Home | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/home/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Tue, 07 May 2024 20:00:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 Home | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/home/ 32 32 The best mini fridges for offices in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-mini-fridges-for-offices/ Tue, 07 May 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=613835
The best mini fridges for offices in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

If you want to keep your favorite meals fresh and drinks cold while at the office, these mini fridges should fit the bill while you pay the bills.

The post The best mini fridges for offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best mini fridges for offices in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Danby Diplomat Compact Refrigerator on a plain white background. Danby Diplomat Compact Refrigerator
SEE IT

If you have enough space in your office, this well-designed mini fridge is an excellent choice and will meet the needs of most who want to store food and drinks at work.

Best splurge Rocco Super Smart Fridge Rocco Super Smart Fridge
SEE IT

Although this mini fridge is very pricey and only lets you store beverages, it has a bold, stunning design that’s sure to get you noticed at work!

Best budget with a cube design Midea WHS-65LB1 Mini Fridge on a plain white background. Midea WHS-65LB1 Mini Fridge
SEE IT

If you’re looking for an inexpensive, compact mini fridge for your work space, this model should meet your needs.

Companies increasingly require full-time workers to spend more days in the office, which means leaving behind the convenience of just wandering to the fridge when the mood strikes. Even just a hybrid work schedule means more commuting, and more commuting means considering costs. One of the easier ways to save money is skipping meals out and bringing your lunch from home. That means it might be an ideal time to consider keeping a mini fridge at the office, which allows you to keep your meals and drinks fresh and tasty and secure from that one coworker who acts like anything in the shared kitchen is for everyone. 

Like their full-size siblings, mini refrigerators come in different sizes (although they’re at least half the size of most standard models) and include various features. Some budget models only give you the bare minimum. And in some cases, that means excluding a freezer. But there are mini fridges that include more bells and whistles. And if you aren’t worried about price, you could even find distinctive models among the best mini fridges for offices that are designed to be noticed—almost like a work of art—much to the envy of your colleagues and associates.

How we chose the best mini fridges for offices

Our recommendations for best mini fridges for offices are based on experience, analysis, and research into the best options to accommodate the most common use cases. With the exception of the splurge choice, we focused on general-purpose mini fridges rather than a beverage cooler, which is a similar but specialized appliance.

A mini fridge for your office performs much like a mini fridge in any other location: It has one purpose—keep drinks and food cold for an extended period of time. Some have a particular feature, like a built-in freezer, differentiating them from the pack, while others are more portable and easier to move around. Mini fridges can also vary some in price, so we included a more premium and cheap mini fridge to cover the widest budget range.

The best mini fridges for offices: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re an office manager or an employee, shopping for a cubicle or the mother-in-law suite that you’ve turned into a work-from-home oasis, these are our top picks for mini fridges for offices. 

Best overall: Danby Diplomat Compact Refrigerator 

Danby

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 19.3 x 33.1 x 21.9  inches
  • Capacity: 4.4 cubic feet
  • Weight: ‎49.6 lbs.
  • Design style: Tall 

Pros

  • Offers lots of storage space
  • Adjustable glass shelves
  • Full-width freezer
  • Storage space on the interior of the door
  • Includes an interior light

Cons

  • Relatively pricey
  • Might be a bit big for some smaller-sized office

This model is a little more expensive and a little larger than others in its class. Nevertheless, this mini fridge is worth it. For starters, it provides you with 4.4 cubic feet, which offers more capacity than many in its class. It also has adjustable glass shelves, making the interior a tad brighter. It’s smartly designed, too: The integrated door shelving allows you to store tall bottles (like water, juice, and soda). Its reversible door hinge provides more options in positioning your mini fridge in your office. It’s a small refrigerator with freezer. Plus, it has a manual defrost control and a mechanical thermostat.

Best value: Magic Chef MCAR32BE Compact Refrigerator

Magic Chef

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 17.5 x 33.4 x 18.5 inches 
  • Capacity: 3.2 cubic feet
  • Weight: 49.5 lbs. 
  • Design style: Tall 

Pros

  • Ample storage space
  • Comes with glass shelves
  • Adjustable thermostat control
  • Interior light

Cons

  • Doesn’t include a freezer
  • Might be a bit big for some smaller-sized office

If having a freezer isn’t essential, this Magic Chef brand mini is an ideal model for your office. For starters, the interior has more room to store items since it doesn’t have a freezer. It comes with an adjustable thermostat control and adjustable glass shelves, too. It also includes in-door storage, for bottles and beverages. It even has a designated spot for storing a 2-liter bottle of soda. There’s also an adjustable temperature thermostat control and an interior light. However, its tall design may be too large for tiny offices.

Best splurge: Rocco Super Smart Fridge

Rocco

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 24 x 34.5 x 16 inches
  • Capacity: N/A 
  • Weight: 128 lbs. 
  • Design style: Tall 

Pros

  • Beautifully designed
  • Can be controlled via a mobile app
  • Great for storing beverages 
  • Comes with a multi-year warranty

Cons

  • Limited to storing beverages
  • Pricey
  • Heavier than most mini fridges

It may not be the most practical mini fridge to have in your office. For instance, it’s only for beverages. It’s also very pricey at $1,500. However, its bold design might help you make a bold impression, depending on where you place it in your C-suite or cubicle. 

One feature that makes Rocco’s Super Smart Fridge distinctive is that it has five pull-out shelves, which can be adjusted to accommodate differently-sized bottles and cans. These shelves can be separated into different “temperature zones” by pushing buttons on a control panel inside the fridge. For example, if you have white wine or red wine, it can be chilled at a different temperature than your seltzer bottles. 

There are other impressive features, too, like its model app (iOS only, for now), which allows you to adjust the temperature from your phone. If you’re into assembling smart-home systems, this is the chiller you’ll think is cool.

Best budget with a cube design: Midea WHS-65LB1 Mini Fridge

Mideo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 18.6 x 19.4 x 17.7 inches  
  • Capacity: 1.6 cubic feet
  • Weight: 30 lbs. 
  • Design style: Cube

Pros

  • Relatively lightweight
  • Compact size
  • Includes a freezer compartment
  • Door is reversible

Cons

  • Doesn’t offer as much capacity to store items as others in its class 

If your workspace isn’t very spacious, you’ll most likely want to choose a mini fridge with a cube design since it’s smaller, more compact, and has a smaller footprint than those with tall designs. What’s nice about this Midea mini fridge is that despite having a small footprint, it still comes with a freezer compartment (which, not surprisingly, isn’t very large). It also comes with adjustable legs and a reversible door, which, again, will be important if you don’t have a large office and a lot of space to work with. Includes a mechanical temperature control and a manual defrost setting. 

Best budget with a tall design: Costway Compact Refrigerator 

Costway

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 19.5 x 34 x 19 inches 
  • Capacity: 3.2 cubic feet
  • Weight: 52 lbs. 
  • Design style: Tall

Pros

  • Separate freezer compartment
  • More freezer capacity than most in its class 
  • Comes with glass shelves
  • Adjustable thermostat 

Cons

  • Might be a bit big for some smaller-sized office

One distinctive feature is that it has a separate freezer compartment, with its own door, for chilling everything from ice cubes to ice cream. Both doors come with magnetic door seals, which helps prevent users from accidentally leaving either door open and spoiling food and drinks. It also comes with an adjustable thermostat, two removable shelves, and a built-in light.

What to consider when shopping for the best mini fridge for offices

Whether you’re set up in a spacious corner office or in a tiny cubicle that barely has room for a red stapler, you’ll want to make sure you have enough room for a mini fridge. That’s why you’ll want to check out the following features to ensure that you get the model that’s right for you:

Size and capacity 

Most mini fridges have capacities that range between 1.5 to 4 cubic feet. They also come in one of the following two design styles: 

  • Cube: These models are also sometimes called countertop mini fridges. In general, they have capacities of less than 2 cubic feet, and measure between 17 and 21 inches tall.
  • Tall: These mini fridge models have capacities between 3.5 and 4.5 cubic feet and measure between 30 to 35 inches tall

Freezer compartment 

Another consideration when buying a mini fridge is whether or not you need a freezer compartment. If you decide to forego the freezer, you’ll generally gain additional storage space.

Other features to consider 

When you’re in the market to buy a mini fridge for your office, don’t forget to consider the following features, too: 

  • Interior light: Many models are now built with interior lights, which is nice if your office is dimly lit. 
  • Temperature Control: You can use this control to adjust the fridge’s internal temperature using a built-in thermostat.
  • Adjustable Shelves: This feature lets you configure your fridge to suit your specific needs best.
  • Two-Door Design: Two-door mini fridges have a separate freezer that offers higher performance and can maintain lower temperatures.

FAQs

Q: What’s a good size for a mini fridge?  

The type of design of your mini fridge, either cube or tall, will more or less determine its size. In most cases, models with Cube designs are the shorter of the two—generally measuring between 17 and 21 inches tall. Models with Tall designs, however, are roughly a foot taller, measuring between 30 and 35 inches tall. You’ll want to look at your office’s design to see which model fits best. 

Q: Where shouldn’t you place a mini fridge? 

Many experts say that you should keep your mini fridge away from windows and direct sunlight, as well as heat sources, such as radiators—all of which can adversely affect the efficiency of your mini fridge. Additionally, it’s not ideal to place your mini fridge directly on a carpet, since it can reduce airflow. Instead, place it on a flat, uncarpeted surface. But if that’s not an option, position a piece of plywood, and then place the mini fridge on top of it.  

Q: Will a mini fridge heat up a room? 

Most mini fridge models do produce some heat. However, by and large, most models won’t significantly increase the overall temperature of your office space. (Of course, smaller office spaces will be affected more than larger office spaces.)   

Final thoughts on the best mini fridges for offices

If you’re considering a small refrigerator for office, you might be wondering what the best time of year to buy is. In our experience, you should always keep an eye on your prospective mini fridge model on Black Friday or Cyber Monday (in November), as well as Amazon Prime Day events. However, some experts suggest that you shouldn’t just limit your search for sales during Black Friday or Cyber Monday. In fact, they say that mini fridges sales could occur throughout November (and some suggest those sales might even begin in October). Whenever you invest, any of our picks will perfectly complement your coffee machine, ergonomic chair, headphones, and other accessories that increase your workday comfort.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mini fridges for offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Control your hungry kitty’s portions with up to 40% off PETLIBRO automatic cat feeders at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/petlibro-amazon-pet-day-deal/ Tue, 07 May 2024 18:18:15 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=613796
Cats photo
Amanda Reed

Help your cat live a longer life—and prevent any unwanted vet bills—with this PETLIBRO automatic feeder during Amazon Pet Day Deals.

The post Control your hungry kitty’s portions with up to 40% off PETLIBRO automatic cat feeders at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Cats photo
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

If your cat is a hungry little guy who will eat whatever you put in front of them, you know the importance of portion control. Sure, chonky cats are cute, but obese cats are three times more likely to pass compared to lean cats. Going to the vet is expensive, so an automatic pet feeder is a worthwhile investment in your cat’s life and the length of your budget. This PETLIBRO feeder deal is part of Amazon’s Pet Day Deals—happening today and tomorrow online.

PETLIBRO Automatic Cat Feeder $54.98 (Was $89.99)

PETLIBRO

SEE IT

This automatic pet feeder allows you to schedule up to 60 meals a day and 50 portions per meal. If your kitty deserves a little snack you can also hit the manual feeding button to give them their much-deserved extra portion. A rotor, secure twist-lock lid, desiccant bag, and sealing strip all ensure freshness and crunchy bites all the time. You can also record a 10-second message and play it while you’re away to calm your pet. And, built-in infrared detection suspends feeder operations to keep your cat safe and your feeder in great condition.

More automatic feeder and fountain deals:

The post Control your hungry kitty’s portions with up to 40% off PETLIBRO automatic cat feeders at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to recycle crayons into fun-shaped rainbow crayons https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-recycle-crayons-rainbow-crayons/ Sat, 04 May 2024 12:09:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=613282
rainbow crayons of darth vader, han solo, and lego minifigs on a countertop
Luke, I am your crayon. PopSci

Don't toss your broken crayons.

The post How to recycle crayons into fun-shaped rainbow crayons appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
rainbow crayons of darth vader, han solo, and lego minifigs on a countertop
Luke, I am your crayon. PopSci

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Eventually any pristine box of crayons ends up as a pile of busted stubs at the bottom of a craft bin. In the U.S., between 45,000 and 75,000 pounds of crayons end up in landfills every year and traditional paraffin-based crayons are not biodegradable. Instead of trashing broken crayons, give them a new, colorful life by creating rainbow crayons.

This simple DIY project can also be a fun lesson for kids on the states of matter. The crayons start as a solid, melt into a liquid at temperatures above 120 degrees Fahrenheit, and return to a solid when removed from heat.

[Related: How to Frankenstein old wax scraps into a totally new candle]

The best part about creating recycled crayons is that you’re not limited to boring old pencil-like shapes. With silicone molds, you can create crayons in the shape of Darth Vader, a Lego minifig, flowers, sea stars, or even Han Solo frozen in carbonite.

What you’ll need to make recycled rainbow crayons

Ingredients

  • 2-3 cups broken crayons with paper removed
    Note: You can use new crayons, but where’s the fun in that?

Tools

Activity Time

  • 30-60 minutes, depending on your method for peeling the paper off the crayons.
crayon melting supplies on a kitchen countertop: crayons, molds, baking sheet, wire rack
If you also have a bin of broken and busted crayons, this might be the perfect weekend project for you. Photo: PopSci

Directions

  1. Pre-heat oven to 250-degrees.
  2. Peel paper off crayons.
    Note: To speed up the process, soak crayons in tub of water first. To slow down the process (and keep little hands occupied), don’t soak.
  3. Break or cut crayons into 1/4 to 1/2-inch pieces.
  4. Arrange crayon chunks in silicone molds. You’ll want to slightly overfill the molds.
  5. Place molds on baking sheet or wire rack.
  6. Bake crayon chunks for 8-10 minutes, or until all crayon chunks are melted.
  7. Remove molds from oven and allow to cool (approximately 25 minutes at room temperature or 10 minutes in the freezer).
  8. When fully cooled, carefully remove the crayons from the molds.

That’s it! Now grab a coloring book or sheet of paper and color away.

colorful crayons in the shape of lego bricks and lego minifigs
You can’t build anything with these Legos, but they’re still fun. Photo: PopSci

The post How to recycle crayons into fun-shaped rainbow crayons appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coffee grinders for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-coffee-grinder/ Thu, 26 Aug 2021 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=390554
The best coffee grinders of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Move one step closer to the perfect cup with these invaluable tools in the quest to turn beans into brew.

The post The best coffee grinders for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best coffee grinders of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Baratza Encore Conical Burr Grinder is the best coffee grinder overall. Baratza Encore Conical Burr Coffee Grinder
SEE IT

A user-friendly model with conical burrs that work for multiple types of coffee makers, from automatic brewers to French presses.

Best splurge The Baratza Forte BG Brew Grinder is the best coffee grinder. Baratza Forte BG (Brew Grinder)
SEE IT

This coffee shop–quality flat-burr megabrewer has over 200 grind settings and a giant hopper.

Best budget OXO Brew Conical Burr Coffee Grinder on a countertop. Fellow Ode Brew Grinder
SEE IT

Multiple settings allow you to get the perfect grind for French press coffee or pulling espresso shots.

Whether rocking a classic brewer or a fancy pour-over or press, you need a coffee grinder to pulverize those beans. Believe it or not, your grinder’s quality will affect your coffee’s quality. The oft-overlooked grinder is actually a crucial piece of equipment when it comes to crafting the perfect cup: You get maximum flavor from uniformly cut beans, and not every grinder can deliver those. Finding the best coffee grinders for you and your needs means looking at the price point, whether you want something manual or electric, and whether you prefer burred beans to bladed ones—and we have the options that address all these considerations and more.

How we chose the best coffee grinders

We chose the best coffee grinders based on a mix of research and hands-on testing. Our methodology took into consideration whether the grinder was manual or electric, a burr or blade grinder, and even the type of coffee beans one can use. This is a monotasking appliance, but that doesn’t mean it’s simple. In the case of the coffee grinders we tested, our assessments covered their ease of use, ease of cleanup, and overall performance. Price was also a consideration, and we’ve diligently presented options across a wide cost spectrum.

The best coffee grinders: Reviews & Recommendations

No matter how you prepare your coffee—whether pour-over, French press, espresso, etc.—freshly ground beans take the experience to a new level. Here are the best coffee grinders to help you get your caffeine fix at home, at the office, or even on the go.

Best overall: Baratza Encore Conical Burr Coffee Grinder

Baratza

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Electricity
  • Size: 6.3 x 4.7 x 13.8 inches
  • Capacity: 5 ounces
  • Price: $149.95

Pros

  • 40 grind settings
  • Single-button design
  • High-torque motor

Cons

  • Low capacity

Baratza says its Encore Conical Burr Coffee Grinder was designed for beginners, which is great if you’re making the leap from using pre-ground coffee to whole beans. Its 40 grind settings may seem intimidating at first, but researching the correct coarseness of your coffee beans based on the brew you’re making will allow you to make the perfect cappuccino every time. Over time, the Encore’s numerous grind settings will be a vital feature rather than a source of frustration.

The Encore’s approachable design is comprised of an on/off switch, which will continuously grind beans, and a single pulse button to engage the machine’s high-torque motor in short bursts. A few pulses will yield enough coffee for a single cup, while letting the machine run for half a minute should provide enough grounds for a group. Just be mindful of this coffee grinder’s relatively low capacity, which means you’ll have to refill the machine on a more regular basis.

Best splurge: Baratza Forte BG (Brew Grinder)

Baratza

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Electricity
  • Size: 5.12 x 7.09 x 14.17 inches
  • Capacity: 10.58 ounces
  • Price: $895

Pros

  • Built-in scale
  • Digital screen
  • 260 grind settings

Cons

  • Price

Yes, Bartaza’s Forte BG costs several times more than our other recommendations. Still, it has features that professional coffee makers will want and that everyone who uses it could appreciate. Its two stand-out features are a built-in electronic scale to ensure each cup of coffee you make has the same amount of grounds and a digital screen, allowing you to switch between its grind settings, set the grinder on a timer, and more. Bartaza outfitted this coffee grinder with 260 grind settings, so you can get pinpoint precision when making your grounds.

If you’re willing to invest in a machine like this, the chances are high that you’ll have a similarly tricked-out coffee maker. Once you’ve found the ideal grind setting for your preferred cup of coffee, you can save it as a preset so it’s accessible at the push of a button. Bartaza’s Forte BG is a no-compromise coffee grinder and is likely to be the only one you’ll ever need if you make the investment.

Best design: Fellow Ode Brew Grinder

Fellow

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Electricity
  • Size: 9.5 x 4.7 x 9.4 inches
  • Capacity: 3.5 ounces
  • Price: $199

Pros

  • Aluminum construction
  • Automatic stop function
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Low capacity

Fellow’s sleek-looking Ode Brew Grinder is sure to spruce up your countertop, but its performance matches the aesthetic value of its aluminum frame. The Ode features 11 grind settings, with 31 steps in between to give you ample space for experimentation. Fellow says its settings were specifically designed to produce the optimal grounds for AeroPress, pour-over, French press, and cold brew beverages. The heart of this appliance is its professional-level 64mm flat burrs, which grind beans consistently.

Despite their size and power, Fellow touts this coffee grinder’s quiet operation. One of the Ode Brew Grinder’s most user-friendly features is its automatic stop function, which will shut off its motor when it senses its hopper is empty. This is both a cue to add more beans (if necessary) and to conserve energy. This coffee grinder can’t hold a lot of beans at once, so you’ll likely have to replenish it regularly if you drink more than one cup of coffee per day, or prefer a stronger cup.

Best portable: KitchenAid Go Cordless Blade Coffee Grinder

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Size: 4.41 x 5.29 x 8.41 inches
  • Capacity: 4 ounces
  • Price: $129.99

Pros

  • Runs on a rechargeable battery
  • Simple design
  • Works very well

Cons

  • You’ll need to remember to charge it

KitchenAid’s new Go line of battery-powered appliances includes a coffee grinder, and it’s easily the best powered model you can take with you anywhere. It’s small enough to cart around in a backpack or carry-on bag and can run for up to six minutes per charge. In our tests, that’s enough time to get several cups of finely ground beans before reaching for a USB-C cable. If you’re worried about running out of juice, you can always pick up a spare battery. Using this cordless coffee grinder was straightforward: We loaded its hopper up with beans, placed the plastic cover on top, twisted the cover to lock it in place, and pushed down on its single power switch.

This coffee grinder has no set grind settings, so you’ll need to watch the grounds as they’re being crushed to determine when they’ve reached the correct consistency. We were able to get course grounds in about 15 seconds when the hopper was full, and kept the grinder running for a full minute to get powder-like results. This coffee grinder was short enough that we could easily keep track of the state of our grounds to prevent ourselves from overgrinding while it was on a countertop.

You’ll need to remember to keep this coffee grinder’s battery topped up, which can be tedious in a world where every portable gadget requires power management, but you’ll be rewarded for this minimal amount of maintenance. This is the best option if you’re serious about making freshly ground coffee in moderate to high quantities on the go.

Best manual: JavaPresse Manual Coffee Grinder

JavaPresse

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Hand crank
  • Size: 1.8 x 1.8 x 7.5 inches
  • Capacity: N/A
  • Price: $39.94

Pros

  • No outlet required
  • Compact design
  • Price

Cons

  • Requires elbow grease

If you’d like to take a coffee grinder with you on a camping trip or only want to enjoy a high-quality cup on occasion, JavaPresse’s Manual Coffee Grinder is the one to get. Turning its crank a few times will yield enough grounds for a couple of cups of coffee, which isn’t bad considering you can easily pack this grinder in a backpack. That said, using this coffee grinder will take more effort than an electric one, so be prepared to put in some effort to get your grounds.

It’d be easy to assume JavaPresse would have to make big sacrifices to achieve this manual grinder’s small size, but that’s not true. It features 18 grind settings, is significantly quieter than using an electric grinder, and uses ceramic burrs that were designed to last several times longer than stainless steel ones. If you want to make sure you’ll be able to make fresh coffee the way you like it while you’re on vacation or a business trip, JavaPresse’s Manual Stainless Steel Coffee Grinder is the one to get.

Best value: OXO Brew Conical Burr Coffee Grinder

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Electricity
  • Size: 6.8 x 11.8 x 14.8 inches
  • Capacity: 12 ounces
  • Price: $99.95

Pros

  • 16 different grind settings
  • Timer to control the length of its grind sessions
  • Easy to maintain

Cons

  • Difficult to see how many grounds are in the container

OXO’s Brew Conical Burr Coffee Grinder is another compact, beginner-friendly option for those beginning their adventures in whole-bean coffee making. It features 15 settings that produce grinds ranging from the texture of loose-leaf tea to confectioner’s sugar. Its relatively large hopper can hold a couple of cups worth of beans at a time, and the grinder had no problem continuously pulverizing them with consistent results. While testing this coffee grinder, one of our favorite features was its built-in timer, which allows you to continuously grind beans in intervals up to 30 seconds. Once you know how the volume of grounds this machine will produce on your preferred grind setting, you can make the perfect amount with the twist of a knob.

We found the grind setting numbers on this coffee grinder easy to read, and OXO even broke them down into fine, medium, and coarse, so you know which way to turn the hopper. Ironically, the only part of this coffee grinder showing signs of wear after months of use is the company’s logo, which is printed in the middle of its grind button. Once we were done grinding our beans, it was equally simple to remove the hopper and grounds container to wash them.

Overall, we found this coffee grinder to be fast, easy to operate, and it produced consistent results regardless of our preferred grind setting. The grounds container’s stainless steel construction made it impossible to see how full it was at a glance—the top cover is made out of see-through plastic, but was difficult to keep an eye on at any angle—but we never ran into the issue of it overflowing if we stuck to OXO’s 30-second grind intervals. You can’t go wrong here if you’re looking for a full-powered electric coffee grinder on a budget.

Don’t want to deal with a kitchen scale to measure the perfect amount of your grounds? OXO has a solution for that in the OXO Brew Conical Burr Coffee Grinder with 38 Settings and Scale (which, admittedly, adds substantially to the price). However, you’ll still need to pick up a milk frother for those perfect espresso-based beverages.

What to consider when shopping for the best coffee grinders

Baristas and javaheads alike agree that one of the keys to a perfect cup of joe is using fresh, uniformly ground beans; to get those, you need one of the best coffee grinders. Knowing how to grind your beans for the particular type of coffee you’re making (will it be iced coffee, cold brew, or a crema-rich shot for that latte drink, etc.) is also crucial. (Here’s a secret: Start with less beans.) If you don’t know your burrs from your blade or your flat-tops from your conicals, read on to up your coffee game instantly. 

Burr vs. blade grinders

As you start to shop, you’ll quickly notice two words coming up again and again: burr and blade. A burr grinder (or burr mill) works by crushing beans between two rotating burrs, or small rotary cutting tools. (Within the world of burr grinders, there are two types: conical and flat. Conicals will typically cost you more than flat.) A blade grinder features one big blade that rotates and slices up your beans as it goes. In general, burr grinders are thought to be more precise (and therefore pricier) because they chop grounds in a more uniform way than blades. In broad strokes, a blade grinder works faster and is cheaper; a burr grinder offers more control and better taste, but it’ll also cost you more.

Manual vs. electric grinders

As you could probably guess, the big difference between these two options is how much elbow grease you feel like putting into grinding your beans. Manual grinders are typically smaller than their electric counterparts and don’t require electricity, so they’re perfect for traveling. They’re more affordable than automatic grinders and allow you to control the size of your grind better. The biggest benefit to an electric grinder is ease and speed of use—no physical effort is required, but you will need an outlet.

How tech-savvy and/or comfortable you are with settings is also a factor: The more precise you want your electric grinder to be, the more settings you’ll have to deal with (because the grind size for an espresso drink is different from that for straight coffee). If you don’t want to deal with so many options (or spend as much) but still want something electric, pick one with minimal settings. 

Coffee bean preference

You may be asking yourself: should I choose my grinder based on how I make my coffee and what kind of coffee I drink? Yes! Well, sort of. The way you take your coffee will determine how finely you grind your beans. For example, French presses and cold brew coffee work best with a coarse grind; espresso should be fine. (In the middle is an assortment of slightly different ground sizes, like medium-coarse for pour-over and medium for a drip machine.) If you’ve ever had beans ground at the grocery store, you’ve likely had to choose the size of your grind. Over- or under-grinding beans for the way you brew can result in a deficit of flavor. 

FAQs

Q: Does a coffee grinder really matter?

Yes! A coffee grinder is one important factor in the equation that is making a good cup of coffee. You want something that grinds beans uniformly and—if you plan to brew for multiple types of makers—can adapt (i.e., give you options like coarse, medium, and fine). If you’re always disappointed that your at-home coffee never tastes quite as good as the coffee house stuff, your first step in improving your java game is investing in a coffee grinder. 

Q: What is a burr grinder?

A burr grinder is one that breaks up beans by crushing them, like a mill. (A blade grinder chops beans with, well, a blade). Burr grinders are said to cut beans more precisely and evenly, delivering better flavor. Within the burr world, there are two kinds of grinders: conical and flat. A conical burr grinder has a cone-shaped center burr and outer serrated burr; a flat one features two round, facing burrs that turn out grinds that are even more precise than their conical brethren (but they also make more noise). 

Q: How long should you grind with a manual grinder?

How long you keep at it with a manual grinder differs based on what kind of grounds you seek and how many beans you want to break. As you’d probably guess, the finer the grind, the longer it takes; the same goes for bigger volumes of beans. The best thing to do is start out slow and check your beans every couple of seconds. You can always grind more, but you can’t go back and grind less. In general, a coarse grind takes about 10 seconds and a fine grind takes around 30. A medium grind takes, well, a medium amount. But trial and error is your friend!  

Final thoughts on the best coffee grinders

The best coffee grinders are ones that are right for your budget, have options to satisfy every coffee drinker in your house (e.g., you like an espresso, but your roommate wants cold brew), and are suited to get every last bit of flavor out of those power-packed little magic beans and into your travel mug. In general, that probably means springing for a burr grinder over a blade one, but beyond that, it’s dealer’s choice among our picks above!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coffee grinders for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 4K monitors for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-4k-monitor/ Fri, 03 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=515562
The best 4K monitors
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Equip your home office, gaming setup, or editing rig with the best 4K monitor.

The post The best 4K monitors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best 4K monitors
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dell S2722QC Dell S2722QC
SEE IT

Everything a creative professional or student needs in a single, well-constructed package.

Best for gaming Samsung Odyssey Neo G8 Samsung Odyssey Neo G8
SEE IT

A no-compromise display for serious PC or console gamers.

Best budget PC Gaming photo Philips 288E2E
SEE IT

All the performance most people need—for a lot less money.

A solid 4K monitor provides all the screen real estate you need to get things done, whether working from home, gaming, or creating content. A high-resolution display will allow you to see text, photos, and video in great detail—especially recently created media. External monitors have been a common tech accessory for decades, but the marketplace for 4K displays specifically has expanded greatly over the past few years. The combination of 4K PC and console games, accessible 4K video, and the necessity of a home office or learning space has accelerated this change. If you’re assembling a new computer setup, these are the best 4K monitors available right now.

How we chose the best 4K monitors

The monitor market has recently introduced several new 4K models, but these high-res options aren’t the standard—if you want 4K resolution, that narrows the field right off the bat. And that’s not necessarily a bad thing. Choosing the best one for your needs is easier by eliminating hundreds—if not thousands—of options. From that pool of possibilities, our recommendations are based on meticulous research and careful consideration of the most common uses of a 4K monitor. We’ve also considered the computer platform (Mac or PC) you’re using and whether you’d like to use your monitor with several devices or to replace a TV.

A monitor is the type of tech accessory most people will rely on daily for a decade or more, so our recommendations must stand the test of time and be ready to work with every computer you get. Longevity, multi-functionality, and value were the core virtues we considered when searching for and ultimately selecting the best 4K monitors.

The best 4K monitors: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selection of 4K monitors is designed to match any budget and lifestyle. Some are “all-rounders,” which means they’ll be pretty good for many tasks, while others are designed for a specific purpose—gaming, for example—or have a differentiating tech spec, like a curved panel. Our 4K monitor recommendations will serve you well while browsing the web or streaming video.

Best overall: Dell S2722QC

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27 inches
  • Ports: 1 x USB-C PD, 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 x headphone jack
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: Yes

Pros

  • Can quickly charge laptops while they’re connected
  • Multiple USB-A ports
  • Built-in speakers

Cons

  • Low refresh rate for serious gaming

Dell’s S2722QC is an all-in-one package that offers the right mix of excellent performance for most uses and value. Its most convenient feature for MacBook and modern PC laptop users is a USB-C port, which allows you to connect your computer to it without an adapter. Yes, the S2722QC has multiple HDMI ports, but hooking your laptop up to it with a USB-C cable will charge the computer and allow you to connect other accessories to the monitor’s USB-A ports. This configuration turns the 4K monitor into a USB hub. This single-cable solution will make your home office setup look neater, and ensure your laptop is charged when you want to take it out of your home.

We’ve used Dell’s S2722QC hooked up to a 13-inch MacBook Pro via USB-C for several months and have never had an issue with the monitor recognizing the computer or flaking out mid-use. We’ve been especially pleased with the monitor’s color reproduction and overall sharpness when reading text and viewing photos. MacOS automatically puts the monitor in a scaled resolution mode, which admittedly makes text larger and easier to read, but you can switch it to 4K in the “Displays” section of the System Settings app. The monitor performs just as well whether we’ve used it at a scaled or default resolution.

One of this monitor’s most surprising features is integrated 3W speakers. They’re helpful in a pinch, but we still recommend picking up a dedicated set of speakers for your computer if you listen to music frequently. Still, if you’re on a video call and your Bluetooth headphones have run out of juice, it’s helpful to have speakers immediately at the ready. Ergonomically speaking, the S2722QC gets high marks for being height adjustable. The ability to raise and lower the monitor whenever we pleased made working more comfortable as we moved throughout the day.

The S2722QC’s only downside—depending on how you plan on using your 4K display—is its relatively slow 8ms (millisecond) response time and 60Hz panel. This won’t make a difference when you’re watching videos, browsing the web, or editing photos, and we never noticed any perceptible lag in day-to-day use. You’ll only notice this feature when you’re playing fast-paced games like first-person shooters. Casual or slower-paced games don’t require a fast refresh rate display, but cutting-edge titles will suffer slightly, so opt for a dedicated gaming monitor instead.

If you’re not a PC or console gamer looking for a high-resolution display primarily for gaming, the S2722QC will serve you very well.

Best for gaming: Samsung Odyssey Neo G8

Samsung

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 32 inches
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, headphone jack
  • Refresh rate: 240Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: No

Pros

  • Extremely high refresh rate
  • Support for Adaptive Sync with AMD and NVidia graphics cards
  • Matte display won’t show glare from lights

Cons

  • Price
  • Curved display may not be for everyone.

If gaming is your primary use case for a 4K monitor, Samsung’s Odyssey Neo G8 is a no-compromise display. Its 240Hz panel is incredibly fast, allowing you to play the latest games at their fastest-possible speed—so long as your gaming computer‘s graphics card and processor are fast enough to handle them. The monitor’s display panel is complemented by built-in software support for Adaptive Sync, which will offer better performance when it’s hooked up to a computer with an AMD or NVidia graphics card.

Adaptive sync will further reduce latency (lag) and the frequency of image artifacts like screen tearing, which can occur when the screen is updated with new images quickly. This technology, which works with settings like low input lag mode and a refresh rate optimizer, increases the probability of smooth, consistent gameplay.

Many modern games support HDR (high dynamic range), which improves contrast and color accuracy when a PC or console is hooked up to a display that supports them. Samsung outfitted the Odyssey Neo G8 with Quantum HDR 2000, so newer games, TV shows, and movies will really pop. Games that don’t support HDR will also look nice, so don’t worry if you spend a lot of time playing the classics.

While Samsung focused primarily on optimizing the Neo G8 for gaming, it made design choices that make it a solid pick for general use. The 4K monitor can be tilted and height adjusted and rotated a full 90 degrees. This is a huge deal ergonomically, as it allows you to position the monitor exactly where you want it without having to get a third-party stand or mount.

The most controversial choice is that the Odyssey Neo G8 has a curved display, a love-it-or-hate-it situation. Curved displays have the advantage of taking up more of your peripheral vision, which, combined with the Odyssey Neo G8’s 21:1 aspect ratio, will create an immersive gaming experience. On the other hand, curved displays can reflect light from multiple angles, which can get frustrating if you’re playing in a well-lit room.

If you have a dedicated PC or console gaming setup, Samsung’s Odyssey Neo G8 can be an excellent 4K desk-friendly display. That said, its cutting-edge hardware does come at an extremely high price. Don’t get us wrong, the Odyssey Neo G8 is an excellent 4K gaming monitor and priced appropriately given its tech specs, but it’s a significant investment.

Game in a darker environment and willing to sacrifice a few pixels for a more immersive viewing experience? Our favorite ultrawide OLED monitor is also in the Samsung Odyssey G8 family.

Best curved: Gigabyte M32UC

Gigabyte

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 31.5 inches
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI 2.1, 1 x DisplayPort 1.4, 1 x USB-C, 4 x USB 3.2 headphone jack
  • Refresh rate: 160Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: No

Pros

  • Large viewing angle
  • Fast refresh rate
  • Ergonomic design

Cons

  • Curved display may not work in rooms with a lot of light

Curved monitors aren’t for everyone, but Gigabyte’s M32UC is our preferred 4K model due to its gamer-forward features and ergonomics. The big reason to get a 4K curved monitor is to have a display that covers more of your peripheral vision, which can be helpful if you get distracted while working. However, curved displays will catch and reflect light from more angles, so you should seriously consider the light source in your room before picking one up, as a constant bright blotch on your screen can also be distracting. If you already know the risks associated with curved monitors and want a high-resolution model, there’s a lot to like about the M32UC.

Serious video and photo editors will appreciate that the M32UC covers 93% of the DCI-P3 color gamut, 123% of the sRGB color gamut, and supports DisplayHDR 400. It’s paramount that the display you’re using is as accurate as possible, and this monitor will deliver for prosumers. Similarly, gamers who want a truly immersive high-resolution PC gaming experience will take advantage of the M32UC’s HDR (High Dynamic Range) support along with its 160Hz refresh rate. Modern games will move fluidly on this display—provided your PC has enough graphical hardware to run the latest titles at such a high resolution and frame rate simultaneously.

Every type of user will benefit from the M32UC’s height-adjustable stand—especially helpful if you’re using the monitor in a room where the sun is at risk of reflecting off its display throughout the day. You’ll also appreciate the monitor’s port selection, which includes multiple USB-A and HDMI ports in addition to a USB-C and DisplayPort. It’s easy to connect several peripherals, computers, and game consoles to the M32UC at the same time without using a single adapter.

If you’re comfortable using a curved monitor and want a 4K display as your digital canvas, GIGABYTE’s M32UC is our top pick.

Best ultrawide: LG 38WN95C-W

Specs

  • Size: 38 inches
  • Ports: 1 x Thunderbolt (USB-C), 2 x HDMI, 1 x DisplayPort, 2 x USB-A, 1 x Headphone jack
  • Refresh rate: 144Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: No

Pros

  • Massive display that’s still VESA-compatible
  • Solid refresh rate for gaming
  • Wide port selection

Cons

  • Price
  • May be too big for many desks

Ultrawide monitors have become popular recently because they allow you to have two full-sized windows open on a single display rather than requiring a dual-monitor setup. At 38 inches wide, the 38WN95C-W requires a huge space commitment, but you’re rewarded with a curved display guaranteed to take up all of your peripheral vision. Technically, this is a QHD+ (3840 x 1600) display, which isn’t quite a “true 4K,” but it’s the closest you’ll get with a display like this. The monitor would have to be comically tall to accommodate the extra 500 pixels, and you won’t miss them with this type of display.

The 38WN95C-W is stacked on the tech side, especially in its port selection. You can connect four devices to it simultaneously using its mix of HDMI, DisplayPort, and Thunderbolt ports. The monitor’s Thunderbolt 4 input—the same shape as a USB-C port—has the same benefits as the one in our best overall pick for this guide. You can charge your laptop and connect it to accessories through the 38WN95C-W’s pair of USB-A ports with a single cable.

Gamers will appreciate the 38WN95C-W’s 1ms response time, 144Hz refresh rate, and support for AMD FreeSync and NVidia G-Sync, all of which make this monitor a solid pick for 4K gaming. The difference between a 4K 120Hz monitor and one that runs at 144Hz is noticeable when playing games that require precise movement. Its height, swivel, and tilt-adjustable stand also score points in the ergonomics arena. Frankly, it’s hard to find a task the 38WN95C-W isn’t well suited for.

The limiting factor for this display is space—if you have enough and are committed to living the ultrawide monitor lifestyle, the 38WN95C-W can handle anything you throw at it with aplomb.

Best for video editing: BenQ PhotoVue SW272U

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27 inches
  • Ports: 1 x USB-C, 2 x HDMI 2.0, 1 x DisplayPort 1.4, 1 x USB-B, 2 x USB-B, 1 x SD Card slot, 1 x Headphone Jack
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: No

Pros

  • Support for 100% sRGB, 99% Adobe RGB, 99% DCI-P3 color spectrums
  • Video and photo-centric built-in features
  • Height-adjustable stand

Cons

  • Cost

BenQ’s PhotoVue SW272U is the best monitor we’ve ever tested for video editing, and professionals in this field should take notice. The 4K display is calibrated and tested for color accuracy before leaving its factory for Delta E ≤1.5 accuracy. BenQ includes a certification report with the display so you can be sure it passed the inspection. The display covers 99 percent of DCI-P3 color gamut, is Calman-verified and Pantone-validated, and offers 10-bit support for 1.07 billion colors. This level of performance allows you to use the SW272U for professional video editing work right out of the box.

Additional video and photo editing-centric settings include a P3 color preview to ensure accurate colors before you deliver a video to clients and Paper Color Sync, which allows you to fine-tune color settings without burning through precious photo paper and ink. These features aren’t necessary for folks who need a 4K monitor for common uses but are essential for creative professionals whose work needs to be as polished as possible. The included Hotkey Puck G3 makes it easy to change settings with shortcuts, saving you time throughout the day.

If you’re working in an environment with a lot of natural light, the SW272U has you covered. We tested this monitor in a room with south and west-facing windows and have no issues seeing the screen, thanks to the 400 nits of brightness. In terms of ergonomics and build, this IPS monitor features an anti-glare coating, essentially eliminating reflections, making it more comfortable to look at for multiple hours in a row. It has a sturdy stand with plenty of adjustment options and a leatherette base. The SW272U doesn’t have built-in speakers, but its headphone jack allows you to plug headphones in if you’re mixing audio for a key scene.

It’s expensive, but BenQ’s PhotoVue S272U offers truly outstanding quality, a robust feature set for creatives, and excellent ergonomics for long editing sessions. 

Best portable: SideTrak Solo 4K

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 15.6 inches
  • Ports: 2 x USB-C, 1 x USB-A, 1 x Mini HDMI
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • VESA compatibility: N/A
  • Speakers: Yes

Pros

  • Can be powered by a single cable
  • Thin enough to pack in a backpack
  • Improves the ability to multitask out of the house.

Cons

  • Cost

SideTrak’s Solo 4K is far and away the most technically impressive portable monitor we’ve tested and a must-have for creatives who need as many pixels as possible when working from outside their home. The 15.6-inch 4K display weighs under three pounds and is under half an inch thick, which allowed us to take it around in a backpack during our tests without feeling over-encumbered.

We used the Solo 4K with a 13-inch MacBook Pro and connected the two using a single USB-C cable (included), which provided power and transferred data. Our computer immediately recognized the 4K display, configured it appropriately, and never lost its connection. MacOS put the Solo 4K into a scaled resolution mode by default, and it worked well whether we used this stock setting or adjusted it to its native 4K monitor resolution. SideTrak also configured the Solo 4K’s picture preset appropriately, so we didn’t have to touch that to get colors that looked accurate instead of washed out or overexposed.

If you’re used to working on two high-resolution displays at home, it’s incredible how much more efficient you can be when taking a similar setup on the road. We found ourselves using the Solo 4K as a separate pane dedicated to tasks like photo editing and keeping our e-mail and work chat apps open while using our laptop’s built-in display for writing posts. Having additional information available at a glance rather than having to break focus by switching to a different piece of software was immediately beneficial.

Multitasking became possible when working at a coffee shop—be sure to snag a table with enough space for both a laptop and monitor side-by-side—in ways that wouldn’t have been practical otherwise. Frequent travelers who find themselves at a disadvantage while working in transit or at their temporary destination will find their roadblocks eliminated. The only technical fault we could find with the SideTrak Solo 4K was its fairly weak speakers, which is understandable when you consider the thinness of this display. If you need a 4K display that can be reasonably taken anywhere, SideTrak’s Solo 4K is the solution.

Best budget: Philips 288E2E

Philips

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 28 inches
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 1 x DisplayPort, 1 x Headphone jack
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • VESA compatibility: 100 x 100 mm
  • Speakers: Yes

Pros

  • Support for 120 percent of the sRGB spectrum
  • Height and tilt adjustment
  • Price

Cons

  • Refresh too slow for gaming

Philips’ 288E2E proves how far the affordability of 4K monitor technology has come in a relatively short time. For $270 (at the time of this reporting), you’re getting a 28-inch 4K display with AMD FreeSync support, the ability to display 120 percent of the sRGB color spectrum, built-in speakers, and an ultra-slim design. Philips had to make very few feature cuts when designing this display, and they mostly come down to nice-to-have-but-unnecessary extras, namely a USB-A port and ultra-fast refresh rate.

These commissions aren’t glaring—though gaming on a 60Hz panel isn’t ideal—and make the 288E2E feel like a slightly more barebones version of our best overall pick, Dell’s excellent S2722QC. Part of this 4K monitor’s appeal is its averageness. Hear us out: There’s no curved panel or ultrawide design, just a straight-ahead high-resolution display. While this may be relatively boring, it’s exactly what most people are looking for in a 4K monitor for general tasks. This display even has built-in speakers, a relative niche feature not found in many of its competitors in this price range.

If your needs are relatively modest, the difference between Philips’ 288E2E and other picks is insignificant. You can use the money you save by picking up this display to upgrade additional parts of your home office setup.

What to consider when buying the best 4K monitors

Several factors should be considered when deciding which 4K monitor fits your needs. These are the five we’ve deemed most important when conducting our research to help you make your selection:

Screen size

4K monitors come in a variety of sizes, but bigger doesn’t always necessarily mean better. A large monitor will take up more room on your desk and may not be necessary if your needs are modest. Photo and video editors can take full advantage of the space available on a 38-inch 4K monitor more easily than a writer or typical student. Ironically, it’s easier to see individual pixels on a monitor as its screen size grows, which may annoy you if you’ve got very sharp sight. The 4K monitors we recommend run the gamut from 27-38 inches.

Ports

A monitor’s ports (also called inputs) determine which cable is required to connect it to a computer or other tech accessory. All 4K monitors above are equipped with multiple HDMI ports, the most common input found on external displays and TVs. Many also feature a DisplayPort or USB-C port, which are more niche but serve the same purpose. Some of our 4K monitor picks have USB-A ports, which allow you to use them as a hub to connect your computer to additional accessories.

Refresh rate

A monitor’s refresh rate—measured in hertz, shortened to Hz—determines how quickly it can be updated with new information. Refresh rates are measured in milliseconds, which means this tech spec isn’t important for common tasks but will make a difference if you choose to use your external display for gaming. A typical monitor offers a 60Hz refresh rate but can go much higher. Some gaming monitors go as high as 500Hz, but that’s extreme for the category.

VESA compatibility

All 4K monitors above come with a built-in stand, but you can replace it with a different one—whether it’s a wall mount or a monitor arm—if preferred, as long as they are VESA compatible. Switching to a different monitor stand may improve the ergonomics of your computing setup or save you desk space based on the one you choose.

Speakers

If you’d like to use your computer as a TV replacement, it’s smart to get one with built-in speakers. A monitor’s speakers will never match the quality of a true stereo pair but will work well in a pinch.

FAQs

Q: Is text too small on a 4K monitor?

No. Text looks very clear on a 4K monitor. If you’re having trouble reading it, you can always zoom in on the text you’re reading to see it more easily.

Q: Does a 4K monitor need HDMI 2.1?

No. Many 4K monitors have HDMI 2.0 ports and will connect to a game console, computer, or another tech accessory with no problems. HDMI 2.1 ports are only necessary for playing native 4K console or PC games with HDR (High Dynamic Range) enabled.)

Q: Can my PC handle a 4K monitor?

Yes. Most desktop and laptop computers sold in the past five years or so are powerful enough to run a 4K monitor capably.

Q: How much should a 4K monitor cost?

This will depend on the display’s size, refresh rate, and the other factors listed above. You can get a basic 4K monitor for under $400 but will have to spend much more if you’d like one specifically suited for gaming.

Final thoughts on the best 4K monitors

A 4K monitor will quickly become the most important tech accessory in your computing setup, right next to the external hard drive you use for regular backups and the Wi-Fi router you rely on for a steady Internet connection. It used to be difficult to find monitors with this resolution without spending thousands of dollars or settling for sub-par specs, but thankfully, that’s no longer the case. Advancements in display technology have made 4K monitors more accessible and affordable than ever, and once you get one, there’s no going back.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 4K monitors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best swivel recliners for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-swivel-recliners/ Mon, 12 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=602028
The best swivel recliners of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These comfortable, movable chairs will allow you to comfortably reposition yourself with ease.

The post The best swivel recliners for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best swivel recliners of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Evolur Harlow Deluxe Glider Swivel Recliner on a plain white background. Evolur Harlow Deluxe Glider Swivel Recliner
SEE IT

Marketed as a nursery chair, this recliner has become very popular with families.

Best design CHITA Power Recliner on a plain white background. CHITA Power Recliner
SEE IT

With 10 colorways in two material selections, this recliner offers up superior style.

Best budget Sweetcrispy Swivel Rocking Recliner on a plain white background. Sweetcrispy Swivel Rocking Recliner
SEE IT

If you need a swivel recliner but don’t want to spend a lot, this is the chair for you.

Swivel recliners all kinds of opportunities. You can relax comfortably in your living room. You can sit behind a desk facing away, then slowly turn towards someone as they enter a room like you’re a super villain. The possibilities are endless. But, you need to choose the right chair for your needs. We’ve selected this list of the best swivel recliners for just about any person and any space.

How we chose the best swivel recliners

Since customers know best, we combined previous research on great recliners for both pleasure and pain relief with a search for the chairs that the customers are not only purchasing but also talking about. We mean four-star and above conversation, leaving the three-star and below recliners for the curb. We also call an audible occasionally, choosing a newer chair that might not be highly reviewed yet but comes from a trusted brand and is full of style. 

The best swivel recliners: Reviews & Recommendations

The best swivel recliners of 2024 have to at least recline and swivel. While there are different methods of reclining, there is no variation in swivel, as that construction generally requires similar parts. These five swiveling recliner chairs will keep you turning around to face your perceived realities until you have to recline out of dizziness.  

Best overall: Evolur Harlow Deluxe Glider Swivel Recliner

Evolur

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Recline type: Power
  • Swivel degree: 275°
  • Price: $424

Pros

  • Push-button recline
  • USB port
  • Solid construction

Cons

  • Limited swivel
  • Design is a bit bland

The Evolur Harlow Deluxe Glider Swivel Recliner comes in a few variations of gray, which can make for a bit of a dull chair. However, that just means it matches with all your other furniture, and you can always just get a chair cover. Regardless, it has the prerequisites of being both a recliner and a swivel chair and has hundreds of positive reviews. 

Features include a power reclining mechanism controlled by a button on the armrest. There’s a built-in USB port to charge up while you’re sitting down and some side pockets. While it doesn’t swivel all the way around, 275 degrees at least eliminates the side eye. Coming in at under $400, the Evolur Harlow Deluxe Glider Swivel Recliner is a best buy if you want to swivel and recline. 

Best splurge: Hershman Leather Swivel Recliner 

Hershman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Leather
  • Recline type: Manual lever
  • Swivel degree: 360°
  • Price: $1,069

Pros

  • Top grain leather
  • Solid wood construction
  • Mid-century modern style

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No charging ports
  • Ottoman instead of leg rest

Hershman Leather Swivel Recliner is very much a splurge, but there’s good reason for spending over $1,000 on a swivel recliner. It comes in orange, blue, white, and cream, so it immediately does away with the boring gray found in most chairs. It also focuses on ergonomics, with a manual recline and included ottoman. This is a sitting room chair, or at least one you’ll want to use as a centerpiece in the living room. 

Most importantly, it swivels an entire 360 degrees, so if you entertain a lot of James Bond types and own a hairless cat, this chair is a must-have. But really, it’s the style that counts. Full leather and a mid-century modern look make the Hershman Leather Swivel Recliner an absolute splurge.

Best design: CHITA Power Recliner 

CHITA

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Faux leather / Fabric
  • Recline type: Power glide
  • Swivel degree: 270°
  • Price: $649

Pros

  • Ten color options
  • Power glide function
  • Extended footrest

Cons

  • Not a full swivel
  • No swivel lock when reclined

The CHITA Power Recliner has all those nice features you want in a swivel recliner, like lumbar support, USB charging, push-button recline, and rocking. That’s right; this is a swivel-rocking recliner, so you can rock, swivel, and recline. Fun times. But that’s not the main selling point of this recliner. 

Rather, that would be the two material selections in faux leather or fabric, along with 10 different color selections. That means that the CHITA Power Recliner is the perfect chair when you want to recline in accordance with your home design. 

Best value: Abingdon Upholstered Swivel Recliner 

Abingdon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polyester blend
  • Recline type: Glider
  • Swivel degree: 360°
  • Price: $266

Pros

  • Full recline
  • Also a rocker
  • Easy to clean

Cons

  • Low weight limit
  • Kind of small

Another gliding rocker billed as a nursery chair, the Abingdon Upholstered Swivel Recliner will also suffice as a regular recliner. Plus, it’s a rocker as well. You get a full recline, and it’s moderately cheap. It’s not a flashy recliner with a ton of color options or a necessarily big poofy recliner, but it does what it sets out to do. 

And isn’t that the real value of a recliner? Serving as a place to rest your weary bones after a long day of dealing with humanity? And sometimes all you need is a simple chair like the Abingdon Upholstered Swivel Recliner to set your feet up, swivel around to watch TV, and wait for the day to close.

Best budget: Sweetcrispy Swivel Rocking Recliner 

Sweetcrispy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Linen fabric
  • Recline type: Manual
  • Swivel degree: 360°
  • Price: $443

Pros

  • Adjustable recline
  • Full 360° swivel
  • High backrest

Cons

  • A bit narrow
  • No electronic functions

The Sweetcrispy Swivel Rocking Recliner comes in at around $200, which should fit nearly any chair-related budget. This is not a complex chair; it sticks to the basics. There are no massage functions, USB charging, automatic recline, or heating, but it does swivel all the way around. This is a chair your kids will spin in until you lose your patience and kick them outdoors.

This is a sturdy little chair, and there’s the only real downside. It’s a bit narrow, so it’s not suited for bigger folk. But it holds its own with an adjustable recline, so you don’t have to live in the black and white of reclining all the way or not at all. The Sweetcrispy Swivel Rocking Recliner is a budget chair for sure, but without being budget quality.

What to consider before buying one of the best swivel recliners

Before you purchase a swivel recliner, you’ll want to hone in on at least three particular points:

Swivel degree

Most swivel recliners have a 270- to 360-degree radius. But that 90 degrees makes a huge difference. Without that last right angle, you won’t be able to turn all the way around. Peripheral swivels are nice and all, but sometimes we want to be able to go the full 360 degrees because it’s super fun.

Material

You’ll want to search for a fabric chair if you are looking for multiple color options outside the beige, gray, and black found in faux leather chairs. Both are easy to clean, as is polyester. Pure leather will be the most expensive and sometimes offers some interesting color choices. And it looks the best. 

Features

Chairs vary in their available features, and it’s rare to find a swivel chair with plug-in features such as massage and heat. However, you’ll find plenty with electronic recline, USB charging, and lumbar support. These common features make each chair more appealing, especially when you can charge your phone while nowhere near an actual outlet.

FAQs

Q: Which is better: manual or electric recliner?

It’s completely subjective, but electric obviously requires a power source. Plus, it adds a higher chance of something breaking in the future. But one of the best things about an electric recline is that it offers you more available positions. Manual usually is either reclined all the way or not at all. However, there are some manual recliners that allow for adjustable recline.

Q: Are swivel chairs safe for elderly?

Swivel chairs are safe for anybody as long as there are no mobility or vertigo issues. However, the elderly usually prefer stable, non-spinning chairs because of the aforementioned issues. 

Q: What is the average cost of a good recliner?

A good recliner can cost anywhere between $200 and thousands of dollars, with the average generally hovering around $400 to $500 for a standard recliner. There are so many brands on the market these days that it’s easy to find a good recliner that fits your needs and your budget.

Final thoughts on the best swivel recliners

When choosing the best swivel recliner, knowing your swivel degree is important because that’s the most entertaining part about these chairs. We don’t spin because we have to; we spin because we want to. Plus, if we can recline a bit, maybe rock, while doing so, even better. The best swivel recliners make us feel like the world is spinning, but without having to run in a circle. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best swivel recliners for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fire-starters/ Fri, 09 Feb 2024 16:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=600717
A four-panel lineup of the best fire starters
Amanda Reed

Fire starters can help light your fireplace, campfires, and camp stoves, even in bad weather.

The post The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A four-panel lineup of the best fire starters
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall An orange and black fire starter on a plain background. Gerber Gear Fire Starter
SEE IT

With added features that can keep you prepared while you’re in the wilderness.

Best for fire pits A package of GreenSpark all-natural fire starter on a plain background. GreenSpark Firestarters
SEE IT

If you’re not outdoors, use this fire starter as tinder.

Best budget A green and blue ust Sparkie fire starter on a plain background ust Sparkie Fire Starter
SEE IT

A cheap innovation that’s also nifty.

You can try holding a lighter to a log and waiting, but a fire starter will make your life much simpler. To build a blaze, you need to start small, then add your larger pieces of wood until you have a large fire. The problem is getting that first spark isn’t easy if you’re working in windy or wet conditions. Matches and lighters are no match for these particular elements. Fire starters, however, make fire building infinitely less frustrating. The best fire starters are portable, easy to use, and handy in all sorts of environmental conditions.

How we chose the best fire starters

A fire starter can refer to the strikers and rods used to start a fire or the small, flammable objects you can light to encourage your kindling and such to catch flames. We decided to focus on the strikers and rods, with one exception. Our focus is based on “what came first: chicken or the egg” logic: Without a striker and rod fire starter, you cannot use the “small, flammable object” fire starter, especially out in the woods. Additionally, anything can be a “small, flammable object” fire starter technically, from pork rinds and Doritos to a cotton ball. To find the best firestarters, we looked at reviews, recommendations, and conducted heavy research to separate the ones that sparked our interest from those that were a little dim. I’m also a proud former Girl Scout and pride myself on my fire-starting and building abilities.

The best fire starters: Reviews & Recommendations

A fire starter is a handy camping gadget that can do double duty when you’re at home. And, if you have a backyard fire pit, you don’t have to worry about finding a lighter that you can use safely. One of our picks should get your fire going.

Best overall: Gerber Gear Fire Starter

Gerber Gear

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ferro rod, steel striker, nylon cord, plastic
  • Waterproof?: Yes, IPX4
  • Lifespan: N/A
  • Size: 8 x 6 x 1 inches
  • Price: $25

Pros

  • Bonus features
  • Portable
  • Easy-to-use

Cons

  • Lanyard could be better

Maximize your backpack storage with this fire starter—the cargo shorts of camping gear. The ferro rod is compact, and an included handle gives you a great grip. Plus, the material itself is easy to work with. The included steel striker has directions right on it, so you’ll never forget how to use it. Bonus features like built-in storage for tinder and a 100-decibel emergency whistle make this choice stand out from the pack. If you’re thinking, “What about using the lanyard as tinder in case?” you’ll be out of luck. It’s not recommended for that, although some fire starters do have that feature. All in all, it’s a well-designed fire starter we feel comfortable stowing in our glovebox or side pocket. You can also buy it directly from Gerber.

Best ferro rod: Wolf and Grizzly Fire Set

Wolf and Grizzly

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ferrocerium, steel, nylon, jute
  • Waterproof?: N/A
  • Lifespan: Around 20,000
  • Size: 3.94 x 0.43 x 0.45 inches
  • Price: $23

Pros

  • Paracord can be used as tinder
  • Packable
  • Steel striker can be sharpened for continued use

Cons

  • Some reviews say it’s best for experienced outdoorspeople

If you’re looking for a long-lasting fire starter, consider this simple Wolf and Grizzly fire set your dream come true. Its curved steel striker can nestle against the ferro rod to create a compact profile, meaning you don’t have to worry about bulk. If you’re out of tinder, you can use a knife or the striker to access the jute inside the parachord lanyard. Its 20,000-strike lifespan means you’ll pass it on before reaching its expiration date. And, you can resharpen its steel striker like you do with a multitool, meaning it’s less likely to need replacing. Some reviews say it’s best for outdoorsy folk, but others disagree, blaming it on user error. Regardless, you’ll be glad to have this ferro rod with you while camping.

Best for fire pits: GreenSpark Firestarters

GreenSpark

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Wood wool, palm wax
  • Waterproof?: Yes
  • Lifespan: 8-10 minutes in fire
  • Size: 1-inch
  • Price: $22

Pros

  • Compact
  • Can use in multiple settings
  • Eco-friendly materials

Cons

  • Must be dry to light

Here is that exception we were talking about earlier. Based on what you’re lighting, it might feel more comfortable just to use a match or lighter to ignite a fireplace. All those sparks flying create a safety hazard; you don’t want to set off your smoke alarm when you don’t have to. Instead, you’ll need a fire starter that acts as tinder to help your larger pieces of wood catch fire. This eco-friendly fire starter is made from salvaged pine trees and technically never expire. They’re waterproof, but you must ensure they’re dry before lighting. If they do come into contact with water, they take around 10 minutes to be usable. You can also use them in wood stoves, grills, fire pits, and more.

Best for camping: Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL

Exotac

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: anodized aluminum body, ferrocerium rod, tungsten carbide striker
  • Waterproof?: Works when wet
  • Lifespan: 3,000 strikes
  • Size: ‎3.65 x 0.43 x 0.43 inches
  • Price: $32

Pros

  • Flammable lanyard
  • Small enough to put on keychain
  • Very compact

Cons

  • Might be too small for large hands

Packing light is no problem with the Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL. This extra small fire starter creates a shower of sparks that supercedes its size. Its included striker screws on, meaning you won’t have to take apart your meticulously packed backpack looking for a single part. It’s also .5 ounces, meaning you can use that extra weight to bring a thicker sleeping pad. The ferro rod is replaceable, and you can use the included lanyard as tinder in emergencies. You can even use it when wet. Whether in your pack or emergency kit, the Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL will perform in all kinds of conditions. If you have large hands, it may be a little cumbersome to use.

Expert pick: überleben Zünden Fire Starter

überleben

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Natural wood, ferrocenium
  • Waterproof?: Works when wet
  • Lifespan: 12,000-15,000 depending on length
  • Size: ‎4.8 x 0.66 x 0.95 inches or ‎7.24 x 2.32 x 1.06 inches
  • Price: $16

Pros

  • Comes in different lengths
  • Reliable and durable
  • Works when wet

Cons

  • Reviews note rod separating from the handle

“Last year, a Canadian friend recommended the überleben range of ferro rods and firestarters to me, and they have been worth every penny,” says Richard Prideaux, lead instructor for Original Outdoors, a UK-based outdoor skills training provider. “I carry an überleben Zünden with me on courses and trips where lighting a fire with natural materials is either likely or maybe necessary. They produce a good shower of sparks and have a good length/diameter ratio, and it hasn’t let me down yet.”

This ferro rod also comes in different thicknesses, which helps if you’re green behind the ears when it comes to using a ferro rod and striker.

“A beginner should look for reliability and ease of use in a fire starter,” he says. “If you are going to go somewhere that lighting a fire will become a safety issue then you should be focusing on equipment that will give you that fire reliably and repeatedly in a short space of time. A wider ferro rod will often give a better shower of sparks and be easier to use, but there will be a weight penalty, and some users may find it awkward to hold. A dedicated striker attachment is good to have as it means you can use the ferro rod without requiring additional equipment.”

Best budget: ust Sparkie Fire Starter

ust

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Flint, plastic
  • Waterproof?: Works in wet conditions
  • Lifespan: More than 100 strikes
  • Size: 6 x 5 x 2 inches
  • Price: $11

Pros

  • Works in adverse weather conditions
  • Can use one-handed
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Not the most long-lasting fire starter

Lighting a fire doesn’t get much easier or cheaper than this, folks. You can operate the ust Sparkie with one hand. Simply press a button to expose the flint bar and press down toward your tinder. Bam! That’s it! All for around $10! However, it only lasts for around 100 sparks. If you have some extra change to spend and love the Sparkie concept—or you’re a more experienced camper—consider upgrading to the BlastMatch, its beefier older sibling, which lasts for 4,000 strikes. This is a flint-based fire starter, so you also won’t get as much longevity compared to a ferro rod.

What to consider when buying the best fire starters

Fire starters are not a one-size-fits-all object. They have a common goal of helping tinder catch aflame, but you might be better off with one over another based on features. Some are better for casual, indoor use, while others are more ruff and rugged. Here’s how to separate the duds and phonies from the fabulous fire starters:

Types of fire starters

There are three main types of fire starters: Flint and steel, Ferrocerium rods (ferro rods), and magnesium bars.

The flint and steel combo is the tryest and true-est of all the fire starter options. The “flint” can be any hard, sedimentary rock like quartz and chert. The steel striker is heat-treated. You can even use any metal that has a high amount of carbon in it, like old rake teeth and garage door springs. When the striker comes in contact with the flint, tiny particles released from the metal oxidize and ignite when exposed to oxygen. Sparks from flint and steel can be dull, but this fire starter is the easiest to find. You’ll get the best results if you use it with char cloth.

Ferrocerium rods, or ferro rods, produce incredibly hot sparks and make quick work of lighting dry tinder. If you don’t have a striker on hand, you can use the back of a knife. Ferro rods are less uniform compared to flint and steel. They’re made with different metals—particularly cerium, lanthanum, and iron—and the percent of each affects its performance. A softer ferro rod doesn’t have a long shelf life, but it’s easier to use and produces more sparks. When using a ferro rod, any dry, highly flammable material, like birch bark, cotton, and tiny sticks, makes for excellent tinder.

Magnesium bars come with a ferro rod attached to the top. You shave off parts of the magnesium bar onto the nearby tinder pile, which will ignite when it comes into contact with a spark from the ferro rod. It takes a large amount of magnesium to create a flame that lasts long enough to light nearby tinder, so we recommend just sticking with a ferro rod. Outdoor skills trainer Richard Prideaux says he uses a ferro rod over flint and steel in “99.5 percent of situations.”

“A ferro rod is easier to use, lighter, smaller, and produces a more consistent shower of sparks at a higher temperature,” he says.

Activity

If you’re car camping, van lifing, or just hanging out in a camper or RV, you can get away with a heavier fire starter, since pack weight isn’t a concern. However, backpackers will want to choose something light, like the Exacto nanoStriker. Extra ounces add up to pounds, which is more weight to bear on the hike. This is important, especially if your hike is over days, not hours.

If you’re looking for something to help light your fireplace or grill, the world is your smoked oyster. Like the car camping/RV/camper camp, you can simply bring out what you want to use. You can also use a utility lighter—something those camping, unfortunately, don’t have the luxury to bring along.

Ease of use

As Prideaux mentioned in our expert pick, user-friendliness is important. Some fire starters, like the ust Sparkie, only need a downward push to create sparks. Flint and steel and ferro rods require a bit more finesse, although the former is more difficult to use than the latter. If you’re a beginner, consider a wide ferro rod, the Sparkie, or even an electric lighter. If you’re well-versed in the language of the outdoors, you can forage for your own flint … or you can just buy one that’s more technical (e.g., a compact fire starter built for backpacking).

FAQs

Q: How does a fire starter work?

It depends on the fire starter you’re using. Those like the ust Sparkie just need some force to produce sparks. The ones you will come across use a steel striker and ferrocerium, magnesium, or flint. Good old-fashioned friction helps create a shower of sparks that will hopefully land on your tinder (not that one) to start a fire.

Q: Do fire starters expire?

Fire starters are long-lasting. Instead of “expiring,” you’re generally faced with a finite number of strikes before the rod loses its effectiveness. That number is usually in the thousands. Unless you’re literally living outdoors, a fire starter is often a one-time purchase.

Q: How do I use a fire starter?

Using a fire starter can take some practice, but it’s easy to get the hang of it. Depending on the rod material, you first have to scrape off the protective layer that comes with a brand-new rod. If you’re using a magnesium rod, you’ll want to scrap off some magnesium, then add some tinder on top. Then, take a steel striker or a knife and position it close to your tinder pile. Add some pressure, quickly scrape the steel across the rod, and watch the sparks fly.

Final thoughts on the best fire starters

A fire starter isn’t a one-trick pony. You can use it on camping trips, in your own backyard, and even in your own home if your butane lighter is nowhere to be found. Plus, they can be a perfect addition to your emergency kit. They’re built to last and are generally inexpensive. Don’t wait until the moment you need one to click “add to cart.”

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smokeless-fire-pits/ Thu, 10 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561939
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A smokeless fire pit can provide a safe, simple way to get a blaze going for your next backyard get together or camping trip.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
SEE IT

It’s simple to light, easy to store, and eradicates smoke.

Best large Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going at night surrounded by torches and chairs Tiki Fire Pit
SEE IT

Gather up to 10 people around this ample fire pit for superior s’mores.

Best for patios Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside BioLite Fire Pit+
SEE IT

The mesh sides offer a unique view of the flames inside and nice radiant heat.

Smokeless fire pits solve an age-old problem: No matter where you sit around the camp fire, smoke always seems to blow in your face. The solution? Get rid of the smoke completely. These metal containers are built to control the flame and make it easy to start and finish. Not only do they make firing up easier, but they can also add a touch of class or a bit of flash to your patio, camp area, or backyard. A solid fire pit can turn a boring patio or backyard into a great place to spend an evening. Consider this your burn book, a list of the best smokeless fire pits.

How we chose the best smokeless fire pits

We started with a list of more than 30 models from hands-on testing and critical consensus before narrowing our options to the best we could find. The four main factors we considered were ease and effectiveness of use, aesthetics, value for price, and unique features. Our list represents our top choices, a couple for those who aren’t looking to spend as much money, and some situation-specific choices. During our tests, we burned a variety of different woods and burned under various weather conditions.

After all, everyone’s needs when it comes to a fire pit are different, and it’s important to consider how and where you plan to use your fire pit before you buy it. The “best” is not always the “best for you.” Our list should help you avoid getting more fire pit than you really need, as every one of our picks is recommended.

The best smokeless fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Smokeless fire pits contain and elevate fires. Their design allows air to flow in such a way that it minimizes (and in some cases fully eliminates) smoke. There are different looks and focuses among our choices, so line up your desires as best you can with our recommendations.

Best overall: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.25 lbs
  • Height: 18.5 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $249

Pros

  • Excellent single-piece construction
  • Well-controlled fires with efficient burn
  • Light for the size and quality
  • Attractive, simple silhouette
  • Excellent smoke reduction

Cons

  • The aesthetic doesn’t necessarily fit with some more casual backyards
  • Outside gets very hot


It’s no secret that we think the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 is excellent. In fact, we think it’s the best choice on the market for a smokeless fire pit. The first point for the Solo Stove Bonfire is performance. It heats up quickly and burns efficiently with a stunningly small amount of smoke. The aesthetic is particular: It’s not quite industrial, but it does have a shiny, smooth finish that doesn’t scream “tiki bar” or “family gathering” like some other models, and it’s not uniquely edgy in its stylings. It may not help bring certain patio looks together, but it also doesn’t stand out or bring attention to itself. The look is very “elevated comfort food outdoor cafe.”

Among the mid-sized models we recommend, the Bonfire 2.0 is one of the more portable (though look further down for the real portable star). Twenty-eight pounds is quite light for this category, and while the Bonfire 2.0 doesn’t collapse or disassemble to make it easier to transport, you can use a cloth carrying card to make things a bit easier for a beach trip or some light camping. Wood pellets are best in the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0—that’s true of most circular-basin fire pits—but small firewood also works extremely well. The interior volume of the pit isn’t particularly large, but the burn is so efficient and controlled that the fires tend to outperform the amount of fuel.

The Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 comes at a semi-premium price, but its durable construction guarantees its long-term value. Unless your fire pit needs are particularly portable or particularly large, this is the one to get, the best overall smokeless fire pit.

Best for patios: BioLite Fire Pit+

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 19.8 lbs
  • Height: 15.8 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece self-assembly with foldable legs
  • Price: $249

Pros

  • Bluetooth-enabled, battery-powered fan keeps fires going
  • Cool, see-through design
  • Foldable legs make storage easier
  • Battery is USB rechargeable
  • App allows control of the flame size
  • Sized for commercial firewood logs

Cons

  • Foldable legs aren’t particularly durable
  • The aesthetic is specific enough to not be everyone’s cup of tea
  • Rectangular design requires a more specific space arrangement than circular models

The BioLite Fire Pit+ is one of the most unique-looking fire pits on the market, with some interesting tech features. It’s an excellent overall fire pit and a contender for best overall, but it landed in best-for-patio because of its big, open flame, cool look, and innovations. The smoke elimination is not quite as good as a few other models, but it makes up for that.

Let’s look at those innovations first. One of its chief innovations is mesh side panels that allow more heat to radiate out and make the fire easy to observe. This does require a bit more work maintaining the Fire Pit+, but it is worth it for the cool view and unique shadows that are interesting and calming when sitting around the fire pit. Another great feature that really contributes to the comfort at a backyard gathering, and is absent on any other model, is the Bluetooth-enabled, app-controlled, battery-powered fan which controls airflow and can make the flames in the Fire Pit+ larger or small at will. This is simply something that isn’t seen elsewhere and really sets the Fire Pit+ apart. The battery pack, which is removable and charged via USB, gives the Fire Pit+ a retro-futuristic look, but it can be easily hidden on the least-seen side in a patio set-up if needed.

The biggest mark against the Fire Pit+ is the double-edged sword that is its legs. The foldable legs make moving and storing the Fire Pit+ much easier than some other models, but they’re also a bit less strong and stable than the circular or thicker-legged bases that competitors have. This means you can’t overfill the Fire Pit+ with firewood (it can fit standard commercial logs). That’s good advice in general with a fire pit, but particularly vital advice for the Fire Pit+.

The Fire Pit+ offers a unique look, unique control, and an overall very good performance, making it the best patio smokeless fire pit among our recommended ones, and a great complement to patio heaters.

Best large: Tiki Fire Pit

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45 lbs
  • Height: 18.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $295

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Nice, classic design
  • Lots of space for fuel inside
  • Perfect size for a larger patio

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Works better with wood pellets which can be more expensive than firewood
  • Not intended to be portable; you can’t easily take it to the beach or camping

Most fire pits on this list are great for four-to-six people. The Tiki Fire Pit is much larger and is a better choice if your patio seating is couches and lounges for 8-10 rather than chairs. Additionally, the Tiki Fire Pit has a classic Tiki design, which may be just what you’re looking for in your backyard paradise.

The benefits of the Tiki Fire Pit’s size are the amount of fuel it can use and the length of burn your fire is going to get. Stronger, longer fires mean less time spent tending the flames during your evening get-togethers. Smoke elimination is very good thanks to the airflow design, and the small, strong legs lift the pit enough for performance while not detracting from the pleasing, rounded throwback style. 

The drawback is this fire pit is really not meant for moving around. Forty-five pounds is a lot, and it is large, meaning you will most likely need two people and plenty of space in a truck or van if you want to take this party starter to the beach. Honestly, the Tiki Fire Pit is much better served finding a permanent home on your patio. However, with that heft comes a lot of durability, so the included weather-resistant cover is probably enough to protect your fire pit outside of an extreme situation. 

If your lifestyle means bigger is better, the Tike Fire Pit is probably the better choice among our recommendations, making it the best large smokeless fire pit as far as we’re concerned.

Best stainless steel: Breeo X Series 24

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 62 lbs
  • Height: 14.75 in
  • Material: Corten steel (also available in stainless steel)
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $599

Pros

  • Extremely strong and durable
  • Sleek look that blends in well with a lot of decor
  • Excellent fire control and smoke elimination

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Extremely heavy

If construction and materials really matter to you, and you want a fire pit that might become an heirloom to pass down to your children, break out the wallet for the Breeo X Series 24. This beautiful, sturdy, heavy, and durable fire pit is not one to travel; the 62 pounds of metal means it doesn’t want to go to the beach or a campground. However, at home you’re not going to get a longer-lasting, better-put-together fire pit.

The “24” in Breeo X Series 24 refers to the diameter of the fire pit’s interior—a considerable amount of space, larger even than the interior of the Tiki Fire Pit. There are 19-inch and even larger models as well. The legs of the Breeo X Series 24 are built-in and incredibly stable. The interior wall sucks up air and creates a wonderful, even secondary flame that shoots out the small holes just below the top of the rim. Visually, the Breeo X Series makes one of the nicest flames on the market.

The price tag is almost as heavy as the pit itself. The Breeo X Series is a premium product at a premium price—two or three times more than a lot of our other recommended models. If you have the means to splurge and believe in buying a product that will last a lifetime, the value is there, even if the initial cost is high.

Big, bold, and built to last, the Breeo X Series 24 is a beast and a beauty in one. For that reason, it’s the best corten steel smokeless fire pit we can recommend.

Best portable: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 15 in
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: single-piece construction
  • Price: $199

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Good flame control and smoke elimination
  • Includes a carrying case
  • Sleek and strong design

Cons

  • Portable but not collapsible; still need a vehicle to transport longer distances
  • Grilling requires additional accessories for best results

If you want a multi-purpose fire pit, portability is really important. We know it ourselves, so we have a guide if this category is the one you are exclusively considering. For those looking at a wider range of options, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is the little sibling of our best overall smokeless fire pit and the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market. Smaller, lighter, and more portable—but no less efficient—the Ranger is a much easier carry than the Bonfire without sacrificing any of the quality.

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire going inside
Billy Cadden

The Ranger really sings when you add in grilling accessories. The Solo Stove product line’s design gives you a simple, flat top that placing any flat wire grill means producing nice results (though you’ll want to very carefully clean the inside of your fire pit later, as food can create some sticky burnt messes). Some official grilling accessories are available, as well as skewers for s’mores or hot dogs if you look at Solo Stove’s offerings. (However, we recommend a dedicated grill if you’re into cookouts more than casual entertaining.)

For a portable model, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 isn’t particularly light. It’s not meant for trekking but more drive-to-the-national-park-or-beach style portable use. The included carrying case is probably enough for inside storage, but outside storage will need a thicker, more protective case (which is also available to purchase).

If you’re planning to head out with your fire pit a lot, we can heartily recommend the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 as the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market.

Best budget: Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit

Innostage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Height: 18 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction
  • Price: $152

Pros

  • Two-piece design lets it travel smaller
  • Easy to set up
  • Good airflow for smoke elimination
  • Matte black coloration makes it blend in easily

Cons

  • The silhouette is a bit industrial
  • Clean-up is tougher than with some other brands

You’ll need firewood once you’ve purchased your pit, so buying something that leaves you with some cash left over isn’t a bad plan. For those a bit more thrifty, Inno Stage offers a line of fire pits that don’t quite match the higher-cost models for performance or style but more than do the job for a very reasonable cost.

Inno Stage’s design involves two pieces. When assembled, the larger piece sits on the smaller piece, which acts as the ash pan. For travel or storage, the smaller piece is turned upside down and slots into the larger piece’s basin, taking up less space and becoming easier to carry. This is the most convenient feature of the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but it also results in less efficient burn.

In terms of looks, the Inno Stage is not the most beautiful fire pit. It has a bit of a utilitarian and industrial look, which doesn’t make it a star of the backyard. There’s a trio of options for the finish: chrome, matte black, and faux terracotta. The last is our suggestion; it softens the look a bit. There are also multiple sizes (four in all) depending on your needs.

If you need a highly functional, well-priced fire pit or just want to dip your toe into the world of fire pits without committing too many funds, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit is your best entry point. It’s inexpensive enough to upgrade later without feeling regretful and functional enough to use it for a long time, squeezing every ounce of use out of what we consider the best-value smokeless fire pit.

Best under $100: Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge

Blue Sky

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.49 in
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction
  • Price: $79

Pros

  • One piece tucks into the other for portability
  • Assembly is quick
  • Low price

Cons

  • Not quite as efficient burn as other models
  • Non-stainless steel means it’s a bit less durable and a bit harder to clean

Sometimes, price is the most important factor. If you want to get into the smokeless fire pit game for less than $100, choose the Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge. This two-piece smokeless fire pit has a similar tuck-in-and-carry construction as our best value option, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but an even lower base price. 

The design of the Ridge doesn’t allow air to flow as efficiently as higher-end models, meaning the smoke elimination is less impressive. However, it’s still an incredible improvement over typical fire pits. The matte black finish to the Ridge means it’s unobtrusive, but it’s also not a particularly attractive fire pit. Weight and size make the Ridge easy to move, and you’ll probably want to store it inside and bring it out to use it rather than leave it as patio furniture.

What to consider when choosing a smokeless fire pit

Smokeless fire pits offer a focal point for your patio set-up, allowing you to enjoy cooler days and nights in a comfortable and stylish way. To that end, picking the perfect smokeless fire pit means considering smoke elimination effectiveness, style, size, and durability.

Smoke elimination

When it comes to smoke elimination, all of these models will do an excellent job of minimizing the amount of smoke produced but the fire. This is due to airflow design, which allows for more complete combustion. Smokeless fire pits will have secondary fires popping out of the interior wall of the fire pit’s basin, using up more oxygen and producing very little smoke. The best models do this most efficiently, but even our recommended value and budget models do a great job.

Most of the design elements of smokeless fire pits are utilitarian due to wanting to offer the best possible airflow efficiency. The nicer models are sleep and round, while the budget models tend to have more edges or corners. A few of our models took their look more into consideration: the Tiki Fire Pit and the BioLite Fire Pit+ chief among them. Make sure you like the look of your fire pit if you’re planning to use it when entertaining guests. No matter how great the fire is, if the pit feels out of place and clashes with the motif you’re trying to achieve, you’ll be disappointed with your purchase.

Size

Most of the smokeless fire pits we recommend are medium-sized, built to be used with a smaller circle of people, maybe no more than 6. Portable models are best with 2 or 4. Larger models exist that can accommodate 8-10 people around them, but you’re looking at completely non-portable models at that point. In terms of warmth radius, most of these fire pits will be nice and toasty within 8 feet, but some of the smaller models will need a tighter formation.

Materials and durability

Lastly, durability is important as you want to be using your smokeless fire pit long term. Stainless steel is the material of choice. It holds up well to use and elements and is the easiest to clean. Some steel composite low-end models exist but should probably be avoided.

Fuel

While this list is entirely dedicated to wood-burning fire pits, you can also get propane-powered models that are much easier to get started. Check out our list of the best propane fire pits for options.

FAQs

Q: Is a smokeless fire pit really smokeless?

Not exactly. Smokeless fire pits will still produce some smoke. However, the amount of smoke is drastically reduced because the design allows airflow on nearly all sides, causing much more complete combustion. Even the smoke that does make its way out of the fire still won’t find its way into your face.

Q: Do smokeless fire pits give off good heat?

Absolutely. A smokeless fire pit can easily give off 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), which is extremely warm within 8 feet and comfortable from 8 feet to 10 feet.

Q: How much does a smokeless fire pit cost?

The ones we recommend can be had for as cheap as $75 on sale, and you could spend up to $1000 on the luxury models when you add in accessories.

Q: What type of fire pit is best?

It really depends on the space you’re most likely to have your fire. If you will almost only use your fire pit on your patio, choose a fire pit that fits the aesthetic of your backyard area. If you want to take your fire pit to the beach, choose a lighter standard-sized fire pit with a carrying case or a very light “portable” model. These will make smaller fires, but your back will thank you. No matter what, it’s best to go smokeless.

Q: Can you put water in a smokeless fire pit?

Do not do this. The holes in a smokeless fire pit can get clogged with wet fire debris, and dirty water will spill out onto whatever surface your fire pit is over. Instead, douse the flames with sand, wait long enough for everything to cool off, dump it, then clean it carefully by hand if necessary.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

Don’t do this either. First, it’s very unlikely that a fire pit fire will last all night, anyway. It’s simply not big enough, even though it’s protected from wind and moisture within the pit. Second, never leave a fire unattended, even in a relatively safe environment like a fire pit. It only takes one stray ember to cause a tragedy.

Q: Can you burn wood in a smokeless fire pit?

Yes! Most smokeless fire pits are expressly designed for wood. Many work better with wood pellets, but small scavenged firewood or commercial firewood cut into smaller pieces also works well.

Q: What makes a smokeless fire pit smokeless?

The airflow design allows more complete combustion of your fuel (usually wood or wood pellets), and more complete combustion produces less smoke, sometimes so little as to appear “smokeless.”

Final thoughts on the best smokeless fire pits

If you’re looking for a fire pit, smokeless is the way to go. There’s enough variety in the marketplace, with quality throughout, that choosing a model based on your particular needs is more involved than simply choosing the “best” model. From portable to large-scale patio-only models, our recommendations should make sure that your nights are toasty, your shadows flicker, and you enjoy fire whenever you wish.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/aiper-pool-vacuums-amazon-deal/ Tue, 30 Apr 2024 16:01:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=612929
Aiper Seagull Pro Pool Vacuum next to a pool
Billy Cadden

Let a robot do the taxing work of cleaning your pool for your with this AIPER deal at Amazon.

The post Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Aiper Seagull Pro Pool Vacuum next to a pool
Billy Cadden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Memorial Day is officially less than a month away, meaning it’s finally time to turn your current pool from “green, leafy, dead animal stew” to “clear, chloric, and classy.” I know you don’t want to interact with the sludge shellacking the entirety of your pool. Thanks to this Aiper pool vacuum deal at Amazon, you don’t have to.

Aiper Seagull Pro Cordless Robotic Pool Vacuum $598.75 (Was $899.99)

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

This rechargeable and cordless pool vacuum has four motors and a gyroscope. The internal gyroscope provides smart navigation that allows the Seagull Pro to map the floor and walls of a pool. The powerful motors offer 130GPM (gallons per minute) of suction while bottom brushes sweep out leaves, dirt, and other debris. It cleans up to 3,200 square feet in the three hours of battery power it gets from each charge. All that together equals a robot that makes cleaning your pool a hands-off experience.

If you’re looking for a cheaper robotic pool cleaner, our budget pick, the Aiper Seagull SE, is 20 percent off. Also, you can get an additional $40 coupon with one easy click. Combined, you save almost $100 on an already price-friendly pool vacuum.

Here are more cool pool deals, just in time for summer:

The post Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best espresso machines for easy, even extraction at home https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-home-espresso-machines/ Sat, 07 Nov 2020 01:20:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-home-espresso-machines/
The best espresso machines of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

At-home espresso machines are the best when you’re sick of paying $6 for a latte and you want to skip the drip.

The post The best espresso machines for easy, even extraction at home appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best espresso machines of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Breville-Barista-Touch-Impress-Espresso-Machine-with-Grinder on a countertop. Breville Barista Touch Impress
SEE IT

Sling barista-level shots in your own kitchen with the Breville the Barista Touch Impress Espresso Machine.

Best for beginners Nespresso VertuoPlus product image Nespresso VertuoPlus Coffee and Espresso Machine by De’Longhi
SEE IT

Save on counter space with this compact, beginner-friendly espresso machine.

Best budget Bialetti Moka Express, Stovetop Coffee Maker, Aluminium, 9-Cup Espresso Bialetti Moka Express, Stovetop Coffee Maker, Aluminium, 9-Cup Espresso
SEE IT

This moka pot proves you don’t need frills and fancy parts to make a good cup of espresso.

Six bucks for a cappuccino? You’ve got to be kidding me. Coffee shops nowadays charge top dollar for espresso drinks; if you’ve got a daily milk and espresso habit, the cost will add up quickly. Imagine enjoying a cappuccino in the morning without waiting in line or speaking to a soul. Alternatively, imagine impressing guests at a dinner party by serving macchiatos with dessert. Espresso also tends to be less acidic than drip coffee, so many people find it to be easier on the gut and a pleasing digestif. Depending on how advanced you want to get, there are home espresso machines for the pro barista and layperson alike. Here are some of our favorites to help you start your search for the best espresso machines.

How we chose the best espresso machines

As journalists constantly trying to meet deadlines, our minds are fueled by equal parts inspiration and desperation, but our bodies are 99.9 percent coffee. This means we have a thing or two to say about creating the coffee shop experience at home. To round out this roundup, we downed a double and had jittery discussions about our own brewing experiences, looked at product reviews, talked to coffee aficionados, and scoured coffee chat boards—yes, those exist—to find the best espresso machine for your home.

The best espresso machines: Reviews & Recommendations

Making a quality cup of joe or mug of latte takes more than hot purified water, freshly ground coffee, and time. Don’t get us wrong, we love our drip coffee and pour-over coffee makers, but we sometimes need the special energy and aura of perfectly textured crema. Take the temperature of any barista, and they’ll say hand-crafted beverages are both an art and a science. At the heart of all good coffee is a great shot of espresso, and at the core of great espresso is a great espresso machine—the exacting, expressive tool that lets you pull perfect shot after perfect shot in the comfort of your own home. Here are our picks so you won’t get steamed yourself looking for the perfect pressurized apparatus.

Best overall: Breville Barista Touch Impress Espresso Machine with Grinder

Tony Ware / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This professional-grade espresso machine pulls no punches and pulls perfect espresso shots.

Specs

  • Capacity: 67.6 fluid ounces
  • Weight: 22 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 12.9 x 13 x 16.4 inches

Pros

  • Built-in grinder
  • Assistye3d tamping
  • Settings for alternative milks
  • Saves up to eight customized drinks

Cons

  • Cost
  • Requires substantial counterspace

Breville’s Impress is the most, well, impressive latte machine we’ve tested, and it’s also our favorite for making espresso. The machine was designed to be beginner-friendly, with most of the drink-making process being automatic. This starts with selecting your drink of choice from the Impress’ touchscreen, at which point its built-in burr grinder (which can be fine-tuned for various factors) will automatically portion out your grounds. A lever allows you to use the espresso machine’s integrated 22-pound tamper. If everything seems in order—the Impress will show a green checkmark on its screen—you move the portafilter to its brew head, and the Impress takes care of the rest.

If your drink requires milk, use this espresso machine’s built-in frothing wand and milk jug. Breville’s “MillQ” system has temperature + aeration presets for different alternative milks, including almond and oat milk. In this case, the Impress is not automatic: You’ll decide how much milk you need and how much to pour. Markers on the milk jug will show you its minimum and maximum capacity, but that’s all the guidance you’ll get. It may take a few tries to get the perfect macchiato, but this won’t be an issue once you’re comfortable making your preferred drinks.

The Barista Touch Impress isn’t fully automatic, but it will keep you from making common mistakes by telling you things like letting you know your coffee puck needs to be tamped again or letting you know when the portafilter isn’t full enough. Gauging the pressure it took to establish a steady flow of expresso, it will give you suggestions on grind size to help you achieve a more consistent result. Many of these errors will be displayed on its display or denoted by pronounced beeps, taking some of the guessing game out of pulling off the perfect grind, and helping keep your countertops clean, too, since you’re only transporting the grounds above the drip tray. This espresso machine isn’t perfect—it costs $1,500 and can only accommodate a standard-sized mug under its brew head—but its beginner-friendly nature and overall design are hard to beat. That’s why we’ve also named it the best splurge if you’re looking at coffee machines for offices.

Best timesaver: KitchenAid KF8

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The KitchenAid KF8 is the automatic espresso machine you’ve always dreamed of.

Specs

  • Capacity: 2.2 liters
  • Weight: 27 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 14.3″ H x 10.2″ W x 18.5″ D

Pros

  • Makes drinks with the push of two buttons
  • Plant-based milk options
  • Support for up to six user profiles
  • Capable of making variations of popular drinks
  • Quiet-Mark Certified

Cons

  • Price
  • Requires a deep countertop

KitchenAid’s KF8 may not unseat its stand mixer as the company’s crown jewel, but there’s a good case to be made that it should. The fully automatic espresso machine allows you to make drinks in a couple of minutes that baristas spend years training to perfect. If you’re intimidated by making coffee for fear of screwing up nice beans (guilty), you’ll appreciate how the KF8 is set up and use. Just be sure you have enough counter space (the KF8 is deeper than most espresso machines) before you begin.

This espresso machine’s centerpiece is its five-inch touchscreen, which allows you to select your preferred drink. Once selected, you can choose its strength, temperature, the type of milk you’re using (if applicable), and the size of your glass. We found that adjusting the strength setting did impact the way our drink tasted—strong brought out the most flavor from our beans—and liked the middle temperature setting the best, as we could enjoy our beverage immediately without the risk of totally burning our tongue and throat.

Once your drink and settings have been selected, the KF8 will use its built-in grinder to grind the beans, tamp them, and begin pouring the beverage. This entire process takes about a minute, and its progress is shown on the espresso machine’s display. Once the drink is complete, you can add it to a profile, where it’ll be accessible with a single tap. The KF8 has enough memory to save multiple drinks for several people, so homes with a few coffee drinkers can designate their presets. Beyond the KF8’s stellar performance—this machine made the best coffee drinks our tester has tried at home or from a café—the machine has several design features that make it stand out.

Its brew head can be moved vertically to accommodate different glass sizes. Its bean hopper is removable, which allows you to swap out different beans in a minute or two without wasting them. Its milk container attaches to the machine’s brew head using a flexible, removable tube that extracts the perfect amount based on your beverage. This container can be stored in your fridge between uses to prevent you from wasting milk. The KF8 even earned a Quiet-Mark certification, which was awarded to the machine due to how soft its grinder sounds while it’s working.

This espresso machine is undoubtedly a luxury at $1,999, but one that’s absolutely worth the additional cost for anyone who’s a perfectionist when it comes to coffee.

Best statement piece: Smeg Espresso Coffee Machine

Smeg

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This espresso machine features a smaller profile for a minimalist kitchen.

Specs

  • Capacity: 34 fluid ounces
  • Weight: 11 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 12 x 6 x 13 inches

Pros

  • Passive cup warmer
  • Slim

Cons

  • No built-in grinder

This is a great option for someone who isn’t a pro barista but cares about their espresso and aesthetics. It is made of stainless steel with a filter holder for either espresso grounds or pods, depending on how involved you want to get. The control panel is easy to use with buttons for one cup, two cups, and steam. It also has a one-liter water tank that can be removed for filling. For the more detail-oriented espresso hound, this machine allows you to adjust water hardness and extraction length. The onboard chrome steam wand also makes it easy to froth milk for your fancier drinks. The Smeg, unfortunately, does not have an onboard grinder, so that’s something to consider—but don’t worry, we have plenty of suggestions for the best coffee grinders.

Best for beginners: Nespresso VertuoPlus Coffee and Espresso Machine by De’Longhi

Nespresso

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This beginner-friendly machine makes barista-worthy shots.

Specs

  • Capacity: 40 fluid ounces
  • Weight: 9 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 5.59 x 16.88 x 12.79 inches

Pros

  • Hands-off
  • Thin profile

Cons

  • No steam wand
  • Pod-only

This machine—our best overall choice among Nespresso machines—is great for home or office; just insert a Nespresso capsule, push a button, and watch it go. The Nespresso VertuoPlus offers options for single (1.35-ounce) espresso, double (2.7-ounce) espresso, or Americanos in 5-, 8-, or 14-ounce sizes. Any of these pours can be extracted from a single capsule. The removable water tank holds 40 ounces, and the used capsule container can store up to 12 pods before it needs emptying. This is a more hands-off option for somebody in search of a quick fix. The espresso drinks pour nicely with crema on top, but the VertuoPlus does not have a steam wand for milk. It comes with a complimentary assortment of 12 capsules to get you started.

Easiest to use: Café Affetto Automatic Espresso Machine + Milk Frother

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This machine can make a custom cup to your liking; no mental math required.

Specs

  • Capacity: 40.6 fluid ounces
  • Weight: 19 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 16.1 x 7.1 x 12.48 inches

Pros

  • Brews in 90 seconds
  • Compact

Cons

  • Touch panel is very sensitive
  • Water reservoir is hard to reach if you have low cabinets

Are you the person with the complicated coffee order because your cappuccino has to be a certain way? Are you also tired of paying for that customized cup multiple times a week but worried you don’t have time to get it right at home? Congrats, this machine is for you. This espresso machine is Wi-Fi-connected and syncs with the SmartHQ app, which allows you to customize drink preferences by volume and strength—ristretto and beyond. And your custom cup is available in 90 seconds at the push of a button. The froth wand rotates 90 degrees for control and convenience, and the included 15.8-ounce steel frothing pitcher includes liquid measurement engravings inside. A built-in conical burr grinder includes five levels of grind, from coarsest to finest, to prep your beans for pre-infusion, balanced extraction, and a consistent cup blooming with flavor. If you’re assembling a smart-home beverage station, this is the smart choice.

Best budget: Bialetti Moka Express, Stovetop Coffee Maker, Aluminium, 9-Cup Espresso

Bialetti

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This moka pot proves that you don’t need a fancy machine to make a good cup of espresso.

Specs

  • Capacity: 17 fluid ounces
  • Weight: 2 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 7.05 x 5.12 x 9.64 inches

Pros

  • Zero-waste
  • Hands-on

Cons

  • Takes more time to make a shot

This is the old-school Italian way to make espresso at home, and it works like a charm. Just fill the lower chamber with cold water, add ground espresso to the filter, and screw the top chamber on. Put it on the stove over medium-low flame and let it bubble until the water travels through the grounds and into the top chamber. The result is delicious and complex, considering you don’t have to plug anything in. The Bialetti is compact to the point that you could travel with it, so it is quite the opposite of any of the other counter-space-eating espresso makers on the market. It’s the perfect compact cabinet-friendly complement to one of the best French press coffee makers. You will also want to keep it near your kitchen scale, coffee grinder, and milk frother, as nothing is built into this pot.

What to consider when buying the best espresso machines

Not all espresso machines are built alike. Here are some important considerations before purchasing the best espresso machine for you:

Price

Professional-style machines tend to cost more than ones meant for the regular consumer. If you just want to make a simple Caffè Americano or latte and don’t need bells and whistles like a milk frother or built-in grinder, don’t splurge on a barista’s dream espresso machine.

Size

Espresso machines can take up the same footprint as a more traditional coffee maker all the way to an entire wing of the counter, depending on the complexity of the machine. You may want a larger, professional-style machine, but before you purchase you need to make sure you have the counter set-up that can accommodate it.

Drink preferences

If you’re a mocha or cappuccino fan, you might benefit from a more technical machine that preserves the quality of the espresso. If you’re just trying to get some caffeine in your body and don’t care about the particulars, don’t worry about things like boilers and what temperature the machine gets to.

Related: Best coffee makers

FAQs

Q: What kinds of coffee can I make with an espresso machine?

Lots! You can make lattes, Caffè Americanos, cappuccinos, mochas … you name it, it’s possible with an espresso maker. The amount of steamed milk, foam, and espresso determines what kind of drink you will have. For example, an Americano is just espresso and hot water. Lattes and cappuccinos are both made from espresso, steamed milk, and milk foam, but the ratio of the three ingredients differentiates the two.

Q: What are some tips for using the espresso machine?

It depends on the kind of machine you have. But for a manual machine—the kind where you have to pull the shot—make sure you use fresh beans, clean your machine, and don’t use hard or untreated water when making a shot of espresso.

Q: How long do espresso machines last?

Depending on the quality, amount of use, and care, an espresso machine can last between 5-10 years.

Final thoughts on the best espresso machines

Making your own coffee at home saves you money and adds to your morning ritual. Yes, being on a first-name basis with a barista is a great humblebrag. But so is engaging in small acts of mindfulness by paying attention to how each shot smells when it’s brewing and savoring every sip from your favorite travel coffee mug, knowing you are mastering the alchemy of espresso.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best espresso machines for easy, even extraction at home appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best iced coffee makers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-iced-coffee-makers/ Tue, 12 Sep 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=569347
The best iced coffee makers composited
Stan Horaczek

A solid iced coffee machine on your counter can drastically reduce your brew budget without sacrificing quality.

The post The best iced coffee makers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best iced coffee makers composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Breville Precision Brewer Breville Precision Brewer Coffee Maker
SEE IT

This versatile machine can make a perfect cup no matter your taste.

Best for batch brewing Zojirushi EC YTC100XB Coffee Maker Zojirushi EC-YTC100XB Coffee Maker
SEE IT

Make up to five cups of concentrated iced coffee to serve at once.

Best splurge De'Longhi Eletta Explore Fully Automatic coffee machine De’Longhi Eletta Explore Fully Automatic Coffee Machine
SEE IT

Go beyond a simple iced coffee to more complex drinks with this high-end machine.

Add a reliable iced coffee maker to your arsenal of kitchen appliances; it will change your daily routine and your entire mindset. You’ll stop lusting after pricey takeout brews and start crafting custom ice cubes made of coffee or creamer so they won’t dilute your perfectly extracted concoction. As the temperatures rise and you long for ways to cool down without slowing down, at-home iced coffee can achieve true greatness. But which maker suits your palate? Take some time to consider whether you’re a pod-loving, grab-and-go drinker or someone who wants to tinker with bloom times adjusted to your favorite beans. Here are the best iced coffee makers for those who take life cup by cup or vat by vat.

How we choose the best iced coffee makers

PopSci’s obsession with coffee leads to firmly entrenched opinions about the superiority of brewing methods (French press vs. pour-over, etc.) and trickles down to milk frothers, travel mugs, and other accouterments. Our recommendations for iced coffee makers come from research, expert opinions, and our experience drinking ever-larger volumes of chilled caffeine as the temperatures increase.

Technically, any coffee maker that brews hot coffee makes iced coffee: Just brew a pot and toss it in the fridge for later. For this roundup, we stuck to machines with dedicated settings that brew a stronger concentration directly over ice to be sipped immediately. We also considered performance, brewing capacity, overall size, and whether each machine can make other beverages while occupying precious counter space. (And we’ve got you covered if cold brew coffee makers are more your vibe. Not sure of the difference? Read our “What to consider …” section after our top picks.)

The best iced coffee makers: Reviews & Recommendations

The best iced coffee makers make a solid cup of hot coffee and a more robust version to go over ice. But you should also consider whether you’re making a cup at a time or enough for a household, whether the machine uses pods or beans, how much control you want over brew settings, and whether it will be one of many coffee makers or your primary device.

Best overall: Breville Precision Brewer

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 9 inches deep by 14 inches wide and 16 inches height
  • Weight: 3.15 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: Up to 32 ounces for iced coffee, up to 60 for hot
  • Thermal carafe

Pros

  • Six preset brewing modes, including iced coffee and cold brew
  • My Brew setting allows custom brewing setting
  • Adjustable temperatures
  • Three flow rates
  • Includes flat bottom and cone filter baskets
  • Auto-start

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Water tank isn’t removable

The Breville Precision Brewer hits a sweet spot for people who want a programmable, automatic machine that still allows them to customize the flavor of their beans. The tall stainless steel brewer comes with six preset brewing modes—including iced coffee, cold brew, and one tuned to Specialty Coffee Association’s Gold Cup standard—for those who want barista quality but don’t necessarily have barista know-how (or patience).

For hot coffee, the machine can brew a single cup or crank out 60 ounces in less than seven minutes on its fast setting. The volumes for cold sippers are significantly smaller. The Over Ice mode brews up to four cups of a more potent brew. The Cold Brew setting makes up to 20 ounces—a single serving for many of us—in an adjustable steeping time (zero to 16 hours), but you can skip the carafe and put it right into your favorite mug.

The Precision Brewer, our pick for best overall drip coffee maker, is jam-packed with features to get the most out of your favorite beans. Tinkerers can also play with customizable brewing settings, including adjustable temperatures and flow rates, and save them as a “My Brew” setting for repeated use. It also comes with cone and flat-bottom filter baskets, and a pour-over adapter can be added separately. At more than $300, the Precision Brewer may have a higher price tag than the average joe may be expecting. Still, it consolidates what could be multiple different gadgets—drip, iced coffee, cold brew, and the optional pour-over—into one device.

Some reviewers, however, have quibbles about the water tank. It isn’t removable like many other models, so refilling requires using something else to fill it, and it doesn’t completely empty every time.

Best budget: Mr. Coffee Iced and Hot Coffee Maker

Mr. Coffee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7 inches deep by 10 inches wide and 16 inches tall
  • Weight: 5.6 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: Up to 16 ounces
  • Single servings in your own cups or included 22-ounce tumbler

Pros

  • Use your own beans
  • Includes a 22-ounce tumbler with straw
  • Easy to clean
  • No pods necessary

Cons:

  • Complaints about leaky tumbler lid

The Mr. Coffee Iced and Hot Coffee Maker is for households that take the day one cup at a time but want to avoid pods. This single-serve machine comes with a reusable filter to use your chosen grinds and cranks out a cup of hot or iced coffee in under four minutes.

This budget find keeps things simple with only two buttons for “hot brew” or “over ice” and clear markings to meet the grind-water-ice ratios needed. For iced coffee, the included 22-ounce tumbler features a water line to fill the reservoir and then an ice line (though this really means filling it all the way to the top to account for coming melt). For hot options, the water reservoir has internal markings for 6, 8, 12, and 16 ounces and a double-sided scoop that tucks into its side.

The recommended retail price for the Mr. Coffee Iced and Hot Coffee Maker is $59.99, but it can often be found in the $30 to $40 range. Executive Editor Stan Horaczek has a very similar machine that comes with the same tumbler, and that aspect of the set is terrible. The top leaks, it’s hard to clean, and the straw feels very cheap. Get a better tumbler with all that money you saved on the machine itself.

Best Keurig: Keurig K-Elite Single-Serve K-Cup Pod Coffee Maker

Keurig

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10 inches deep by 12.7 inches wide and 13.1 inches tall
  • Weight: 8 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: Single Cup
  • Pick your own cup up to 7.2 inches tall

Pros

  • Brews in less than a minute
  • Makes five different serving sizes
  • Large water reservoir
  • Compatible with My K Cup reusable coffee filter
  • Makes other beverages and hot water for instant noodles, etc.

Cons

  • All plastic body
  • Large footprint

Some of us value simplicity and speed, the hallmarks of the Keurig K-Elite Single-Serve K-Cup Pod Coffee Maker. Slide your iced-filled mug under the spout, drop in your favorite K-Cup coffee, and press the “iced coffee” button. About a minute later, you can grab and go or at least sip a fresh cup with little fuss.

Keurig offers a machine specifically for iced coffee, but we recommend the K-Elite for maximum flexibility. The K-Elite provides more customization than most automatic single-serve machines, including increasing the brew temperature, an elevation setting for mountain folk, and programmable auto-on and auto-off. The massive 75-ounce water tank can also be used for five different beverage sizes—4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 ounces—or hot water on demand for a cup of noodles.

Clean-up is just the cup, tossing the pod (or washing your My K Cup reusable coffee filter), and occasionally descaling.

But the single-serve lifestyle means taking life one cup at a time—there’s no option for a carafe or batch brewing here. And though the K-Elite comes in colors like brushed silver, slate, and gold, the body is plastic with metal details.

Best for batch brewing: Zojirushi EC-YTC100XB Coffee Maker

Zojirushi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8 inches deep by 10.6 inches wide and 15.8 inches tall
  • Weight: 9 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: Up to 40 ounces for iced, up to 80 for hot
  • Thermal carafe

Pros

  • Optional pre-infusion cycle to allow beans bloom time
  • Front-loading swing basket
  • Detachable water tank
  • Water marking for iced coffee

Cons

  • Reports the vacuum carafe doesn’t keep coffee piping hot
  • Looks more like an office machine than one for a kitchen

Zojirushi may be more readily associated with its well-loved rice cookers, but the Japanese company has long made hot water dispensers, electric kettles, and thermal mugs for hot beverages. The Zojirushi Fresh Brew Plus EC-YTC100XB Coffee Maker nabbed a spot as one of our best coffee makers for its ability to make delicious cups of hot and iced coffee. The secret? The machine lets the coffee bloom—geek speak for pouring a small amount of water on the grounds so they can release carbon dioxide before brewing—during an optional pre-infusion cycle. (So opt for it.) The result is either 10 cups of hot coffee or 4 to 5 cups of a concentrated brew to serve over ice immediately, a win for households with multiple or high-volume drinkers, or maybe even offices in search of a coffee maker.

Iced coffee brewing isn’t a secondary bell or whistle. The Fresh Brew Plus’ water tank features clear markings for iced coffee. The setup is reasonably easy to clean with a removable water tank, a front-loading basket with a mesh filter—and a drip prevention mechanism to stop errant coffee from making a mess when the carafe has been removed.

One drawback is some hot coffee drinkers report that the carafe doesn’t keep the brew extra scalding. It also puts off a decidedly retro appliance vibe, which may not fit everyone’s aesthetic.

Best splurge: De’Longhi Eletta Explore Fully Automatic Coffee Machine

De’Longhi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17.5 inches deep by 10.5 inches wide and 15.1 inches tall
  • Weight: 24.7 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 60 ounces
  • Single servings in your own cups

Pros

  • Built-in grinder with 13 settings
  • Make a wide variety of espresso drinks
  • Four user profiles for one-touch personalized coffee
  • Brews 8-, 12-, and 16-ounce drinks
  • Can fit travel mugs

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Large footprint
  • Mostly plastic body

We’ve stuck to regular iced coffee to this point, but now it’s time to level up to espresso drinks like iced lattes, iced cappuccinos, iced Americanos, and the other strong brews we shell out for at the local coffee shop. Making those barista-worthy concoctions at home is what the De’Longhi Eletta Explore Fully Automatic Coffee Machine was designed to do—but for those of us who need the process automated. This $1,800 latte machine is an investment, but it makes 40 different recipes at the touch of a button.

The colorful, backlit screen features groups of drinks—cold, hot, or to-go—and menus of the drinks available and four programmable custom profiles. Brewing takes less than a minute, but the screen walks you through every step of the way, right down to the number of ice cubes that should be in the cup.

A large part of the De’Longhi Eletta Explore is the two milk canisters: one to make cold foam and one for hot foam. Each canister features a dial to adjust the fluffiness of the foam as prompted by the machine or to your preferences. Though it only takes a minute to brew a drink, the device will walk you through rinsing the milk system after each use, which takes another minute or so. However, you don’t want funk to build up.

The machine consumes significant counter space—partly due to the large 60-ounce water reservoir, but a conical burr grinder sits on top with options for 13 different coarseness. That consolidates at least two machines into one, but the two milk canisters will need space to live in the fridge.

One of the few complaints about the Eletta Explore is that it’s more plastic than expected for the price tag. Another is that the 40 drink options can be overwhelming. And do you really want both hot and cold foam? If that’s overly fussy, the De’Longhi Magnifica Evo with one foam option (and about half the price) may be your speed.

What to consider when shopping for the best iced coffee makers

Like all coffee makers, you must balance the taste you want with the time, effort, and cost of meeting that. It’s also good to consider your household’s lifestyle: Are you each making a bespoke cup or a pot at a time? Do you mind cleaning each piece by hand, or do you want to be able to toss pieces into a dishwasher?

Iced coffee vs. cold brew

The brewing process is the critical difference between iced coffee and cold brew coffee. Iced coffee is brewed with hot water and then cooled down. Fans of this brewing method say the heat releases the nuances of the beans, though, generally, it has a milder flavor and thinner mouthfeel than cold-brew beverages. Cold brewing is a slower process—usually steeping grounds at room temperature or cool water for 12 to 24 hours—that results in a sweeter, less acidic taste (and, by the way, more caffeine).

Iced coffee-specific features

Many machines have an “iced coffee” or “over ice” setting that brews a more robust cup to go over ice. This more concentrated brew compensates for the ice that melts as it brings the hot java down to a chillier temp. Too little ice or too weak a mixture (or both) ends up with a meh, watered-down, neither hot nor cold drink.

Brewing capacity

Do you want to brew one cup at a time or make a batch? Many single-serving machines will fit the needs of individuals who wish for a specific flavor or only need one cup at a time. The better versions allow different sizes, including brewing directly into your favorite travel mug. While many coffee makers are best by the pot, manufacturers increasingly create options that handle single cups or at least half pots with a solid flavor. 

Customizable brewing

Coffee shops have essentially trained us to want a custom blend: small, tall, half-caff, skinny, skim/soy/almond milk, upside down. If your tastes are more complex than adding a cream and two sugars, it’s time to look at the machines that allow tinkering with the strength of brews and other personalized settings.

Pods or beans

Most coffee makers—including those for iced coffee—are compatible with only pods, capsules, or grounds. If you’re looking for more flexibility with Nespresso capsules or K-Cups, many models offer a reusable cup option, which is Earth-friendlier than the disposable versions.

FAQs

Q: How much counter space do you have?

The kitchen counter is the Manhattan of household real estate: There’s nowhere where square footage is more in demand. Coffee enthusiasts can quickly clutter it with a machine devoted to every conceivable beverage. Any iced coffee should also be able to brew hot coffee, but some versions offer additional options, like hot water spouts for brewing tea or making ramen noodles. Decide whether you want extra flexibility or are OK with a more single-purpose machine. Consider how much space you will dedicate to getting caffeinated and whether it can replace other gadgets.

Q: Can I use regular coffee grounds for iced coffee?

Whatever you brew for hot coffee can be used for iced coffee, though generally, you will want a more potent version. Some drinkers recommend using medium to dark roast beans for iced coffee, which hold up better against being diluted with ice and milk.

Q: Can I make iced coffee with a regular coffee maker?

You can make iced coffee with a regular coffee maker by brewing a batch and then putting it in the fridge overnight. For those who aren’t planners, pouring freshly brewed coffee over a generous amount of ice can hit the spot.

Final thoughts on the best iced coffee makers

An iced coffee maker should do at least two things well: brew hot coffee and a tasty cup over ice. Whether that’s a cup at a time or a larger batch depends on your household size and preferences. Our overall pick, the Breville Precision Brewer, offers flexibility with several brewing presets, additional personalized settings, and multiple brewing styles, including iced and cold brew, in a single machine. Mr. Coffee Iced and Hot Coffee Maker and Keurig K-Elite Single-Serve K-Cup Pod Coffee Maker hit the spot for people looking for simple brewing for single servings, while the Zojirushi Fresh Brew Plus EC-YTC100XB Coffee Maker can handle brewing a large batch of iced coffee at one time. The De’Longhi Eletta Explore Fully Automatic Coffee Machine is quite an investment but will satisfy those craving iced espresso drinks at home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best iced coffee makers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Samsung S95D QD-OLED TV review: Stunning in any setting https://www.popsci.com/gear/samsung-s95d-qd-oled-tv-review/ Fri, 26 Apr 2024 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=612606
Televisions photo
Stan Horaczek

Samsung's flagship OLED TV shines because glare doesn't.

The post Samsung S95D QD-OLED TV review: Stunning in any setting appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Televisions photo
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

My living room isn’t well-suited for testing OLED TVs. There’s a pair of large windows off to the side of the viewing area, and when they’re not busy leaking, they’re letting in enough ambient light to wash out a typical OLED. This type of TV excels in contrast and color reproduction but can only pump out comparatively paltry max brightness levels. That makes even a moderately bright room a no-go. And let’s be honest, that’s what most of us have. So, instead of appealing just to people with perfectly treated home theaters, Samsung aimed to fix that issue with its new S95D QD-OLED TV. And after a few weeks spent watching content and gaming to the best of my very pathetic abilities, I can confirm it as a huge success. The S95D’s defining feature may have caused some controversy in the hardcore AV world (more on that later), but it’s easily one of the best TVs I’ve ever seen.

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Resolution: 4K
  • Refresh rate: 144Hz
  • Sizes: 55”, 65”, and 77”
  • OS: Tizen
  • HDMI ports: Four HDMI 2.1 ports
  • Wireless: Wi-Fi 5
  • Bluetooth: BT5.2
  • Processor: NQ4 AI Gen2 Processor

Pros

  • Excellent color accuracy and contrast, as you’d expect from OLED
  • Exceptional brightness thanks to Quantum Dot tech
  • Anti-glare coating works phenomenally
  • Ports and connectors live on a box connected to the display by a single wire for flexible installation
  • Built-in speakers provide clear, crisp audio that makes dialog easy to hear (credit to Samsung processing)
  • Low input lag
  • Responsive operating system

Cons

  • Anti-glare tech comes with very slight compromises in terms of pure picture quality
  • While the speakers provide excellent clarity, they’re not overly powerful

Verdict: Just about every OLED TV looks phenomenal in the dark, but the S95D’s ability to shine (literally) in a room full of ambient light makes it one of the most impressive pieces of TV technology to come around in years. 

How I tested the Samsung S95D QD-OLED TV

I have been writing about and reviewing TVs for roughly two decades for outlets including this one, Men’s Journal, Sound & Vision, AOL, and others. For this test, I placed the Samsung S95D QD-OLED TV directly in front of my typical TV to get a true real-world experience. I played regular Blu-rays, 4K Blu-rays, and games through a PlayStation 5. I also connected the TV to my Wi-Fi router and compared content through the native Samsung apps with the most recent Apple TV 4K (my preferred hardware for streaming media). 

We do some scientific testing on equipment like this, but we don’t publicly post the results because we don’t control the environment in a way to capture publishable results. I use a Datacolor Spyder X Pro device to measure brightness and color accuracy as a reference for our internal testing. Other sites provide excellent test results from labs, but that information doesn’t always reflect the real-world experience that comes from watching a TV.

Televisions photo
Stan Horaczek

The Samsung S95D’s picture quality

There’s a lot about the ultra-slim S95D that’s impressive and we’ll get into the build below, but we’re here first and foremost for the panel’s picture quality. If you’re spending the extra money for an OLED, it’s for the on-screen image. 

Brightness

Brighter isn’t always better. Even casual TV snobs know this fact. But, the S95D changes the math on that old rule. The first time I turned on our review unit, I couldn’t believe how much light it put out. I was standing in my sunny living room at two in the afternoon, and this OLED display was blasting over the ambient light without hesitation. The S95D is noticeably brighter than its predecessor or really any OLED TV I’ve ever seen. It’s brighter than the middle-of-the-road LG TV I bought on Black Friday a few years ago to use between TV reviews. The S95D is just plain bright and truly improves its overall performance. 

In addition to the increased light output, the S95D is the first TV non-Frame-series TV to get the full anti-glare treatment, which was a standout feature in our first impressions and remains one now that we’ve gotten to try the TV outside of an impromptu showroom setting. As a result, the screen has a more matte appearance than its glossy ancestors and competition—in the high-end printing world, I’d call this a pearl finish. Even with the TV off, it’s apparent just how well the surface resists reflections. Even bright objects, which would typically render as a sharp reflection on a glossy screen, wash out to a dull, nebulous blob. The turtle tank with a UV light that typically occupies a full quarter of my TV screen when it’s turned on? Pretty much gone. I’m impressed. 

Even when a light shines directly onto the surface, the anti-glare surface renders it nearly invisible. This does come at a slight cost. As some other reviewers have noted, the anti-glare makes the perceived black level seem a bit brighter than a glossy screen would. Thus, the controversy mentioned in the intro. But, the benefits will drastically outweigh that tiny complaint for the majority of the TV-watching public. The anti-glare tech seriously changes the OLED game.

Samsung OLED with a lamp shining on it to show anti-reflective coating
Stan Horaczek

Bring on the content

For the early tests, I left the TV in standard mode, which doesn’t quite max out the TV’s light output, but it’s decidedly more luminous than the more subdued movie mode or Filmmaker Mode. All the typical OLED benefits shine through immediately. I popped in a Blu-ray of Venom: Let There Be Carnage, which isn’t a great film, but it’s a meat grind of a test for just about any TV. Its extremely high contrast, fast motion, and vivid colors quickly expose a TV’s shortcomings. The S95D handled it all with aplomb. 

I like Filmmaker Mode, which is designed to depict the movie as the creators intended. But it’s typically only usable in very dark situations. I still preferred standard, or maybe movie mode for viewing content while the sun was up, but Filmmaker Mode was still totally viable. You can be a snob at any time of day.

I put on the first Timothée Chalamet Dune movie out of pure curiosity. In a dark room with standard mode turned on, the jarring dark-to-bright transitions from dingy interiors to blazing desert scenery were enough to make me wince, literally. That’s the kind of impact I like to see. 

Those transitions are also a great test for a TV like this. Going from bright to dark doesn’t leave any lingering brightness. Bright don’t bleed into dark areas next to them (a phenomenon called blooming) to ruin the overall clarity of the image. 

A little help from AI

You can’t get away from AI in the gadget world and this TV is no exception. The S95D comes toting Samsung’s latest image processing chip, which puts a heavy emphasis on AI. Multiple neural networks analyze every single image and frame to emphasize subjects, upscale the picture, and improve audio performance.

Even as a TV reviewer, I still watch streamed content more than pristine 4K Blu-rays. I imagine you’re the same way. Luckily, my review unit arrived just as the new Fallout series premiered on Amazon Prime. Like Dune, the post-apocalyptic series jumps freely between dingy underground silos and sun-blasted desert landscapes. The S95D, once again, excelled. The deep blacks retain tons of detail, though just slightly less than a high-end Mini-LED (like Samsung’s own QN900/D). But the inkiest blacks are why you go OLED. You want that contrast, and the S95D dishes it out in spades. The streamed image looked excellent. I again found myself defaulting to standard picture mode because it feels like it uses more of the panel’s dynamic range without losing anything. 

When it comes to 4K upscaling, the S95D does a great job across the board. The final result will vary depending on the bitrate and quality of the original content (don’t even try to watch Buffy the Vampire Slayer on Amazon Prime because no amount of AI can save that mess) but don’t expect extra artifacts or other upscaling nastiness to become apparent very often if at all. 

Gaming performance

Several features apply specifically to gaming performance, including the maximum 144Hz effective refresh rate. For this test, I jumped into Helldivers 2 on the PS5. While it’s not the pinnacle of graphical achievements in terms of gaming, it is a challenging title thanks to tons of fast-moving on-screen objects and shadowy environments. 

Input lag is nearly non-existent, essential if you want a good gaming TV. Response times are also miniscule, which fares well for fast on-screen action. I died—a lot—during the test session, but I looked great doing it. The TV will automatically enable game mode when you start gaming, and you’re best served to leave it be once it makes the switch. That’s how it unlocks game-specific features like the maximum refresh rate and the lowest possible input lag.

Televisions photo
Stan Horaczek

The Samsung S95D’s sound

While OLEDs often excel in terms of picture quality, their super-thin panels don’t leave much room for audio firepower. Samsung made hay with the space it had in the S95D, packing a total of eight circular speakers onto the back of the display. They won’t blow you away with power, especially on the low end, but Samsung has emphasized its strengths, which are clarity and understandability. The AI-powered chip enables Dolby Atmos compatibility and localized audio, which creates a discernible directional audio effect depending on which on-screen object is making noise. You can hear a spaceship zoom across the screen. It’s not nearly as pronounced as with a true surround sound system, but it’s noticeable and appreciated. 

Even cranked to max volume, the speakers don’t offer much in terms of crackle or distortion. The voice clarification tech really does make a difference, though, which is handy for people like me who have trouble hearing words through ambient noise. 

Overall, the sound performance is solid, but with a TV this nice, you’re doing yourself a disservice by not adding a more powerful stand-alone system to the mix. [Related: Look for our review of Samsung’s new flagship wireless soundbar system, the HW-Q990D, coming very soon.]

The Samsung S95D’s design and setup

Another impressive aspect of the S95D is that this deep feature set fits in a strikingly shallow enclosure thanks to thoughtful design decisions. As a high-end TV, Samsung didn’t skimp on the S95D’s build quality. The panel connects via a single wire to a compact interface containing all the necessary ports and connections. The “One Connect Box” is about the size of a stand-alone DVD player and can sit horizontally or wall mount vertically. I chose to use the included stand instead of putting the display on a mount, though I could have easily mounted it thanks to VESA compatibility. The bezel is skinny. The panel is flat. The external I/O box is a nice touch. The setup and build quality really didn’t give me anything to complain about. 

I can’t say quite the same thing about the remote. I love that the Samsung remote charges via the onboard solar panel, but I still find the layout annoying. The flat rocker buttons for channel and volume changes aren’t designed for my clumsy hands. The remote is also tiny and somewhat non-descript, so it’s easy to lose it in a pile of other remotes (though that may only be a problem if you’re also a reviewer with too many remote-controlled devices).

Televisions photo
Stan Horaczek

So, who should buy the Samsung S95D?

If you’ve been craving the contrast and color accuracy that comes with OLED but are worried your space is too bright, then your worries are over. The extra brightness and the very impressive anti-reflective coating have truly changed the game. With help from Samsung’s new AI-powered image processor, the S95D QD-OLED creates one of the best viewing experiences of any TV I’ve tested.

The post Samsung S95D QD-OLED TV review: Stunning in any setting appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best fans for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-fan/ Tue, 08 Jun 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=368374
The best fans of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Beat the heat during the sweaty season with these breezy picks.

The post The best fans for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best fans of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Windmill Fan on the top of a desk. Windmill Fan
SEE IT

This sleek-looking fan is smart, powerful, and nearly silent at its lowest setting.

Best window A large all-gray fan with two twin reversible airflow blades centered on a red button and numbers on it. Bionaire Window Fan w/ Twin 8.5-In. Blades
SEE IT

Takes in cool air while expelling hot air.

Best budget A portable all black color desk fan with an upper round shape and with flat shape under it. Honeywell HT-900 TurboForce Air Circulator Fan
SEE IT

This small but mighty model has an aerodynamic turbo design that allows you to feel the air from 27 feet away.

As the thermostat rises, having a fan on hand for your home or outdoor adventure needs makes sense before the stifling summer weather makes you too lazy to shop. In addition to cooling you down without running up your electricity bill, an efficient one can help keep you healthy by stimulating air circulation. Science has confirmed that we hate being hot, and a quality fan could mean the difference between a pleasant evening or a poor night’s sleep. With that in mind, we’ve compiled this handy guide to the best fans to help you chill out and find relief from the sweltering heat.

How we chose the best fans

Our fan recommendations are based on a combination of hands-on testing and research. When determining which fans to feature, we considered room size, fan size, and window type.

The best fans: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re looking for the best fan for your bedroom to keep cool at night, a battery-powered portable fan to bring on your next camping trip, or deciding between the best window or electric fan, we’ve got cool choices for cooling down.

Best overall: Windmill Fan

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 6.5 x 8 x 10.98 Inches
  • Type: Desk
  • Price: $79

Pros

  • Clean, modern look
  • Surprisingly quiet given its power
  • Useful smart features

Cons

  • No height adjustment

Windmill’s smart air conditioner impressed us mightily when we tested it last year, but the company’s new smart fan—pardon the pun—blew us away. It actually improved the aesthetics of our home office desk due in large part to Windmill’s focus on circles. The base of the fan is a circle, the face of the fan is a circle, the cutout in the middle is a circle, and around the back are two additional circular housings that hold the fan’s motors and other mechanisms. Viewed from the side, the fan looks like a layer cake suspended in mid-air. While looks aren’t everything, this is an object you’re likely to keep on top of your desk for years, and it’s helpful that Windmill took this into consideration.

The Windmill Fan has five speed settings—the first three were designed for standard desk fan use, while the fourth and fifth settings allow you to use the Windmill Fan as an air circulator. On its first setting, the Windmill Fan was inaudible, providing the equivalent of a pleasant breeze without creating a buzzing sound. This is especially important if you’d like some relief while presenting on a work call from home.

The second and third fan settings provided much more airflow while increasing the amount of ambient noise it made reasonable amount. The Windmill Fan was never too loud, but you wouldn’t want to crank it up during a work call. On its fourth and fifth settings (which Windmill calls High and Boost), a jetstream from this fan could be easily felt from about 12 feet away. This is overkill for typical desk fan use but helpful if you’d like to move a lot of air around a big room very quickly.

Windmill’s fan can be controlled in three ways: by pushing a button on its base, using the included remote, or through the company’s smartphone app on iOS or Android. We’re skeptical about making every electronic object “smart,” but found the process of connecting this fan to our Wi-Fi router simple enough. The entire setup process took about five minutes (we already had a Windmill account, which expedited it) so we could turn the fan on and adjust its speed settings from our smartphone. If you’re liable to lose the extra remote or prefer to keep the top of your desk as clean as possible, this fan’s smart-home functions are reasonable enough.

Our complaints about Windmill’s fan have nothing to do with what it does but rather what it can’t do. The fan has no height adjustment or oscillation function, so you’ll have to manually move it around (and potentially stack it on top of a book or two) to hit you at the correct angle. You can tilt the fan upward, which is helpful but not quite the same. As a first-generation gadget, though, it’s hard to find any significant fault with the Windmill Fan.

Best for large spaces: Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan

Big Ass

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27 x 55 x 59.5 inches
  • Type: Floor
  • Price: $2,599

Pros

  • Gigantic size
  • IPX5 rating
  • Comes pre-assembled

Cons

  • Too big for indoor use

Cooling a big space can be challenging, so you need a powerful fan when you set out to do it. The Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan is up for the job. This barrel fan is 48 inches wide, providing plenty of airflow from its six airfoils. Big Ass Fans says this model can move up to 15,000 cubic meters of air per minute at its highest speed. This means it’s only practical to use outdoors, but that’s perfectly fine if you live in a warmer climate year-round and have backyard space. The Sidekick comes fully assembled, and its swivel casters make it portable and lockable. It must be kept on wheels as its 275-pound weight would make it nearly impossible to move otherwise. With its IPX5 waterproof rating, the Sidekick can be exposed to water without damage. You should still keep it covered during intense rainstorms, but a small sprinkle shouldn’t cause concern. The Sidekick isn’t for everyone, but if you have intense fan needs in a huge space, there’s no better choice.

Best battery-powered: Shark FlexBreeze

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 13.77 x 13.77 x 37 inches
  • Type: Floor
  • Price: $199.99

Pros

  • Modular design
  • Magnetic remote
  • Misting feature

Cons

  • Cost

While it’s great to have a stationary fan that you can depend on, it’s also very helpful to have one you can take throughout your day. Shark’s FlexBreeze takes this concept to the next level by allowing you to detach the fan from its floor-standing base at the push of a button. Small feet at the mini-sized fan’s base fold outward, keeping it steady on top of a table. This lets you use the FlexBreeze in any situation, regardless of the size of your room or the position of your outlets. It’s perfectly reasonable to use this as a tower fan in your living room, then take it on a camping trip to provide cool comfort when you’re outdoors. This modular design is reminiscent of Shark’s vacuums, and the ability to use one fan in different contexts came in handy more than once.

Buttons that control all of the FlexBreeze’s core functions (fan speed, oscillation) can be found on top of its fan, but we found ourselves gravitating toward its included remote for one reason: it’s magnetic. A raised bump on the back of the remote fits perfectly into a slot on the back of the fan, and it’ll hold even when shaken. Including a remote is especially helpful when using a wireless fan because a big benefit is using hardware unencumbered by cables and wires.

In our tests, the FlexBreeze could blast a jet of cool air across a 12-foot room with no problem, even on its lower settings. The fan was audible at each power level, though higher ones did create enough sound to overpower other ambient noise like a clicking mechanical keyboard. This is fine if you’re using the FlexBreeze in a loud outdoor environment like a cookout, but less so if you need a quiet desk fan that can run eight hours a day without distraction. On that note, Shark says the FlexBreeze can last up to 24 hours per charge on its first power setting and oscillation turned off. We used it for about a dozen hours at various speeds and modes after fully topping it up and never ran into any issues.

One of the FlexBreeze’s optional features is a misting mode, which works by clipping an attachment onto the front of the fan and the other side onto a spigot used for a garden hose. The water flows to the attachment, where it’s lightly disbursed and blown toward you. You won’t get hit with a constant spray of hard water, but it’s the equivalent of a spritz you’d experience when using a spray bottle. Shark is explicit about only using this feature outdoors and never around areas with appliances or other electrical tools.

Shark’s FlexBreeze is not only the best battery-powered fan but also one of the most inventively designed models we’ve ever seen. It’s easy to take with you regardless of where it’s needed and can serve multiple purposes when necessary.

Best for windows: Bionaire Window Fan w/ Twin 8.5-In. Blades

Bionaire

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 4 x 24 x 12.8 inches
  • Type: Window
  • Price: $64.99

Pros

  • Adjustable frame
  • Three speed settings
  • Comes with a remote

Cons

  • Dated look

Bionaire’s Twin Window Fan is designed for those who want to stay cool without dedicating floor or desk space to a traditional fan or installing an air conditioner. Its most impressive technical feature is that it lets you control both blades individually, which means you can program it to bring in fresh air from outside, expel hot air from indoors, or do both simultaneously. Buttons on the fan’s face allow you to control its speed, mode, and airflow functions, but you can make adjustments wirelessly using the included remote. A small LCD screen in the center of the fan’s control panel shows the current temperature, and you can set the fan to turn on when your room gets too stuffy.

Bionaire designed its fan with adjustable sliders on the sides, which you can extend to accommodate windows up to 34 inches long. The minimum amount of space you’ll need to use this fan is two feet, so make your measurements ahead of time. While the Bionaire’s Twin Window Fan isn’t the best-looking gadget we’ve seen, it makes up for this in sheer utility. Don’t hesitate to pick one up if you’re trying to get cool and have a double-hung, vertical slider, or casement window.

Best desk: Vornado 660 Large Whole Room Air Circulator Fan

Vornado

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 11.75 x 13.5 x 15 inches
  • Type: Desk
  • Price: $99.99

Pros

  • Reaches up to 100 feet
  • Vortex action airflow
  • Four speed settings

Cons

  • No remote

The Vornado 660 packs the performance of a large box fan into a package small enough to fit on an office desk or side table. The company says the fan uses a circulator designed to use a specific airflow that can disperse air more efficiently than similarly-sized models. Similarly, the fan can push air as far as 100 feet at its top speed, providing ample relief from across a room. There are four speed settings to choose from, up from the traditional three, so you’ll have a little extra control over its power. We can quibble with the fact that this fan doesn’t have welcome extras like a remote, but that doesn’t have a huge impact on its performance. If you’re short on space but want a fan that can deliver ample cool airflow from the top of a desk, this is the one.

Best budget: Honeywell HT-900 TurboForce Air Circulator Fan

Honeywell

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 6.54 x 11 x 11.3 inches
  • Type: Desk
  • Price: $19.99

Pros

  • Compact size
  • Full vertical articulation
  • Price

Cons

  • Not designed for larger rooms

Honeywell’s HT-900 is an inexpensive, quiet fan for use in small to medium-sized rooms. It can’t oscillate, but you can pivot its head a full 90 degrees, which is significantly flexible. The fan is small and light enough that twisting and turning it occasionally as you move around a room won’t be a huge hassle. The HT-900 has all the essential settings you’ll need in a fan, including three speed settings, enough power to reach areas up to 27 feet away, and quiet operation. You’re not going to be able to use this fan to cool down large rooms, but it’s powerful and compact enough to provide relief in smaller bedrooms or a kitchen while cooking.

What to consider when shopping for the best fans

There are many factors to consider when deciding which fan is right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide.

Before you search for the best fan, measure the size of the room where you plan to use it. Most have several speed settings, but you’ll want to determine in advance that the one you bring home is powerful enough for your space. Another aspect to consider is how much sound it makes. Some, especially if they’re set to full-blast, can be quite loud, while others are so silent you might even forget they’re on. If you’re very sensitive to noise, you may want to consider a bladeless fan, which tends to produce much less of a din than traditional ones. But bladeless models are often more expensive, so if you want the latest technology, expect to pay a higher price. 

Not to worry, though, because there are plenty of great picks for every budget. Most are cheaper than air conditioners and use less electricity, so buying one may help you save money. Also worth considering is whether you want one with a remote control or timer. If the temperature in your bedroom dips overnight, you might prefer one that you can turn off (or that is already off) before you get out of bed. Many are battery-powered so you can take them onto the patio or out in the yard. Other models, such as window fans, will bring fresh air inside by sucking in cooler air from the outside. 

Airflow

If you’re looking for something that will not only make you feel cooler but actually lower your home’s temperature, window fans are the way to go. The key to making them work, however, is all about positioning. Inward-facing models bring in cool air from outside while outward-facing ones exhaust hot air from inside. To make the most out of your window unit, you might want to consider buying two of them and placing them on opposite sides of the room or house. Just be sure to put the inward-facing model on whichever side gets more shade to maximize the amount of cool air coming in. 

Want even more control over airflow? Other window fans come with inward- and outward-facing blades that can be set individually. Dual window fans can help cool down any room, but they are especially helpful in the kitchen since they can expel heat and odors while bringing in fresh air from outside.

Bladeless fans

Bladeless fans (also known as air multipliers) work by utilizing entrainment, meaning the air surrounding the edges of this electric option will begin to flow in the direction of the breeze. Finally, because the ring is thinner at the front than at the back, a phenomenon known as the Coandă effect occurs, creating low pressure in the inner part and causing additional air to be sucked in from behind it. Considering the technological wizardry behind their sleek design, it’s no surprise that air multipliers are significantly more expensive than their traditional counterparts. But if money is not your main concern, bladeless fans can’t be beaten when it comes to functionality and aesthetics. 

Battery power

If you’ve ever found yourself struggling to fall asleep in a stuffy tent, you may want to consider buying a battery-operated fan before going on your next camping trip. Even if you’re not an outdoorsy, adventurous person, this type can still make a great addition to your next picnic or keep mosquitoes away while sitting on the porch. The best thing about battery-powered models is that they are portable, but there are advantages and disadvantages depending on the situation. 

The most important things to consider before you buy are the size and weight, plus how long the batteries will last. You probably won’t want to lug around a heavier fan if you’re going on a long hike, but if you just plan on using it on your patio or you’re taking it with you in an RV, you might appreciate the extra power that a bigger design provides. You’ll also want to consider whether the model runs on rechargeable or disposable batteries. Rechargeables are better for the environment, but if you don’t have a way to charge them, they won’t do you much good. Some battery-powered models also come with neat features such as a radio or lights, but using these add-ons will run the battery down faster. Need personal refreshment that takes up minimal space? Consider a neck fan.

Price

If you want to stay cool this summer without putting too much strain on your wallet, an inexpensive device can be a lifesaver. Mass-produced electric models have existed for over a century, and today, affordable options abound. Does anyone need an expensive bladeless fan? Not necessarily, but staying cool and circulating the air around you can make all the difference in your health. Although cheaper ones tend to lack bells and whistles like timers and remotes, if you can live without those extra features, there are plenty of models that you can pick up for a budget-friendly price point of less than $20.

FAQs

Q: Are bladeless fans better?

Bladeless fans are also called air multipliers because they’re specially designed to blow out more air than regular ones. But since they also come at such a steep price, whether or not they’re “better” for you will depend on your budget. Many on the market will keep you perfectly cool at a much lower price point. 

Q: What should I look for when buying a fan?

When buying a fan, make sure it’s powerful enough to keep your space cool. The size of your room or home may dictate the best type of fan to choose. Some models are also noisier than others, so look for a quiet fan for your bedroom that won’t keep you up at night.

Q: Which fan is best for summer?

The best for summer depends on the space you plan to use it in and how hot it gets outside vs. inside. For example, if it’s cooler outside than inside, the best window model will help bring that cool air inside while exhausting hot air outside. 

Final thoughts on the best fans

The best fan for you is the one that keeps you comfortable. For most people, this will come down to how powerful the model is and whether or not it is a quiet fan. Beyond that, there are plenty of extra features that you may want (such as timers, remotes, and thermostats). But those bells and whistles may not be necessary if you’re just looking for a blast of cool air. Ultimately, the most important thing to remember when shopping is to buy it before the temperature goes up and while a variety of popular models are still in stock.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fans for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best keypad door locks for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-keypad-door-locks/ Thu, 30 Sep 2021 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=399495
The best keypad door locks of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Stop fumbling with keys and upgrade your home with a keypad door lock.

The post The best keypad door locks for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best keypad door locks of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Electronic Schlage Encode Century WiFi Latitude Lever on a plain white background. Schlage Encode Century Wi-Fi Latitude Lever
SEE IT

Lots of advanced features and a sleek look make this a winner.

Best with Wi-Fi Yale Assure Lock 2 on a plain white background. Yale Assure Lock 2 Touch with Wi-Fi
SEE IT

Remotely control the most important door in your home.

Best Electronic Deadbolt Kwikset Powerbolt 250 on a plain white background. Kwikset Powerbolt 250
SEE IT

Never forget to lock your door again.

Keypad door locks, once popular in commercial settings, have quickly gained traction with homeowners in recent years. The devices add convenience by eliminating the need to fumble with keys to get inside and allowing homeowners to grant access to friends and family by programming temporary passcodes. The best locks can also make your home more secure. Some, for example, automatically lock the door when you or a family member forgets to flip the bolt. For even greater control, smart keypad door locks allow you to remotely lock and unlock the door, program passcodes, and even track who’s coming and going. With so many options available, it can be difficult to find the right one. This guide will review the factors you should consider when shopping for the best keypad door locks. 

How we chose the best keypad door locks 

We assessed dozens of keypad door lock options, considering various factors. We considered installation to determine how easily the average DIYer could set up the lock. We also evaluated how easy it was to program (and delete) codes and how many different codes the lock supported. 

A good keypad door lock shouldn’t require an IT pro to get it online and running, so we looked at how compatible the device was with smart devices, smart home systems, and home automation platforms—as well as ease of setup. Your lock should integrated as easily into your smart security system as wired or indoor cameras. Since all keypad door locks use a battery, we considered battery life as well; these devices are supposed to add convenience, not create more work by constantly requiring battery changes

The best keypad door locks: Reviews & Recommendations

Why a keypad door lock? We asked Erik Glassen, senior manager of brand marketing at Spectrum Brands, just that.

“The primary benefit of a keypad lock is not needing to carry around keys, which can be lost or stolen. It makes it convenient whether you are out for a jog or you have kids who no longer need to keep track of house keys,” Glassen says. “You can also give access to housekeepers or temporary guests without having to give out a key, which may or not get returned.” One of our picks should help you make the switch to the keyless lifestyle.

Best overall: Schlage Encode Century Wi-Fi Latitude Lever

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Schlage’s smart keypad door lock was easy to install, connected to our home network, and had multiple forms of entry.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi connectivity: Yes
  • Dimensions: 3 x 5.88 inches
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries

Pros

  • Simple installation
  • Out-of-the-box Wi-Fi compatibility
  • Doesn’t require a deadbolt to install

Cons

  • Not a deadbolt replacement.

Most keypad door locks are designed to replace a deadbolt, but the technology in Schlage’s Latitude Lever is built into its handle. This allows you to install it on doors inside your home or on an outside-facing door with a lever door handle. Installing this smart door lock took about a half-hour (and a screwdriver), thanks to the included instructions. This includes the time it took to remove our existing door handle. While this would qualify as a home DIY project, we can recommend it to folks who consider themselves less handy, as you won’t have to cut any new holes or deal with any significant wiring during your installation.

Once installed, we were prompted to download the Schlage Home app (available on iOS and Android) to set up its wireless functions. It took another 15 minutes or so to pair the lock with our smartphone, connect it to our home’s Wi-Fi router, and download a new firmware update. We were pleased that Schlage took the time to design an app that’s both functional and easy to understand. From its main screen, you’re able to see the current status of the Latitude Lever, which you can change by tapping on the giant picture of a lock, and its battery life. Buttons at the bottom of the screen take you to sections of the app where you can monitor when it was last locked and unlocked and by whom.

Schlage allows you to create up to 100 entry codes—which you can delete at any time—and asks whether you’d like to receive a notification when each code was used. This can be helpful as you’re probably not interested in getting pinged each time someone you’re living with comes inside. You can still review who’s used the lock at any time by hitting the “History” button on the Schlage Home main screen. If you or someone you live with are uninterested in smart features or a keypad, you can always give them the physical key Schlage includes with the Latitude Lever. That said, the Latitude Lever is best used as a keyless entry door lock and can even be managed using Amazon’s Alexa or Google Assistant.

Overall, we were pleased with how easy it was to set up and manage Schlage’s Latitude lever and just as happy with how well it worked. We could reliably lock and unlock this keypad door lock from inside and out of our home and never had an issue with a network disturbance or other anomaly. It gave us peace of mind to know exactly when the door was locked and unlocked and by whom. This information is handy to have whether the Latitude Lever is installed on the interior or exterior of your home. If you want this same functionality in a smart deadbolt, Schlage has you covered with the Encode Smart Deadbolt.

Best Wi-Fi: Yale Assure Lock 2 Touch with Wi-Fi

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Yale’s Assure Lock 2 was easy to install, maintained a rock-solid connection to our Wi-Fi network, and looked unassuming from the outside.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi Connectivity: Yes
  • Dimensions: 2.5 x 3.75 inches
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Touch-sensitive buttons
  • Fingerprint reader

Cons

  • App has a learning curve

If remote monitoring is a must-have keypad door lock feature, your best bet is Yale’s Assure Lock 2 Touch with Wi-Fi. The keypad door lock replaces an existing deadbolt in your home and allows you to lock or unlock it using the Yale Access app (on iOS or Android), a keypad code, fingerprint, Amazon’s Alexa, Google Assistant, or key. It only took about a half-hour to disassemble our previous deadbolt and install the Assure Lock 2.

Yale’s directions were clear, and the entire installation only required a screwdriver. It’s important to note that you’ll have to pop in a standalone Wi-Fi module inside the keypad door lock (it’s included and fits snugly into a slot) to enable all its wireless functionality. Once it was set up, we headed over to the Yale Access app to configure the lock. Connecting smart home accessories to a home network can sometimes be a pain, but the Assure Lock 2 connected to our Wi-Fi network the first time. After downloading and installing a firmware update, we could finally fully configure the keypad door lock.

The Yale Access app’s home screen shows the lock’s current status (you can lock and unlock it by tapping on the circle in the middle of the screen), as well as its current Wi-Fi status. You can access other parts of the app by tapping on glyphs at the bottom of the screen, but they don’t have any text above them, so it’ll take a couple of days to be able to successfully get to the settings you want without a second thought. That said, you can access your lock’s activity (a history of when it was locked and unlocked), manage your guest list, and access a more robust settings menu in just a tap. We were pleased with how granular you can get when inviting or managing the Assure Lock 2’s guest list. You can adjust their access level by assigning them an entry code, fingerprint, or full app access. If someone you know doesn’t want to opt into the smart home lifestyle, a physical key is bundled with the Assure Lock 2.

Trusting something as important as access to your home with a gadget can seem intimidating, but we’ve had no issues with the Assure Lock 2 in the weeks since it was installed. We could always access, lock, and unlock it using our phone, key, fingerprint, or code. Its connection to our network was absolute and never cut out for any reason. Be sure to immediately check the network status of your Assure Lock 2 upon installation if your Wi-Fi router is located far away from the door (you may need to consider a mesh network with the latest Wi-Fi protocols). If you need a keypad door lock that can be controlled from anywhere, Yale’s Assure Lock 2 is an excellent choice.

Best electronic deadbolt: Kwikset Powerbolt 250

Kwikset

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kwikset’s keypad door lock can’t be controlled remotely, but it’s still an excellent choice for those not sold on a smart home.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi Connectivity: No
  • Dimensions: 2.69 x 4.59 inches
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries

Pros

  • Auto-locking mechanism
  • Backlit keys
  • Keypad can be disabled

Cons

  • No smart features

If you’re interested in living the keyless entry door lock lifestyle but don’t want to worry about smart features, Kwikset’s Powerbolt 250 is the one to get. The electric deadbolt only requires a screwdriver to install, and it 10-button keypad allows you to create customizable codes that crooks can’t crack, all without the use of a smartphone app. Kwikset says you can make up to 25 permanent user codes and five single-use codes with this model.

You can add codes by pushing a “program” button located inside the keyless door lock’s battery compartment. Once pressed, you must press the “1” button on the door lock keypad, followed by the “Kwikset” button, followed by the four- to eight-digit passcode, followed by the “Kwikset” button. Once you’ve completed that sequence, the code has been permanently saved. It may seem tedious, but adding a code should only take you about a minute.

The Powerbolt 250 may not be smart in the modern sense, but it has some useful design features beyond the ability to program two dozen codes. It can be set to automatically lock after a set period of time (up to 10 minutes), has backlit keys that illuminate when you press keys on its keypad, and has a “Vacation Mode” that disables the keypad entirely for a set period of time. When in vacation mode, you’ll only be able to unlock the Powerbolt 250 with the included key.

It’s very useful to have all of these smart features available in an electric deadbolt that doesn’t require an app to set up and manage. You won’t get advanced features like remote monitoring, but Kwikset’s Powerbolt 250 is still an excellent choice.

Best without a keypad: Level Bolt

Level

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Level’s Bolt is the smart upgrade to your existing home security system that you’ve been waiting for.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi connectivity: Yes
  • Dimensions: 3.31 x 1 inches
  • Battery: CR2 battery

Pros

  • Supports every major smart platform
  • No keypad to worry about
  • Works with your existing keys

Cons

  • Price

If you’d like to install a smart lock without a keypad, you’ll want to use the Level Bolt. The Bolt replaces your existing deadbolt and allows you to unlock your door using your existing keys, the Level Home app on iOS and Android, Amazon’s Alexa, or Google Assistant. Level says you’ll be able to install the Bolt with just a screwdriver and that it was designed to fit in standard door frames. The Bolt comes with two components: A deadbolt, which will replace the one on your door, and a bridge (wireless receiver) that needs to be plugged into an outlet. The bridge will connect your Level Bolt to your home’s Wi-Fi network, allowing you to lock and unlock it remotely.

Once it’s configured, you can use the Level Home app to see when the Bolt was locked and unlocked and create new virtual keys for different people. A big benefit of the Level Bolt is its simplicity. You’re only replacing one part of your door’s locking mechanism, which is why you’ll still be able to use the same keys. If you’re waffling on the idea of getting a smart lock without a keypad, Level offers a Smart Keypad accessory, so you’ll have the ability to add one to your system later on. The Level Bolt is among the most expensive keypad door locks we’re recommending, but it’s a great option if you’d like to expand your smart home without inconveniencing the people you live with.

Best budget: Wyze Auto-Lock Bolt

Wyze

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Wyze’s durable auto-locking smart keypad lock is impossible to beat for its price.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi Connectivity: No
  • Dimensions: 6.8 x 3 inches
  • Battery: 4 AA

Pros

  • Wireless connectivity over Bluetooth
  • IPX5 water resistant
  • Price

 Cons

  • No Wi-Fi

If you’re interested in a keyless entry door lock with three means of entry, water resistance, and a $70 price tag, it’s impossible to beat Wyze’s Auto-Lock Bolt. The keyless door lock allows you to enter your home using an iOS and Android app, a pre-programmed code, or your fingerprint. Wyze says replacing your existing deadbolt should only take about 20 minutes and a screwdriver. Once you’ve installed the Auto-Lock Bolt and Wyze’s app, you can pair the smart device to your smartphone using Bluetooth. The Auto-Lock Bolt does not support Wi-Fi, so you won’t be able to monitor or control it remotely. You can see when your lock was unlocked (and by whom) when you’re home or return to your place.

You can use Wyze’s app to save up to 16 codes and 50 fingerprints. Wyze says the Auto-Lock Bolt can register a fingerprint in under half a second. You can set certain codes and fingerprints to only register on a certain schedule, which is helpful if you’ve got guests coming for a weekend, or have a babysitter, tutor, or tradesperson who needs limited access to your home. You can also lock or unlock your door using Amazon’s Alexa. If Wi-Fi functionality isn’t important in choosing your keypad door lock, the Wyze Auto-Lock Bolt is the best value in its category. If remote unlocking is a must-have feature, you can step up to the Wyze Lock, which adds this functionality (and more), but costs over twice as much.

What to consider before buying the best keypad door locks

The digital door lock industry is large and is only expected to get bigger over the years. That means there are a lot of options on the market—with all those options, you’ll need to know what to look out for.

“The features consumers typically look for are multiple user codes (for homeowners and guests), one-touch locking, vacation mode (keypad can be disabled when you are away), [and] backlit keypads (for nighttime or dark locations),” says Erik Glassen, senior manager of brand marketing at Spectrum Brands. “Other features are security grade [BHMA [grades] 1, 2, or 3], easy installation, and a backup keyway in case batteries are low,” says Glassen at Spectrum Brands.

Here are other helpful features you should look for in your search:

Connectivity

More and more keypad door locks have smart capability, meaning they can connect to Wi-Fi or a smart-home hub. Smart keypads give you greater control over the lock, allowing you to lock and unlock the locks remotely, add and remove user codes, access user logs, and even set when codes are and aren’t active.

Battery life

Most but not all keypad door locks run off of batteries. Battery life depends on the keypad lock as well as how often it is used. When shopping for a keypad door lock, consider where it will be used and how often, then check the model’s estimated battery life to determine if it’s right for the job. Many electronic keyless locks will run for between 3 and 5 years on one set of batteries, while others may last less than a year. While features such as auto-locking are nice to have, they do put more of a strain on the batteries. 

Extra security features

While some keypads offer a basic setup that allows you to open a lock with a code, others offer features to enhance protection. This includes automatic locking, which flips the lock after about 30 seconds to ensure that you or a family member doesn’t accidentally leave a door unlocked. Some door locks will also disable the keypad after a set number of failed attempts or even set off an alarm to scare away would-be intruders. 

Keypad vs. touchscreen lock

Nowadays, everything operates via a touch screen. But, per Glassen, you might be better off sticking with a keypad lock.

“The benefits of a keypad lock versus a touchscreen lock are that [keypad locks] are typically less expensive,” Glassen says. “They are generally more durable and perform better in extreme weather (cold or direct sunlight). They don’t show fingerprints or smudges and can be operated with a glove/mitten on the hand. With a touchscreen, skin contact is typically needed.”

Additionally, if working with a Wi-Fi-operated lock, make sure there’s a power backup available or an option to use your keys in case of emergency. You don’t want to be left outside in a storm because the power is out, and it took the Wi-Fi with it.

FAQs

Q: How much does a keypad lock cost?

The cost of a keypad lock can vary significantly. Basic battery-powered keypad deadbolt locks run around $50, while high-end smart locks may cost as much as $300. This price difference is because smart deadbolts have built-in wireless connectivity. Mid-tier models include keypad door locks with handles, which run for about $100. 

Q: Do keypad locks have batteries?

Most but not all keypad locks use batteries. Keypad locks that automatically turn the bolt when the correct code is entered and smart keypad locks both require batteries. Manual keypad locks that require you to manually turn the bolt after entering the correct code require no power source, but we’re not recommending any of those. 

Q: Are keypad door locks safe?

Keypad locks are no more or less safe than a standard lock. Since keypad locks have backup keys as a failsafe, both a keypad lock and standard lock can be picked. If you choose a model that connects to your home Wi-Fi, be sure your network is private and secure. 

Q: What are the disadvantages of keypad door locks?

Traditionally, the main disadvantage of using a keypad door lock was that you’d need to memorize a code to enter your home. This has been mitigated in the era of smart locks because they give you the option to lock and unlock your door using an app on your phone. Many of our recommendations also feature a fingerprint reader, and some even let you use a key.

Q: Do doors with keypads automatically lock?

Yes. Keypad door locks can be programmed to lock themselves after a set period of time automatically.

Q: Are keypad door locks hard to install?

No. Our hands-on tests found that a keypad door lock can be installed in roughly half an hour with a single tool and little DIY experience.

Q: How long do keypad door locks last?

You should expect to get about a decade or so of use out of a smart keypad door lock, at which point it may not be supported by the software developed by the hardware manufacturer. If you use a less technically advanced model that can be programmed on its own, you should never have to replace your keypad door lock.

Final thoughts on the best keypad door locks

If you’re looking to upgrade the locks on your front door, it’s tough to beat the quality and functionality the Schlage Camelot Keypad Deadbolt offers. It gives you added control with the ability to program numerous passcodes while also including a useful Flex Lock feature that helps ensure your door is locked when it should be. If your budget allows you to make the leap to a smart keypad door lock, Schlage’s Encode Deadbolt Smart Lock is easy to set up and is supported by a robust app that gives you refined control over access to your home.  

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best keypad door locks for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best kitchen scales for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-kitchen-scale/ Sat, 24 Jul 2021 11:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=382338
The best kitchen scales on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

As accurate as they are stylish, the best kitchen scales help ensure there are no more recipe mishaps for bakers and baristas.

The post The best kitchen scales for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best kitchen scales on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall OXO Good Grips 11-Pound Stainless Steel Food Scale with Pull-Out Display on a plain white background. OXO Good Grips 11-Pound Stainless Steel Food Scale
SEE IT

If precision and accuracy are essential to creating the perfect cake or cookie, this fine-tuned kitchen scale will help you measure all your ingredients to the exact ounce.

Best splurge Penn Scale PS-50 on a plain white background. Penn Scale PS-50
SEE IT

Whether you’re meal prepping for two or cooking dinner for the whole family, this high-capacity pick can hold up to 50 pounds.

Best budget The Etekcity Food Kitchen Scale is the best kitchen scale for occasional bakers. Etekcity Food Kitchen Scale
SEE IT

Precise cooking doesn’t need to come at a high cost. This budget option can measure your ingredients by the ounce, and has multi-unit conversion for convenient cooking.

A kitchen scale will elevate a regular kitchen to a cozy cafe or full-on bakery. Cooking is an art, but baking is a science. You can add a pinch of this and a fistful of that when cooking, but accurate measuring is necessary for baking cakes, bread, pastries, and pies. And tried-and-true volume measurements (gallons, cups, teaspoons, etc.) are anything but true. If you measure wrong or have some remnants stuck to the sides and bottom of your measuring device, your baked goods may turn out as baked awfuls.

Inaccuracy leads to frustration, but an electronic kitchen scale eliminates mishaps by showing accurate readings in every unit of food measurement needed. Plus, it makes it incredibly easy to use one bowl for mixing an entire recipe as you zero out the scale for each new addition to the party. Cooking scales have come a long way since the days of shaky seesaw balancing contraptions. Today’s best baking scales are digital wonders that offer rechargeable batteries, unique features, speedy measuring, and fun designs.

What to consider when shopping for the best kitchen scale

You could add the first kitchen scale you see into your Amazon cart, but before you assume all kitchen scales are the same, explore the newest features and styles on the market. From functions to display type, specific options may work best for your kitchen and cooking style. Or, for that matter, whether you’re investing in a coffee grinder to make the best pour-over. We conducted research and hands-on testing to determine the best models to recommend.

How we chose the best kitchen scales: Reviews & Recommendations

The two key issues of any great kitchen scale are functionality and style. The scale must be easy to read and understand. It should also look great, like a sleek, shiny platform that works with your kitchen decor. Take a close look at the specs and find the food weight scale you can easily understand and operate, which you’ll be proud to show off in your kitchen. 

Best overall: OXO Good Grips 11-Pound Stainless Steel Food Scale

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 9.5 x 7.13 x 1.25 inches
  • Maximum weight capacity: 11 pounds
  • Measurement units: Ounces, grams, pounds
  • Power source: AAA Batteries

Pros

  • Pull out screen
  • Accurate measurements
  • Backlit display

Cons

  • Price

If you’re ready to leave volumetric baking measurements aside for weight, OXO Good Grips’ 11-Pound Stainless Steel Food Scale is the one to get. It follows the company’s track record of elevating kitchen tools, from storage containers to grilling tools, to make them more accessible to home cooks. The big innovation with its kitchen scale is a magnetically attached display that can be moved a few inches forward. This lets you see the screen when weighing ingredients in a big bowl. In our experience, this has become an indispensable feature, making one-bowl baking recipes easier to manage.

We’ve used this scale to measure ingredients from countless recipes—especially when testing smart ovens or even microwaves—and it’s never let us down. The scale was accurate when measuring wet or dry ingredients, and we’ve even used it when weighing batters or doughs, which are a combination of both. You’ll have to pay a relatively steep price for this scale, but it’s worth it to have your recipes turn out every single time.

Best splurge: Penn Scale PS-50

Penn Scale

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 12.7 x 10.5 x 3.4 inches
  • Maximum weight capacity: 50 pounds
  • Measurement units: Pounds, ounces, kilograms
  • Power source: AA batteries, AC adapter

Pros

  • Ultra-high weight capacity
  • Multiple power sources
  • HD display

Cons

  • Large

Penn Scale’s PS-50 is the only kitchen scale we’re recommending that cracks three figures, and it’s best used by bakers who make food as a side hustle rather than the typical home cook. It can measure ingredients up to 50 pounds, which is helpful if you’re making a quintuple batch of chocolate chip cookies or cakes. Dessert meal preppers who want to knock out a quarter’s worth of baking at one time—or have cookie dough at the ready in case of emergencies—will benefit from the elevated weight capacity.

With its great weight city comes a great need for energy, which is why Penn Scale equipped the PS-50 with two power sources. You can use this kitchen scale portably by popping in a whopping six AA batteries (we prefer the best rechargeable batteries) or plug it into an outlet with the included A/C adapter. The latter limits where you can use the scale but is a little more eco-friendly. Another nice feature is this kitchen scale’s HD backlit screen, which displays its measurements clearly. If you’re upgrading from another kitchen scale because it can’t handle the volume of food you’ve cooking at one time, this is the one to get.

Best eco-friendly: Etekcity Rechargeable Food Kitchen Scale

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 9.1 x 6.7 x 1.1 inches
  • Maximum weight capacity: 22 pounds
  • Measurement units: Grams, ounces, pounds
  • Power source: Rechargeable battery

Pros

  • Runs on a rechargable battery
  • High weight capacity
  • Responsive buttons

Cons

  • Requires a USB-A to USB-C cable
  • Flat design makes it difficult to use with big bowls

If you’re trying to eliminate the number of batteries you have to keep around, Etekcity’s Rechargeable Food Kitchen Scale is a solid, eco-friendly solution. The scale can be plugged into any battery pack or power adapter with a USB-A port using the included cable to be topped up. Frustratingly, using a USB-C to USB-C cable will not work. In our experience, this kitchen scale was accurate enough that all of our recipes turned out regardless of the ingredients we were using. Its higher weight capacity allowed us to make a double batch of some recipes without running into any issues.

This kitchen scale has a relatively low profile, which is helpful when you need to get it into a drawer but a little frustrating if you’re trying to read its display when measuring ingredients in a large bowl. You’ll get the most accurate weight measurements when your bowl is centered on the scale, so you’ll need to be aware of its circumference. This typically wasn’t a big issue, but it’s something to be aware of if you like using wide bowls to measure ingredients when baking. With that caveat aside, Etekcity’s Rechargeable Food Kitchen Scale would be a great addition to any kitchen.

Best design: Escali Primo P115C Precision Kitchen Food Scale for Baking and Cooking

Escali

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 8.5 x 6 x 1.5 inches
  • Maximum weight capacity: 11 pounds
  • Measurement units: Grams, ounces
  • Power source: AAA batteries

Pros

  • Elevated scale design
  • Low battery indicator
  • Available in several colors

Cons

  • Tall size may make it difficult to fit in a drawer

The Escali scale has all the features you want in a kitchen scale: Accurate readings in 1-gram increments, long-lasting battery life, and a clear display. The scale runs on AAA batteries and will even flash an alert on its screen when they’re running low on power. What sets this popular baking scale apart from the others is the variety of color options. Tarragon Green, Pumpkin Orange, Royal Blue, Warm Red—you definitely can find an Escali kitchen scale to match your cooking space. You can also stick with the classic chrome, white, or black if you can’t decide on a funky hue. No matter what color you pick, the Escali kitchen scale is a precise tool that’s easy on the eyes.

Best budget: Etekcity Digital Food Kitchen Scale

Etekcity

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 7.3 x 5.7 x 0.6 inches
  • Maximum weight capacity: 22 pounds
  • Measurement units: Ounces, pounds, grams
  • Power source: AAA batteries

Pros

  • Sleek look
  • Slim size
  • Price

Cons

  • Harder to read the display when bowls are on it

This tiny, budget-friendly cooking scale is a good little kitchen tool to help amateur bakers and those looking for portion control. Accuracy and durability may slip slightly below the $15 mark. That said, it can still be useful for those needing a quick, cheap scale. It’s good for cooking but also useful DIY crafts with the kids. The LCD display is clear, and the buttons are easy to use.

The 7.3-inch by 5.7-inch scale is small enough to slip into any kitchen drawer, and the battery power lasts long if you use it only once or twice a week. However, this kitchen scale’s slim design has the same downside as the company’s rechargeable model: It will be hard to read its display when measuring ingredients in wide bowls. If you don’t want to invest in top-of-the-line kitchen equipment, this affordable scale is a good addition to your culinary toolbox. 

What to consider when shopping for the best kitchen scales

Ready to have your mind blown? One cup of flour is not the same as another equally sized cup of flour; how you scoop and pack the flour into the measuring cup results in varying weights. And it gets even more confusing when switching between wet and dry ingredients. Volume measurements, like cups, tell you how much space an ingredient is taking up. It doesn’t tell you the weight. That imprecise discrepancy can cause big problems for baking, where accuracy makes or breaks the finished product. True bakers know the best way to measure ingredients is via weight, sometimes called mass measurement. One hundred grams of flour will always be 100 grams, whether you measure it in a cup, a bowl, a Frisbee, or a top hat. 

Kitchen scales let you pinpoint precise weights easily, down to the gram or half-gram. You don’t need to worry about any residue left on the inside of measuring cups or spoons. You don’t need to wonder if an ingredient should be packed down or loose and fluffy. When mixing wet ingredients, you don’t need to fret over the small, convex peak caused by the liquid’s surface tension. (Yes, that matters and makes a difference.) And functions like translating ounces to grams mean you won’t need to run to the internet for conversion charts. 

In addition, for those on strict diets who closely monitor what they eat, a food weight scale simplifies the chore of portion control. Basically, if you don’t have a kitchen scale, you’re making kitchen duty that much more difficult.

Power source

Even the most luxurious kitchens can have a wall outlet deficiency. Between plugging in blenders, food processors, magic pots, rice cookers, phone chargers, and the George Foreman grill, there’s no room in the outlet for new kitchen appliances. And adding bulky power strips to the kitchen makes the room look more like a workshop than a food-safe space. On top of that, it can be a pain dealing with cords for a kitchen accessory you may only use for a few seconds at a time. Fortunately, there are high-quality battery-operated kitchen scales for those who don’t have an outlet to spare.  Choosing a cordless kitchen scale means you can use it on any flat surface, moving it near mixing bowls and frying pans for easy reach. 

You can find kitchen scales that use standard AA or AAA batteries. They’re great for those who don’t plan to use the scale often and don’t mind buying batteries. Most have a surprisingly long battery life, powering through more than a few months on the same batteries.

Size

Professional bakers recommend using a kitchen scale capable of weighing at least 11 pounds. That sounds like a lot of weight, but it also accounts for the weight of your mixing bowl. Cooking accessories such as bowls can get surprisingly hefty. 

You can go bigger and buy a kitchen scale capable of weighing items heavier than 20 pounds, but how often are you baking a bowling ball? And you can go much, much smaller with some portable kitchen scales designed to measure only between 1 and 100 grams. But those have limited uses, mostly for coffee aficionados who demand a perfect brew. If measuring anything less than 5 grams, you’ll need a jeweler’s scale, not a kitchen scale.

Display

Any great kitchen scale display must be easy to read. The digital font should be big enough to decipher, and the numbers should be simple to understand. Some kitchen scales display weight in fractions, some use decimals, and some do both. 

Perhaps even more importantly, make sure you understand what the numbers mean. You may find kitchen scales that measure fluid ounces, and, as any middle-school science teacher will yell at you, “fluid ounces” are not the same as ounces. Fluid ounces are a measurement of volume. Ounces are a measurement of weight. This discrepancy can be deceiving and confusing. Make sure you understand what the scale is actually measuring. For weight, the numbers to look for are grams, pounds, and ounces. 

What’s more, backlit displays can be helpful, but baking is usually done in a brightly lit kitchen where even non-illuminated displays can be read quickly and easily. One overlooked display factor: It should be visible even if a big mixing bowl is sitting on the platform. If the screen is blocked, look for a “hold” button that will keep the weight on-screen even when you remove the bowl.

Taring

Most scales offer a tare function. This simply means that with the touch of a button, the display will zero out the weight of whatever’s on the scale. For instance, start by putting a mixing bowl on the scale, then hit tare to zero out the bowl’s weight. Add your first ingredient, and hit tare again. Add your second ingredient, and so on. 

Don’t overlook the tare function. This might be the single most important button on any kitchen scale. By taring the weight, you can use one bowl for all of your ingredients. You won’t need to clean countless measuring cups and multiple mixing bowls. Tare it up for quick, efficient baking!

FAQs

Q: How do I know if my kitchen scale is accurate?

To determine whether your kitchen scale is accurate, perform a few simple tests. You can buy special 5-gram and 10-gram weights made for scale calibration. These are relatively inexpensive, but you probably don’t need the hassle. Instead, plop a stick of butter on the scale. The scale should read 0.25 pounds or 4 ounces. If it doesn’t, read the instructional manual to learn how to calibrate your scale. 

Simply put a nickel on the scale for the lactose intolerant or butter haters. Each U.S. nickel weighs 5 grams, so the scale should display 5 grams. Use clean coins that haven’t been worn down too much. This should tell you if the scale is ready to go.

Q: Can you store a digital kitchen scale on its side?

No, you shouldn’t store a digital kitchen scale on its side. Any scale sensitive enough to measure grams should be stored flat. The inner workings of the digital scale are made of delicate materials that may warp and deform if not stored correctly. The result is inaccurate results. If you do store the scale upright, put it through a few calibration tests (see above) before using it for serious baking. 

Q: Are cheap scales accurate?

Cheap scales are very accurate—if used correctly. Inexpensive kitchen scales are great for measuring food portions. Most will have a tare button and a good display for mixing recipes. The lower price usually means less functions. Cheaper scales may not be able to measure in 0.5-gram increments, which can be important for some recipes. They may also have slower read times, adding a few half seconds to the baking process. That probably won’t matter much to the average person, but if you plan to use the scale often, slow calculations can be very frustrating. And if you measure weight less than 5 grams, you don’t need a kitchen scale, you’ll need a more precise jeweler’s scale.

Final thoughts on the best kitchen scales

No matter what type of food you’re preparing, a quality baking scale makes the recipe manageable. Find an electronic scale that fits your kitchen decor, from a small, green scale highlighting your style to a more substantial stainless-steel platform telling the world you know what you’re doing. Understand the difference between volume measurements (cups, fluid ounces, and teaspoons) and weight/mass measurements (pounds, ounces, and grams). It will become second nature once you wrap your head around that for a few meal prep sessions. With the right kitchen scale, you’ll be cooking up a storm and baking up a delicate French pastry like a pro.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best kitchen scales for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The latest battery-powered Ring doorbell is at its lowest price ever https://www.popsci.com/gear/ring-battery-doorbell-deal-amazon/ Thu, 25 Apr 2024 14:08:05 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=612475
A tile set of Ring Battery Doorbell Deal Amazon.
Brandt Ranj

If you've put off setting up a home security system, take the first step by snagging this Ring doorbell at Amazon.

The post The latest battery-powered Ring doorbell is at its lowest price ever appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A tile set of Ring Battery Doorbell Deal Amazon.
Brandt Ranj

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Nobody likes to think about why they’re beefing up their home security system, but it’s important to take some precautions against package theft (or worse) now that the technology is available and accessible. If “set up a home security system” has been on your to-do list for months, we highly recommend taking advantage of Amazon’s deal on the Ring Battery Doorbell Plus, which is on sale for a limited time.

Ring Battery Doorbell Plus $119.99 (Was $149.99)

Ring

SEE IT

The 1536P camera has a motion sensor, and will send your phone alerts each time someone walks by or pushes its ringer button. A microphone and speaker system will allow you to speak with the person at your door in real time, which is helpful if whether you’d like to tell a friend you’re not home, or a stranger they’re being watched. The best part is that this model of Ring Doorbell is battery-powered, which means it requires little time and very few tools to set up. The rechargeable battery’s lifespan will depend on how often its motion sensor is triggered, but you can pick up a second one for $35 if you’d like to have a spare on hand to swap out immediately. Whether you rent or own, the Ring Battery Doorbell Plus is a wise investment, especially at its current price.

More Ring home security deals

The post The latest battery-powered Ring doorbell is at its lowest price ever appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/craftsman-mini-chainsaw-garden-lawn-power-tool-amazon-deal/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611997
Red mini Craftsman chainsaws in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Miniature versions of large things are in right now. This tiny chainsaw from Craftsman is just as practical as it is petite.

The post Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Red mini Craftsman chainsaws in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

I am currently obsessed with all things mini right now. Look at this video of someone mopping their very tiny kitchen with a tiny heavy-duty mop. And here’s a miniature plant room complete with real wood floors, something I will never have in my own lifetime. Don’t even get me started on Mini Brands reveal videos and my personal favorite, Poppin Cookin’ “meals.” Not everything teensy tiny happens to be usable, however. That’s not the case with this Craftsman mini chainsaw, which is perfect for trimming smaller trees and shrubs. Why bring out the unwieldy big guy when you can get the job done with something lighter and less cumbersome?

CRAFTSMAN V20 Mini Chainsaw, 10 inch, Battery and Charger Included $119.99 (Was $169)

Craftsman

SEE IT

This cordless chainsaw has a V20* MAX 2.0AH lithium-ion battery, so you don’t have to worry about it crapping out when in the middle of a cut. Although we joke about it being a mini chainsaw, dainty it is not: its 10-inch bar and chain can cut material that’s eight inches thick. An auto-oiling feature allows for continuous lubrication, and bolt lock chain tensioning gives you consistent bar clamping. You can also use the integrated hook to hang it directly on a VERSATRACK wall organization system (sold separately). Sure, it won’t take down a Redwood, but it can slice through a cursed Bradford Pear like butter.

More Craftsman garden and lawn power tool deals:

The post Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Chopping it up with the best personal blenders for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-personal-blenders/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611951
A lineup of the best personal blenders on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

You don't always need a big blender. These smaller options cut down on waste and space on your counter or when stashed in a cabinet.

The post Chopping it up with the best personal blenders for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best personal blenders on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Ninja BL660 personal blender on a plain background. Ninja BL660 Professional Compact Blender
SEE IT

Create a smoothie for one or for all with this powerful blender.

Best for making smoothies A NutriBullet NB9 personal blender on a plain background NutriBullet NB9-1301K Pro
SEE IT

A large cup means more room for fruits and veggies.

Best budget A Ninja Fit personal blender on a plain background Ninja QB3001SS Ninja Fit Compact Personal Blender
SEE IT

You don’t have to spend $100-plus on a great personal blender, which this cheap-but-mighty option from Ninja proves.

A personal blender is perfect if you’re making smoothies, soups, and even frozen cocktails for one. They pack many of the same features as full-sized blenders in a pint-sized package that’s perfect if you’re low on counter space. As an apartment dweller who has lived in college crustzones, old buildings with no dishwashers, and slightly more suitable places, a personal blender has saved me plenty of time, space, and money. I don’t make so much smoothie that some goes to waste because I forget about it in my fridge. Plus, in my experience, personal blenders are easier to clean than their full-sized counterparts. More often than not, you can just throw in some soap and water, re-run the blender, rinse, and use it again the next day … or for your next meal. The best personal blenders fit neatly onto countertops and in cabinets without skimping on power.

How we chose the best personal blenders

This isn’t our first time at the blender rodeo. We’ve taken a spin through the best blenders and know what makes a certain blender a cut above the rest. We made sure each personal blender had at least 700 watts of power, with a focus on anything around 900 watts. In our experience, anything in the 700-900W range is capable of crushing ice and smoothing even the most freezer-burned bananas. We conducted our own testing—I’ve consumed a lot of liquid foods in the process of researching and writing this story—and made sure also to consult the reviews to get a full picture of the personal blenders’ power.

The best personal blenders: Reviews & Recommendations

Blending something into a slurpable slop is a great way to consume more fruits and vegetables, and a personal blender is an easy conduit to make it happen. One of our choices should help you treat your body more like a temple and less like a garbage disposal.

Best overall: Ninja BL660 Professional Compact Blender

Ninja

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17 x 6 x 8 inches
  • Capacity: 16-ounce personal cup; 72-ounce blender
  • Wattage: 1,110 watts

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Two kinds of blenders in one
  • Doesn’t take up much space on counter

Cons

  • Blades can miss small grains like chia and flax seeds

I am a creature of habit, and my morning breakfast has been the same for about a year. I’m a person who doesn’t love a huge meal first thing in the morning, so I tend to gravitate toward a protein-rich, fruit-forward smoothie. I’m not a gatekeeper, so my recipe is 1/2 of a frozen banana (a whole one if you want a creamier texture); Aldi brand Cherry Berry mix to my heart’s content (the best frozen fruit blend, in my opinion); a big spoonful of full-fat Greek yogurt for that magical protein (or a scoop of your favorite vegan protein powder); and enough orange juice to get it smooth, but not liquidy, which is usually to the max fill line. That morning breakfast smoothie gets made in this Ninja BL660 Professional compact blender, which isn’t showing any signs of slowing down after a year of daily use.

It has a 1,100-watt motor, which is more than enough to demolish fruit chunks. My frozen bananas get frozen because of my freezer, which makes things frosty at even the lowest setting, and I’ve never had a chunky smoothie in my time making them with this blender. It comes with two personal 16-ounce blender cups and a full-sized 72-ounce blender attachment for larger meals. The cups are made of tough BPA-free plastic and are dishwasher-friendly. There are four speed settings—three presets and a pulse button—along with a separate speed button for the single-serve cups.

I would take this blender with me on an island if I had to. However, there are moments when the chia seeds in my smoothie aren’t as pulverized as I’d like them to be. The same goes for larger flax seeds. It’s not a major problem for me, but the grainy texture sometimes gives me the ick, which makes me … not finish the smoothie. I know I’m not alone in getting grossed out by that kind of texture.

If you’re also looking for something with a food processor attachment on top of personal blending cups and blender, Ninja has a blender with all three that’s similar to the BL660.

Best design: Our Place Splendor Blender

Our Place

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 5.5 x 6.1 x 8.5 inches
  • Capacity: 750 mL for personal blender
  • Wattage: 1,000 watts

Pros

  • Stylish
  • Incredible blend capabilities
  • Easy to use

Cons

  • Quality control and user experience issues

If you’d rather have a blender meant to be shown off rather than hidden in a cabinet, the Our Place Splendor Blender is the most stylish blender we found. It comes in colorways that match Our Place’s other products, like its Wonder Oven (which we included in our smart oven roundup) and the famous Always Pan.

The Splendor Blender isn’t just a pretty face. It packs 1,000 watts of power that demolished even the smallest of chia seeds in less than a minute. Although it only has two settings—pulse and blend—the “blend” option ramps up speed over the course of 45 seconds. The max fill line is 16 ounces, but there is some extra wiggle room between the fill line and the blender base, so it’s more forgiving than other personal blender systems. I was reaching for this blender over the Ninja BL660 for a period of time, based on its ease of use and ultra-smooth blending abilities.

Go deep into the reviews of the Always pen, and you’ll see complaints about the pan’s value, with customers saying it doesn’t perform the way a $145 pan should. Sadly, the Splendor Blender faces similar issues. Although I was deeply impressed with the Splendor Blender’s blending abilities, there are some quality control and user experience issues. The blade itself stuck after one month of use. This prevented me from using the blender since the blade couldn’t turn and, thus, couldn’t lock. In the process of attempting to lock the blender, the thin blender handle started to break. Additionally, the blade base got stuck in the blender cup and nothing—no hot-to-cold water switch, no amount of manpower, no internet hack—got it unstuck. The blender’s light blinks when not in use, which is annoying. You have to unplug the blender to stop this issue. There is a one-year warranty and a 100-day return window if you’re not happy with your purchase, and Our Place rectified my situation with a new unit. When the Splendor Blender works, it’s incredible; when it doesn’t, it’s disappointing. I have hope, however, that a Splendor Blender 2.0 would alleviate these pain points for an even better blending—and user—experience.

Best portable: Cuisinart RPB-100 EvolutionX Cordless Rechargeable Compact Blender

Cuisinart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.5 x 3.9 x 11.69 inches
  • Capacity: 16 ounces
  • Wattage: N/A

Pros

  • Portable
  • Easy to use
  • Dishwasher safe

Cons

  • Not the most powerful choice on this list

This blender nabbed the top spot in our best portable blenders roundup, and it made the cut here for its cup capacity and battery power. Like others on this list, it has a 16-ounce blending cup. And, like the top-spot Ninja, you can make a smoothie with a single touch. Simply screw the blender base onto the cup, flip it over, blend, and then turn the base over and replace it with the included flip-top travel lid.

The RPB-100 can run for up to 20 minutes per charge, meaning you can make multiple smoothies per day. It takes about two hours to recharge the blender fully—I recommend charging it between meals or when you’re not home. It’s also dishwasher-safe. Use that time spent hand-washing a blender cup on …making another smoothie or more sauce.

Best for smoothies: NutriBullet NB9-1301K Pro

NutriBullet

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.72 x 12.01 x 15.94 inches
  • Capacity: 32 ounces
  • Wattage: 900 watts

Pros

  • Large personal cup capacity
  • Lots of included accessories
  • Thorough blending

Cons

  • Extractor blade base wide and can be hard to open

Many sleepness nights of my childhood were spent watching Magic Bullet infomercials and being mesmerized by the ingredients turning into other food. When I struck it out on my own, I sought out a NutriBullet—Magic Bullet’s larger and more powerful sibling—after using a roommate’s for years. If you’re just looking to make smoothies for one and don’t need multiple speed settings, the NutriBullet NB9-1301K Pro is an astonishing choice. The blade’s shape blends everything—even small seeds—but its low profile allows you to stuff up the included cup without overflow. 900 watts is more than enough power to blend ice, frozen fruit, and the toughest of kale, and its 32-ounce cup is one of the largest on this list. The blender also comes with tons of accessories, like to-go lids, lip rings, lip rings with handles, and a recipe book. Talk about stretching your dollar.

The NutriBullet extractor blade is a little wide, and if you have small hands like mine, you might have a hard time re-opening the cup if you screw it on too tight. You can find third-party lid wrenches on the internet, but they might not be compatible with this particular model. However, you can use the power of expansion and contraction to open it.

Best budget: Ninja QB3001SS Ninja Fit Compact Personal Blender

Ninja

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.3 x 4.3 x 13 inches
  • Capacity: 16 ounces
  • Wattage: 700 watts

Pros

  • Compact
  • Great form factor
  • Easy to use

Cons

  • Not the most powerful on this list

The Ninja Fit blender is similar in concept to the NutriBullet—one setting, push to blend—at a fraction of the price. It uses a blade similar to our best overall pick, so we consider it the best of both worlds when it comes to form factor and ease of use. It clocks in at 700 watts, the lowest wattage on our list. You’ll have to run it a bit longer to get the same smoothness, but hey—think of all the money you saved in the process. However, compared to other value personal blenders—which clock in at 250-300 watts—you’re getting the most bang for your buck.

This kit comes with two single-serve cups, two travel lids, a base, and an extraction blade, which isn’t bad for the almost $70 price. Other companies would charge you that amount for one lid and cup. I love that the travel lids come with a piece that snaps over the sip opening. It’s one thing to have a travel lid, but it’s another to have one that won’t leak if it falls over or you drive over a bump.

What to consider when buying the best personal blenders

Getting a smooth blend for sauces, soups, and smoothies is of utmost importance when it comes to a personal blender. “Blend” is in the name! Here’s what you should look for so your foods are to your liking.

Power, wattage, and speed

Personal blenders come in all combinations of wattages and speeds. Typically, personal blenders start at 250 watts and go up to 1,500 watts. The higher the watts, the more powerful the blender, and, in turn, the easier it will be to cut through ice and frozen fruits and veggies.

Speeds refer to the revolutions per minute (RPMs) of the blade. Although most companies don’t list the specific RPMs for each speed setting, it’s safe to assume that the higher the speed, the higher the RPMs, and the finer the food. Higher speeds lead to smooth liquids, while low speeds are better for chunky salsas and purees.

Container material and design

There is such a thing as a glass blender cup—take this Black and Decker blender, for example. When it comes to personal blenders, we recommend sticking with plastic. Personal blender blades rest closer to the cup than regular-sized blenders. I, a raging hypochondriac, would rather deal with the threat of microplastics (everything on this list is BPA-free, for what it’s worth) than little shards of glass. Plastic is also less prone to breaking, although it can get discolored and hold odors. Most companies sell replacement cups on their site in case this happens.

Grooves and indentations direct the food, meaning food won’t stick to the sides of the blender. Wide openings make it easier to add ingredients, but a wider cup doesn’t mean it can carry more volume. The Our Place Splendor Blender has a wider circumference than the Ninja BL660, but both fill lines stop at 16 ounces to prevent overflow.

Many companies will say that their blender has a “self-cleaning” design. Technically, all cup-style blenders are self-cleaning. Simply add some dish soap to the cup, fill with water, run, rinse, and bam: Clean blender. You should still run it in the dishwasher so it doesn’t grow and create a new creature (which is another mouth you’ll have to feed).

Blades

Personal blender blades come in a wing, star, X-shape, or combination of any of the three. More blades mean more contact with food, which ensures for a finer, smoother blend. Blade style affects performance: X-style blades are great for cutting, and wing-style blades are perfect for crushing ice. Some companies sell separate blades for specific purposes. For example, NutriBullet sells a lid designed for milling grain.

FAQs

Q: How long do personal blenders last?

Personal blenders last 3-5 years, depending on care and quality. Clean it according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Throwing a blender in the dishwasher when it’s hand-wash only will lessen its lifespan. Giving the motor a rest, letting the blender cool down after use, and discontinuing use if the motor overheats are other ways to lengthen your personal blender’s lifespan.

Q: Are more expensive blenders better?

It depends. More expensive blenders tend to have more powerful motors, which makes blending, chopping, and pureeing easy. This gives you consistent results and a better texture. However, blade design is also important. I love the Ninja BL660, but its towered wing blender blades—a completely different design from the X-shaped personal blender blade—chops more than blends, which is fine for me, but may not be fine for you. Instead of looking at price, consider features that help create a vortex for a smooth blend.

Q: Are small blenders worth it?

We think so. Traditional blender cups are too large if you’re making personal-sized blended food. They also require less clean-up than traditional blenders, and you save valuable dishwasher and sink space when you use them.

Final thoughts on the best personal blenders

If you’re cooking for one and don’t want a full-sized blender taking up precious counter space, a personal blender is your best bet. You can make a one-size portion every time, meaning you stop food waste in the process. I’ve had plenty of homemade sauces go to waste because I made too much of it in a full-size blender and let the rest rot in the freezer. Personal blenders are easier to store and clean, with removable bases and dishwasher-safe cups. Some personal blenders even come with full-size blender cups if you’re cooking for a party. Regardless of where you’re at in life, a personal blender can keep you fueled at every step of the way.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post Chopping it up with the best personal blenders for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Brother sewing machines according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-brother-sewing-machines/ Thu, 16 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=449198
The best Brother sewing machines
Stan Horaczek

The best equipment yields the best results, and Brother sewing machines are well-known in the world of sewing, quilting, and crafting for their quality and innovative features.

The post The best Brother sewing machines according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best Brother sewing machines
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall A Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine on a plain background Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

This model is a solid, mechanical sewing machine that offers automated functioning for multiple sewing purposes.

Best for beginners Brother CP60X Computerized Sewing Machine is the best for beginners. Brother CP60X Computerized Sewing Machine
SEE IT

This is a great machine that helps beginners but allows for growth as skills improve.

Best Computerized The Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine on a plain background. Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine
SEE IT

A computerized machine with 165 built-in stitch options along with push-button stitch selection and automated functions.

Even if you’ve never threaded a needle or even heard of bobbin, you’ve probably heard about Brother sewing machines. Throughout its 115-year history, Brother Industries has developed into a global leader in sewing machine design, innovation, and manufacturing. Currently, the company offers one of the most advanced line-ups of innovative machinery for home-sewing pursuits. Its models include reliable sewing machines for basic projects and state-of-the-art, computerized models designed for advanced embroidery, quilting, and crafting. Consumers rely on the best Brother sewing machines to provide quality, value, and features for both utilitarian and creative purposes. Here are our picks of the best Brother sewing machines in the company’s impressive line-up.

How we chose the best Brother sewing machines

I drew on personal experience, peer suggestions, and public opinion in selecting six Brother sewing machines for these recommendations. I then narrowed it down to 11 different models and accessed the in-depth product details and specifications available on the Brother-USA company website. Then, we selected Brother products that are easily available and read the product descriptions, user impressions, and FAQs on retailer sites. Knowing that various readers bring an array of needs, preferences, and monetary resources to the search, we tried to assemble a diverse assortment of Brother sewing machines for our list.

I considered both computerized and mechanical sewing machines. Although the computerized models exhibit advanced technological features, many users prefer simple operating procedures and easy maintenance of mechanical machines. Additionally, we looked for both computerized and mechanical models that provide automated processes such as needle threading and buttonhole making, as these features make sewing easier and more pleasurable.

The best Brother sewing machines: Reviews & Recommendations

Brother Industries Ltd. (the company that manufactures Brother sewing machines) traces its history back more than 100 years. In 1908, Kanekichi Yasui founded the Yasui Sewing Machine Company, working at his home in Nagoya, Japan. He repaired industrial sewing machines and manufactured machine parts for local use. When Yasui’s sons inherited his company, they changed the name to Yasui Brothers’ Sewing Machine Company, and the company title was eventually shortened to Brother.

With such a long history, Brother has engineered a sewing machine to suit every user and use case. So, to narrow them down, we searched for Brother sewing machines to meet the needs of beginning sewers, those who engage in basic sewing projects, and those with more advanced skills and experience in quilting, crafting, and fashion design. We endeavored to present Brother machines that meet the requirements of these various types of sewists. 

Best overall: Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brother XM2701 sewing machine offers versatility as it provides automated features and numerous built-in stitches for advanced sewists, along with ease of operation for beginners. 

Specs

  • Weight: 12.6 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 12.1 x 5.9 x 15.3 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 27

Pros

  • Automatic buttonhole function
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Both decorative and straight built-in stitches
  • 6 interchangeable feet included

Cons  

  • Not computerized

The Brother XM2701 sewing machine is easy to operate, making it a viable choice for beginners. On the other hand, it boasts a wide array of stitch options and automated features that appeal to experienced sewing enthusiasts. Stitch options include multiple decorative and quilting stitches along with basic, straight stitches for seams and basting. With 27 built-in stitches and 63 stitch functions, users can create crafts, fashions, home decor items, and quilts. 

Although not a computerized machine, the XM2701 offers several automated features to make sewing projects go more smoothly and quickly. For example, the automatic needle threader eliminates the frustration and eye strain of threading the needle by hand. An automatic, 1-step buttonhole function saves time and ensures consistent, professional-looking results. Additionally, the task of winding the bobbin is an automatic process.

Several convenient features make the XM2701 a popular and versatile sewing machine. The jam-resistant, drop-in bobbin is located on the top of the machine to speed up the sewing process. An LED light brightly lights the work area. The free arm feature also makes it easy to manipulate the fabric when sewing cuffs, sleeves, and pants. 

The XM2701 model includes six interchangeable feet to accomplish multiple sewing tasks: Buttonhole foot; Zipper foot; Zigzag foot; Narrow hemmer; Blind stitch; and Button-sewing foot.

Best computerized: Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With computerized, push-button stitch selection and automatic functioning, the Brother XR9550 sewing machine offers advanced features for quilters, crafters, and hobbyists, as well as sewing artists. 

Specs

  • Weight: 10.14 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 20 x 13.5 x 17.9 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 165

Pros

  • Extra-wide sewing surface for large projects
  • Push-button stitch selection, including decorative stitches and alphanumeric fonts
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Protective hard case included

Cons

  • Not the best choice for beginners

For the avid sewist who is ready to take their craft to a more sophisticated level, the Brother XR 9550 computerized sewing machine provides numerous features to spark the imagination and facilitate creative success. The machine offers 165 built-in stitches. These include utilitarian and decorative stitches along with heirloom stitches. Choose from among eight different buttonhole styles, and the machine will automatically sew a tailored buttonhole around any button. For monogramming and personalizing projects, a selection of 55 alphanumeric stitches facilitates automatically sewing letters, numbers, and symbols onto fabrics. 

Numerous features of this machine provide ease of operation, taking the stress and frustration out of sewing. The built-in stitches are clearly marked on the front of the machine. Simply push a button for the computerized stitch-selection function, and a backlit LCD display shows the appropriate choice. Additionally, this machine includes an automatic needle threader and a jam-resistant, top drop-in bobbin.

Quilters appreciate the drop-feed feature that facilitates free-sewing for quilting. The work surface is illuminated with a bright LED light, and the extra-wide table allows quilters to handle bulky fabrics and large projects. Alternatively, sewists can use the free arm to sew sleeves, cuffs, and trouser legs.

The XR9550 includes seven interchangeable sewing feet along with accessories: Zigzag foot; Buttonhole foot; Button-sewing foot; Overcasting foot; Blind stitch foot; Monogramming foot; Quilting foot; Protective, hard cover; and an Instructional DVD.

Best for embroidery: Brother SE1900 Sewing and Embroidery Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sewists can achieve artist-quality results in creative DIY projects by choosing from 138 built-in embroidery designs in the Brother SE1900 sewing and embroidery machine.

Specs

  • Weight: 22.1 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 23.19 x 11.54 x 13.43 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 138 embroidery designs + 240 built-in stitches

Pros

  • Large number of built-in embroidery designs and stitches
  • Built-in memory for imported embroidery designs
  • Built-in memory for personal, custom-designed stitches
  • LCD touchscreen display

Cons

  • Not the best choice for beginners

Take your sewing and crafting projects to the artist level with the Brother SE1900 computerized sewing and embroidery machine. Select from among 138 built-in embroidery designs and see them displayed on the large-size, full-color, LCD touchscreen. Alternatively, users can import new designs and save them to the machine. Additionally, the machine can combine designs and store them in its memory. Measuring 5 inches by 7 inches, the embroidery field provides ample versatility for creative sewists. A hoop is included to facilitate larger embroidery designs, so users are limited only by their imaginations.  

The 240 built-in stitches inspire customizing many crafting, quilting, and garment-making activities. Among the stitch options, the SE1900 offers 11 built-in fonts for monogramming and personalizing the original projects. Additionally, 10 styles of buttonhole stitches facilitate automatic sewing of precisely sized buttonholes.

Several convenient features of this computerized machine take the effort and frustration out of sewing pursuits. The advanced, automatic needle threader eliminates threading the needle by hand. Instead, the thread inserts precisely through the eye of the needle with a simple press of a lever. The jam-resistant feature facilitates a consistent thread feed from the top drop-in bobbin, preventing the work delays that come with tangled threads. With a maximum speed of 850 stitches per minute and labor-saving features for smooth operation, sewing on the SE1900 is an enjoyable and inspiring experience.

To facilitate a broad array of sewing tasks, this machine includes eight interchangeable sewing feet: Blind stitch foot; Buttonhole foot; Button fitting foot; Zipper foot; Zigzag foot; Monogramming foot; and Overcasting foot.

Best for beginners: Brother CP60X Computerized Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The easy-to-use Brother CP60X computerized sewing machine is a top choice for beginners to embark on a learning adventure in sewing, quilting, and crafting.

Specs

  • Weight: 14 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 16.26 x 6.65 x 12.21 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 60

Pros

  • Utilitarian and decorative stitches built-in
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Durable metal frame
  • Capable of sewing denim and thick fabrics

Cons

  • Not capable of monogramming

Use the Brother CP60X computerized sewing machine to embark on a lifelong hobby of sewing, crafting, and quilting. It offers straightforward, easy-to-use operating procedures, suitable for beginning sewers. An array of 60 built-in stitch options is prominently displayed on the front of the machine. Choose by simply pressing a button, and the information shows up on the clearly visible LCD screen. In addition to decorative and heirloom stitches, the machine offers a selection of seven auto-size, buttonhole stitches. 

With a fixed needle bar, this machine is particularly well-suited for beginning sewers. The needle remains fixed in place to ensure clean stitching and even seam lines. Additionally, the 2-step, automatic needle threader accurately pushes the thread through the eye of the needle. It saves time and frustration so that beginners can enjoy their sewing activities. 

The CP60X is a versatile sewing machine for multiple purposes. With its heavy-duty frame and exceptionally smooth feed system, the machine handles denim and other thick fabrics without snagging. A favorite feature of quilters, the drop-feed system allows free-motion sewing. Additionally, the machine facilitates free-arm sewing for constructing shirts, cuffs, and trousers. 

This CP60X provides an ample collection of accessories to get started with a sewing hobby. These include a 3-piece needle set, bobbins and a bobbin cover, a quilt guide, and a bilingual instruction manual. The included supply of seven interchangeable feet facilitates multiple types of sewing tasks: Blind stitch foot; Zigzag foot; Buttonhole foot; Button sewing foot; Overcasting foot; Zipper foot; and Monogramming foot (used for decorative stitches only).

Just starting out and interested in other options? Check out our dedicated guide to the best sewing machines for beginners.

Best for quilting: Brother XR3774 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With built-in stitches for utilitarian and decorative applications, automatic features, and an extra-wide table that accommodates quilts, the Brother XR3774 is a standout machine for quilters.

Specs

  • Weight: 15.87 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 15.3 x 5.8 x 12 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 37

Pros

  • Wide work surface for bulky quilts and large sewing projects
  • One-step buttonhole function
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Jam-resistant, drop-in bobbin

Cons

  • Not computerized

Here’s a mechanical sewing machine with automated features and a large workspace for bulky projects. The large throat area and the extra-wide work table make the Brother XR3774 sewing and quilting machine a viable choice for quilters. For projects other than quilts, sewists may utilize the free arm. This feature facilitates sewing sleeves, cuffs, trousers, and skinny jeans. 

In addition to providing ample space for quilting, this machine offers ease of use through several automated functions. The 1-step buttonhole stitch automatically turns out perfectly sized buttonholes. An automatic needle threading system eliminates the frustrating task of threading the needle by hand. Simply press a lever on the side of the machine and the thread inserts precisely through the eye of the needle. Additionally, the top drop-in bobbin winds automatically, and it’s jam-resistant to ensure a smooth, continuous feed of thread. 

The XR3774 includes 37 built-in stitches that produce 74 stitch functions when applied to various sewing tasks. These include both utilitarian and decorative stitch options for multiple sewing and quilting purposes. The 37 pre-set stitches are prominently displayed on the front of the machine. Select a unique stitch pattern by simply turning a dial to the appropriate number. 

This machine includes an ample supply of accessories to facilitate varied sewing and quilting activities: Walking foot; Blind stitch foot; Zigzag foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; Button sewing foot; Spring-action quilting foot; Narrow hem foot; Wide table, detachable work surface; Hard cover to protect the machine when not in use; and an Instructional DVD. Here are more of our picks for the best sewing machines for quilting.

Best budget: Brother LX3817 Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brother LX3817 is an affordable machine for the sewing hobbyist, offering ease of operation and versatile features for basic sewing tasks and creative projects.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.36 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 17x 7 x 14 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 17

Pros

  • 17 built-in stitches
  • 4-step buttonhole function
  • LED light for well-lit workspace
  • Jam resistant bobbin

Cons 

  • Not computerized
  • Not as many built-in stitches as other machines

Available at a budget-friendly price, the LX3817 sewing machine provides an array of features to suit the needs of beginners, as well as experienced sewing hobbyists. It’s a full-size machine with 17 built-in stitch options. These include straight stitches, zigzag stitches, blind hem stitches, and couching stitches. The stitch choices are clearly marked on the selection dial, located on the front of the machine. Simply turn the dial to choose the desired stitch patterns for constructing garments, sewing crafts, and embellishing home decor creations. 

In addition to the 17 stitch options, the LX3817 provides a 4-step buttonhole function. With a quick turn of the dial, users may select the appropriate stitches to produce consistent, auto-size buttonholes, lending a professional look to finished projects. 

Several features make this machine a pleasure to use. The work area is well-lit with an LED light and the bobbin cover is transparent for visually monitoring the thread supply. The jam-resistant feature means that the thread on the drop-in bobbin does not become entangled. A convenient control dial lets users adjust the upper tension to avoid loose stitches or fabric puckering. The machine’s design also facilitates free-arm sewing for cuffs, sleeves, and trouser legs. 

This machine includes four interchangeable feet: Zigzag foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; and Button-sewing foot. The LX3817 includes all necessary parts to ensure success on multiple sewing and crafting projects, including: Darning plate; Bobbin cover; Bobbins; Set of 3 needles; and an Instructional DVD.

What to consider when buying the best Brother sewing machines

With many options to choose from, it can be daunting for any consumer to select the most appropriate Brother sewing machine for their purposes. Here are several factors to consider before making a selection:

Computerized or mechanical?

Brother Industries manufactures both mechanical and computerized sewing machines. The mechanical models tend to be easier to operate and maintain. They’re durable and reliable, offering basic sewing features for beginners and hobbyists. As an added bonus, many of the mechanical models include automatic functions for ease of use. On the other hand, some sewists prefer the advanced technological capabilities of computerized sewing machines. Especially for embroidery, crafting, and quilting projects, computerized machines can’t be beat.

Built-in stitches

As a standard feature, all Brother sewing machines include varying arrays of built-in stitches. These range in style from straight, utilitarian designs for basting and sewing seams to complex, decorative stitches for the artistic embellishment of garments, quilts, home decor, and crafts. The built-in stitches offered by the Brother sewing machines reviewed here range from as few as 17 to as many as 240 options. Advanced, computerized machines include alphanumeric fonts among their built-in stitches to facilitate monogramming and customization of sewing projects. Additionally, the Brother sewing-and-embroidery machines include built-in embroidery designs with memory capability for importing or creating additional options. 

Automatic features

In addition to computerized and mechanical operating systems, shoppers might consider the availability of automatic functions on various Brother sewing machines. These features make the machines easier to use and increase the enjoyment of sewing as a pleasurable activity. Many of the Brother machines offer automatic needle threading. This function saves time, frustration, and eye strain, eliminating the need to thread the needle by hand. Additionally, including a 4-step or 1-step buttonhole function is a time-saver for sewists as it tailors a buttonhole of the precise size and shape for every button.

FAQs

Q: How do you thread a Brother sewing machine?

You thread a Brother sewing machine by following the steps in the instruction manual. First, turn off the machine. Then raise both the presser foot and the needle. Pull up the spool pin on top of the machine and place a spool of thread on it. Pass the thread toward you in the groove on the thread guide, and a spring will catch the thread. Pass it through the take-up lever from right to left. Bring the thread behind the guide above the needle. Thread the needle from front to back.

Q: Are Brother sewing machines good for beginners?

Several models of Brother sewing machines are good for beginners. A beginner might enjoy learning to sew on the XM2701, the LX3817, or the CP60X models. These machines offer versatile features with easy-to-use operating procedures. Prefer another brand? Check out the best Singer sewing machines.

Q: How do you use a Brother sewing machine?

A Brother sewing machine may be used for sewing garments and home decor items from original designs or from commercial patterns. Alternatively, it can be used for creating and embellishing craft projects or making quilts. Select a Brother sewing machine that exhibits the qualities to meet your needs, Then, follow the directions in the instruction manual or DVD that comes with the machine. 

Q: How do you set up a Brother sewing machine?

You set up a Brother sewing machine by following the steps in the instruction manual or DVD that comes with the machine. Reading the manual or watching the DVD before setting up the machine is a good idea. Place the sewing machine on a clean, flat work surface to get started. Attach the power cord and the foot pedal cord. Place a spool of thread on the thread pin and follow the markings for the thread path, culminating in threading the needle automatically or by hand. Wind thread onto the bobbin and drop the bobbin into its case. 

Q: What’s the easiest sewing machine to use?

The easiest sewing machine to use is a mechanical model with clearly marked stitches, thread guides, and stitch-selector dial. Computerized models with numerous stitch options and advanced, automatic features may be more complex in their operating procedures.

Q: How do I choose a good sewing machine?

You can choose a good sewing machine by deciding the type of sewing projects you wish to undertake. Perhaps you’re a beginner who wants to learn basic sewing techniques. On the other hand, you might be an experienced quilter or crafter who needs a more advanced machine. After determining your needs, research sewing machines on the manufacturers’ websites. Investigate options at a local dealer’s store, if possible. Additionally, it helps to read consumer reviews and ratings.

Q: How much does a Brother sewing machine cost?

Brother sewing machines vary in cost from approximately $130.00 for a basic, mechanical machine to $900.00 for an advanced, computerized sewing machine that creates colorful, artistic designs on fabric. Computerized machines that provide versatile features for sewing, crafting, and quilting range in price from approximately $200.00 to $400.00.

Final thoughts on the best Brother sewing machines

Many sewists appreciate the straightforward operating procedures and simplified maintenance of a non-computerized sewing machine such as the Brother XM2701 model. It’s a popular, mechanical machine that provides an ample selection of built-in stitches, automatic needle threading, and buttonhole making. Overall, the XM2701 offers value and versatility for multiple sewing and crafting activities. Regardless of the Brother sewing machine you choose, you’ll feel better about working with a quality machine from a company with a long history and good reputation.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Brother sewing machines according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best pool floats for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-pool-float/ Wed, 14 Jul 2021 15:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=373107
best pool float pink flamingo
Toni Cuenca, Unsplash

The best pool floats help you to chill as the summer heats up.

The post The best pool floats for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best pool float pink flamingo
Toni Cuenca, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for pool parties Pink flamingo pool float Intex Party Island Flamingo
SEE IT

This fun model comes with a built-in cooler and four cup holders.

Best unicorn Girl sitting on a inflatable pool float Jasonwell Giant Unicorn Pool Float
SEE IT

Designed to hold up to 400 pounds, this allows for quick inflation.

Best for dogs Blue, plastic paddle paws pool float SwimWays Paddle Paws Dog Raft
SEE IT

This model is designed for small to medium dogs and is reinforced with claw-friendly fabric.

As we head into another sizzling summer, many of us are gearing up for our favorite hot-weather activities. One of the best ways to have fun and keep cool is to go for a dip in a refreshing pool. However, no poolside hang is complete without a leisurely float to lounge around on. These days, you can find fun inflatable pool toys in just about any shape or size, and some even come with special features. Considering the many options available, here’s a wet, hot guide to help you find your new favorite swimming pool float. Whether you’re searching for the best pool floats for yourself, your friends, your kids, or even your dog, these are the coolest pool inflatables for every sunbather. 

How we chose the best pool floats

We looked at product reviews and consumer impressions to determine what floats a pool-goers boat when it comes to the best pool floats. After reviewing the specs—including dimensions, weight limits, cupholders, and other luxuries—we narrowed down our list to the inflatables that most float our … boat? Nay, our bodies.

The best pool floats: Reviews & Recommendations

While it may seem like a simple purchase, there are a few things to think about before clicking “add to cart.” First, determine how many people might be using the float at once, then make some executive decisions about size, style, and functionality. After all, there are pool chair floats, unicorn pool floats, and giant pool floats, just to name a few types. Quality, price, and safety—especially for babies, kids, and pets—are a few other very important considerations.

Best overall: Aqua Campania Ultimate 2-in-1 Recliner 

Aqua LEISURE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This versatile chair can accommodate different lounging vibes.

Specs

  • Cupholders: Yes
  • Weight limit: 250 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 3.25 x 16.5 x 13.85 inches

Pros

  • Detachable caddy
  • Adjustable backrest
  • Inflates easily

Cons

  • Needs pump to fill

This reclining lounger from Aqua Campania is everything you need for a perfect pool day. The backrest can be positioned at a 60-degree angle for a little support, or lay the back completely flat to achieve a successful full-body tan. The Campania pool chair float comes with a detachable caddy for snacks, extra drinks, or personal items so you won’t be left wanting on the water. It can support up to 250 pounds and is easily inflated with a two-valve locking system. 

Best foam float: Frontgate Resort Pool Float

Frontage

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This foam float was designed to last more than one pool season.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 350 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 74 x 26 x 2 inches

Pros

  • Thick
  • Resists peeling and cracking
  • Incredibly buoyant

Cons

  • Expensive

This pool float is truly top of the line when it comes to peace and relaxation on the perfect pool day. The 2-inch, closed-cell foam is thin enough to keep you afloat but light enough for easy transport. Unlike traditional floats, this product uses PVC coating on top of the foam to reduce erosion caused by chlorine and sun exposure while keeping things plush. This foam pool float is available in eight solid colors, or be bold and select from two fun prints. While this product might be a bit more expensive than other inflatable pool floats, it will last longer and provide additional comfort. 

Best for pool parties: Intex Party Island Flamingo 

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The more really is the merrier when it comes to this party-friendly pool float.

Specs

  • Cupholders: Yes
  • Weight limit: 880 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 166 x 147 x 73 inches

Pros

  • Lots of room for drinks and beverages
  • Repair kit
  • Boarding platform

Cons

  • Need a large pool to use

This isn’t just a pool float—it’s a pool island, capable of supporting 880 pounds and measuring 166 inches by 147 inches by 73 inches. This Intex pink flamingo float comes with four cup holders, a built-in cooler, a detachable boarding platform, and a mesh bottom to let in cooling water. It’s even equipped with an anchor bag, rope, and repair kit just in case you need some extra support and stability. If the giant pool floats are too big for your pool, consider taking them to a nearby lake.

Best unicorn: Jasonwell Giant Unicorn Pool Float

Jasonwell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mystical pool float puts the “fun” in “functional.”

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 400 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 114.17 x 55.12 x 47.24

Pros

  • Fits two people
  • Easy to inflate

Cons

  • Leaks air easily

Make a splash with this giant unicorn pool float, designed to support up to 400 pounds (typically up to two people) at a time. It measures 144 inches by 55 inches by 47 inches when fully inflated, which you can achieve using a hairdryer, hand pump, or electric pump. Make sure you bring out the waterproof camera because you’ll definitely be bombarded with picture requests. 

Best baby pool float: Laycol Baby Pool Float Ring

LAYCOL

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pool float helps your baby learn to swim while protecting them from the sun.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 48 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 10.5 x 10.5 x 2 inches

Pros

  • 5-point safety protection
  • Easy to remove

Cons

  • Reviews note flip potential

Suitable for children under 36 months old, this baby pool float will support your little one’s first ventures into the water this summer. It has a double-layered air chamber, wide sides, a raised front, abdomen/back support, and a five-point safety belt to keep your baby right side up. Buckle in your guppy on their back or front so they can experiment with different ways to “swim.” You’ll be able to pull them around through the water easily while they kick and splash around. This float ring comes in three sizes and colors—each includes a removable canopy to protect little ones’ sensitive, soft skin from the sun. 

Best dog pool float: SwimWays Paddle Paws Dog Raft

SwimWays

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This dog-friendly pool float lets the family pooch cool off in the pool.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 200 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 15 x 15 x 16.25 inches

Pros

  • Paw- and claw-friendly
  • Reusable carrying bag included

Cons

  • Reviewers note flimsy air valve

Keep your fur baby happy with this inflatable dog raft from SwimWays. It’s available in two sizes, supporting dogs under and over 65 pounds. Made from claw-friendly mesh, this dog pool float features inserts that allow just enough water to seep in and cool down your pet. An innerspring design around the edge provides extra stability, and reinforced fabric protects the float from popping. Best of all, Fido’s float folds down flat, easily fitting in your pool bag without any hassle. 

What to consider when buying the best pool floats

Imagine yourself on the perfect summer day, dipping your toes into a freshly inflated pool with a frosty beverage in hand, a patio umbrella nearby to shade you when you take a break from the sun, a waterproof Bluetooth speaker to soundtrack your fun, and your favorite people by your side. Now, ponder the best pool float to complete this picture. If you’re having trouble visualizing, ask yourself the following questions to help turn this daydream into reality. 

Number of people on the float

First and foremost, you’ll need to decide how many people you’re hoping to pack on. Are you looking for a relaxing tube for one? A double-wide recliner built for two? Or a massive party float to hold a group of friends? Before you buy, double-check the product’s size specs to ensure you’re getting the dimensions you need, that way, you can safely select your favorite design and avoid any surprises when unboxing.

Statement pool toys

The best thing about pool floats is the veritable feast of eye-catching options. Hello, perfect pool day selfie! While there are several classy, solid-color options, summer is all about fun, and your float should inspire smiles. From llamas to pizza slices, giant pineapples to classic convertibles, there is truly something for everyone—including the fan-favorite unicorn pool float. 

Cupholders

If you’re looking to spend an entire day bobbing along the water, you’re going to need sustenance, which in turn means you’ll need a place to put your snacks. Instead of heading towards dry land to get some grub, grab a reclining pool float chair that comes with a food and beverage holder. That way, you won’t have to waste a second of aquatic fun to replenish and rehydrate. 

Safety

If you are headed to the pool with your baby in tow, and you know they aren’t ready for arm floaties, think about grabbing an inflatable ring, so you and your little one can enjoy the water together. Safety is of the utmost importance, so look for a no-flip float made from non-toxic material that’s equipped with safety belts to keep your tiny tot securely above water. In addition, make sure your little water bug has enough mobility to stay comfortable, but not so much room to move that they can accidentally fall out of the float. Products with raised edges and multiple straps are a great way to let your water baby splash around safely.

Foam vs. inflatable

Most inflatable pool floats are made from PVC plastic, which is great for buoyancy, dry-time, and easy inflation. However, some find that the material in inflatable pool floats can get too hot if left in the sun or that it irritates their skin over time—this is especially true for classic inner tubes and full-body recliners. Luckily, there are a few solutions. Some companies offer custom covers made from nylon or waterproof fabrics. Also, check out some of the amazing foam floats available. While foam floats tend to be pricier, they don’t require any inflation, are gentle on the skin, and provide soft, squishy support for maximum comfort. Plus, there’s no risk of popping and sinking. Even with an accidental puncture, foam pool floats are not likely to sink.

Pets

What’s cuter than a puppy lounging on a pool float? Not much! If your dog enjoys the water but isn’t keen to spend the day swimming, think about giving your four-legged friend their very own float as a special summer treat. Essentially a buoyant dog bed, dog pool floats are a fun way for you and your furry best friend to relax on the water. As long as you select a product made from durable material that can support your dog’s weight, nothing should get in the way of a perfect summer day alongside your canine BFF. 

FAQs

Q: What are pool floats made from? 

Most pool floats are made from polyvinyl chloride, or PVC. Manufacturers can also list this as vinyl, plastic, or naphthalene. Think of any inflatable water toy—baby pool, beach ball, waterslide—and chances are it’s made from PVC. Some products may have an additional layer of polyester mesh to strengthen the material, but this is more commonly used for inflatable pools. The only other material that is often used is foam. 

Q: Why are foam pool floats so expensive?

Foam pool floats are typically more expensive than PVC floats because of their durability, comfort, weight, and ease of use. Creating a foam float requires manufacturers to develop tiny cells within a plastic layer by putting the plastic inside a gas chamber filled with nitrogen and applying high pressure. As a result, it is highly unlikely that a foam float will sink, even when damaged, plus they provide a soft layer of cushion for peak relaxation. 

Q: What are the best foam pool floats?

If you are looking specifically for a foam pool float, in addition to the Frontgate Resort Float, we recommend the TCR Recreation Sunsation and SwimWays Aquaria Luxury Solana Lounge Float. There are many options for foam pool floats out there, and you can use the same list of factors above to help narrow down your selection. 

Final thoughts on the best pool floats

Finding the best pool float for your perfect summer day shouldn’t be too difficult once you know what you want. First, make sure it can safely support any person or pet who will climb aboard, then think about any additions or aesthetic features. If you’re shopping for kids or preparing for a pool party, look for a silly or fun style. If you are looking for yourself and prioritize comfort above all else, think about purchasing a long-lasting foam float or a reclining pool chair float. Above all, make sure to select the best pool float for bringing a smile to your face whenever you’re ready to take a dip.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best pool floats for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save $100 on the Vitamix countertop composter at Amazon for Earth Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/vitamix-foodcycler-composter-earth-day-2024-deal-amazon/ Mon, 22 Apr 2024 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611875
Vitamix Food Cycler countertop composter with a picture of a hopper full of food on the left and a hopper full of processed mulch on the right.
Stan Horaczek

This simple, silent device makes composting in your kitchen super easy and free of bad smells and mess.

The post Save $100 on the Vitamix countertop composter at Amazon for Earth Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Vitamix Food Cycler countertop composter with a picture of a hopper full of food on the left and a hopper full of processed mulch on the right.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Lots of stuff we throw away could easily go into compost. But getting started with composting can be tricky. Do it wrong, and you’ll stink up your whole kitchen. Vitamix’s Food Cycler makes it easy, and right now, it’s down to $299, which is $100 off of its regular price at Amazon.

Vitamix FC-50-SP Food Cycler FoodCycler FC-50, 2 L $299 (was $399)

Vitamix

SEE IT

Chuck food waste and other compostable items into the Food Cycler’s two-liter canister and then close the carbon lid. When you run the device, it circulates air through the chamber and pulls moisture from the material without creating a smell in your house. Once it’s done, your waste will be considerably smaller and easy to mix into your garden soil, where it will work as a natural fertilizer. This is a great way to reduce the amount of food byproducts you send to the landfill and improve your garden simultaneously. Plus, it runs almost silently, so you don’t have to worry about making too much noise in your kitchen—one of the many reasons Vitamix tops our best compost bins.

More composting deals

Maybe you’re not ready for a $300 composter on your counter. That’s cool! Luckily, Amazon has some other composting gear on sale for Earth Day.

The post Save $100 on the Vitamix countertop composter at Amazon for Earth Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Sony’s new TVs take Mini-LED to the max: Here’s what you should know https://www.popsci.com/gear/sony-bravia-mini-led-tv-soundbar-2024-lineup-first-impressions/ Fri, 19 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611775
A Sony television with home theater set-up staged in a pretend living room.
Sony

From backlots to TV backlights, soundstages to soundbars, Sony held a premiere for its 2024 BRAVIA lineup and we walked their red carpet.

The post Sony’s new TVs take Mini-LED to the max: Here’s what you should know appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Sony television with home theater set-up staged in a pretend living room.
Sony

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sony launched its new TV and soundbar lineup April 17 with the tagline “Cinema is coming home.” But a month earlier, they invited me to travel far from home—from the East Coast to Sony Pictures Studios in Culver City, Calif.—for a behind-the-screens preview of the philosophy and technology that went into the 2024 models. 

Ecto-1. Johnny 5. BRAVIA 9. Our two-day tour of the lot showcased applied science of the past and present. Movie props and filmmakers giving Sony engineers props. Classic characters and new naming conventions. I found myself in JEOPARDY! and on a holodeck. It was a soup-to-nuts, lens-to-living room look at mastering monitors, home theater setups, and the push to narrow the gap between creators and consumers.

Sony

SEE IT

Seeing what we’re not seeing  

Sony’s new TVs include four models and two important acronyms: BRAVIA and HDR. The “Best Resolution Audio Visual Integrated Architecture” brand has been part of Sony’s televisions for almost 20 years but is now the unifying label for the BRAVIA 3, 7, 8, and 9 screens, as well as the BRAVIA Theater Bar 8 and Theater Bar 9. For anyone used to Sony’s sets like the X95L, X90L, etc., X no longer marks the spot except on the SKU. (The A80L is also gone—no more separate LED and OLED series—but that didn’t fit the last sentence’s wordplay as well.) 

The BRAVIA 9 is now the Mini-LED flagship, with the most expanded, authentic contrast, while the BRAVIA 8 is a 4K OLED alternative. The BRAVIA 7 is a premium but more approachable 4K Mini-LED, while the BRAVIA 3 is an entry-level 4K 60Hz Direct LED. Is making shopping simpler versus the previous system the rename of the game? Debatable, and it doesn’t help that the flagship A95L will remain on the market. At the very least, the new monikers make it clear that the BRAVIA 9 is the set Sony considers the true peak of this year’s innovations—peak brightness particularly.

On to that second acronym. The ability to turn off every diode independently allows OLED screens unbeatable black levels and contrast, given a low-light environment to show its best. But when it comes to HDR, or High Dynamic Range, the peak brightness levels achievable by a Mini-LED screen allow for more control over fine highlights and luminance that can stand up to rooms with more natural light. 

Sony’s brightest 4K TV to date (50% brighter with 325% more dimming zones), the BRAVIA 9’s High Peak Luminance sets out to narrow the gap with OLED’s pixel-level control while improving the ability to perform accurately wherever people want (or need) to set up their TV, not just in an optimized home theater or demo den. Sony hosted its product reveal throughout the studio lot, and invited directors and cinematographers to speak to us, to reinforce the part the company plays in every stage of the cinema signal chain—from professional Venice cameras used in aircraft on Top Gun: Maverick to Gran Turismo’s object-based sound design to color-grading monitors. And it’s Sony’s belief in the ability of HDR to preserve the detail and intent of every frame that explains why the first, foundational screen we saw was one none of us will ever buy.

The Sony BRAVIA 9's backlight panel
Tony Ware

Shining a light on backlighting

The HX3110 is an if-you-have-to-ask-you-can’t-afford-it 31-inch 4K reference monitor with a dual-layer LCD panel capable of color grading up to 4,000 nits. To date, most films are mastered to 1,000 nits because of the limitations of previous monitors. With the NX3110, even the smallest highlights can be displayed without clipping, and 2,000/1,000 nits settings allow filmmakers to ensure details translate to any current display scenarios. And the gradients on display were compelling. But it’s that 4,000 nits future that informed the development of the BRAVIA 9’s local dimming and backlight processing. 

Handing out sunglasses, our hosts had us turn to the other side of the darkened room, draped in blackout curtains. On one table was a BRAVIA 9 without its LCD panel, with an intact TV on the floor in front of it. To the side were two sets from a competitor in an identical arrangement [see image below]. Can the BRAVIA 9 reach the brightness levels or shading of a tens of thousands of dollars professional monitor without clipping? No, but it did demo the response time and object recognition of the “XR Backlight Master Drive” and newly developed IC [LED Driver] system [see above], as well as show off the color volume and specular highlights, which emulated some of the HX3110’s vivid reproduction admirably. The naked backlight, well, illuminated the level of definition 22-bit channel control can produce. And a granular grasp of each component and current also means 20% less power consumption, according to Sony.

This will also come into play in one of Sony’s new partnerships. The BRAVIA 7, 8, and 9 will all feature Prime Video Calibrated Mode—announced at the event by BA Winston, VP, Technology, Amazon Prime Video. A Sony-exclusive feature (at least initially), this algorithm auto-adjusts picture settings for the content streaming (movies, TV, live sports, etc.), screen type, and the light conditions in the room. (Prime Video joins similar processing for Netflix and the Sony Pictures Core app.) IMAX Enhanced, Dolby Vision, HLG, and HDR10 support—plus 4K 120Hz, VRR, ALLM, Auto Tone Mapping, and other “Perfect for PS5” features for gamers—make sure all the picture mode boxes are checked. 4K X-Reality PRO, XR Clear Image, XR Triluminos PRO, XR Motion Clarity (120Hz native refresh rate), and X-Wide Angle with X-Anti-Reflection underlie upscaling, color mapping, etc.

As for the BRAVIA 8 OLED, it’s 10% brighter while being 30% slimmer than 2023’s A80L. The BRAVIA 7 is 790% brighter than last year’s full-array LED X90L but lacks the flagship’s precise lighting and peak management. It’s the BRAVIA 9 that’s an upgrade from every angle—including the viewing angle, which exhibited low off-axis desaturation. I look forward to testing one to bring all the shadowy details into the light.

Two televisions displaying their LED capabilities.
Sony

Elevating more than brightness

Obviously, Sony believes Mini-LED has a … bright future. But what’s cinema without being equally saturated in sound? Whereas the BRAVIA 9 operates under a mantra of more is more, the BRAVIA Theater Bar 9 makes a statement that less isn’t less. The 2024 soundbar, which replaces the HT-A7000 [a Dolby Atmos soundbar that impressed our reviewer], is 36% smaller with no decrease in capability thanks to its 13-driver array and 360 Spatial Sound Mapping technology filling in the virtual channels for spatial audio. Integrated with a BRAVIA 9 TV and augmented by wireless SA-RS5 satellite speakers and the SA-SW5 subwoofer, the Theater Bar 9 delivered 7.1.4 channels and plenty of energy. Thanks to AI-powered Voice Zoom 3 and “Acoustic Center Sync,” which uses the BRAVIA 9 as the center channel (and the TV now has up-firing Beam Tweeters and Frame Tweeters), dialog stayed anchored and audible even as action swelled. The demo was dynamic, despite the challenges of being in an acoustically treated recording studio full of irregular surfaces. (The Theater Bar 8 offers similar soundfield features but with 11 drivers within a slimmer, less powerful footprint.)

The real surprise was the BRAVIA Theater Quad system, which maximizes minimalism with four fabric-wrapped panel-like powered speakers with four drivers each (tweeter, mid, woofer, and up-firing). The wireless speakers self-calibrate to adjust volume and create 16 phantom channels based on their placement (and they’re purpose-built to be wall-mount friendly but also stand-suitable). They’re also wireless subwoofer compatible. Flanking a BRAVIA 9 hung a touch above eye/ear level, with the other two Quad components behind the sitting area, the Theater Quad system delivered an even more immersive experience than the Theater Bar 9, with audible overhead effects. Flexible positioning plus fluid sound? Yes, thank you. Speakers that stand out by blending in are so hot right now.

Individual parts of Sony's soundbar displayed on a table.
Sony

There was one last stop on our tour of Sony Pictures and Sony products, and that was to Pixomondo—a virtual production company/LED soundstage. Combining a modular wall of 1,400 display panels with infrared motion-tracking cameras to render perspective changes in real-time, Pixomondo allows directors to film free-flowing action in virtual environments (like, say, a starship). It also allows journalists to take pictures of the TVs and soundbars staged in multiple suites of varying moods, all without leaving one space [as shown below]. Placed against a towering crescent of monitors, the new BRAVIA setups were visually eclipsed yet still stood out. Colorful screensavers cranked, it was quite the contrast(s) … talk about heightening the experience.

Sony's new televisions staged in a large indoor room.
Sony

BRAVIA TV and soundbar models and prices, once available 

BRAVIA 9 Mini LED

  • 85″ Class (84.6″ diag): $5,499.99 USD MSRP
  • 75″ Class (74.5″ diag): $3,999.99 USD MSRP
  • 65″ Class (64.5″ diag): $3,299.99 USD MSRP 

BRAVIA 8 OLED

  • 77″ Class (76.7″ diag): $3,899.99 USD MSRP 
  • 65″ Class (64.5″ diag): $2,799.99 USD MSRP  
  • 55″ Class (54.6″ diag): $1,999.99 USD MSRP 

BRAVIA 7 Mini LED

  • 85″ Class (84.6″ diag): $3,499.99 USD MSRP
  • 75″ Class (74.5″ diag): $2,799.99 USD MSRP
  • 65″ Class (64.5″ diag): $2,299.99 USD MSRP
  • 55″ Class (54.6″ diag): $1,899.99 USD MSRP

BRAVIA 3 LED

  • 85″ Class (84.6″ diag): $1,799.99 USD MSRP
  • 75″ Class (74.5″ diag): $1,299.99 USD MSRP
  • 65″ Class (64.5″ diag): $999.99 USD MSRP 
  • 55″ Class (54.6″ diag): $849.99 USD MSRP
  • 50″ Class (49.5″ diag): $699.99 USD MSRP 
  • 43″ Class (42.5″ diag): $599.99 USD MSRP

BRAVIA Theater Quad has a suggested retail price of $2,499.99 USD 

BRAVIA Theater Bar 9 has a suggested retail price of $1,399.99 USD 

BRAVIA Theater Bar 8 has a suggested retail price of $999.99 USD 

BRAVIA Theater U has a suggested retail price of $299.99 USD

The post Sony’s new TVs take Mini-LED to the max: Here’s what you should know appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Klipsch speakers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-klipsch-speakers/ Fri, 19 Apr 2024 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609834
The best Klipsch speakers of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

The top speakers from a venerable speaker maker since 1946.

The post The best Klipsch speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best Klipsch speakers of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Klipsch Reference Premiere RP-8000F II on a plain white background. Klipsch Reference Premiere RP-8000F II
SEE IT

Premium, surround sound-ready stereo towers well designed from top to bottom for high-output, highly emotional entertainment.

Best Splurge Speakers photo The Nines
SEE IT

The ultimate multi-use speakers for analog and digital music lovers alike.

Best budget Klipsch The Austin on a plain white background. Klipsch Austin
SEE IT

A multi-driver $100 speaker that almost fits in a pants pocket.

Klipsch speakers have impressed the audio world since the company’s inception in 1946, and the tradition of continually releasing new, innovative hardware has continued for the past 78 years. In recent years, Klipsch has branched out from passive floorstanding and bookshelf speakers into making powered and portable Bluetooth speakers. The company’s attention to high-energy acoustics and dual focus on both audio quality and value have helped it stand out even with increased competition from both new and legacy speaker makers. The best Klipsch speakers will extract all the dynamic details of your music, movies, and video games at home and on the go.

How we chose the best Klipsch speakers

Klipsch makes an enormous number of speakers, so winnowing down the best required us to take into consideration the most common ways people will use them. After careful consideration we decided on portable speakers for on-the-go listening, passive and active speakers for music listening, and a soundbar for those who want a more compact home theater system. Our recommendations are based on a mix of hands-on testing and research to determine the best choice in each given category.

The best Klipsch speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

Ready to set up a home theater or upgrade from a pair of speakers with toasted tweeters and worn-out woofers? It’s time to hear what your music, movies, and games really sound like with a set of Klipsch speakers.

Best overall: Klipsch Reference Premiere RP-8000F II

Klipsch

SEE IT

Specs

  • Powered: No
  • Dimensions: 22.04 x 14.96 x 48.42 inches
  • Weight: 61.4 pounds
  • Price: $1,198

Pros

  • Triple driver audio system
  • Aluminum feet designed to absorb vibrations
  • Aesthetically pleasing

Cons

  • Price

Klipsch’s Reference Premiere RP-8000F II speakers typify what makes the company’s audio hardware so impressive and revered. Yes, the floorstanding speakers are large, but each cabinet houses multiple drivers: a pair of eight-inch woofers and one-inch tweeters. These woofers are made from a cerametallic material, which Klipsch says maximizes their efficiency while minimizing the potential for distortion. In addition, specially designed bass ports allow for more extension with less noise. This is especially important because the woofers will be responsible for accurately representing the dynamic width of midrange and low frequencies unless you connect a subwoofer to your home audio system.

The speakers’ titanium LTS tweeters and vented housings are mounted onto Tractrix horns, a proprietary component designed by Klipsch to ensure detailed, accurate reproduction. The silicone composite horn is flared so that the tweeter’s sound is properly dispersed outward. Klipsch says this design is an efficient way for treble sounds to always clear the enclosure with deliberate directivity and minimum reverb from wall reflections, lowering the probability of harsh harmonics and sibilant sounds.

If you like to listen to your music loud, the RP8000F II’s cast aluminum feet may be a most appealing feature. They keep the speaker from sitting flush on the floor, so vibrations from loud sounds don’t rattle the cabinet, which causes distortion. While these speakers were designed for stereo listening, each one has a pair of connectors toward the top of the cabinet that allow you to connect one of Klipsch’s RP-500SA upward-firing surround sound speakers to them. This, along with a switchable crossover setting, will allow you to listen to music mixed in Dolby Atmos without hooking those additional speakers up to your AV receiver. Klipsch includes a pair of “jumper cables” with the RP8000F IIs for this purpose. It’s great to know there’s a built-in upgrade path if you’re starting to build a home theater system and are starting with these speakers.

Yes, they’re expensive, but there’s a reason Klipsch has labeled the RP-8000F IIs as reference speakers. They’re well worth the price if you have enough space for a pair of floor-standing speakers and care about premium sound.

Best splurge: Klipsch The Nines

Sarah Jones

SEE IT

Specs

  • Powered: Yes
  • Dimensions: 13.38 x 9.5 x 19.13 inches
  • Weight: 66 pounds
  • Price: $1,499

Pros

  • Enormous woofers for a relatively compact cabinet (compared to a tower speaker)
  • Designed for both analog and digital music listening
  • Loaded with inputs

Cons

  • Price

The Nines is an all-in-one audio system that blew us away during our time with them. Klipsch outfitted its powered speakers with a single eight-inch woofer and one-inch tweeter mounted onto a Tractrix horn. While they don’t have the exact same components as the Reference Premiere RP-8000F IIs, they share the same DNA, if not the dimensions. You’ll get enormous sound—both in depth and volume—from speakers just over a foot-and-a-half tall.

Part of The Nines’ appeal is their versatility. Like the smaller Fives and Sevens, these powered speakers have an RCA phono input, USB port, HDMI port, optical audio port, and subwoofer output, meaning you can connect them to virtually any component. It’s conceivable that one could hook up a turntable, TV, and computer up to The Nines simultaneously and use them as home audio, home theater, and computer speakers with the flick of a switch.

And because The Nines have a built-in phono stage, you won’t need an external phono preamp or AV receiver for them to be excellent turntable speakers. Discerning digital music listeners will be able to listen to 24-bit 192kHz natively through any of its digital inputs, or stream compressed audio to the speakers wirelessly over Bluetooth. This is it if you’re looking for one set of speakers that can fit into any audio system.

Best portable: Klipsch Nashville

Tony Ware / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Powered: Yes
  • Dimensions: 3.19 x 3.07 x 7.01 inches
  • Weight: 2.4 pounds
  • Price: $149

Pros

  • 24-hour battery life
  • Can connect to up to 10 additional Klipsch speakers
  • Reverse charging

Cons

  • Bluetooth only

Klipsch’s Nashville is the mid-sized option in the company’s “Music City” portable speaker series, and it delivers a lot for its small size. The speaker has a pair of 2.25-inch full-range drivers behind its signature copper logo and black grille—one front and one rear-firing so it can be enjoyed from any angle. The Bluetooth speaker’s drivers are augmented by a pair of bass radiators for cleaner low-end response. There aren’t any onboard tone controls, but you can tweak how the Nashville sounds using the Klipsch Connect app on iOS and Android if you’d like to dial in different frequencies or adjust its EQ to suit the type of music you like listening to the most.

The Nashville supports Bluetooth 5.3, the latest most stable version of the wireless audio protocol, though it only connects to smartdevices and computers via the baseline SBC codec. It does, however, support a feature called “Broadcast Mode” that allows you to connect it to up to 10 other Klipsch speakers. This feature will come in handy if you’d like to create a whole-home wireless audio system or just want to be able to stream the same track to two places during a larger party. Broadcast Mode works over Bluetooth, as the Nashville doesn’t support Wi-Fi audio streaming. Similarly, there’s no Aux input on this speaker, which means it’s Bluetooth or bust. We’re pleased that the Nashville has an IP67 rating, so it won’t get damaged when exposed to water or dust.

Klipsch says the Nashville supports up to 24 hours of music playback per charge, but the amount you get will be dependant on your listening volume and whether Broadcast Mode is engaged. The speaker charges via USB-C, and you can use its charging port to top up the batteries in your other devices by plugging them in. Using the Nashville as a power bank will deplete its battery a lot more quickly, but the feature is useful in a pinch.

Of course, none of this is worth a dang if the speaker ain’t got that twang. Luckily, the Nashville’s 60Hz to 20kHz frequency response is surprisingly robust for a speaker its size. At 50 to 60 percent volume, the speaker maintains pleasingly throaty dynamics with minimal distortion, thanks to its DSP. Things start getting iffy above that, so if it’s volume you seek, look to the bigger $299 Detroit speaker (the elongated speaker in the image above). Playback is in mono but there’s still a good sense of instrument separation, aided by some EQing in the app to bump tight bass and boost treble without tizziness. The Nashville is a speaker that can hold a note and hold up under the conditions of a pool party or beach bash.

Best soundbar: Klipsch Flexus CORE 200

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Powered: Yes
  • Dimensions: 4.94 x 44 x 3.1 inches
  • Weight: 22 pounds
  • Price: $499

Pros

  • Built-in subwoofers
  • Upward-firing drivers for Atmos height channels
  • Can be augmented with a dedicated subwoofer/surround speakers

Cons

  • Requires a wide space.

The Flexus CORE 200 is Klipsch’s newest soundbar, and it’s quickly become one of the best we’ve ever tested. At 44-inches wide, you’ll need a large media center to accommodate the home theater speaker, but you’ll be rewarded handsomely once you hear how music, video games, and movies sound. The Flexus CORE 200 has six 2.25 ceramic drivers (one on the left and one on the right, two in the center, and two facing upward) plus two 4-inch subwoofers. We’ve never heard better bass response or single-point surround sound from another compact soundbar at this price point (or a bit beyond).

The low end was shockingly tight when listening to explosions while playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild on the Nintendo Switch OLED or titles with bombastic bopping soundtracks like Penny’s Big Breakaway. The Flexus CORE 200 could recreate the ambiance of a theater or hall when watching comedy specials like Neal Brennan’s Crazy Good and Demetri Martin’s Demetri Deconstructed. Even casual YouTube videos sound great, with clear separation between voiceovers and sound effects.

This performance is possible because Klipsch partnered with Onkyo when developing the Flexus CORE 200. The former designed the enclosure and acoustic components, while the latter was in charge of developing the processor inside. Onkyo has a long history of making AV receivers and amps and has brought that expertise to the table in a big way. It’s no surprise that their technology was able to recreate the experience of listening to a more traditional multi-speaker multichannel setup.

On its own, we can recommend Klipsch’s Flexus CORE 200 as a premium 3.1.2-channel soundbar for anyone who’s at least a little surround sound curious. However, we were also able to test it alongside Klipsch’s new $299 10-inch Flexus Sub 100 and $249 wireless Flexus Surround 100 speakers. This trio is a grand slam, offering better-balanced sound and more immersive audio experiences when listening to Dolby Atmos mixes of albums like The Beach Boys’ Pet Sounds and Pink Floyd’s Dark Side of the Moon, with spatial audio ping-ponging off the ceiling and walls around you.

Whether you use it on its own or with Klipsch’s optional satellites/sub, we cannot find a major fault with the Flexus CORE 200 system. If you have enough space, it’s a home theater upgrade you’ll deserve.

Best budget: Klipsch Austin

Tony Ware / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Powered: Yes
  • Dimensions: 1.73 x 4.13 x 4.13 inches
  • Weight: .88 pounds
  • Price: $99

Pros

  • 12-hour battery life
  • IP67 durability rating
  • Price

Cons

  • May not get loud enough for certain situations

If you need an ultra-portable, highly affordable Klipsch speaker, The Austin is the one you’ll need. This personal speaker retains many of the looks and features that impressed us during our time with its Music City sibling the Nashville, including IP67 water and dust resistance, support for Bluetooth 5.3, Klipsch’s Broadcast Mode, speakerphone capabilities, and reverse charging. Klipsch says The Austin can last up to 12 hours per charge, which is great for a speaker conceivably fitting in a pair of cargo shorts.

Despite its small size, Klipsch managed to fit a 2-inch woofer and separate tweeter into its compact square enclosure. This means that even though the Austin is mono, you’ll get better separation between crisp high and rich mid frequencies than you would with most single-driver ultra-portable speakers. The 10W 70Hz to 20kHz Austin is not going to be a suitable speaker system for a large space or a bass lover, but that’s not what it was designed for. Klipsch did outfit the speaker with a built-in strap, which you can use to attach it to a bicycle’s handlebars or on a backpack. Don’t be fooled by The Austin’s size and price, Klipsch spent the time to optimize its performance, so you won’t get a significantly diminished experience when listening to your tunes. We’ll be including it in our favorite portable Bluetooth speakers in the future.

What to consider when shopping for the best Klipsch speakers

There are many factors to consider when deciding which Klipsch speakers are right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide:

Active vs. Passive

The first consideration you’ll need to make when deciding which Klipsch speakers to get is whether you’d like them to be active (with built-in amplification) or passive (without that). Passive speakers require an AV receiver or other amp and speaker cable for power and to connect to sources like a turntable or computer. Active speakers have built-in amplification (and more and more frequently some sort of DAC and/or wireless streaming capabilities), which allows you to connect components to them using an HDMI cable, optical audio, or RCA cable, as well as Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth. Active speakers are typically heavier, and their power supply and other audio hardware take up space inside each speaker’s cabinet, leaving less room for audio components. Passive speakers are lighter, only have audio hardware inside, but don’t have any utility on their own out of the box.

Style

Traditional Klipsch speakers come in the two classic form factors: bookshelf and floorstanding. Bookshelf speakers are more compact, and can fit more easily on top of a media center or in a smaller space like bedrooms and home offices (assuming you also factor in space for an amp, or you pick a powered pair). Their smaller size does limit how many drivers they can have and the size of those drivers. Floorstanding (aka tower) speakers are significantly taller but have more room for multiple larger drivers, which means more extension and greater separation between frequency bands, resulting in a more dynamic response. These speakers sit directly on the floor—as their name suggests—so you’ll need space on both sides of your home audio system to make them work.

In addition, Klipsch has introduced its soundbars and a new line of portable Bluetooth speakers in addition to passive and active bookshelf and floorstanding speakers. These speakers follow Klipsch’s adherence to strict audio quality, and come in a trio of sizes—all easily taken on the go.

Connectivity

As we outlined earlier, Klipsch has outfitted its powered speakers with several means of connectivity, which will allow you to use them in several ways simultaneously. For example, The Nines speakers have a USB port, HDMI port, and RCA input (with a grounding peg), which means you can conceivably connect them to a computer, TV, and turntable. These active speakers also support Bluetooth for wireless audio streaming.

FAQs

Q: What is Klipsch famous for?

Klipsch is famous for making premium speakers and headphones, particularly loudspeakers featuring the recognizable Tractrix horn-mounted driver for efficient high-frequency transfer and a fleshy, high-fidelity presence across an almost multidimensional soundstage.

Q: Is Sonos or Klipsch better?

Both Sonos and Klipsch speakers have pros and cons. Klipsch has the advantage when it comes to passive speakers, while Sonos is better known for its Wi-Fi-connected speakers. Both companies make exceptional audio hardware.

Q: What is Klipsch signature sound?

In a 2014 blog post, Mark Cesavent—the company’s senior vice president of global product development—defined the Klipsch sound as “… akin to the live concert experience—powerful, detailed and emotional. Klipsch sound is easy to recognize by the everyday music listener to the ardent audiophile. It is best heard in a stereo, 2-channel HiFi system for playing music.”

Q: How much do Klipsch speakers cost?

Klipsch speakers occupy every price point, but our recommendations cost between $100 and $1,500.

Final thoughts on the best Klipsch speakers

Klipsch’s continued efforts to make the best-sounding speakers for music listeners and home theater enthusiasts after nearly 80 is laudable. The Flexus CORE 200, a 2024 release, is the perfect example of this. The soundbar supports Dolby Atmos—an audio format that wasn’t even around 10 years ago, much less when the company was founded—yet it adheres to the same fundamentals of Klipsch’s most traditional passive speakers. By using common connectors like HDMI, RCA, and USB on its powered speakers, Klipsch ensures their longevity and usefulness as you upgrade your current audio components. This commitment to both sustainability by design and audio quality has kept Klipsch as relevant today as it was in the 1940s and will carry the company through into the future.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Klipsch speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cannabis essentials for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-cannabis-essentials/ Wed, 19 Apr 2023 20:20:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=534082
A lineup of cannabis essentials on a white background
Amanda Reed

Ditch your bar cart for a cannabis cabinet—and pack it with these essentials.

The post The best cannabis essentials for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of cannabis essentials on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best grinder A Santa Cruz Shredder grinder on a blue and white background Santa Cruz Shredder
SEE IT

This aircraft-grade aluminum grinder granulates the stickiest of the icky.

Best infuser system LEVO C Levo C
SEE IT

Create cannabis-rich oils for homemade edibles in an easy and low-key process.

Best handheld vaporizer A Pax Plus cannabis vaporizer on a rolling tray with some oregano seasoning Pax Plus
SEE IT

An intuitive ingestion device that’s discreet and direct.

So you want to smoke weed—either for medicinal or recreational purposes—and you’re looking for a place to start. Sure, you could walk into that headshop down the street, but they most definitely sell counterfeit Puff Bars, and you feel a little claustrophobic surrounded by all that expensive glass. Plus, the college kid behind the counter is a little bit too close in age to your own kid. Thankfully, we at Popular Science share how science shows up in our everyday life, and cannabis and its extracts are quite scientific. Consider this an essentials list of what you’ll want to keep on hand for your next sesh, or what to buy to get started. Move over bar cart, cannabis cabinet has entered the chat!

Remember that every state has different laws regarding cannabis use, so check them out before using. Once you can hit “Add To Cart” with confidence, we’ve cultivated Spotify playlist for both sativa and indica strains to help make sure every hit is a hit.

Best rolling tray: Santa Cruz Shredder Hemp Rolling Tray with Spout

Santa Cruz Shredder

SEE IT

Learning how to roll a joint is a journey all its own, but procuring a solid rolling tray is an essential first step. You can use it as a surface to stuff your cones and pack handheld vaporizers or bowls without getting cannabis everywhere, thanks to high curved edges that prevent mess. A spout makes it easy to put any leftover ground cannabis back into your grinder or storage container. We like this one from Santa Cruz Shredder that has both, and is made of biodegradable hemp. If you’re looking for rolling tray that doubles as decor, we love this glass Keith Haring rolling tray from Higher Standards that could pass as a catch-all plate in your foyer. 

Best rolling papers: Blazy Susan Rolling Papers

Blazy Susan

SEE IT

The Blazy Susan rolling papers are fun to look at, thanks to their bright pink hue, but they’re also some of the best rolling papers on the market. They’re vegan, non-GMO, and made from high-quality wood pulp. They also burn slowly and evenly, which prevents canoeing. We recommend starting with 1 ¼-inch papers if you’re new to rolling (and we won’t judge you if you pick up some pre-rolled cones, in case of difficulties or time constraints). And if you are inviting like-minded friends over for a social smoke, grab one of the company’s namesake spinning rolling trays (available in colorful plastic and limited edition woods), with its specialized inserts and cuts for every manner of supplies, accessories, and end products.

Best cones: Edie Parker Crush Cones in Excite Mint

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

These aren’t your average cones. These cones from Edie Parker come in a variety of flavors, including peach, grape, strawberry, and banana. We’re personally huge fans of the mint flavor for a cool fresh taste while taking a hit. Simply pack your ground cannabis into the cone, ignite, find the flavor pearl in the filter tip, crush, and inhale. They also are great to pull out and pass around at a party. Of course, if you don’t need a fun flavor with your joint, we love Blazy Susan’s cones. We’re fans of the Shorty size, which makes for a perfect joint for yourself when you’re seshing alone. 

Best handheld vaporizer: PAX Plus

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

There are many benefits to vaporizing cannabis compared to igniting it. Vaporizers use convection, conduction, and sometimes even both to heat your weed to release those sweet terpenes and cannabinoids. The result is better for your lungs and provides a more consistent flavor and aroma. It’s also less stinky than other means of ingestion. You can use the already vaped bud (ABV) in edibles since the vaporizing process decarboxylates, or decarbs, the cannabis. The PAX Mini is our favorite handheld vaporizer and one of the easiest to use (and it’s often on sale around a certain time in April). Simply click the top once, wait until the purple light turns green, and inhale. You won’t have to worry about temperature either—the PAX Mini will cool down when not in use and heat up when it’s picked back up. Concentrates might not be your jam (yet!), but the PAX Plus comes with a concentrate chamber to enjoy the wax, shatter, or budder of your choice. Speaking of …

Best for concentrates: Puffco Peak Pro

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Dabbing is cool because it involves torches and fire, but it’s also dangerous for just that reason. The Puffco Peak Pro solves that by ditching the fire, making for a more approachable and beginner-friendly device. The instruction manual is easy to read and follow—you don’t have to be a dabbing expert to use the Peak Pro. It’s also Bluetooth-app enabled for customized temperature and color settings. If you’re looking for something more handheld that’s less expensive, the company’s Proxy Travel Pipe is for you. Its silicone body is shatterproof and comes with a pocket for tools, like a loading tool or a cotton swab for cleaning. 

Best splurge: Storz & Bickel Volcano Hybrid

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

The Rolls Royce of tabletop vaporizers, the Storz & Bickel Volcano Hybrid is absolutely worth its almost $700 price tag, thanks to its high-quality materials and workmanship that gives you a long service life. The Volcano Classic is cheaper (and just as good), but the temperature dial doesn’t list the actual temperature. The Hybrid changes that, letting you know exactly when it’s warm enough for use. You can choose to ingest via the included Tube Kit (which is a hookah-type hose) or the classic Valve Balloon. If you have an Android phone, you can control the Volcano Hybrid with your phone using the S&B app. We personally only bring out the Volcano Hybrid on special occasions, and it definitely makes for a conversation starter among stoners. 

Best waterpipe: Session Goods Bong

Session Goods

SEE IT

Waterpipes are usually … kind of ugly. Not the Session Goods Bong, which is modern, durable, and easy to clean. The included cleaning caps and mouth cover prevent spills when you’re cleaning—just fill it with some isopropyl alcohol and a little salt, shake, and you’re all good. The bong itself is made of sturdy borosilicate glass, and a silicon foot cover hides your nasty bong water, acts as a water line, and protects your piece. Two included bowls—small and large—let you choose how much you want to consume. Plus, nine colors will help you coordinate your bong with your living room color story. And who doesn’t love color coordination?

Best pipe: Laundry Day Tanjun pipe

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Pipes are a great introductory tool for beginners but aren’t always the prettiest. Laundry Day’s Tanjun—and the company’s other collection of smokeware—is meant to be displayed on your coffee table and ogled when passed among friends. It has all the pipe basics—bowl, carb, mouthpiece—and is made of borosilicate glass for toughness. Use the pipe as an incense holder when it’s not in use. 

Best hemp wick: Twisted Bee 100% Organic Hemp Wick

Twisted Bee

SEE IT

It’s fine to light a bowl with a lighter, but sometimes you don’t want to breathe in the butane it emits. The smoke is much hotter when using a lighter and burns off more cannabinoids and terpenes. Hemp wicks solve this problem by being a flame conduit, which creates a cleaner flavor and a more flavorful hit. This one from Twisted Bee uses organic hemp with a natural beeswax coating that doesn’t interfere with your flower’s flavor. You can even use it for crafting. Since you get 200 feet of it, you won’t have to worry about running out. 

Best lighter: Clipper Lighter

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Sure, everyone is familiar with the BIC lighter for ignition needs. Step up to a Clipper, which is windproof, water-resistant, and refillable, making it more friendly to the Earth compared to its lighter brethren. You can also replace the flint, and there’s a poking tool for packing down hand-rolled cigarettes. Plus, the Clipper wheel is easier to strike compared to BIC lighters.  

Best joint holder: The Clinger

The Clinger

SEE IT

I personally have dug into my ludicrously capacious bag, the eyes of the group on me, searching for a lighter that is evading my clutches. It’s a humbling experience—one that you don’t have to go through with The Clinger, which is smell-proof, crush-proof, holds a king-sized joint, and hugs your lighter like it’s their friend. It can hold a BIC or a Clipper lighter and fits easily in your pocket. You won’t have to worry about digging for a lighter or accidentally smashing a joint ever again.

Best grinder: Santa Cruz Shredder

Santa Cruz Shredder

SEE IT

This grinder is made of solid aircraft-grade aluminum and has a scratch-free finish for long-lasting use. Thirty-two diamond-shaped sharp teeth pulverize even the stickiest cannabis to make a fluffy and even grind. We recommend a three-piece grinder that separates the flower from the kief, the potent trichomes that have broken away and separated from the flower. You can use those the add a little zhuzh to your joints and bowls. A magnetic lock system protects your cannabis from moisture and spillage, meaning you can take it to and fro without any worries. It’s a pricey grinder, but it’s absolutely worth it.

Best cleaner: Grand Master Smoke

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

You can use isopropyl alcohol and a little salt to clean your pieces. However, we’re also fond of Grand Master Smoke. This cleaner has taken the crustiest bongs and turned them as good as new. Simply pour the liquid into a large container or leakproof bag, add your piece, wait 1-3 hours (try soaking overnight for heavily used pieces), drain out the excess liquid from the piece, rinse with warm water, and you’re done! It also helps deodorize your pieces so they aren’t so stinky. And no one wants to hit from a stinky bong!

Best 510 battery: Ooze Twist Slim Pen 2.0

Ooze

SEE IT

I’ve certainly used 510 batteries that work but aren’t made of quality materials. And who keeps track of that proprietary charger that they all come with? The Ooze Slim Pen can be charged using this proprietary charger, but you can also use a micro USB cable. (Which you probably have a million of around your house.) You can draw the pen in two ways: by pressing the button down and inhaling, or just by inhaling, thanks to auto draw. It shuts off after 12 minutes of inactivity, saving you battery in the long run. And you can adjust the voltage for a customized experience

Best infuser system: Levo C

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

One of the knocks against making homemade edibles—beyond the ever-growing number of high-quality premade options—is infusing oil or butter with your flower, which can be a smelly operation. Levo’s C is a countertop appliance that makes the process easy. All you need to do is fill its herb pod with bud (up to one ounce) and the glass basin with oil or butter (up to one liter). Once your ingredients are set, you place the glass basin onto the Levo C’s heating pad, select a time and temperature, and wait for the infusion to complete. Making infused oil or butter using this method won’t be quicker than a traditional method, but the results will be more consistent since the temperature will be regulated. Additionally, you won’t have to worry about standing around and stirring the flower constantly to ensure a proper result.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best cannabis essentials for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-budget-bluetooth-speakers/ Fri, 04 Feb 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=423525
Best budget Bluetooth speakers on a white background.

Get affordable audio for all with the best budget Bluetooth speakers.

The post The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best budget Bluetooth speakers on a white background.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Anker Soundcore 3 on a white background Anker Soundcore 3
SEE IT

A well-rounded speaker with a solid build that won’t break the bank.

Best for a party Tribit Outdoor Portable Speaker on a white background Tribit XSound Mega
SEE IT

A speaker equipped with flashy features for a fraction of the price.

Best for travel JBL Clip 4 JBL Clip 4
SEE IT

A super portable speaker  designed to move with you thanks to its carabiner-like design.

There is no shortage of Bluetooth speakers under $100, even $50, which can make choosing the right one for your listening needs particularly difficult. While you’d think a less expensive option might not boast outstanding audio quality or unbeatable battery life, there are many models that are going to deliver exactly what you need when it comes to wire-free listening. Hone in on your top priorities and search accordingly. Do you need something waterproof? A speaker that will clip onto a backpack? Or maybe something extra bass to bump at a party? When it comes to the best budget Bluetooth speakers, it’s okay to focus on one or two central features so you get the most bang for your buck. Here are picks for speakers that can fit your needs and your budget.

How we chose the best budget Bluetooth speakers

Many of the speakers recommended here have been personally tested by myself or our team, which is why we confidently recommend this selection. We retested some of our personal favorites and compared them to new units from other reputable brands with a focus on sound quality. While smaller portable speakers can’t deliver audio that’s as precise as premium stereo or multi-channel models, we made sure to pick products that preserve the integrity of our favorite albums. To further pare down the list, we only looked at speakers that currently retail for under $115, primarily focusing on those around $50, while paying particular attention to durability, portability, and battery life. Then, we considered special features like onboard controls, EQ customization, and connectivity to bring you the best of the best when it comes to affordable Bluetooth speakers. 

The best budget Bluetooth speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

If you visit my apartment, you will immediately see a veritable wall of Bluetooth speakers, large and small. I have what some may call a deep enthusiasm for portable sound that doesn’t require equally deep pockets or corners. And I’ve found that the best cheap Bluetooth speakers don’t have to sound dinky. In fact, many options provide solid sound for less. While shopping, consider your top priorities for your budget-friendly speaker. Do you emphasize battery life, portability, water resistance, or sound quality? Once you can answer this question, you can pick out an excellent speaker from our picks without spending a fortune.

Best overall: Anker Soundcore 3

Anker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Soundcore 3 is a well-rounded, budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker with an impressive 24 hours of battery life and the option to boost the bass without distortion. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 24 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 66 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX7
  • Size: 6.9 x 2.4 x 2.2 inches  

Pros

  • Excellent Battery Life 
  • Sound Quality 
  • Bass Up technology 
  • Customizable EQ 

Cons

  • Simplistic design
  • Voice assistant capability is lacking

The Soundcore 3 is a robust, portable Bluetooth speaker that won’t cost an arm and a leg, making it the best budget Bluetooth speaker overall. Available in four colors, this powerful unit utilizes 16 watts of power to push dual 1.5-inch drivers with titanium diaphragms. Meanwhile, dual passive radiators combine with improved BassUp technology to analyze music in real-time and work to punch up the low-end during your favorite bass-driven songs. Alongside BassUp, there are three additional preset EQs you can choose from, or customize your own using the Soundcore app. The treble on the Soundcore 3 stretches all the way up to 40kHz. Bluetooth 5.0 offers a consistently stable connection and PartyCast compatibility means you can link up to 100 Soundcore speakers for a truly impressive array of sound. To get a full battery faster, this speaker charges via USB-C, and the 24-hour battery life beats more expensive models. While $55 isn’t the steepest cost if you needed a replacement, an IPX7 rating means you won’t have to worry about water damage if you get caught in the rain or drop it in the pool. And if you’re definitely planning to fill a patio with friends, there’s also the Anker Soundcore Glow Mini, an outdoor-friendly speaker that offers 360-degree sound, a pulsing LED halo, and IPX7—all for less than $50.

Best for bass: Sony SRS-XB100

Sony

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SRS-XB100 is a compact, portable waterproof speaker that automatically boosts the bass for party-worthy sound wherever you are. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 16 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 32 feet
  • IP Rating: IP67
  • Size: 3.43 x 3.43 x 4.41 inches 

Pros

  • Removable strap
  • UV coating 
  • Five cool colorways
  • Extra Bass 

Cons

  • Extra bass isn’t adjustable 

If you’re looking for a compact speaker that weighs less than 1 pound and costs less than $50 but doesn’t sacrifice bass-booming sound, then the SRS-XB100 is the best bass Bluetooth speaker for you. With a 20Hz – 20kHz frequency response and a dedicated passive radiator to reinforce low-end, your music won’t be found lacking when it comes to heart-thumping beats. An IP67 rating means it’s protected from water and debris, so you can toss it into your beach bag without worrying about sand getting into the speaker grill. Available in five modern colors, each unit comes with a matching multiway strap, so you can easily carry the speaker if you run out of room in your backpack, or hang it up for easy access at a pool party. With an extra XB100 speaker, you can enable stereo mode, and a USB-C port means you can charge quickly to keep the party going all night long. And the integrated microphone means you can have a conference call from the campfire.

Best waterproof: Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 14 hours
  • Bluetooth range: 131 feet
  • IP rating: IP67
  • Size: 3.68 x 3.68 x 4.02 inches

Pros

  • Easily portable 
  • Can be submerged for up to 30 minutes 
  • Impressive volume 

Cons

  • No microphone 
  • No USB-C charging

The WONDERBOOM 3 from Ultimate Ears is a great option for any listener who needs the perfect shower speaker or pool-party pal. The unique design is an immediate eye-catcher, and the sound quality is genuinely impressive for its size. Power by two active drivers and two passive radiators, coverage is pretty great with solid reproduction across the lows, mids, and highs. Granted, it doesn’t have the heart-pounding bass a larger speaker would, but will certainly do for poolside, lakefront, or river raft listening.  Plus, it can be paired with a second WONDERBOOM for even better stereo sound. An Outdoor Boost button at the bottom of the speaker adjusts the sound to suit your environment better.

If you’ve ever seen a picture before of the WONDERBOOM 3, chances are it’s bobbing around in a pool or being sprayed with water from a rogue splash. This is, yes, because of target ads, but also because this tiny but mighty speaker is genuinely well-suited for “aquatic” listening. The IP67 rating means it’s essentially waterproof. Specifically, you can submerge this model in up to 1 meter of water for up to 30 minutes. It’s okay to accidentally drop this speaker in the pool, bathtub, or ocean. This rating also means it’s also protected from dust and debris. 

Build-wise, you get a stable rubber loop at the top of the speaker that can easily clip to a backpack or make for easier carrying. You’ll also get large, easy-to-use onboard controls, so you won’t have to get your pruney wet fingers all over your smartphone just to change the volume or skip a song. The WONDERBOOM 3 comes in four fun colors, including “Hot Pink” and “Performance Blue.” (And, if you dig the aesthetic and budget becomes less of a concern, the new, admittedly much more expensive EPICBOOM brings a lot more bass and even more battery to the party, while remaining floatable.)

Best for travel: JBL Clip 4

JBL

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Bluetooth range: 32 feet
  • IP rating: IP67

Pros

  • Excellent design
  • USB-C charging
  • Good volume

Cons

  • No fast charge 
  • No wired connectivity

The JBL Clip 4 is a small speaker designed to keep you connected wherever your travels take you. Weighing just over half a pound, with an integrated carabiner clip, you can attach this speaker to your backpack, suitcase, bike handle, lunch box, belt loop, etc. There are rubberized grips on the speaker’s backside to increase stability, and the textured wrap covering most of the speaker is easy to hold onto. All in all, this is the easiest speaker to grab and go if you’re hiking or cycling; plus, it has an IP67 rating, so you can even attach it to your shower rod, beach tent, or foldable kayak (yes, it’s a thing).

Sound quality is pretty solid for such a small unit thanks to an impressive dynamic driver; plus, it can get loud for a 5-watt output (JBL knows how to build a potent party speaker and sensational shower speaker). Yes, it’s a little lacking in low-end, but that’s par for the course. Overall, this little guy sounds great. Sound can be controlled by five onboard buttons and charges via USB-C. 

If you don’t want to play the $80 market price for the Clip 4, check out early models, like the Clip 3, which are still available for just under $50.

Best budget: Oontz Angle 3

OontZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With an impressive connectivity range, solid battery life, and thousands of positive user reviews, the Oontz Angle 3 is one of the best budget Bluetooth speakers for those looking to spend less than $35.

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 14 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Approx. 100 feet 
  • IP Rating: IPX5
  • Size: 5.3 x 2.8 x 2.6 inches

Pros

  • Extended Connectivity Range
  • Price
  • Stereo Drivers

Cons

  • Not fully environment-proof 
  • Limited onboard controls 
  • Sound quality is just okay

While the Angle 3 isn’t touting many bells and whistles, it will have what you need to take tunes with you on the go. It’s got 10 watts that power acoustic stereo drivers, as well as a passive radiator—all wrapped up in 10 different colorways. Equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, this wedge-like speaker delivers a strong connection across 100 feet and is compatible with most current devices. With its IPX5 rating, you won’t want to toss this model into the pool, but you don’t need to worry about a few splashes or drops of rain. While the volume is certainly there, don’t expect a lot when it comes to wide stereo, booming bass, or true clarity across mids and highs. It’ll do the trick for lite listening on the go, but it won’t necessarily stand up to other, more expensive models. That being said, if you just need something that’s far preferable to silence, the Angle 3 should do the trick.

Best party speaker: Tribit XSound Mega

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Boosted bass, additional EQ presents, and a veritable light show deliver a high-end listening experience at a reasonable price. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 20 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 98 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX7
  • Size: 10.66 x 3.42 x 3.14 inches 

Pros: 

  • 3 listening modes 
  • Dual charging/powerbank ports  
  • Music-activated lighting 
  • Carrying strap 

Cons: 

  • Some distortion at high volumes 
  • Pricier

If you’re having a gathering with more people you’re going to want more sound, and that may mean spending a little more, so here’s the best Bluetooth party speaker if your budget can stretch slightly above $100. The Tribit XSound Mega, released in early January, follows the waterproof, outdoor-friendly, ultraportable XSound Go models with a similar form factor but significant upgrades when it comes to sound quality and visual appeal. 

Right out of the box, the Mega feels sleeker than some of its contemporaries with a texturized rubber surface that’s easy to grip, a black speaker grill, a discrete brand label, and smooth, integrated onboard controls. These seven intuitive buttons control power, Bluetooth pairing, play/pause, volume down, volume up, light adjustment, and EQ adjustment. Directly underneath the EQ Mode button are three indicators that will tell you which mode has been triggered: options include XBass, Music, and Audiobooks. At the back of the speaker is a rubber panel housing USB-A and USB-C ports for charging/using the 8000mAh battery as a powerbank to top off other devices, plus an AUX input. The included carrying strap is black and grey with silver hardware and two small carabiners easily clip onto the discrete embedded handles, which certainly helps shoulder the speaker’s 2.2 pounds. The visual pièce de résistance is the frame of LEDs that surrounds the front face of the speaker—a rainbow gradient of light that slowly cycles through colors while you pair your device. 

Bluetooth 5.0 pairing is simple and easy, following the standard protocol of most speakers. The Mega is also equipped with NFC (Near-Field Communication), this is the same technology that allows you to tap your phone at a point-of-purchase to use ApplePay or Android Pay. NFC eliminates the need to push buttons and scroll through settings by allowing you to simply tap your speaker and phone together to establish a secure connection. Unfortunately, Apple hasn’t equipped any of their phones with controllable NFC modes, so you can only take advantage of this function if you have an Android or another device running Windows 10 or higher. The final pairing option you can consider is Broadcast Mode, which will allow you to link more than 100 XSound Megas together for a boost in volume or stereo playback. 

When it comes to sound quality, this Tribit speaker has the thump if not exactly the clarity and soundstage of comparable models, like the JBL Charge 5. An impressive 30 watts power a driver with a pure titanium diaphragm, which combines with two passive radiators to reproduce low frequencies to 45Hz and high frequencies up to 14kHz. Audiobook mode successfully isolates the dulcet tones of Jim Dale, who you might recognize as the reader of the Harry Potter series, though the audio can get a little muddy if you are listening to a music- or sound design-heavy podcast. However, Isobel Campbell and Mark Lanegan’s sultry vocals and staccato keys on “Come Undone” are smooth and clear when Music mode is triggered. The low-end on Subtrakt’s “Wildfire” is big and bold when XBass is engaged, delivering a party-appropriate level of “thump” to get things going without overpowering the vocals. The volume can reach over 100 dB but some distortion does occur when pushed to its max, though that is to be expected from a speaker of this size. 

One of our favorite features is the light display, which flashes in time with the beat of whatever you are playing. You can select from different options: a continuous oval of rainbow lacing glowing around the speaker grill’s perimeter; colors pulsing rhythmically in a symmetrical left/right or top/bottom pair, almost mimicking the metering you’d see on a recording studio console or DAW; or a circuit traveling the display track changing color, speeding up and slowing down in time with the beat. You can also forgo the light display altogether, but a 20-hour battery life keeps all that flair from fading fast.

While this model is a bit more expensive than other budget-friendly models, you will certainly get what you pay for when it comes to audio quality and special features.

Best for (viewing) parties: EarFun UBOOM L

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Its wide, rich sound, surprising for a speaker this size, delivers a powerful listening experience at a reasonable price. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 16 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 50 feet
  • IP Rating: IP67
  • Size: 8.27 x 3.07 x 2.83 inches 

Pros 

  • Video mode 
  • Aux connection available 
  • Stereo Pairing

Cons 

  • Short charging cable 
  • Only available in black

The UBOOM L from EarFun is a budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker that delivers surprisingly impressive sound. While the texturized black grill, rubber trim, and raised buttons resemble its predecessors and contemporaries (like the Treblab HD77 or JBL Flip 5), its price:performance helps this compact speaker stand out in the sub-$100 crowd. Two 14-watt, 55mm drivers and dual passive radiators support potent but balanced playback across the full frequency range. Bluetooth 5.0 supports a stable connection for up to 100 feet of distance. Multiple devices can connect to the UBOOM L, so you can easily pass along the party playlist responsibilities; to really kick things up a notch, you can easily create a stereo pair using two UBOOM Ls, widening coverage and essentially doubling volume (great for gatherings). Three listening modes are available: Indoor, Outdoor, and Video—the most unique of the bunch. Using digital signal processing (DSP) technology, Indoor mode focuses on sonic clarity and depth, while Outdoor mode boosts volume and low-end bump. Video mode supports low-latency playback with lag reduced to 150ms, making it an excellent solution to greatly improve sound when watching movies and TV shows from a laptop or other device with smaller internal speakers. A built-in microphone makes hands-free calls an option, and an IP67 rating means the appropriately portable speaker is protected from dirt and water damage when you take it to the pool or on a trek.

Best smart speaker: Amazon Echo (4th Gen.)

Why it made the cut: For under $100, the 4th-gen. Amazon Echo is the perfect at-home speaker with a built-in microphone, impressive sound quality, and multiple connectivity options. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: Not rechargeable 
  • Bluetooth Range: 30 feet
  • IP Rating: None
  • Size: 5.7 x 5.7 x 5.2 inches

Pros

  • Sound quality 
  • Auxiliary port 
  • Built-in mic 

Cons

  • Not portable 
  • Not waterproof 

While the Amazon Echo is not a speaker you can take with you on the go, it is the best option for indoor listening if you’re assembling a smart-home system around Alexa. Like its Echo predecessors, the 4th-generation model is easy to use and compatible with many smart devices, doubling as a smart home hub for those who have smart lights, switches, doorbells, locks, and more. Even without the extra fixtures, Amazon’s voice assistant Alexa can help you set up timers, reminders, check the weather, call your family and friends, or call up your favorite playlists. The built-in microphone and speaker capabilities make for streamlined, hands-free communication. Installing more than one Echo in your home means you can program and sync multiroom music.

Available in three sleek colorways, the Echo will not only look good but sound good, with dual front-firing 0.8-inch tweeters and surprising bass thanks to a 3.0-inch neodymium woofer. These three drivers combine to deliver a satisfying thump and improved clarity, plus they support Dolby Audio (but not Dolby Atmos). Wi-Fi enabled, you can cast music from your phone if you’re on the same network or let it take direct advantage of connected services like Amazon Music HD, Audible, or Spotify Connect if you want to reserve your Bluetooth for another device.  

The Echo orb is equipped with onboard controls that will allow you to control volume, mute the microphone, or skip tracks. An LED ring at the base of the speakers will illuminate when Alexa has been activated and glow red when the microphone is muted. At the back of the speaker, you’ll find a power input port and an aux port for analog connections. The Echo is not a portable speaker, so it will need to stay plugged in at all times, though the Bluetooth 5.0 connection means you can play from just about any smart device in your home (and most rooms, depending on the layout of your walls).

Here are other options we think sound like a good investment:

Things to consider before buying the best budget Bluetooth speakers

In order to find the best budget Bluetooth speaker for you, think about what features will be a defining factor in your final decision. Are you prioritizing battery life? Volume? Portability? When it comes to inexpensive speakers, you might not have all the fancy features of a high-end model at your fingertips, but as long as you know what you want to focus on, you’ll be satisfied. 

What should a budget Bluetooth speaker sound like? 

Sound quality is typically a top priority, no matter what kind of speaker you’re looking at. While we cannot expect a 6-inch speaker to carry the same sonic weight as a set of premium monitors, you can still make smart choices if you value sound above the rest. 

First and foremost, if you want better sound you’ll have to sacrifice a little bit of portability. That’s because larger units are generally more equipped to maintain consistent, distortion-free audio even as you turn the volume up (a common critique of compact speakers is that though they can get pretty loud, the audio quality significantly degrades with each decibel). Bigger speakers also have more room for well-designed subwoofers, which provide an accurate low end that won’t totally overpower the mids and highs, making for a more satisfying mix.  

If you really want booming bass but can’t upgrade when it comes to size, many smaller units now come equipped with “bass boosting” technology that uses digital signal processing to put an emphasis on low-end frequencies that bumps without any rattle. While this can be a major pro for parties or at-home workout playlists, beware of speakers that use these boosts to overcompensate for a lack of clarity throughout other frequencies. 

To learn more about where your new speaker will succeed or fall short when it comes to audio quality, look at the frequency response. Measured in hertz and kilohertz, this range lets you know the range of frequencies (lows, mids, and highs) the speaker will support. More often than not, you’ll see a response range from 20Hz – 20kHz, which are the limits of human hearing for both highs and lows. This is certainly an ideal range; however, just because the model boasts a wide range doesn’t mean it won’t suffer from dips and peaks around specific frequencies. For a really in-depth understanding of the speaker’s success at accurately reproducing audio, you can take a look at a frequency response graph for the product, often created with audio testing by a third party.  

For more information about volume, check out the speaker’s specs to find a maximum decibel level, notated as dB. If you are primarily playing music inside, you won’t need to go over 100 dB and we don’t even recommend listening at that level, as it’s akin to listening to a jackhammer at close range. On the other hand, if you’re hosting an outdoor party with many people in attendance, you could think about increasing the volume to 115 dB, which is concert-level; music at this volume will cover a large area, but you wouldn’t want anyone standing too close. Generally speaking, we are satisfied with Bluetooth speakers that maintain good sound quality at 85 dB for larger gatherings. As I write, I am happily listening to music at 74 dB and really don’t require any more volume. 

What’s the deal with codecs and connectivity?

While options can be limited when it comes to budget speakers, we recommend looking for gear that supports the most recent version of Bluetooth you can find (at the moment that’s anything in the 5.0 range). A Bluetooth 5.1 or 5.2 and especially 5.3 or 5.4 speaker will have a more stable connection, which makes it easier to support brand-specific features like allowing more than one person to connect and control the speaker at a time. Bluetooth 4.0 will still function just fine with most devices, but you may miss out on some range, stability, and special features like multiuser pairing. 

A Bluetooth codec describes the way in which your digital audio data is encoded and decoded from a source device to your speaker or headphones. To get the most from these high-speed transfers both your receiver and transmitter need to be equipped with the same codecs. The most common codec to see is SBC, which is supported by every Bluetooth speaker. While not the highest quality codec, it’s a virtually universal, reliable way to transfer data. If you’re an iOS user looking for higher quality, consider a speaker with AAC, or Advanced Audio Coding. If you have an Android smartdevice, select a speaker with aptX/aptX HD/aptX Adaptive (or LDAC) support for faster transfer rates that preserve more data. 

One final thing to keep in mind when considering connectivity is Bluetooth range. This describes how far you can wander away from your device before the sound starts to get fuzzy and eventually you get disconnected. If you plan to never leave your speaker’s side, you’ll probably be fine with a connectivity range under 30 feet. However, if you’re listening to music outdoors, need to go inside, and you don’t want to leave your phone unattended, then look for a speaker with a range above 35 feet. 

What kind of special features should you look for?

Typically, the best budget Bluetooth speakers lack high-flying special features, though this isn’t always the case. If a Bluetooth speaker provides custom EQ options via an app or onboard control, that is a major win. Custom equalization will give you way more control over your sound and is particularly helpful if you are listening to various types of media—as you certainly won’t need to boost the bass when you’re listening to Terry Gross on “Fresh Air.” Some inexpensive models are starting to roll out visual features first employed by higher-end models, like bold colorways or LED panels that pulse to the beat. 

Another prime feature to look for is the elusive onboard microphone that will let you conduct phone calls or speak to voice assistants like Siri or Alexa without having to pick up your device. 

What is the bare minimum when it comes to battery life? 

Luckily, one of the things budget Bluetooth speakers rarely sacrifice is battery life. Even at a lower price, it’s unlikely you’ll come across a model that has less than a 10-hour charge and many can do even better. For infrequent listening at moderate volume, 10 hours of playback could last you up to a week; however, the louder you play your music, the faster battery life will be depleted. If a speaker boasts 13 hours of consistent playback, you may get something closer to 7-10 hours if you’re blasting EDM all night long. Party throwers and party-goers should look for a model that boasts a battery that can last over 12 hours. 

How do you know if your budget Bluetooth speaker is actually waterproof? 

The only way to guarantee your speaker is waterproof (or dustproof) is to look at its IP rating. If you’ve ever purchased a portable speaker before or checked out one of our other reviews, you’ll know that IP rating is one of the most important specs to check out before buying. This is especially true if you know you want to prioritize outdoor use. If you want a speaker to safely take you to the beach or into the shower—make sure you investigate how well it’s already protected from the elements.

IP stands for “Ingress Protection,” which tells you just how fortified an electronic device is against dirt, dust, and water. These ratings are typically composed of two numbers, or one number and an X. We often cite the Wonderboom 2, a tried-and-true favorite, when it comes to durability. The Wonderboom 2 has an IP67 rating. The first digit describes particle protection, the second liquid. The “6” indicates it can keep out most dust and dirt particles, while the “7” means it can be submerged in up to 1 meter of water for 30 minutes before any damage occurs, making it a great option for poolside tunes. The higher the number, the more protected your speakers will be from debris and water. This is why you can often find the Wonderboom poolside, or hanging off a showerhead. 

You may find an IP that replaces particle protection with an “X,” written as IPX7, for example. An “X” in place of any number means no data is available for that substance, or rather that the unit is not protected from that substance. 

FAQs

Q: Can cheap speakers sound good?

Yes, cheap speakers can sound good. Of course, the more you can invest, the more options you’ll have when it comes to special features, more powerful drivers, better frequency response, etc., but you don’t necessarily have to spend thousands to get good sound quality. Generally speaking, smaller speakers can’t carry the sonic load a larger speaker can (hence why portable Bluetooth speakers often lack low-end), but this doesn’t mean you can’t find something inexpensive that will suit your listening tastes. Of course, if you’re an audiophile a cheap Bluetooth speaker isn’t going to live up to your standards. 

Q: What’s the best Bluetooth speaker brand?

The best Bluetooth speaker brand is widely debated and will certainly depend on your unique needs and preferences. Bang & Olufsen are known for turning out high-end products with excellent sound quality. Sonos continues to top the charts when it comes to in-home connectivity. For more rugged, portable models our favorite brands have to be Ultimate Ears and JBL, both of which have products that claimed top spots in this article. 

Q: Which speaker is best, JBL or Sony?

When it comes to finding the best budget Bluetooth speakers, JBL is going to give you more variety. They have a diverse range of budget-friendly options in various sizes, with distinctive features, including the JBL Clip 4 and JBL Go 3. These JBL models are compact, travel-friendly units designed to move with you. Currently, Sony only has one Bluetooth speaker under $90, the Sony SRS-XB100—a model we love, but you might be better off searching elsewhere for inexpensive speakers. Return to Sony if your budget gets a bit higher, or if you start the search for other techy treats, like a new television or game console. 

Q: Which is better, JBL or Bose Bluetooth speaker?

Similar to the JBL versus Sony debate above, JBL continues to come out on top when it comes to affordable options. Bose does not currently have a model, the SoundLink Micro, that regularly retails for under $119. However, if you plan on looking for a high-end speaker, soundbar, or home system in the future, Bose is certainly a brand worth investigating. 

Q: How can I improve my Bluetooth battery life?

There are a few things you can do to improve the battery life of your Bluetooth speaker. While you can’t magically make it extend its absolute maximum playtime, you can try to prevent an early battery death. The first thing to do is to lower the volume. If you are listening at max volume all day, your speaker is going to die significantly faster. Second, when you’re not using the speaker, ensure it’s off. Some units power down automatically after a certain period of time when nothing is playing; others need to be manually shut off. 

Final thoughts on selecting the best budget Bluetooth speakers

You don’t need to go above and beyond your means to find the best budget Bluetooth speakers that will satisfy your sonic needs. There are plenty of options out there that you can take with you to the park, beach, or nearest house party without breaking the bank. Generally speaking, an inexpensive speaker won’t have all the bells and whistles a fancier model might, but you can still tune into your favorite audiobooks, podcasts, and playlists—which, at the end of the day, is all a Bluetooth speaker is designed to do.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coffee machines for offices in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coffee-machines-for-offices/ Tue, 16 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610989
The best coffee machines for offices in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

From single-serve to automatic espresso, these are the six best coffee makers for quickly filling a mug and seizing the day.

The post The best coffee machines for offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best coffee machines for offices in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Breville-Precision-Brewer on a countertop. Breville Precision Brewer
SEE IT

The large-capacity coffee maker is durable, easy to use, and looks good in any space.

Best single-serve coffee maker LOR-Barista-single-serve-coffee-maker on a countertop. L’OR Barista 
SEE IT

It uses two capsule sizes and works with Nespresso Original capsules.

Best value Cuisinart Auto Grind and Brew on a countertop. Cuisinart Automatic Grind and Brew 
SEE IT

Enjoy freshly ground beans each day with the coffee maker’s automatic burr grinder.

You’re not alone if you like to jump-start your day at the coffee machine. According to a report by the National Coffee Association (NCA), 63% of Americans drink coffee daily, making it the most consumed beverage—even more popular than water. The report also reveals that 36% of Americans say they have an in-office coffee station.

In the past, many offices were limited to commercial coffee brewers with warming plates. However, those models often resulted in bland and/or burnt coffee that didn’t get any better from sitting on a hot plate for too long. These days, however, coffee-maker manufacturers make affordable retail models with many of the bells and whistles you’d find in commercial coffee makers. The best coffee makers for offices can cater to cubicle coworkers’ and C-suite executives’ tastes alike without exceeding space or budget restrictions. 

How we chose the best coffee machines for offices

As a freelance journalist for over 10 years, I’ve reviewed home and tech products for publications including Forbes, CNN Underscored, NBC News Select, Popular Mechanics, Architectural Digest, Tom’s Guide, The Daily Beast, USA Today’s Reviewed, TechRadar, Better Homes & Gardens, Bob Vila, and, of course, PopSci. I’ve tested and written several dozen coffee makers and combined this experience alongside interviews with several coffee experts for tips on choosing the best coffee maker(s) for this type of setting. 

The best coffee machines for offices: Reviews & Recommendations

Giorgio Milos, master barista for illy, tells us, “Good and well-prepared coffee at offices is a thing that should be available all the time and independently of who’s making the coffee.” He admits, however, that people are not born with the skills to make it right; some knowledge and training are necessary to make coffee properly.  

“Filter coffee is easy to prepare and maintain with very little training and knowledge, but making espresso-based drinks properly requires extensive training, practice, and passion,” he says. “On the other hand, single-serve pods or capsules are made to avoid the requirement of skills.” 

For office managers in the market to purchase a coffee maker, these are some NCA stats to keep in mind: Among people who drink coffee, the most popular preparation method is drip coffee (40%), followed by single-cup brewers (27%), cold brewing (16%), and espresso machines (11%). In addition, the most popular espresso-based beverages are lattes (18%), espressos (16%), and cappuccinos (15%). Based on testing, our experience with coffee makers in office settings, and the factors explained by our experts at the end of this roundup, here are the best coffee machines for offices that offer all types of extraction and allow you to leave behind that travel mug of homebrew without regrets.

Best overall: Breville Precision Brewer

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The large-capacity coffee maker is durable, easy to use, and looks good in any space.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 14” x 9” x 16”
  • Weight: 3.15 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 60 ounces

Pros

  • Six brewing presets, including fast, strong, and cold brew
  • Programmable
  • SGA Gold Cup standard certification
  • Thermal carafe
  • Easy to use
  • 60-ounce capacity

Cons

  • Adapter kit for pour-over option sold separately

The Breville Precision Brewer leads our list of the best drip coffee makers and is also our top pick for the best office coffee machines. The Breville Precision Brewer can brew 60 ounces (12 cups) of coffee. However, it also has a small cup detection feature for office workers who want to brew a single-serve volume. In addition, the coffee maker has several settings, including SCA Gold Cup, Fast, Strong Brew, Ice Coffee, and Cold Brew. SCA (Specialty Coffee Association) Gold Cup certification is only awarded to a handful of coffee makers, and certification is determined by various factors, including brew basket volume, temperature, uniformity of extraction and performance, holding receptacle and temperature. 

It’s easy to use, another reason this is a great coffee machine for office use. After pressing the start/cancel button, there’s a select dial, and the selection shows on the display panel. The coffee maker also has a “time since brewed” feature, so anyone walking up to the machine can see how fresh the coffee is.

It’s a durable coffee maker made of brushed stainless steel with a thermal carafe. I like thermal carafes because they can keep coffee hot without using a warming plate. In an office setting, a thermal carafe is also a heavy-duty option that won’t break if it’s accidentally dropped on the floor, unlike fragile glass carafes. Also, more manually minded caffiends can use the Breville Precision Brewer with a pour-over dripper.

Best splurge: Breville the Barista Touch Impress Espresso Machine  

Tony Ware / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The step-by-step instructions make this great for beginner baristas.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.2” x 13.4” x 16.3”
  • Weight: 22 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 12 ounces

Pros

  • Onscreen guidance
  • 9 bar extraction pressure
  • Hands-free milk texturing

Cons

  • Expensive

Don’t underestimate your officemates’ ability to use and appreciate high-end coffee makers. Many of them may have high-end espresso machines at home, and others, especially those who visit their favorite barista every day, may be willing to learn how to recreate their favorite drinks at work. Having a proper latte machine at the office saves them time and money and can help create a sense of camaraderie in the office. And the Breville Barista Touch Impress is actually a beginner-friendly automatic espresso machine with settings for flat white, latte, cappuccino, long black, babyccino, hot chocolate, tea, and more.

The 12-ounce bean hopper holds whole beans until you want the integrated burr grinder to transform them into ground coffee. Also, the generous 67.6-ounce water tank eliminates having to refill it continuously. The Thermojet heating system heats up quickly, and the automatic steam wand provides a silky microfoam layer on top of the coffee that beats a simple milk frother. In addition, settings for alternative milk types (almond, oat, soy) can also be selected for latte-based drinks.

Best for large groups: Bunn 12-Cup Commercial Coffee Brewer

Bunn

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8” x 23” x 19.2H
  • Weight: 25.6 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 12 cups

Pros

  • Three warming stations can keep 36 cups of coffee warm
  • Can designate regular or decaf decanters
  • Simple, easy-to-use buttons

Cons

  • Temperature recovery period

If you need to make coffee for many people, the Bunn 12-Cup Commercial Coffee Brewer lets you brew up to three carafes (or decanters) of coffee and keep them hot on the three warming stations. The warming stations are each separately controlled. And for large events, like meetings and office parties, you can continue to brew coffee rapidly. In fact, this stainless-steel, easy-to-use commercial brewer makes 3.8 gallons of coffee per hour.

There’s another advantage to such commercial coffee machines. A Bunn allows you to brew fully leaded and decaf coffee simultaneously and keep them in carafes with a color-coded handle. This allows you to accommodate those who may be trying to cut down on their caffeine consumption. You can brew two carafes of coffee back-to-back, but then there’s a temperature-recovery period before the third carafe can be brewed.

Best single-serve coffee maker: L’OR Barista System Coffee and Espresso Machine  

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 16” x 7” x 11”
  • Weight: 11.02 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 12 ounces

Pros

  • Uses a variety of coffee and espresso capsules
  • Heats quickly
  • 40-ounce detachable water tank

Cons

  • Single-serve use only

If you have a small office that enjoys single-serve coffee, they can customize each cup with the L’OR Barista System Coffee and Espresso Machine—a fully automatic machine that is quite easy to use. After pressing the Power button, just press the Small icon for a 5-ounce coffee or a 1.4-ounce espresso. The Medium icon produces 8 ounces of coffee or 2.7 ounces of espresso. The Large button is used for 12 ounces of coffee or 3.7 ounces of espresso.

The L’OR Barista can accept both large coffee capsules and small espresso capsules, producing a velvety layer of crema on top every time. Some coffee blends offered include Vanilla Flavored Blend, Bonjour Blend, Chateau Blend, Provocateur Blend, Le Tigre Blend, and Decaf Medium Roast. Some of the espresso capsules include Ristretto, Colombia, Ristretto Decaffeinato, Onyx, Profondo, Estremo, Forza, Chocolate, Vanilla, Caramel, and Papua New Guinea. L’OR single-serve coffee makers are also compatible with Peet’s Coffee capsules and Nespresso Original machine capsules (another popular style of office-friendly coffee maker).

Best French Press: Espro P7 French Press

Tony Ware / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.5” x 4.2” x 9.5”
  • Weight: 1.5 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 32 ounces

Pros

  • Makes good, strong coffee
  • Double filter keeps coffee sediment-free
  • Gorgeous, space-saving design

Cons

  • Plunger can be tricky

It’s been said that no coffee tastes better than properly prepared French Press coffee. If there are a few coffee snobs in your office, the Espro P7 French Press can provide the level of flavor that they’re unlikely to get from another brewing method. That’s because you can fully control the brewing process (using the plunger) in a way you can’t with most other types of brewing processes. The Espro P7 has a double micro-filter to ensure that no grit or sludge can make it into your cup—and it brews coffee in 4 minutes. In addition, since the stainless-steel French press has double-walled insulation, it keeps coffee (or tea) hot for hours with no degradation of taste.

The Espro P7 is available in 18- and 32-ounce sizes. It’s also available in several colors, including matte black, matte white, Aegean blue, cranberry, brushed stainless steel, and polished stainless steel. Of course, you’ll need a good source of hot water for a French Press, like the temperature-controlled Stagg EKG Pro Studio Electric Gooseneck Kettle—one of our top gift suggestions for the hot beverage-obsessed.

Best value: Cuisinart Automatic Grind and Brew 

Terri Williams

SEE IT

 Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.74’ x 16.34” x 11.96”
  • Weight: 15 pounds
  • Brewing capacity: 12 cups

Pros

  • 12-cup carafe
  • Programmable
  • Bean hopper/grinder
  • Grind-off feature

Cons

  • Glass carafe

Nothing tastes better than freshly ground coffee beans, and the Cuisinart Automatic Grind and Brew can save you the space and expense of a dedicated grinder. The bean hopper, which holds half a pound of coffee beans, has a lid to keep the beans fresh, and the built-in burr grinder has a grind control knob to make the ground finer or coarser, as desired. However, there’s also a Grind-Off feature when using pre-ground coffee.

The coffee maker also has several other convenience features. For example, it can be programmed up to 24 hours in advance so that officemates can arrive to freshly brewed coffee each day. In addition, the brew strength can be controlled, and there’s a Brew Pause feature if someone wants to cheat and grab a cup of coffee before the carafe has finished. (I strongly advise against that since it weakens the remaining coffee.) The 12-cup carafe has a dripless spout. However, the carafe is made of glass, which doesn’t retain heat as well as a thermal carafe. But considering that it’s a 12-cup coffee maker with a built-in grinder, we also consider this the best value when looking for a coffee maker for the office.

What to consider when buying coffee makers for an office

There are many factors to consider when deciding which coffee maker for an office is right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide.

Machine type

The type of machine you purchase is the most important decision, and our experts had the most comments on this particular topic. “Consider your available budget, the number of employees that will be brewing coffee, the machine’s durability, and the counter space available in your office kitchen,” says Dr. Christina Rahm, founder and CEO at Rahm Roast Coffee in Franklin, Tenn.

She notes that single-brew coffee machines are popular because they tend to be cost-efficient, require minimal countertop space, and are easy to clean. “Utilizing a pour-over or French press, which is what we use in our office, is undoubtedly one of the finest ways to achieve a fresh and flavorful cup of coffee,” Rahm explains. “In a smaller office setting, this is a great option to consider.”

Caroline Bell, founder and CEO of Cafe Grumpy, agrees you want something easy to use. “However, you also want something that produces a good cup of coffee, so your team will want to take their coffee break in the office,” she says. “After establishing your budget, consider how many people will be using the machine and whether or not you want to have something that allows people to brew one cup at a time or a pot of coffee to share.”

And Bell recommends just the right amount of fresh ground coffee. “Although pods allow you to offer different types of coffee one cup at a time, having fresh ground coffee will give your team a better coffee experience, including those nice aromas.”

If you’re in a small office, Bell says investing in a coffee grinder and some pour-over equipment might be a good idea so people can brew individual cups and try different coffees. “On the other hand, if you have a big budget and a large team, you might want to splurge on an automatic espresso machine,” she says.

According to Shonali Paul, founder of Paul John Indian Caffeine Company, “The ideal solution for offices would be an automatic machine that brews at least three different coffees: an espresso, an Americano, and a latte,” she says. “That way, the possibilities are endless and will cater to all your employees’ likes.”

Paul is also a fan of machines with built-in bean grinders (pro tip: keep a small spray bottle of water handy to cut down on static and stray grinds). “This also gives you the option to try many different roasts and blends—while grinding them on demand, so they stay fresh for longer.”

If there’s no coffee professional in charge, Milos (master barista for illy) recommends a system that avoids most potential errors in preparation. “Filter coffee is much easier to manage, and it can be set in offices regardless of the skills of the users,” he says. “Assuming all preparation variables are set—water temp, ratio coffee/water, grind size, and more—the two main rules are maximum two hours of consumption time, and the equipment must be cleaned every day.”

Settings  

When making your choice, consider which coffee machines provide ease and functionality. “Look for coffee makers with settings such as cup size, brew strength, a timer feature, and whether the machine can brew espresso shots or provide hot water for other beverages [don’t forget the tea drinkers in your company],” Rahm says. “Not all settings are created equal, so focus on the settings that would best benefit your team members.”

Capacity

Capacity is an important factor, depending on the number of people in your office.Keep in mind the number of employees in your office, and regardless of what you choose, make sure it can provide enough fresh coffee for the number of employees working,” Rahm says.  

User-friendly interface

Next to the type of machine, Rahm says the second-most important decision to consider is the interface. “The last thing anyone wants to do when they want to brew a cup of joe is read an instruction manual,” she says. “Digital interfaces can offer a multitude of settings at a click, while traditional knobs or buttons are more straightforward but still effective at getting the job done.”

Additional tips

Whatever you decide, Bell recommends making the coffee station a fun place where people can add their own touches, with options like alternative milks, cinnamon and/or cocoa, fun mugs, and other accessories like the ones you would want to give or get.

Paul agrees and recommends getting creative. “For example, provide even more of a variety of coffee flavors by having different syrups to add,” she says. “Giving employees the chance to savor different flavors in the workplace can really change their coffee experience throughout the day.”

FAQs

Q: Why are coffee makers important in an office?

Most Americans drink coffee and many expect companies to provide coffee makers in an office setting. In-office coffee makers provide convenience for employers who don’t have time to stop by a coffee shop during their morning commute. It can also help them save money. Lastly, gathering around the coffee maker provides an opportunity for workers to socialize temporarily.

Q: Are expensive espresso machines better?

It depends. We provided a variety of coffee makers and espresso machines, realizing that people have different tastes. However, I have noticed in numerous office settings that when a high-quality espresso machine is available, people tend to flock toward it and suddenly start drinking espresso-based drinks. Some eventually purchase an espresso machine for their home. However, if, for example, you only have two or three people interested in a high-end espresso machine, it may not be worth the investment.

Q: Which coffee maker is better: automatic or manual?

An automatic coffee maker is easier for most office workers to operate. However, just as companies expect office workers to learn new processes and technology, they can also quickly learn how to use coffee makers. Employees are at work for eight hours a day, and the desire to create the perfect coffee is a task they’re more than up to tackling.

Final thoughts on the best coffee machines for offices

When considering the best coffee machine for an office, the 12-cup Breville Precision Brewer is durable and easy to use. It’s a drip coffee maker that can also be used to make pour-over coffee. However, there are a variety of other coffee makers, some with grinders and others with espresso features, that may also appeal to various team members. If you have the budget for it, consider creating a coffee bar that includes two or three different types of coffee machines.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coffee machines for offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best turntable accessories for Record Store Day 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-turntable-accessories/ Tue, 16 Apr 2024 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610821
The best turntable accessories of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Planning to pick up some fresh wax this Record Store Day? Augment your turntable with accessories to keep your vinyl clean and system finely tuned.

The post The best turntable accessories for Record Store Day 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best turntable accessories of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best powered speakers Audio photo Klipsch The Nines
SEE IT

Uncompromised sound from a set of powered speakers perfect for both analog and digital music listening.

Best record brush Mobile Fidelity Sound Lab Anti-Static Record Brush on a plain white background. Mobile Fidelity Sound Labs Anti-Static Record Brush
SEE IT

This brush keeps your vinyl’s grooves free from hair, dust, and static.

Best turntable cartridge Ortofon 2M Bronze Moving Magnet Cartridge on a plain white background. Ortofon 2M Bronze Moving Magnet Cartridge
SEE IT

Ortofon’s 2M Bronze was designed from diamond-tip to tail to extract the best sound from your albums.

Record Store Day 2024 is this coming Saturday, April 20, and to enjoy your limited-edition slabs of wax to their fullest, you’ll need a few accessories. (If you need help finding the right turntable, we have recommendations, too.) Add-ons for your record player typically fall into a couple of categories: maintenance and audio fidelity improvements. The former will keep your treasured grooves in tip-top shape to avoid creating scratches that can result in unwanted clicks and pops. The latter are components to add to your analog audio system to help your albums sound their best. Having a few turntable accessories from both categories will ensure your vinyl gives you maximum enjoyment for a lifetime—if not multiple lifetimes.

Best powered speakers: Klipsch the Nines

Sarah Jones

SEE IT

The Nines topped our list of the best turntable speakers, and they’re an incredible upgrade for turntable owners looking for an audiophile-grade all-in-one system. In our full review, our author praised The Nines for the presence of an internal preamp, which will allow you to quickly plug any turntable with a moving magnet cartridge into it. Many modern turntables come with a built-in preamp, but older models and lots of high-end record players don’t. Using an external preamp will always yield better results, but it’s nice to be able to use The Nines with a turntable out of the box. Additionally, The Nines have a grounding peg for your turntable’s RCA cables.

The Nines are stacked on the audio hardware side: Each speaker has an eight-inch long-throw woofer, one-inch tweeter, custom DSP, and an amp that delivers up to 480 watts of power. In addition to a turntable function, The Nines supports native playback of 24-bit digital audio files up to 192kHz when connected to a source using its optical audio or USB port. Yes, you can connect The Nines directly to a computer using the included USB-B to USB-A cable or optionally pick up a USB-B to USB-C cable, depending on your computer’s ports. The Nines also sport an HDMI port to use them as home theater speakers with a television.

This versatility makes The NInes’ $1,499 price tag easier to justify. You can use them as a pair of incredible speakers for your turntable while pulling double or even triple duty as the Bluetooth wireless audio system and home theater setup in a living room. Just make sure you have enough space for the speakers because at 19 inches tall and 13.38 inches wide, you’ll need a fairly large entertainment center.

Best preamp: Cambridge Audio Alva Solo

Cambridge Audio

SEE IT

A phono preamp sits between your turntable and amplifier (or powered speakers) and boosts its signal so that you’ll be able to actually hear your music. Cambridge Audio’s Alva Solo works with turntables outfitted with moving magnet cartridges, and we like it for both its understated look and powerful features. Its all-aluminum enclosure houses a 10-watt preamp with 39dB of gain, RIAA equalization, and a built-in subsonic filter that can reduce the sound of some subtle sonic imperfections from your albums. Critically, the Alva Solo’s power supply is built inside its relatively svelte box, so you can connect it to the wall with a single clean cable. The preamp’s relatively small footprint (just under seven inches wide and two inches tall) means it’ll fit in any turntable setup, either beside or below your deck. Our favorite touch is that Cambridge Audio labeled each input and output above and below the RCA jacks, so you can easily identify them if you’re looking at them upside down (aka from in front of the equipment).

Best record weight: Andover Record Damping Weight

Andover Audio

SEE IT

The purpose of a record weight is to help keep vinyl from moving vertically as it spins around; even a visually imperceptible amount of movement can cause distortion. Andover’s Record Damping Weight weighs 9.35 ounces and fits right on top of your vinyl’s label, with a cutout that fits over the turntable’s spindle. The company says using this weight can result in less distortion, improved dynamics, righter bass, and a deeper sound stage, among other benefits.

Best record cleaner: Spin-Clean Record Washer Complete Kit

Spin Clean

SEE IT

If we could only recommend one vinyl maintenance tool, it’d be this record-washing kit from Spin Clean. Here’s how it works: the spin clean’s basin gets filled with a mixture of water and the included record cleaning solution, at which point you submerge your album inside. The water only gets high enough to reach the innermost groove, so your vinyl’s label won’t get damaged. Once it’s submerged, you’ll physically rotate the vinyl clockwise a few times. Soft brushes on the inside of the spin clean will get the gunk out of your record’s grooves, which can reduce the album’s surface noise and the number of clicks and pops you’ll hear. Once it’s been cleaned, wipe off your album with the included cleaning cloth. It won’t turn your VG- mono copy of The Kinks Are the Village Green Preservation Society into an NM-sounding album, but the difference will be noticeable.

Best turntable slipmat: Pro Spin Cork Turntable Mat

Pro Spin

SEE IT

Static buildup is one of the reasons you’ll hear clicks and pops on your albums, but you can eliminate this issue by switching to a cork turntable mat instead of using the felt mat that comes with most record players. There’s no increased risk of scratching your albums using a cork mat, and you’ll ensure the grooves of your records won’t accumulate stray stands of felt in them. This cork turntable mat from Pro Spin was designed to fit both 12-inch and 7-inch vinyl and is thick enough to absorb a few stray vibrations to reduce overall distortion.

Best record brush: Mobile Fidelity Sound Labs Anti-Static Record Brush

Mobile Fidelity Sound Lab

SEE IT

Another way to reduce static clicks and pops from your albums is using an anti-static brush like this one from Mobile Fidelity Sound Labs each time you play a record. Its fine plastic bristles will clean your album’s grooves while removing static simultaneously. To use this brush most effectively, start your turntable and gently place the brush’s bristles over your spinning record. Repeat this process each time you flip the album for the best results.

Best turntable cartridge: Ortofon 2M Bronze Moving Magnet Cartridge

Orofon

SEE IT

If you’re using a turntable that lets you upgrade its cartridge, we highly recommend stepping up to the Ortofon 2M Bronze moving magnet cartridge to get the most out of your record collection. It’s a level up from the already excellent Ortofon 2M Red and 2M Blue (found on excellent turntables like the Fluance RT85, which our reviewer loved). Its Nude fine line diamond-tipped stylus was specifically cut to a profile optimized to stay inside the groove of a record even if it’s wobbling a little bit, and it uses split pole technology to send a clean signal from the needle to the tone arm using a copper wire. The Dutch-made cartridge we’re recommending has been premounted, which means it can plug directly into the tone arm of a record player rather than requiring you to futz with removing and replacing an entire needle. A turntable’s needle is the literal point of contact between your vinyl and the rest of your audio system. A weak or lackluster signal cannot be improved as it moves through your chain, so having a strong piece of hardware right up front is the best way to ensure you get the best possible sound from your albums.

Best power conditioner: WAudio AC Power Filter Power Conditioner

WAudio

SEE IT

If you’re incredibly sensitive to any noise when listening to a new or mint album, turn to WAudio’s AC Power Filter Power Conditioner. The truth is that some noise can come from the quality of the electricity coming from your wall due to old or low gauge wiring. You can eliminate this by plugging your turntable (and other audio accessories) into a power conditioner, which will pick up and eliminate this noise before it hits your system. WAudio says its power conditioner can restrain interference above 1kHz and will up to 10dB of digital noise between 2MHz and 100MHz. This power conditioner has 10 outlets—six of which are filtered—and also provides overload and voltage protection to avoid electrical spikes from damaging your equipment.

Best vinyl subscription: Vinyl Me, Please

Vinyl Me, Please

SEE IT

So, you got the taste for premium pressings of classic albums but don’t want to wait till the next RSD to flesh out your collection. Well, look no further than Vinyl Me, Please. The site allows you to join a “club” and will send you one LP per month. Clubs are broken down by genre (country, hip-hop, rock) plus essentials (covering soul, blues, and jazz) and a generalist essentials option for listeners who want a little bit of everything. A subscription costs $46 per month, with discounts if you subscribe for three, six, or 12 months. Albums and box sets are also available a la carte for varying prices. Finding original pressings of albums in near-mint quality can be difficult, and Vinyl Me, Please takes the hassle out of crate digging with the hopes of striking gold.

The post The best turntable accessories for Record Store Day 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable blenders in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-blenders/ Mon, 15 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609904
The best portable blenders of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj

A portable blender can help you smooth out a soup, whip up a smoothie, or even indulge in a frozen margarita wherever you go.

The post The best portable blenders in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best portable blenders of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Cuisinart RPB-100 portable blender on a plain background. Cuisinart RPB-100
SEE IT

Make big smoothies on the go with the biggest, most powerful battery-powered blender.

Best splurge The Beast Blender on a plain white background. Beast Blender
SEE IT

A modern design and ample power help this portable blender stand out.

Best budget A Hamilton Beach Portable Blender on a plain background. Hamilton Beach Portable Blender
SEE IT

For under $20, Hamilton Beach’s portable blender goes above and beyond for its price.

Portable blenders are an essential tool for home cooks with small kitchens, creative car campers, or travelers who want to ensure they have all their essential kitchen tools during a long stay at an Airbnb. While smaller than their full-sized countertop contemporaries, portable blenders are still powerful enough to crush up fresh roots and roughage to make pastes, smoothies, and sauces. Once you’re done, these blenders can be easily cleaned with a little dish soap and water, then stored inside a cabinet or drawer until the next time you’d like to use them. Many of our recommendations run on battery power, allowing you to take and use them out of your home. The best portable blenders will allow you to enjoy your smoothies, crushed ice, or other diced-up delights on the go.

How we chose the best portable blenders

Choosing the best portable blenders meant finding the models that balanced power, size, and cost. All of our recommendations are powerful enough for common tasks, like making Erewhon smoothies at home, but don’t expect to use them to make hot soup like a full-sized model can. We also made sure to include smaller blenders—ones that require an AC outlet but are nonetheless small enough to store or take from place to place easily—and battery-powered models that are truly portable. Our recommendations also cover a wide price range, so you can find a portable blender that is well within your budget.

The best portable blenders: Reviews & Recommendations

Ready to make a milkshake from your yard? We can teach you, and we won’t charge. The best portable blenders are accessible appliances for anyone who wants to reduce chopping and other manual kitchen tasks but can’t commit the space or budget to a larger, more powerful model.

Best overall: Cuisinart RPB-100

Cuisinart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 3.5 x 3.9 x 11.69 inches
  • Capacity: 16 ounces
  • Power source: Battery
  • Price: $79

Pros

  • 20 minute runtime on battery
  • Bowl can be used as a drink container
  • Quick charging

Cons

  • Larger than other battery-powered models

Cuisinart’s RPB-100 is the largest, most powerful battery-powered blender we’ve found, so it’s nabbed the top spot here. Yes, you’ll need to dedicate more space on your countertop or in a bag to take it with you, but you’ll be rewarded for making the space. You can easily make a large smoothie with a single touch thanks to the blender’s 16-ounce container and one-button design. Hitting the power button will automatically start the blender at its maximum power level, so you don’t need to futz around with speed settings. The RPB-100’s container doubles as a drinking glass, too; simply turn the blender over when you’re done using it and pop on the included lid. The lid has a flip-top design to ensure your smoothie won’t get everywhere if you stash it in a bag or it accidentally tips over.

Cuisinart says the RPB-100 can run for up to 20 minutes per charge, which is more than enough time to make multiple smoothies or crush a few pounds of ice before being topped up. It’ll take about two hours to fully recharge the blender, which is plenty of time if you plug it in before going to sleep or heading out to work. Each part of the blender is also dishwasher safe, so you won’t have to hand wash it after every use. If you’re looking to make homemade dressings or smooth out sauces on the go, Cuisinart’s RPB-100 is the portable blender to get.

Best splurge: Beast Blender

Beast

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 4.92 x 4.92 x 15.75 inches
  • Capacity: 33.81 ounces
  • Power source: AC
  • Price: $164.95

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Svelte design
  • More powerful

Cons

  • Price

If you don’t mind being tethered to an outlet, the Beast Blender is a sleek-looking, ultra-powerful 1000W blender still small enough to keep in a backpack when traveling. It also features a single-button design and a removable container that can be used as a 33-ounce drinking vessel when you’re done making a smoothie. However, Beast went the extra mile to include both a screw-on lid and straws (although nothing is stopping you from using your own reusable straw). A big part of the Beast Blender’s appeal is its eye-catching hourglass shape, with ridges on its container that are aesthetically pleasing while making it easier to hold. The blender is also available in multiple colors, so you can find one that suits your aesthetic.

Beast built a powerful motor into its blender since it didn’t have to worry about managing battery life, which is a significant feature if you’re looking for an ultra-smooth blend. The company says its blade will automatically adjust itself to maintain a set speed during its one-minute runtime and is designed to sense and avoid overheating. Beast says you can use its blender to make dips, dressings, cocktails, spreads, smoothies, sauces, frozen desserts, and even smooth out some soups. And it fits neatly in the cabinet or car (right next to a portable generator to power it). Don’t skip this one if you’ve wanted a powerful portable blender but thought you couldn’t justify the counter space.

Best all-in-one: Ninja BC51NV Blast Portable Blender

Ninja

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 3.54 x 3.54 x 10.71 inches
  • Capacity: 18 ounces
  • Power source: Battery
  • Price: $59.99

Pros

  • Battery powered
  • Leak-proof design
  • Large capacity for a battery-powered blender

Cons

  • Requires charging

Ninja’s BC51NV Blast is a modern-looking battery-powered portable blender that was designed to be used and taken with you everywhere. The blender is perfect for smoothies and protein shakes. When you’re done making them, you can drink directly from its container without detaching it from its base. Yes, the blender’s top is actually a flip-up sipping lid with a handle that makes it easy to carry when you’re not drinking. Every part of this portable blender is dishwasher-safe, ready for the next day’s smoothie. A single-button design makes the BC51NV Blast easy to use, too, and its BlastBlade has blades pointed upward and downward to ensure you get a proper blend.

Ninja doesn’t state its portable blender’s runtime, but you can recharge it using a USB-C power adapter. This portable blender has a truly grab-and-go design and is a powerful all-in-one solution. Blending a beverage and immediately drinking it without having to attach a separate lid or pour it into another glass is very helpful when you’re making it in a hurry before heading out for the day.

Best set: NutriBullet NBR-1201 12-Piece High-Speed Blender/Mixer System

NutriBullet

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 7.4 x 17.8 x 14.25 inches
  • Capacity: 24 fluid ounces
  • Power source: AC
  • Price: $69.87

Pros

  • Powerful for a portable blender
  • Includes two blades
  • Comes with two mugs

Cons

  • Larger size

Nutribullet’s NBR-1201 12-Piece High-Speed Blender/Mixer System is the most comprehensive solution to any portable blending problems—but it’s also the largest model we’re recommending and requires an AC outlet. Neither of those attributes are dealbreakers, as this is still smaller than a typical full-sized blender, but they’re worth keeping in mind. As is suggested by its name, this is a 12-piece set that includes a blender, multiple blades, two 18-ounce glasses, and a pair of lids. Thanks to the size of its vessel, you can make two medium-sized smoothies simultaneously, then pop it off and pour it directly into Nutribullet’s included cups to take them on the go.

The inclusion of an “extraction blade,” where multiple blades are pointed upward and downward, is especially helpful when making smoothies as it’s designed especially for finely pulverizing. The separate flat blade can be used to crush ice or smooth sauces. We understand that the appeal of a portable blender is to take it anywhere, but feel the accessories included with the NBR-1201 make it the best value and will earn their keep in your cabinets or on top of your counter before being packed away for a trip.

Best budget: Hamilton Beach Portable Blender

Hamilton Beach

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 3.9 x 3.9 x 11.9 inches
  • Capacity: 14 fluid ounces
  • Power source: AC
  • Price: $20.85

Pros

  • Battery-powered
  • Designed to fit in a cup holder
  • Price

Cons

  • Smaller container capacity

Hamilton Beach has you covered if you’d like an ultra-compact portable blender that won’t break the bank. Its single-button portable blender comes with a screw-on flip-top sipping lid, so you can sip directly from it after making a drink. The blender and vessel have a concave shape, making it easier to grab and hold in one hand. The vessel is a little smaller than the ones found in other portable blenders we’re recommending, but it’s not immediately noticeable. What does stand out is this portable blender’s $21 price tag.

This is an AC-powered blender, but its power cord can be neatly tucked away inside a cutout around its base, so you won’t have a cord dangling around in a bag. This design choice also makes Hamilton Beach’s Portable Blender a solid choice for those who want a blend-grab-and-go style solution. If you’re eyeing a portable blender on a budget, you won’t find a better choice than this one from Hamilton Beach.

What to consider when shopping for the best portable blenders

There are many factors to consider when deciding which portable blender is right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide.

Size

Size is the chief characteristic of a portable blender, and we had strict requirements when deciding which models made the cut. None of our recommendations are over 18 inches tall, and most fall below 12 inches. This means you’ll be able to stash them easily into a backpack or duffel while traveling and may even be able to keep them on your kitchen counter indefinitely without taking up too much room.

Container capacity

One of the tradeoffs when choosing a portable blender is that it can hold fewer ingredients than a full-sized model, so in most cases, you’ll be making single-serving smoothies rather than a multi-person batch. Our recommendations can hold between 14 and 33 fluid ounces of material, so be mindful of how many people you typically cook for before choosing.

Power source

Our portable blender recommendations run on either AC power (which means they need to be plugged into an outlet) or a built-in battery. Battery-powered blenders are more portable but aren’t as powerful and will wear down more quickly. AC-powered blenders can draw more power but can’t be used in as many places. There’s no wrong answer, but seriously consider where you’re going to be using your portable blender before deciding which one to get.

FAQs

Q: Can portable blenders crush ice?

Yes. Portable blenders are powerful enough to crush ice. If you’re trying to make a frozen margarita or smoothie with frozen fruit, you generally won’t have a problem doing so with a portable blender.

Q: Can portable blenders blend vegetables?

Yes. Portable blenders can blend vegetables, fruits, nuts, berries, and viscous liquids. If the aforementioned viscous liquid happens to be a hot soup, check with the manufacturer to ensure its cups can handle higher temperatures.

Q: What are the disadvantages of portable blenders?

The disadvantages of a portable blender can vary by model. Some may be too large to comfortably carry around, while others may not have a large enough capacity to make as many smoothies or icy frozen treats as you’d like in a single batch. Battery-powered models are ultra-portable, but you must remember to charge them frequently.

Q: How long do portable blenders last?

If you keep your portable blender clean and don’t overload it, you’ll be able to keep it in top shape for five years or more. Battery-powered models will begin to lose their ability to hold a charge over time and may need to be replaced more frequently.

Final thoughts on the best portable blenders

Portable blenders—especially battery-powered models—have become a viable option for anyone looking to work more smoothies into their diet on a tight schedule. A small blender will be powerful enough to make thousands of recipes you can find online in a minute or less. Many portable blenders allow you to drink either directly from their vessel or from glasses that are included as part of a set. A blender is a very helpful multi-use tool in the kitchen, and these smaller models are great if you don’t have a lot of room on your counter or want to take a battery-powered model anywhere.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable blenders in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best seat cushions for office chairs in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-seat-cushions-for-office-chairs/ Thu, 11 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610218
The best seat cushions for office chairs in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Stop sitting around wondering how you can alleviate your office aches and invest in some chair cushions that do the job.

The post The best seat cushions for office chairs in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best seat cushions for office chairs in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ComfiLife contoured seat cushion cross-section showing grey exterior and blue interior gel ComfiLife Gel Enhanced Seat Cushion
SEE IT

This memory foam seat cushion was comfortable to sit on and its gel technology regulated its temperature to keep things cool.

Best splurge Purple Ultimate best splurge seat cushion for office chairs showing its gel grid interior Purple Ultimate Seat Cushion
SEE IT

This luxe office chair cushion helped us maintain proper posture, and its porous design kept us from overheating.

Best budget Qutool Orthopedic Memory Foam Seat Cushion and Lumbar Support on a plain white background. Qutool Orthopedic Memory Foam Seat Cushion and Lumbar Support  
SEE IT

This two-cushion bundle provides support for your office chair’s seat and back for under $30.

If you work in an office, even a home office, you’re probably sitting in a chair for eight or more hours a day—a potentially tiring scenario, but the right seat cushion can make it more comfortable. To be clear, sitting for prolonged periods of time is detrimental to your health. Heart disease, lower back and spine issues, obesity, and blood clots are some of the issues caused by sitting for so long. So, in addition to recommending the best seat cushions for your office chair, we recommend that you stop every 30 minutes to stand up and walk around. In addition, try to exercise at least 150 minutes a week, which can be broken down into 30 minutes a day/5 days a week, per the CDC’s guidelines for physical activity. But when you must sit in your chair, the right cushion can help provide support, and these are the best seat cushions for office chairs we’ve found.

How we chose the best seat cushions for office chairs

We conducted extensive research, contacted experts, and did plenty of first-hand testing to compile this list of the best chair cushions for offices. Most of the selections on this list have been tested. We also considered peer recommendations and consumer reviews.

The best seat cushions for office chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

I work from home, and I love the ability to control my work hours. However, I often find myself falling into a writing groove, and before I know it, I’ve been at my desk for hours. I tend to scoot a new desk chair onto the mat every few months just to switch things up—it helps that I test them professionally—and I recommend a new ergonomic office chair if you don’t already have one). Still, even though most of my chairs are quite comfortable, I’ve found that an office chair cushion can provide an even better experience. When compiling this list, most of the recommendations are office chair cushions that I’ve actually tested, and I also tried to provide a variety of types at various price points.

Best overall: ComfiLife Gel Enhanced Seat Cushion

Terri Williams / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17.5 x 13.7 x 2.8 inches
  • Fill Material: High-density memory foam with gel layer
  • Cover: Velour

Pros

  • Memory foam for support
  • Cooling gel layer
  • Built-in handle
  • Washable cover
  • Three color choices

Cons

  • May be too firm for some people

The ComfiLife Gel Enhanced Seat Cushion is our top pick—a thick, plush seat cushion made of high-density memory foam, designed to provide support and relieve pressure on the tailbone/coccyx area. The seat cushion also has a layer of gel technology on top. The gel provides additional comfort and keeps the cushion (and what it cushions) cool.

This is important because the cover is velvety material that I initially thought would make the seat cushion hot. However, the gel regulates the temperature well to keep the cushion nice and cool. The cover is available in black, grey, and navy blue. It also has a handle on the side, which makes the pillow easy to carry. In addition, the back side of the cushion has super-grippy dots to keep the cushion from sliding around or falling off the chair. I also like that the zippable cover can be removed and laundered in the washing machine in cold water and then tossed in the dryer.

Honestly, the first time I sat on the ComfiLife Gel Enhanced Seat Cushion, I found it firmer than I expected or preferred. It took a few times to get used to that level of firmness, but now I consider it the best overall choice if you’re looking for a seat cushion, thanks to feel and price. In terms of getting the best bang for your buck, the ComfiLife Gel Enhanced Seat Cushion delivers the best value.

Best cooling: Sutera Seat Cushion  

Terri Williams / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17.7 x 16 x 4.3 inches
  • Fill Material: Bamboo charcoal-infused memory foam
  • Cover: 90% Polyester, 10% Spandex

Pros

  • Memory foam is 4.3 inches deep
  • Contours to the shape of legs and posterior
  • Bamboo provides cooling airflow
  • Cushion remains fresh
  • Grips keep cushion in place

Cons

  • May be too thick or hard for some

Runner-up for the best overall seat cushion for office chairs, the Sutera Seat Cushion is 4.3 inches in depth and makes a good choice if you want a thick option. The memory foam provides support and relief—and the pillow is also ergonomically shaped to support various body parts. For example, since it’s so thick, the seat cushion elevates the hips, and the thighs are also slightly elevated (but if this is uncomfortable, you can lower your chair so your feet are on the floor).

In addition to memory foam, the seat cushion includes bamboo charcoal-infused material. This breathable material provides a cooling effect by keeping heat from getting trapped in the cushion. In addition, the charcoal-infused bamboo keeps the seat cushion fresh. The cover, which is made of 90% polyester and 10% spandex, can be removed and machine-washed in cold water and then air-dried. The cover’s back side (bottom) also has rubber grips to keep the cushion in place.

The first time I tried the Sutera Seat Cushion, I found it so stiff that my legs actually hurt (and I’m 5’8”, so it’s not like my legs were too short). However, after using it several times, I grew to appreciate the level of support it provides. Sometimes, seat cushions can be so soft that they’re like sitting on a bed pillow (which does not provide enough support to sit in an office chair all day). Now, I thoroughly enjoy sitting on this seat cushion, and I appreciate that it hasn’t started sagging after continuous use.

Best splurge: Purple Ultimate Seat Cushion  

Terri Williams / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 21.75 x 18 x 2.5 inches
  • Fill Material: Hyper-Elastic Polymer
  • Cover: Polyester

Pros

  • Gel grid is squishy, soft, and supportive
  • Both cover and cushion are washable
  • Air channels keep the cushion cool
  • Grippy bottom keeps seat cushion from moving

Cons

  • Expensive

I’ve tested dozens of high-end pillows and the Purple Harmony Pillow is one of the very best pillows on the market. So, it’s no surprise that Purple would also make one of the best seat cushions. The company actually makes a variety of seat cushion options, but the Purple Ultimate Seat Cushion is designed for larger chairs. As with its pillow, this seat cushion is also more expensive than many (if not most) competitors, but it’s worth it.

The seat cushion is made of a purple grid (I unzipped the cover so you can see it). The grid is squishy and soft, yet it can provide support without pressure. The cushion cradles the tailbone and cushions the other body parts, and the contoured groove is designed to ensure the right posture. Also, there are hundreds of air channels that help to ensure the cushion is temperature-neutral so I can avoid getting hot and sweaty while seated. The Purple Harmony Pillow offers undoubtedly the best design of the desk chair cushions I’ve tried.

If you have a hard chair, this will definitely make it softer. However, remember it’s bigger than the average seat cushion, so measure your chair to ensure the right fit. The cover can be removed, washed in the machine, and dried on a low setting. In addition, the actual cushion can also be hand-washed in cold water and a gentle detergent.

Best non-slip bottom: Aylio Seat Cushion  

Terri Williams / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18” x 14” x 2.5 inches
  • Fill Material: High-density foam
  • Cover: Velvet

Pros

  • Carrying handle
  • Washable cover
  • Nonslip microgrip
  • Soft

Cons

  • May be too soft for some people

I first tested the Aylio Seat Cushion in 2020, and the fact that I still have it says something about the quality and durability of this product. It’s slightly firm—enough to be supportive—but not firm enough to be uncomfortable or hard. The cushion leans more toward the soft side and is quite comfy yet supportive. And there was no “break-in” period. From day one, it was nice and cushy.

The U-shape design eliminates the numbness that sometimes comes from sitting for long periods and takes the pressure off the coccyx, legs, and other areas. In addition, the cover, which has a carrying strap, can be removed and machine-washed to keep it hygienic. Although the cover is made of velvet, it doesn’t generate heat.

Best back cushion: Purple Back Cushion

Purple

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 15.75 x 9.25 x 2.5 inches
  • Fill Material: Hyper-Elastic Polymer
  • Cover: Polyester

Pros

  • Adjustable strap keeps it in place
  • Provides lumbar support
  • Cool
  • Machine washable cover

Cons

  • Expensive

The Purple Back Support Cushion is large enough for any chair with a backrest. The hyper-elastic polymer (elastic gel) provides a squishy level of comfort that is also supportive. It’s designed to adjust to your body shape, and the adjustable strap keeps it in place so the cushion can provide lumbar support. The gel also has hundreds of tiny airways to ensure that the cushion does not trap heat but, instead, keeps you cool.

The zippered cover can be removed and tossed into the washing machine. In addition, the cushion itself can be cleaned with soap and water to keep it hygienic.

Best budget: Qutool Orthopedic Memory Foam Seat Cushion and Lumbar Support

Qutool

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: Cushion: 18 x 14 x 3 inches: Lumbar Pillow: 14 x 13 x 4 inches
  • Fill Material: Memory foam
  • Cover: Velvet

Pros

  • Great price
  • Seat cushion and lumbar pillow
  • Machine washable cover
  • Choice of colors 

Cons

  • Back cushion may not fit right for some

The Qutool Orthopedic Memory Foam Seat Cushion and Lumbar Support Pillow is a great option for those considering an office chair for back support but shopping on a budget. It’s a fabulous deal because it’s a combo that comes with two separate cushions: one for the seat and one for the back. The memory foam material is soft to the touch yet supportive, and the lumbar support pillow includes two straps to secure it to the back of the chair.

Keep in mind that if your chair already has a lumbar option, the lumbar support pillow will fit rather awkwardly. But if your chair doesn’t have a lumbar feature, the pillow should fit fine. The velvet cover zips off to launder in the machine, and the set is available in black and grey.   

What to consider when shopping for the best seat cushion for office chairs

There are several factors to remember to ensure you get the right seat cushion for your office chair: 

Material

Memory foam

“Memory foam cushions help contour the back and offer spinal support,” Dr. Allen Conrad, owner of the Montgomery County Chiropractic Center in North Wales, Penn., says. “Similar to a memory foam bed, the material will conform to your back and offer support.” However, he tells us there’s a downside: Like a memory foam bed, Conrad says, it will sag over time and lose its elasticity. Also, he warns that memory foam tends to retain heat and says it may not be the best choice if you tend to sweat a lot.

Dr. Sapna Sriram, chiropractor and injury expert at Integra Health in Toronto, agrees that the cushion’s material plays a significant role in providing both comfort and support. “Memory foam cushions are popular due to their ability to contour to the shape of the body, offering personalized support,” she says. “Additionally, materials like mesh or breathable fabrics can enhance airflow and prevent sweating, especially during warmer months.”

Liquid gel 

“Liquid gel and silicone gel offer the combination of support of a memory foam cushion,” Conrad says. “They also have individual cells, which allow circulation which helps you from overheating like a regular memory foam cushion tends to do.” He notes that these are very popular materials, especially for those looking for a combination of temperature control and comfort. 

Sriram adds, “Gel-infused cushions provide excellent pressure relief and help in dissipating heat, which can be beneficial for prolonged sitting.”

Inflatable 

While we didn’t include them on our list, some seat cushions can be inflated with air, reveals Conrad. “These are convenient for people that need something lightweight, but something they can travel with—for example, you use it at your desk at work and want to take the seat cushion home each day.” However, most options on our list have a carrying handle for easy transport. We didn’t include inflatables because they don’t provide the same level of support as the other two materials.  

Exterior materials

“The covering of an office seat cushion mostly focuses on personal taste, durability, and temperature control,” Conrad says. While some materials, like suede or leather, look nice, he warns that they may show wear and tear after only a few weeks. In addition, he says a wool or canvas material may also retain heat, compared with a cotton or polyester material. 

Firmness 

Sriram notes that the ideal firmness of the cushion will vary depending on your individual preferences and specific needs. “Generally, a cushion with medium firmness strikes a balance between comfort and support, ensuring that it adequately supports the body while alleviating pressure points,” she explains. However, she says some individuals may prefer firmer cushions for additional support, while others may find softer cushions more comfortable

If you don’t have any serious back conditions, Conrad says you may like a softer type; however, if you have a history of degenerative arthritis, for example, he says the firmer, the better. “When you get a degenerative spine condition, the ligaments of your spine lose their structural support,” Conrad explains. “As a result, you need the additional firm pressure while sitting to help reduce spasms and inflammation of the lumbar spine.” 

Size and shape

“The size and shape of the cushion should complement the dimensions of your office chair and provide ample support for your body,” Sriram says. “Look for cushions that are large enough to support your entire seating area and promote proper alignment of the spine.” In addition, she recommends an ergonomic design that contours to the natural curves of your body since it can help alleviate lower back pressure while also promoting a healthy posture.   

“You will need to measure the width and depth of your office chair to see the dimensions that will fit,” says Conrad. “If the cushion is too narrow, for example, it will tend to move and slide around. This will become uncomfortable and defeat the whole purpose.” 

Most people can use a flat style, Conrad continues, but for those with herniated discs or degenerative arthritis, the contoured type is preferred. “Contoured cushions will follow the lordotic curve of your lumbar spinal vertebrae,” he explains. “This provides additional reinforcement along your lower back to act as extra pressure right on your spine.  

Temperature regulation

Sriram says it’s important to maintain a comfortable temperature -especially if you spend a lot of time sitting at your desk. “Opt for cushions with temperature-regulating features, such as gel-infused or ventilated designs, which help dissipate heat and promote airflow to prevent discomfort caused by excessive sweating or overheating,” she says.

Additional features

Depending on your preferences and specific needs, Sriram says you may want to consider additional features that can enhance comfort and functionality. “This may include built-in lumbar support for extra back support, non-slip bottoms to prevent the cushion from sliding on the chair, and removable, washable covers for easy maintenance and hygiene.” 

FAQs

Q: Is gel or memory foam better for a seat cushion?

It depends on your preferences and needs. Memory foam can contour to the shape of your body and provide personalized support. Cushions infused with gel can provide pressure relief and dissipate heat.

Q: Can a seat cushion for an office chair relieve pain?

Yes, a seat cushion for office chairs can relieve pain in your lower back, hips, and joints. It also reduces fatigue by improving circulation. In addition, the seat cushion can support your legs and hips and promote proper posture.  

Q: What is the difference between a chair pad and a chair cushion?

A chair pad is typically a flat seat cushion for outdoor chairs, kitchen and dining room chairs, and other scenarios. Some models include fabric ties to keep them secure. They provide a more comfortable experience but usually don’t have the ergonomic effects you’d find in a dedicated seat cushion for an office chair.

Q: Can a seat cushion for an office chair be used in other environments?

Yes, a seat cushion for an office chair can be used in your car, while sitting on the sofa, in a wheelchair, and pretty much anywhere you sit down.

Final thoughts on the best seat cushions for office chairs

If you sit at your desk for an extended period, your body can start to ache. But one of the best seat cushions for office chairs can help alleviate these pains. Whether you prefer memory foam, gel, or a combination, there’s a seat cushion that meets your needs and can make it easier for you to focus and work comfortably.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best seat cushions for office chairs in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best label printers for home offices and small businesses in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-label-printers/ Fri, 15 Oct 2021 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=403350
Rollo label printer in front of plants being held in a hand
Stan Horaczek

Make shipping and organizing much easier with these compact, efficient printers.

The post The best label printers for home offices and small businesses in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Rollo label printer in front of plants being held in a hand
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Rollo label printer in front of plants being held in a hand Rollo Wireless Label Printer
SEE IT

The easiest way to print shipping labels.

Best for small business The Dymo XL is the best label printer for small business. Dymo 4XL
SEE IT

A super-compact printer with a wide range of features

Best value The Leoity is the best label printer. Leoity Thermal Label Printer
SEE IT

This affordable option prints as fast as many competitors.

You don’t have to be a true type-A person for a label printer to change the way you work. Whether you’re running a high-volume online store or just trying to keep track of where all your stuff is, a great label machine can make the process much simpler. The best label printers are typically much more efficient than trying to wrestle with an unreliable all-in-one inkjet printer that tries to do everything and succeeds at almost nothing. These purpose-built printers can make the shipping process a lot easier and a whole lot cheaper. Just be sure you know what you’re looking for before taking the plunge and picking up one of the best label printers. 

How we chose the best label printers

Here at PopSci HQ, we have gadgets and other products coming in and out all the time. I’m also a frequent online seller with an established vintage clothing business, so this is essential equipment for me. I can look at a shipping box and tell you the correct dimensions at this point. Our regular delivery service workers gave us a holiday gift last year. We do a lot of shipping. At the same time, we also do a lot of organizing. Keeping track of everything can be a grind if we’re constantly sorting through identical boxes. Label makers can make a huge difference. 

The best label printers: Reviews & Recommendations

For this guide, we surveyed dozens of models but focused on the most reliable and revered brands with the best reputation. We considered ease of use and even design, which is important when you have to stare at these things all day.

Best overall: Rollo Wireless Label Printer

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Thermal printing
  • Up to 4-inch x 6-inch prints
  • Works with all the major shipping companies
  • Prints one label per second

Pros

  • Fast
  • No toner or ink to buy
  • Works with all major shippiers
  • Automatically recognizes labels
  • Connects wirelessly

Cons

  • Pricey unless you’re doing high-volume
  • No color 

Put a stack or roll of labels behind the Rollo label printer, and it can start pumping out ready-to-roll labels at a rate of one per second. It uses thermal-printing tech, which means it prints with heat onto thermal-compatible labels, which means there’s no ink or toner to buy as there would be with your inkjet. 

The Rollo has built-in sensors that can automatically detect what type of label it’s printing on to keep everything in the correct spot without a user having to dig into its settings. 

In many cases, you can get the Thermal Direct labels from the shippers for free, which means the cost of the printer and the small amount of electricity it takes to run it is all you’re spending on labels. 

As the best label printer overall, it works with USPS, UPS, and FedEx, and the whole thing is rugged and portable, so you can take it with you if you want to get some work done at a separate location. 

If you don’t need wireless capabilities, you can get the USB-only version for $199, though the wireless connectivity is extremely handy. Rollo also sells a scale specifically for online sellers in case you want the matching kit.

Best with wireless: Brother P-Touch PT-D460BT Business Expert Connected Label Maker

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Memory holds up to 70 labels
  • 30mm per second print speed
  • Bluetooth or wired connectivity
  • Five lines per label
  • Manual tape cutter

Pros

  • Easily stores frequently used labels for quick printing
  • Crisp, clear print quality
  • Keyboard is easy to type on
  • Quick
  • Screen is roomy and easy to red
  • Wireless connectivity is handy

Cons

  • Requires proprietary materials

This Bluetooth-enabled printer can churn out prints at up to 30mm per second on 0.75-inch wide tape. You’ll have to use the proprietary Brother tape, but that’s common for models like this. The P-Touch 460BT can store up to 70 different label templates in its memory, making them easy to quickly print if you use them frequently. Brother’s print quality and clarity are excellent. Even small print is simple to make out, thanks to the sharp, clear letters. You can connect this printer to a computer via Bluetooth or a cord, which makes it one of the most versatile models we’ve tried. It’s a great way to label things in storage or add QR codes to inventory that you’re trying to keep track of in automated systems. Plus, if you’re using it at home, you have many formatting options that are easily accessible through the keyboard. With 16 different fonts, 800 symbols, and 140 frame styles, you can personalize the look of the labels. If you’re looking for a traditional model, go check out our list of the best Bluetooth printers.

Best color label printer: Brother VC-500W Versatile Compact Color Label and Photo Printer

Brother

SEE IT

Specs

  • ZINK thermal printing technology
  • Prints in color and black-and-white
  • WiFi connectivity

Pros

  • Full-color printing without ink to buy
  • Can make prints up to 17 inches long
  • Small
  • Wireless connectivity
  • Lots of printing substrate options, including stickers

Cons

  • Width maxes out at two inches
  • Pricey paper refills

This printer can churn out full-color print jobs but doesn’t require ink. Instead, it relies on Zero Ink technology (sometimes called ZINK). The required colors exist inside the special paper or sticker refills before entering the printer. Heat activates them to create images.

These labels aren’t as big as typical shipping labels—they max out at two inches wide. It can print images up to 17 inches long, however. 

Built-in wireless connectivity makes connecting via WiFi or even a smartphone’s wireless connection easy. While this isn’t ideal for people in most business settings, it can be the best color label printer for a teacher or other professional that can benefit from the occasional splash of color. 

Best for small businesses: Dymo 4XL

Dymo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Prints up to 4 inches by 6 inches
  • 60 custom templates to choose from
  • Prints up to 129 labels per minute
  • Works with major selling and shipping platforms

Pros

  • Super-fast printing
  • Very small footprint
  • Super crisp, high-res text
  • Woks with shipping labels from major companies

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Works best with on-brand labels

Small business label printing goes beyond shipping. This 300-dpi printer can churn out super-crisp barcodes, QR codes, and other business-specific labels easily read with a machine or your eyeballs. If you’re mostly shipping, this printer works with labels from major shippers like FedEx, USPS, and UPS. With 60 built-in printing templates, the Dymo can automatically print labels from popular services like eBay and Etsy to streamline shipping. 

Like other label printers, it maxes out at four inches by six inches, which should be plenty big for the most common tasks. Dymo offers a litany of different first-party papers and substrates to match your exact printing requirements. 

Like other thermal printers, it doesn’t require ink or toner cartridge replacements, which keeps costs way down over inkjets making this the best label printer for small businesses. If you’re looking for the best printer for small businesses over all, go check out our buying guide.

Best for organizing: Brother P-Touch

Brother

SEE IT

Specs

  • Full QWERTY keyboard
  • Battery powered
  • Prints to half-inch tape
  • Three font choices

Pros

  • Cheap
  • Built-in keyboard
  • Portable
  • Prints quickly

Cons

  • Very small print material

If you don’t need to print barcodes or shipping labels and just need the best label printer for organizing, this portable unit can come in very handy. Load a roll of half-inch tape inside and choose one of three fonts. Then type into the onboard QWERTY keyboard, and the machine spits out your label in just a few seconds. It allows for borders and special characters like fire if you want to point out that something is flammable. 

This model can save 15 labels to its built-in memory, so if you’re constantly making the same one, you don’t have to create it every time you turn the machine on. Brother sells a whole line of compatible tape for printing, including various colors and types. The printing process is quick and quiet so that you can make fast work of an entire room or space. The best small printers can make a big difference in your workflow.

Things to consider when buying the best label printers

Paper size

The major shipping companies have standardized their label sizes, so it’s fairly easy to know whether the labels you need to use will fit. Anything capable of pumping out 4-inch by 6-inch labels is enough to cover USP, USPS, FedEx, and any other big names. 

Smaller label makers and quirky label printers often use much smaller material, which won’t work for shipping purposes.

Printing technology

Most shipping label printers use True Thermal technology. There’s no ink involved. Instead, the printer uses heat to reveal black substrate from behind a top white layer. This process requires special paper or labels to work, but it doesn’t require ink cartridges or toner, which is typically much more expensive. 

If you want color, you’re better off with inkjet or Zero Ink (ZINK), which uses the same thermal printing tech but includes color in the paper.

Print speed

You’ll sometimes see this expressed differently depending on the model. Some thermal printers will describe their speed by the number of mm per second it can churn out. For instance, you might see 150mm/s listed in a product description. Higher numbers mean faster printing. Other printers will tell you exactly how many labels you can print out per second or per minute. Expect 0.5 to 2 labels per second, depending on the content and the printer.

FAQs

Q: Do label printers need ink?

Thermal printers like the Dymo don’t rely on ink to make prints. Instead, they utilize special paper or labels that react with heat to reveal black material that makes up the print itself. So, there are no ink cartridges or toner cartridges to replace.

If you’re using a more traditional printer to print labels, however, you will need to replace those cartridges.

Q: What should I look for in a label printer?

As with any electronic, I suggest figuring out what the most important aspect of the device is to you and focusing on that. In the case of label printers, speed is likely a concern if you’re dealing with high volume. You want something that can churn out a lot of labels in a little bit of time. 

Size is also a consideration. If you only need labels to mark bins, boxes, binders, or other things that need organizing, pick something that gives you more text options and a portable form factor.

Q: How long do label makers last?

Heat and gadgets do not typically get along. Most label makers use heat for their thermal printing process. Good models have robust cooling solutions that blow hot air out to keep delicate electronics from overheating. Still, you’ll know your label printer is starting to go when prints get inconsistent and spotty.

Final thoughts on the best label printers

Shipping is a huge part of starting many small businesses; the best label printers can make short work of it. Of course, they also have utility beyond shipping. They can print barcodes, stickers, and other things to make your life easier and more organized. Just make sure you get the right model for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best label printers for home offices and small businesses in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save $90 on a DEWALT drill and bit driver set at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/dewalt-drill-bit-driver-amazon-spring-deal/ Thu, 11 Apr 2024 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610452
DEWALT DCD771C2 20V MAX Lithium-Ion Compact Drill:Driver Kit with DW2166 45-Piece Screwdriving Set Bundle Deal tiles.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

The power tool is bundled with a 45-bit driver set.

The post Save $90 on a DEWALT drill and bit driver set at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
DEWALT DCD771C2 20V MAX Lithium-Ion Compact Drill:Driver Kit with DW2166 45-Piece Screwdriving Set Bundle Deal tiles.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Spring is here, and with it comes longer days ripe for tackling DIY projects that have dodged you all winter. Thankfully, DEWALT is offering a $90 discount on its latest drill and driver set, which will cut your work time down significantly. The power tool can rotate up to 1,500 times per minute, has a built-in light that lights up during use to help you work in darker areas, and has a lightweight design that makes it easy to hold and use with one hand.

DEWALT Compact Drill/Driver Kit with 45-Piece Screwdriving Set $113.69 (Was $203.49)

DEWALT

SEE IT

We’re pleased to see this deep discount on a bundle that also includes the company’s 45-piece screwdriving set. This bit set includes an assortment of flat and Phillips head screwdriver bits at different lengths and thicknesses. More specialty bits for bolts or star-shaped screws are also included. DEWALT’s bundle comes with a battery and charger for its drill, and more critically, a carrying case that can hold the power tool and all of its accessories. This is a one-click solution for anyone starting their DIY journey, or who wants to upgrade from an older drill or screwdriver.

Other DEWALT Tool deals worth your dollar:

The post Save $90 on a DEWALT drill and bit driver set at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best microscopes for students in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-microscopes-for-students/ Wed, 10 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610048
The best microphones for students in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Seeing the small world up close gives students a clearer picture of the larger world around us. Here are the microscopes to help them get started.

The post The best microscopes for students in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best microphones for students in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AmScope M150C-I on a plain white background. AmScope M150C-I
SEE IT

This classic microscope is made with students’ needs in mind.

Best for groups OMAX-MD82ES10 on a plain white background. OMAX-MD82ES10
SEE IT

It can connect to a laptop or other screen for group viewing, helping large groups explore the microverse together.

Best budget NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC Microscope for Kids on a plain white background. National Geographic STEM Kit
SEE IT

This scope has brightfield and darkfield for enhanced viewing and a “student-proof” design for longevity.

There’s a wide world full of shapes, colors, and things for the inquisitive to observe, but only with microscopes for students can the scientifically inclined investigate the world within the world—the world of the tiny. From the fine scratches on the top of a worn penny to the cilia of microbial life, a lot is going on that the naked eye cannot see. But what constitutes a great microscope is not always clear. Depending on the level of the student, they may need almost literal hand-holding through the operation of the scope, with interesting slides pre-prepared. Situations may call for less intense magnification and simpler devices that even young students can use if guided properly. In other scenarios, some microscopes connect with high-quality displays, letting a group work together, seeing and documenting what they find simultaneously. No matter your needs, these are the best microscopes for students, and one will likely fit your needs.

How we selected the best microscopes for students

It can be hard to believe that your friendly neighborhood article writer came from anywhere but a cramped library, surrounded by books and manuscripts. This one, however, came from cramped (and sometimes quite spacious) laboratories. One period of several months spent counting pollen for hours and hours a day—when, at 22 or so, I was hardly beyond being a student myself—stands out particularly in my mind as a period of learning and understanding the intricacies of microscope usage.

Of course, the microscopes presented below will be good for students, both young and old, with various capabilities depending on the age group. While no microscope is indestructible, they’re universally quite fragile at the lens, we are aiming for microscopes that can withstand (or safeguard against) beginner follies and common pitfalls. Two other features that give a big boost to a microscope’s suitability for students are easy ways to view and share what’s being seen, as well as supplied activities and guidance.

The best microscopes for students: Reviews & Recommendations

The following microscopes were all picked to satisfy your student at home or, as the case may be, in a group at your school, club, or other location. Check out each one to compare and contrast it to your needs. Also, while there will definitely be some overlap with the microscopes on this list, you should check out our listing of the best microscopes for kids. This goes doubly so if you feel that the microscopes and activities listed here are too difficult or challenging for the student you have in mind.

Best overall: AmScope M150C-I

AmScope

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Compound
  • Magnification: 40X – 1000X
  • Included activities: No

Pros

  • Classic style used in real labs and universities
  • Wide magnification range good for most activities
  • Teaches real microscope skills
  • Affordable for most

Cons

  • No included investigation kit
  • Not ideal for youngest learners

The AmScope M150C-I resembles many other microscopes but comes in at $100, within a serious student’s budget, and affordable enough multiples can be purchased for a group of learners. This microscope will teach real responsibility with a microscope, including proper handling, as well as give students a chance to see the smallest parts of the world properly. It uses a proper compound style, has an easily graspable fine coarse control, and an adjustable light source that can be powered either via batteries or an outlet.

This microscope has an incredible range of magnifications that you can use it at, as well. The world at 40X and 1000X, the two extremes this microscope has to offer, will appear almost completely different and will allow for different activities. At a low magnification, look at the exterior of a bug or plant “skins” up close. Then, at 1000X, take a look at the cells themselves. With all of these factors combined, you should expect your students to be able to learn a wide variety of lessons with this scope, making it a best value.

What gives us pause about this microscope is that it does not come with activities and may not be suitable for fast-moving and excitable youngsters. If you are the creative type and have equally curious and motivated students, these issues can be circumvented, however. Setting up scenes for young students to look at—without adjusting the scope themselves—can certainly help. Consider looking at award-winning microscope imagery and other outstanding microscope shots to spur creative impulses.

Best for groups: OMAX-MD82ES10 

OMAX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Compound
  • Magnification: 40X – 2000X
  • Included activities: No

Pros

  • Built-in 1.3MP USB camera
  • Easy to connect software
  • Very solid slide grip
  • High longevity in use cases

Cons

  • Optional oil immersion capabilities are complex

The OMAX-MD82ES10 is a bi-focal compound microscope with a secondary viewing pattern—accessible through the 1.3MP camera that exports imagery through USB. This gives large groups of students of all capabilities a chance to simultaneously look at the same field of view. That can mean trusted students taking turns finding things in a microscope and being able to share what they see with each other in real-time or a teacher-led activity that lets students of all capabilities share in on the excitement. Furthermore, individual students can copy and save imagery and videos on the secondary view, allowing them to share their findings with the world.

Another point about this microscope is its build and construction. Take its slide-holding mechanism, with squared-off edges that grip and secure slides snuggly. Compared to less form-fitting mechanisms, there will be considerably fewer fears of slides popping up and tapping the lens, as well as less frustration when changing slides. You’ll also appreciate dual-sided fine focusing, maximizing comfort for right- and left-handed users.

We do think that for many students (and even teachers), the thought of using oil immersion microscopy—a very advanced technique and a capability included on this scope—may be rightfully intimidating. The good news is that getting quality shots does not require its usage, and the capability is there for you when (and if) you eventually want to try it.

Best for active students: AmScope Student Forward Binocular Stereo Microscope

AmScope

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Stereo
  • Magnification: 10X – 60X
  • Included activities: No

Pros

  • Stereo microscope usable by younger students
  • Higher magnification than many stereo scopes
  • Easy-to-use design

Cons

  • Cannot see cells, etc.

When we think of microscopes, we often think of compound microscopes, which can be problematic for students. Their lenses are very close to the subject, so small mistakes can ruin them easily. It can also be very difficult to find interesting things with them.

Enter the stereo microscope. These microscopes are designed for looking up close and seeing new details on full objects. Typically only getting about 50X magnification, max, these microscopes are great for revealing the finer details of rocks, bugs, and more. This AmScope student stereo microscope can get up to 60X zoom, quite better than others. It also has a lengthy distance from subject to lens, meaning an excited or shaky student is unlikely to damage the lens while putting something into frame.

We highly recommend a microscope like this for examining specimens from nature hikes, studying plants, and more biological research. The binocular eyepiece setup will also allow students to lean into the microscope more—holding your head properly at a microscope is more difficult than you might expect—without hiring their faces.

Best splurge: Accu-Scope EXM-150-MS-DF

Accu-Scope

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Compound
  • Magnification: Up to 400X
  • Included activities: No

Pros

  • Student-proof design protects lenses
  • Darkfield option increases visibility
  • Cordless LED lighting

Cons

  • Expensive

One of the biggest fears surrounding finding the best microscopes for students is the possibility of them messing up the lenses. It happens to fully trained adults in absent-minded moments of haphazardly switching from far to near focus, so imagine the possibilities for error in our youngest scientists!

This Accu-Scope microscope helps prevent this issue by including a pre-set focus stop to help students avoid hitting the lens. Of course, it won’t completely prevent the problem, and students should still be properly trained in how to increase focus—both for the sake of this scope and potential future ones they encounter—but the added safety barrier certainly helps.

Another feature that makes this our premium pick (its main downside is that, at $400, it is expensive) is the darkfield switch. This method of microscope usage greatly increases contrast on the edges of cells and other objects, making it easier to see boundaries.

Best budget: National Geographic STEM Kit

National Geographic

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Compound
  • Magnification: 40X – 400X
  • Included activities: Yes

Pros

  • Has a great included kit
  • Very affordable
  • Entertaining presentation

Cons

  • Cheap construction

Not all students are ready for an intense simulation of the laboratory. Additionally, not all students will dedicate serious time to the art of using the scope. For the science-interested but not dedicated, this kit is what you want. It’s the right price for a weekend or even a fun week. If your student continues with it, that’s great. If they don’t, it’s no harm, no foul. You know where your student lies on this spectrum.

It’s got a great kit with included activities and a fun, lighthearted guide to go with it. The construction of the microscope is similarly simple and non-intimidating. It’s brightly colored, soft, and forgoes a lot of the complexities of other scopes on the list. While its plastic construction won’t exactly give it the longevity to make it a hand-me-down, it will be easy for young people to use, even heavily, without fears of trouble. This is a microscope that young (but still responsible) individuals can use and make their own without excessive family worry over damaging expensive lenses. In other words, it is perfect as a gift for the budding scientist near you.

What to consider before buying microscopes for students

Microscopes are complex. There are no ifs, ands, or buts about it. Here’s a guide on what you should expect and how to choose a reasonable microscope for students:

Age suitability

In many ways, this comes at your discretion before buying a microscope. Not all students (or even parents) have the patience to use a highly detailed microscope with the care it requires. Finding interesting things, even in pond water at 400X+ zoom, takes patience and a careful hand.

Throughout the above, we’ve attempted to give you a glimpse at what you and your student child (or student group, should you be a teacher) might be able to accomplish with a given microscope. If the activities supplied seem outside the scope of what the student or student group can accomplish on a fundamental level, that microscope can be put in your “pass” pile.

Magnification level

The first thing to know about microscope magnification is that a higher magnification level is not always better. This goes doubly for students who—if given proper guidance—can find excitement at all magnification levels. Avoid the temptation to summarize microscopes as “cell viewing devices” only. A student envisioning a world of gladiatorial amoeba battles will become instantly disappointed with anything less.

Here is what to expect at various microscope levels, as well as target tasks that you can expect to accomplish reasonably:

Under 50X, we will begin to see things just beyond the border of what the eye can normally see. Here, your students can understand the surface of normal objects better. Great investigations here include looking at printed text, looking at the veins and stomata of a leaf up close, and seeing insects clearly up close.

By 100X, individual cells and pollen can be seen, though it will definitely feel like a “bird’s eye view” of sorts. Here, you can observe how many cells are in a small area of one pond’s water to another. Do you expect there to be a higher density of cells observable in a spot of pond water or tap water left out overnight? Can you find cells in your saliva? Onion cells look particularly good at this level.

If you get to 400X, you can observe cells up close and even see their insides. What structures can you observe, and how can they move? This is the stage where you can see amoeba, though you should be warned that observed cells will likely be dead or die quickly after being observed in a slide under the heat of a microscope’s lamp.

Of course, you can get magnifications beyond these, but these three levels are fairly standard for student microscopes. Remember, there is no best magnification level; there are just different magnification levels that are best for different jobs. For example, you wouldn’t want the highest resolution microscope, which can see atoms, for looking at cells.

Microscope types and control

One of the first choices in your microscope-picking journey will be the type of microscope. There are many types of professionally used microscopes, but for the purposes of student microscopes, you can broadly separate them into two categories: stereo microscopes and compound microscopes.

Stereo microscopes are an oft-overlooked style of microscope that are particularly suitable for students who lack refined motor skills and advanced self-control. They feature a single, wide lens that towers far above the subject. Control often involves moving the subject and adjusting the (usually below 50X) zoom level, with little else. Since the lens stays far above the subject, the odds of damaging it are much lower, and reasonably well-behaved students can be trusted with the microscope after adult preparation and instruction.

Compound microscopes and other microscopes with a dual-lens approach are invariably cooler to use. They allow for higher magnifications, after all. Unfortunately, they also require more complex skills to use, with the lens approaching the subject directly. Should the lens become scratched, it can become completely ruined. This can occur by switching a shorter lens to a longer lens without pulling away from the subject first or accidentally moving the quick-moving coarse adjustment when you meant to use the fine-adjustment knob or even panning. In schools—including college classrooms—it isn’t uncommon to make students pass an easy test to verify their knowledge of a compound microscope before using it.

Price

Given enough technology, your journey to peer into the world of microcosms can stretch to infinitesimally small places. Much the same, it seems that more and more microscope technologies can bring with them infinitely high prices.

For student microscopes, this isn’t the way.

While price points you’re willing to pay are personal, you should be able to find the best student microscope for your family or small group for the price of any other modern tech gadget, such as a 3D printer or laptop computer.

The prices of the student microscopes above vary widely. If you’re a family buying a microscope for an individual student, gauge their level of interest and stick-to-it-iveness and buy accordingly.

FAQs

Q: How much does a microscope for students cost?

A microscope for students can cost anywhere from about $60 to over $300 or $400. What you are willing to spend on this scale will largely depend on the number of students who will be using a single scope, your budgeting, and the overall purpose of the microscope. 

Q: What type of microscope is used the most by students?

Younger students tend to mostly use stereo microscopes, while older students will use a mixture of both stereo and compound microscopes. Neither is the “best” type of microscope—they have different applications—but stereo microscopes are usable with less experience and training than compound microscopes.

Q: What is a student microscope?

Ultimately, there is no designation for a “student microscope” in the world of scientists. With the exception of cheaper plastic models that are clearly made for children, you’re either using a microscope or you aren’t. Instead, we can think of a student microscope as one that more easily enables students to learn about the world and fits their needs more than others. In this way, multi-thousand-dollar microscopes with complex operations and niche uses are not student microscopes.

Final thoughts on the best microscopes for students

The preceding microscopes will be able to help your individual student or student group on their first explorations into the world of the microscopic (and potentially beyond). They are designed to encourage creativity and promote skill in the reasonable exercises that most entering scientists will need in a career in microscopy. Toss in one of the best telescopes for kids and you’ll have both ends of the curiosity spectrum covered, equipping your student with a broader understanding of the world(s)!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best microscopes for students in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best powered speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-powered-speakers/ Tue, 22 Mar 2022 17:22:20 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=430842
The best powered speakers composited
Stan Horaczek

Fill your space with sound, not extra components, when you plug in and bliss out to these top-tier powered speakers.

The post The best powered speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best powered speakers composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall JBL 4305P JBL 4305P
SEE IT

Prosumer connectivity and hi-res streaming meets precision tuning in a premium speaker ideal for both pro and casual listening.

Best for the bookshelf KEF LS50 Wireless II KEF LS50 Wireless II
SEE IT

This beloved powered bookshelf doubles as a full-featured hi-fi wireless hub.

Best PA speakers Bose L1 Pro8 Bose L1 Pro8
SEE IT

Power performances and parties with an ultra-portable all-in-one PA you can carry in one hand.

Powered speakers are a minimalist’s dream. Because they feature built-in amplification, there’s no power-matching, no racks of components, and cable clutter is essentially nonexistent: Just plug the speakers into wall power, connect your sound source, and you’re in business. Increasingly, powered speakers are being marketed as all-in-one sound hubs, combining the convenience of built-in power with wireless connectivity and smart assistants. But powered speakers aren’t just designed to spark joy in your less-is-more living space; they often offer sonic advantages over passive models. Read on to learn what’s great about the best powered speakers and how to start your journey into the maximized minimalism of a sweet new self-contained sound system.

How we chose the best powered speakers

We explored hundreds of products in our pursuit of the best powered speakers: We concentrated mainly on companies with a lot of experience designing powered models. While we considered a range of listening applications, we prioritized speakers that offer convenience and connectivity features but focus on fidelity first. Our in-house hi-fi heads and active producers debated our favorite models, solicited input from respected peers, and collected user impressions and critical perspectives, performing listening tests whenever possible as we narrowed down the contenders.

The best powered speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

As more speaker makers add powered models to their lineups, wading through the choices can get pretty overwhelming. We’ve made things a little easier with our top choices for a range of listening scenarios, from best-loved bookshelf speakers to all-in-one PA systems to power your next pool party or jam sesh. With models here starting below $200, you’ll land on the best powered speakers for your budget and lifestyle.

Best overall: JBL 4305P

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Advanced transducer designs, hi-res streaming, and prosumer connectivity make this powerhouse speaker well-suited for both pro monitoring and casual listening.

Specs

  • Driver complement: 2 (one 1-inch compression driver, one 5 ¼-inch composite woofer)
  • Amplification: 300 W rms
  • Frequency response: 45 Hz – 25 kHz
  • Dimensions: 13.2 x 8.3 x 8.8 inches (H x W x D)

Pros

  • Inputs support both consumer and pro devices
  • 24-bit/96 kHz converters preserve hi-res audio
  • Optimize sound with room-correction EQ

Cons

  • Pro sound comes with a premium price

JBL is no newcomer to powerful speakers, introducing some of the first models as far back as the 1960s. The company’s brand-new 4305P ($2,200/pair) is the first powered model in its consumer Studio Monitor series, which pay homage to the brand’s ’70s-style speakers. This fully loaded speaker features built-in Class D amplification, 24-bit/192 kHz converters, and six audio inputs that can connect to a huge range of digital and analog sources to provide comprehensive, hi-res wired and wireless connectivity. 

The 4305P (shown in walnut above with its grille removed) aims to deliver the presence and power of a floorstanding speaker in a standmount form factor, using patented JBL transducer technologies: each speaker features a 2410H-2 1-inch compression driver mated to a High-Definition Imaging horn for crystal-clear highs and lifelike dynamics. A 5.25-inch cast-frame, fiber-composite cone woofer operates in a bass-reflex configuration with dual front-firing tuned ports. An onboard Class D amp delivers 25W to each compression driver and 125W to each woofer for a total system power of 300W rms. Other features include a bass contour control to compensate for acoustic issues introduced by speaker placement close to walls, plus a signal-sensing line-level subwoofer out (which applies a high-pass 80Hz filter when in use to give the cabinets more headroom).

The result is the lively dynamics expected from a horn-guided tweeter presented with punchy authority, especially in its beefy midrange—not surprising for a company with heritage firmly entrenched in both control rooms and live sound reinforcement. Imaging is impressively wide, though the darting transients can get bright. Thankfully, this is accompanied by bass that’s well-etched and impactful, maybe not the deepest, but capable of keeping things balanced. (A powered subwoofer—such as the aesthetically and aurally compatible L10cs, with a 10-inch down-firing polycellulose cone driven by a 250W RMS/500W dynamic built-in amplifier—is needed to really warm things up.) What stands out most about the 4305P’s innate character, perhaps, is the overall speedy response, which never loses its footing at any pace or pressure. The 4305P isn’t a laidback analytical listen and can play far louder (with minimized distortion) than you’d expect from speakers this size.

When it comes to high-res streaming, the 4305P takes quality to the next level thanks to an integrated streaming engine that provides wired and wireless network audio capabilities via Ethernet, Google Chromecast Built-in, Apple AirPlay 2, and Bluetooth 5.1. A high-resolution digital-to-analog converter preserves 24-bit/96 kHz resolution when the speakers connect wirelessly; when they are tethered with the included 2m Digital Link cable, resolution can be extended to 192 kHz. The 4305P can render MQA files (the musical equivalent of a ZIP file, a way to encode and distribute full-spectrum audio in a compressed container) and is set to be Roon Ready, giving you access to a compatible music server while on your local network. As a bonus, JBL has thrown in a 90-day Qobuz trial membership that includes a curated playlist of songs that showcase the speaker’s audio capabilities.

Analog ins include combo XLR and ¼-inch TRS phono connectors and a selectable input-sensitivity switch. This configuration provides the option for balanced XLR and ¼-inch TRS (tip/ring/sleeve) or unbalanced TS (tip/sleeve) connections, which cover both pro and consumer gear. Other I/Os include asynchronous USB and optical digital inputs and a 3.5mm analog in. In addition to front-panel controls, the 4305P includes a Bluetooth handheld remote and can be controlled as part of a Google Home or Apple AirPlay ecosystem.

The 4305P’s enclosure is constructed from 3⁄4-inch MDF with internal bracing. It is finished in wood veneer, styled in Natural Walnut with a blue grille or Black Walnut with a black grille (shown above in Natural Walnut with the grille off). With its pedigree and presence, the 4305P can look as at home flanking a mix console as it does facing your comfiest listening chair. Crave more kick? The 4329P, which debuted at CES 2023 and will ship in Q2, is a similarly self-contained, amplified system that increases the size of the woofer to a JW200P-4 8-inch pure-pulp black paper cone, with 250W delivered there and 50W to the step-up JBL 2409H 1-inch compression driver. That comprehensive connectivity/high-res rendering engine remains intact while receiving a specs bump to Bluetooth 5.3 with aptX Adaptive audio. Of course, larger model means larger price, so expect these to hit the market around $4,500/pair.

Best bookshelf: KEF LS50 Wireless II

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Built-in amplification, hi-res audio support, acoustic upgrades, and futureproof connectivity add up to a full-featured audiophile-grade wireless hub.

Specs

  • Drivers: 2 (one 1”, one 5 ¼”)
  • Amplification: 380W per speaker
  • Frequency response: 45 Hz – 28 kHz
  • Dimensions: 12 x 7.9 x 12.2 inches (H x W x D)

Pros

  • Set up a whole-home system with Chromecast
  • Robust wired and wireless connectivity
  • Future-proof app tech

Cons

  • Speakers and stands are very pricey

In 2016, KEF debuted the LS50 Wireless, a successor to its classic LS50 bookshelf speaker that added built-in amplification and streaming. The next-gen LS50 Wireless II boasts refinements to acoustics, connectivity, and the KEF Connect control app.

As at home stand-mounted (shown above) or on a desktop as it is tucked in a nook, the KEF LS50 Wireless II is a “bookshelf speaker” in the classic audiophile sense, an effortlessly integrated component capable of bringing a wide sweet spot to a small room. Inside each speaker, custom amps deliver 280 watts of power to each woofer and 100 watts to each tweeter for big, clean, distortion-free sound at any volume. Digital processing lets you fine-tune the sound to fit your speaker placement and space, either on-speaker or via the free KEF Connect app.

The LS50 Wireless II is available in signature KEF Carbon Black, Titanium Grey, Mineral White (pictured), and Crimson Red finishes, with optional matching stands. KEF’s striking, copper-hued Uni-Q driver orients a 1-inch vented aluminum-dome tweeter in the acoustic center of a 5 ¼-inch magnesium-aluminum alloy woofer cone to create a wide listening sweet spot; a bass-reflex cabinet with elliptical rear ports is designed to maximize accurate, musical low end. And Metamaterial Absorption Technology (MAT) behind the proprietary 12th-generation drivers takes in unwanted reflections and reduces distortion. Much like the JBL 4305P (above) is detailed and dynamic, the LS50 Wireless II is spacious and gripping; one will sweep you up in every track while the other will let you float away. Your preference when it comes to these equally adept two-way challengers may come down to whether your listening leans nimble/bright versus natural/rounded.

The LS50 Wireless II supports Hi-Res Audio; network file support is 24-bit/384 kHz; a wireless setup supports 24-bit/96 kHz audio resolution or connect the speakers with the supplied CAT 6 cable for 24-bit/192 kHz support. Stream music directly over Bluetooth or Wi-Fi, AirPlay 2, and Google Chromecast, or through the KEF Connect app, which supports Spotify Connect, Tidal, Qobuz, Amazon Music, and Deezer. In addition, you can use the LS50 Wireless II as an endpoint if you set up a Roon music library on your local network. Wired connections include HDMI eARC, Ethernet, coaxial and optical inputs, a subwoofer out, and 3.5mm aux-ins.

The LS50 Wireless II is pricey, typically retailing for $2,799/pair, plus $449 for optional S2 floor stands. (Willing to sacrifice some features to save some money? KEF also makes a baby-in-size-not-sound brother speaker system, the Wi-Fi-connected LSX II, or you can opt for just Bluetooth connectivity and pick up the Dynaudio Xeo 2s at $679/pair.) But if you crave a highly resolving, engaging experience and your budget supports it, the LS50 Wireless II’s versatile connectivity options and potent sound make it an ideal all-in-one listening system. And they’re a “bargain”—even if you toss in the sonically and aesthetically complementary KEF KC62 subwoofer—considering stepping up to the richly evocative, surprisingly slimline KEF LS60 floorstanding powered speakers are $6,999!

Best for computers: Edifier S1000W

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Edifier S1000W’s sound, size, connectivity, and price are in perfect alignment for computer users looking at an audio upgrade.

Specs

  • Driver complement: 2 (one 1-inch tweeter, one 5.5-inch woofer)
  • Amplification: 120W rms
  • Frequency response: 45 Hz – 40 kHhz
  • Dimensions: 13.6in x 7.8in x 11.6in (H x W x D)

Pros

  • Well balanced sound
  • Great mix of inputs
  • High-resolution audio support
  • Amazon Alexa support
  • Intuitive app

Cons

  • No USB port

Edifier is a company known for its ability to cram a lot of performance into audio gear with surprisingly low prices. Its S1000W powered speakers, which were released late in 2021, continue that trend, but their $550 price tag allowed Edifier to reach beyond the technical sacrifices necessary to make its most budget gear. Although these speakers can be used in multiple applications, we found they’re particularly great with a computer due to their slim, acoustically angled design and clarity at a reasonable volume.

On paper, the speakers are pretty stacked: They’re powered by a 120W Class-D amplifier, can natively play 24-bit/192kHz audio, and use a digital signal processor to control their crossovers dynamically, so optimized frequency division always reaches the titamium-dome tweeter and aluminum woofer. These features are present in other speakers in this guide, but both of those pairs cost roughly four times as much as the S1000Ws. We wouldn’t go so far as to say these speakers can stand toe-to-toe with speakers that cost over $2,000, but after spending time with the S1000W at home we can say they certainly give any pair under $1,000 a run for their money.

Midrange-heavy genres like live and acoustic music sounded superb, with plenty of detail and a wide soundstage when the speakers sat 3 feet away from one another. We connected them to a computer for use more as nearfield monitors (more on that in a little bit), but we could see how listening to live music would become even more immersive and engaging if the S1000Ws were spread further apart. And, thanks to well-handed treble reproduction, distorted guitars and crashing cymbals in lo-fi and punk songs sounded clear without requiring us to reach for the volume knob to protect our ears.

Similarly, we didn’t hear any sibilance across the board. The S1000Ws didn’t have quite as much bass as we would have liked out of the box, though hip-hop and R&B sounded serviceable. Once we tweaked the response, though, we got closer to our ideal while never pushing the woofer to the point of distortion, even at the very least low frequencies. While our experience was positive, yours will vary based on the music you listen to, how it was mastered, and even its bitrate. In general, though, you should expect to hear quite a lot of detail without much futzing.

Beyond their sound, the S1000Ws are easy to recommend because they have many of the trademark features that have endeared Edifier to price-conscious audiophiles. The speakers have physical EQ knobs on a side panel, so you can adjust their sound to your exact preference. And if you prefer digital customization, Edifier’s app is surprisingly intuitive to use and walks you through the step-by-step process of hooking them up to your Wi-Fi network without frustrating you. While the S1000Ws don’t connect to each other wirelessly, the cable that’s provided to connect one speaker to the other is long enough that you can set the S1000Ws up on a desk with your computer, or on top of a media center flanking your television.

The speakers support both Bluetooth 5.0 and Apple’s AirPlay 2, wireless protocols that complement the pair of RCA inputs, coaxial input, and optical audio input on their backside. The speakers lack a USB port, but in this day and age it’s hard to imagine your computer, your whole house, isn’t on Wi-Fi so you can stream whatever you desire directly from your laptop. In addition, Spotify Connect and TIDAL Connect are supported, so once you pick a playlist on your phone you can offload the streaming directly to the speakers. If you’ve set up a smart home, you can connect Edifier’s speakers to your Amazon Echo and tell it to play music through your streaming service of choice using Alexa. Even the S1000W’s remote is good, with input and media control buttons that depress with a satisfying click and work instantly (as well as another way to adjust EQ). All of these smaller quality-of-life decisions add up and help the speaker become greater than the sum of its parts.

If you spend a lot of time listening to music at your work desk, you owe it to yourself to check out Edifier’s S1000W speakers, especially if you’ve been making do with tinny sound coming from the built-in drivers in your computer or monitor.

Best for turntables: Kanto YU6

Kanto

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Connect all of your digital and analog gear to these stylish speakers, available in seven stunning finishes.

Specs

  • Driver complement: 2 (one 1” silk-dome tweeter, one 5.25-inch Kevlar cone woofer)
  • Amplification: 100W rms
  • Frequency response: 50 Hz – 20 kHz
  • Dimensions: 13.98 x 6.89 x 10.71 inches (H x W x D)

Pros

  • Versatile inputs support turntables
  • Well-balanced sound with respectable bass
  • Seven gorgeous finishes elevate any décor

Cons

  • USB connection is underutilized

People often ask if powered speakers are good for vinyl and we can conclusively say that if you enjoy listening to both analog and digital sound, the Kanto YU6 ($379/pair) has you covered. It’s highly capable thanks to analog RCA and 3.5mm mini-jack ins, a switchable phono preamp/line-in, optical TOSLINK inputs, and Bluetooth 4.0 streaming with aptX support.

This versatile powered speaker features 1-inch silk-dome tweeters and 5.25-inch Kevlar cone woofers, powered by built-in Class D amps (50W rms per channel); it’s all housed in rear-ported fiberboard cabinets that come in a spectrum of bold finishes, including matte black, matte white, gloss black, gloss white, gloss red, bamboo, and walnut. (Available stands support a range of desktop and home theater scenarios.)

Vinyl fans will gravitate right to the YU6’s rear-panel RCA stereo input, which is switchable between moving magnet phono preamp-in and analog line-in. Optical ins connect TV, CD player, or game console digital audio. A USB jack charges devices and a subwoofer output with 200 Hz lowpass filter provides the ability to extend the low end with a standalone sub.

One note: If you’re using the YU6 speakers for a turntable playback system, it’s best to position your turntable and cabinets on separate furniture or stands or add a turntable platform to control vibration. (Just getting started on your vinyl journey? Fluance makes some great options to consider when it comes to turntables we like, such as the RT81 and RT85.)

A front-panel control knob provides simple access to volume and input adjustments: Twist the knob to adjust volume, press it to cycle through inputs. The included remote control handles power, volume, mute, EQ, source input, and Bluetooth pairing. Rubber feet are supplied but not attached.

Looking for a step up from the YU6? Kanto’s premium TUK powered speakers ($779) feature onboard DSP, high-performance AMT tweeters and 5.25-inch aluminum drivers, active crossovers, plus dedicated phono, RCA, and Optical TOSLINK inputs, onboard USB DAC and headphone amp, and Bluetooth 4.2 with aptX HD and AAC codecs.

Best PA speakers: Bose L1 Pro8

Bose

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This all-in-one sound system packs up tight to go from vehicle to venue in a single trip.

Specs

  • Driver complement: 8 2” neodymium drivers, 1 7×13” subwoofer
  • Amplification: 60W (driver array), 280W (subwoofer)
  • Frequency response: 45 Hz – 16 kHz
  • Dimensions: 78.94 x 17.32 x 38.92 inches (H x W x D) assembled

Pros

  • Eight-speaker array provides broad coverage
  • Control mixes from your mobile device
  • Two phantom power inputs

Cons

  • Assembled system can feel unstable in windy conditions

Whether you’re a singer/songwriter, band, DJ, or just looking for a plug-and-play-simple way to transform your next BBQ into an impromptu dance party, a portable powered public address system is the perfect all-in-one sound solution. Powered PA systems are serious multitaskers, delivering pro-quality sound reinforcement with built-in amps, mixers, audio effects, Bluetooth streaming, and tons of I/Os, in self-contained systems you can schlep in one hand while you carry your guitar (or beer) in the other.

Nearly 20 years ago, Bose introduced the shockingly portable L1 PA, which became a go-to gig staple for indie artists thanks to its premium sound and built-in amplification, mixer, effects, and subwoofer. The series has been updated over the years and the L1 Pro line debuted in 2021, in driver configurations up to 32 speakers.

The L1 Pro8 ($1,199), the most portable array in the Pro series, is ideal for singer/songwriters and best for DJs. Inside, a C-shape 8-driver array that provides 40 degrees of vertical coverage and 180 degrees of horizontal coverage, with an integrated subwoofer that features an elongated RaceTrack driver, which Bose says delivers low-end performance that rivals a conventional 12-inch woofer in a slimmer footprint. All L1 Pro models feature a built-in 3-channel mixer: Channels 1 and 2 can receive signal from combo XLR/TRS jacks (with phantom power), while Channel 3 can receive signal from either a 1/8-inch headphone jack, a ¼-inch TRS jack, or via Bluetooth streaming.

This system sets up fast, is easy to operate, and packs a sonic punch, powering the speaker array with 60 watts of Class D amplification and the subwoofer with 240 watts, for 118 dB peak SPL.

Use the Bose L1 Mix App to adjust mixes and effects settings (including Bose’s ToneMatch library of custom EQ presets) from anywhere in the room. The system weighs just 35 pounds and disassembles into three pieces that pack into the base unit for effortless transport in the included travel bag.

Thinking of cutting the cord entirely? Check out Bose’s S1 Pro portable Bluetooth speaker, which has three 2 1/4-inch high-frequency drivers and a 6-inch low-frequency woofer and provides up to 11 hours of play time. Or keep all the features (and, admittedly, the price) and get the rechargeable 1,500W JBL EON ONE MK2 column PA, with 8 2-inch tweeters, built-in 10-inch woofer, and a 5-channel mixer that can run off a 6-hour battery.

Best budget: Klipsch R-15PM

Klipsch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When it comes to price/performance ratio, these feature-packed budget beauties punch way above their class.

Specs

  • Driver complement: 2 (one 1”, one 5 ¼”)
  • Power rating: 50 WPC
  • Frequency response: 62 Hz – 24 kHz
  • Dimensions: 12.5 x 7 x 8.11 in (H x W x D)

Pros

  • Diverse I/O set handles a range of sound sources
  • Onboard phono amp
  • Convenient remote

Cons

  • Difficult to conceal cables when using stands

The Klipsch R-15PM small powered speakers boast 50 watts per channel of amplification, for room-filling sound in a super-compact footprint. Each speaker features a 1-inch aluminum diaphragm compression driver that’s integrated with Klipsch’s square Tractrix horn, which Klipsch says delivers wider dispersion and cleaner, clearer highs; a distinctive, 5-¼-inch spun copper woofer provides solid midrange, and a rear-firing port beefs up bass response. It’s all housed in resonance-deadening MDF cabinets for smooth, distortion-free response.

These speakers, which retail for an affordable $275/pair, offer an incredible array of features on top of their solid sound performance. Setup is plug-and-play easy: Connect directly to a range of sound sources, from your tablet to your TV, thanks to an onboard phono preamp, Bluetooth connectivity, and a range of analog and optical digital inputs, plus a USB Type B input. A remote lets you adjust volume and change inputs from the convenience of your couch. A mono subwoofer output connects an optional powered sub; consider Klipsch’s wireless Reference R-10SWi.

For an alternative at the same price point, check out the Audioengine A2+ wireless Bluetooth bookshelf speakers, or if you’re hoping to keep your purchase below $200, the Edifier R1700BT, at $159, is a worthy contender.

Things to consider before buying powered speakers

Buying powered speakers is a personal process, weighing subjective factors like sonic preferences along with objective benchmarks like power output, number of inputs and outputs, and convenience features. Many factors influence a powered speaker’s sound, including driver and cabinet size, type of amplification, and build quality. The size of your listening space plays a major role. Your sound sources will also inform your decision: If you’re planning to connect a turntable, for example, you’ll need phono inputs. If you want to stream music, you’ll need Bluetooth or Wi-Fi.

One drawback of powered speakers is the inability to mix and match or upgrade components, such as the best AV receivers. But a pro is that, because amplification is built into a powered speaker, it’s perfectly optimized for its specific speaker driver(s) needs. Amps sit right inside the cabinet, so there’s no need to connect long lengths of wire between drivers and amplifiers, which takes cable-induced distortion and signal loss out of the picture. In addition, integrated crossover design gives the designer more control over the frequency response. [Note that not every speaker manufacturer designs its own amplifiers, sometimes relying on OEM parts. This isn’t a deal-breaker, but be sure the technologies are well implemented for the best sonic performance.]

What size powered speakers should I get?

Powered speakers are available in a vast array of sizes, from smart speakers you can fit in the palm of your hand to towers that top 6 feet in height. In general, the bigger the speaker, the more power it can put out, and the deeper the bass it can produce. But this doesn’t necessarily mean that more is better. Speakers should be small enough to efficiently produce space-filling sound; if they’re too powerful for the size of the room, they can’t be operated at their ideal performance levels and can end up sounding boomy. On the other hand, they must be powerful enough to easily reproduce the most dynamic music, movie, and game content. Generally, bookshelf speakers with 5- or 6-inch drivers are good matches for offices, dens, and other small rooms, while larger bookshelf speakers and floorstanding models with 8-inch drivers are more appropriate for bigger rooms, like home theatres.

What kind of features should I look for in powered speakers?

Increasingly, powered speakers offer more features than their passive counterparts, evolving into all-in-one entertainment hubs for minimalists who don’t want to navigate a sea of components and cabling. If you’re in the less-is-more camp, you’ll appreciate features like digital and analog inputs and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi streaming, in addition to built-in amplification.

Should I add a subwoofer?

You should add a subwoofer if you want to extend your system’s low-end energy and bring more visceral impact to your listening experience, whether you’re watching the latest action flick, crushing your favorite videogame, or transforming the living room into a dance floor. You can mix and match speakers and subs, but many products profiled here are designed to pair perfectly with available companion subwoofers. For instance, there is a setting within the KEF app to automatically integrate and optimize the KEF LS50 Wireless II and KEF KC62 subwoofer, allowing them to wake together and produce an amazingly musical, muscular response down to 11 Hz. Remember that you can always start small and add a sub later if you’re not feeling enough room-rocking thunder.

FAQs

Q: What’s the difference between passive speakers and powered?

Powered, or active, speakers have built-in amplification, while passive speakers need to be powered by an external amplifier, such as a stereo receiver or integrated power amp. Powered speaker setups are pretty turnkey, requiring fewer components and annoying cables—but more importantly, your speakers are already perfectly matched to the right amplifier. Passive speakers are often preferred by audiophiles because they offer the flexibility of mixing and matching components, for more control over system sound. And, unlike powered speakers, passive speakers don’t have to plug into a power outlet, which provides more placement options in some spaces.

Q: Are powered speakers better than passive speakers?

Powered speakers, by design, offer some sonic benefits: By incorporating precisely matched drivers, amps and crossovers, they can deliver cohesive sound that’s harder to achieve with discrete components. And, you never have to worry about underpowering or overpowering your speakers—no matter how loud you crank it up.
 
Traditionally, passive speakers have been sought out by hi-fi fans, because they provide opportunities to swap out and upgrade components. But these days, you’ll find a vast range of great-sounding options in both passive and powered categories.

Q: Do powered speaker need an amplifier or receiver?

Do not connect powered speakers to an amplifier unless you want to blow up your gear. Technically, it’s possible to connect powered speakers to an amplifier, and there are some niche cases where it might make sense, such as using speakers with bypassable built-in amplification. But really, we don’t recommend it. There’s a reason why the Golden Rule of Sound is: “Power + Power = Disaster”!

Final thoughts on choosing the best powered speakers

If you strive for a simple, minimalist setup, and don’t want to deal with connecting racks of audio components and yards of cables, powered speakers just might be perfect for you. Anytime you’re shopping for speakers, fidelity comes first. That said, we’ve spotlighted versatile products that excel in a range of scenarios. If you choose any of the speakers above, you won’t be disappointed.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best powered speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best HDMI splitters for managing multiple monitors https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hdmi-splitters-for-dual-monitors/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 19:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=453700
Best HDMI splitters sliced header
Stan Horaczek

Put your PC, cable box, or console on many screens at once!

The post The best HDMI splitters for managing multiple monitors appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best HDMI splitters sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall OREI UHD-PRO102 HDMI Splitter OREI UHD-PRO102 HDMI Splitter
SEE IT

The OREI UHD-PRO102 HDMI Splitter is the perfect choice when you need to show one image on two screens.

Best USB-C-to-HDMI splitter Targus USB-C Dual HDMI 4K Docking Station Targus USB-C Dual HDMI 4K Docking Station
SEE IT

Power two displays and a whole bunch of ports from a single USB-C port with this portable hub from Targus.

Best budget Avedio Links HDMI Splitter Avedio Links HDMI Splitter
SEE IT

The Avedio LInks HDMI Splitter is extremely affordable solution for those with modest needs.

Unifying video and audio connections in a single HDMI cable may have simplified home theater setups for the majority of people, but some of us home theater enthusiasts and PC power users still find ways to complicate things, and require an HDMI splitter for dual monitors. For example, suppose you want to send a single video source to multiple TVs or monitors. In that case, you’ll need to use an HDMI splitter, which duplicates or “mirrors” from a single HDMI “in” connection, and provides multiple HDMI “out” ports so you can plug in many displays.

Of course, HDMI splitters can cost as little as a few dollars or run into the hundreds. They can offer a wide range of different capabilities depending on your needs. A quick search on your favorite shopping site will also reveal that there are a lot of them to choose from, which can make it tricky and frustrating to find a good one. We’ve collected some of the best HDMI splitters for dual monitors and more currently available, so you don’t need to guess which one will work well.

How we selected the best HDMI splitters for dual monitors

Unlike 4K TVs or gaming monitors, there isn’t a library of in-depth professional reviews on HDMI splitters for dual monitors that you can quickly turn to for trusted recommendations. Luckily, I’ve covered A/V gear for publications like Engadget, Popular Mechanics, and Reviewed, so I can step in and make some recommendations based on personal experience and hands-on time using them. In addition to my own testing, I turned to user impressions from comment sections and feedback in enthusiast forums so I could learn more about the quirks of each individual product.

The best HDMI splitters for dual monitors: Reviews & Recommendations

Our recommendations for the best HDMI splitters range from basic and inexpensive options to pricier, more capable devices for advanced home theaters or commercial setups. Whether you’re looking to feed video to two displays or eight, you’re sure to find a solution here to meet your needs and make sure the equipment mounted (perhaps on the best dual-monitor stands) on your sturdy workstation works its best.

Best overall: OREI UHD-PRO102 HDMI Splitter

OREI

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: OREI’s UHD-PRO102 does almost everything we want in an HDMI splitter, supporting high resolutions and scaling automatically in a compact, affordable package. 

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 2
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 60Hz
  • Power: Micro USB (wall adapter included)

Pros 

  • Support for 4K at 60Hz
  • Built-in scaler will match the TV’s resolution
  • Affordable

Cons

  • May cause issues with Dolby Atmos

It costs a little more than a basic HDMI splitter, but the OREI UHD-PRO102 HDMI Splitter is still fairly inexpensive and offers just about all of the capabilities you’ll need if you’re simply looking for a splitter with two HDMI outs. It supports resolutions up to 4K at 60Hz and automatically scales your video source to match the resolution of each screen. It requires independent power via Micro USB, and OREI does include a wall adapter, which isn’t a given with some of the cheapest splitters. 

One small caveat: Some customer reviews report that video quality takes a hit when you try to pass Dolby Atmos through the splitter. It doesn’t officially support Atmos, though, so that’s to be expected. On the bright side, it does offer full support for Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD.

Best 4-out: OREI UHDPRO-104 4K 1×4 HDMI Splitter

OREI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An upgraded version of our top overall pick, the OREI UHDPRO-104 matches does all the same things right, while adding support for two more displays.

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 4
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 60Hz
  • Power: Micro USB (wall adapter included)

Pros

  • Support for 4K at 60Hz
  • Automatic video scaling 
  • Compact design

Cons

  • Doesn’t fully support Atmos

If you need to mirror more than two displays, OREI also makes an equally effective 4-output version of our top overall pick. The OREI UHDPRO-104 offers all of the same key specs as the dual HDMI-out version, including support for 4K at 60Hz along with automatic scaling to match your TV’s resolution and, just like the OREI UHD-PRO102, it’s powered via Micro USB with a wall adapter included in the package. As you’d expect, this one is larger than the two-out model, but it is about as compact as a 4-output splitter can be, and you shouldn’t have any trouble tucking it away out of sight. It’s also substantially more expensive, but, again, you’ll be able to mirror twice as many displays.

Best 8-out: Tripp Lite 8-Port HDMI Splitter

Tripp Lite

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tripp Lite’s 8-port HDMI Splitter may be pricey, but it will easily handle the most demanding multi-display setups thrown at it.

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 8
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 60Hz
  • Power: AC power supply

Pros

  • Support for 4K at 60Hz
  • Solid, all-metal construction
  • Three-year warranty

Cons

  • Expensive

If you need to split your image among eight displays, Tripp Lite makes the splitter for the job. It’s considerably more expensive than the others but it’s also capable of outputting a video source to eight screens in 4K at up to 60Hz. It’s a suitably heavy-duty unit with all-metal construction, and it even comes with mounting hardware if you want to attach it to a wall or a desktop. 

One small issue, considering the expense: Tripp Lite recommends you keep the HDMI cables to no longer than 15 feet to ensure the best performance. Even with that issue, though, it’s a small compromise to make if you want to get your image on eight screens at once.

Best 16-out: OREI 1×16 HDMI Splitter

OREI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This plug-and-play splitter can send a single HDMI source to 16 different monitors, making it a cost-effective option for personal and commercial applications alike.

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 16
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 1080p at 60Hz
  • Power: 12 DC adapter (included)

Pros

  • Durable metal chassis
  • Sends 1080p and 3D video channels to 16 HDMI outputs
  • Supports Dolby True HD audio

Cons

  • No 4K support

In cases where eight outputs just won’t cut it, the OREI 1×16 HDMI Splitter is a fantastic option for sending a single HDMI signal to 16 output devices simultaneously. It’s built into a durable metal chassis that’d be welcome in any media center or mobile A/V rig and comes with its own 12-volt DC wall wart for power. While this splitter only supports a maximum output resolution of 1080p, it can do so at a refresh rate of 60 Hz, making it a solid option for enjoying games and other high-frame rate content on multiple monitors or TVs. This splitter also supports 3D video as well as DSD, DTS-HD, and Dolby TrueHD audio. If you’re looking for a 1-to-16 HDMI splitter that supports higher resolutions, OREI also offers a 4K 1×16 HDMI splitter that costs a bit more.

Best USB-C-to-HDMI splitter: Targus USB-C Dual HDMI 4K Docking Station

Targus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While there are plenty of simple USB-C-to-HDMI adapters out there, Targus’ USB-C delivers the best possible HDMI splitter performance and throws in plenty of ports to match.

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 2
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 60Hz
  • Power: USB-C powered

Pros

  • Supports 4K at 60Hz
  • Mac and Windows compatible
  • Functions as a full-fledged docking station

Cons

  • Only one of the USB ports supports fast charging

While it may feel like overkill, Targus’ USB-C Dual 4K HDMI adapter is a stellar, relatively affordable USB hub that can both mirror your laptop display or “extend” it across multiple monitors. There are plenty of dedicated USB-C-to-HDMI adapters out there, but many of them come with caveats: Some either limit 4K playback to 30Hz. Others only support Windows. Meanwhile, Targus’ portable hub turns a single video-enabled USB-C port into two HDMI ports that support 4K at 60Hz, plus two standard USB 3.1 ports, an Ethernet port, and both SD and Micro SD card readers. Only one of the USB ports supports fast-charging, which is annoying because you’ll need to remember which one, but you’re adding a ton of functionality to your laptop, and it only costs a little bit more than a simple USB-C-to-HDMI adapter.

Best Mini DisplayPort-to-HDMI splitter: C2G Mini DisplayPort to HDMI Monitor Splitter

C2G

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While it has a few drawbacks, this adapter from C2G is a better option than standard USB adapters for Mini DisplayPort-enabled devices.

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 2
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 30Hz
  • Power: Micro USB (required in some instances)

Pros

  • Portable solution for Mini DisplayPort-enabled devices
  • Mirrors or extends displays with Windows
  • Three-year warranty

Cons

  • Will only mirror, not extend display on Mac
  • May require power from USB port in some instances

Have a laptop with a Mini DisplayPort but no video-capable USB-C port? This adapter from C2G will let you easily mirror or extend your display and should give you better performance than an adapter that simply relies on standard USB. Unfortunately, while it supports mirroring across all laptops, it can only output extended displays on Windows systems. The company also notes that the adapter may require external power by plugging it into a spare USB port on your computer “in some instances.”

avedio links

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Avedio Links HDMI Splitter gets high marks from customers and will be more than adequate for most setups, especially if you’re only concerned with 1080p video. 

Specs

  • Number of outputs: 2
  • Max resolution/refresh rate: 4K at 30Hz
  • Power: Micro USB (wall adapter not included)

Pros 

  • Very affordable
  • Compact 
  • USB-powered

Cons 

  • 4K limited to 30Hz
  • USB wall adapter not included

The Avedio Links HDMI Splitter might be inexpensive, but it will easily get the job done for anyone that doesn’t have especially demanding needs. It’s small enough to easily be tucked away, and it’s USB-powered, which means you can use either a wall adapter (which isn’t included) or a spare USB port if you have one. The two HDMI outs will handle video up to 4K, although the splitter only supports 30Hz at that resolution—you’ll need to drop down to 1080p for 60Hz.

Also worth a look: Plugable 4K DisplayPort and HDMI Dual Monitor Adapter

Plugable

SEE IT

Plugable’s HDMI splitter is just as compact as some of the other models we’ve recommended, but has two DisplayPort outputs too, which makes it a great choice in a mixed-monitor or TV setup. All four ports can send a 4K video signal at 60Hz, which is perfect for every application except for playing video games. The adapter terminates into a USB-C connector, which is built into the splitter so it can never get lost, but Plugable also includes a USB-C to USB-A adapter in the box. Both the adapter and cable can be tucked away neatly beneath the underside of the adapter for easier storage. Plugable says its adapter is compatible with computers running Windows or MacOS, but not ChromeOS. If you’re running HDMI-equipped monitors now, but want an adapter that’ll remain useful even if you switch over to one with DisplayPort inputs, this is the one to get.

What to consider before buying the best HDMI splitters for dual monitors

Before you buy an HDMI splitter for dual monitors, you should have a plan. This is a specific little accessory that does a very specific thing. If you don’t have a device, like a game console, cable box, or PC, that you want to show on multiple monitors simultaneously, you should hold off on buying this until such a need arises.

If you are looking for a device that allows you to plug multiple devices into a single HDMI port, you’re actually looking for an HDMI switcher, rather than a splitter. There’s also a wide range of HDMI adapters that convert signals to different kinds of ports. We totally understand if you got mixed up: Terms like splitter, switch, or adapter are sometimes used interchangeably, but they refer to completely different things. It certainly doesn’t help that HDMI switchers often come up in search results for HDMI splitters, and vice versa.

Considering how complicated it gets just talking about whether or not you need an HDMI splitter, we’re going to walk through some basic information we think everyone should know before buying one.

HDMI adapters and HDMI splitters

Like we said, a lot of people, including manufacturers and retailers, play it fast and loose with A/V terms like “HDMI splitters.” Technically, HDMI splitters turn one HDMI signal into many identical HDMI signals. It’s HDMI end-to-end, and all they can do is mirror the screen.

That said, there is also a category of HDMI adapters that can plug into a laptop via USB Type-A, USB-C, or Mini DisplayPort, and output to two monitors. These adapters will give you a more robust set of display options, including an extended desktop across multiple displays. (They can also mirror your laptop across multiple displays.) Usually, these accessories will be called adapters, because they take one connection type and convert it into another. In some cases, they will also be called HDMI splitters, either because that’s what people expect them to be called, or because they want to make our lives harder.

We realize that there is a very real possibility that you’re actually looking for an HDMI adapter that can serve as a splitter so you can plug your laptop into a dual-monitor setup. Rest assured: We have recommendations for both conventional HDMI splitters and various adapters that output video to two HDMI ports.

Picking the right splitter

HDMI splitters are fairly simple devices, but they don’t all have the same capabilities. First and foremost, figure out how many video-out ports you need. Personally, I’d suggest mapping out your exact setup, including the positions of each monitor or TV and the video source, as well as a cable management plan for your HDMI cables.

You’ll also want to pay attention to the maximum resolution and refresh rates that the HDMI splitter supports. Many splitters, particularly affordable ones, will only support 1080p at 60Hz. If you’re using 4K monitors with high refresh rates, make sure their specs are supported. Increasing a splitter’s bandwidth can be just as expensive as buying a larger splitter with extra ports. 

Lastly, you’ll find that some HDMI splitters require an independent power source, while others feature internal power. The latter can be more convenient and may be sufficient in some cases, but we recommend using a splitter with a dedicated power source, as they generally work more reliably.

All of this also applies to HDMI adapters that can output dual-HDMI signals. Most adapters will not be able to handle the same bandwidth as a direct HDMI 2.1 or DisplayPort 1.4 connection. Refresh rates, in particular, will likely take a pretty serious hit going through an adapter. On the plus side, most HDMI adapters we’re aware of will take power from your laptop, so there’s no need to plug them in independently.

FAQs

Q: What HDMI splitter do I need for dual monitors?

Any HDMI splitter will let you use two monitors, but it will only mirror the image on both displays. To “extend” your display, or expand your desktop to span two monitors, you will need to use an adapter or USB-C hub that converts video out from a compatible port, such as a Thunderbolt or DP Alt Mode-enabled USB-C port, or Mini DisplayPort, to a dual-HDMI connection.

Depending on your computer, you may also simply be able to connect two monitors using two separate ports. Most desktops, particularly gaming PCs, support multiple DisplayPort and HDMI connections. Some laptops may feature a single HDMI and a video-capable USB-C port.

Q: Does an HDMI splitter reduce quality?

At this point, most HDMI splitters (or adapters) can output your PC to multiple screens at up to 4K resolution, so you shouldn’t lose any visual fidelity. That said, most splitters and adapters will cap and reduce your PC’s refresh rate to 30 or 60Hz, which may be well below your PC and monitors’ capabilities.

Splitters and adapters may also introduce lag, which would be more noticeable in gaming than in other uses, and you may run into problems with longer lengths of HDMI cables, especially when using a non-powered splitter. 

Q: What is the difference between an HDMI splitter and a switch?

Though the terms are often used interchangeably, HDMI splitters and switches are literal opposites.

An HDMI splitter takes the signal from a single source (like a streaming device, game console, or 4K Blu-ray player) and sends it to TVs or monitors, so you can watch the same image on many screens at once.

An HDMI switcher lets you plug multiple video sources into a single HDMI port on your TV or monitor, then switch between them, which can be handy if you have more game consoles, streaming devices, and computers than HDMI ports. If you’re having this problem, you might also consider buying an AV receiver, which can provide more HDMI ports and can improve audio fidelity if you have a surround sound system.

Final thoughts on the best HDMI splitters for dual monitors

Clearly, HDMI splitters can be a very confusing topic, but sometimes you just need one. Whether you’re actually looking for a proper HDMI splitter or an adapter to create a dual-monitor setup with a compatible laptop, make sure you figure out exactly what you want before you buy anything. It is especially easy to buy the wrong thing and get discouraged or frustrated, so we hope our guide to HDMI splitters for dual monitors has helped clear the confusion.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best HDMI splitters for managing multiple monitors appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-generators/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585466
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

Portable generators come in many shapes and sizes, but we'll help you pick the best one for your specific power needs.

The post The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator on a plain background Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator
SEE IT

This 46-pound generator provides plenty of power and runs quietly.

Best high-capacity Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator on a plain background Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator
SEE IT

A five-gallon fuel tank gives it a nine-hour run time at half capacity.

Best solar Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator on a plain background Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator
SEE IT

A pair of solar panels make this an ideal solution for true off-grid experiences.

A portable generator is useful in a wide variety of situations. For camping, it can help keep your RV or van conversion fully juiced and your devices topped off. At home, it’s easy to move into place when the utility power goes out. It provides the electricity necessary to use power tools at off-grid worksites. And it’s generally essential whenever and wherever you need power but don’t have access to a plug. Portable generators come in various forms, ranging from very small portable power stations to exceptionally large (yet still mobile) gas generators. Whatever the case, the best portable generators are relatively easy to move, durable, and dependable, and we’ve tested a bunch of them to determine which are your top picks for various purposes.

How we chose the best portable generators

I am what is commonly referred to as a “gear junkie” in that I am borderline obsessive about testing a wide range of tech tools, particularly those relevant to the outdoors and varying home DIY projects. Portable power generators not only rank among those tech tools in and of themselves but have also been essential to charging all the other electricity-hungry items like phones, the best MacBooks, the best travel drones, power tools, the best electric bikes, and my trusty van conversion, not to mention an RV or home when the lights go out. I’ve also written guides about the best solar generators and inverter generators for PopSci.

That being the case, I’ve had the opportunity to test out generators of every variety, and I’ve combined that experience with insight from other PopSci writers who have tried everything from small, straightforward power stations the size of a shoebox to big, feature-rich behemoths designed to power a small army. Accordingly, I know which generators provide plenty of juice and which fizzle out under a full power load. Armed with this knowledge, I have spent over a decade reviewing generators and other equipment for outlets like Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. Occasionally, I’ve arrived at split decisions for certain categories, so to break the tie, I’ve looked to input from my fellow experts as well as reviews from real-world buyers. 

The best portable generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The picks below span a range of sizes, intended uses, and budgets. Some are small and lightweight and designed for appropriately smaller power demands, while others are big on both size and output. All, however, are portable in some capacity, whether because they’re compact and easy to carry or equipped with mobility aids like wheels and handles. 

Best overall: Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Super portable, durable, and intuitive to use, this is an outstandingly versatile, go-anywhere generator. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 46.5 pounds
  • Price: $1,299

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Rugged durability
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Only moderate power output

It shouldn’t come as much of a surprise that Honda has topped our list. The company has been making outstanding generators for a long time, and the EU2200i is the perfect representation of how the brand manages to do a little bit of everything just right. 

Compact, lightweight, and easy to carry thanks to its sturdy handle, this is about as portable as generators can get. While its 2,200W output isn’t exactly going to replace an electrical line, it’s still a solid amount to keep an RV air conditioner going, power the hungriest of power tools, or keep your fridge and a few other essentials going during a blackout. The 20- and 30-amp outlets allow you to use a typical AC plug or larger RV plug, and it’s equipped with an array of safety features to make sure nothing goes awry. 

It’s also incredibly durable. I’ve hauled mine along through many camping trips, and I’m not exactly gentle with my outdoor gear. And thanks to its quiet operation, you can enjoy electrification in peace. 

Best high-capacity: Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its exceptionally high wattage and reliable operation, it will handle whatever job you throw at it.

Specs

  • Wattage: 25,000 peak/18,000 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 439 pounds
  • Price: $3,999

Pros

  • Super high power output
  • Reliable operation
  • Sturdy handle and wheels

Cons

  • Extremely heavy

When only the utmost power will suffice, look no further than the Generac 18000EFI. With its massive 18,000W running output, this monster will easily power a whole house, large-scale job worksite, or multiple RVs. Admittedly, its 439-pound heft takes a lot of liberty with the “portable” distinction, but its sturdy handle and wheels and well-balanced weight make it fairly easy to maneuver around. 

With its massive 5-gallon fuel tank, it will run for up to 9 hours on a 50 percent load, and an hour meter tracks usage and displays how much operating time it has left. Seven outlets spanning 20-50 amps provide plenty of high power port options, and it’s equipped with circuit breakers and other essential safety features. Powerful and reliable, this generator will deliver on pretty much any and all power needs. 

Best solar: Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Great portability, solid capacity, and lightning-fast charging make this the best mid-sized solar generator on the market. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,000 peak/2,000 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall
  • Weight: 9.92 lbs
  • Price: $1,249

Pros

  • Supremely portable
  • Extremely fast charging
  • Plenty of ports

Cons

  • Not intended for rugged use

Solar power generators have become a big hit as of late with the van life crowd in particular, and we’re a fan of Jackery. The Jackery 1000 Plus is the best mid-sized option out there thanks to its perfect fusion of input/output capability, paramount portability, and generally well-considered design elements. With 1,264 watt-hour capacity and 2,000W output, it’s the perfect choice for packing along on a camping trip or placing at the heart of your van conversion. Capable of charging in under two hours via a wall outlet or solar panel array, it has one of the fastest charge speeds around.

A number of smart design choices elevates its portability. Lightweight, perfectly squared, with a fold-flat handle, it’s easy to move, store, or build into a van conversion. It’s also expandable thanks to Jackery’s new add-on batteries, which essentially means you can bring along as much or as little power as you need. Jackery has also added the ability to monitor and adjust settings via an app, which makes it easier to use in general. 

Best for RVs: Champion Power Equipment 200988 4500 Watt Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Champion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High portability, high power output, quiet operation, and dual fuel functionality make this a must for avid RVers. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,500 peak/3,150 running
  • Power source: Gas or propane
  • Weight: 97 pounds
  • Price: $1,359

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Higher-end wattage
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Somewhat heavy

The Champion 200988 hits the sweet spot for RV generators by pretty much every metric. It runs on both gas and propane, making it easy to find fuel when out in the wild. Its 4,500W output is more than enough to power almost any RV—even with the air conditioner turned on. It’s relatively quiet, so it won’t ruin the outdoorsy mood. And it offers straightforward, intuitive operation. 

What’s more, it’s exceedingly rare to find a generator that delivers so much wattage in such a portable package. Compact, squared off for easy packing, and equipped with sturdy handles and wheels, it’s easy to bring along in the RV. While its weight is just under 100 pounds, not exactly featherlight, it’s also not unmanageably heavy. And while I prefer the dual-fuel version, there are also single-fuel gas and propane options that feature a remote start, allowing you to switch it on or off without leaving the comfort of your camper.  

Best for home backup: Westinghouse 9500 Portable Generator

Westinghouse

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Powerful, remote starting, and relatively mobile, this is the perfect generator to wheel into place when the power goes out.

Specs

  • Wattage: 9,500 peak/7,500 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 196 pounds
  • Price: $899

Pros

  • High wattage
  • Remote starting
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Pretty heavy

When the lights go out at home, the Westinghouse 9500 is a solid backup in every way you could want it to be. It’s certainly not light, but its handles and wheels make it easy to maneuver into place—my 70-year-old mother carts hers around with no problems. Its above-average wattage is plenty strong for most household demands, and its 6.6-gallon tank allows for an admirable 11-hour runtime. A remote starter allows you to switch it on without braving the storm. And Westinghouse generators are built solid, typically lasting through many years of use without issue.

It’s also equipped with plenty of smart safety features. Circuit breakers, low-oil auto shutdown, and rubber covers over the plugs reduce the potential for various risks. A (sold separately) smart switch allows it to switch on automatically when utility power goes out. And it’s relatively quiet, producing roughly the same decibels as a vacuum cleaner. For all practical purposes, it’s exactly what you want from a home backup generator. 

Best budget: Craftsman C0010020 2,200 Watt Portable Generator

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Good specs and great portability in a low-cost package make this an outstanding budget pick.

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,700 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 46.3 pounds
  • Price: $510

Pros

  • Very portable
  • Parallel capable
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Not for high-power use

The great thing about the Craftsman C0010020 is that it does a little bit of everything right, and it does it without breaking the bank. While its modest wattage probably isn’t going to keep an entire house or RV going, it’s plenty to keep a few essentials like the fridge, lights, and key devices powered—or even a lower-draw air conditioner. It’s parallel capable, meaning you can chain it to a second generator to double the output when you need more juice. It’s also lightweight, quiet, and dependably built. 

There are other generators out there in the $500 neighborhood, but if they deliver on all the promises above, I haven’t seen them.

Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP 13000HX Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High power output, intuitive operation, and relative mobility translate into dual-fuel excellence.

Specs

  • Wattage: 13,000 peak/10,500 running on gas – 12,350 peak/9,975 running on propane
  • Power source: Gas and propane
  • Weight: 240 pounds
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Very high power output
  • Helpful data display

Cons

  • Very heavy

The main benefit of a dual-fuel generator is in the name: the availability of two fuel options, which can be essential in an emergency situation. The DuroMax XP 13000HX delivers that versatility along with outstanding power output, intuitive operation, and reliable, long-lasting durability. I’m also a big fan of the data display, which provides useful information like voltage, hours of operation, and even a countdown to the recommended maintenance. A CO2 safety switch also detects carbon monoxide and then shuts the generator down if the levels become dangerous. 

This is definitely one of the heavier generators on the list, but it’s equipped with strong handles and smooth-rolling wheels that make it easy to move around. It also boasts a super-heavy duty 50 amp outlet, so in other words, this thing is a true beast. 

Most portable: Bluetti AC180 Portable Power Station

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: As portable as they come with great stats all around, this is the definition of go-anywhere power. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,700 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall plug
  • Weight: 37.4 pounds
  • Price: $599

Pros

  • Extremely portable
  • Solid power stats
  • Plenty of outlets

Cons

  • Dual solar inputs would be nice

If you’re looking for an ultra-portable box of on-the-go power, the Bluetti AC180 is it. The lightest and most compact on our list, it still has solid power chops thanks to its 1,152Wh capacity and ability to temporarily crank up its power output as high as 2,700W via the brand’s app. That capacity can be expanded via Bluetti’s new add-on batteries, and it can be fully charged within an hour. 

While adding a second solar input wouldn’t hurt, if you’re looking for a reliable box of power that you can bring along pretty much anywhere with ease, you’ve found it.

What to consider when shopping for the best portable generators

A portable generator tends to be a pretty big investment not only financially but in that it’s a piece of equipment that you plan to rely on—potentially in emergency situations—for many years to come. This being the case, there are several key considerations to remember when choosing the right one for your needs: 

Power output

First and foremost, you need a generator that will meet your electricity needs. When shopping for generators, you’ll typically see output expressed via two numbers, both of which are measured in watts (W). “Running” or “rated” output is the typical amount of watts produced at any given time, while “Peak” output is the amount it can produce in momentary surges, while switching on a power tool or air conditioner, for example. Read the wattage requirements for the various things you expect to power, total them up, and then look for a generator that delivers the appropriate output. Generally speaking, if you’re just looking to keep a few devices charged, 2,000W is the most you’ll need. For power tools, RVs, or a refrigerator, you should aim toward 4,000W. If you expect to be powering a full home, however, you will want at least 7,500W.

Fuel type and capacity

Generators almost always run on either gas, solar power, or, in the case of dual-fuel models, a combination of gas and propane. Which is right for you depends on considerations like access and the environment. Gas is typically the most convenient option as it can be acquired pretty much anywhere, though it pollutes more and tends to deliver louder operation. Adding the propane option provides greater versatility, which can be helpful if you’re out in the wild or in the event of an emergency, and it also produces less harmful emissions. (We love it in our grills, so why not our generators?) Solar is an environmentally friendly, nearly silent fuel, but it relies on the availability of sunshine and can’t deliver the same level of wattage as fossil fuels.

Next you need to consider capacity. The larger the fuel tank or battery capacity, the longer a generator will provide power, but it also increases the weight. If you plan on using your generator at home, a larger model that can be wheeled around is a fine choice. If you’ll be packing your generator along on camping trips, however, you’ll probably need to compromise some capacity in favor of lighter portability. 

Starting type

With gas or propane-fueled generators, you’ll almost always have the option to use a recoil cord and an electric starter, as it’s fairly standard for generators to come with both these days. The cord requires a lot of physical effort but will allow you to start the generator under any condition, while the electric start fires things up at the push of a button, though it won’t work if the internal battery is drained. Some models offer remote starters that you can fire up from the comfort of your home or RV. This isn’t really a consideration with solar generators as they tend to be plug-and-play.

Operating noise

Generators can be extremely loud, so volume should be a consideration if you don’t want to bother the neighbors at home or disrupt the peace and quiet while camping. While there are exceptions, typically speaking, the larger and more powerful a generator is, the louder it gets. The best portable generators tend to boast heavy shielding to reduce noise, though this only helps up to a point. 

If noise isn’t much of a concern, then go big and go loud. But if you want to minimize the racket, choose a smaller model, a dual-fuel that uses propane (which is somewhat quieter than gas), or the near-silence of solar.

Plugs

If a particular model doesn’t have the plugs you need, then it’s not much use to you. Most mid-large-sized generators come with AC outlets of 20-amp and 30-amp ratings, which will allow you to plug in most devices and RVs. Smaller units, especially solar, frequently don’t include a 30 amp port, so they might not work for your RV needs. If you’re looking for true max power output, you’ll need one of the few and far between generators with a 50-amp plug. 

FAQs

Q: Can I use my portable generator indoors?

Absolutely not! This can kill anyone indoors with the generator very quickly. Carbon monoxide can build up even in partially enclosed areas like barns or garages, so be sure to run them outdoors and away from windows. Solar generators, however, do not pose this risk as they produce no harmful gasses. 

Q: Are portable generators a fire hazard?

As with anything involving gas or propane, fire and explosion are a risk. To prevent the danger of fire, ensure you never over-fill the tank, clean up any fuel that spills, and never fill a generator while it’s hot from running. Here again, solar generators avoid this danger. 

Q: Can a portable generator operate in the rain or snow?

A generator should not be run while wet, as it can lead to damage or electrocution. Be sure to position it out of the weather or protect it with a cover of some sort.

Q: What happens if I overload my generator?

Overloading can cause the generator to overheat and become damaged, leading to serious damage to the electronic equipment being powered. If your generator isn’t rated to power everything you want it to, prioritize your needs to stay within its limits or get a bigger generator.

Q: How long can a generator run continuously?

That depends on the specific model and its fuel capacity, though it can range anywhere from 5 to 15 hours. Read all manufacturer recommendations carefully to ensure you stay within its operating time and avoid the risk of damage. 

Final thoughts on the best portable generators

A good portable generator can not only be useful when camping or off-grid, but it can be vital and even life-saving in an emergency. While theoretically, you want as big a generator as possible, you also want one that’s actually portable, so get a model suited to your needs rather than the largest you can find. Bigger isn’t always better, especially when it comes to mobility. Try to strike the balance between the two appropriate to your circumstances. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dual-monitor stands for home and office in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dual-monitor-stands/ Fri, 17 Jun 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=449578
An Ergotron dual-monitor stand attached to a desk in a high-end office.
Ergotron

Double the screens, double the fun, but take up less of the desk space with the best dual monitor stands.

The post The best dual-monitor stands for home and office in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An Ergotron dual-monitor stand attached to a desk in a high-end office.
Ergotron

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm
SEE IT

Full articulation and ease of use are what make this dual monitor arm stand out—especially if you don’t have a lot of desk space.

Best wall-mounted The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount conveys is a more affordable choice if you’re okay installing a more permanent dual monitor setup. Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount
SEE IT

The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount conveys is a more affordable choice if you’re okay installing a more permanent dual monitor setup.

Best budget VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount
SEE IT

VIVO’s Dual Monitor Desk Mount has more features than its modest price suggests.

Using a dual-monitor stand, whether it’s something you put on your desk, a mounted monitor arm, or a bracket you mount on your wall, gives you the freedom to place your screens as you please for both maximum comfort and efficiency. There are many ways to optimize your two-monitor setup: The best dual-monitor stands ensure maximum flexibility, regardless of your approach.

How we chose the best dual-monitor stands

To make our selections, I paired my own personal testing and experience with professional reviews and consumer feedback on Amazon. Our favorite monitor arms and monitor stands for dual-display setups provide a wide range of use cases, installation types, and prices. We also kept brand credibility in mind: Among monitor arm manufacturers, there are a handful of respected companies and many lesser-known brands that often offer cheap prices but without the reputation or warranty to back them up.

Best dual-monitor stands: Reviews & Recommendations

So you have two monitors, and you want to put them up on a single adjustable stand. Now that you know the basics of what to look for, we have a few recommendations for the best dual-monitor stands, including desk-mounted, the best TV wall mounts, and freestanding options. No matter your home office or PC gaming setup, there should be a decent option for you among these picks.

Best overall: Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Mount-It’s monitor arm makes it very easy to maneuver two big displays without any friction.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring mount/free moving
  • Weight range: 20lb per arm
  • Display size range: 19-32 inches
  • Available colors: Black, Silver
  • Price: $121

Pros

  • Requires very little desk space
  • Offers fine-grain control over the monitors
  • Easy-to-move displays

Cons

  • Price

We’ve had great success in our tests of Mount-It!’s single monitor arms, and feel very comfortable recommending this dual-display version to anyone who needs a lot of extra digital real estate to work. The arms can hold large, heavy displays, and each one can be twisted, tilted, and turned in several directions. This level of control can accommodate many work styles: video editors who want to see how their color grading tweaks are affecting the look of footage in real time, office workers who want to dedicate a vertically oriented monitor to their e-mail or messaging client, or gamers who want to monitor their Twitch chat.

Two features that impressed us with Mount-It!’s other monitor stands apply to this one: The ease at which they allow you to control your monitor and how well their clamping mechanism keeps it firmly attached to your desk. We’ve had no issues moving a 27-inch monitor with one hand, and the ability to move your displays closer and further from your face comes in handy more frequently than you’d expect. If you don’t have a lot of physical desk space, this monitor’s clamp will be incredibly helpful. A monitor stand’s feet can take up a lot more room than you think, and having more area back for your go-to tech accessories is very useful.

Best desk-mounted: Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm is a slick desk mount that balances great build quality and the price that comes with it.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring mount/free moving
  • Weight range: 7-20 lbs
  • Display size range: 27 inches
  • Available colors: Black/white/silver
  • Price: $297

Pros

  • Superior build quality
  • Plenty of ergonomic options
  • Easy to install
  • Lots of color options

Cons

  • Expensive

When you think of monitor mounts, free-moving gas-spring arms typically come to mind. They offer smooth action that allows you to move your screens with precision easily. Though it costs more than many other brands, Ergotron’s LX Dual Monitor Arm dual-monitor arm has a higher quality that justifies the price. Plus, it comes with a 10-year warranty, so you know the company stands behind its product. The Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm doesn’t do anything flashy. It just does the basics very well.

Best wall-mounted: Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount

MOUNTUP

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount looks sharp, and strikes a balance between price and features.

Specs

  • Mount type: Wall mount
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring arms/free moving
  • Weight range: 3.3 – 17.6 lbs
  • Display size range: Up to 32-inch
  • Available colors: Chrome/Black
  • Price: $49

Pros

  • Great price
  • Very adjustable
  • Detachable VESA plates

Cons

  • Requires tools to install
  • Requires brick, concrete, or wood anchor

If you’re ready to commit to a specific home, spot, and desk setup, you can save a lot of money on a really great dual-monitor arm with the Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount. It looks sharp, carries a lot of weight, and costs less than half as much as our desk-mounted pick. That said, this is a heavy dual-monitor arm. Not only do you need to attach it to the wall, the manufacturer specifically calls for you to anchor it on a brick, concrete, or wooden stud. Drywall alone may not hold it up. That’s a huge limitation, but if you have the right setup, this is arguably the most stable way to mount your monitors.

Best freestanding: ErGear Freestanding Dual Monitor Stand

ErGear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you don’t want to mount your monitors on arms, ErGear makes a more conventional dual-monitor stand that’s sturdy and offers strong adjustability.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desktop stand
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Pole-adjusted height/static arm
  • Weight range: Up to 22 lbs
  • Display size range: 17-32 inches
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $55

Pros

  • Glass base
  • High weight tolerance
  • No “install” time
  • Price

Cons

  • Fewer placement/ergonomic options
  • Base takes up space on your desk

We often recommend desk-clamping or wall-mounted monitor arms for their great adjustability and their ability to free up desk space. However, not all of us can use those options: We can’t all drill holes in our walls, and some desks aren’t clamp-friendly. Whether your options are limited, or you simply don’t want to install anything, a desktop or “freestanding” monitor stand is the way to go.

ErGear’s Dual Monitor Stand features a static base column with adjustable spokes for both monitors. It is as adjustable as a dual-monitor arm, but you can still adjust height, tilt, swivel, and rotation to get very good, ergonomically mind positioning. It’s all held down by a large, sturdy black glass base that has enough room under it to route some cables. While it doesn’t free up as much space as a desk-mounted stand, putting both of your monitors on a single stand still opens up your workstation quite a bit.

Best vertical: Hemudu HT05B-002 Dual Monitor Stand

Hemudu

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Hemudu HT05B-002 allows you to set up a vertical stacking configuration without sacrificing stability.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desktop stand
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 50mm x 50mm, 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Static mount
  • Weight range: 44 lbs per arm
  • Display size range: 13-34 inches
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $42

Pros

  • Can handle very large and heavy displays
  • Has plenty of ergonomic options
  • Easy to move

Cons

  • Fewer adjustment options compared to free-moving arms
  • Still takes up desk space

Ergonomics are, ultimately, the core advantage of using a dual-monitor arm. Putting your displays on a single, adjustable mount allows you to position your displays to reduce the number of neck movements you have to do in your daily work. No matter what you do, though, putting two widescreen displays right next to each other ensures that you will need to turn your head to focus on one screen or the other. Suppose you are the kind of person who uses one display most of the time and only occasionally glances at screen number two. In that case, a stacking monitor stand, which mounts the two monitors in a single column, might be useful. Craning your neck to look up isn’t great, ergonomically speaking, but if you only look at that second monitor every once in a while, it may lead to a net reduction in strain.

If you want to set up a vertical stack, we recommend a desktop mount like the Hemudu HT05B-002, rather than a desk-mounted one. With a vertical setup, you’re putting a lot more stress on the stand arm, and a flat stand handles that extra weight better. The HT05B-002 can handle two 34-inch, 44-lb. screens. It features removable VESA plates for easy installation as well. A wide base limits your desk real estate gains, but you can rest easy knowing that the stand will support your monitors’ weight(s). It’s a small consolation, but the feet under the base raise up enough to fit some of your other cabling underneath.

Best splurge: Ergotron HX Desk Dual Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you’re willing to pay a premium for a reliable brand, the Ergotron HX is as sturdy as they come.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk-mounted
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm (More available with optional bracket adapter kit)
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring arms/free moving
  • Weight range: 35 lbs per arm
  • Display size range: Up to 32-inch
  • Available colors: White, Silver, Black
  • Price: $585

Pros

  • Killer looks
  • 15-year warranty
  • A trusted name in ergonomics

Cons

  • Very expensive

It’s easy to find a monitor arm for under $100, but they’re almost always a gamble. You’re buying a relatively untested design from a brand with little to no reputation, which can be a risky proposition with a dual-monitor stand that holds and protects two pieces of equipment that cost hundreds or even thousands of dollars. If you have a pair of very expensive displays, you may want to consider spending a similarly luxurious amount on your stand. 

Ergotron is one of the oldest and most reliable names in the monitor stand game, and its HX dual-monitor arm is a deluxe desk-mounted stand. It has some of the flourishes from our other top picks, including a 15-year warranty and detachable VESA mounts for easy mounting. It also features a unique handlebar beneath the screens that allows you to adjust both displays at once. Those things are all just gravy, though. In this case, you’re spending a lot of extra money on the peace of mind that comes with buying a trusted luxury brand.

Best budget: VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount

VIVO

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: VIVO managed to make its dual-monitor stand comparable to more expensive models without many compromises.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: Gas-spring arms/free-moving
  • Adjustment mechanism: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Weight range: up to 22lb per arm
  • Display size range: 13-30 inches
  • Available colors: Black, White
  • Price: $28

Pros

  • Gives you a fair amount of control over your monitors
  • Won’t take up a lot of room on your desk
  • Price

Cons

  • No automatic height adjustment

If you’ve invested most of your home office improvement budget on your new displays, it makes sense to save a little bit on a dual-monitor stand. This model from VIVO has most of the features found in our best overall pick, but at a quarter of the price. Each monitor can be tilted and twisted individually, but you can only adjust their height by loosening and tightening a screw on the back. Both monitors have to be set at the same height, which may matter depending on the type of work you do. This stand works with monitors up to 30-inches wide, but VIVO offers a model that can handle displays up to 32 inches if necessary.

We like monitor arms that can be clamped onto a desk rather than sit on top of it because of the space savings, which is why VIVO’s is especially appealing to us. We’re also impressed that it can control monitors up to 22 pounds, which means the arms on this stand are stronger than the ones on our best overall pick. If the lack of height adjustability isn’t a dealbreaker, there’s no reason to spend more money on a dual-monitor stand.

Things to consider before buying one of the best dual-monitor stands

Even if you know exactly which dual-monitor stand or arm to buy, it helps to know a bit about the basic mechanics involved. Different stands require varying amounts of installation at setup, and not every monitor can be mounted on a third-party stand. Understanding these basics will help you pick the right stand for your displays, and ensure you’re ready to install your stand (or call someone who can.)

Why should I use a dual-monitor stand?

There are many reasons to mount your monitors, ranging from purely cosmetic to enabling better ergonomics. The stands with PC monitors vary widely in construction quality, appearance, and features. Some stands take up tons of desk space without offering any additional utility. Others may not allow you to adjust them properly, forcing you to twist or crane your neck to look at them, which could lead to long-term strain. And some of them may just look ugly. When you buy a monitor for its great specs, which you should, it potentially opens the door for you to end up with a huge, ugly stand that gives you a sore neck. Luckily, most monitors allow you to remove the actual display from its stand and mount them on a third-party stand. 

A monitor stand, whether it sits on your desk, clamps on at edge of it, or bolts onto the wall behind it, can solve all of these issues at once, giving you the ability to place your monitor exactly where you want it, reclaiming your desk space for more useful tools, and swapping out what may be garish design for something more subtle and clean.

Stand, clamp, or wall mount?

When moving to a dual-monitor stand, you must choose between a conventional desktop form factor, a clamping desk-mounted design, or a wall-mounted one. Often, picking one versus another comes down to what kind of desk you have, how important it is to reclaim desk space, and the likelihood that you’ll need to move your setup.

If you have a flat desk with an edge or lip, we like clamping monitor stands that clamp to the rear edge of your desk. They’re sturdy, highly adjustable, and easy to install or remove without damaging the desk. (Some offer an option to drill a hole into your desk as an anchor, but it isn’t necessarily mandatory.)

That said, if you have a glass desk, an executive-style desk, or something with lots of cable guides built into the back, a clamp might not be a good fit. In most cases, there’s just no spot to install the clamp. With glass, it could literally shatter the desk. In those cases, a desktop stand makes more sense. Though you won’t get as much space back, a desktop with a dual-monitor stand still consolidates two screens onto a single stand, reclaiming some desk real estate. Also, desktop stands are very sturdy, so it makes sense to use them for larger, heavier screens.

Finally, there’s the wall mount. Whether you use a set of monitor arms or a bracket similar to what you’d use when mounting a TV, the wall mount is an extremely sturdy choice but requires serious installation. To install it, you’ll need to find a stud, drill some holes, and bolt your monitor stand to your wall. Once you install it, your monitor stand isn’t going anywhere, which means your desk setup isn’t going anywhere, either. That lack of flexibility makes it a very niche choice. You don’t want to have to spackle and repaint your walls every time you think your desk would look better over by the window.

Before you buy: Make sure all your monitors have VESA mounts

If you peek around the back of most computer monitors, you’ll notice that the stand for your display probably attaches via four screws in a square configuration. This is a standard configuration maintained by the Video Electronics Standards Association, commonly known as VESA, meant to make stands as close to universal as possible so users can buy new stands easily. 

VESA mounts can come in many sizes, but most PC monitors fall into one of two options, 75mm x 75mm or 100mm x 100 mm. That makes everyone’s life easier: All of our picks support both sizes, as should most third-party monitor stands of any shape and size. That said, you should still double-check your monitors’ specs to see VESA mount sizes you’ll need before buying a dual-monitor stand, if only to ensure your monitor can be mounted. Some very cheap monitors (and a few very expensive ones) build their monitors permanently attached to their stands.

Double-check the weight of both of your displays

Monitors are heavy and expensive. Before mounting them, you should ensure your stand can support their weight. Make sure that your monitors are within the stands’ specified weight limit—don’t risk going above or below whatever limits the manufacturer sets. Most monitor manufacturers include the weight of the displays both with and without stands on their product pages. You have a little wiggle room on the size of the monitor, but consider the weight tolerances to be inviolable laws of nature in this case, or risk breaking hundreds or even thousands of dollars worth of monitors.

FAQs

Q: Does a dual-monitor arm save space?

Desk- and wall-mounted monitor arms do double duty, clearing off desktop space and improving your PC setup’s ergonomics. With your monitor on a desk-mounted stand, you can remove the original stand from your desk, giving you back some desk space. You can leave that space open for a cleaner, more minimalist look, use it as a spot to store a laptop, or maybe take advantage of it as a home for some powered speakers? The sky’s the limit.

Q: How much weight can a dual-monitor stand hold?

The maximum weight your dual-monitor stand can hold will vary from stand to stand. The mounts we’ve selected for this list max out at anywhere from 17.6 lbs to 44 lbs per monitor, influenced by the build material, the type of arm, and mounting style. 

This is one of the most important things to check out before picking out an arm. Do not buy a stand unless you are sure it can support your monitors’ weight.

Q: Can you use a monitor arm on a glass desk?

You can use some dual-monitor arms on a glass desk. Avoid using desk-mounted monitor stands, which apply a large amount of clamping force to your desk. A clamping monitor stand may very well crack or shatter the desk. So long as your desk can handle the weight of two monitors, a desktop monitor stand should work fine. If weight is also a concern, consider a wall-mounted stand.

Q: How much should a dual-monitor stand cost?

This will vary based on the features you need, but you shouldn’t have to spend over $50 on a monitor stand if your needs are modest.

Final thoughts on the best dual-monitor stands

With so many options for mounting your monitors and such a wide range of prices, the best dual-monitor stands are a very affordable and useful upgrade for anyone using two monitors. Whether you’re rocking one display in landscape mode and one in portrait mode, pairing an ultrawide monitor with a standard one, mounting to a desk or a wall, there are dynamic stands for every type of home setup.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dual-monitor stands for home and office in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hydroelectric-generators/ Sat, 29 Jul 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559517
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

These surprisingly powerful devices can turn the power of running water into current.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best portable waterlily turbine WaterLily Turbine
SEE IT

This model is small enough to carry with you into the wild.

Best overall Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine
SEE IT

This reliable model can power a small home all on its own.

Best budget Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator Water 12V DC 10W Micro Hydro Water Charging Tool Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator
SEE IT

Install it on your pipes and get up to 10W of power.

Hydroelectric generators produce electricity by harnessing the force of running water. This may seem like a novelty or impractical for home use, but you’d be surprised. While hydropower—or the use of the kinetic energy of running water to generate power—has been in use since ancient times, it is most associated these days with massive industrial damming projects, like the Oahe Dam and the Hoover Dam in the United States. But, hydropower can exist on an extremely small scale.

The benefits are obvious: you can generate power from an available resource—running water (with some models, even the water in your home’s pipes). In addition to possibly lowering your energy bills, allowing you to run additional electrical equipment, and potentially providing other benefits, utilizing hydro can take the pressure off the electricity grid, provide electricity if living off-the-grid, and offer backup power in the event of a blackout. Regarding sustainability, generating your own hydropower can reduce your use of fossil fuels and, consequently, your carbon footprint. According to the Department of Energy, about 7 percent of the nation’s electricity (and 37 percent of its renewable electricity) comes from hydropower—but with your own generator, you may be able to help those numbers grow, even slightly. Better yet, unlike large-scale hydroelectric projects, which can be extremely damaging to river ecology, small-scale hydro has relatively minimal effects on the immediate environment. Here are our picks for the best hydroelectric generators.

How we chose the best hydroelectric generators

We looked through about a dozen models to find the top hydroelectric generators. Admittedly, there aren’t a ton of options in the middle. There are a few larger-scale, ultimately stationary models that require a good amount of flow but can usually power a home, as well as tiny models that are best for producing small amounts of power. But we did find a couple of relevant models that—while maybe not meeting all your power needs—can provide extra energy and are particularly useful in a camping or off-grid setting. 

When purchasing a hydroelectric generator, sustainability is primarily in the concept: if you have running water near you, you can access a freely available resource to produce, potentially, a lot of electricity. Again, unlike with massive industrial hydro projects, effects near you should be minimal, and you can take pressure off the grid or other less sustainable energy sources. If you want to get deeply technical about it, you can calculate hydropower that you produce, and compare it to grid power, estimating both the relative cost and carbon impact of the energy you use.

The best hydroelectric generators: Recommendations & Reviews

If you’re on this page, then you likely know exactly what you’re looking for because these are somewhat complex machines that require lots of infrastructure to go with them. We’ve selected the best to fit specific uses, but products always overlap.

Best overall: Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine

Scott Hydro

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an extremely well-built machine that—even with low head—can reliably power a small home with steady water flow.

Specs

  • Rated at 1500W output (but can reach 2000W)
  • Largely self-cleaning
  • Made in USA

Pros

  • Provides ample power
  • Very sturdy

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Additional components required

If you live near a decent, steady source of running water, this high-quality machine can, once installed, probably provide consistent power for your home year-round. Your electricity bills will be negligible, you will not have to worry about the weather (as you do for solar or wind power), and you can sustainably produce consistent electricity with limited environmental impact.

ABS Alaskan, the maker of this machine, has been making high-quality alternative energy devices for over 30 years, geared toward the conditions in Alaska—a state with over 12,000 rivers—but applicable all over. The Scott Hydro Turbine, with a 1500-watt output, can almost certainly provide the energy you need for your home. While it requires a steady flow of water, it only needs a 20-foot drop in “head” (a term explained in our “Things to consider …” section near the bottom)—relatively small given the power provided. Once installed, it’s very easy to maintain—it is effectively self-cleaning, using the water flow, with only three rotating components.

On the con side, these units are pricey, and installation does take some work, requiring a relatively simple water diversion and a small shelter to protect the unit. You’ll also need an electric connection kit, not to mention batteries (if intending to store power). But once it’s up and running, it can provide lasting, sustainable power for years.

Best value: Energy Systems and Design Watter Buddy

Energy Systems and Design

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a modest price and small size, the Watter Buddy can provide a non-insubstantial 200W of power.

Specs

  • Type: Generates DC power via rectifier
  • Weight: 8 lbs

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Multiple nozzle sizes provided to match flow

Cons

  • Likely cannot provide all your power needs

The Watter Buddy is an innovative machine from Energy Systems and Design, a Canadian company providing off-grid hydro solutions for four decades. While the company produces a couple of larger (and more expensive models), the Watter Buddy meets you in the middle. For a modest price, it can provide a considerable amount—though probably not all—of your power needs. But don’t discount 200W. Whether you need supplementary off-grid power, are looking for electricity for a small workshop, or have other relevant needs, with steady water flow, this machine can do a lot—potentially lessening your reliance on a traditional electric generator. And you don’t have to be off-grid—this can even be effectively used with traditional household pipes.

This product is convenient in a few other ways. Multiple nozzle sizes allow you to match the flow you use to generate power easily. A built-in rectifier converts from AC to DC power, allowing electricity produced to be easily sent to batteries or compatible devices. Finally, its very small size allows you to move it around conveniently as needed.

Best portable: WaterLily Turbine

WaterLily

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WaterLily Turbine is easy to set up and use anywhere you can access running water, providing charge capabilities for both 12V and USB devices.

Specs

  • Produces up to 2A (on 12V output); or up to 3A (via USB output)
  • 10 ft. charge cord
  • 1 km/h minimum water flow required

Pros

  • Can charge cellphones, battery banks, lights, and more
  • Under 3 lbs.

Cons

  • Likely can’t provide for all power needs

For something easily transportable but extremely reliable, check out the WaterLily Turbine. This innovative little device can be set up virtually anywhere you have running water, producing (at highest power) up to 15 W. With good flow, a small device (cellphone, camera, etc.) should charge at roughly the same rate as it would if plugged into a traditional wall outlet. The WaterLily also offers unique accessories, including its WindLily attachment, which allows you to convert the device to harvest wind energy, and its SolarLily panels, which allows for a solar harvesting component like the best solar generators.

In terms of sustainability, again, a small hydroelectric generator has the virtue of harnessing natural flow with minimal ecological impacts. According to the company, using a WaterLily can provide the equivalent power of 50 AA batteries in a day. The company also looks to promote its values by collaborating with organizations that help deploy WaterLily turbines in the developing world.

Best budget: Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator

Yosoo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a very affordable price, this small Yosoo generator reliably generates up to 10 W of power and can be used on your household pipes.

Specs

  • 12V, 10W output
  • 3.2 oz
  • Made in China

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Reliable, steady

Cons

  • Provides very limited power

The Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator is a small, handy device that neatly hooks up to the pipes in your home. For an extremely affordable price, you can use water that, in most cases, should flow through your pipes anyway to generate a little extra electricity. It’s not useful for big devices, but it can provide additional capacity for lightning, charging for phones or other devices, or similar uses that require comparable power.

While this generator may not make a huge difference if you’re tied into the grid, it can be very handy if you live off-grid, where every little bit of power matters. Keep some lights on, charge up your phone or radio, or fulfill other needs based on existing water flow. 

Best lightweight: Beduan Micro Water Turbine Generator

Beduan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is another small, inexpensive, and simple option that can provide some extra power in your home.

Specs

  • 3.17 oz
  • 12 V, 10 W
  • 0.5” G thread

Pros

  • Very light
  • Affordable
  • Easy to install

Cons

  • Provides limited power
  • Can be noisy

This small device from Beduan provides another handy way to generate a little extra power from water running through a pipe, like a shower or through a hose. Its recommended water flow for full power is about 26 L/min, and with 10 W, you can provide a little extra power to charge a small device or power a light. While that certainly won’t be enough to run your washing machine or fridge, it can still be helpful—again, especially in off-grid situations, where power may be limited.

In practice, this little device from Beduan can make a handy addendum to your stock of energy-efficient tech. It makes up for its limitations by being both extremely affordable, as well as lightweight and easy to install.

Best off-grid: PowerSpout TRG

PowerSprout

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a high-caliber model that comes in high-head, medium-head, and low-head options, with the capacity to provide substantial off-grid power.

Specs

  • Head range is 6.6 to 100 feet
  • Maximum flow 254 gpm
  • 16.9×16.1×13.8”

Pros

  • Customizable to different types of flows
  • Relatively affordable given power provided

Cons

  • Can be challenging to set up

PowerSpout is a New Zealand-based company that offers an assortment of hydroelectric generators. We’ve linked to their medium-head option here, but they also make a high-head and low-head model. This variety is great, allowing you to carefully select the right model for your given conditions. Bear in mind, though, that setup can be tricky, and it is best to buy from a dealer.

The PowerSpout TRG is a high-quality machine that—for a pretty modest price—can generate 1.6 kW daily with adequate flow. The company even notes that “stacking” units is an option for generating additional power. The turbine will come with pretty much everything you need for setup, and by ordering from a dealer, you can go over your system specs to be sure you are prepared to easily get it up and running. While these are ideal for off-grid setups, they can be ordered such that the system voltage can easily be tied into the grid. In short, a great model for all situations.

Best small: Suneco 500W Hydro Turbine

Suneco

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If your water flow has decent head, this fairly small turbine can produce a decent amount of power that can cut down your electricity budget or provide extra off-grid power.

Specs

  • Rated for 12-18 m. head
  • Output: 500 W
  • Weight: 27 kgs.

Pros

  • Consistent, fairly substantial power
  • Good safety protection

Cons

  • Requires considerable head to generate power

Suneco Hydro has been developing micro hydro turbines since 1991—and they have several options. The 500W hydro turbine is a modest size that slots in right in the middle; it’s not too large or expensive but is substantial enough to make a difference in terms of power provided.

This particular model, weighing in at 27 kgs., is small enough that you can most likely set it up yourself. While it requires a somewhat considerable 12 m. of head to generate power, if you have the setting for it, it can make a great option for an on or off-grid property. However, it should be noted that Suneco Hydro is based in China, which can mean longer shipping times, and may potentially involve more challenges when working with customer service.

What to consider when shopping for a hydroelectric generator

Many factors go into choosing the ideal hydroelectric generator. How bulky is the generator? Is it portable? How much water does it require to run? How much power does it generate? Where can it be run? Can you set it up yourself? Depending on your needs—whether you want it for the home, a workshop, or for use when out in the backcountry—you will probably hone in on particular products.

Size

Hydropower comes in many sizes. According to the Bureau of Reclamation, for instance, the Hoover Dam generates 4 billion kilowatt-hours annually. On the far opposite end of the spectrum is pico hydro, which can generate up to 5 kW of electricity. The next most substantial type of hydro is micro hydropower, which generates up to 100 kW of electricity. (Hydropower continues up in size after that—encompassing mini hydro, which produces 100 kW to 1 MW of electricity, small hydro, and so on—but virtually any system for use on an individual scale will fall into the micro or pico category.) 

Keep your needs in mind. If you’re looking for something to use while camping, you’ll want to focus on the smallest and lightest end of the spectrum; if you want to power your house from the creek that runs through your property, you may need a sizable generator. 

Water source

While hydropower is conventionally associated with large rivers, any flow of water can potentially produce hydropower. The output could possibly offer more power than you think. Two terms are useful to know to understand how to calculate hydropower’s potential output. “Head” denotes the height gradient over which water moves from input to output; “flow” is the amount of water going through the system. These two numbers can be used to calculate the rough power output of a system.

How does the water source come in? Naturally, heavier running water over steeper terrain generates more power. If you have a substantial stream on your property, it’s very possible that you can generate a considerable amount of electricity from it. But hydropower can work even on a tiny scale. For instance, some systems are built to run off the water in your pipes. When looking for a personal hydro system, give consideration to the source of the water—and also consider seasonal factors, like whether a stream tends to dry up in the summer.

Generator type

According to the Department of Energy, “reaction” and “impulse” turbines are the two main classes of hydro turbines. Hydropower is not terribly complicated, but for the purposes of home use, you mainly need to determine what fits your particular setting.

The main difference between the two is that reaction turbines generate energy based on water pressure, while impulse turbines generate energy based on water velocity. Impulse turbines are best with high head and low flow (while reaction turbines are the inverse). Impulse turbines are more common in microhydro settings, although propeller turbines are a type of reaction turbine that can be used for microhydro.

FAQs

Q: How much do hydroelectric generators cost?

In a generator, the cost of a generator will be correlated with its power output. The most miniature, portable generators—which may produce only a few watts, can be reasonably priced. Larger generators surveyed, provided they have access to a steady water supply, may be able to power your home—and more. But these ones can cost several thousand dollars and may require supplementary equipment, like inverters, wiring, and batteries. Of course, you can always save and look for refurbished options on sites like eBay, Amazon Renewed, and others. 

Q: What size hydroelectric generator do I need?

It all depends on your needs! If you want one that provides enough power to charge your phone, one of the smallest options above might be sufficient. If you want to generate most of your home’s electricity via a hydro generator, you may need one producing 1000W or more.

Q: Can you power a house with a hydroelectric generator?

It depends on your power needs, the amount of water flow you can access, and the size of your generator. According to ABS Alaskan, the average American home without electric heat uses about 1000W consistently (less than the 1500 W put out by their Scott Hydro Turbine—meaning that device could power an average house). You can add up the wattage used by regularly running devices in your home—refrigerator, lights, washing machine, etc.—and compare them to the output of your generator.

Q: Will I need to purchase any additional equipment?

Sometimes. If you want to store power, you must purchase batteries, typically lead-acid or lithium. Both options are fairly expensive, but once purchased, they can usually last many years. Depending on the model, you may also need an inverter or other equipment to bring power from the generator to batteries or appliances. Be sure to check the specs on whichever generator you end up purchasing.

Q: What can I do with my hydro or old generator when it no longer works?

With good care, your hydro generator should last many years. Because these units tend to be specialized and each model is unique, check with the dealer or manufacturer about cleaning and maintenance instructions to ensure the machine lasts as long as possible (some, like the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine, are largely self-cleaning once set up.)

If your new hydro generator will replace your gas generator, you may be looking for ways to recycle your old machine. LoadUp is one company that can help recycle your old gas generate, salvaging as many valuable materials as possible. Some scrap companies, like Rockaway Recycling, may pay cash for old generators. Reaching out to scrap yards near you may suggest other ways to salvage usable materials from your generator.

Final thoughts on the best hydroelectric generators

If you’re looking for a serious way to generate consistent hydropower from a decent amount of flowing water on your property, check out the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine. If you’re looking for a smaller and more portable option, the WaterLily Turbine is a great choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best routers for Spectrum of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-routers-for-spectrum/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=452202
The best routers for Spectrum
Stan Horaczek

Make the most out of your internet by supplying your own router for your Spectrum service.

The post The best routers for Spectrum of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best routers for Spectrum
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Netgear Nighthawk Cable Modem Wi-Fi Router Combo Netgear Nighthawk Cable Modem Wi-Fi Router Combo
SEE IT

This modem-router combination takes the guesswork out of Spectrum compatibilty.

Best cyber secure Gryphon AC3000 Gryphon AC3000
SEE IT

Hackers are no match for this protective router.

Best budget TP-Link AC1750 TP-Link AC1750
SEE IT

Lots of expensive features are packed into this budget-friendly router.

If you work from home—and you’re a Charter Communications customer—you know there’s a huge difference between a bad router and a router that’s compatible with Spectrum internet. A bad router means long wait times talking to customer service, annoyingly slow load speeds, and a pixelated presence on work video calls. Choosing the best router for work, play, and just surfing the web makes life easier—and reduces the amount of low to no bandwidth-induced headaches you might get. 

How we chose the best routers for Spectrum

We know how important a strong Wi-Fi connection is to effortless, lag-free performance on the best gaming laptops and streaming high-quality lossless audio. I personally have made the mistake of not doing my research before buying a router—would not recommend spending a few days Wi-Fi-less and with my own thoughts. To prevent you from facing a similar situation, we looked to personal testing, peer recommendations, critical reviews, and user impressions to find the best Spectrum routers.

The best routers for Spectrum: Reviews & Recommendations

The best routers for Spectrum can handle everything, whether it’s a day full of video meetings, nights scrolling TikTok, intense gaming sessions, or streaming lengthy explainer videos on YouTube. These are our top picks.

Best overall: Netgear Nighthawk Cable Modem Wi-Fi Router Combo

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to worry about purchasing a separate modem with this trusted combination device.

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 1,900 Mbps
  • Coverage: 1,800 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: Up to 400 Mbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: Four 1-gigabit Ethernet ports; one USB 2.0 port

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Independent channels for 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz
  • Warrants fast, reliable internet. 

Cons 

  • Slow return on investment
  • No support for Wi-Fi 6

The Netgear Nighthawk proves that two is better than one: This router also features a built-in modem, meaning you don’t have to shop for a Spectrum-compatible modem. This router covers 1,800 square feet for up to 30 devices and is compatible with Spectrum speed plans up to 400 Mbps. It includes separate networks for 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz bands, meaning you can organize your devices based on band level. You can plug in gaming consoles and computers to Ethernet thanks to four one-gigabit Ethernet ports, and can share storage with a connected device using the USB port. The router supports Wi-Fi 4 and 5 but does not support Wi-Fi 6. It features a WPA2-PSK security protocol, which is secure enough to protect your home without an enterprise authentication server—simply provide an 8- to 62-character-long passphrase to encrypt your network. However, it will take some time to see a return on your investment with the Nighthawk. Multiple reviews note that owners’ internet speed and performance were improved after setup, making the purchase worth it. Find more options for the best Netgear routers here.

Best for gaming: ASUS AX5700 Wi-Fi 6 Gaming Router

ASUS

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Reduced lag and latency are a tap away thanks to the router’s game mode and support for Wi-Fi 6. 

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 5700 Mbps
  • Coverage: 2,500 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: 1 Gbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: two 3.2 USB ports; one 2.5 G WAN/LAN port; one WAN port; four Ethernet ports

Pros

  • Fiber internet compatible
  • Easy installation
  • Plenty of LAN ports for devices if need be

Cons 

  • Upright design can hinder placement 

We are no strangers to the ASUS AX5700—we’ve previously named it the best all-purpose gaming router. And it is compatible with Spectrum’s Internet Gig plan, which can handle up to 1 Gpbs, making it a perfect addition to this list. It’s Wi-Fi 6 compatible and includes MU-MIMO functionality for increased speed and security. Download the ASUS Router app to turn on the mobile game mode, which reduces lag and latency for back-to-back Victory Royales. AiMesh support allows you to bring seamless, interruption-free coverage to your home—and, considering the price of mesh routers, that makes this one a steal. Hackers will be KO’d thanks to free lifetime access to ASUS AiProtection Pro, which includes WPA3 protection—the latest Wi-Fi security protocol—powered by Trend Micro, a cyber security software company. However, you can only set the router vertically, which could pose a problem if you need a horizontal router. 

Best for streaming: Linksys – Dual-Band AX5400 Wi-Fi 6 Router

Linksys

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Between the wide coverage range, support for more than 30-plus devices, and splittable price, this router means the only thing your roommates will lag on is doing their dishes. 

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 5.4 Gbps
  • Coverage: 2,800 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: 1 Gbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: 4 Ethernet ports; 1 internet port; 1 USB port

Pros

  • Easy setup
  • Separate guest access
  • Easy device connection thanks to a WPS button

Cons 

  • Reviews note trouble connecting the router to the Linksys app

We’ve all had the problem of the internet slowing because it’s slogged down by everyone’s respective phone, laptop, and gaming system streaming at once. This problem is exacerbated if your roommates like Internet-of-Things smart devices that connect to the network. Expect the slog to stop with this dual-band router, which can connect to more than 30 devices. Additionally, this router is Wi-Fi 6 compatible, meaning it’s fast and futureproof. This router includes four Ethernet ports, one internet port to connect the router to the modem, and one USB port. Also, the router can create a guest access network so your roommates’ siblings or frequent callers don’t cause security problems or snag too much bandwidth when they add their binge-watching to what’s pulling down all the data. A WPS button makes device connection easy, and you can use your smartphone, tablet, or computer browser for quick set-up. The second biggest problem with this router is deciding who will take it at the end of the lease. The largest problem is connecting it to the Linksys app.

Best mesh: NETGEAR Orbi Whole Home Tri-band Mesh Wi-Fi 6 System

NETGEAR

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Up to 5,000 square feet of coverage and an included satellite extender means you can take meetings almost everywhere in your home without lag.

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 4.2 Gbps
  • Coverage: 5,000 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: 1 Gbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: 1 Ethernet WAN port; 3 Ethernet ports; 2 Ethernet ports on satellite extender

Pros

  • No dead zones
  • Wide coverage area
  • Tri-band Wi-Fi

Cons 

  • Must pay Netgear to service software issues
  • Expensive
  • App capabilities are only free for 30 days

We’ve all experienced the pain of being laggy and pixelated on a video call, either from weak signals or dead spots in the home. Say goodbye to all that with the Netgear Orbi, which covers 5,000 square feet and includes a satellite extender for more reach. This router, our pick for working from home, can support up to 40 devices and has a crazy-fast data transfer rate of 4.2 Gbps, plus support for Wi-Fi 6 for futureproofing. Unlike other routers, this one supports a tri-band frequency: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band for connecting your devices, and a separate 5 GHz band so the router and included satellite can communicate with each other. Netgear Armor Antivirus and data theft protection powered by Bitdefender means business secrets will stay secret. However, there is a catch: this capability, along with others in the Orbi app like parental controls, are only free for 30 days. Afterward, you’ll need a subscription. And you’ll have to pay Netgear for software troubleshooting—that can be a lot of money to spend after purchasing an already-expensive router.

Best cyber secure: Gryphon AC3000

Gryphon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This router does not use a web browser for configuration, making it less likely that a hacker will jack your info. 

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 3 Gbps 
  • Coverage: 3,000 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: 1 Gbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: 1 WAN port; 3 Ethernet ports with backhaul capabilities

Pros

  • Easy installation with Gryphon app
  • Free intrusion detection in the first year
  • Responsive support team

Cons 

  • No advanced customization options

You won’t need to worry about hackers and internet thieves with the Gryphon AC3000, which offers advanced security thanks to its Wi-Fi 6 functionality, vulnerability scans, and app configuration that prevents hackers from accessing your network via the web. It also secures connected devices and sends alerts when it detects vulnerabilities, weak passwords, or infected devices. The router has fantastic basic security and you also get one year of intrusion detection for free with purchase. Afterward, it’s $89 per year. It covers 3,000 square feet—an average 2-3 bedroom home—at lightning-fast speeds thanks to its 3 Gbps data transfer rate. If you purchase multiple Gryphon routers, you can create a mesh network for even stronger, wider coverage. The Gryphon Connect app includes robust parental controls, including content filtering, screen time, and usage monitoring. Its user interface is incredibly streamlined and simple. However, reviews note that there could be more advanced customization options, like more device categories and fields for categories that should be blocked.

Best budget: TP-Link AC1750

TP-Link

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The TP-Link AC1750 features high-end capabilities at a fraction of the cost. 

Specs

  • Data transfer rate: 1750 Mbps
  • Coverage: 2,500 square feet
  • Plan speed compatibility: 400 Mbps
  • Parental controls: Yes
  • Ports: 1 USB port; 1 WAN port; 4 Ethernet ports

Pros

  • VPN Server
  • Alexa compatibility
  • Bandwidth prioritization (QoS)

Cons 

  • Not compatible with Wi-Fi 6

The TP-Link AC1750 tops Amazon’s list of computer routers for a reason: it includes a VPN server, bandwidth prioritization, parental controls, Alexa compatibility, and can connect up to 50 devices—all for under $100. A 2,500-square-foot range means you can take video calls outside and bandwidth prioritization allows you to assign devices to either of the dual bands to prevent congestion and slow internet speeds. Connect it to Alexa to turn the guest Wi-Fi on or off using your voice, or use the TP-Link Tether app to set up and manage your network. WPA/WPA2 wireless encryption keeps the entire family protected from hackers, and parental controls protect your kids from looking up mature content on the internet. The only downside of this router? It’s not Wi-Fi 6 compatible, which means it could become obsolete as new Wi-Fi protocols come out.

What to consider when buying the best routers for Spectrum

Routers are not one-size-fits-all. Here is what you need to know when shopping for the best routers for Spectrum:

Modem vs. router

A modem connects you to a wide area network, or WAN—the internet that Spectrum provides. A router connects your devices to a local area network, or LAN—your own little piece of the internet that Spectrum provides. You can’t connect to a router without a modem. Spectrum customers are required to use an authorized modem, and the company provides a preconfigured Wi-Fi router for a monthly fee. However, that adds up, and purchasing your own can save money in the long run. If you buy your own router, you don’t have to give it back if you cancel your service—you can use it with your new internet provider.

Compatibility with Spectrum

Make sure that the router your purchase is compatible with Spectrum. Otherwise, you’ll have to return it. You can find a list of Spectrum-compliant routers on the company’s site. Although buying the correct modem is more important, it never hurts to double-check. Also, the router can only run as fast as your internet plan provides. For example, if you have a router that can only reach speeds of 300 Mbps and have an internet plan for 200 Mbps, you’ll only max out at 200 Mbps.

Wireless protocol

The wireless protocol, or Wi-Fi standard, determines your router’s throughput and range. You can determine the protocol by finding the number 802.11 and a certain letter combination:

  • 11ax (Wi-Fi 6): Wi-Fi 6 is the newest standard and delivers speeds up to 10 Gbps. However, not all devices and internet connections support Wi-Fi 6. You may not need to upgrade just yet, but switching to Wi-Fi 6 will help futureproof your internet connection. This standard is the fastest.  
  • 11ac (Wi-Fi 5): This standard appears on most routers, and supports speeds up to 3.5 Gbps. 
  • 11n (Wi-Fi 4): This standard supports speeds up to 600 Mbps and was the first to allow both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequencies. This standard, compared to Wi-Fi 5 and 6, is the slowest. 

Range and signal strength

Wi-Fi range is determined by the kind of router you’re using, the wireless protocol the router follows, and the space you’re in. Wi-Fi signals have a harder time permeating through concrete, compared to wood, stucco, and other building materials. For example, 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi routers can reach up to 150 feet indoors and 300 feet outdoors and should be used if you’re looking for long-distance Wi-Fi. Routers running on 5 GHz bands can reach around one-third of these distances since it uses narrower wavelengths—because of this, you should choose a 5 GHz router for speed but only if your devices can be located nearer to your internet access point. Newer routers operate on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands to reach greater distances and achieve maximum throughput for devices in closer proximity.

Budget

The best routers range from $50 up to $500. The best Wi-Fi extenders can help with spotty internet, but Consumer Reports recommends using a mesh router system that relies on multiple systems to spread strong Wi-Fi signals. However, a mesh router system can be pricey. On the flip side, Wi-Fi extenders are cheaper and can be a perfect solution if you’re looking for more reliable coverage in certain areas of your home. However, poor placement of your extender won’t help your Wi-Fi woes and can cause more connectivity problems if your Wi-Fi extender creates a separate network that your device has to switch between.

Extra features

Many newer routers are compatible with voice assistants like Siri and Alexa, have parental controls, and provide separate networks for guests. Built-in VPNs and routers with multi-user, multiple-input, and multiple-output technology—also known as MU-MIMO—can help with security and network speed, respectively. However, if you would not benefit from the bells and whistles—and the added costs associated with them—then there’s no shame in going for a basic router.

FAQs

Q: How do I use my own router with Spectrum?

Per Spectrum’s website, you should first connect the coax cable and power cord to the internet modem. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into the modem. Plug the other end into the Internet, Uplink, WAN, or WLAN port on the router. Wait 2-3 minutes for the router to light up. You can then either connect an Ethernet cable from the router to a computer or laptop or open a browser and enter the IP address on the router to configure it. You can also configure your router using an app if the router has that feature. Contact the manufacturer if you have any problems with setup.

Q: Does any routers work with Spectrum?

Technically, yes. It’s really the modem that matters, as that will connect you to Spectrum’s internet. However, make sure the router is compatible with your plan. If you have a router that only reaches speeds up to 200 Mbps and a 1 Gbps internet plan, your devices will only be able to reach internet speeds of 200 Mbps.

Q: What’s the difference between a router and a modem for Spectrum?

A router will not work without a modem. The modem is the entire pie that Spectrum has baked: A modem connects you to all the internet that Spectrum provides. Well, at least the slice of Spectrum’s pie you pay for. Your plan determines how large your slice is. The only way you can access that slice of pie is through a modem. Connecting a router to the modem lets you give bites of the pie you’ve bought to your phone, laptop, gaming console, and/or smart devices.

Final thoughts on the best routers for Spectrum

Whether you decide on a router that helps you jumpstart your streaming career, keeps your new battlestation in sync with the rest of the squad, or feeds your OLED TV buttery-smooth 4K video, the best routers for Spectrum will be suited to your lifestyle and internet needs. It doesn’t matter if you go ham-handed on the features or keep it simple—the best routers will get you streaming, web surfing, online gaming, and working with ease.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best routers for Spectrum of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best star projectors for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-star-projectors/ Tue, 23 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=463938
The best star projectors
Stan Horaczek

A light show billions of years in the making beams into your home.

The post The best star projectors for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best star projectors
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best overall star projector Sega Toys Homestar Flux
SEE IT

Get a scientifically accurate recreation of the night sky at home.

Best for adults BlissLights Sky Lite BlissLights Sky Lite 2.0
SEE IT

Skip the kid stuff without breaking the bank.

Best budget Infmetry Star Projector Infmetry Star Projector
SEE IT

This star light is designed ofor gaming rooms, home theaters,

Beyond a few bright celestial objects, the rise of light pollution has made it difficult for most people to experience a genuinely starry night sky—and that’s where star projectors come in. If artificial lights have obscured your view of the Milky Way, these compact devices provide a fun and comfortable way to observe the cosmos. All you need is a dark room with a power outlet and you’re ready to bask in the wonders of the universe. Many also function as night lights or pattern projectors that can spruce up a room without the celestial theme. While nothing can replace the awe-inspiring feeling of seeing millions of stars in person, the best star projectors can still leave you transfixed.

How we chose the best star projectors

I’ve been fortunate to visit areas less affected by light pollution, so I know what it’s like to gaze upon the grandeur of our galaxy. As an editor at TechnoBuffalo, I visited NASA’s Jet Propulsion Lab in Pasadena, Calif., to learn about the Mars rover. I also took a guided tour of the Goldstone Deep Space Communications Complex, where I saw enormous satellites used to communicate with faraway spacecraft. Over the last 10 years, I’ve written about gadgets and space for outlets like CNN Underscored, TechnoBuffalo, and Popular Science, and this guide, in a way, allows me to write about both. If you’re searching for a projector for movie night, you’re in the wrong place (though we do have a guide for the best projectors, the best home theater projectors, and the best outdoor projectors). But if you enjoy the stars of the sky as much as you do the stars of the screen, read on.

The best star projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re looking to liven up your space with colorful lights or follow in the footsteps of Carl Sagan, a star projector is a novel way to explore the cosmos. When making our picks, we found a balance between fantastical projectors, options for kids and adults, and a more scientifically accurate model that’s great for those who love astronomy.

Best overall: Sega Toys Homestar Flux

Sega

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sega’s Homestar Flux features the most scientifically accurate images out of all the star projectors we picked.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 6.3 x 6.3 x 5.9 inches (LWH)
  • Weight: 1.36 pounds
  • Power: USB

Pros 

  • Supports multiple discs
  • Projects up to 60,000 stars at once
  • Great educational tool

Cons 

  • Expensive

Sega’s Homestar Flux is the closest thing to a planetarium if you’re a fan of astronomy and intend to use your star projector as an educational tool. It can project up to 60,000 stars at once and covers a circle with a 106-inch diameter. Unlike the other star projectors on this list, Sega’s model supports interchangeable discs, allowing owners to explore different parts of the universe in incredible detail. The Homestar Flux comes with two discs, the Northern Hemisphere and the Northern Hemisphere with constellation lines; it also supports additional discs that feature the Andromeda Galaxy, the southern hemisphere, and more. 

These discs contain data from different missions of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), and the United States Naval Observatory (USNO). While Sega’s projector is pricey, it features the most scientifically accurate experience and is a must-have for would-be astronomers.

Best portable: NEWSEE Northern Lights Star Projector

NEWSEE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: NEWSEE’s Northern Lights Star Projector lets you take the magic of the stars with you everywhere.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 4.7 x 4.7 x 4.8 inches (LWH)
  • Weight: 1.15 pounds
  • Power: USB-C

Pros 

  • Battery powered
  • 360-degree projection
  • White noise mode
  • Bluetooth streaming

Cons 

  • Don’t expect high-fidelity audio

NEWSEE’s Northern Lights Star Projector is the only model we’re recommending that can be taken anywhere. The battery-powered projector can run for a couple of hours before needing to be recharged—though because it has a USB-C port, you can plug it into a portable charger to extend its life. The projector sits on a stand and can be rotated so that you can find the best angle for your room. This flexibility comes in handy because you may be using the projector in multiple rooms because of its portability.

You can program NEWSEE’s projector to display one of four different star patterns, and play five different white noises. This star projector can even be used as a Bluetooth speaker for playing any music from your digital library. However, you shouldn’t get your hopes up where audio fidelity is concerned—consider this a fun bonus feature. If you want to take a star projector to a friend’s place or on vacation, this is the one to grab.

Best for adults: BlissLights Sky Lite

BlissLights

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Sky Lite from BlissLights will help you set the mood with the right lighting.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 5.95 x 2.91 x 5.95 (LWH)
  • Weight: 1.68
  • Power: AC adapter

Pros 

  • Adjustable brightness
  • Tilting base
  • App controlled

Cons 

  • Projector design is easy to tip over

The Sky Lite from BlissLights is an excellent option for adults because it offers brightness controls, and several lighting effects, making it easy to set the proper mood. While star projectors generally become the center of attention in whatever room they’re in, the Sky Lite is excellent as complementary lighting, casting colorful auroras during dinner, movie nights, and parties. Additionally, the Sky lite 2.0 supports a rotation feature and a shutoff timer so that you can have your magical night under the stars before nodding off to bed. 

Best for kids: Gdnzduts Galaxy Projector

Gdnzduts

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This galaxy projector features brightness controls and a shutoff timer, plus it doubles as a colorful night light.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 6.45 x 6.45 x 4.92 (LWH)
  • Weight: 0.61 pounds
  • Power: USB

Pros 

  • Built-in speaker
  • Shutoff timer
  • Brightness controls

Cons 

  • Doesn’t show constellations

This simple galaxy projector features 21 lighting effects, a shutoff timer, brightness controls, and doubles as a night light. That way, you can find the right effect you like, adjust the brightness, and set a timer before bed. You can also toggle the lasers on and off, turning off the stars and letting the nebula-like effect lull you to sleep. The Galaxy Projector also comes with a remote, making it easy for kids to operate. Whether you want to inspire your kid’s imagination or keep them feeling safe with a night light, the Galaxy Projector is an excellent choice.

Best budget: Infmetry Star Projector

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Infmetry’s Star Projector offers an array of features at an affordable price.

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 7.1 x 7.1 x 7.5 inches (LWH)
  • Weight: 1.37 pounds
  • Power: USB

Pros 

  • Affordable
  • Five brightness modes
  • Shutoff timer

Cons

  • No nebula or aurora features

Infantry’s Star Projector casts 360 degrees of light through a precut dome, creating a night sky-like effect. This model also supports five brightness modes, a breathing mode, and four colors (white, yellow, blue, and green). There’s also a shutoff timer, so you can fall asleep with the projector on and wake up with it off. It’s not nearly as captivating as the other options on this list, but for the price, it’s a fun way to introduce someone to the wonders of the universe.

What to consider when buying the best star projectors

Generally, cheap star projectors are novelties that emit a mix of colorful swirling LED lights and class 2 lasers, which are low-power visible lasers—the same type used in laser pointers. While most models aren’t scientifically accurate, they provide a fanciful escape and can offer a calming experience. However, if you’re serious about astronomy and willing to spend more, you can find a star projector that can turn your room into a personal planetarium.

Most models we researched offer features like brightness and color controls, image rotation, and an automatic shut-off timer. We found picking the right star projector is more about finding the experience that matches your mood. Are you looking for the cosmic color of nebulae? What about scientifically accurate constellations? Whatever you’re after, there’s a star projector for everyone.

Projection type

You’d think that a star projector only projects, well, stars. But many of them can cover the broad cosmic spectrum and mimic everything from nebulae to auroras to constellations. As we mentioned, picking the right one is about capturing your interest and imagination. A projector that can cast a nebula or aurora is an excellent choice if you want to create a calming environment before going to sleep. A star projector with more scientifically accurate images is ideal for studying and educational use.

Brightness control

A good star projector uses an LED bulb and offers multiple brightness settings. While star projectors are most effective in a dark room, the models that project nebula and aurora make for great complementary lighting, such as during a party or movie night. They also make for good night lights and can help create a calming environment that encourages rest.

Color settings

In addition to adjusting brightness, most star projectors offer different color settings, similar to smart light bulbs. Users can create a scene that fits their mood through advanced color settings and change it with the press of a button. A green aurora may be suitable for calm and tranquility, while yellow may be ideal for happiness and optimism. Most star projectors allow color adjustments through a controller or smartphone app and support millions of color options.

Still vs. rotating

Star projectors generally offer different viewing modes: still and rotating. A projector that operates in still mode will cast light onto a surface and remain static. A projector with a rotating feature will put on a more dynamic light show by slowly rotating the lights. Many of the models we looked at are capable of switching between still and rotating modes.

Extra features

Beyond simply projecting lights onto a wall, some star projectors include extra features like white noise, app support, and shutoff timers. Some models can even be synced with your music so that you can put on a cosmic light show. While these features aren’t necessary, they make specific models more appealing, especially if you intend to use a star projector in a child’s room, because it can act as a night light and white noise machine and then shut off after a few hours.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best star projectors cost?

Star projectors can start at $10 and go up to the $150-$200 range, depending on quality and additional features. For example, something that provides a planetarium-like experience will be more expensive than one that has constellations etched into the cover.

Q: Can I use a star projector on any wall?

Yes, you can use a star projector on any wall in your home. These projectors typically have a short throw, which essentially means they need to be relatively close to the surface they’re projecting onto (between 6-10 feet). We recommend pointing your star projector at a blank wall or ceiling so that you can enjoy the maximum effect of the colorful lights without distractions.

Q: Where should a star projector be placed in a room?

For an evenly lit ceiling, you should try to put the star projector in the center of your room. We realize that’s not ideal for most people, so any place you have an outlet is a good spot. There’s no wrong place to put a star projector, as long as it’s not too close to the surface it’s projecting onto. What works and looks best to you may not be the same for someone else.

Q: Are star projectors for kids and adults the same?

Star projectors are appropriate for any age and generally offer the same features or designs, whether for a kid or an adult. There are some variations if you do want one for a specific age group. For example, some models might come with imagery, such as an astronaut or spaceship, aimed at younger audiences. Meanwhile, projectors that offer scientifically accurate images might only appeal to adults or people who are enthusiastic about astronomy. If you’re purchasing a star projector for someone, you must consider their interests to get the most out of what you buy.

Q: Are star projectors good to use as night lights?

If the imagery and colors of a star projector make you feel more relaxed, then you should use it as a night light. While not their intended purpose, many models we researched feature brightness and timer settings, making them suited for bedtime use. Some also have built-in sound machines, which some people claim help them fall asleep and stay asleep.

Final thoughts on the best star projectors

Star projectors are a fun and affordable way to add bright, colorful lights to your bedroom. That said, most are nothing more than novelties and put on light shows that vaguely resemble nebulae and auroras. If you’re searching for something with more scientifically accurate imagery, you can find some excellent options if you don’t mind spending more money. Better yet, we recommend traveling to a place unaffected by light pollution and experiencing the feeling of seeing millions of stars in person.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best star projectors for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best retractable dog leashes of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-retractable-dog-leashes/ Thu, 24 Feb 2022 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=426342
tug retractable dog leash and a dog on a sidewalk best overall retractable dog leash
Billy Cadden

These reliable retractable leashes are essential, easily packable equipment for adventures with your pooch.

The post The best retractable dog leashes of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
tug retractable dog leash and a dog on a sidewalk best overall retractable dog leash
Billy Cadden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Tug retractable dog leash with dog attached TUG 360°
SEE IT

This leash offers a solid value with all the necessary features.

Best tape flexi® New Comfort Retractable Tape Dog Leash is the best tape. Flexi Comfort
SEE IT

Having more than one dog doesn’t have to mean lugging more gear, with two color-coded leashes in one.

Best for large dogs KONG Ultimate Retractable Dog Leash is the best for large dogs. KONG Ultimate
SEE IT

For bigger breeds, this leash can support up to 150 pounds.

There’s nothing quite like going on a jaunt with your pooch, and the right retractable dog leash can strike a perfect balance between security and freedom. A trusted lead maximizes the safety of your dog-walking experience. We curated this list of the best retractable dog leashes to help make the most of your adventures with the pooch and something durable, dependable, and comfortable in your hand. 

We chose models popular because you can release your dog’s distance up to 26 feet in some cases (the most common length is about 16 feet). This allows your dog less confinement and more freedom of movement to sightsee as they get their daily steps in. However, because they allow more freedom, you must ensure the brake-and-lock system is up to par. A lock button on the handle controls how much of the leash is extended or retracted at any given time. Some even come with reflective stitching for low-light conditions. There are many leashes to choose from, but for those who love the freedom of a retractable design, here are five of the best retractable dog leashes to get the most out of your daily strolls. 

How we chose the best retractable dog leashes

To find the best retractable dog leashes, we considered dozens of models from several manufacturers. We relied on research, published reviews, and some hands-on experience to find leashes that were both safe and reliable over a long period of time. We looked for models that have solid reputations above all else because failure out in the real world can be catastrophic for you and your pooch. We favored models that can accommodate many breeds with the necessary features for controlling a pup’s movements on the street. Added features like a hook for carrying bags provide nice touches to round out the offerings.

The best retractable dog leashes: Reviews & Recommendations

There are a lot of dog leashes, including these lengthy tethers, out there. And one thing is for sure: There’s nothing worse than a leash that snaps or breaks, so we’ve collected trusted brands known for their durable, long-lasting products. Beyond the actual retractable dog leashes being sturdy, our top picks ensure you get a burly handle that won’t fall apart if it’s dropped or bangs against a hard object.

Best overall: TUG 360° Tangle-Free Retractable Dog Leash

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This extremely durable retractable dog leash is both lightweight and strong for a wide range of dog sizes and strengths and clocks in at under $20, making it the best retractable dog leash overall. 

Specs

  • Length: 16 ft
  • Sizes: Tiny, Small, Med, Large
  • Tangle-free: Yes

Pros

  • Lightweight yet extremely durable
  • Ergonomic grip handle
  • Consistent positive customer feedback
  • Safety features
  • Range of sizes

Cons

  • Not chew-proof

With tons of positive user reviews, a thoughtful set of features, and a very affordable price, the Tug Tangle-Free won us over for the best retractable dog leash overall. A 16-foot, tangle-free, 360-degree movement tape leash with their signature Quick Lock and Brake System ensures your dog follows your lead. 

Reviewers note that the handle is comfortable and wide enough for larger hands, and the wider strap is more durable than previous models for pullers or hyperactive pups. Sizes range from Tiny to Large, for tiny dogs to hefty fur-babies. 

Best tape: Flexi New Comfort Retractable Tape Dog Leash

Flexi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Flexi has been making a version of this leash for 50 years, which speaks to its success.

Specs

  • Length: Up to 26 ft
  • Sizes: XS-XL
  • Tangle-free: Yes

Pros

  • 50-year history in dog leashes
  • Customizable (LED lighting, multi box, etc)
  • Safety features 
  • Extra long tape that won’t jam

Cons

  • Some reviewers report snapping
  • Not the cheapest option

Looking for the best Petsmart dog leash for your next trip to the store? This Flexi leash is one of the best in the market for tape models, featuring an adjustable handle, brake and lock buttons, and an ergonomically designed handle for comfortable walking. 

It can also be customized with its own LED Lighting System for added safety and protection in low light. Sixteen feet of tape is protected by the tape guidance system, which ensures that your tape won’t get jammed during walks or as it retracts.

One of the main reasons to choose a Flexi leash is the brand name itself. Flexi invented the retractable lead 50 years ago and has been refining it ever since.

Best chew-proof: PUPTECK Retractable Dog Leash with Anti-Chewing Steel Wire

PUPTECK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With 15 inches of chew-proof steel wire, this retractable dog leash promises to keep your munch-happy pups from chewing through their lead.

Specs

  • Length: 16 ft
  • Chew-Proof: Yes
  • Weight: Up to 110 lbs

Pros

  • Lightweight chew-proof wire 
  • Reflective strip for low visibility conditions
  • Can handle up to 110 lbs
  • Ergonomic handle

Cons

  • Some reviewers wished for more wire coverage
  • Retraction mechanism is slow

For dogs who will munch on anything, this 16-foot chew-proof retractable dog leash from Puptek features 15 inches of detachable chew-proof steel wire rope. Compared to alternative stainless steel rope, the wire design rope is overall lighter making it a more user-friendly experience when going for long walks and the best chew-proof retractable dog leash.

The tangle-free rope can bear up to 110 pounds and features black webbing with a reflective strip attached to it, so night walks are safer and more visible to passing cars. The only downside here is some reviewers wished the chew-proof steel covered more of the leash. This would, indeed, create a heavier lead but would ensure that your pup couldn’t chew through any part of the tape. 

Best for large dogs: KONG Ultimate Retractable Dog Leash

Alcott

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Extra durable, extra rugged, and extra powerful dog leash for dogs up to 150 lbs, suitable for most large dog breeds like Pit Bulls, Mastiffs, and Rottweilers. 

Specs

  • Length: 16 ft
  • Reflective: Yes
  • Weight: Up to 150 lbs

Pros

  • Very durable
  • Suitable for up to 150 lbs
  • Reflective stitching for safety
  • Dependable; long-lasting

Cons

  • Some reviewers don’t like the forward placement of the lock button
  • More expensive end of models
  • No keyring slot or holder for poop bags

You shouldn’t have to lift heavy weights to be able to walk your Pitbull or another strong breed. This dog leash is for those hefty pups that require super durable and extra-strength leashes. The Ultimate Kong leash—made by the trusted manufacturer of some of our favorite dog toys—may be rugged and sturdy, but the ergonomic and soft grip handle with added grip support keeps it easy and breezy for the pet owner to maintain total control of their large dog. 

You can use this Kong leash for dogs up to 150 pounds, comparable to a Mastiff, American bulldog, or Leonberger. It also comes color-coordinated with reflective stitching for added safety, which you’ll need with those heavy pullers in low-light conditions. We would have liked a keyring slot for a baggie holder, but that’s not a dealbreaker.

What to look for in the best retractable dog leashes

Type 

There are a few types of retractable dog leashes: nylon, tape, and chew-proof designs with steel wiring. It depends on your needs, but we don’t recommend nylon for tough or heavy dogs as they can more easily snap or break. Go for a chew-proof with wiring if your dog is prone to chewing.

Brake settings

Ensure you can easily brake or lock to have optimal control over your dog while walking. Since the lead can be up to 26 feet, this is supremely important for safety. Plus, most leashes recommend you don’t let the dog hit the end of its range because that puts excess stress on the mechanism.

Weight limit

This is very important so your leash doesn’t snap or break, especially with pullers. Be sure to read the product information to ensure your leash can handle your dog’s weight capacity.  Most will offer a weight range that the product can withstand. 

Comfort

An ergonomic grip handle is important for your comfort, especially for long walks. 

Tangle-free design

Most good brands will have tangle-free designs to ensure you’re not spending precious walking time untangling a lead. Leashes typically achieve this feat by shaping the opening through which the leash comes out of the mechanism and attaching to the dog’s collar with rotating hooks that spin freely. 

FAQs

Q: Are retractable leashes bad for big dogs?

They are not bad for big dogs, but you’ll need to find leashes suitable for your dog’s weight. For example, our suggestion for the dual doggie leash can only handle dogs up to 50 pounds each, but our Kong leash works well for dogs up to 150 pounds!

Q: How thick should a dog leash be?

It depends on the size of your dog. For smaller dogs, 3/8-inch-thick should suffice. For medium-sized and larger dogs, go with a 3/4-inch thick and up.

Q: How much does a retractable dog leash cost?

On average, retractable dog leashes cost $20 – $30, but some heavy-duty and multi-dog models can venture closer to $40.

Final thoughts about the best retractable dog leashes

Finding the best retractable dog leash for you depends on various factors: your dog’s weight, strength, and habits (like chewing through everything in their path). Choosing the wrong one can end in disaster, and your best friend deserves better than that. Plus, if you have a leash you and your pup enjoy, you’re more likely to get out there and have adventures. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best retractable dog leashes of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best floor lamps in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-floor-lamps/ Tue, 09 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610002
One of the best floor lamps in a room with windows. The lamp is on.
Trent Austin Design

If you have a space where the world's darkness, or at least the sun’s exposure, turns corners into infinite blackness, you need a nice modern floor lamp.

The post The best floor lamps in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
One of the best floor lamps in a room with windows. The lamp is on.
Trent Austin Design

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall PESRAE Floor Lamp on a plain white background. PESRAE Floor Lamp
SEE IT

The PESRAE Floor Lamp is a classic floor lamp priced to move and compact enough for any room.

Best eco-friendly SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp on a plain white background. SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp
SEE IT

The SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp uses energy-saving LED lights rather than energy-draining bulbs.

Best budget Addlon's Floor Lamp on a plain white background. Addlon Floor Lamp
SEE IT

The Addlon floor lamp’s classy linen lampshade and consistently low price make it a top-notch budget buy.

Floor lamps serve a specific purpose, usually occupying those dimmer corners of your house where the installed lights won’t reach. Thankfully, floor lamps are not a new technology, limited to a few super expensive items. There are tons of them. Whether you are after a nice energy-saving LED floor lamp, a dimmable floor lamp, or a unique floor lamp made from random metal scraps, these things will surely bring some light into your living room, bedroom, mudroom … your life in general. The best floor lamps are the ones that fit your space and budget and satisfy your need for illumination, and we’ve collected them below.

How we chose the best floor lamps

Choosing the best floor lamp is like choosing the best flavor of Slurpee at 7-Eleven: There are multiple similarities between brands and styles of floor lamps and, at the core of it, they’re all refreshing. So, it really comes down to reviews and ratings. Considering the fluctuations in price and the multitude of floor lamps available, the best on this list comes from Amazon and Wayfair based on personal usage, peer recommendations, customer reviews, and purchase volume.

The best floor lamps: Reviews & Recommendations

These are some of the most popular floor lamps for living rooms and beyond on the market, certainly found within a room you’ve walked into. If not, it’s only a matter of time. Modern floor lamps are easy to assemble, generally fair priced, and don’t require any electrical work besides plugging something in. While we didn’t take each of these floor lamps home to make shadow puppets, we are confident they are solid buys and will perform their requisite function of providing light. 

Best overall: PESRAE Floor Lamp 

PESRAE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 70 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: Yes
  • Temp range: 3000-6000K

Pros

  • Stepless adjustment
  • Memory function
  • 1-hour timer
  • Full range of brightness

Cons

  • No reading light
  • Remote isn’t great

The PESRAE Floor Lamp is exactly what you’d think of when picturing a floor lamp. It might not have that mid-height reading light arm, but it is the top overall pick on Amazon, and that’s saying something when there are hundreds of these things to choose from. It is adjustable, dimmable, and comes with a sometimes-it-works remote control. 

But the best part of this floor lamp is not its ability to bring some much-needed light to the cobwebs on your ceiling; rather, it’s the temperature range. With a proper bulb, you can adjust the temperature range from 3000K to 6000K, from middling light to bright as the sun. Plus, it’s generally on sale for half-off, which makes the PESRAE Floor Lamp a great overall buy.

Best value: Allensville 71″ Torchiere Floor Lamp

Allensville

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 71 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: No
  • Temp range: 2700K

Pros

  • Task light
  • Adjustable arm
  • Socket switch

Cons

  • Balance is iffy
  • Low wattage reading light

The Allensville 71″ Torchiere Floor Lamp brings value to the table with its built-in secondary reading or task light. That’s two lights for the price of one. The main light illuminates the room above your head, keeping the ghosts and ghouls at bay on those especially dark nights. While the reading or task light hangs over your shoulder as you peruse the Necronomicon or just the latest book to top the New York Times Best Seller list.

Like many floor lamps in this price range, there is a general stability issue. They tend to be slightly shaky on the stand, but it’s not too hard to readjust them into a more stable position. This lamp also comes with a socket switch style on/off knob, which is much more reliable than one of those tough lamps. With its adjustable reading light arm, the Allensville 71″ Torchiere Floor Lamp is a multipurpose floor lamp that satisfies most light generation needs.

Best eco-friendly: SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp 

SIBRILLE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 68 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: Yes
  • Temp range: 2700-6500K

Pros

  • Adjustable light heads
  • Remote control
  • Touch control
  • Individual control

Cons

  • Remote range isn’t great
  • Cord gets stuck in bottom

The SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp has three individual lights that rotate 350 degrees and vertically adjust up to 180 degrees. Each light has its own controls for temperature and brightness. It’s quite a stylish little lamp, but that’s not the main selling point. Though, it should be a consideration if you pride yourself in how you compose your living room.

The true selling point of this lamp is its eco-friendliness. It uses modern LED lights rather than bulbs, which translates 36W into the equivalent of 200W incandescent. Basically, you get temperature changes from warm white to daylight without paying extra for fancy bulbs at a fraction of the energy use. For that bit alone, the SIBRILLE Tree Floor Lamp is the most energy-efficient floor lamp on this list. 

Best design: Ebern Designs 61.5″ Mid-Century Modern Tripod Floor Lamp 

Ebern

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 61.5 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: No
  • Temp range: N/A

Pros

  • Linen shade
  • Rotary switch
  • Long cord

Cons

  • Legs are tough to assemble
  • Maximum 150W bulb

The Ebern Designs 61.5″ Mid-Century Modern Tripod Floor Lamp is one of those lamps you buy when you are more concerned with aesthetics than true light. It’s a bit mid-range regarding available light, but it supports dimmable bulbs. But we’re not buying this for a reading lamp, not with those legs and the required floor space.

The legs can be a bit janky to set up based on how well the holes were bored. They just don’t make things like they used to. But whatever, it looks nice next to your well-maintained Mid-century modern furnishing, like whatever that thing is with the record player built-in. When it comes to style, you really can’t do much worse than the Ebern Designs 61.5″ Mid-Century Modern Tripod Floor Lamp. 

Best splurge: Trent Austin Design Richarson 75.5″ Task/Reading Floor Lamp 

Trent Austin

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 75.5 inches
  • Dimmable: No
  • Remote control: No
  • Temp range: N/A

Pros

  • Cool industrial style
  • Adjustable height arm
  • Solid metal 

Cons

  • 100W maximum bulb
  • Pulley system can stress the cord

The Richarson 75.5″ Task/Reading Floor Lamp is a solid lamp at a premium price. But for that money, you get a sturdy lamp with a really unique industrial design. It has a pulley system holding the lamp itself, which can stress the cord a little bit, but only if you are bumping it a lot. 

The one downside besides that is the bulb strength maxes out at 100W, but you don’t want a super bright bulb in this lamp anyway. You want one of those yellow diffused lights because this lamp creates ambiance in a space rather than just plainly lighting a room. For its sturdiness alone, the Richardson 75.5″ Task/Reading Floor Lamp is definitely a splurge worth spending.

Best smart: Dyson Solarcycle Morph

Dyson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 49.2 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: Yes (via app)
  • Temp range: 1800-3400K (docked), 2700-6500K (undocked)

Pros

  • Motion sensor
  • 3-points of rotation
  • Integrated USB charger
  • Slide touch controls

Cons

  • A bit short
  • Expensive

The Dyson Solorcycle Morph isn’t as tall as most floor lamps, but that’s a minor issue for a premium lamp with high-tech features that tower over the competition. This smart-home accessory features several very handy modes, all controlled via Bluetooth through the Dyson smartphone companion app. Use it as a glare-controlled, low-optical flicker task light at a desk or reading/studying nook, or rotate the head for some indirect light. Want to highlight some treasured art, family portraits, architectural details, etc.? Revolve it further—it adjusts at the stem, elbow, and head—and increase the brightness for a feature light, or magnetically dock the optical head above the perforated stem to bask the room in a warm, relaxing ambient light with reduced blue light.

As for where the product’s name comes from, there’s a very calming wake-up mode, which brightens the light gradually as your day begins. So it’s right there with you as your coffee does the same thing with your brain. And the intelligent day tracking feature continues morphing the light in relation to available natural light. There are also slide-touch controls for color temperature and intensity, as well as an integrated USB charger. And if you don’t even want to remember you have a lamp and just want light to appear when you walk in a room (and turn off when you leave to conserve energy/the halogen bulb), the Dyson Solorcycle Morph has a built-in motion sensor. (And it comes in a desk lamp if that’s more your speed.)

Best budget: Addlon Floor Lamp

Add;pm

SEE IT

Specs

  • Height: 64 inches
  • Dimmable: Yes
  • Remote control: No
  • Temp range: 3000-6500K

Pros

  • Adjustable angle
  • Linen lampshade
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • No remote control
  • Questionable stability

The Addlon Floor lamp has three color temperatures, from warm yellow to bright white, so it’s dimmable. It’s also quite cheap, even when not on sale. You can’t get more budget when it comes to floor lamps. And this one stands apart as it’s not a ceiling-focused bulb but rather a hanging bulb behind a linen lampshade.

The linen lampshade keeps the light, no matter the temperature, fairly tolerable. A lot of floor lamps suffer from being too bright, too in-your-face. But that linen lampshade keeps out the worst of it. Even if the frame of the Addlon Floor lamp is a bit shaky, it’s still a great budget buy. 

What to consider before buying floor lamps

Since the purpose of a floor lamp is to provide one of the most basic human indoor needs, you’ll want to consider some very light-focused options before purchasing. Of course, it’s all based on your particular needs, but it’s wise to consider whether a lamp is dimmable, how bright it can get, and the type of compatible bulb.

Dimmable

Most floor lamps are dimmable when paired with a compatible bulb. Some aren’t, and if you prefer variable light ranges, you’ll want to skip those. Dimmable lamps offer users the ability to adjust the intensity of the light, which is handy as the sun goes down or your needs change from cleaning to reading.

Kelvins

A Kelvin (K) is a unit of absolute temperature, not just a starship in the Star Trek universe. Some lamps list the Kelvin range, while others don’t. But for those that do, it indicates the color temperature range of a particular lamp. From light yellow to bright white and daylight, the bigger the range, the more available lighting options you’ll have. 

Bulb type

Outside of color temperature, several types of bulbs work with different lamps. Some lamps are limited in available wattage, while others are made with LED bulbs that never need replacing. It’s smart to pay attention here so that you don’t purchase a lamp that doesn’t provide enough light, or the inverse.

FAQs

Q: What style of lamp gives the most light?

Well, it’s less about the style and more about the color temperature range, as well as the bulb wattage. A lamp kicking out 6500K of light with a high-wattage bulb will deliver more light than a standard 100W bulb or a diffused bulb. The only thing the style of the lamp contributes to this is the direction of the light and whether the lampshade diffuses the light.

Q: Are floor lamps good for bedrooms?

Floor lamps are perfect for bedrooms, or any room without adequate built-in or overhead lighting. Bedroom floor lamps are usually fairly inexpensive, which makes them much more economical than hiring an electrician to wire in a fixture.

Q: How long do LED floor lamps last?

LED floor lamps (equipped with LED bulbs) are extremely economical, lasting anywhere from 25,000 to 50,000 hours. That’s roughly 1,041 days to 2,083 days. That’s 2.5 to 5 years in between bulb replacement. You really can’t ask for better longevity than with an LED bulb.

Final thoughts on the best floor lamps

Like sunset lamps, light-therapy lamps, and ring lights, floor lamps serve a specific purpose in your life, making them almost a standard buy-in homes across the country and throughout the world. They bring light to the corners of our homes where there is none. They are a great solution for lighting solutions when we don’t want to pay for expensive alterations to the current electrical setup in our homes. And floor lamps are generally inexpensive and extremely varied in style, color temperature, and utility to boot.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best floor lamps in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to $1,200 when you pre-order Samsung’s Bespoke AI appliances https://www.popsci.com/gear/samsung-bespoke-appliance-preorder-deal/ Tue, 09 Apr 2024 13:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609990
A samsung fridge, robot vacuum, and microwave on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

Get free setup and haul away on cooking ranges, robot vacuums, microwaves, fridges, and more during Samsung's Bespoke pre-order sale.

The post Save up to $1,200 when you pre-order Samsung’s Bespoke AI appliances appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A samsung fridge, robot vacuum, and microwave on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Getting new appliances represents one of the few home upgrade projects that’s actually fun. Spend $7,000 on a furnace or some new pipes and everything feels the same (except for your bank account). New appliances, however, can make a home feel like a totally new place. That’s especially true with Samsung’s fancy new Bespoke AI appliances. Right now, Samsung is offering up to $1,200 off its new home gadgets if you pre-order. Plus, you can also get free installation, free haul away, and extra credits if you jump on this deal before it ends April 11.

Bespoke 2.1 cu. ft. Over-the-Range Microwave with Auto Dimming Glass Touch Controls in Fingerprint Resistant Stainless Steel $429 (was $733)

Samsung

SEE IT

Find a classier way to cook a Hot Pocket. You can’t. This microwave lives above your stove and employs an internal vent system to pull smoke and cooking smells out of the kitchen. It has 2.1 cubic feet of space inside, which is more than enough space for even the most robust cooking jobs. The promotional site shows a whole turkey in there. I’m not sure you’d want to put a whole turkey in the microwave, but you could. Plus, the automatic humidity sensor helps cook things the perfect amount.

Bespoke Jet Bot Combo™ Robot Vacuum and Mop with All-in-One Clean Station® with Auto Steam $1,099 (was $1,399)

Samsung

SEE IT

This advanced robotic cleaner looks like it would belong to a Star Wars stormtrooper. The vacuum, however, has much better aim, at least when it comes to hunting down and eliminating dirt and grime. It’s both a vacuum and a mop, so it can tidy up just about any kind of floor you may have in your home. Plus, it automatically docks and empties itself between cleanings, so you can concentrate on making up an elaborate lie about how you watched the eclipse (when you were actually looking at TikTok the whole time and forgot it was happening).

More Samsung AI Bespoke appliance pre-order deals

The post Save up to $1,200 when you pre-order Samsung’s Bespoke AI appliances appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
If you buy a 2024 Samsung TV, you get another 65-inch 4K TV completely free while they last https://www.popsci.com/gear/samsung-2024-free-tv-deal/ Fri, 05 Apr 2024 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609571
Samsung QN900D TV with Blade Runner on the screen
Stan Horaczek

You can buy a new Samsung TV for as little as $999 and get a totally free 65-inch 4K TV as a little treat.

The post If you buy a 2024 Samsung TV, you get another 65-inch 4K TV completely free while they last appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Samsung QN900D TV with Blade Runner on the screen
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Lots of companies will give you something free with a purchase, but it’s not often you get a full-on 65-inch 4K TV as a little treat. That’s the deal right now, however, if you pre-order one of Samsung’s new 2024 TV offerings. Pre-order any of the new 2024 Samsung TVs (which we recently got to preview) from 43 inches all the way up to 98 inches and you’ll get a 65-inch UHD Samsung TV for free. This isn’t limited to super-expensive models, either. The 55-inch QN85D is just $1,399 and qualifies for the deal.

Click here to see all the models included in the free 65-inch TV promotion

The free TV in question is a 65-inch Crystal UHD TV that retails for just under $500. While this line doesn’t have any of the fancy Quantum Dot tech that Samsung uses in its higher-end models, it does offer full 4K resolution, the Tizen OS for full smart TV functionality, and oh yeah, it’s free.

Samsung – 43” Class LS03D The Frame Series QLED 4K Smart Tizen TV $999 (Includes free 65-inch TV)

Samsung

SEE IT

If you want the cheapest way into the free TV deal, then this is it. You get a 43-inch version of Samsung’s Frame TV, which displays high-res works of art when you’re not streaming content. You can switch out the physical frame around the TV to match your room’s design. Plus, it has one of the most impressive anti-glare coatings we’ve ever seen.

Samsung – 55” Class QN85D Series Neo QLED 4K Smart Tizen TV $1,399 (Includes free 65-inch TV)

Samsung

SEE IT

If you don’t want a Frame TV and you’d rather get something with a bigger focus on image quality, then this is your option. It employs Samsung’s high-end Neo QLED backlight tech, which improves both contrast and brightness compared to normal LED-lit displays or even QLED models. It’s a great-looking TV overall and worthy of the main spot in an entertainment system.

Samsung – 55” Class S95D Series OLED 4K Smart Tizen TV $2,599 (includes a free 65-inch TV)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

If you want to go with something high-end, I can recommend the new S95D OLED. It’s brighter than many past OLEDs thanks to Samsung’s backlight tech. Plus, it employs that ridiculously effective anti-glare coating, which helps your content shine through, even when there’s lots of ambient light in the room. It’s a fantastic-looking display and one of the best TVs we’ve seen this year.

The post If you buy a 2024 Samsung TV, you get another 65-inch 4K TV completely free while they last appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best closet organizers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-closet-organizer/ Tue, 16 Mar 2021 12:48:23 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-closet-organizer/
Four of the best closet organizers on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

A closet organizer will help you streamline your wardrobe—and your experience getting dressed.

The post The best closet organizers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best closet organizers on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Rubbermaid Configurations Deluxe closet organizer on a plain background Rubbermaid Configurations Deluxe
SEE IT

A modular option that’s easy to install and customize.

Best for walk-ins A ClosetMaid ShelfTrack installed in a closet ClosetMaid ShelfTrack
SEE IT

With shelves that can hold up to 60 lbs., this option is sturdy.

Best budget A Simple Houseware 5 Shelves Hanging Closet Organizer on a plain background. Simple Houseware 5 Shelves Hanging Closet Organizer
SEE IT

Closet organization can be yours for just $12.

Closet organizers come in all different shapes and sizes for all kinds of different closets. What works for a walk-in won’t be right for a nursery, and vice versa. The key to picking the best closet organizer and corresponding organizational accessories is to consider what you need space for (shoes? Linens? Dress shirts?), how much you want to spend, and what kind of changes you’re willing to make (e.g., are you ready to invest in an entire closet organization system, or are you just looking for some hangers to help streamline the bulk?). From bathroom closet organization ideas to stackable shoe storage, find the best organization closet organizers for you! The best closet organizers help your spaces get a whole lot neater.

How we chose the best closet organizers

Properly storing and organizing your clothes can prevent random stains and holes. It also makes your life easier (no more sniffing around for clean jeans) and keeps things nice and tidy. We looked at reviews, recommendations, and did heavy research to narrow down our picks.

The best closet organizers: Reviews & Recommendations

One little closet change—be it layered hangers, bins, hanging shelves, or drawers—can clear out your space’s physical clutter, which in turn can clear out your mind’s clutter and bring on a sense of calm. Now, let’s find the best closet organizer for you.

Best overall: Rubbermaid Configurations Deluxe

Rubbermaid

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 96 x 12.85 x 72 inches
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Mount type: Wall mount

Pros

  • Modular
  • Quick install
  • Expandable shelves

Cons

  • Hard to obtain additional parts outside of kit

All the mounting hardware you need to put this closet organizer system together comes included. Telescoping rods and the ability to add accessories to the set mean you have numerous configuration options to create the perfect custom space for your 4- to 8-foot closet.

Best for walks-ins: ClosetMaid ShelfTrack

ClosetMaid

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 36 x 13 x 78 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Mount type: Wall mount

Pros

  • Sturdy
  • Easy to install
  • Expandable

Cons

  • Some cutting may be required

This walk-in closet organizer retracts to 5 feet wide and expands up to 8 feet. Some cutting may be required for installation, but all hardware and an installation template are included. Each shelf can hold up to 60 pounds, so this is a sturdy pick.

Best for small closets: DOIOWN S-Type Stainless Steel Clothes Pants Hangers

DOIOWN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 13.39 x 14.17 inches
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Mount type: Hanger

Pros

  • Can put multiple items on one hanger
  • Multi-purpose
  • Small change that makes a big difference

Cons

  • Slippery clothing can slide off
  • Too much weight can warp hanger

This small closet organizer is durable and rust-resistant. It has transparent rubber edges to prevent clothes from falling to the floor. The unique S-shape lets you see every item on the hanger so you can pull out just what you need. It also doubles as a drying rack for your hang-dry-only items.

Best drawer organizer: Simple Houseware Closet Underwear Organizer

Simple Houseware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6 x 3.5 x 12 inches
  • Material: Polyester
  • Mount type: N/A

Pros

  • Functional
  • Sturdy
  • Flexible

Cons

  • Larger bras don’t fit

In addition to underthings, closet drawers are a good bet for anything delicate you don’t want to stretch by putting it on a hanger (e.g., sweaters). Some people with bras larger than a C-cup have reported that their bras don’t fit perfectly in these closet drawer organizers, but if you’re flexible about what you can store here, it’s a good, very affordable bet.

Best for babies: GRANNY SAYS 3-Shelf Hanging Closet Organizer

GRANNY SAYS

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 29 x 12 x 12 inches
  • Material: Polyester
  • Mount type: Hanger

Pros

  • Sturdy
  • Roomy
  • Easy to use

Cons

  • Fabric can rip if organizer becomes overstuffed

Soft hanging shelves in this baby closet organizer let you store all sorts of stuff—whether from a closet rod or freestanding clothing rack—and lightweight material means it collapses down to nothing, perfect for taking with you when you travel. The grab-and-go design of this hanging closet organizer makes it particularly easy to reach a new outfit when the little one has made an oopsie.

Best for shoes: Simple Houseware 3-Tier Shoe Rack

Simple Houseware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.2 x 26.8 x 20.9
  • Material: Metal, polyester
  • Mount type: N/A

Pros

  • Moveable shelves
  • Semi-modular
  • Sturdy

Cons

  • Not the most stylish option

This shoe rack can hold 16 pairs of shoes and even comes in multiple tier sizes in case your shoe collection grows over the years. It’s not stylish, but it will be in your closet anyway. If you’re looking for an #aesthetic option, consider this classy rack that has a wooden top and adjustable metal shelves.

Best for purses: SPACEKEEPER Adjustable Shelf Divider for Closet

Spacekeeper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 26.2 x 9.52 x 6.88 inches
  • Material: Plastic
  • Mount type: N/A

Pros

  • Not just for closets
  • Can separate base or put it together
  • Quick to assemble

Cons

  • Could be sturdier
  • Need more than one set if you have a collection of bags

Properly storing your purses can keep them in tip-top shape and looking brand new for years and years. This plastic option keeps your handbags upright and doesn’t put any strain on the handles. Plus, you can adjust the divider width to accommodate larger purses.

Best budget: Simple Houseware 5 Shelves Hanging Closet Organizer

Simple Houseware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 45 inches
  • Material: Polyester
  • Mount type: Hanger

Pros

  • Side pockets
  • Fits closets of all sizes
  • Lots of color options

Cons

  • Will break if too much weight put into organizer

If you’re just looking to add a little bit of room (especially if, say, you own a handful of T-shirts that always end up on the floor no matter how many times you put them away), a simple hanging closet organizer is perfect. It’s unobtrusive but essential.

What to consider when buying the best closet organizers

Ask yourself: How’s my current organizational wardrobe system working for me? For some of us, that system consists of one pile of clothes in the corner of the bedroom for clean socks, another in the bathroom for used towels, and many other smaller piles strewn about everywhere else (what’s in them? Nobody knows!). In these piles are different pieces of clothing—some clean, some not—and the best part is, whenever we find what we’re looking for, it is sure to be completely wrinkled.

It’s hard to imagine that there could be a better way, much less many better ways, but there are! Organization doesn’t come naturally to everyone; some of us are just prone to messiness. Adding organizational components to your closet will give you the incentive and tools to keep things tidy, even if you don’t feel a natural instinct to only hang onto items that spark joy.

Closet organization systems

Unlike a la carte closet additions, full closet organization systems do all the thinking for you and offer loads of variety. You get rods, you get shelves, you get drawers—and many are customizable, so if you need, say, more shelves than drawers, you can have that.

You don’t even necessarily need a ton of space to install a closet system, as many models are adjustable (meaning even if you move, you can take your hard-earned organizational system with you and just adapt it).

Size

Organization can happen in even the littlest places—the key is to figure out how to make the most of every single inch you have. That may mean sacrificing the ease of a furniture-like system and instead opting for individual small closet organization accessories that allow you to add space without adding bulk or making your closet claustrophobic.

Hooks, built-in wall shelves, and even special hangers should all be in your organizational arsenal when you’re dealing with a lot of stuff in a little room.

Type of closet

If you have a walk-in, a) we are jealous, and b) congratulations! On the downside, figuring out how to maximize your space when adding an organizational element can be overwhelming. On the upside, you have options and can incorporate lots of different elements—hooks, tie racks, accessory drawers—to make your closet uniquely yours.

If you’re indecisive or have trouble conceptualizing different layouts, get a second opinion from an expert before you invest in a walk-in closet organizer.

Drawers vs. hangers

If you need a place for your undies, socks, and other soft, compact items, say no more: You need a closet drawer organizer! You can place drawers on any existing shelves or sills, or just put them on the floor, a chair, or a table.

Because closet drawers are soft, they’re forgiving, which means you can probably shove more in there than you’re meant to if you’re running low on room.

Options for children

Nappies, onesies, booties, and all other soft, adorable things for a baby deserve a place of their own. A hanging component—as opposed to a dresser or other hard piece of furniture—is a good option if you want to store your kiddo’s stuff in the closet.

The best part is that you can move a baby closet organizer from room to room. So if the baby is co-sleeping with you one night and back in her crib the next, you can just move the hanging shelves with her and keep all the essentials close by. You can also use these shelves in laundry rooms for sorting laundry.

Budget

Unless you’re investing in a complex organizational system, most closet components are relatively affordable. Think of it this way: All you’re paying for is a contraption that gives order to space you already have, so many options are truly cheap.

Especially if all you need is a little added vertical space, like with hanging shelves that hook onto a closet rod or with layered hangers, you can easily get what you need for under 10 bucks. This is the best closet organizer we’ve found in that price range.

FAQs

Q: What clothing should be folded, and what should be hung up?

The rule of thumb is that if it’s something delicate or that can wrinkle (e.g. silk), or that is starched (e.g. dress shirts), hang it. Same goes for heavy formalwear, like gowns and tuxedos. If it’s something stretchy or a material that will warp under the weight of a hanger (like a knit), fold it.

Q: How do you store jeans in the closet?

Dealer’s choice! If you have the drawer space to fold your jeans and prefer a stack, do it. If you like the look of having jeans hung up in the closet—and the ease with which you can find the pair you’re looking for—you can do that too. Either option is perfectly fine for denim.

Q: How does Marie Kondo organize a closet?

The KonMari closet method is based on the idea that organization brings happiness. At its most basic, it asks you to keep any items that “spark joy” and discard everything else. Beyond that, Kondo believes in investing real time and commitment to tidying up and organizing by category: e.g., fold all your jeans, hang all your button-downs, then line up all your sneakers. It’s more complicated than that, but that’s the gist!

Q: What is the most effective way to organize a closet?

You might need to get a little messy before you get clean. First, pull everything out of the closet. Pull out what you don’t wear anymore to donate it or sell it secondhand. Then, sort the remaining items into specific categories. I personally have sections in my closet for dresses, skirts, pants, and shorts. Shirts are organized via color.

Q: How often should you organize your closet?

You should organize your closet every six months. You can stretch that out to once a year if you don’t shop much.

Final thoughts on the best closet organizers

From linen closet organization to shoe closet organizer options, there are lots of ways to declutter your closet. Whether you want to take a big step toward organizing your closet with an intricate system or just add a few organizational elements, a happier, less cluttered tomorrow is on deck once you invest in the best closet organizer for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best closet organizers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get a KitchenAid stand mixer for just $250 at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/kitchenaid-stand-mixer-deal-amazon/ Thu, 04 Apr 2024 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609435
A tiled sequence of the KitchenAid Classic Series 4.5 Quart Tilt-Head Stand Mixer.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

The powerful kitchen appliance is $80 cheaper than usual thanks to a flash sale.

The post Get a KitchenAid stand mixer for just $250 at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A tiled sequence of the KitchenAid Classic Series 4.5 Quart Tilt-Head Stand Mixer.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The KitchenAid stand mixer has been a staple appliance for home bakers for decades, known for both its build quality and longevity. We consider them one of the best stand mixers, and have an entire story dedicated to finding the best KitchenAid mixer. Amazon’s latest deal on KitchenAid’s Classic Series 4.5 Quart Tilt-Head Stand Mixer knocks roughly 25% off its price. This deal will only be around for a limited time as it’s not tied to a larger sale.

KitchenAid Classic Series 4.5 Quart Tilt-Head Stand Mixer $249.99 (Was $329.99)

KitchenAid

SEE IT

The 4.5 quart model of KitchenAid’s stand mixer is the ideal size for most apartment bakers who are short on counter space but have dealt with cramped hands when making doughs and batters. KitchenAid says its bowl has enough space for up to eight dozen cookies, so you should have no issues fitting in enough batter for a multi-layer cake or two large portions of pizza dough. This mixer has 10 speed settings. The higher ones are necessary when mixing denser foods, or those filled with mix-ins like chocolate chips and dried fruit. KitchenAid bundles this mixer with three attachments: A whisk, dough hook, and beater, which allow you to use it for most baking recipes right out of the box. You can extend the mixer’s usefulness with additional attachments, many of which are also on sale.

More KitchenAid deals to up your cooking game

The post Get a KitchenAid stand mixer for just $250 at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
These Shark vacuums and robovacs are up to 44% off at Amazon—but not for long https://www.popsci.com/gear/shark-robovac-vacuum-amazon-deal/ Wed, 03 Apr 2024 19:36:51 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609329
A Shark vacmop robovac on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

Get your floors extra clean for spring with a Shark robovac and vacuum at Amazon.

The post These Shark vacuums and robovacs are up to 44% off at Amazon—but not for long appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Shark vacmop robovac on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Vacuuming is one of my least favorite chores. I knock over a few things when reaching for it in the hall closet, only to pull it out and realize that it doesn’t have enough battery to run. Do I remember to vacuum after putting it on a charger? No! Although a robot vacuum does get your floors squeaky clean, they do an excellent job of sucking up crumbs, pet hair, and dust bunnies that accumulate day after day. That small maintenance during the week makes a big difference when doing a weekly deep clean. Shark is offering both its vacuums and robovacs on sale at Amazon for up to 44% off, meaning you can upgrade your entire setup.

Shark AI Robot Vacuum & Mop $269.99 (Was $479.99)

Shark

SEE IT

This robovac from Shark vacuums and mops at the same time—talk about killing two birds with one stone. LIDAR tech accurately maps your home, and AI laser navigation makes sure all floor space is clean without running into a corner and crying for help. You can control it via app or voice, thanks to compatibility with Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant. Powerful suction and sonic mopping clean pet- or kid-related messes so well you’ll forget they even happened.

More Shark vacuum and robovac deals:

The post These Shark vacuums and robovacs are up to 44% off at Amazon—but not for long appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best countertop microwaves in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-countertop-microwaves/ Thu, 16 Mar 2023 21:30:08 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=519179
The best countertop microwaves on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These countertop microwaves nuke your favorite Hot Pockets with aplomb.

The post The best countertop microwaves in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best countertop microwaves on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Sharp SMC1169HS on a plain white background. Sharp SMC1169HS
SEE IT

It offers all the essential features and power you want without a lot of clutter.

Quietest Best countertop microwave toshiba TOSHIBA EM925A5A-SS Countertop Microwave Oven
SEE IT

Get the power you need without the noise that wakes everyone up for your midnight snack.

Best budget Faberware classic microwave oven Farberware Classic Microwave Oven
SEE IT

This simple option leaves lots of money left over for pizza rolls.

Some food snobs may scoff, but countertop microwaves can make your culinary life simpler and more efficient. They reduce heat times, require fewer dishes, and revive leftovers in just a few minutes. The most innovative microwave ovens can even provide more convenience, with automatic programmed modes for commonly microwavable items such as “popcorn,” “defrost chicken,” or “reheat leftovers.” We appreciate a smart appliance that does even more work for us, and these are the best countertop microwaves for you and your crew to enjoy.

How we chose the best countertop microwaves

To provide a reliable list of the best microwave brands and ovens that satisfy your needs, we conducted both research and hands-on testing. We scoured the internet for customer favorites and the best microwave brands that consistently make quality products. We paid extra attention to reliability, ease of use, and quality that lasts a decade, and considered the types of microwaves you may be looking for, so you had a range of options. The models in this roundup are differentiated from over-the-range microwaves as those require a more involved installation process.

Some users may need a small countertop microwave, while others are looking for a stylish, stainless steel microwave that looks cool on the counter. We also wanted to offer a range of price points, from around $100 budget buyers to $300+ luxe models. All of the microwaves come with standard features and good brand recognition. 

The best countertop microwaves: Reviews & Recommendations

Microwaves make life easier, provided you pick the right model for your and your household’s needs. Below, we’ve collected our favorite options from what’s available on the market today.

Best overall: Sharp SMC1169HS

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When it comes to countertop microwave ovens, we love Sharp’s because it doesn’t take up too much counter space while still providing plenty of power.

Specs

  • Capacity: ‎1.1 cubic feet
  • Item Weight: ‎37 pounds
  • Product Dimensions: 14.7 x 20.6 x 11.8 inches

Pros

  • Compact size
  • Similar in power to more expensive models
  • Price

Cons

  • Wi-Fi connectivity exclusively through Alexa

Sharp’s SMC1169HS is the best counter microwave we tested because it exceeded the performance of more expensive models in many of our tests, even if it didn’t have all the same bells and whistles. When making popcorn using the SMC1169HS’ preset button, it left the fewest kernels behind. The countertop microwave raised the temperature of a mug full of water to 123 degrees in two minutes and cooked a 2.75-ounce sausage up to 213 degrees in a couple of minutes. These are the most common uses for a microwave, and the SMC1169HS had no problem handling them.

While the counter microwave’s look is understated, it doesn’t feel cheaply produced. Its buttons are responsive, the larger LEDs are easily read, and the typeface beneath its presets is bold and legible. Where ease of use is concerned, the SMC1169HS gets full marks. If you’re an Amazon Alexa smart-home platform user, you can control the SMC1169HS hands-free (once it’s connected to your Wi-Fi network) by asking your smart assistant to engage a particular setting or set a cook time.

We’d have preferred having the option to use Google Assistant as well, as this feature isn’t accessible unless you’ve gone all-in on Amazon’s platform. Still, this is an entirely optional setting and didn’t impact the countertop microwave’s ability to cook food—its primary function. If you’re looking for a powerful microwave that performs well above what we’d expect from an appliance in its price range, Sharp’s SMC1169HS is the best choice.

Best splurge: Breville Smooth Wave Microwave

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Breville’s high-end microwave can handle heating leftover pizza, meat, and tea.

Specs

  • Capacity: ‎1.2 cubic feet
  • Item Weight: ‎26.2 pounds
  • Product Dimensions: 19 x 20.43 x 12.44 inches

Pros

  • Tons of presets
  • Larger capacity
  • Large screen

Cons

  • Cost

Breville’s Smooth Wave Microwave was the best-looking by a longshot, and its user interface was the nicest to use. This high-end microwave performed okay in our popcorn test—its performance actually varied by popcorn brand—but it raised the temperature of a mug of water to 119 degrees in two minutes and cooked a 2.75-ounce sausage from the fridge to 202 degrees using its dedicated meat cooking setting. Rather than cluttering up its face with numbers and buttons, the Smooth Wave Microwave has its presets on the inside of its door. There are quick start buttons for commonly cooked foods like bacon, pizza, hot chocolate, and even a setting for softening butter.

Hitting the smart cook button will bring up a menu of additional presets for popcorn and various types of food. The Smooth Wave even has dedicated settings for both meat and chicken, and hard, soft, or frozen vegetables. This specificity will allow you to get the appropriate cook more precisely than a single preset button or just punching in a cook time. Navigating through the microwave’s menus was simple thanks to its pair of dials, and we appreciated the ability to quickly add 30 seconds by pushing “Start” button.

The Smooth Wave Microwave is undoubtedly overkill for anyone who only uses this appliance for quick reheating jobs, but it significantly increases what you can do with it. In some ways, the Smooth Wave Microwave is more similar to a smart countertop oven like one made by Brava, given all its settings. If your counter space is limited, and you can only have one or two appliances that can serve multiple functions—or be relied upon to aid or entirely cook meals several times a week—Breville’s Smooth Wave is up to the task.

Quietest: TOSHIBA EM925A5A-SS Countertop Microwave Oven

Toshiba

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This quiet countertop microwave offers a mute button to prevent the “finished” alert sound from beeping.

Specs

  • Capacity: ‎0.9 cubic feet
  • Item Weight: 27.3 pounds
  • Product Dimensions: 16.1 x 19.1 x 11.5 inches

Pros

  • Budget-friendly
  • Space-saving and compact design
  • Mute button
  • Over 13,000 positive Amazon reviews
  • Stylish

Cons

  • Closing door is still loud

If you’ve got a newborn, roommates, or simply hate the obnoxious sound of a microwave “all done!” alert, you’ll love that this quiet countertop microwave oven has a mute button. Simply hold down on the number eight for three or so seconds to shut off the sound.

This 900W microwave features a stylish stainless steel finish, easy defrosting by weight/time, six auto menus, 10 power levels, express cook buttons for 1-6 minutes, as well as a memory function and an energy-saving ECO mode.  

It’s one of the best compact microwaves, budget-friendly, and features a bright LED digital display for easy handling. With over 13,000 Amazon reviews, this model can be trusted to deliver a pain-free experience. Do note that some reviewers say shutting the microwave can still be loud, even with extra care. 

Best small: BLACK+DECKER EM720CB7 Digital Microwave Oven

Black+Decker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For tight spaces, apartment dwellers, offices, and other compact needs, this mini microwave is super affordable and comes with all the necessary features. 

Specs

  • Capacity: ‎0.7 cubic feet
  • Item Weight: 22.5 pounds
  • Product Dimensions: 13 x 17.3 x 10.2 inches

Pros

  • Compact, Small microwave
  • Child lock feature
  • 10 power levels
  • Super affordable

Cons

  • May be too small for some dishes
  • Buttons could be more sensitive

The Black + Decker 0.7 Cubic Foot 700 Watt Stainless Steel Microwave is tiny and affordable without sacrificing all the features and perks you’d look for. It has 10 power levels, a removable glass turntable, and a spacious interior that’ll fit your dinners with ease without overpowering your kitchen counter.

This portable microwave countertop model comes with Sensor technology for consistent heating results, six pre-programmed buttons, and a large LED digital display. At ‎13 x 17.3 x 10.2 inches, you can easily slide this into any kitchen or room corner.

The small countertop microwave for countertop also has a safety lock feature to ensure your children’s safety. Some downsides are the buttons may not be sensitive enough for certain users, and a tiny microwave might not fit all your larger dinner-sized dishes. However, it’s simple, practical, and a great price point for what you get.

Best stainless steel: Cuisinart CMW-110

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you love the look and functionality of a stainless steel model, this Cuisinart microwave is our recommendation.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.1 cubic foot
  • Item Weight: 37 pounds 
  • Product Dimensions: 23 x 18 x 16 inches

Pros

  • Stainless steel material
  • Useful presets
  • Express recook is handy

Cons

  • Price

If you’re doing a kitchen remodel or upgrade and want to keep the look of your appliances consistent, Cuisinart’s CMW-110 is your stainless steel solution. It performed the best in our microwave popcorn test, leaving the fewest number of kernels when using its preset button. Similarly, it raised the temperature of a mug of water to 115 degrees and cooked a 2.75-ounce sausage to 211 degrees using its meat/poultry preset. This performance is made possible by the microwave Sensor IQ technology, which measures how much steam is present to manage its cook times automatically.

A lot of what we like about our top choice microwave is present here, from the responsive buttons and large text beneath the presets, to its overall performance. However, one of the stars of the show with the CMW-110 is its stainless steel construction, which does a lot to bolster its aesthetics. Its silver front and black frame play off one another well, and make the microwave easy on the eyes. If you’d like a countertop microwave that performs well and will match your aesthetic aspirations, don’t miss out.

Best budget: Farberware Classic Microwave Oven

Why it made the cut: For less than $100, you can get a high-quality budget-countertop microwave that’s compact, space-saving, and gets the job done.

Specs

  • Capacity: ‎0.7 cubic feet
  • Item Weight: ‎22.5 pounds
  • Product Dimensions: 17.3 x 12.99 x 10.14 inches

Pros

  • Budget-friendly
  • Space-saving and compact design
  • Lightweight 
  • Easy to clean

Cons

  • Somewhat loud
  • 700W may not be powerful enough; more cooking time may be needed

This 700-watt stainless steel microwave oven is a great budget option for smaller kitchens, office spaces, or anyone looking to save a few bucks. It features six one-touch cooking options, 10 power levels up to 700 watts, a large digital screen, and even a memory function to save previous cook times for your most common microwavable meals. 

Note that 700W may not be powerful for some recommended cooking times. This is usually remedied by adding more cooking time to dishes. One reviewer noted that there’s some moisture build-up after each use, but they leave the door open for a minute or so to counteract that. For the price, it does a solid job and won’t take up a lot of space so it’s useful for an apartment or a college dorm.

What to consider before buying the best countertop microwaves

You’ll want to consider a few key factors when shopping for the best countertop microwaves:

Brand and reputation

First, look into shopping with the best microwave brands that have a consistent reputation for building quality products that last. There’s nothing more frustrating than spending $100+ on something that breaks after two weeks. This is likely one of those situations where you’ll want to stick with a brand you’re familiar with so they can offer a useful, honest warranty if things go badly.

Space

Assess your living space in order to hone in on the type of model you’ll need. For example, an extra-large model probably won’t suit you if you have a small apartment without much countertop space. Look for terms like “compact microwaves,” “mini microwaves,” or “portable microwaves,” in the description. Always look at production dimensions! It’s absolutely worth it to measure the space you expect it to sit so you can get an idea of how much room it really eats on your counter.

Smart features and program modes

There are also smart models for people who value tech-forward models. Safety features are also important if you have little ones—so be sure to look out for child lock safety modes. Most microwaves will come with standard features like auto-timed buttons or correlated times with names of popular foods like “defrost chicken” or “popcorn.”

If you find microwaves haven’t been powerful enough for you in the past, or you tend to cook items that are more involved than just a simple Chinese takeout reheat, pay attention to the Wattage for more power. The options on this list vary between roughly 700 watts at max power up to over 1,250 watts.

FAQs

Q: Do countertop microwaves need to be vented?

Yes! Because there’s metal inside a microwave, this metal can quickly become so hot that it either melts the microwave parts, fuses together, or causes burns when you touch the inside. You need to have a properly vented microwave in order to prevent excess heat from transferring to your kitchen or ruining the microwave model. 

Q: Can I put my countertop microwave in a cabinet?

Yes, as long as the necessary precautions are taken. These include: ensuring proper ventilation, the ability to hold the weight of a microwave without buckling, and wire management. Most cabinets don’t have holes for passing cables through to a power bank, so you may need to drill one.

Q: How long do countertop microwaves last?

Most microwaves last around 10 years with proper care. But, that can vary quite a bit. It depends on the manufacturer, your usage, and your willingness to do the necessary cleaning and maintenance to keep it in good shape.

Final thoughts on the best countertop microwaves

Finding the right microwave for you depends on how you plan on using your microwave, your space requirements, your budget, and your sense of style. Whether you need a quiet microwave, a portable microwave, or an extra large microwave to feed the whole family, these six microwave ovens are your best bet to choose from.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best countertop microwaves in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best memory foam mattress toppers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-memory-foam-mattress-toppers/ Sat, 18 Feb 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=512541
The best memory foam mattress toppers can help you get a good night's sleep.

Sleep better with these mattress toppers that conform to your shape and go easy on the wallet.

The post The best memory foam mattress toppers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best memory foam mattress toppers can help you get a good night's sleep.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Tempur Pedis Tempur Supreme is the best memory foam mattress topper overall. Tempur-Pedic TEMPUR Supreme 3-Inch Mattress Topper
SEE IT

Quality materials, comfortable contouring, and a removable, washable cover offer a relaxing way to end the day.

Best cooling The BedStory 3-inch is the best memory foam mattress topper for cooling. BedStory 3-Inch Memory Foam Mattress Topper
SEE IT

Dual layers of foam support and cradle the body, while a cooling gel and a breathable cover let you drift off to sleep.

Best budget Zinus makes the best memory foam mattress toppers at a budget-friendly price. ZINUS 1.5 Inch Swirl Gel Cooling Memory Foam Mattress Topper
SEE IT

This thin topper provides light cushioning and contouring but allows the body to breathe.

If you find yourself tossing and turning because of an uncomfortable mattress, a memory foam topper could help you get a better night’s sleep. Made from a space-age cushion that contours to the sleeper’s shape, a memory foam topper can help relieve pressure on the shoulders and hips or better support the back, depending on its design. The right mattress topper can revitalize an old mattress or soften an overly firm one to help you get better sleep and wake up with fewer aches and pains. Here are our recommendations for the best memory foam mattress toppers.

How we chose the best memory foam mattress toppers

Memory foam started in the space program, but today, it’s a common household material, especially in bed-in-a-box mattresses and mail-order bedding. It’s made from polyurethane foam that’s been treated with various compounds and chemicals, giving the foam viscous characteristics that allow it to change shape under pressure. It will continue to change shape slowly as pressure increases. The elastic properties give the foam stretchiness that helps it return to its original shape without damage.

I’ve worked in the sleep industry, researching and testing products. After reading numerous sleep studies and digging into what makes a great sleep product, I’ve honed in on how and what products help you get Sleeping Beauty-levels of slumber. I’ve combined that real-world experience with peer recommendations plus a look at the following technologies when it came time to make my recommendations:

Foam density: Dense foams can be soft or firm, but the denser the foam, the longer it lasts.

Cover design (cuts and grooves): If the mattress topper had a cover, those covers better be removable and washable. A cover can prevent a dirty topper, but it should be washable.

Cooling technologies: Cooling technologies like gel foam or gel-infused foam, along with the design of the foam itself, can enhance breathability. Memory foam is known for trapping heat, so the topper should feature at least one cooling technology in its design.

The best memory foam mattress toppers: Reviews & Recommendations

Finding the best memory foam mattress topper for you depends on your sleeping preferences. Are you looking for a softer landing or firmer material to support your back and neck? The following five options offer something for all kinds of sleepers.

Best overall: Tempur-Pedic TEMPUR Supreme 3-Inch Mattress Topper

Why it made the cut: This Tempur-Pedic’s performance, quality, and removable, washable cover easily make it our top choice for sleepers of all sizes and sleep styles.

Specs

  • Thickness: 3-inch memory foam
  • Firmness: Medium-firm
  • Extra feature: Removable cover

Pros

  • Removable, washable cover simplifies cleaning and maintenance
  • Foam deepens pressure relief as body heat and pressure increase
  • Dense, durable foam
  • Six sizes available

Cons

  • Requires airing out upon arrival
  • Can be warm

Tempur-Pedic enjoys a well-deserved reputation for excellence in the sleep industry. The Tempur-Pedic TEMPUR Supreme 3-Inch Mattress Topper meets high standards and delivers well-cushioned rest for struggling sleepers. It features 3 inches of Tempur material, Tempur-Pedic’s memory foam “recipe.” It’s the same foam found in their mattresses and has similar durability, meaning it will last. The foam stretches and conforms under pressure and heat, which deepens the cushioning as you sleep. That continued customization relieves pressure at the shoulders and hips but provides support for the neck and lower back.

This model also gets high marks for the removable, washable cover. Memory foam mattress toppers without a cover can easily attract hair, dirt, and dust. The cover offers protection and works as part of the memory foam’s cooling system, which offers impressive breathability.

Most memory foam mattresses and mattress toppers have a bit of an odor upon arrival. The Supreme is no different and does require some time to air out, but it doesn’t take long. While most users don’t report overheating, a few found this topper caused some overheating. However, many of those same users report that the comfort of the topper outweighed the discomfort from excess heat. You can find a cheap memory foam mattress for the same price, but we think this topper is worth the splurge if you don’t want to ditch your mattress just yet.

Best cooling: BedStory 3-Inch Memory Foam Mattress Topper

BedStory

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The BedStory’s gel-infused memory foam absorbs heat for improved temperature control and comes in three heights and firmnesses.

Specs

  • Thickness: Comes in 2-, 3-, and 4-inch heights
  • Firmness: Soft, medium, and firm firmnesses available
  • Extra feature: Removable cover

Pros

  • Gel infusion absorbs body heat for cooler sleep
  • Aeration pattern provides good air circulation
  • Multiple firmness options work for differently sized people
  • CertiPUR-US certified foams

Cons

  • Lacks long-term durability
  • Corner loops may break when used on thicker mattresses

The BedStory 3-Inch Memory Foam Mattress Topper comes in three thicknesses: 2-, 3-, or 4-inch. Each thickness offers a different firmness level—medium with the 2-inch, soft with the 3-inch, and firm with the 4-inch. It gets high marks for offering different firmness levels and thicknesses so that people of different shapes and sizes can get cool and comfortable.

The gel-infused memory foam absorbs body heat and transports it away from the sleeper. That cooling ability is supported by aeration holes that aid heat and air circulation even as the foam contours to the body.

The BedStory topper’s CertiPUR-US-certified memory foam does an excellent job following the body’s shape. To receive the certification, a third-party organization monitors and ensures that the topper was made without using substances that can potentially harm people. Even as it surrounds your body, you can rest easier knowing it’s free of things like plastics, vinyl, and toxic flame retardants.

A cover works with the gel and aeration design to dissipate further heat. Plus, it’s removable for easier maintenance and washing. Loops at each corner of the cover help hold the topper in place. The loops are helpful but aren’t long enough for the tallest mattresses and may break. One other issue noted by a few users was that, over time, the foam lost its ability to return to its original shape. Interestingly, it maintained its cooling abilities even when it wasn’t as plush as it used to be.

Best zoned: Best Price Mattress 3-Inch 5-Zone Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Best Price

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mattress stood out for the quality and design of the targeted zoning, helping it to support the body’s natural physiology.

Specs

  • Thickness: 3-inch memory foam
  • Firmness: Soft to medium-soft firmness
  • Extra feature: Lavender infusion

Pros

  • Targets five body zones
  • Soothing lavender infusion helps sleepers relax
  • Zoning design also enhances breathability
  • CertiPUR-US certified foam

Cons

  • Lacks density

The Best Price Mattress 3-Inch 5-Zone Memory Foam Mattress Topper features cuts and grooves in the memory foam to alter the density by zone. The five zones focus on the body’s most common problem areas—head/neck, shoulders, hips, lower back, and knees. The design in each area offers more or less support based on the body’s needs. For example, a spiral design through the lower back provides firmer support, while the chevrons at the shoulders allow the shoulders to sink into the topper, relieving pressure.

This type of design works well for couples with different sleep styles. For example, side sleepers get the pressure relief they need at the shoulders and hips, and back sleepers get added support through the back. Of course, because it’s memory foam, it also provides general pressure relief and contouring to relieve aches and pains. A lavender infusion adds a nice touch to this model since lavender has been linked to improved sleep quality. Users found the scent pleasant, though there’s no conclusive evidence that the lavender specifically improved sleep. The mattress topper is also available in several other infused scents. The only issue with the Best Price model is the density. Memory foams come in various densities, contributing to their firmness and durability. This foam has a relatively low density, contributing to a few early breakdown cases.

Best hybrid: LUCID 4-Inch Down Alternative and Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Lucid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The LUCID mattress topper offers three comfort options for the price of one, making it one of the best mixed-media toppers available.

Specs

  • Thickness: Two inches of gel memory foam with 2 inches of down alternative
  • Firmness: Soft
  • Extra feature: Hypoallergenic down alternative

Pros

  • Three comfort options
  • Gentle padding with soft contouring that feels like a blanket
  • Memory foam offers excellent pressure relief through the down alternative

Cons

  • Can get warm

The LUCID Foam Mattress Topper combines two mattress topper types in a single product. The down-alternative layer and the gel memory foam layer can be used separately or together, offering three different comfort options. The hypoallergenic down alternative gives the bed a pillowy feel. Combined with the memory foam, it feels like that pillow is giving you a hug. The LUCID is an excellent way to add cushioning to a firm mattress or to experiment with different sleep options to find what works for you.

Alone, the gel memory foam does an adequate job absorbing heat. However, when used with the down-alternative layer, the LUCID can get warm. Down acts as an insulator and the memory foam’s cooling technologies cannot compensate for that insulation. Heat tends to be less of an issue when each layer is used on its own.

Best budget: ZINUS 1.5-Inch Swirl Gel Cooling Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Zinus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This model’s simple design offers light contouring with good breathability for a price that most people can afford.

Specs

  • Thickness: 1.5-inch memory foam
  • Firmness: Soft firmness
  • Extra feature: CertiPUR-US-certified foam

Pros

  • Thin profile for light contouring
  • Requires three days to expand fully
  • Gel and eggshell design enhance temperature control and breathability

Cons

  • Needs extra time to air out
  • Infused green tea doesn’t cause a change in odor

The ZINUS 1.5-inch Swirl Gel Cooling Memory Foam Mattress Topper provides comfort beyond its price. The CertiPUR-US certified gel memory foam helps to absorb heat and move it away from the body. Breathability also gets a boost from the eggshell design because it leaves air pockets for heat and air to circulate.

Gel isn’t the only addition to the memory foam. This model also contains green tea, which the manufacturer claims can add antibacterial and antioxidant properties to the topper. Such claims are unsubstantiated, but that infusion doesn’t alter the odor or affect comfort.

With only 1.5 inches of foam, don’t expect deep contouring. This model features light, gentle shaping to take pressure off problem areas. The thin foam also makes this topper easy to roll up and store in a closet or attic until needed.

What to consider when buying the best memory foam mattress toppers

You don’t have to buy an air mattress while you wait for a new bed to arrive. Simply add a mattress topper to your current sleep situation. Here’s what you look for while shopping around:

Your weight and sleep style

A mattress topper that works for a friend or neighbor may not be the best choice for you based on your weight and sleep style. Heavier sleepers and those over 150 pounds need thicker memory foam to get adequate pressure relief. Side sleepers may also need thicker, softer memory foam that gives under the pressure of the shoulders and hips. Smaller people, those under 130 pounds, may find thick memory foam too firm to provide adequate contouring.

As a general rule, side sleepers need softer support, while stomach sleepers need firmer support to keep the lower back from overarching. Back sleepers fall in the middle but still need support in the low back to prevent poor spinal alignment.

Cooling technology

Memory foam is well-known for trapping body heat. Today’s memory foams perform much better than those on the market 20 or 30 years ago. However, a mix of cooling technologies usually offers better breathability. For example, a gel-memory foam perforated with aeration holes will pull heat away from the sleeper and allow better air circulation. Covers and bedding like cotton sheets can also provide extra cooling properties.

Memory foam thickness

How much contouring do you want? If you want to be enveloped in your mattress, a soft, thick 3-inch or thicker memory foam topper can feel like a bedtime hug. However, if that makes you feel trapped, a thinner 1.5-inch topper will relieve pressure without making you feel stuck.

FAQs

Q: Are memory foam mattress toppers good for your back?

A memory foam mattress topper can be good for your back. Of course, it depends on the source of the pain and the type of mattress used under the mattress topper. Back pain caused by a sagging mattress, for example, won’t go away with a topper because the topper will sag, too. However, pain that stems from a lack of cushioning can certainly be helped by memory foam. You can also buy firm or zoned memory foam mattress toppers that offer more back support.

Q: What’s the difference between gel and memory foam mattress toppers?

You can find memory foam mattress toppers without gel and those with it. The gel in the topper, whether mixed or infused into the memory foam, absorbs body heat to help cool the sleeper. There are memory foam mattress toppers that do not have gel, and therefore do not contain the gel’s heat absorption qualities.

Q: What’s the best mattress topper for lower back and hip pain?

A memory foam mattress topper can help relieve lower back and hip pain. A model with zoned support better targets these problem areas by providing pressure relief at the hips and firmer support through the lower back.

Q: Are memory foam mattress toppers hot to sleep on?

It depends on the material mix. Traditional memory foam can trap heat. However, purchasing memory foam mattress toppers with certain materials can keep things cool. Consider a memory foam topper with a top layer of cooling gel or made with a mix of a cooling material like graphite. You can also switch your bedding to those made with breathable fabrics like cotton and bamboo.

Q: How thick should your memory foam topper be?

It depends. If you’re just looking for a sprinkle of change, choose something in the 2-3-inch range. Anything that’s 4 inches and higher will be more plush.

Q: Can you wash a memory foam mattress topper?

You unfortunately can’t wash a memory foam mattress topper in a washing machine. You can vacuum it and spot-clean it with a gentle detergent, baking soda, vinegar, or dish soap.

Q: How long does a memory foam mattress topper last?

With good care, a memory foam mattress topper can last between 3-5 years.

Final thoughts on the best memory foam mattress toppers

The quality, temperature control, and washable cover of the Tempur-Pedic TEMPUR Supreme 3-Inch Mattress Topper make it stand out among the best memory foam mattress toppers. If you’re unsure of the height or type of mattress topper you want, the  LUCID 4-Inch Down Alternative and Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper gives you three options from which to choose.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best memory foam mattress toppers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Samsung 2024 TV and soundbar lineup: First impressions https://www.popsci.com/gear/samsung-2024-tv-soundbar-oled-qled-impressions/ Tue, 02 Apr 2024 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609194
Watching the Samsung OLED TV on a stand with plants
Stan Horaczek

We got a first look at Samsung's flagship 8K TV, its new OLED, and its latest high-end soundbar.

The post Samsung 2024 TV and soundbar lineup: First impressions appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Watching the Samsung OLED TV on a stand with plants
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We recently had the opportunity to spend a day with Samsung’s 2024 TV offerings, as well as its updated HW-990D soundbar and new Music Frame speakers. Overall, the 2024 lineup isn’t a revolution from the 2023 offerings, but the company has placed a clear influence on AI capabilities for features like upscaling and analyzing audio in order to emphasize dialog so it’s easier to hear through ambient noise. 

To test the TVs to the best of our ability, we spent some time streaming content with the built-in Tizen OS smart TV apps, including Netflix and other popular streaming services. We also used 4K Blu-ray copies of Alien and Blade Runner 2049 to test Ultra HD playback. 

Here are some first impressions about the new gear, with more in-depth reviews to come down the line:

S95D OLED 4K TV

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

LG has historically dominated the OLED segment of the TV market, but Samsung took a big swing with last year’s S90C. It offered all the poppy contrast and deep black levels you’d expect from an OLED, adding amplified brightness to make it more watchable in a bright room. Now, Samsung has introduced its successor, and it is making even more strides to battle back against bright environments.

The S95D employs an impressive glare-resistant matte coating to reduce reflections that can ruin your watching experience. Glare can be especially problematic for OLEDs since they typically can’t achieve the same brightness levels QLEDs or even typical LEDs provide. During our time with the S95D, we were very impressed with the brightness, color gamut, and anti-reflective properties. Shining a lamp directly at the screen from just a few feet away created a dull blob of illumination rather than a clear image of the lamp or a well-defined specular highlight (a bright light source reflecting directly back at the viewer from within the frame). 

Samsung OLED with a lamp shining on it to show anti-reflective coating
Stan Horaczek

The demo room where we watched the TV had ample ambient light, but we could still clearly make out details in dark scenes from most angles. The Pantone-validated screen predictably excels with the lights off, but the daylight performance was truly impressive. That doesn’t come as too much of a surprise as Samsung has been honing its anti-glare screen tech for years with its design-oriented Frame-series TVs

We spent most of the demo watching 4K Blu-ray content in Cinema mode. And while that’s our preferred mode for most content, the overall picture does benefit from a little bit of added brightness. If you’re blacking out your room completely, Cinema mode may be fine, but those dark OLED blacks everyone loves so much can still get a little too black without a little tweaking. 

A side view of the very skinny OLED from Samsung
Stan Horaczek

Overall, we were very impressed with the S95C, and the S95D seems like a very worthy successor. It maintains the gaming-friendly “Motion Xcelerator” 144Hz maximum refresh rate with 2.0ms lag (only available in specific modes); Samsung’s smart TV features; support for HDR10, HDR10+ (adaptive and gaming), and hybrid log gamma (HLG) HDR profiles (but still no Dolby Vision on any Samsung sets); and very fast upscaling thanks to the new NQ4 AI Gen2 Processor. 

It’s available in 55-, 65-, and 77-inch models and is currently up for pre-order.

QN900D Neo QLED 8K TV

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

While the OLED TV is flashy, the QN900D 8K TV is Samsung’s true flagship and offers the top-end bells and whistles you’d expect. Samsung is touting its new AI-based upscaling powered by the NQ8 AI Gen3 Processor. Upscaling acumen is crucial in this case since you don’t really have any native options for 8K source material at the moment. You’ll always be upscaling no matter what you watch. 

We got the chance to check out the 65-inch mode, and the 4K Blu-ray content looks spectacular, as you might expect. From an appropriate couch distance (roughly 6 to 8 feet), I don’t think the average person will notice an appreciable difference from a typical 4K display, thanks to the algorithm-based upscaling, motion-tracking (particularly useful for sports), “Motion Xcelerator” 240Hz refresh rate, and Auto HDR (with the same profiles as the S95D). The image is bright, the colors are simultaneously vivid and accurate, and it provides an overall excellent picture. Is it overkill for most people? Sure. But that’s always been part of a flagship experience. 

Speakers photo
Stan Horaczek

The panel itself is one of the most impressive parts of the whole experience. All of the HDMI 2.1 ports, etc., reside on a remote box connected by a single wire, which is something Samsung has been doing with many of its high-end TVs for a while now. (The S95D above also has a “One Connect” box.) Thanks to its flexibility, installation is relatively simple. The panel itself is wildly thin with a barely noticeable bezel (Samsung calls it the “Infinity Air Design”). In a darkened room, the image looks like it’s floating. 

QN900D TV on a stand
Stan Horaczek

Despite its diminutive thickness, this flagship TV provides fairly impressive sound. You’re still going to want a soundbar or some other home audio setup to do justice to the image, but the onboard 6.2.4-channel speaker system does an admirable job right out of the box. The TV supports Dolby Atmos with its built-in sound system. The directional audio is subtle compared to a dedicated system, but it is noticeable if you’re paying attention. The TV tracks objects as they move across the screen and tweaks the sound output to mimic the movement. 

It comes in 65-, 75-, and 85-inch configurations and is currently available for pre-order.

QN90D Neo QLED 4K TV

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

This is Samsung’s bread-and-butter QLED 4K TV. It eschews 8K but comes in a wider variety of sizes, including 43, 50, 55, 65, 75, 85, and a massive 98 inches.

The backlight includes Quantum Matrix Mini-LED technology, which allows for hyper-local dimming. It can’t quite reach OLED levels of contrast, but it does offer considerably more brightness, which is crucial if you’re battling lots of ambient light. I did notice that specular highlights sometimes cause a curious red, green, and blue halo effect on the screen. It’s not a problem in most settings, but it’s noticeable if you have a light directly near the TV, especially if you’re off the center axis.

Generally, though, the TV performs excellently. The extra brightness from the Mini-LEDs makes the Filmmaker Mode usable in just about any lighting situation. I still prefer a little bit of added brightness, but if you’re in a pitch-dark room with eyes adjusted to the dark, you can really appreciate the subtlety. 

The QN90D’s processing hardware isn’t as robust as the flagship’s chip, but it doesn’t need to be since it’s not on constant upscaling duties. You do, however, still get the AI-powered features. The voice enhancement tech really does make it easier to understand people when they’re speaking on-screen. And once again, the Dolby Atmos performance provides noticeable directionality without any extra hardware. 

We’re looking forward to spending more time with a review unit, during which we can test it in a wider variety of settings. If you want to try one before we do, every size except the 98-inch is currently available for pre-order.

HW-990D Soundbar

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

While Samsung’s TVs have received noticeable upgrades and improvements, the company’s flagship soundbar for 2024 is similar in many ways to the 2023 edition. But that’s not a bad thing. This celebrated Dolby Atmos soundbar’s hefty hexagonal hardware (say that five times fast) still delivers 7.1.2 channels when paired with its wireless subwoofer. And that channel count continues to expand to 11.1.4 when you add in the optional wireless rear satellites with their additional upfiring drivers (the configuration we wholeheartedly recommend).

The soundbar remains 48 inches long (fitting between the width of 55- and 65-inch TVs), 2.7 inches tall, and 5.4 inches deep, so measure your credenza/media stand pre-purchase. Within that 17-pound enclosure are 15 front-facing, side-firing, and top-mounted drivers in total. The sub is relatively slim for its 26 pounds, housing an 8-inch driver with a rear port and a distinctive acoustic lens. The two 7-pound satellites, which each require a power output, share design language with the soundbar’s metal grille. It’s still a Wi-Fi-enabled setup, with AirPlay 2/Chromecast/TIDAL Connect/Spotify Connect for network music streaming, as well as support for Bluetooth 5.2 for less advanced-resolution content. As for the system’s differences, the 990D’s ports are now HDMI 2.1 with 4K 120Hz passthrough and VRR, which is great for gamers. 

The Samsung 990D soundbar in front of the Frame TV
Stan Horaczek

Just because the 990D looks the same doesn’t mean it sounds the same, however. Thanks to AI (the buzzword at CES 2024 in January), the 990D has “SpaceFit Sound Pro,” an auto-calibration system that analyzes room surroundings for optimal response based on the layout of soundbar, satellites, and sub. In addition, a new Game Pro mode promises to adapt playback to different game profiles (FPS, racing, RPG, etc.). Oh, and a pro tip: Make sure the TV is set to properly passthrough bitstream audio so that the soundbar can properly decode it (a setting we had to tweak on the demo unit after an initially confusing, underwhelming minute).

We didn’t get any gaming in, but we did cycle through several Dolby Atmos albums (Rage Against the Machine’s self-titled debut was a pummeling highlight), as well as select scenes from Blade Runner 2049. There’s a sequence in the film where cars, flying through a violent storm, crash land at a seawall. Parts of the action take place above and below water, featuring immersive, operatic sound design alternating between claustrophobic and crescendo. Our general takeaway was that the 990D extracted even more intent and impact than the already impressive 990C. Even when the ambiance was meant to be crushing, there was clarity—precise imaging and clear dialogue aided by the Q-Symphony synchronization of sound and on-screen action. The subwoofer, given a thorough workout, never felt overwhelmed. The overall experience was never just a case of everything being louder; it was an ability to make everything feel larger. From flyovers to drum fills, the 990D deftly rendered a sense of spaciousness and dynamic tension.

Sound like something you’d like to hear? The HW-990D is available to purchase now.

The post Samsung 2024 TV and soundbar lineup: First impressions appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to 45% on a Hisense 4K TV at Amazon before March Madness ends https://www.popsci.com/gear/hisense-4k-tv-march-madness-amazon-deal/ Tue, 02 Apr 2024 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=609110
A Hisense ULED U6 television in a pattern on a white background.
Amanda Reed

Don't miss your shot at saving big on a new Hisense TV at Amazon.

The post Save up to 45% on a Hisense 4K TV at Amazon before March Madness ends appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Hisense ULED U6 television in a pattern on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

March Madness is coming to a close, with the men’s tourney tip-off on April 8 and the women’s championship the day before. Maybe your television was a causality in an upset or kicked the bucket at the perfect time. However, not everyone has new TV money or wants to leave their house to watch the game. You can get stunning 4K Hisense TVs for far less than their competitors at Amazon, coming to your house just in time for the final 2024 March Madness games.

Hisense 75-Inch Class U6HF Series ULED 4K UHD Smart Fire TV $629.99 (Was $1,149.99)

Hisense

SEE IT

Hisense makes our favorite television for watching sports, the 65-Inch Class U8 Series Mini-LED ULED 4K UHD Google Smart TV. Its almost $1,000 price tag is a steal compared to other models, but $1,000 is still $1,000. The Class U6HF also sports QLED tech and is Alexa-compatible, but comes at a much cheaper price tag. Support for Dolby Vision HDR, HDR10, and HDR10+ lends stunning clarity to movies and television after the March Madness trophy is awarded to the winning team.

More March Madness cheap television deals:

The post Save up to 45% on a Hisense 4K TV at Amazon before March Madness ends appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best shredders for small offices in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-shredders-for-small-offices/ Mon, 01 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=608880
The best paper shredders for small offices on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Upgrade your small office setup with these reliable document shredders tailored for security and convenience.

The post The best shredders for small offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best paper shredders for small offices on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Amazon Basics 24 Sheet Shredder on a plain white background. Amazon Basics 24 Sheet
SEE IT

This shredder impresses with powerful, quick, quiet operation but may overheat.

Best splurge Fellowes ‎Powershred LX22M 20-Sheet 100 Percent Jam-Proof Micro Cut Paper Shredder on a plain white background. Fellowes ‎Powershred LX22M
SEE IT

Our premium pick is the Fellowes Powershred LX22M with micro-cut, 20-sheet capacity, sleek design, and quiet operation.

Best value Amazon Basics 8 Sheet High Security Micro Cut Shredder. Amazon Basics 8-Sheet High-Security Micro-Cut Shredder
SEE IT

Affordable, mobile, and has a credit card slot, but only has a limited run time.

Small office setups have one big problem: limited space for all the computers, printers, paper shredders, etc., that need to fit in them. A functioning home office is necessary now that so many of us work from home or have taken on flexible working schedules. Luckily, working from the kitchen table is no longer your only option, and efficient accessories—like the best shredders for small offices—have become essential.

From selecting ergonomic office chairs and innovative desk accessories to the best paper shredder, your productivity and well-being are shaped by your carefully chosen office equipment and tools. And when it comes to protecting your identity, a shredder is an important consideration for your home or small office. Whether it’s details on the competition, company proprietary information, or financials, you’ll want to keep secure information, well, secure. The best shredders for small offices can also be used to protect your personally identifiable information (PII) like medical information, credit card bills, and banking details. Read on for our top picks and how to pick one.

How we chose the best shredders for small offices

Our best shredders for small offices are based on extensive research. We surveyed peer recommendations, critical reviews, and user impressions to create a list of contenders and then put them through their paces. Read on to find the best paper shredders that balance efficiency, security, and affordability, ensuring your documents are disposed of safely and seamlessly. 

The best shredders for small offices: Reviews & Recommendations  

Looking for a paper shredder to complete your small office setup? We’ve got you covered with the top-rated small shredder machines on the market. Let our comprehensive reviews help you narrow your options when choosing your next shredder for your small office.

Best overall: Amazon Basics 24 Sheet

Amazon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Cut Type: Cross Cut
  • Capacity: 7 Gallons
  • Special Features: Automatic Start Stop

Pros

  • Powerful 
  • Quick
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Can overheat and will then shut off

The Amazon Basics 24-Sheet Cross-Cut Shredder is a powerful machine offering impressive capabilities and advanced features to meet the demands of any small office or home workspace. 

The robust cross-cut shredding mechanism efficiently powers through documents, transforming them into confetti-like pieces. It can shred up to 24 sheets of 20-pound bond paper at a time, so it effortlessly tackles large volumes of documents with ease. It can also easily power through staples, CDs, DVDs, credit cards, and small paper clips. Its exceptional power may even be considered overkill for typical low-volume shredding needs. Still, the thorough shredding is impressive for small businesses with lots of documents to destroy and for unparalleled peace of mind.

The low noise level sets it apart; it emits a quiet hum that is relatively unobtrusive compared to other shredders. This makes extended use more comfortable and minimizes disruptions in the workspace. You won’t have to put on those headphones for work (though you still might want to for inspiration).

The shredder’s intelligent design includes a 4-mode power switch (auto, off, reverse, forward) and features such as auto start and anti-jam auto reverse to minimize and clear paper jams, ensuring smooth operation. If it overheats (which it does occasionally), the auto shut-off will protect the motor. With exceptional shredding capabilities, versatility, and user-friendly features, this shredder stands out among the best you can buy.

Best splurge: Fellowes ‎Powershred LX22M

Specs

  • Cut Type: Micro Cut
  • Capacity: 8 Gallons
  • Special Features: SafeSense 

Pros

  • Looks good
  • Large capacity
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Expensive

This shredder model is on the pricey side at almost $400, but as our premium pick, it earns its place with an impressive 20-sheet capacity and an ample 8-gallon bin. The Fellowes Powershred LX22M shredder prioritizes productivity and efficiency and has a sleek design that sets it apart from conventional office equipment. 

Real-time status LED indicators on the “efficiency meter” ensure optimal shredding and prevent you from exceeding the sheet capacity. It quickly and effortlessly blasts paper into over a thousand shredded pieces, achieving a robust P-4 security rating for dealing with even the most confidential documents. Additionally, it’s a quiet worker with one of the lowest decibels emitted among tested models. You can also rest assured that children and pets will be safe as the SafeSense setting prevents shredding when little hands or paws get too close to the paper entry. It can continually shred for up to 30 minutes for total efficiency. This model is a serious contender if you need a hardworking shredder for many documents.

Best quiet operation: BONSEN 10-Sheet Super Quiet Micro-Cut Paper Shredder

BONSEN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Cut Type: Micro Cut
  • Capacity: 5.3 Gallons
  • Special Features: Jam proof

Pros

  • Very quiet
  • Fast operation
  • Bin empties easily from the front

Cons

  • Low capacity

Equipped with a robust 10-sheet shredding capacity, this professional small office shredder effortlessly handles various materials, including credit cards, staples, junk mail, and receipts, ensuring comprehensive document destruction with ease. It offers an impressive security level, reaching P-5 standards, meticulously shredding paper into tiny confetti, and providing the ultimate protection against data breaches. It does all of this whilst making surprisingly little noise. 

Although the 5.3-gallon bin is on the smaller side, it features a visible window, offering a convenient way to know when to empty the paper. The shredder’s advanced features include a jam-proof system and overheating protection, allowing you to continue shredding for up to 40 minutes without interruption. 

The BONSEN 10-Sheet Micro-Cut Paper Shredder combines advanced security features, whisper-quiet operation, efficient operation, and a user-friendly design, making it a top choice for home and small office use.

Best for high volume: Fellowes Powershred 99Ci

Fellowes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Cut Type: Cross-cut
  • Capacity: 9 Gallons
  • Special Features: Handles large volumes

Pros

  • Quiet 
  • Fast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Expensive

If you only occasionally need to shred a few pages, you’ll be hard-pressed to justify purchasing the Fellowes Powershred 99Ci. But this hardworking powerhouse is your best option for high-volume users who need to destroy piles of documents at a time. 

With its 16-sheet capacity, this shredder is tailor-made for people with high-volume shredding needs. The “jam-proof” technology ensures that paper getting stuck will never slow you down.

Once shredded, the particles are not as small as those from some machines, which may mean this shredder is not as suitable for the most high-security requirements. However, with its blazing speed and ability to handle staples and paper clips effortlessly, it’s a productivity win.

Including wheels allows for easy mobility around the office, although its size may pose challenges in tight spaces. Overall, the Fellowes Powershred 99Ci offers a perfect blend of power, efficiency, and safety features, making it a standout choice for demanding shredding needs. 

Best value: Amazon Basics 8-Sheet High-Security Micro-Cut Shredder

Amazon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Cut Type: Micro Cut
  • Capacity: 4 Gallons
  • Special Features: Automatic Start Stop

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Mobile due to castors
  • Credit card slot

Cons

  • Limited run time 

At an affordable price point, this shredder works perfectly for home use and small offices. However, it has a short run time of only five minutes before it needs a 30-minute cooldown, which can be frustrating if you have lots of documents that you need to shred fast. 

Micro-cut shredders, like this one, also known as particle-cut or security-cut shredders, operate by diagonally cutting paper from both corners, yielding minuscule square-shaped particles that are nearly indecipherable. It easily works through sensitive documents and personal information up to eight sheets at a time. The convenient paper window lets you see when it needs to be emptied.

The castors make it easy to move the shredder around the office or even to another room. As a shredder is used fairly infrequently, the wheels also allow you to wheel it away when not in use.

And you can complete that best budget home office with our selections of office chairs under $200 and a chair mat so you can easily swivel from desk to document shredder.

What to consider when choosing a shredder for small offices

When selecting a shredder for small offices, keep these factors in mind: 

Shredding capacity

Select a shredder with an appropriate capacity to accommodate your workload without frequent emptying or jamming.

Shredding type

Decide between strip-cut, cross-cut, or micro-cut shredders based on your desired level of security. Strip-cut shredders offer basic security, while cross-cut and micro-cut shredders provide higher levels of protection by shredding documents into smaller pieces.

Security level

Consider the sensitivity of the information you’re shredding and choose a shredder with a security level that meets your requirements. Security levels range from P-1 to P-7, with higher numbers indicating smaller particle sizes and greater security.

Bin capacity

Assess the size of the shredder’s waste bin and choose one that suits your needs. Larger bins require less frequent emptying, while smaller bins may be sufficient for occasional use.

Size and portability

Evaluate the available space in your home or office and choose a shredder that fits comfortably within that space. If portability is important, look for models with wheels or a compact design for easy movement.

FAQs

Q: Which is better: micro-cut or cross-cut shredder?

Micro-cut and cross-cut shredders offer effective document destruction, but the choice depends on your security needs. Micro-cut shredders provide higher security by shredding documents into smaller particles than cross-cut shredders, making reconstructing more challenging. 

Q: How much should a good shredder cost?

The cost of a good shredder can vary depending on factors such as brand, shredding capacity, security level, and additional features. Generally, basic shredders suitable for home use may range from $30 to $100, while more advanced models designed for office use can cost anywhere from $100 to $500 or more. 

Q: Which type of shredder is most secure?

Micro-cut shredders are generally considered the most secure type of shredder. They shred documents into tiny particles, providing a higher security level than strip-cut or cross-cut shredders. 

Q: What is the maximum run time for a shredder?

The maximum run time for a shredder varies depending on the model and manufacturer. Most shredders are designed to operate continuously for a specific duration, typically ranging from 5 to 60 minutes, before requiring a cooldown period to prevent overheating. 

Q: Does a shredder use a lot of electricity?

Shredders generally consume minimal electricity, especially compared to other office equipment. Their energy usage depends on factors such as shredding capacity, motor power, and usage frequency. While shredders may contribute to overall energy consumption in an office environment, their impact on electricity bills is typically negligible. 

Final thoughts on the best shredders for small offices  

From compact designs to those with powerful capabilities, we’ve gathered paper shredders for small offices, with options tailored to meet the unique needs of your remote work setup. Our favorite overall best shredder for small offices is the Amazon Basics 24 Sheet. We chose it for its robust performance and user-friendly, advanced features. But once you weigh the options, we know you’ll find one that perfectly suits your needs.

Why trust us? 

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now. 

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best shredders for small offices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Take half off this TikTok-famous collapsible storage bin at Amazon and kickstart your spring cleaning https://www.popsci.com/gear/stacking-storage-spring-cleaning-amazon-deal/ Mon, 01 Apr 2024 13:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=608816
Amazon's stacking storage in a room with a blue wall
Amazon

You've probably seen ads for this stacking storage system all over your social media channels. Now it's just $30 at Amazon.

The post Take half off this TikTok-famous collapsible storage bin at Amazon and kickstart your spring cleaning appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Amazon's stacking storage in a room with a blue wall
Amazon

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The weather is getting warmer, which means it’s time to throw open the windows, put on your favorite Spotify playlist, and dive headfirst into spring cleaning. Nothing helps get the cleaning juices flowing like some new storage bins. Right now, Amazon has the folding storage bins you may have seen on TikTok for half their normal price. And that’s not a fake discount like so many other products. Keepa’s Amazon price tracker says it hasn’t been below $50 all year. We could barely … contain ourselves when we saw this price, and we think you’ll feel the same way.

4 Tier Stackable Storage Bins with Wheels and Lid $31 (was $59)

Amazon

SEE IT

This clever little storage station folds up nearly flat when you don’t need it. Expanded, you get four little storage chambers that measure 14.76 x 11 x 8.27 inches(23QT capacity) each. The 4-layer stacked unit measures 15.35 x 11 x 32.68in. It can keep shoes, clothes, rare action figures, a collection of little porcelain dogs you bought at an estate sale because they were adorable, but now you don’t know what to do with them. It’s very versatile. The whole stack sits on wheels, so you can move it around easily, even when all the bins are stacked together.

More organizational deals to help with spring cleaning

The post Take half off this TikTok-famous collapsible storage bin at Amazon and kickstart your spring cleaning appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart grills for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-grills/ Fri, 29 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589705
The best smart grills in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Overdone? Underdone? Be done with both with smart grills that make sure your cooking experience is just right.

The post The best smart grills for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smart grills in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Weber Genesis EX-325S Weber Genesis EX-325S
SEE IT

The gas-powered, gold standard for smart grills.

Best pellet Traeger Grills Pro Series 575 Traeger Grills Pro Series 575
SEE IT

A (meat) smoker’s dream appliance.

Best budget Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro Smart Grill Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro
SEE IT

Portability and functionality from a smart grill that’ll set you back under $500.

Many of us have made the leap to having at least a few key smart home accessories inside our home, but how about one that lives outside: a smart grill. It’s hard to beat a smart home gadget that can help deliver perfectly cooked food without second-guessing yourself or constantly reaching for a thermometer. Or requiring standing in the cold! As you’d expect, the main feature of these grills is Wi-Fi or Bluetooth connectivity to your phone via an app, which allows you to monitor the temperature of your grill wirelessly to prevent overcooking from wherever you are in or around the house. Some of the grills come with meat probes, so you can also check in on the exact state of your cook, which is enormously helpful to amateur and pro grillers alike. The best smart grills will work well even if you don’t use their wireless features but are enhanced by them.

How we chose the best smart grills

When compiling this collection of smart grills, we considered their size, fuel type, functionality, and cost. We also consulted our guides to the best gas, charcoal, and kamado grills, drawing upon the research conducted during their construction.

The best smart grills: Reviews & Recommendations

Embedding Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth into grills doesn’t revolutionize cooking with radiant heat, but it does take some heat off the cook. Whether you want to upgrade your old grill to a smart model or set up a cooker for the very first time, expertly make long cooks like brisket or just avoid sitting around waiting for the grill to warm up, you’ll find what you need here.

Best overall: Weber Genesis EX-325S

Weber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 35.5 x 30.75 x 31 Inches
  • Weight: 188 pounds
  • Fuel: Gas
  • Price: $1,079.00

Pros

  • Large cooking area
  • Side wings
  • Easily accessible temperature gauge

Cons

  • Price

Weber’s Genesis EX-325S offers everything you’d need in a smart grill, especially if you’re cooking for a bigger crowd. The larger gas grill has three burners, so you can create hot and cool zones to avoid overcooking your food, plus one “sear station,” which can get super hot to hasten caramelization. An expandable top grate gives you ample space to toast buns or keep foods warm while you cook the rest. The EX-325S’ two integrated side tables are wide enough to accommodate what you’re cooking, plus whatever other grilling tools and accessories you may need for your cook. A screen on the side of the grill shows its current temperature, while meat probes located underneath can be inserted into thicker cuts so you can monitor them as they cook.

These features make the EX-325S a fine grill whether you care about smart features or not, but it also supports Weber Connect, the company’s digital platform available on iOS or Android devices. Connectivity is available through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth, and once you’ve paired your smartphone to the grill, you can monitor its temperature and check on the meat probes you’re using. You can’t control the grill’s temperature through your phone, but can monitor it. This is the most important functionality when cooking, so it’s great to see Weber build it directly into its grills.

Weber’s Genesis EX-325S is one of the best gas grills you can get, and its smart functionality pushes it over the top. You will have to pay for its power, but it’s worth the cost if you cook often.

Best charcoal: Kamado Joe Konnekted Joe

Kamado Joe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 29 x 47 x 48 inches
  • Weight: 175 pounds
  • Fuel: Charocal
  • Price: $1,699

Pros

  • Automatic fire starter
  • Full ceramic build
  • Surprising control for a charcoal grill

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Price

The Kamado Joe Konnected Joe has taken to Mortal Kombat naming conventions when it komes to its included features. It doesn’t have a control board; it has a Kontrol Board. It doesn’t have a top vent to maintain air settings during opening and closing the dome; it has a Kontrol Tower top vent. It also has an automatic fire starter. No misspellings there. Between its Wi-Fi app connectivity, multiple cooking modes, digital fan, and Kontrolled temperature settings, you can reach precise cooking enlightenment.

It has space for 13 burgers, four whole chickens, or two pork shoulders. Or several pounds of red bell peppers. It’s your call. It clocks in at 175 pounds, but it stands on wheels, so you can move it if you need to. The digital controls are great if you are just getting into smoking, as that can be a sweaty and stressful manual process. Maintaining a temperature of 250 degrees over 18 hours for a brisket is much easier when you have an app. While traditionalists might disagree with that assessment, we just wanna eat. Relax, because it also has a classic mode that allows you to manage the temperature manually. So yeah, the Kamado Joe Konnected Joe has something for everyone, no matter your level of grill expertise, and makes a delicious addition to a smart home (just make sure you’ve got a Wi-Fi router with enough range to reach the patio).

Best pellet: Traeger Grills Pro Series 575

Traeger

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27 x 41 x 53 Inches
  • Weight: 124 pounds
  • Fuel: Wood pellets
  • Price: $799.99

Pros

  • Ample cooking space
  • 500-degree maximum temperature
  • Pellet hopper management feature

Cons

  • You still need to add wood pellets

If you don’t mind the maintenance required for using a smoker, Traeger Grills’ Pro 575 is the smart version you’ve been waiting for. Sure, there are innovative devices that bring the smoker experience indoors, but this is a proper grill with upgraded features. The smoker is large enough to accommodate 24 burgers, five rib racks, or four chickens, plus some space for sides if you use its top rack. What’s more, the pellet grill can get up to 500 degrees, which is suitable for baking, too. A built-in meat probe allows you to monitor the temperature of larger cuts of meat. The smoker was updated with a new design that Traeger says is better at heating the grill more quickly and improving the quality of its smoke. The smoker’s temperature can be monitored and adjusted using a panel on its right-hand side.

To enable the Pro 575’s smart features, you’ll need to download its app to your iOS and/or Android device. The app will allow you to monitor and adjust the smoker’s temperature, check the status of your meat probes, and set a cooking timer. You’ll receive a notification on your device when the meat probe gets up to your specified temperature, or the timer goes off. You can also switch this pellet grill’s cooking mode from super smoke to keep warm, or shut it down entirely. The most important smart feature is arguably the ability to see how full this grill’s pellet hopper is. If you’ve got an all-day cook (think brisket), you’ll want to be sure the hopper always has enough fuel, and this feature can save you from having to check manually. You’ll still need to add your own fuel—and be sure you have pellets on hand—but this feature makes using it more convenient. The Pro 575 is the best value introduction to Traeger’s line of pellet grills and may one day lead you to the flagship Timberline—the best splurge and a grill we found to be straight WiFire.

Best for large family: Weber Genesis SPX-435

Weber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 31 x 68.5 x 63 inches
  • Weight: 227 pounds
  • Fuel: Gas
  • Price: $2,099

Pros

  • Massive cooking area
  • Four cooking zones
  • Side burner

Cons

  • Price

Weber’s Genesis SPX-435 is the super-sized version of our top smart grill pick, which means it has all of the same smart functionality—temperature monitoring and meat probe monitoring—as its smaller sibling. Where the Genesis SPX-435 stands out is its size, which is immense. This is a four-burner grill with 994 square inches of cooking space, which means you should be able to cook roughly eight racks of ribs, 32 burgers, or six chickens on it simultaneously.

Need more space? Say no more. The SPX-435 has an additional side burner, which you can use to cook food in a pan. Having four burners allows you to create even more hot and cool cooking zones, and using the sear zone can get you the char and grill marks you desire. All of this power comes at a cost—this is the most expensive smart grill we’re recommending—but it’s a necessity if you’re cooking for a huge crowd during summer parties and tailgates. Don’t worry; we have plenty of less expensive gas grill recommendations, too. If you’re looking to upgrade to a smart grill with substantial space for cooking, Weber’s SPX-435 is our top pick.

Best budget: Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro

Ninja

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 22.28 x 20.03 x 15.82 inches
  • Weight: 38.9 pounds
  • Fuel: Electric
  • Price: $449.99

Pros

  • Portability
  • Multifunctionality
  • Price

Cons

  • May not be large enough

Ninja’s OG951 Woodfire Pro is our least expensive smart grill recommendation, but it’s also the only one you can reasonably carry around with you. The electrically powered smart grill can be plugged in anywhere there’s an outlet but can impart smoky flavor into your food by burning wood pellets from a hopper built into a side pocket. A fan built into the top of the grill circulates the smoke to ensure even exposure. You don’t have to use the wood pellets if you don’t want to—the grill’s heating elements are electric—but it’s nice to have the option. Speaking of options, the OG951 has seven cooking modes, which range from grill and smoke to bake and dehydrate. If you want to cook outdoors while camping, the OG951 covers all your bases.

Ninja allows you to connect to its smart grill over Wi-Fi or Bluetooth through its Pro Connect app on iOS and Android. The app allows you to monitor its temperature, change its cooking mode, enable or disable wood pellet burning, set a timer, control the grill temperature, and set up a meat probe. If you’re cooking a specific cut of meat, you can program the meat probes using presets that’ll control the grill’s temperature and other settings for you to ensure a proper cook with minimal maintenance. If you’d like a smart grill but don’t have enough room for a full-sized one (or you’ve fully embraced van-life), Ninja’s OG951 is the ideal choice.

What to consider when shopping for the best smart grill

We’ve been hibernating with smart ovens for years, and now it’s time to feel the sun again. It’s hard to beat a smart home gadget that can help deliver perfectly cooked food without second-guessing yourself or constantly reaching for a thermometer.

Size

Smart grills aren’t small or light, but that’s the price for a tool that allows you to cook for an entire family all in one shot. Most of our recommendations weigh over 100 pounds (one clocks in north of 200) and sit on wheels that allow you to move them around. We have a portable option if you’d like smart functionality from a grill you can take anywhere.

Fuel source

Smart grills can run on gas, pellets, charcoal, and even electricity. Each of these fuels has its own pros and cons, but one isn’t inherently better than the other. Smart grills that run on pellets and charcoal will impart a naturally smokey flavor to whatever you’re cooking but require you to feed them with additional fuel continually. This can get taxing on especially long cooks. Gas smart grills won’t require as much maintenance but will require you to monitor how much propane is left.

You’ll have to refill the tank once or twice a summer, depending on how often you use it. An electric smart grill won’t be as powerful as the other types, but it only requires an outlet to work. This gives you much greater flexibility when cooking. Neither a gas nor electric grill will give your cooks a smokey flavor on their own; you’ll have to find alternative ways to get that effect.

Smart features

The “smart” features that set these grills apart from their analog brethren come down to sending information from the grill to your smartphone. This includes how hot the grill is and, if you use the included meat probes, the current temperature of your cooks. It’s crucial to know this information as, without it, you can easily over or undercook your food when not paying attention. While these smart features are icing on the cake (or bark on the brisket, as it were), they don’t get in the way of a grill’s core functionality. In some cases, you’ll also be able to adjust the temperature of your grill using your phone, which can be helpful if you’re in another room in your home.

FAQs

Q: Is a smart grill a good investment?

A smart grill’s additional features can make cooking easier if you grill often. For example, getting an alert on your smartphone when the grill reaches a particular temperature or using meat probes that send a notification when your meat is ready to be removed is genuinely useful. However, if you don’t grill often, the presence of these features may not justify the high price of a smart grill.

Q: Which grill is better, gas or electric?

While both fuel sources are different, one isn’t inherently better than the other. An electric grill requires access to an outlet, while gas grills necessitate tank refills on a regular basis. Both can reach similar maximum temperatures, so you’ll be able to cook the same types of food on each.

Q: What grills can connect to a smart device?

The smart grills we’re recommending can be connected to a smartphone, as can any model advertised with Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth compatibility.

Q: How much does a smart grill cost?

This depends on its size, power, and fuel source. Our recommendations range between $449.99 and $2,099.

Final thoughts on the best smart grills

Using a smart grill won’t automatically turn you into a pitmaster, but can soften the learning curve of more complicated dishes like brisket or prime rib. Messing up an expensive cut of meat is deeply dissatisfying on multiple levels, so having a grill that can help you keep track of a cook in real-time can be a legitimate help. A smart grill is a worthy upgrade for long-time grillers who want to fine-tune their recipes with surgical precision, as well as those who want to start their grilling journey with a little extra help.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart grills for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best office chairs for back support in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-office-chairs-for-back-support/ Thu, 16 Mar 2023 21:13:15 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=518908
The best chairs for lumbar support composited
Stan Horaczek

Working from home isn’t a pain with these supportive chairs.

The post The best office chairs for back support in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best chairs for lumbar support composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The sihoo office chair for lumbar support in orange SIHOO Ergonomic Office Chair
SEE IT

The SIHOO M18 Classic Office Chair provides adjustable ergonomic features, a simple stylish design and an affordable price.

Best for gamers The Razer office chair for lumbar support in black Razer Iskur XL Gaming Chair
SEE IT

The Razer Iskur XL features a fully adjustable lumbar curve, 4D armrests, and contoured high-density foam cushions for back support and comfort.

Best budget The Devoko chair for lumbar support in black Devoko Office Desk Chair
SEE IT

For less than $70, you’ll get a comfortable, basic chair with an ergonomic curved mesh back.

With the shift to remote and hybrid work, getting an office chair that offers back support is more important than ever. Sitting comfortably for hours means you will be more productive during the day, and diminishing back pressure and pain will also help reduce strain on your body over time. So, if you haven’t upgraded yet, it’s time to ditch the dining chair or stool and invest in your home office setup. Technology advancements have made ergonomically correct office chairs easy to find and less expensive. Ergonomically correct chairs follow the natural curve of the spine and offer adjustable settings that properly align your body while working. The best office chairs for back support are designed for dynamic movement, allowing you to move freely while sitting and reducing pressure and pain on your back for more enjoyable workdays.

How we chose the best office chairs for back support

As a remote worker who experiences chronic back/neck tension, I can attest firsthand to how crucial it is to create a functional, comfortable work-at-home office. And at the heart of that is a proper office chair. To find the best office chairs for back support recommendations for this article, I initially researched educational and medical sources to understand the best practices for ergonomically correct seating. After understanding the features that make for an ergonomically correct office chair, I compared over 40 chairs from 30 brands before making recommendations. I considered cost, materials, adjustability, ergonomic construction, and customer reviews. 

The best office chairs for back support: Reviews & Recommendations

Customers with neck and shoulder pain may want to consider ergonomic office chairs with adjustable headrests, which are useful for reclined breaks to reduce neck tension. If you aren’t concerned about neck pain but still wish to support your spine properly, you can get a lower-profile ergonomic office chair that minimally supports your shoulder blades and back. Our selections include chairs with and without a headrest and many other desirable features. (Oh, and while you’re at it, consider a chair mat to make wheeling around easier on you and your floor.)

Best overall: SIHOO Ergonomic Office Chair

Sihoo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Height: 42.91 to 51.18 inches
  • Seat width: 20.87 inches
  • Seat depth: 17.72 inches
  • Seat height: 16.93 to 20.87 inches

Pros

  • Affordable list price and extra coupon savings promotion on black and orange colorways
  • Simple, streamlined modern design would be aesthetically pleasing in your home office
  • Available in three colorways: black, gray, and orange
  • Adjustable lumbar support, headrest, height, and tilt

Cons

  • Manual controls to adjust settings

The SIHOO M18 Classic Office Chair is our choice for best overall office chair for back support because it provides adjustable ergonomic features, a simple stylish design, and an affordable price. The chair price varies depending on your color preference; the least expensive colorway is black, and the most expensive is gray. SIHOO chairs retail between $179 and $269.99, including current promotions. 

You can work dynamically with the chair’s easy-to-use turning, tilting, rolling, and reclining functions. The SIHOO M18 offers many adjustments to suit your body size and preferences. You can adjust the headrest up and down 3.9 inches, lumbar support in two directions, armrests in two directions, seat height, and recline tension. 

The chair is comfortable in warmer environments since it’s upholstered with a polyester mesh material, which promotes airflow (and keeps you cool). The fabric is also durable and resistant to UV rays. You’ll be able to take breaks while working to release back pain; in fact, you can recline up to 126 degrees. Considering the price and features as well as the stylish look, we chose SIHOO M18 as the best overall office chair for back support.

Best eco-friendly: Steelcase Karman Chair

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Height: 39.125 to 43.5 inches
  • Seat width: 20 inches
  • Seat depth: 16.3 inches
  • Seat height: 15.875″ to 20.375

Pros

  • Made from sustainable materials 
  • Sleek design
  • Lightweight
  • Comfort adjustment dial added

Cons

  • Lumbar support is a separate purchase
  • Supports less weight capacity than other ergonomic chairs

Steelcase’s Karman Chair is inspired by the weightlessness of the Kármán Line, where the Earth’s atmosphere meets space. The chair is designed with sustainability in mind and is made from 25 percent recycled and 75 percent recyclable material. Steelcase uses a proprietary mesh material in this offering, combining yarn and filaments to create a weave that responds to your body and ensures you’re consistently comfortable. At 29 pounds, this chair is lighter than many options on the market but still features the same weight capacity as many similar chairs. Functionality was not ceded in the name of sleekness of sustainability.

The Karman features a mechanism that automatically senses your weight to provide the right amount of support for your back when you recline. It also boasts a new comfort dial that adjusts the chair’s tension by up to 20 percent, so you can customize it to your preference. You can also customize the chair when placing your order, choosing between height adjustability, 4-way adjustable arms, or an armless model. These options don’t impact how eco-friendly the chair is, but allow you to make choices based on personal preference and comfort. You can also purchase a cushion for additional lumbar support for an extra $57. Design enthusiasts will also appreciate the ability to choose between 13 colorways and several frame finishes.

Best low-profile: HON Office Chair Ignition 2.0

Hon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Height: 44.5 inches
  • Seat width: 20 inches
  • Seat depth: 19 inches
  • Seat height: 16.25 to 19.25 inches

Pros

  • Dynamic sitting with synchro-tilt mechanism and tension control
  • Seat back constructed with breathable stretch mesh
  • Adjustable lumbar support, arms, height and tilt

Cons

  • Manual controls to adjust settings
  • Some customers found the assembly instructions confusing

The HON Ignition 2.0 is our choice for best low-profile office chair or best office chair for back support without a headrest. For a reasonable price, HON delivers an impressive amount of adjustments, which help this chair conform to your specific height and comfort preferences. For example, you can adjust the lumbar support, chair height and armrest height, and width. The chair tilts, and if preferred, the tilt function can be locked into place. The Ignition 2.0 also has a sturdy star base and a 360-degree swivel. The backrest material is a stretchy, breathable mesh, which is both comfortable and cooling. The chair is also highly rated by users, making it a good, sturdy, classic choice for your home office.

Best for gamers: Razer Iskur XL Gaming Chair

Razer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 400 pounds
  • Height: 57.1 inches
  • Seat width: 22.83 inches
  • Seat depth: 19.88 inches
  • Seat height: 18.11 to 22.83 inches

Pros

  • Great choice for larger and taller users
  • Plush high-density foam cushions provide hours of comfort
  • 4D armrests allow users to adjust height, angle, and forward or backward preference

Cons

  • Heavy at 74 pounds
  • Separate soft tread castors should be purchased for use on hard flooring

The Razer Iskur XL chair is our choice for best for gamers because it can be used both as an ergonomically correct office chair and as a PC gaming chair. Ergonomic features include a fully adjustable lumbar curve, 4D armrests, and contoured high-density foam cushions for back support and comfort. The Razer Iskur is available in average and XL sizes, making it a solid choice for larger frames. The chair is constructed with a steel-reinforced frame for durable support. The biggest difference between this chair and other ergonomic office chairs is the extra padding and thicker back cushion. The thicker cushions are designed to support long hours of gaming but could also work for long hours of computer work in the office. This chair is styled to coordinate with the Razer line of gaming computers and equipment, so if you like the gamer tech look, this chair is a good option to consider for both office and gaming.

Looking for something far more affordable? Check out our guide to the best gaming chairs under $100.

Best with footrest: Hbada E3 Ergonomic Office Chair

Hbada

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Height: 45.2 inches
  • Seat width: 19.6 inches
  • Seat depth: 19.5 inches
  • Seat height: 20 inches

Pros

  • Ergonomic 3-zone lumbar support
  • Breathable mesh fabric supports temperature regulation
  • Adjustable headrest, seat depth and back support
  • Allows 125-degree tilt with footrest and headrest for reclining

Cons

  • Manual controls to adjust settings
  • Some customers found the mesh seating too firm with break-in time needed

The Hbada E3 Ergonomic Chair is our choice for best for reclining with footrest because it offers easy adjustability, supportive upright seating, and a comfortable place to place your feet. The Hbada E3 chair is made from a lightweight, breathable, flexible mesh fabric, which isn’t bulky (despite the added headrest and footrest). 

Building in rest is a smart solution for reducing fatigue and back pain from long days of working at the computer. Rather than moving to a different seat, this chair helps productivity by allowing the user to take rest breaks without relocating. Hbada offers two E3 models, Supreme and Upgraded. The Supreme offers 3D armrests that allow users to raise and lower and go forwards, backward, and sideways. The Upgraded armrests can only be adjusted by height. The price difference is $50.

Best budget: Devoko Office Desk Chair

Devoko

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 280 pounds
  • Height: 41.9 inches
  • Seat width: 20.5 inches
  • Seat depth: 19.25 inches
  • Seat height: 16 to 19.8 inches

Pros

  • Curved mesh chair back for ergonomic back support
  • Flip up arms for easy storage or multi-functional use
  • Rocking backrest with five-star mute rolling wheels for easy mobility

Cons

  • No adjustability for lumbar support, armrests, or seat depth
  • Some customers found the assembly instructions confusing

The Devoko Office Desk Chair is our choice for the best budget back-supporting office chair because, for less than $70, you will get a comfortable, supportive chair. The Devoko chair will allow you to roll, pivot, and lean back. You can’t adjust the settings, but for most average-sized people, this chair will be comfortable for computer work. The design brings an ergonomic back that supports the natural curve of the spine and breathable mesh fabric, which makes the chair comfortable to sit in. When you are looking for a simple, affordable ergonomic desk chair, this is a good budget option. And it’s available in three colors: black, blue, and gray. Looking for additional options? Check out our guide to the best office chairs under $200.

What to consider when choosing the best office chair for back support

With the shift to working at home, investing in products that let you work comfortably is important. Make sure the office chair you select is best for your office setup and is sized to fit your body. You can easily find an ergonomic office chair within your budget. Comfortable options can be found between $100 and $500, while high-end models retail for well over $1,000. Premium models use more expensive materials and construction, making the chair likely to last longer. Before choosing your office chair, consider these key features: 

Lumbar support

Adding lumbar support is one of the most important features of ergonomic office chairs. Ergonomic chairs are designed with a curved seat back to account for the natural curve of the spine. Many chairs offer adjustable lumbar support, which users can shift up or down for comfort, while others offer extra lumbar cushions. If the lumbar support is fixed, be sure the chair is comfortable with your back pressed against it.

Adjustability

The best ergonomic office chairs consider the shape of the spine and the best alignment for the legs, arms, and back. They provide optimal support for long days in the chair but don’t always account for the variance of body height, shape, and weight. Look for models that easily adjust the height, armrests, seat, and lumbar support, which makes them a better fit for that adjustable ergonomic desk when you change its height, etc.

Materials

The best materials will provide both cushion and breathability. High-quality foam seat cushioning will provide hours of comfort. Mesh fabrics are a good choice for comfort as they allow for airflow. Plastics and PVC upholstery, while durable, can make the chair overly warm and uncomfortable in warmer office settings. And low-density foam cushions will not hold up to years of use.

Size

Some ergonomic office chairs provide a high seat back and include a headrest, while others are designed with a lower profile. Make sure your seat is minimally high enough to hit your shoulder blades—this will ensure sufficient support for both the upper and lower back. The seat pan should be at least one inch wider than your hips and thighs. You should have at least a half-inch gap between the front edge of the seat pan and the back of your knees. The best office chairs for back support have a soft contoured seat pan with a waterfall front (one that curves down) to prevent the seat from compressing leg circulation.

Dynamic movement

Even when you’re working at your desk, you’re moving. The best ergonomic office chairs are built with the ability to shift around. Your chair should have at least a five-star base with castors that glide easily, and your chair’s backrest should recline and support your back in different positions. Dynamic sitting is better for the health of the spine. Want to try something completely different? There are always kneeling chairs that relieve pressure and help strengthen your core (which contributes to less back pain, but consult a doctor first if you have concerns).

FAQs

Q: What type of office chair is best for back pain?

The best office chair for back pain is an ergonomic office chair designed with adjustable height, swivel, and lumbar support. Look for features like a curved back, which supports the lower back, adjustable armrests, a comfortable seat cushion, breathable fabrics, and a backrest that supports your back at least to shoulder-blade level.

Q: What is the best office chair for sitting for long hours?

The best office chair for sitting for long hours is an ergonomic office chair that supports dynamic movement. Since dynamic sitting helps maintain a healthy spine, look for chairs that allow you to recline in different postures while maintaining back support, a swivel for easy movement and rotation, and an adjustable-tilt seat pan that helps maintain a balanced seated posture.

Q: What office chairs do chiropractors recommend?

Chiropractors recommend an ergonomically correct office chair to support your posture and balance your spine. Ergonomic office chairs should ideally offer customizable settings, such as adjustable height and armrests, since everyone’s body is different. Chiropractors advise using an office chair that allows your feet to be flat on the floor, your hips and knees at 90 degrees, a swivel base for easy movement, and lumbar support.

Final thoughts on the best office chairs for back support

If you work from home, chances are you spend at least seven hours per day in your office chair. That amount of sitting can damage your spine. But the best office chairs for back support come with cushioning, adjustable headrests, lumbar support, and other features that can help the workday take less of a toll on your body and look great in your office as well.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best office chairs for back support in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best toasters for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-toaster/ Tue, 10 May 2022 14:00:07 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-toaster/
Best Toasters
Stan Horaczek

Any way you slice it, a well-equipped kitchen needs a good toaster.

The post The best toasters for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Toasters
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Silver Wolf Gourmet 4 slice toaster with red knobs and thick sliced bread in the slots Wolf Gourmet 4-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster
SEE IT

The Wolf Gourmet 4-Slice Toaster is everything we’re looking for in a toaster—and then some.

Best smart toaster best toasters Revolution R180 InstaGLO Toaster
SEE IT

The Revolution InstaGLO does everything but wash your dishes. Maybe that’s the next upgrade?

Best budget Best Toasters Black & Decker 2-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster
SEE IT

Black & Decker’s two-slice toaster is a simple, inexpensive way to help you get your first meal of the day.

Toasters have been a mainstay in kitchens for decades—and for good reason. Bread is a staple in our breakfasts, lunches, and midnight snacks, and toasting makes us love it more. We love crisp, golden-brown carbs so much that companies have created foods specifically to be toasted: Pop-Tarts, grocery-store English muffins, and frozen waffles, among others. And, of course, heat can also refresh aging bread. The quest for perfect toast has to start with finding the best toasters, and these are the top ones we’ve found to date.

How we chose the best toasters

As a freelance journalist for over 10 years, I’ve reviewed home and tech products for publications such as CNN Underscored, NBC News Select, Popular Mechanics, Architectural Digest, Tom’s Guide, The Daily Beast, USA Today’s Reviewed, Apartment Therapy, The Spruce, and Bob Vila. I combined my experience with that of other PopSci writers, and we compiled our extensive selections based on personal testing, thorough research, recommendations from fellow critics, and user impressions.

The best toasters: Reviews & Recommendations

There are hundreds—if not thousands—of toasters. Picking just one assertively and with confidence can be a challenge. We’ve narrowed the choices down to just a few that we consider the best toasters. One of these should have you spreading grape jam on golden bread in no time. 

Best overall: Wolf Gourmet 4-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This toaster can fit any size of bread, toast it well, and serve it up to you (minus the platter).

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.75 x 14.5 x 11.3 inches
  • Weight: 13.22 pounds
  • Slots: 4
  • Material: Stainless Steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Bagel, frozen, one slice

Pros

  • Superlative build quality
  • Consistent toasting
  • Can accommodate extra thick slices of bread

Cons

  • Expensive

If you want the best toast, it’s going to cost you, but the results spoke for themselves. Wolf Gourmet’s Toaster is not only the best choice in its class, it’s one of the best kitchen appliances we’ve ever tested. We immediately noticed the toaster’s build quality—it’s quite a bit heavier than any other we tested—from the amount of tension in its knobs, the clinkiness of its buttons, and its serious-looking tines. The toaster grabbed onto toast, bagels, or waffles more tightly than other toasters before lowering it to its heating elements. The tines themselves are thick, which gives the literal impression of grill marks on whatever’s being toasted.

Wolf Gourmet’s toaster produced the most consistent results of any toaster we tested, with noticeable increases in browning as we increased its heating settings. It didn’t matter what type of toast or starch we were cooking; the toaster never let us down. It also performed the best at the highest heating setting, as what emerged from the toaster was still edible rather than being an overly charred hockey puck-looking mess. The toaster’s slots were also a fair bit wider than most other models, which means it can accommodate thicker slices of sourdough or heartier bagels.

At $399, Wolf Gourmet’s Toaster is the most expensive one we’re recommending, but it’s well worth the added cost if you make toast, bagels, English muffins, or similar starches daily. You’ll always get exactly what you expect, with no stuck slices that necessitate careful cajoling with a butter knife to get loose.

Best smart toaster: Revolution R180 InstaGLO Toaster

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Revolution R180 InstaGLO does everything but wash your dishes. Maybe that’s the next upgrade?

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.65 x 6.13 x 8.4 inches
  • Weight: 7.83 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings:

Pros

  • Touchscreen instead of levers and dials
  • Toasts faster
  • Smartphone control
  • Clean crumb tray reminder
  • Doubles as a sleek clock
  • Accessories for Panini press/warming rack

Cons

  • Extremely expensive
  • Only comes in a 2-slice model

Admittedly, $350 is a lot of money for a toaster—but the Revolution InstaGLO R180 is no ordinary toaster. It has a touchscreen interface that visualizes all of the controls: There are no levers to push down, no knobs or dials to turn. It has a countdown timer, so you can check how long until your toast is done, in addition to the usual chime. Select the bread type from the icons; select fresh, frozen, or reheat; select toasting level from one of the seven settings; and then press start. The screen even lets the toaster serve as a stainless-steel digital clock between uses.

The Revolution InstaGLO R180’s interface is pretty simple to use, but it still took some time for us to get used to it. The idea of operating a toaster with no physical buttons may seem absurd, but its visual indicators give you a sense of what your toast will look like at seven stages of doneness. If you like your toast well done but not burnt, you’ll be able to dial that setting in with a few taps. Selecting fresh, frozen, or reheat made a big difference in the results, too. We weren’t surprised by the Revolution InstaGLO R180’s performance when toasting room-temperature white and whole wheat bread—it costs $350, and this is its core function—but we really liked how it handled frozen bread. If you keep your bread in the freezer to extend its freshness, you can expect perfect toast every time without waiting much longer

One of our favorite features of the Revolution InstaGLO R180 is its countdown timer, which will let you know exactly how much time is left in the toasting process. The first three-quarters of your toasting will be represented by dots appearing in a circle, like a loading bar on your computer. When it reaches the end, a timer will actually start counting down until it’s done. Easily checking how much time is left until you’ve got toast is an excellent feature, and any smart toaster will need to adopt it to retain relevance.

Most toasters can be used to make the essentials—toast, bagels, toaster pastries, English muffins—but optional accessories allow you to expand the Revolution InstaGLO R180’s functionality. A panini press will allow you to make stuffed sandwiches like grilled cheese in the toaster without the risk of damaging its coils. InstaGLO R180’s warming rack will provide a surface to slightly toast the bottom of pasties that wouldn’t fit in its slots.

Other features, like the Revolution InstaGLO R180’s ability to automatically adjust the lift to the height of whatever is being toasted, are subtle but welcome touches. There’s even a smart reminder that displays on the screen when you need to empty the crumbs at the bottom, and the catch tray releases with a simple push. It really feels like using a toaster from the future. Whether the future is worth $350 is debatable, but Revolution InstaGLO R180’s smart features aren’t superfluous. This isn’t a smart kitchen gadget whose flashy features mask poor performance.

Best 4-slice: Cuisinart Metal Classic 4-Slice Toaster

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You can fully control each side of this Cuisinart 4-slice toaster separately for customized results.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.6 x 11.15 x 7.5 inches
  • Weight: 6.06 pounds
  • Slots: 4
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Bagel, defrost, reheat

Pros

  • Six toast shades
  • Removable crumb tray
  • Simple interface
  • Dedicated controls for each side

Cons

  • Doesn’t offer much feedback when toasting

Cuisinart’s Classic 4-Slice Toaster served up four slices of toast and two split English muffins with minimal effort. Operating the basic toaster has three steps: select your level of doneness on the dial, choose your setting, and depress one of its sliders. In a few minutes, we ended up with slices of bread and English muffins that were well toast edge to edge. You can control the left and right slots of this toaster independently from one another, and we’re happy to report no loss in performance when doing so. Pieces of toast in the left slots were just as well done as they were when all the slots were turned to the maximum doneness level, even when the right slots were set to a lower temperature.

This toaster’s simple interface will be familiar to anyone who’s used a four-slot toaster before, so if you’re replacing an older model, there are no tricks to learn. Small details, like the size of the text on this toaster’s buttons and knobs, make them easy to read. Its temperature knobs offer very little resistance, but it was easy to dial in the right setting after getting used to them, which took about a minute. Our only complaint with this toaster is its lack of feedback. There’s no ticking to indicate it’s on (this is obvious because whatever you’re toasting is in the slot), or dinging to indicate your toast is ready.

You’ll have to build up muscle memory to know how long it takes for this toaster to toast bread to your preferred doneness level or stay in the room while it’s working. This toaster’s lack of a doneness indicator is particularly annoying. Still, its overall performance and brushed stainless steel appearance get full marks. If you need a reliable way to make a lot of toast at once, this model will meet (or exceed) your expectations.

Best for fast toasting: Café Express Finish Toaster

Cafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Members of the microwave generation will love the hurry-up-and-finish option.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.0 x 12.28 x 8.0 inches
  • Weight: 8 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Aluminum with stainless steel finish
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Bagel, express finish, reheat, frozen

Pros

  • Push to release crumb tray
  • Extra-wide slots
  • Extra lift for waffles
  • Eight shading options
  • Cord storage

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Does not come in a 4-slice model

The aptly named Café Express Finish Toaster gets high marks for its unique “express finish” setting that engages extra heating elements to toast the bread extra fast. It’s a gamble: Pay attention when using the feature, or you’ll burn the bread. Still, the setting can be a lifesaver if you need to get out the door (or log on ASAP).

In addition to the express finish setting, there are also settings for bagels, reheating, and defrosting frozen bread. By turning the browning control knob, you can choose up to eight different settings. An LED ring on the front indicates your toast’s browning progress and will blink when ready.

Sometimes, especially when space is limited, you need to turn the toaster in a particular direction to accommodate it. The Café Express Finish toaster works especially well in these scenarios since it has a cord channel in the bottom. This means the cord can be used on the back side, left side, or right side of the toaster. 

Lastly, Cafe Express Finish Toaster is undoubtedly one of the most stylish toasters on the list. It comes in three finishes: Stainless steel, matte black, and matte white.

Best for bagels: Calphalon Precision 2-Slice Toaster

Calphalon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Calphalon Precision 2-Slice Toaster comfortably holds bagels and has enough space to brown them effectively.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.55 x 7.6 x 8.35 inches
  • Weight: 5.69 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Metal
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Bagel, defrost

Pros

  • Extra-wide slots
  • Removable crumb tray
  • LED Timer
  • Toast lift
  • Six browning settings

Cons

  • No 4-slice model

The Calphalon Precision 2-Slice Toaster has extra-wide slots to accommodate bagels and other thick bread. The toaster uses Intellicrisp technology to heat bread consistently for a more even toast. Its three buttons—bagel, defrost, and cancel—control the toaster, along with the dial that lets you select from one of 6 browning settings. There’s also an LED timer surrounding the shade dial, and this provides the browning status of the toast in the form of a countdown clock. In addition, the toast lift can elevate the toast so you can visually check it, and it’s also helpful when browning shorter or smaller pieces of toast. A removable crumb tray makes it easy to clean up crumbs, and the toaster has a durable design. It’s a great choice if you’re looking for an option with simple controls.     

Best long slot: Cuisinart CPT-2500 Long Slot Toaster

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You won’t have to cut your bread in half to get full coverage with the Cuisinart CPT-2500 Toaster.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18 x 6 x 7 inches
  • Weight: 6 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Defrost, reheat, bagel

Pros

  • Extra-long slots
  • Works as a 4-slot toaster
  • Even toasting

Cons

  • Subpar-feeling buttons and knobs

If you like to toast long slices of bread, Cuisinart’s CPT-2500 will fit your kitchen like a glove. Each slot can fit two slices of regular toast (four slices total) or one long slice of bread. It’s also handy if you want a 4-slice toaster but don’t have enough counter space for one.

The Cuisinart CPT-2500 features three settings—bagel, reheat, and defrost—and you can toast to 7 browning shades. The extra-lift feature ensures your bread won’t get stuck in the toaster, and a removable crumb tray makes the toaster easy to clean. Despite its low price tag, we were impressed by how well the toaster worked and how nice it looked. The only telltale sign that we were using an inexpensive toaster was the slightly rickety feeling of its knob, buttons, and depression mechanism.  

Putting the toaster through its paces—toasting two slices of white and multigrain bread, bagels, and frozen waffles—proved that the CPT-2500 was up to snuff. Toasting was mostly even, though the sections of our food that were closest to the center were a little less done, owing to the location of its heating elements. Getting food into and out of the toaster was easy as we never had to deal with bread becoming stuck. Similarly, our food was always cooked through, though the toaster was best at toasting in its middle settings. If you’ve got a narrow slice of counter space that can be dedicated to a toaster, Cuisinart CPT-2500 will slot in just fine.

Best with a timer: All-Clad Stainless Steel Digital Toaster

All-Clad

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The All-Clad Stainless Steel Digital Toaster has a digital countdown clock and lets you add more time to fine-tune your toast.  

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.9 x 8.6 x 8.9 inches
  • Weight: 2.10 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Reheat, defrost, bagel, more time

Pros

  • Adjustable timer
  • Digital display
  • Six browning levels
  • Crumb tray slides out
  • Wide slots

Cons

  • Crumb tray is in the back

You’ll probably like the All-Clad Stainless Steel Digital Toaster if you are very particular about your toast. It has four settings: reheat, defrost, bagel, and a button lets you add more time during the toasting process. Plus, the LED screen has a countdown clock that lets you track how long your bread has been toasting. Beyond that, it has many hallmark features we look for in a good toaster, including wide slots, six browning settings, and a high-lift lever that makes it easy to retrieve items from the toaster.

Best design: Breville Die-Cast Smart Toaster

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Breville’s toaster looks luxurious, but it’s more than just a pretty face.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.9 x 10.9 x 7.75 inches
  • Weight: 9.48 pounds
  • Slots: 4
  • Material: Stainless Steel
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings: Defrost, reheat, bagel

Pros

  • Exceptional build quality
  • Consistent toasting
  • Visual indicators

Cons

  • Pricey

True design combines style and substance, and Breville—maker of equally elegant things like our favorite latte machine—nailed the balance with its four-slice smart toaster. You won’t find a screen or Wi-Fi connectivity here; instead, we got consistent results when toasting bread, bagels, and frozen waffles. Breville tuned its toaster well, with noticeable jumps in doneness at different heating levels that correspond to our expectations. A light toasting at the first setting, even browning at the third setting, and charred at the highest setting. Another button labeled “A Bit More” plunges your starch back into the toaster’s slots for a short period of time, adding, as we expected, just a little more browning at lower heating levels.

Our favorite design features were the toaster’s buttons, which depressed with a satisfying click and featured an illuminated ring to indicate which setting was currently selected, and the LEDs above the doneness selection sliders, which change as your bread cooks. Knowing how much longer there was during a toasting cycle—especially on higher settings—was helpful, as we could prepare our jams and plates at appropriate times. This toaster is an investment, but having great toast consistently comes at a cost.

Best toaster oven: Breville Smart Oven Air Fryer Pro

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Breville Smart Oven can make toast and does a whole lot more.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 21.5 x 17.5 x 12.7
  • Weight: 38.9 pounds
  • Slots: N/A
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Crumb tray: N/A
  • Settings: Toast, bagel, broil, bake, roast, warm, pizza, proof, air fry, reheat, cookies, slow cook, rehydrate.

Pros

  • All-in-one appliance
  • Easy-to-master controls
  • Large LCD screen

Cons

  • Overkill for just toast

This is the best smart oven we’ve tested yet, and while it’s a little much for just toast, its multifunctionality makes it a great investment if you want a single appliance for multiple cooking styles. While the smart oven has over a dozen features, navigating around its interface is simple, thanks to Breville’s well-designed user interface. Selecting a setting, adjusting the smart oven’s time and temperature, and monitoring a cook is a breeze. We have used this smart oven for toast, and its use of top and bottom heating elements produced good results.

But we’ve also cooked everything from banana bread to french fries using the bake and air fry settings, respectively, and been similarly impressed. Even meat, from chicken wings to a full roast bird, cooked well. If you’ve fully embraced the smart home lifestyle, you’ll be equally impressed by Breville’s thoughtful Wi-Fi-enabled features, which allow you to monitor a cook remotely, and receive a notification when the timer you’ve set is up. This is a welcome feature if you work from home and want to make dinner in advance when working in another room.

We still recommend sticking with a toaster if your needs are more modest, but if you’d like to kick things up a notch with a multi-cooking countertop toaster oven, stepping up to Breville’s Smart Oven is the way to go.

Best budget: Black+Decker 2-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster

Black+Decker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Black + Decker 2-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster is ideal for budget-conscious buyers.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.58 x 9.09 x 12.32 inches
  • Weight: 2.64 pounds
  • Slots: 2
  • Material: Plastic
  • Crumb tray: Yes
  • Settings:

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Extra-wide slots
  • Extra lever lift
  • Seven browning choices

Cons

  • Plastic components
  • Drop-down crumb tray

The Black+Decker 2-Slice Extra-Wide Slot Toaster is a remarkably good value. It’s the least expensive toaster on our list, but it will definitely get the job done. With extra-wide slots, it can hold bagels and other thick types of bread, and an extra lift feature is perfect for pulling out items that aren’t easy to grab. Its simple controls include a control dial that lets you select one of 7 browning shades and special settings for bagels and defrosting frozen food. The drop-down crumb tray is not as convenient as those that slide out, but at least it has something. That’s a very small caveat for a comparatively cheap and very effective kitchen appliance.

What to consider when buying the best toasters

You can probably find dozens—if not hundreds—of toasters for $25 to $30. They’ll probably work well at first, but you might find yourself right back here looking for a replacement in a year or two. A bargain toaster isn’t actually a bargain if it stops working after a few hundred toasts. Plus, cheaply built toasters may be a fire hazard. 

That’s why our list is not based on the cheapest toasters you could find. When choosing the best toaster, you should consider its functionality, size, ease of operation, and browning settings. Your personal preferences may vary, but here’s a breakdown of these features, which will help you find the toaster you really want.

Settings

Since we all have preferences regarding how well we like our toast—and some types of bread require more or less browning time than others—browning settings are an important feature to consider. And with 4-slice toasters, a nice feature is the ability to control both sides separately since you may like your toast well, but your partner or kids may prefer a lighter shade.

Toasters can do more than just crisp up sliced bread. Most can toast bagels, frozen waffles, toaster pastries, artisan breads, English muffins, and many other foods you can put in a slot and heat without melting. While all of the toasters on our list have dedicated reheat and frozen settings, some may be able to do even more. For example, some toasters also have accessories for making Paninis and warming muffins on top of the toaster, while toaster ovens offer a plethora of other functions, including the ability to roast and broil entire meals.  

Size

Size matters. Two-slice toasters tend to be more compact, which makes them invaluable in tight spaces. Also, a 2-slice toaster is obviously not as expensive as its 4-slice counterpart. On the other hand, the toaster can become a bottleneck in the morning if everyone needs it at once. If you need to make toast for more than one person at a time, a 4-slice version can save you some time. 

Size is also an important consideration if you want to toast more than just supermarket-style sliced bread. For example, toasters with longer and/or wider slots are likelier to fit thick artisan bread—like sourdough, baguette, ciabatta, focaccia, and brioche.

Interior design

Another consideration is a removable crumb tray, which makes cleaning much easier. Some crumb trays are located in the front of the toaster, and some are on the side or on the back, but on models without a removable crumb tray, you’ll need to pick the toaster up and hold the crumb track over the trash can before opening it. Without a crumb tray (assuming those models even exist), you’ll have to turn the toaster upside down and shake it.  

Another convenience feature is a lift function that ensures the bread is high enough that you can get it out without testing your hand-eye coordination like you’re playing the Operation board game—except, instead of a buzzing sound, you’ll know you failed when you burn your fingers!

Ease of operation

Some toasters have touchscreens for selecting functions, others have buttons, and some stick to the classic dials and sliders. Only you can decide what feels right in your home, but it’s worth considering before you make your pick.

FAQs

Q: Do you need to do anything before using a new toaster?

Before using a new toaster for the first time, you should run it once while it’s empty to burn out any dirt and any chemicals the toaster was treated with during manufacturing. Set it to the highest browning setting, and then turn it on. Don’t be alarmed if it smells a bit–just make sure the room is ventilated.

Q: What are some tips for using the toaster?

Your toaster’s manual can teach you more about cooking than you might think. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for your specific toaster to get the best possible results. For example, different toasters have their own instructions for how to insert some types of bread. When toasting bagels, the Café Express advises that the cut side of the bagels face the outside of the toaster. However, the Black+Decker toaster from our list recommends that the cut side of the bagels face the interior of the toaster. As you use your toaster, you may also find that different types of bread work best on different settings. For example, rye bread may work better on darker settings. On the other hand, raisin bread toast, toaster pastries, and light-textured bread may fare better with lighter browning settings.

Q: How do I clean a toaster?

Before cleaning a toaster, you should first unplug it and let it cool down. Once it’s safe, slide the crumb tray out and empty it, then replace the tray. The body of the toaster can be cleaned with a damp cloth. Do not put your toaster in the sink water or a dishwasher. When cleaning by hand, avoid using scouring pads or abrasive cleaning agents, which can ruin the finish. And don’t use metal scouring pads on the interior since some of those tiny pieces can fall off and may create the potential to get shocked.

Q: Do I need to do anything before using a new toaster?

No. A toaster requires no additional equipment or access to special parts of your kitchen to work properly. The only actions you need to take before setting up a toaster are freeing up the appropriate amount of space on your countertop and ensuring the spot is close enough to an outlet.

Q: Should I get a two- or four-slice toaster?

The answer to this ultimately comes down to how much toast you expect to make or how many frequent toast eaters reside in your home. A two-slice toaster is perfectly fine for a single person looking for a quick breakfast side dish. Four-slice toasters make more sense if you’re cooking breakfast for a crowd—kids going to school need to eat before heading out the door after all. Many four-slice toasters also allow you to control the right and left toaster slots separately, which allows you and another person to use the toaster simultaneously while cooking toast to your preferred level of doneness.

Q: How long should a toaster last?

A toaster should last decades if it’s cleaned regularly and used properly. Using bread that’s too large for the toaster’s slots or neglecting to empty out the crumb tray can cause problems after only a few years. Analog toasters may last longer than “smart” models because they have fewer components that can break.

Q: How much does a toaster cost?

This depends on whether you want a two-slice or four-slice model, the material it’s made of, the level of control you have over the toastiness of your bread, and whether it’s smart or not. You shouldn’t have to spend more than $50 to get a serviceable, basic toaster.

Final thoughts on the best toasters

The toaster is a kitchen staple for a reason. Even though it’s usually a single-task appliance, many people get a lot of use out of it. If you’re a toast person, getting a great toaster can enhance the quality of your breakfast and, by extension, the quality of your day. But as we’ve seen, toasters have gotten a little more versatile over the years, with models that can accommodate larger types of bread, like bagels or English muffins. A smart toaster isn’t necessary, but touchscreens have come to this, the most humble of kitchen gadgets, without ruining it. It’s not a necessary appliance, but many kitchens don’t feel complete without a toaster.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best toasters for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best French press coffee makers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-french-press-coffee-makers/ Sat, 11 Feb 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=511150
The best French press coffee makers will help you make a great cup without the fuss.

Skip the machines, save space, and streamline your morning routine with these easy-to-use devices.

The post The best French press coffee makers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best French press coffee makers will help you make a great cup without the fuss.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Frieling Double-Walled is the best Frech press coffee maker overall. Frieling Double-Walled Stainless-Steel French Press
SEE IT

A sturdy and sleek French press with excellent insulation.

Best budget The Utopia Kitchen French Press Espresso and Tea Maker is the best French press coffee maker for a budget-friendly price. Utopia Kitchen French Press Espresso and Tea Maker
SEE IT

This affordable option can also make espresso and tea and comes in a range of sizes and colors.

Best for families Bodum Brazil makes the best French press coffee maker that's large. Bodum Brazil French Press Coffee Maker
SEE IT

A spacious 1.5-liter coffee maker for caffeine lovers.

If you love the mechanical simplicity of a French press coffee maker but have a very specific kitchen aesthetic, you’re in luck. Most French presses work the same, but there’s a look for every taste. And they don’t take up the counter space of pod and/or latte machines, etc. These simple machines use a stainless-steel plunger with a fine mesh strainer to separate your ground beans from the good stuff. It takes just a few minutes to brew, and all you need are your favorite ground beans and some hot water. You can also easily control the flavor and temperature of your morning joe with a French press. Change the amount of coarse grind for a brew strength that matches your preference. So, if you’re ready to explore the top options on the market, press on to learn what you need to know about the best French press coffee makers.

How we chose the best French press coffee makers

I have been a regular French press coffee brewer for years. I love how a French press coffee maker retains the beans’ oils, imparting a flavor that can’t be matched in a drip coffee maker. I love the ease and durability of the compact design, which uses just a few pieces that won’t easily break, even with years of daily use. Next to the pour-over, a French press is the simplest way to make coffee. To find the best French press coffee makers for new users and lifers like myself, I looked for the most-loved products from leading brands. I then ground some coffee and did personal cuppings (here’s a pro tip: start with less beans), poured over customer reviews and ratings, and drank in product descriptions to find the best for every kind of coffee drinker. Whether you’re all about a hot drink in the morning or you love your cold brew, serving a large household or just yourself, these are the all-around best plunger-style coffee makers to get your caffeine fix.

The best French press coffee makers: Reviews & Recommendations

From über-precise gooseneck kettles and scales to chemistry-lab beakers and cylinders, people are always finding new ways to perfect their brew. But sometimes, the old-fashioned, least complicated method is best. Finding the best French coffee press starts with thinking about how much coffee you want. Are you a single person looking to make one cup? Or are you looking for a device to make several cups to share along with pancakes on a Sunday morning? From there, consider whether you would like the coffee maker to be an elegant addition to your kitchen or a useful device you can take on the road. We’ve selected the best options for various uses so you can find the best pick for you.

Best overall: Frieling Double-Walled Stainless-Steel French Press

Frieling

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an exceptionally well-built French press with a sturdy plunger and double-walled insulation for heat retention.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1 liter (33.8 ounces)
  • Dimensions: 6.75 x 6.25 x 10 inches
  • Materials: Stainless steel

Pros

  • Double-walled insulation
  • Multiple size options
  • Clean pouring spout

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Heavier than other options

This is the French press that I use and have had for years. It’s built to last, and the plunger won’t easily come apart with one too many plunges. I especially love the double-walled stainless-steel construction, which keeps coffee warm for hours. The pitcher has a sharp pouring spout that minimizes drips. The two layers of fine mesh screens and stainless-steel plate ensure that your coffee stays free of sludge. Plus, stainless steel won’t impart any off flavors to your coffee, so you can enjoy the full flavor of your beans. For a deep clean, the entire coffee maker can be put in the dishwasher. All combined, this stainless steel French press is the one I declare to have the best design and durability of the bunch, making it the best splurge.

Best glass: Mueller French Press

Mueller

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The glass windows allow you to watch as your coffee brews, while the stainless-steel wrapping keeps things warm.

Specs

  • Capacity: 34 ounces
  • Dimensions: 8.25 × 7.05 × 4.3 inches
  • Materials: Stainless steel, glass

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Retains heat
  • Dishwasher-safe

Cons

  • Won’t retain heat as long
  • Can break more easily than all-stainless

This lighter-weight French press has a glass carafe inside a stainless-steel frame. The steel helps retain heat, while the glass gives you clear insight into how your brew is going. You may be able to tell when it’s time to plunge based on color alone. This machine does have a few plastic parts, including the handle and lid, so it’s not quite as sturdily made as the all-stainless option. However, it comes at a reasonable price, and the simple design means it’s not likely to break, making it our best value pick. All the parts are dishwasher-safe, and you can just as easily brew your favorite loose-leaf teas in this press.

Best for families: Bodum Brazil French Press Coffee Maker

Bodum

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 1.5-liter coffee maker is great for small and large batches of joe.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.5 liters
  • Dimensions: 5.62 x 7.12 x 9.5 inches
  • Materials: Plastic, glass, stainless steel

Pros

  • Budget-friendly
  • Dishwasher-safe
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Lower heat retention than stainless
  • Only one mesh filter

One of the drawbacks of a French press is that it has a limited brewing capacity. With the Bodum Brazil coffee maker, you can brew up to 1.5 liters, or 51 ounces, of coffee at a time, making this the best choice for large households. It’s made from glass and plastic, so you get a clear view of your coffee brewing, but it does not have quite the same heat retention as an enclosure of stainless steel. The plunger is made of stainless, however, so you won’t get any interfering flavors in your morning joe. And this large French press is entirely dishwasher-safe and easy to maintain.

Best for cold brew: Stanley French Press

Stanley

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You can easily use this well-insulated French press for hot coffee, but it’s also great for making cold brew and keeping it cold.

Specs

  • Capacity: 48 ounces
  • Product Dimensions: ​​12 x 8 x 6 inches
  • Materials: Stainless steel

Pros

  • Multiple color options
  • Ergonomic handle
  • Dishwasher-safe

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Any slight overfilling may cause a spill

This French press is a great option if you prefer the smoother, less acidic flavor of long, slow, cold-brewed coffee (not to be confused with iced coffee). It’s made from double-walled 18/8 stainless steel that keeps liquid cold for up to 9 hours, or up to 24 if you add ice. Of course, it still works for hot drinks and will retain heat for up to 4 hours. The coffee maker is also highly durable and portable, ideal to bring camping or on an RV trip. It has a sturdy ergonomic handle, and the plunger is also stainless steel.

Best portable: ESPRO P0 Ultralight French Press

ESPRO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This portable, lightweight, single-serving option makes it easy to take your favorite beans and coffee maker on the go.

Specs

  • Capacity: 16 ounces
  • Dimensions: 2.9 x 2.9 x 9.2 inches
  • Materials: Stainless steel

Pros

  • Double-walled stainless steel
  • Multiple color options
  • Carrying handle

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Only large enough for one

If you don’t need to share your coffee, this insulated French press is all you need. Its 16-ounce capacity is the perfect size for one, and its lightweight construction makes it great for travel. The mug has a tight-fitting lid with a handle for comfortable transport and no spills. Plus, the double-walled stainless steel design keeps things hot for hours. This French press also has a double microfilter that prevents grit from sneaking into your sips. And if you’re camping with a crew, everyone can get their own color to keep their travel mugs separate. These mugs are top-rack dishwasher-safe. The brand also makes an all-steel competitor to our best overall pick, albeit ones that are 18/32 ounces, not 44.

Best budget: Utopia Kitchen French Press Espresso and Tea Maker

Utopia Kitchen

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This versatile option comes in various sizes and colors and goes easy on the wallet. 

Specs

  • Capacity: 12 ounces, 34 ounces, 51 ounces
  • Dimensions: 9 inches x 6 inches x 6 inches 
  • Materials: Stainless steel and glass

Pros

  • Comes in a range of sizes
  • Makes espresso and tea
  • Comes in nine colors

Cons

  • Not transportable
  • No insulation

If you prefer a simple glass French press coffee maker that’s both budget-friendly and multipurpose, consider the Utopia Kitchen French Press Espresso and Tea Maker. First, this device also makes espresso and tea in addition to coffee. It also comes in three sizes—12 ounces, 34 ounces, 51 ounces—allowing users to choose an option for an individual, couple, or family. Made with long-lasting stainless steel and glass, the Utopia Kitchen French press coffee maker is also available in various colors, from classic black and gray to aqua and plum. And when you’re done brewing, clean up is easy, as this option is also dishwasher-safe. 

Also worth considering: Fellow Clara Insulated Coffee Maker with Enhanced Filtration System

Fellow

SEE IT

If matte minimalism is your thing and you want Instagram-worthy accessories—the fiddle leaf fern of coffee products—then you want Fellow. The brand’s Stagg EKG Pro Studio Electric Gooseneck Kettle is one of our top gift suggestions for the hot beverage-obsessed, and this sleek 24-ounce cylinder offers one of the best places to deposit that perfectly warmed water. Stainless steel for heat retention, with an agitation stick/plunger to ensure even extraction, the Fellow Clara French press and its enhanced filtration mesh gives you all the clean, complex flavors with none of the sludge/silt. And it looks good doing it.

Things to consider when buying the best French press coffee maker

Materials

The right material for your French press can depend on temperature retention. Stainless steel is the best at insulating heat and is more durable than breakable glass. But if you’re more of a cold-brew person, you may prefer the see-through nature of glass or plastic.

Size

If you often brew coffee for a crowd, a larger (one liter or more) coffee maker will be handy, so you don’t have to brew multiple pots in a row. On the other hand, if you want something portable and just big enough for you, a 16-ounce French press will do the trick. For serving two to four people, a one-liter capacity is sufficient.

Portability

Most French press coffee makers do not have an air- or watertight lid. So, if you want something that’s safe to bring in a car or RV, opt for a travel-ready coffee maker like the single-serving mug from ESPRO. Other pitcher-style carafes are likely to spill.

FAQs

Q: What can I make in a French press?

You can make any kind of coffee using ground beans. Add hot water for hot coffee or cold for cold brew (it will just take substantially longer, potentially overnight). You can also make tea by adding loose-leaf tea to the pitcher with water. Or try making an infusion with fresh fruit or veggies, such as lemon and cucumber slices, plus water. Leave it in the fridge for a few hours, then plunge to make delicious spa water at home. 

Q: How long should I brew coffee in a French press?

For hot coffee, you only need to brew the beans for about four to eight minutes in 200-degree water before pressing the plunger (if you don’t have a temperature-controlled electric kettle, just bring water to a boil, then immediately take it off the heat to rest for about one minute). For cold brew, you’ll want at least 8 hours. 

Q: How do I clean a French press?

The great thing about the simple design of these manual coffee makers is that there are no hard-to-clean electrical parts. In most cases, the materials are not fragile, so they can be cleaned right in the dishwasher. For everyday use, you can simply dump the grounds and rinse and dry the carafe.

Final thoughts on the best French press coffee makers

A French press is a great low-tech, low-profile solution to brewing high-flavor coffee at home. You’ll have total control over your morning drink’s taste, strength, and temperature, whether you enjoy it at the kitchen table, on the couch, or to-go in your favorite coffee travel mug. A French press is a great-looking, easily mastered appliance that will last for years, no matter how many cups you brew daily.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best French press coffee makers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Breville makes our favorite smart ovens and they’re all 20% off at Amazon right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/breville-smart-oven-amazon-deal/ Thu, 28 Mar 2024 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=608369
The Breville Pizza Oven next to the Breville Smart Oven on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

Get our top-rated smart oven that does way more than air fryer for 20 percent off right now at Amazon.

The post Breville makes our favorite smart ovens and they’re all 20% off at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Breville Pizza Oven next to the Breville Smart Oven on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Going out to eat has gotten ridiculously expensive. Have you seen the price of a fast food hash brown lately? Jump scare. That’s why it makes so much sense to invest in a good air fryer. Live out your chicken finger fantasies on a chicken nugget budget. The Breville Smart Ovens are our favorite air fryers and right now Amazon has a variety of them for 20 percent off. The sale also includes an indoor pizza oven if you want to kick that late-night delivery app habit.

Breville Smart Oven Air Fryer $279 (was $349)

Breville

SEE IT

Sure, you can slap a basket full of curly fries into this sucker and air fry them to perfection, but Breville’s Smart Oven can do a lot more. You can broil, bake, toast, slow cook, or warm. It even has a dedicated cookies mode if you’re craving a snickerdoodle. It’s a large countertop oven, so you could cook an entire chicken inside if you wanted. Or, just buy a rotisserie chicken from Costco and then invite some people over for a dinner party. When you take the chicken out, everyone will totally believe that you made it.

Breville Smart Oven Pizzaiolo $799 (was $999)

Breville

SEE IT

Yes, it’s still an up-front cost, but this dedicated pizza oven is a truly unique addition to your kitchen. It can quickly reach up to 750 degrees, meaning you can cook a typical pizza in less than two minutes. Plus, the oven allows you to tweak your cooking settings, so you can make thin crust, Detroit-style, Sicilian, or even Cincinnati-style (which is regular pizza, but it has a bunch of spaghetti and chili on top of it).

More Breville smart oven and pizza oven deals:

The post Breville makes our favorite smart ovens and they’re all 20% off at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-solar-generators/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=421868
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

Tap the power of the sun to meet your power needs wherever you may roam.

The post The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus
SEE IT

This is a solid all-around mix of features and affordability.

Best for camping Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Portable Generator Review Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
SEE IT

This powerful pack is easy to transport to a site.

Best for homes EcoFlow Delta Pro portable generator review EcoFlow Delta Pro
SEE IT

This is the pick if you need lots of scalable capacity.

You don’t want to wait until you need a solar generator to buy one. Whether you’re trying to live the van life, prepare for emergencies, or just bring some creature comforts with you when you go camping. Whatever the case, few things are as useful in today’s tech-driven world as a source of reliable, renewable power. The best solar generators can reliably and sustainably meet various energy needs, and we have tested and compared the best models to find which one fits your needs.

How we chose the best solar generators

As an avid outdoorsman, I’ve had the opportunity to test an extremely wide range of outdoor gear, including mobile and off-grid electrification equipment like solar-powered generators, as well as inverter and dual-fuel generators. These became particularly essential when the pandemic forced my travels to become domestic rather than international, which prompted me to outfit a van for long-term road-tripping

To bring my work along for the ride, I needed a constant power source to charge my laptop, a portable fridge, lighting, and a myriad of devices and tools … even the best electric bikes. As a result, I’ve tried all the leading portable power stations (and plenty that aren’t leading, too), so I know precisely what separates the best from the blah. I’ve written all about it (and other outdoor tech) for publications, including the Daily Beast, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. There were cases when my own opinion resulted in a tie, and I, therefore, looked to reviews from actual customers to determine which solar generators delivered the most satisfaction to the most users.

The best solar generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The solar generators on this list span a wide range of budgets, from a few hundred dollars to a few thousand. They span several use cases, from camping to a backup for your home. Only you know all the factors that make one of these the best solar generator for you, but we think that one of these will get the job done.

Best overall: Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It offers just about everything from our previous best overall pick with the added benefits of LiFePO4 battery power.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,042.8Wh (expandable up to 24,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 6,000w
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.7 x 14.1 inches
  • Weight: 61 pounds
  • Price: $2,199

Pros

  • Charges quickly
  • Very high output that can run power-hungry devices
  • Built-in wheels and handle
  • Clear display
  • Four AC outlets
  • Expandable with extra batteries
  • Long life batteries

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Slightly less capacity than our previous pick

As new solar generators hit the market, many come toting new lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4) batteries instead of the familiar lithium-ion batteries that came before. LiFePO4 offers a few advantages, including a much longer lifespan as you charge and discharge them. They’re also safer and often faster to charge. They do typically add some weight, however. Just about all of those modifiers apply here in the form of the Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus.

The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus can power current-hungry devices at up to 6000w, so even if you want to power a welder, you can. The battery will only last you about a half hour doing this (we tried it), but it does work, and that’s more than many other models can say. I also got to test the Explorer 2000 Plus during a real power outage. It kept our router running for several hours to maintain connectivity.

This model has 2kWh of storage built-in, but you can expand that capacity with extra external daisy-chained batteries. It gives a total max storage of up to 24kWh—enough for a serious off-grid job. The optional solar panels charge the battery quickly and efficiently. Jackery claims roughly two hours of charging time via the optional solar panels, and I found it took more like 2.5 hours, but that includes battling some passing clouds. With two straight hours of direct sun, it could likely get the job done.

A look at the Jackery 2000 Plus solar generator with its handle extended
The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus handle and integrated wheels make it considerably easier to move around. Stan Horaczek

At 61 pounds, this is considerably heavier than the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, which weighs nearly 20 pounds less. But, the integrated wheels, handle, and chunky grips to either side of the box make it very easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily set it in the back of my wife’s Honda Civic.

The switch to LiFePo4 also means that this unit will last a long time before the battery degrades beyond its usable range. The company claims it will take 4,000 cycles before the battery life degrades to 70 percent. We obviously haven’t had time to test that yet, but that is the nature of LiFePo4, so it will almost certainly last longer than a lithium-ion model at least.

Still great: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This Jackery solar generator delivers the best blend of capacity, input/output capability, portability, and durability.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,200W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Price: $2,498

Pros

  • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
  • Durable and easy to use
  • Plenty of ports
  • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

Cons

  • Heavy for its size

The biggest portable power station from Jackery, a leading solar generator manufacturer, the Explorer 2000 Pro offers a tremendous 2,160 watt-hours of power, making it capable of charging a full camping setup for a few days. When plugged into six 200W solar panels, an upgrade over the four-panel setup available on the Jackery Explorer 1500, you can fully charge this portable power station in just 2-2.5 hours. That’s less than half the time of the smaller model.

On top of all that, it’s extremely user-friendly. Numerous output ports ensure that you can plug in a wide range of devices and electrical equipment. Its functions are highly intuitive, and the digital display is easy to understand. Like other Jackery generators, it’s incredibly durable, too. The one potential downside is its weight: At 43 pounds, it’s a bit heavy for its size. Even so, for all the power you can store, and the rapid-charging time, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro will keep the lights on wherever you need power.

For more on the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, check out our full review.

Best high-capacity: Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,024Wh
  • Output capacity: 3,000W
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
  • Weight: 63.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,799

Pros

  • Ample power storage for long trips or outages
  • Sturdy handles and wheels make it easy to move
  • Smooth design makes it easy to load and unload
  • High peak output for power-intensive tasks
  • Lots of ports for connectivity

Cons

  • 200W solar panels can be klunky
  • Relatively pricey

This is the big sibling to our best overall pick. Inside the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro, you’ll find 3,024Wh of power storage, which is enough to power even large devices for extended periods of time. It can charge a high-end smartphone more than 100 times on a single charge. It can also power full-on appliances in an RV or emergency situation.

Despite its large capacity, we learned firsthand that the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro is relatively easy to move around. Sturdy handles molded into its case make it easy to pick up, while an extending handle and wheels make it easy to roll around at the campsite or any other location.

It can charge in less than three hours from a standard outlet or, under optimal conditions with the 200W solar panels, it can fill up as quickly as eight hours. That full solar array can get large and unwieldy, but a smaller setup can still provide ample charging if you don’t need to max out the capacity daily.

This portable power station offers the best of everything we loved about the Explorer 2000 Pro, there’s just more of it. When you’re living the van life, powering an RV, or trying to ride out a power outage, more is definitely better if you can justify the extra cost.

Best for frequent use: Anker 767 Portable Power Station Solar Generator

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High capacity and fast charging make this long-lasting battery a solid everyday driver.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh
  • Output capacity: 2,400W
  • Dimensions: 20.67 x 9.84 x 15.55 inches
  • Weight: 67.3 pounds
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Charges up to 80% in less than two hours
  • Solid output and storage capacity
  • Optional battery pack doubles capacity
  • LiFePO4 batteries survive more charge cycles than traditional models
  • Plenty of ports
  • Built-in handle and wheels for transport

Cons

  • Heavy for its capacity
  • No USB-C in for charging

Anker has equipped its massive portable power station with LiFePO4 batteries, which stand up much better to repeat charging and discharging over the long term than common lithium-ion cells. Anker claims it can charge and discharge up to 3,000 times before it reaches 80% battery health compared to 500 in a similar lithium-ion setup. While I haven’t had the chance to run it through 3,000 cycles, LiFePO4 batteries have a well-earned reputation for longevity. 

Regarding overall performance, the Anker 767 does everything you’d want a unit with these specs to do. The bad weather has given me [Executive Gear Editor Stan Horaczek] ample chances, unfortunately, to test it in real-world situations. 

The built-in battery offers a 2048Wh capacity and pumps out up to 2,400W. It does so through four standard AC outlets, an RV outlet, two 120W car outlets, two 12W USB-A ports, and three 100W USB-C ports. 

I used it during a blackout to keep our Wi-Fi running while charging my family’s devices. Filling a phone from zero barely makes a dent in the power station’s capacity, and it ran the router for several hours with plenty of juice left. 

In another instance, it powered our small meat freezer for four hours before the power came back on with some juice still left in the tank. It does what it promises. 

There are a few nice extra touches as well. Built-in wheels and an extendable handle allow it to roll like carry-on luggage. Unfortunately, those are necessary inclusions because it weighs a hefty 67.3 pounds. It’s manageable but definitely heavy compared to its competition. 

The Anker 767 is compatible with the company’s 200W solar panels, which fold up for easy transportation. I mostly charged the unit through my home’s AC power, a surprisingly quick process. The 767 Portable Power Station can go from flat to more than 80% charge in less than a half hour with sufficient power. It takes about two hours to get it fully juiced. 

Anker also offers a mobile app that connects to the power station via Bluetooth if you want to control it without actually going over and touching it.

Best for camping: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its outstanding portability, high storage capacity, and Yeti’s famous durability, the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is great for packing along for camping or van-living. 

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 983Wh
  • Input capacity: 600W
  • Output capacity: 1,200W (2,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
  • Weight: 31.68 lbs
  • Price: $1,198.95

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Incredible durability
  • Rapid recharge rate
  • Plenty of plugs

Cons

  • Expensive for its size/capacity

Yeti is long-renowned for making some of the best outdoor gear money can buy, so when the company launched its Goal Zero line of solar generators, it was no surprise that they turned out to be awesome. While the whole line is great, the 1000 Core model’s balance between capacity and portability makes it perfect for taking on the road and going camping.

While the 1000 Core has a third less capacity than our top pick, it charges up faster, making it a great option for rapid solar replenishment. That said, its capacity is no slouch, offering 82 phone charges, 20 for a laptop, or upwards of 15 hours for a portable fridge (depending on wattage). Suffice to say, it’s more than capable of powering your basic camping gear.

Beyond its charging capabilities, the Goal Zero 1000 Core excels at camping thanks to its hearty build quality. Built super tough—like pretty much everything Yeti makes—its exterior shell provides solid protection.

The biggest issue it presents is the cost. Like pretty much everything Yeti produces, its price tag isn’t small. While there are other 1000-level solar generators for less, this one offers a great balance of power storage and portability.

For more on the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core, check out our full review.

Best for off-grid living: Bluetti AC200 Max

Bluetti

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its high solo capacity and ability to daisy-chain with additional batteries, the Bluetti AC200 Max is perfect for bringing power off the grid.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh standalone, expandable up to 8,192Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,400W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,800W surge)
  • Dimensions: 16.5 x 11 x 15.2 inches
  • Weight: 61.9 lbs
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Massive capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • 30A RV plug and two wireless charging pads
  • Surprisingly affordable for what it offers

Cons

  • Pretty heavy
  • Fan can get loud, especially in hot weather

You’ll be hard-pressed to find a solar generator better suited for living off the grid for an extended period than the Bluetti AC200 Max. It boasts a substantial 2,048Wh capacity, allowing you to power your whole life off it longer than most portable generators. Even better, you can daisy-chain multiple Bluetti batteries, expanding its capacity to a massive 8.192Wh. That’s flat-out enormous and translates into the ability to power a full-sized fridge for over a day or several hours of air conditioning. For the more modest needs of people who are used to living off a generator, it will last for a very long time.

At the same time, the AC200 Max has an outstanding input capacity of 1,400W. That means you can plug in a pretty hefty array of solar panels to replenish its stores quickly. This allows you to keep your off-grid setup going with little to no interruption. It also features some specialty charging options, including a 30A plug, which lets you plug it directly into an RV, and multiple wireless charging pads for smaller devices.

Fastest charging: EcoFlow Delta 2 Max

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Whether it’s solar or AC power, you can get 80% of a charge in an hour or less.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2048Wh (expandable to 6,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 3,400W
  • Dimensions: 19.8 x 9.5 x 12.01
  • Weight: 50.71 lbs
  • Price: $2,000

Pros

  • Very fast charging over solar or mains
  • Relatively compact
  • Not as heavy as we might have expected
  • Long-lasting batteries
  • Scalable by connecting two extra batteries
  • Advanced temperature management for safety

Cons

  • Solar panels are pricy
  • Still heavier than non-LiFePo4 models

Plug this 2048Wh battery pack into up to 1,000 watts of solar panels, and you can get an 80 percent charge in just 43 minutes. That’s blisteringly fast compared to other models. Plug the unit into the wall and you’ll go from zero to 80 percent in just 1.1 hours, which is still fairly speedy when it comes to soaking up electricity. That extra time can make a huge difference if you only have limited opportunities to top off your solar generator. We managed to get above 80 percent in just under an hour without perfect sun conditions here in Upstate New York.

In addition to its quick charging skills, the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max offers an impressive array of connectivity, including six AC outlets, which is more than many larger models offer. That’s good if you want to run many devices or chargers simultaneously. If you need more capacity, you can add two extra external batteries to give it a total storage of 6Wh.

At 51 pounds, this isn’t the lightest solar generator in its category, but like the other EcoFlow generators, it has chunky handles on top that make it easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily get it in and out of the back of our Honda CR-V without issue. Though, it doesn’t have wheels, so you will have to actually carry it around or put it on a cart.

Ultimately, this feels like a very high-end device. The fast charging is wonderful. The display is clear and relatively bright (though it could be brighter). And it offers a wide array of connectivity.

Best for homes: EcoFlow Delta Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The EcoFlow Delta Pro delivers the standalone and expandable power capacity necessary to power your entire home.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,600Wh standalone, expandable up to 25,000Wh
  • Input capacity: 6,500W
  • Output capacity: 3,600W (7,200W surge)
  • Dimensions: 25 x 11.2 x 16.4 inches
  • Weight: 99 lbs
  • Price: $3,699

Pros

  • Enormous capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • 30A RV plug
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • Wi-Fi and Smartphone connectivity

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for the best solar generator for home backup in the event of a power outage, the EcoFlow Delta Pro stands apart from the pack, thanks to an unrivaled power and output capacity. The Delta Pro alone packs a 3,600Wh wallop, and you can expand that to 25,000Wh by chaining it to extra EcoFlow batteries and generators. That’s a ton of power and it has the substantial output capacity necessary to power an entire house worth of electronics when you need it to.

The Delta Pro also offers a companion app for iOS and Android that allows you to monitor energy usage, customize its operation, and monitor and manage a number of other elements.

While it’s not overly large for what it does, the Delta Pro is a heavy piece of equipment. It has wheels, so it is technically portable, but this is meant to be put down in a home or other semi-permanent site. Given its size and power, it’s also a much more expensive device, especially if you’re springing for the add-ons. As the best solar power generator to provide backup power for your entire home, however, it’s worth every penny. 

Best budget: Jackery Explorer 300

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: With its reasonable capacity, compact size, and solid build quality at a low price, the Jackery Explorer 300 is a great budget pick.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 293Wh
  • Input capacity: 90W
  • Output capacity: 300W (500W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.1 x 5.2 x 7.8 in
  • Weight: 7.1 lbs
  • Price: $250

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Durable
  • Portable
  • Reasonable capacity

Cons

  • No flashlight
  • Slower input capacity

Though it isn’t quite as impressive as our top picks for best overall and best high-capacity, Jackery’s smaller Explorer 300 solar generator is super compact and lightweight with a decent power capacity for its price. Less a mobile power station than an upscale power bank, the 7-pound Jackery Explorer 300 provides plenty of portable recharges for your devices when you’re camping, on a job site, driving, or just need some power and don’t have convenient access to an outlet. Its modest 293Wh capacity isn’t huge, but it’s enough to provide 31 phone charges, 15 for a camera, 6 for the average drone, 2.5 for a laptop, or a few hours of operation for a minifridge or TV. A built-in flashlight would have upped its camping game somewhat, but at $300 (and often considerably less if you catch it discounted), this highly portable little power station does a lot for a little.

We tested this portable power station for several months, and it came in handy numerous times, especially during the winter when power outages abound. At one point, we had it powering two phones, a MacBook, and a small light.

The built-in handle makes it very easy to lug around. It feels like carrying a lunch box. The screen is easy to read, and the whole package seems fairly durable. Our review unit hasn’t taken any dramatic tumbles yet, but it has gotten banged around in car trunks, duffle bags, and other less-than-luxurious accommodations with no issues. If you catch one of these on sale, get it and stick it in a cabinet. You’ll be extremely glad to have it around when the need arises.

What to consider before buying the best solar generators

Over the past few years, solar generators have exploded onto the market. There are now dozens of different brands that largely look more or less the same at a glance. The fact is there are only a few standouts amidst a sea of knockoffs. Here’s what to look for to ensure you’re getting a great one:

How much power can it store?

A portable solar generator comes in an extremely wide range of sizes, but a generator’s size doesn’t automatically make it capable of storing a lot of power. In fact, most are disappointingly limited and unable to store much more juice than a portable charger.

To properly check a generator’s storage, you must look at its capacity, measured in watt-hours (Wh). One watt-hour is the equivalent of 1 watt flowing over the course of an hour. The best solar generators offer capacities of several hundred and sometimes several thousand watt-hours. That doesn’t mean, however, that it will provide power for several hundred or several thousand hours. Any generator will ultimately last a different amount of time, depending on what’s plugged into it.

It’s easy to predict how long a generator will last when you use it to power one thing. For example, if you were to power a 100-watt bulb using a power station with a capacity of 500 watt-hours, it would stay lit for five continuous hours. Add a portable fridge that requires 50 watts per hour, your phone which uses 18, a mini-fan that uses three … you get the picture. The more capacity, the better.

Charging capability

No solar generator will hold a charge forever, so you want one capable of charging as quickly and easily as possible. This is where we put the “renewable” into “renewable energy.”

All of the power stations included in this roundup can be charged by connecting them to solar panels (hence the designation “solar generators”). Still, you also want to look for the ability to charge via other sources like wall outlets and your vehicle’s 12-volt plug. This ensures that you can charge up whether you’re off-grid in the sun, plugged in while preparing at home, or using your dash socket on the go.

You must also monitor a model’s charging input capacity, measured in watts (W). For example, a solar-powered generator with a max input of 100W can take in a continuous flow of up to 100 watts, which is about the minimum that you’ll reasonably want to look for. Most of the generators below have input capacities of at least a few hundred watts when charging via solar, so a few 50- to 200-watt solar panels will max them out.

Output capability

Solar generators need to keep the power coming in and going out. The best solar generators can simultaneously charge all your intended devices via whatever plugs are necessary.

Any portable power station worth your money will have a high output capacity so you can charge many devices, even if they require a lot of juice. A generator’s maximum output should be much higher than its max input. While a particular model might only be capable of taking in a few hundred watts at any given moment, it will usually put out exponentially more. At a minimum, you’ll want a generator that can put out 300 watts at a time, though you’ll want at least 500 for larger tasks.

The best solar generators should also offer a variety of output plugs, including AC outlets, USB-A, USB-C, and even 12-volt DC outlets like the one in your vehicle dash. This ensures you can charge several devices simultaneously regardless of their plug. The number of ports you’ll need will vary depending on how many devices you need to power, but it should have at least a couple of AC outlets and a few USB-A ports.

Portability

While portable battery sources have been around for a while now, over the past several decades, they’ve been pretty heavy, unwieldy things. One of the most exciting aspects of the latest generation of solar generators is that they’ve become much more physically compact. 

Suppose you plan on taking a generator camping or working it into a van conversion where every square inch matters; well, size and weight become major considerations. All of the products we’ve recommended are about the size of one or two shoeboxes—three at the most. The lightest is about the weight of a 24-pack of soda, while the heaviest is 100 pounds. Most fall somewhere between 30-60 pounds.

If you’re using your generator as a more or less stationary source of backup power at home, portability isn’t a huge issue. Still, we generally recommend keeping weight and size in mind; You never know when you’ll need it for something other than a backup. (Plus, who wants to lug around something heavy and awkward if they don’t have to?) 

Another consideration regarding portability involves the necessity for accessories, which can impact how easy it is to move and use your generator. Some generators, for example, require a lot of removable battery packs, which can be a hassle when you’re on the go or packing a vehicle. All of the inclusions on our list require some accessories—you can’t get solar power without connecting cables and solar panels—but they work well with minimal add-ons.

Durability

As with any product you expect to last, durability and all-around quality craftsmanship are essential. This is especially true if you plan on lugging your generator around on camping and road trips. Many subpar power stations are made from cheap components and flimsy plastic that doesn’t feel like it will hold up under the rigors of the road.

Durability isn’t something you can determine by reading a spec sheet off the internet. You’ve actually got to take the generator out, use it a bunch, and see how it holds up. I’ve verified the durability of these recommendations via a combination of my own actual field tests and reviews culled from countless real product owners.

Related: Best electric generators

FAQs

Q: What size solar generator should I get?

It’s easy to underestimate how much capacity you need. A 1,000 watt-hours might sound like a lot, but if you’re going to power a converted van with a portable fridge, lights, and occasional phone and laptop top-off, that 1,000 watt-hours will go faster than you expect. I used a setup like this and know from personal experience that you should always overestimate how much power you’ll need.

A generator with a capacity under 1,000Wh can keep electronics charged. A larger one with 1000-1500Wh should be the minimum for road trips where you’ll need it to last multiple days between full charges. For a house or worksite where you expect to use some serious energy—like a full-sized refrigerator or power tools—you’re going to want to start looking at the biggest possible power stations that can be daisy-chained to external batteries.

If you want to get precise, there is an equation:

1. Estimate how many hours you’ll need to power various devices. For example, if you want to power two light bulbs for 2 hours: you need 4 hours of operation.

2. Add up the total wattage necessary: the two bulbs are 60 watts each, so you need 120 watts.

3. Multiply these together to find the total watt-hours needed: 4 x 120 = 480. So, in this case, you’d need at least a 500Wh solar generator. 

That might sound like a lot for two lightbulbs, but remember that, in most situations, you won’t really be powering 60-watt light bulbs for hours on end. You’ll be charging phones and laptops for an hour here or there, cooling a fridge that kicks on and off every once in a while, using power tools in short bursts, and whatnot.

Q: How many years will a solar generator last?

Most modern generators are rated to last upwards of 25 years. The best-designed power stations are pretty sturdy, with few to no moving parts, so they should likely keep kicking for a long time, provided that you care for them properly. I’ve been pretty rough with a few of mine, and they show no signs of stopping.

Q: Can I run my house on solar power only?

Yes and no. While it’s absolutely possible to power your house with solar power, you’re unlikely to do so with a portable solar generator unless you use several at once while limiting your power usage. The largest of our recommendations—the EcoFlow Delta Pro—will come fairly close when bolstered with extra batteries. If the power goes out, you’ll be able to keep your fridge cold and use basic electronics for a couple of days without recharging. With quality solar panels, good sunlight, and smart energy usage, your power should theoretically go uninterrupted.

Final thoughts on the best solar generators

We’re living in a “golden age” for portable solar generators. When I was a kid, and my family was playing around with solar gear while camping in the ‘90s, the technology couldn’t charge many devices, so it wasn’t all that practical. 

By contrast, the solar generators we’ve recommended here are incredibly useful. I’ve relied on them to power my work and day-to-day needs while road-tripping nationwide. They’re also great when the power goes out. When a windstorm cut the power at my house for a couple of days, I was still working, watching my stories, and keeping the lights on. 

We haven’t even scratched the surface in terms of the potential offered by portable, reliable, renewable, relatively affordable power. What we can do now is already incredible. The potential for what may come next, though, is truly mind-blowing.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart home gyms for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-home-gyms/ Mon, 20 Mar 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=520816
Smart Home photo

Home fitness has never been so tech-savvy.

The post The best smart home gyms for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Smart Home photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best smart home treadmill The NridcTrack Treadmill T Series are some of the top equipment for a smart home gym. NordicTrack T Series
SEE IT

The equipment itself is outstanding and the connected program offers a superior experience.

Best smart home bike A Peloton bike is a great choice for the best smart home gym. Peloton
SEE IT

Quality equipment with great program options, Peloton is the standard-bearer for a reason.

Best for strength training The Tempo Studio is a great addition to the best smart home gym. Tempo Studio
SEE IT

Quality AI-powered personal training with a full free-weight setup.

Increasingly, home gyms ain’t like the setup your grandpa used. Modern equipment isn’t just about assembling an exercise circuit; it’s connected by all kinds of high-performance circuitry. It’s providing you with access to digital tools and training that are capable of refining your workout routine and truly pushing it to the next level. Below you’ll find our picks for the best smart home gyms from various realms—from treadmills to stationary bikes, plus much more. Depending on your fitness goals, any of these will deliver an outstanding experience. Pair two together, however—say by mixing a cardio machine with a weightlifting or full-body workout machine—and you’ll essentially bring home a complete gym that can deliver you everything from remote trainers to detailed metrics. To that end, here’s equipment for the best smart home gyms so that you can get your state-of-the-art sweat on.

How we chose the best smart home gyms

The options for working out at home are better than ever. Whether you prefer sparring, yoga, rowing, HIIT, or putting in miles on the treadmill, the best smart home gyms include equipment designed with virtual trainers and tracking to help you maximize your sweat sessions. For our list, we considered all types of activities and accessories so you can achieve the most interactive experience as you maximize your investment and output.

The best smart home gyms: Reviews & Recommendations

These days home workout equipment is getting smart. Sure, the classic versions of fitness equipment will still get the job done. Still, the best smart home gym equipment provides innovative opportunities to maximize your fitness progress and get more results in minimal time. It’s also really cool. Here are our top picks across multiple categories.

Best treadmill: NordicTrack T Series

NordicTrack

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: ‎78.5 inches L x 35.5 inches W x 59 inches H
  • Power: Corded
  • Features: Interactive touchscreen, 12% incline

Pros

  • Quiet, cushioned, smooth motion for a pleasant, safe experience
  • Folds easily to save space
  • Immersive touchscreen with a wide range of program options

Cons

  • Must purchase a monthly membership for program access

NordicTrack has been the standard-bearer for treadmills for decades, and that’s still the case. The T Series offers pretty much everything you could want from a connected treadmill, and it does so at a surprisingly affordable price. 

Available in a range of specific model packages to suit a variety of accessories needs, the most basic option provides a solid all-around treadmill with a 5-inch screen and a compact 20-inch by 50-inch deck for just shy of $700, while the top-tier includes an immersive 14-inch screen and an expansive 20-inch by 60-inch deck—and there are several other options in between. Whatever package you choose, it boasts automatic incline and speed adjustments to suit your workout program. The deck itself provides a smooth, cushioned running surface, while the motor is quiet and self-cooling. The deck can also fold to save space.

The iFIT program offers a wide range of live streams, on-demand workouts, and studio classes, and it comes with a 30-day free membership. You will have to purchase a membership after that, though the treadmill provides all its basic functions without access to classes and programs. It is recommended that you buy the expert assembly package for a hundred bucks because putting the thing together is no small task.

Best stationary bike: Peloton

Specs

  • Dimensions: 59 inches D x 23 inches W x 53 inches H
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Features: Touchscreen, camera, stereo speaker system

Pros

  • Sturdy, comfortable equipment provides an enjoyable experience 
  • Superior program selection for quality workouts 
  • Wide, immersive screen makes location courses a pleasure

Cons

  • Must purchase a monthly membership for program access

There are a lot of stationary bikes on the market, and there are a few solid smart bike options, but there’s only one Peloton. It’s become so synonymous with stationary bikes that it’s almost become cliche, but the thing is, they’re really, really high quality. 

First of all, the overall craftsmanship is outstanding. There are no worries about rocking back and forth like with many other bikes—Pelotons stand rock solid. Their seats are comfortable enough for long classes, the setup can be easily adjusted to suit your body size, and the pedal action is smooth. It also has a relatively compact footprint, making it a decent option for small spaces. 

The Peloton programs are fantastic. Viewed via an expansive touchscreen, membership provides access to thousands of wide-ranging classes, games, location courses, and more. It even offers fitness and wellness programs beyond cycling, such as yoga, strength training, boxing, and so on. You do need a membership to get the most out of it, however. Without one, the equipment will still function as a basic stationary bike, but the classes vastly boost the experience.

Best for strength training: Tempo Studio

Tempo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 72 inches H x 26 inches W x 16 inches D
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Features: AI creates digital personal trainer, range of packages

Pros

  • Expansive screen delivers quality programming and real-time form adjustments
  • Free weights, unlike most dubious home cable weight setups
  • All-in-one setup boasting all the essentials

Cons

  • Not for heavy lifters

There’s no shortage of smart weightlifting options on the market, but Tempo Studio stands out because it provides real-time form adjustments. While most connected strength trainers are essentially videos you follow, Tempo boasts an AI-driven element that analyzes your form and provides adjustment recommendations. It’s essentially a digital personal trainer. 

Another difference: While many similar products come with cheap feeling gear, the weights and bars included with Tempo offer gym-level quality. Tempo Studio comes with three packages. Starter is limited to the screen and a pair of dumbbells. Plus, steps up to include a barbell and bench. Pro goes full package, with a folding bench, squat rack, kettlebell setup, and 215 pounds of weights. Most of the gear stores nicely in the screen platform while the benches fold flat, so the whole thing has a small footprint and eats up very little space. 

The really experienced lifters out there might say that that’s not a lot of weight, and they would be somewhat right. That’s way more than the average lifter will ever need, but the top-tier bodybuilders out there will be left wanting. For typical and even somewhat advanced users, however, Tempo offers more than enough.

Best connected boxing trainer: FightCamp

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 67 inches H x 24 inches W
  • Power: N/A
  • Features: Punching bag, punch trackers, range of classes

Pros

  • Fun fusion of cardio and strength training
  • Classes are comprehensive and well-instructed
  • Equipment is of better quality than competitors

Cons

  • Heavy hitters might experience some punching bag creep

When it comes to home boxing trainers, nothing beats FightCamp, period. Not only does it offer a fun and effective fusion of cardio and strength training, but the gear looks great in your living space while taking up very little room.

FightCamp uses a set of punch trackers to collect data on your punching performance, which it gathers as you train to different fighting programs designed to teach basics, footwork, punching styles, and even kickboxing. You then use the data to improve speed and beat your own performance—or compete with other users—which delivers surprisingly solid results in terms of performance improvement. 

The equipment—which includes gloves, punch trackers, and a free-standing bag—is of much better quality than other similar products. The classes are well delivered, and the experience is flat-out fun. The really heavy hitters out there might find that the punching bag creeps a bit if the base is filled with water rather than sand, but other than that, there are few faults with the system. It also comes in two fairly affordable package sizes, which makes it a great option if you’re looking for fitness gifts.

Best connected rower: Hydrow Wave Rowing Machine

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 80 inches D x 19 inches W x 43 inches H
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Features: Touchscreen, access to more than 4,000 classes with membership

Pros

  • Great full body, low impact cardio, and strength workout
  • Sturdy, stable craftsmanship for comfort and durability 
  • Enjoyable, effective workout programs
  • Easy to assemble and store

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Subscription required to track basic data

Rowers can provide an outstanding combination of cardio and strength exercise, but models intended for home use are often wobbly and unstable. Not so with the Hydrow Rower, which is as stable and sturdy as they come, delivering a solid combination of cardio and strength training that is low impact on your joints (as we found in our full review). 

The Hydrow Rower offers thousands of workout programs to choose from to suit any fitness goal, all of which are followed via an expansive 16-inch touchscreen. The screen is bright and colorful, making the location programs that allow you to row digitally through water sites around the world visually pop. It’s also easy to assemble and folds for convenient storage. 

Memberships are offered in two package tiers, with the one negative being that you must purchase a membership to track even the most basic of data like distance, calories burned, and so on. But if you’re in it for the classes anyways, this rower is unsurpassed.

Best fitness watch: Garmin Venu 2 Plus

Garmin

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 1.3-inch screen
  • Power: Lithium polymer battery (included) 
  • Features: ECG, GPS, bright AMOLED display

Pros

  • Wide variety of fitness activity tracking options
  • Full range of smartwatch functions for managing calls, emails, notifications, etc.
  • Extremely long battery life
  • Looks great by every metric

Cons

  • Wireless charging would be nice

A solid fitness tracker is a great tool for supporting home fitness—or fitness in any context really. And while we’ve got recommendations for the best Fitbits, when it comes to wearing a fitness watch that will truly track any and all activities, the Garmin Venu 2 Plus is as good as they get. 

The Venu 2 Plus tracks almost every fitness activity imaginable, even swimming. And while tracking fitness metrics should sometimes be taken somewhat with a grain of salt—so far, there is no single device that tracks everything with total accuracy—the Garmin has been pretty extensively tested and proven to track with reasonable accuracy factors like calories burned, heart rate, SpO2 (oxygen level), skin temperature, stress, sleep, and more. Its GPS tracking for running and hiking is as accurate as can be. And it responds well as you progress through different stages of an interval training session. 

On top of all that, it delivers a pretty comprehensive range of smartwatch functions, like receiving calls and notifications, listening to and controlling music, accessing your phone’s voice assistant, and a lot more. And it looks great, with a bright face that can be endlessly customized. For these and other reasons, Garmin smartwatches definitely rank highly among our best Apple Watch alternatives.

The bottom line is that few accessories can support your fitness routine in as many ways, big and small.

Best budget: MAXPRO Fitness Cable Home Gym

Maxpro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: Less than 9 pounds 
  • Power: Battery-powered
  • Features: Digital coaching for weightlifting, sensors track your stats

Pros

  • (Relatively) affordable package option
  • Full-body workout with minimal equipment
  • Extremely space efficient

Cons

  • Doesn’t quite compare to a typical gym experience
  • Some users report difficulty achieving coordinated movements

There aren’t a lot of affordable smart home gym setups on the market, at least not ones emphasizing strength training. MAXPRO, however, offers a solid full-body workout fused with digital coaching for significantly less than the competition. 

The MAXPRO achieves this via a cable pulley system capable of producing between 5 and 300 pounds of resistance. The basic package comes with a pulley base that can be attached to a bench, door, or other fixed point, and then you use handles and ankle straps to exercise various muscle groups. Sensors monitor your workout, collect data to monitor your progress, and provide coaching suggestions. The whole setup weighs less than nine pounds and takes up almost no room, so it’s easy to store or pack along while traveling. 

Some users report that it does take some getting used to and that it can be difficult to achieve coordinated movements between both sides of your body. But while it’s not a total replacement for a real gym, it does allow you to bring home a solid workout.

What to consider when buying the best smart home gyms

As you’ve probably realized while reading our recommendations, home fitness equipment comes in an extremely wide range of formats, meaning there are many factors to consider when selecting the right one for you. Here are some of the most important things to keep in mind.

Your fitness goals

What are you looking to get out of your fitness routine? Cardio? Strength training? Classes? Or individual workouts? Some mix of them all? You need to choose the equipment or combination of equipment that will best address your individual goals. A treadmill won’t do much for your fitness training, for example, and a strength trainer isn’t likely your best option for cardio.

Living space requirements

A home gym can be demanding in terms of your living space. Some products require more space than others, but you want something that will look good in your home long after you buy it. Choose a piece that will have a reasonable footprint relative to the available room and suit your aesthetic tastes.

Enjoyment

One of the basic tenets of fitness is that if you can’t enjoy an activity, you won’t stick to it. Choose a home gym you’ll have fun using in the long run. Some people love the repetition of lifting weights, while others need the variety and engagement of classes. Consider what’s right for your personality.

FAQs

Q: Is smart home gym equipment better than regular equipment?

That depends on you more than the equipment. For some people, old-school luddite gear will get the job done fine. But many beginners often prefer to have digital guidance, and even experienced fitness buffs can benefit from having some outside expertise. Data tracking can also be invaluable for maximizing the effectiveness of your efforts.

Q: Do all smart home gyms require a subscription?

In most cases, the smart home gym experience will be vastly expanded with a subscription. Many machines will allow you to use and track basic functions and data without it, but a key benefit to getting a piece of smart gear in the first place is that you can access the many programs and tools it offers.

Q: Can I get a good workout with a smart home gym?

That depends on the gym and on how dedicated you are to using it. Each product we’ve suggested above is 100% capable of providing an outstanding workout—if you’re willing to put in the time and effort necessary.

Q: What makes a piece of fitness equipment “smart”?

It’s kind of a vague term, but typically speaking, if a piece of equipment can be connected to the internet to access classes, live training, or other virtual fitness tools, it can wear the “smart” moniker.

Q: What do I need to have in my home before purchasing a smart gym system?

Generally speaking, just the space a particular piece of equipment requires and a somewhat stable internet connection (perhaps making it a great time to consider upgrading your Wi-Fi router). Some products will ideally require some wall space, but even that can use a stand mount if necessary.

Q: Is a smart home gym worth it?

That’s up to you. No equipment’s “smart” enough to force you to use it. You have to do that yourself. But assuming that you’re putting in the time and effort, smart gyms can offer a range of benefits to help you learn a new fitness routine or improve upon an existing one.

Final thoughts on the best smart home gyms

Whatever your favorite way to work out, smart equipment can enhance the experience. Whether it’s letting you train with rowers from beautiful spots around the world or setting up a sparring session or interactive yoga session, the best smart home gym equipment can help you track your progress, reach your goals, and have fun while you’re doing it.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart home gyms for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart home devices in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-home-devices/ Thu, 23 Feb 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=512978
The Best Smart Home Devices

Cut down on your chores and use automation to make your home work for you.

The post The best smart home devices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Smart Home Devices

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best security system A white SimpliSafe 10-piece smart home security system on a blue and white background. SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System
SEE IT

Monitor every entrance to your home whether you’re there or away, and get alerts to suspicious activities as they’re happening.

Best robot vacuum A eufy x10 Pro Omni robot vacuum and mop on a plain background. eufy X10 Pro Omni Robot Vacuum and Mop
SEE IT

You won’t need Alexa to play your cleaning mix anymore.

Best speaker Bowers and Wilkins speaker with down-firing LED light Bowers & Wilkins Zeppelin
SEE IT

Amazon, Google, and Apple can eat their hearts out—this smart speaker sonically smokes them all.

Smart home devices are finally beginning to make good on the promises made to us by TV shows like The Jetsons, which depicted mainstream video conferencing and remote work (in addition to flying cars) way back in 1962. Broadband internet and Wi-Fi have enabled companies to develop a whole host of gadgets that can be wirelessly controlled and monitored from a smartphone, tablet, computer, or smart home speaker. A new smart home standard called Matter, developed by a consortium featuring some of the biggest tech companies on Earth, will make it possible for gadgets to connect to one another easily. The best smart home devices will simplify your life without requiring you and the people you live with to completely re-learn how to use common aspects of your place.

How we chose the best smart home devices

The world of smart home devices is gigantic and growing daily, so keeping up with it is difficult. This guide compiles our top recommendations from stories dedicated to a single product category. We’ve also linked to these individual guides so you can see even more of our recommendations in this area. The criteria we’ve used to evaluate these products are based on a mix of research and hands-on testing. As we continue to test and update these individual guides, we’ll return and update this one. We feel this virtuous circle will give you, the reader, the most up-to-date information on various smart home devices written by subject matter experts that combine personal use, peer recommendations, critical reviews, and real-world impressions to come up with selections in each specific area. Our smart home device coverage is continuing to evolve, and we’ll also update this story as we explore entirely new categories, too.

The best smart home devices: Reviews & Recommendations

The smart home devices in this guide come from well-known and trusted companies. Our team has paid particular attention to making sure these devices work with as many smart home platforms as possible, may be updated to support Matter through a software update, and are designed to be supported for many, many years.

Best Wi-Fi router: eero Pro 6E

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Eero’s latest Wi-Fi router is its most powerful model yet, but it’s still easy to set up and use.

Specs

  • Speed: 2.3Gbps
  • Range: 6000 square feet
  • Wi-Fi version: 6E
  • Mesh: Yes

Pros

  • Ultra-fast speeds
  • Supports the latest Wi-Fi version
  • Excellent coverage
  • Easy to set up and manage

Cons

  • Expensive

Eero has made the best Wi-Fi routers since its hardware debuted over six years ago, and the 6E Pro only extends that lead.

Our tests, which included downloading large files while simultaneously streaming 4K video and downloading Nintendo Switch games, went well. We didn’t detect any performance drops even when pushing the routers to their limits. Our tests were conducted in a three-floor condo using a two-pack of Eero 6E Pro routers and a gigabit fiber optic Internet connection from Verizon Fios. Your experience will vary based on the speeds provided by your Internet service provider’s (ISP) Internet package.

In most cases, we only needed a single router to cover the entire area, more than we could say for most of the Wi-Fi routers we’ve tested. We added a second for our network to reach a single out-of-the-way room on the basement floor. Internet performance on the second floor was solid with a single router. If you live in a single or two-story home, it’s entirely possible to get by with just one of Eero’s 6E Pro routers.

One of our favorite aspects of using eero’s networking gear is its straightforward setup process. Its app (iOS and Android) has a clean design that’s friendly to newcomers with advanced settings for power users. Getting the 6E Pro routers up and running consisted of connecting them to power, waiting for their LED to blink blue, then setting up my network name and password. One eero router needs to be connected to your cable modem using an Ethernet cable, but the others only need power to operate.

Once a router is installed, the app will prompt you to update its software if a newer version is available. Going forward, software updates can be downloaded and installed at the pre-set time you choose—likely when you’re asleep—to avoid interrupting your day. You also have the option to update routers manually if you’d prefer.

Eero’s hardware is pricy, but in our experience, the brand’s ease of use and performance justifies the cost. Eero has supported its routers for roughly five years so far and offers a 25% discount if you trade in old hardware for a new model, which is more eco-friendly than keeping it lying around. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to Wi-Fi routers.

Best security system: SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SimpliSafe 10-Piece system has the right mix of sensors, cameras, and other security tools to help keep your home safe in a single box.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors, 1 indoor camera, 1 outdoor camera
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $28/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: N/A, but Alexa- and Nest-compatible

Pros

  • Outdoor cam so your security starts before an intruder enters your home
  • Comes with one free month of 24/7 professional monitoring service
  • The variety of parts gives you a more complete sense of security
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Must learn to set up each part correctly

SimpliSafe’s 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System includes all the equipment you’ll need to protect your home fully.

In the box, you’ll receive four window or door sensors, two motion sensors, two HD cameras, a keypad, and a base station. Once you set up the system using SimpliSafe’s app (iOS and Android), you can monitor, arm, and disarm it from your phone. Your smartphone will also receive a notification each time the system is tripped. If you’re home, you have the option of arming and disarming your system using a keypad, too. One of this system’s best features is the 95db (decibel) siren built into the base station. This alarm will alert would-be thieves and neighbors that a security system is installed and has been tripped.

Both cameras included in SimpliSafe’s 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System have the same basic specs: A 1080p sensor, night vision, motion detection, and a 140-degree field of view. The only difference is that the outdoor camera runs on a battery so that it can be installed anywhere. The indoor camera is wired, so you’ll need to keep it plugged into an outlet at all times. You can monitor a timeline of video clips from the past seven days for free or pay for unlimited video storage at the cost of $27.99 per month by subscribing to SimpliSafe’s Interactive Monitoring Plan. The paid plan also includes professional monitoring and is required to unlock the system’s Alexa and Google Home integrations.

If you’re looking for an all-in-one smart security system covering most basic needs, SimpliSafe’s 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System has everything you need to get started. If you have a bigger home or want more protection, you can always add more components over time. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best smart home security systems.

Best scale: WYZE Smart Scale X

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Calculate weight, BMI, muscle percentage, body fat percentage, and so much more with a scale that easily syncs with the WYZE app on your smartphone; we think that’s pretty powerful stuff.

Specs

  • Connectivity: Bluetooth
  • Individual profiles: 8
  • Weight capacity: 400 pounds
  • Metrics: 13

Pros

  • Measures lots of different health metrics
  • Attractive tempered glass design
  • Easily syncs with some smartphone apps

Cons

  • Somewhat invasive software wants to track your location
  • Doesn’t actually pair with all 3rd party apps

A smart scale isn’t going to help you lose weight on its own, but WYZE’s Smart Scale X can help you keep track of a handful of health metrics to help you chart your progress over time. This data can help determine whether your diet or exercise routine produces any results. The scale can track your weight, muscle mass, body fat percentage, BMI, heart rate, and water percentage. This data can be synced to the WYZE app (iOS and Android) on your phone, or a general app like Apple’s Health, Fitbit, and Google Fit.

Aesthetically, the Smart Scale X looks like the normal “dumb” models most of us are used to. Its temperated glass top, black or white colorway, and LCD display are all pretty standard. The scale will be able to take your weight very quickly, but it may take a few extra seconds for it to read your other metrics. You’ll know whether your weigh-in was successful when you see new data appear on your app of choice. Our only qualm with the Smart Scale X is that is constantly asks for your location—providing this information is entirely optional, and declining will not impact the scale’s performance—but it’s annoying. The health data collected by the scale can benefit you, giving away your location information may not. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to smart scales.

Best robot vacuum: eufy X10 Pro Omni Robot Vacuum and Mop

Eufy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Eufy’s RoboVac X10 can vacuum and mop your floors, and uses AI to avoid common obstacles to clean efficiently.

Specs

  • Surfaces: Hard floor, carpet
  • Bin size: 2.5 L
  • Run time: Not listed

Pros

  • Dual cleaning functionality
  • 8,000Pa suction
  • Advanced mapping technology

Cons

  • Price

Eufy’s RoboVac X10 Pro Omni builds on the company’s strong foundation and adds welcome features that weren’t available on most of its previous models.

The RoboVac X10 includes eufy’s 2.0 software, which allows the vacuum to intelligently avoid chairs, stairs, and other obstructions while creating a detailed map of your room. Knowing the borders of your rooms makes it easier for the vacuum to optimize its cleaning path for maximum efficiency during its run. Eufy tuned its sensors to operate in low light, too, to clean your home at night without any issues. The company’s robot vacuums have always done a very good job cleaning; the X10 can pick up more pet hair than before, thanks to a 8,000Pa suction and an auto-detangling brush roll. The dustbag only needs to be replaced every two months, according to eufy.

Robot vacuums have traditionally been good at picking up solid dirt—hair, crumbs, dust bunnies—but couldn’t deep-clean your floor. The RoboVac X10 has a built-in mop connected to a 3L water tank, allowing it to clean these surfaces more effectively. This vacuum cleaner will mop and vacuum simultaneously to avoid leaving water streaks on your floor. The Eufy app (iOS and Android) allows you to schedule cleanings, view the vacuum’s map, and tell it where to clean. You can also start or stop cleaning hands-free by using Amazon’s Alexa if you have a compatible smart speaker in your home.

Smart home devices are designed to make your life easier, but Eufy’s RoboVac X10 can cross a tedious chore off your list. If you want more recommendations, check our choices for the best robot vacuums.

Best speaker: Bowers & Wilkins Zeppelin

Sarah Jones

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Zeppelin’s eye-catching aesthetics are matched by its excellent sound and surprisingly robust smart home integration.

Specs 

  • Assistant: Alexa
  • Drivers: 5
  • Dimensions: 28 x 12 x 11.6 inches
  • Frequency response: 35 Hz to 24 kHz

Pros

  • Audiophile-grade speaker array
  • Elegant, minimalist design elevates any decor
  • Alexa and AirPlay 2 support

Cons

  • No Google Assistant support

Most smart home speaker makers have spent resources trying to make hardware less expensive and more portable, often by sacrificing audio quality. Bowers & Wilkins’ Zeppelin is the antithesis of this trend.

The large, heavy, expensive smart home speaker has been meticulously engineered to sound as good as possible, and it’s well worth its $800 price if you fancy yourself an audiophile. The Zeppelin’s greatest strength is that Bowers & Wilkins refused to compromise on audio quality. It outfitted this speaker with a five-driver array comprised of two 1-inch double dome tweeters, two 3.5-inch midrange drivers, and a single 6-inch subwoofer. The tweeters and midrange drivers are built into the left and right ends of the Zeppelin, which provides a surprisingly wide soundstage for a single speaker. The center-oriented subwoofer provides ample bass while never tipping itself over the edge. You’ll certainly hear the low end loudly and clearly, but mids and highs won’t sound drowned out or weak.

We put the Zeppelin through its paces in our review, listening to music from multiple genres at different bitrates and volume levels. There’s no such thing as a perfect-sounding speaker—everyone’s ears and preferences are different after all—but the level of detail was stunning. If you’re the type of person who has a library of Mobile Fidelity Sound Lab (MSFL) SACDs ripped in FLAC on your computer, or exclusively stream high-resolution audio from different services, your fastidiousness will be rewarded here. Lossy audio also sounds excellent, but your source will help bring out Zeppelin’s full potential.

Regarding smart home functionality, the Zeppelin has Amazon’s Alexa built-in and support for Apple’s AirPlay 2. The lack of Google Assistant support is unfortunate, given this speaker’s price, but it isn’t a dealbreaker. If you’ve built a smart home and want an audio system to be a part of it, Bowers & Wilkins’ Zeppelin is in a class of its own. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best smart speakers.

Best lock: Schlage Encode Deadbolt Smart Lock

SCHLAGE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This smart deadbolt lock can be installed and used without smart features, but the ones it supports enhance its abilities.

Specs

  • Wi-Fi Connectivity: Yes
  • Dimensions: 3 x 5 inches
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries

Pros

  • Does not require a smart hub
  • Numerous programming options via a dedicated app
  • Many finish options

Cons

  • Not compatible with some popular smart home systems

Schlage’s Encode solved one of the biggest problems many people have with smart locks: Its wireless features are entirely optional. Yes, this deadbolt will replace the one on your door, but you can still get into your home using a key. this fallback method is helpful if the lock’s battery dies, your Wi-Fi goes out, or someone in your house doesn’t like or want to use smart features to get in and out of the house. This model also comes with a keypad, which needs to be set up using Schlage’s app (iOS and Android), but can be used by anybody once a code is set.

Setting up the Encode’s smart home features requires you to scan a QR code on the lock’s battery compartment, sending you to a digital setup process on its app. Once you’ve added the lock to your Wi-Fi network, you can lock or unlock it remotely. This feature will be useful when you or someone you live with forgets their key. Wireless locking is also useful if you can’t remember whether you locked the door on your way out. If you’re home, you can lock or unlock the Encode using Amazon’s Alexa or Google Assistant, which is helpful if you’d like to let somebody in but have your hands full.

You can configure Schlage’s Encode to send your phone a notification each time your lock is locked or unlocked, and set it to engage its alarm if somebody tries to get inside your home while it’s locked. These security features are optional, but we recommend setting them up for added security, at least when you’re away from your home for an extended period of time. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best keypad door locks.

Best smoke detector: Google Nest Protect Smoke and Carbon Monoxide

Google

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Nest Protect from Google can alert you of two dangerous gasses whether you’re home or away.

Specs

  • Type: Battery-powered or wired
  • Battery backup: Yes; battery-powered (AA x 6), Yes; wired (AA x 3)
  • Dimensions: 5.3 inches H x 5.3 inches W x 1.5 inches D

Pros

  • Mobile alerts
  • Easy to silence from your phone
  • Powerful interconnectivity features

Cons

  • Expensive

Smoke and carbon monoxide detectors are a legal requirement in new homes—for good reason—but getting woken up by one can be very disorienting. Google’s Nest Protect can detect both threats and will play a voice recording telling you why it was triggered. If the source of the issue isn’t apparent—this is more common for carbon monoxide—you can relay your information to the fire department or another authority. In the case of a false alarm, like burning popcorn triggering the smoke detector, you can silence the Nest Protect using an app rather than struggling to push a button.

The Nest Protect’s best feature is its ability to send your phone notifications when triggered. This information can be invaluable if you’re not home and justifies the Nest Protect’s cost. The best-case scenario is that it’s a false positive, but knowing about a house fire or CO2 leak before it spreads is incredibly helpful. Google offers the Nest Protect in battery-powered and wired configurations so that you can install them everywhere. You’ll receive a notification when its batteries are low rather than hearing an annoying chirping sound. The Nest Protect only has two functions, but they’re incredibly important and can literally save your life or home. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best carbon monoxide detectors.

Best doorbell: Google Nest Doorbell Wired (2nd Generation)

Google

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The second-generation Nest Doorbell is a sleek-looking doorbell with high-quality video.

Specs

  • Video resolution: 1280 x 960
  • Wired/Battery-powered: Battery
  • Field of view: 145 degrees
  • Integration: Google Assistant 
  • Storage type: Cloud

Pros

  • High-quality video
  • Chime included
  • Head-to-toe view
  • Notifications don’t require a subscription

Cons

  • Expensive subscription plan
  • Requires doorbell wire

A smart video doorbell can keep an eye on the most vulnerable part of your home: your front yard or street. Google’s second-generation Nest Doorbell is a wired model that can record HD video during the day or night. The lens’ 145-degree field of view can capture goings on over a wide area, so would-be criminals won’t be able to sneak by it easily. You’ll receive a notification each time the doorbell’s motion sensor is triggered, so you can immediately assess whether the person approaching your door is a friend or a stranger. These security features are the main reason to get a video doorbell, but Google made the Nest friendly, too. You can record away messages to alert people when you’re not home.

On the technical side, this video doorbell requires existing wiring to work. If you’re replacing an existing doorbell, this won’t be a problem. You may need to call an electrician if your home doesn’t already have one. The benefit of installing a wired doorbell is you never have to worry about it running out of batteries, which can be inconvenient if it happens while you’re on vacation. The set-it-and-forget-it nature of the Nest Doorbell is part of its overall appeal, as is its support for both Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa.

This video doorbell can store up to three hours of video—the maximum length for each clip is five minutes—in the cloud for free. If you’d like more storage, you’ll have to pay for an optional Nest Aware plan, which costs $6 per month and offers 60 days of event history. We’d like it if Google allows you to store video clips locally, but this isn’t the case, unfortunately. Still, if you’d like a sleek-looking wired video doorbell, this is the one to pick up. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best doorbell cameras.

Best smart plug: Wyze Plug

WYZE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Wyze plugs are powerful tools, and especially inexpensive if you buy a multi-pack.

Specs

  • Energy consumption: 15 amps; 110 volts
  • Size: 2.75 x 4.1 x 1.5 inches
  • Smart home platforms: Compatible with Alexa and Google Assistant
  • Mobile support: Controllable remotely through the Wyze app (iOS and Android)
  • Wide ecosystem support: Wyze app allows for multiple plugs to be controlled as a single system

Pros

  • Reliable
  • Reasonable price
  • Good companion app
  • Alexa and Google Assistant compatible

Cons

  • Not HomeKit compatible

Smart plugs are the unsung heroes of the smart device world. They allow you to control the devices they’re connected to remotely, even if the appliance or other powered gadget was made in the pre-Internet age. Wyze’s smart plugs cost $11 each or $40 in a four-pack and work just as well as models that cost a lot more. A smart plug is remarkably simple once you’ve set it up in Wyze’s iOS or Android app. Once the plug is connected to your Wi-Fi network, you can turn it on and off using an app. The plug can be connected to any outlet and is small enough not to interfere with the one below it in a multi-outlet receptacle.

The functionality of a smart plug is limited to turning an electronic on or off, but that can be a very powerful feature. For example, using this smart plug with a lamp will allow you to turn it into a smart light. Using a smart plug in conjunction with an air purifier will allow you to set it on a schedule. Smart plugs are little problem solvers, so we recommend picking up a multi-pack. It won’t be very hard to find places for them in your home, and it’s more cost-effective than picking them up one at a time.

Amazon owns Wyze, but the smart plugs can be controlled by both Alexa or Google Assistant, which is a nice touch. These plugs aren’t compatible with HomeKit, which may be problematic if you’re part of Apple’s smart home ecosystem. If that isn’t an issue, we can recommend Wyze’s smart plugs without reservation.

Best TV: Hisense 65U8K

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Hisense’s U8K features an impressive 4K panel, multiple HDMI 2.1 ports, and support for faster frame rates.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55”, 65”, 75”, 85″, 100″
  • Display: QLED
  • Refresh rate: 144 Hz
  • HDR: HDR10, Dolby Vision
  • Ports: HDMI 2.0 x2, HDMI 2.1 x2 USB 2.0, Ethernet, Bluetooth

Pros

  • Sharp, vibrant picture
  • 144Hz panel
  • Multiple HDMI 2.1 port

Cons

  • So-so speakers

Smart TVs have become a commodity, but Hisense’s U8K has stayed above the fray thanks to its 144Hz refresh rate panel, support for the latest video standards, and a snappy processor that makes navigating Google TV snappy. These features make it an excellent choice for casual Netflix watchers, sports fanatics, and gamers alike.

In our tests, the U8K’s bright screen and vivid colors (both courtesy of its QLED panel) make the biggest difference when watching and playing. Its support of Dolby Vision and 144Hz refresh rate make playing cutting-edge titles on the PlayStation 5 and Xbox Series X a pleasure, as the 4K TV can keep up with fast-paced action in first-person shooter titles or action games. Even Nintendo Switch games, which top out at 1080p with no HDR support, benefit from the panel. Ultra-colorful games like Super Mario Wonder and Stardew Valley really pop on the U8K. Similarly, its high refresh rate came in handy when watching sports matches, as players moved smoothly across the screen with no lost detail.

The TV held its own when watching shows and movies from various streaming services. Older HD content looked fine, but newer programming in 4K and HDR looks stunning. The TV’s Full Array Local Dimming allows you to control its contrast with pinpoint precision, so darker and lighter parts of a scene look distinct. This is especially apparent when viewing scenes that take place at night. Cinephiles who invest in the best-looking prints of their movies from boutique companies like Criterion and Arrow will be rewarded by seeing their favorite films in their full fidelity. Sure, you can spend more on an OLED or 8K, and you’ll see a difference, but this set really delivers for its price.

While the U8K dazzles on the visual front, its speakers are only okay, which is true of just about any flat-panel TV. There’s still some depth, but we recommend hooking this setup to a soundbar or home theater system for its sound to match its picture quality.

Best smart lightbulb: Philips Hue White and Color Starter Kit 

Philips Hue

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Even with increased competition Philips’ Hue Starter Kit is still the best smart lighting bundle to get.

Specs

  • Brightness: 800 lumens
  • Power usage: 9.5 Watts 
  • Color temperature: 16 million colors, including 6500K
  • Lifetime: 25,000 hours 

Pros

  • Voice activation
  • Smart Button for additional control 
  • Expandability
  • Schedule custom lighting presets

Cons

  • Expensive 
  • Smart Button does not dim 

Philips virtually invented smart lighting, and its starter kit is still the package we recommend to people beginning their smart home journey. The bundle has three smart lightbulbs, a hub connecting them to the internet, and an on-and-off button. Setting up Hue’s bulbs is very easy, thanks to Phillips’ well-designed iOS and Android app. Adding bulbs to your system only takes a couple of minutes and requires you to either scan a QR code at the base of the bulb or entering in a unique alphanumerical code printed underneath it. In our experience, jotting down the alphanumerical code before installing the lightbulbs is the easiest way to get things going. You’ll also need to connect the included Philips Hue hub to your cable modem with an Ethernet cable. This is slightly annoying, but it’s what allows these lightbulbs to be compatible with Apple’s HomeKit, and makes them more stable overall.

Once they’re connected, you can control the lightbulbs in several ways. Many people will use the Philips Hue app, which allows you to set each bulb’s brightness and color individually. You can also select from an image that will use multiple bulbs to recreate a particular lighting condition—a sunset or sunrise, for example. For those living in a home with someone slightly less enthusiastic about smart home gear, you can sync the LED bulbs to the included wireless power switch. We wish the switch offered dimming controls, but this is a minor inconvenience. One of the most overlooked features of Philips Hue bulbs is the ability to put them on a timer. Knowing your lights will automatically turn on at sunset or slowly get brighter in the morning to wake you up can be both cool and useful. You also have the option to turn the lights on and off remotely, so they can turn on just before you return home after work or a night out.

The smart lighting world has exploded in popularity over the past couple of years, and while these options have brought prices down, none of the bulbs we’ve tried can match the performance of Philips Hue’s. Including other accessories that make them more user-friendly for non-techie folks is icing on the cake. For more recommendations, check out our full guide to the best smart light bulbs.

What to consider when buying the best smart home devices

Every smart home device requires you to consider a different set of factors, but there are some universal ones you should think about regardless of category. Our main focus was to choose products that support a wide range of platforms, so those whose alliances with Google or Amazon’s smart home speakers won’t be left in the dark if they switch from one to another. Apple has lagged in the smart home device space, despite Siri being 12 years old, because it decided to create its own smart home accessory standard, but that’s beginning to change.

Smart home platform

If you’ve searched for smart home devices in the past, you’ve likely run into badges denoting whether they work with Google Assistant or Amazon’s Alexa. You may also have noticed a badge touting support for Apple’s HomeKit. These markings will likely go away once Matter takes over—more on that later—but they’re important to consider now. All smart home devices have allowed you to control them through an app on your iPhone or Android device, but only some were designed to work with a specific smart speaker. If you’ve spent hundreds of dollars outfitting your home with Echo or Nest Audio speakers, be sure that the devices you get support them, or you’ll be relegated to opening up a smartphone app to control them.

Matter support

It’s taken a long time to get here, but the Matter protocol—a new smart home standard developed and agreed upon by companies like Apple, Amazon, Google, and smart home device manufacturers—is set to change how we use these gadgets completely. Smart home devices that support Matter will be interoperable with every major platform, so homes with an Echo, Nest Audio, and HomePod speaker can control them seamlessly without a whole bunch of reconfiguration. Some existing smart home devices can receive Matter support via a software update, but each one has to be certified by a consortium for that to happen. Going forward, Matter will become the industry standard, but we’re not there quite yet.

How to set up a Wi-Fi network for your smart home

A strong Wi-Fi network is the foundation of your smart home. Without Wi-Fi, your smart home devices will not be able to connect to the internet. Your ISP has likely given you a cable modem with a router built into it. If your Wi-Fi speeds are sufficient, and it creates a network that covers your entire home, you’re all set. If your network strength is weak, or you’re having trouble connecting in every corner of your home, it may be time to upgrade to a stronger router. You may also want to look into a mesh Wi-Fi system, which is comprised of multiple routers that connect to one another to create a larger network.

Whether you use a single-point or mesh Wi-Fi router system, we recommend setting up your networking gear in a central location because it’ll give you the best chance of reaching every part of your home. You can check the strength of your Wi-Fi network by walking around different parts of your home and using the Speedtest.net’s free tool. The site allows you to check the speed of your Wi-Fi, which you can check against the speeds you’re paying for from your ISP.

How to add smart home devices to your Wi-Fi network

Every smart home device has a slightly different setup process, but they’re mostly the same. You’ll begin by downloading the app associated with your device and setting up an account. You can save time by setting up an account before your smart home device arrives if you’ve ordered it online. From there, the app will use Bluetooth to scan for your new smart home device and eventually ask you to connect it to your home’s Wi-Fi network. The app will ask for your Wi-Fi password to connect, so be sure to have it handy.

The work these smart home apps do behind the scenes is pretty sophisticated, but the setup process for most devices is pretty simple. If you already have their associated app downloaded, you should be able to set up a new device in five minutes or so. Just be mindful that some devices may download a software update the first time they’re booted, which can extend the setup time by a few minutes. Software updates can be set to download and install in the background to avoid interrupting your service.

Once the smart home device has been set up, you may have the opportunity to name it, so it’s easier to find. This is particularly important when setting up smart lightbulbs and smart plugs since it’s likely you’ll have several of them in your home at once. You may also have the option to add them to a centralized smart home app like Apple’s HomeKit or Google Home, where you can manage devices from different companies in one place. These centralized apps allow you to create virtual rooms so that you can manage all of the devices inside that area of your home.

FAQs

Q: What’s the best way to connect smart devices at home?

You’ll need to use a smartphone app to set up your smart devices, and that’s still the easiest and best way to connect to them. It’s also how you’ll troubleshoot issues if they arise.

Q: Can I save money by using smart home devices?

This depends on the smart home device. A smart thermostat may be able to reduce your energy bill by controlling your HVAC system more efficiently, but a smart home speaker will not.

Q: Which companies make the best smart home devices?

All hardware manufacturers featured in this guide—such as Philips Hue, TCL, and Bowers & Wilkins—make top-notch smart home devices.

Q: Do I need the internet for my smart home devices to work?

You’ll need an internet connection for a smart home device’s smart functionality, like the ability to control it remotely. More basic functionality, like turning a smart lightbulb on by flipping a switch, will work if the internet is down.

Q: Are smart home devices worth it?

Yes. Most devices released today are smart, and the ability to control them using a smartphone or speaker can make them easier to operate and manage.

Q: How much do smart home devices cost?

This depends on the category of smart home device you’re searching for. A smart TV can cost hundreds of dollars, while smart lightbulbs can cost under $100.

Final thoughts on the best smart home devices

Getting your first smart home device can be a very exciting experience. It can make an appreciable difference in how easy it is to control parts of your place that are annoying to access physically. They can save you time and help you optimize the space you have to work with, too. Smartphone apps and smart home speakers have become more sophisticated, too, so setting up and using a smart home device has become easier than ever. If you’ve put off setting up a smart home until now, you’re entering a mature part of the tech world whose biggest kinks have been largely worked out.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart home devices in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-projectors/ Thu, 28 Apr 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439531
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Screen blockbusters at your neighborhood block party with these great projectors.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall XGIMI Horizon Ultra on a plain white background. XGIMI Horizon Ultra
SEE IT

A bright 4K projector with a sound system that’ll cut through noise in the great outdoors.

Best HD Epson Home Cinema 3800 is the best HD outdoor projector. Epson Home Cinema 3800
SEE IT

A 3LCD HD projector that competes with 4K.

Best portable Dangbei Atom Projector on a bed frame. Dangbei Atom
SEE IT

Ultra-portable and bright for taking the show(s) on the road.

As the weather warms up, outside activities heat up, and outdoor projectors transform the natural world into open-air movie theaters. They feature powerful lamps for use even when the sun hasn’t fully set or the streetlights are on, and they’re light enough to make moving them from your media room to your deck easy on your back. Many projectors suited for outdoor use include features like rechargeable batteries, smart TV operating systems, and robust speakers to help streamline set-up. Most importantly, just like any projector you’d buy for indoor use, they don’t skimp on important image specs, such as color, contrast, and resolution. When you don’t want your cul-de-sac drive-in to become a giant car wreck of a viewing experience, turn to the best outdoor projectors. 

How we chose the best outdoor projector

When considering the best outdoor projectors for our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home-theater projectors. Also, we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorite projector brands and the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites, sifting through reviews to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing on image quality. Color, contrast, and resolution were all taken into account. Balanced against these specs were features making the projector most suited to outdoor use, including brightness, portability, and versatility. Price was an important factor, especially regarding “bang for your buck,” though it wasn’t of primary concern when judging the higher-end categories of projectors. 

The best outdoor projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for outdoor projectors can be tricky, filled with jargon, numbers, and an endless parade of acronyms. If you want the most out of your home-theater experience, there’s much to learn, especially when hosting a backyard movie night. So read on for guidance in choosing the best outdoor projectors to watch the stars under the stars.

Best overall: XGIMI Horizon Ultra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Brightness: 2,300 ANSI Lumens
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 x Ethernet, 1 x Optical, 1 x AUX
  • Weight: 11.24 pounds

Pros

  • Stunning video quality
  • Surprisingly good audio system
  • Snappy user interface

Cons

  • No native Netflix
  • Can’t run on battery power.

XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra is hands-down the best 4K projector we’ve tested yet, and at 2,300 lumens, it has enough brightness to handle projections in the great outdoors. One of the biggest strengths this projector offers as an outdoor projector is the fact that it’s all in one. It runs an operating system (Android TV) that allows you to stream TV shows and movies from most services (Netflix is conspicuously absent) without plugging in a media streamer. The Horizon Ultra’s processor is also powerful enough to run this operating system without lagging, which is helpful if you’re switching between apps regularly.

This projector has a pair of built-in Harman Kardon speakers loud enough to cut through most ambient outdoor noise and provide a surprisingly good audio experience when watching videos and playing games. It’s also compact and light enough to fit comfortably in a backpack for easy transport. It doesn’t run on battery power, so you’ll need access to a consistent power source, but this won’t be a problem for backyard movie nights. While it’s inessential, we were really pleased with the Horizon Ultra’s overall build quality, from its mesh outer covering to the fact that its remote is made from metal instead of plastic.

From a performance perspective, this projector is hard to beat. The Horizon Ultra continually produced a bright, colorful image even in a room with some light leakage. It won’t be able to compete with bright sunlight, but that’s the case with all projectors. This is the first long-throw model with support for Dolby Vision, HDR10, and HLG, so it’ll product a clear image regardless of what’s being shown on screen. Automatic keystone correction will keep the screen aligned, whether you’re projecting a 40- or 200-inch screen. XGIMI’s upcoming Horizon Max, announced at CES 2024, offers an IMAX 1.90:1 aspect ratio, more lumens, an updated Intelligent Screen Adaption system, and more immersive sound if you need a larger screen (albeit at a higher price).

Our tests included playing video games like Phantasy Star Second Story R, wherein characters dart across the screen while visual effects pop up constantly. This was no problem for the Horizon Pro’s 18ms latency and 60Hz refresh rate, which handled the task with aplomb. This 4K projector’s color reproduction was fantastic, and shows or games with support for HDR (high dynamic range) look even better. The Horizon Ultra’s speakers, which we mentioned earlier, could decode Dolby and DTS and deliver clear dialogue and deep bass. We never needed to connect external speakers to the projector, which was quite the feat. Our only complaint with this projector remains its lack of native Netflix support, which is a bummer given the ubiquity of the service. If you don’t mind plugging in a media streamer or sideloading apps, this won’t be an issue, so it’s hardly a reason to ding the Horizon Ultra too harshly.

Best HD: Epson Home Cinema 3800

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This ultra-bright HD projector delivers a cinema-like picture with brilliant colors and deep blacks even when it’s not completely dark. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 3,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 100,000:1
  • Weight: 15.2 pounds

Pros

  • Accurate color
  • Can display 4K content using pixel shifting
  • Easy-to-adjust settings
  • Wide variety of inputs

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Somewhat heavy

The Epson 3800 projector is an excellent outdoor choice for anyone who doesn’t need native 4K resolution but still wants a large, movie-theater-quality picture. And with a contrast ratio of 100,000:1 and 10-bit HDR color processing, this 3LCD projector will give you deep blacks and bold colors (100% of the RGB color signal) on a screen up to 300 inches from corner to corner. 

What’s more, the 3800 can still deliver a 4K image—sort of. While its native resolution is 1920 x 1080, it uses a technology called pixel shifting to interpolate the missing pixels and fill out a full UHD frame. Is it perfect? No, and at the maximum screen size some loss of sharpness has been reported. But at, say, 150-200 inches, issues become much less noticeable. 

At 14.1 pounds, the projector isn’t as heavy as units meant to live permanently in a media room, but it’s also not a complete lightweight. The same could be said for this smart projector’s $1,700 price tag, which is a bit high for an HD unit. On the other hand, the superb picture quality and ability to play 4K movies without having to down-res them to HD are worth the extra bucks for this high-quality projector. The Epson also features dual HDMI 2.0 ports, dual USB ports, dual 10-watt speakers, and Bluetooth connectivity for easy integration into an external audio environment.

Best portable: Dangbei Atom

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Brightness: 1200 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 2.82 pounds

Pros

  • Fantastic color reproduction for its size
  • Built-in speakers
  • Bright for a compact projector

Cons

  • Single HDMI port

We ranked Dangbei’s Atom as the best mini projector, and if you’ve got minimal space for your outdoor home theater setup, it’s the one to get. The Atom comes in at just 1.87 inches thick and under three pounds, which is a technical triumph of engineering given its size. It has a 1200 ANSI Lumen bulb, which is exceptionally bright compared to similarly sized models, supports HDR10, has a pair of built-in stereo 5W speakers that do a surprisingly good job, and a processor capable of running Android TV 10 smoothly. This is one of the few Android TV projectors that supports Netflix, which means you won’t have to plug in a media streamer to get access to the popular video streaming service, further improving its portability.

We tested the Atom by playing video games on the Nintendo Switch. In general, colors looked good and games sounded pretty rich. There wasn’t a discernible amount of latency when playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild and/or Tears of the Kingdom, which admittedly runs at 30 frames per second. Having said that, a 1080P image projected on a 100-inch screen does look worse than one at 4K. If your outdoor projector needs are more modest, or you’re willing to give up some visual fidelity in the name or portability, this is a fine tradeoff. However, if you stream a lot of 4K content, it may be wise to look elsewhere. Our only technical complaint is that its single HDMI port means you’ll be swapping out components whenever you want to use a different device. Again, this is less of an issue thanks to the Atom’s support of Netflix out of the box.

Given the Atom’s size—it was practically effortless to carry the projector and power cable in one hand from room to room—you can easily take it outdoors or set up and break down your big-screen home-theater setup in a couple of minutes. The Atom is the ideal mini projector for outdoor movie and gaming enthusiasts.

Best for daylight: Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector

Anker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 4K UHD laser projector provides images you can watch in daylight with built-in Android TV, two 10-watt speakers, and a handle that lets you easily transport it.

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,840 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 1,500,000:1 dynamic 
  • Weight: 10.7 pounds

Pros

  • Impressive brightness
  • 3840 x 2160 display resolution 
  • 4K laser system
  • Built-in Android TV

Cons

  • Expensive

For those looking to create a cinematic experience in all kinds of light, the Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector can help you do it. The 4K UHD laser projector comes equipped with 1,840 ANSI Lumens and 3840 x 2160 display resolution for a bright and vivid picture even on a sunny day. Outdoor projector setup is easy for this model, which is available in 1080p and 4K versions. The Nebula Cosmos is also designed with intelligent technology that allows it to adapt to the environment for a display of up to 150 inches. This daylight projector also has two 10-watt speakers and two 5-watt tweeters, creating an immersive sound experience. 

The built-in Android 10 TV provides access to more than 400,000 movies and 7,000 apps and streaming services. And it’s designed with an ergonomic handle that lets you easily move it from the living room to the backyard. That said, the lack of battery and corded electric power will be a factor in the settings in which you can use this projector.

Best for rooftops: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small and light projector is easy to lug up a few flights of stairs, but it comes in heavy with its picture quality and built-in Android TV. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 200,000:1
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 3-chip LCD avoids rainbow artifacts
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • No 3D support
  • Could be brighter

Movies on the rooftop in the summer—what could be more fun? The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is small and light enough to perch on even the highest roof and delivers a gorgeous 1080p picture once you’re there. The integrated Android TV means you don’t have to go back downstairs to grab a Blu-ray player, and the built-in 5-watt Yamaha stereo speakers save you a trip for extra audio. The 1,000-lumen MicroLaser light source is bright enough for a 140-inch outdoor projector screen if it’s really dark out. Still, it’s more reasonable to expect 80 inches on most neighborhood rooftops awash in light pollution. Thanks to the projector’s 200,000:1 contrast ratio, colors are nicely saturated, and shadow details pop. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range. Besides the built-in streaming functions, the EpiqVision Mini also has two HDMI inputs for external players. 

Best for streaming: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight mini projector is Full HD (1080p), has Android TV 11 built-in, and can work with Netflix.

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ISO lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: Not available
  • Weight: 4.6 pounds

Pros

  • Full HD (1080p)
  • Android TV 11 built-in
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide as much brightness as other models

The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector makes it easy to stream your favorites. This mini projector comes internet-ready with Android TV 11 built-in, providing quick access to over 5,000 apps, including Paramount+ and HBO Max (and you can use a streaming device or contact customer service to watch Netflix.) At 4.6 pounds, this wireless projector is designed for portability and just requires two AAA batteries (we recommend rechargeables) to operate. 

The MoGo Pro 2 supports HDR 10 and features intelligent screen adaption technology that automatically adjust to the viewing space. It’s also 3D-ready. And its two 8-watt speakers work with Dolby Audio for quality sound. That said, it’s not as bright as some other models.

Best budget: GooDee Video Projector

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Despite some flaws, this projector impressed with its 1080p native resolution and a wide variety of inputs—all for about a 10th of the cost of our top picks.

Specs

  • Brightness: 300 ANSI lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 3,000:1
  • Weight: 5 pounds

Pros

  • True HD resolution
  • Dual 3-watt speakers
  • Incredibly inexpensive

Cons

  • No control for display size
  • Hard to adjust the unit height
  • No wireless connectivity

The most recent upgrade to the GooDee projector raises the native resolution from 1280 x 768 to full 1080p, a welcome upgrade that improves picture sharpness. A 300-lumen LED doesn’t provide the most light, but the projector can still create a 200-inch picture with respectable color and contrast—thanks in part to a 3,000:1 contrast ratio. It won’t win any awards for the picture quality, but considering that all this is delivered for less than $200, it’s an impressive device.

Expect some compromises at this price when purchasing a budget-friendly projector, however. For one thing, the projector doesn’t perform well with ambient light; wait until the sun is truly down before starting your movie. It also suffers from a dearth of adjustment controls. For instance, you’ll need to move the projector closer or farther from the screen to make the picture bigger or smaller. But the wealth of connectivity and dual 3-watt speakers add to the convenience and value.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor projectors

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $130, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which our top picks for best outdoor projectors deliver. 

Luminosity

Brightness, measured in ANSI lumens, is one of the most important specs for an outdoor projector. This describes how much light the projector creates. The more light, the bigger and brighter the picture. It also determines how dark a space needs to be for the best projector performance. Since outdoor projectors can’t take advantage of blackout curtains to fight ambient light from a full moon or from inside your neighbor’s home, putting out as much light as possible has distinct benefits. High-end projectors have brightness ratings of 2400 lumens or more, while less-expensive machines deliver somewhat less. While manufacturer claims don’t always match independent testing, the numbers are useful for making general comparisons—a 3,000-lumen projector will be about three times brighter than a 1,000-lumen one. Remember, you can’t ever go wrong with more light, but brightness isn’t the only specification that matters when selecting a projector. 

Let there be light

Images are created by focusing a light source onto a chip, and that image is then sent through a lens to your screen. Light sources come in three varieties: Lasers, LEDs, and Ultra High Pressure (UHP) lamps. UHPs are most common in mid-range and higher-end projectors and are essentially high-end light bulbs. Yes, they’re bright, but they also generate a lot of heat and, over time, can burn out. Replacements aren’t cheap, though you won’t have to swap out UHPs anywhere near as often as you might have replaced the old incandescent bulbs in your hallway. LEDs and lasers are far more efficient than UHPs, but there’s a significant increase in cost vs. performance, and they’re usually built into high-end models. 

Chips

As mentioned above, projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types: Digital Light Processing (DLP), Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS). DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. Sometimes units will use one DLP chip, while sometimes they use three: one each for the Red, Green, or Blue colors that make up an image. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid- to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall, but cost more.

Single-DLP projectors sometimes suffer from what’s known as “the rainbow effect,” where bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. Many people don’t even notice these artifacts, which is why thousands of single-DLP projectors have been sold and continue to sell. Some people simply aren’t bothered by them. If you have an opportunity to test a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect should you encounter it. 

Contrast ratio

Another aspect of picture quality is contrast ratio, or the difference between the black and white output. This is usually expressed as a number representing black followed by a number representing white, with each separated by a colon. So, for instance, something like 15,000:1. 

The greater the difference between black and white, the more color variation the projector displays. An image from a projector with an 18,000:1 contrast ratio will, in most cases, look better than one with a 3,500:1 contrast ratio, with bolder, more true-to-life colors, subtler gradients, and richer blacks. Remember, though, contrast isn’t the only factor in determining picture quality, so always look at the number in the context of all the unit’s specs.  

Resolution

Resolution describes the number of pixels that make up a digital image. A high-definition image is 1920 pixels wide by 1080 pixels high—we often simply call this 1080p. A 4K image (also called Ultra High Definition, or UHD) is twice as large, at 3840 pixels wide (close enough to 4000 to earn the name 4K). The higher the resolution, the sharper the image at large sizes.

A projector that can display a 4K image is wonderful and, since these units also play HD media, you’re covered for whether you’re streaming the latest Marvel movie in ultra-high-def or you’ve dug out an older Blu-ray. At the same time, many HD projectors use a technology called pixel-shifting to double the 1920 resolution. It’s not perfect, but many people won’t notice the difference, and these projectors cost less money. Also, the resolution isn’t the only factor determining picture quality; many movies look fantastic in HD, especially if you’re not blowing up the picture to monumental proportions. 

FAQs

Q: How much does the best outdoor projector cost?

The best outdoor projectors cost roughly $900 to $1,900, depending on features and specs. Generally, with projectors, you get what you pay for. But that doesn’t mean you can’t find excellent units at many different budget levels.  

Q: How many lumens do you need for an outdoor projector?

Outdoor projectors can project an image with a brightness as low as 500 lumens. However, you won’t get as large a picture size at that brightness, and any ambient light will cause the image quality to suffer. For the best outdoor use, look for units with a brightness of more than 2,000 lumens. 

Q: Is it worth getting a 4K projector?

It’s worth getting a 4K projector if you watch a lot of 4K media and want as big a picture size as possible without losing detail. Otherwise, some HD projectors will use pixel-switching technology to create a nice 4K image, while others will accept a 4K signal but down-convert it to HD. 

Q: Can I watch Netflix on a projector?

You can watch Netflix on a projector, along with any other streaming service. Projectors have a variety of inputs, including HDMI and, sometimes wireless, making it easy to connect to a set-top box like a Roku. Some also have USB inputs for Fire TV sticks or similar. Finally, newer projectors, like smart TVs, sometimes have certain pre-installed apps ready to play back media from your favorite streamer right out of the box.

Q: Do outdoor projectors work in daylight?

Outdoor projectors do work in daylight—sometimes. The trick is to find one with a high enough brightness rating for the light you’re dealing with, such as the Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector. However, projectors often suffer at their brightest settings from color and contrast issues that might be bothersome when watching a movie. On the other hand, if you’re gathering with friends for a World Series party, and cinematography isn’t a priority, these shortcomings are much less of a concern. Generally speaking, projectors always perform best in darker environments. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor projectors

Choosing the best outdoor projector isn’t too different than choosing the best projector for your home. To capture that cinema experience, you want one that delivers a large picture with bold colors and rich blacks. On top of that, it needs to be bright enough to overpower ambient light and mobile enough to move in and out of the house easily. A tall order, but one we think XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra accomplishes with ease. Our other recommendations, all suited to handle different resolution, size, and locational requirements, excel in their respective categories without being a better all-around option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best phono preamps for turntables in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-phono-preamps/ Mon, 28 Mar 2022 16:04:06 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=433111
The best photo preamps composited
Stan Horaczek

Plug in one of these unassuming boxes and bring out the nuances of your favorite vinyl.

The post The best phono preamps for turntables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best photo preamps composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Moon by Simaudio is the best overall phono preamp. Moon by Simaudio
SEE IT

An all-around musical preamp with adjustable gain and equalization that will ensure you’re ready for any cartridge.

Best entry-level Curvy black iFi Zen Air entry-level phono preamp with subsonic filter button iFi Audio Zen Air Phono Preamp
SEE IT

With a smart low-frequency roll-off and the ability to produce a deep soundstage from a low-profile body, this robust entry-level preamp is both musical and versatile.

Best features Rega Fono Mini A2D is the phono preamp with the best features. Rega – Fono Mini A2D
SEE IT

An affordable and all-around solid phono preamp with a majorly rare feature at this price: a built-in USB out.

For many music connoisseurs, vinyl is the rule, not the exception, in their collections, and in most serious hi-fi systems, there’s a phono preamp between a turntable and mixer. That’s because most turntables, unlike CD players, deliver an audio signal without inherently raising it to the correct level for your receiver and speakers. Phono preamps solve this problem by boosting your turntable’s signal by between 40 dB to 50 dB. Additionally, phono preamps apply the standardized RIAA equalization curve, an industry standard that counteracts the innate highpass physically cut into most vinyl records produced after 1954. In short, phono preamps are the bridge between your turntable and A/V receiver and a crucial step in most audiophiles’ systems. They deliver excellent EQs that uncover the nuance and depth of your record without overtly coloring it, powerful gain that boosts it without bloating it, and offer control over output. Some even provide USB outs and customizable equalizers. Here are our picks for the best phono preamps worth a spin. 

How we chose the best phono preamps

As a lifelong musician and audio enthusiast, I own and have owned a revolving panoply of audio equipment. For this article, I researched phono preamps at all price points, surveying specs, user impressions, peer recommendations, and critical evaluations. I examined numerous models of preamps from many manufacturers, using my own knowledge of audio gear and my experience as a tech reviewer to compare and contrast these devices, sifting them into multiple categories and ranking them based on a few criteria. Firstly, I looked for phono preamps that do a great job at their crucial function of applying a reliable gain boost and solid RIAA curve. I prioritized phono preamps that deliver especially well, whether providing great moving magnet and moving coil capability in just one package, offering especially deep and robust sound stages, or including special premium features like analog-to-digital 24-bit USB out. 

The best phono preamps: Reviews & Recommendations

Phono preamps usually don’t come with a lot of options and features, but that doesn’t mean they’re one size fits all. Rather, with these technical devices, it’s often important to be sure you know what your sound system needs before you invest. Here are our picks for the best phono preamps for all scenarios.

Best overall: Moon by Simaudio

SimpTronic Tech

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This phono preamp from Simaudio offers a customizable and innately musical soundstage that pairs well with MM and most MC cartridge turntables.

Specs

  • MM or MC: Both
  • Gain control and filters: Yes
  • Weight: 1.05
  • Size: 9.2 x 7.1 x 2.2 inches

Pros

  • Gain, impedance, and resistance controls make this device compatible with most MM or MC cartridges
  • Gorgeous clear audio
  • Great aesthetics

Cons

  • No special features
  • Pricey

If you’re an audiophile looking for a gateway piece of kit to usher your vinyl system into true hi-fi audio, look no further than Moon by Simaudio. A celebrated manufacturer of collector audio equipment, Simaudio creates sonic stages that deliver crisp clarity, resonant depth, and bass response with enough drive that you can really hear the mallets in that first timpani roll in Finlandia (or Bernard Edwards “chuck” in “Everybody Dance”). 

The Moon phono preamp delivers dialable gain, impedance, and resistance settings in the form of switches on the bottom plate, ensuring that your Moon can adapt to your turntable even after you’ve changed out the turntable’s cartridges. For a phono preamp at its price point, it offers decent MC cartridge capabilities that far exceed most of the competition; however, it still sounds thinner and less punchy with an MC cartridge than it will with an MM. That said, this is still one of the best MC-capable preamps with a price tag that doesn’t encroach on the $1,000 price point. 

The Moon is a Canadian-made phono preamp that delivers an excellent, detailed sound and features enough versatility to pair well with nearly the whole spectrum of cartridges, even if its delivery falls off somewhat with the quietest end of the MC spectrum.

Best entry-level: iFi Audio Zen Air Phono Preamp

iFi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a wider-than-normal feature set for an entry-level phono preamp, the Zen delivers MM and MC capabilities with selectable gain and a smart subsonic filter, all while sounding remarkably nice.

Specs

  • MM or MC: Both
  • Gain control and filters: Yes
  • Weight: 1.79 pounds
  • Size: 10.87 x 6.14 x 2.32 inches

Pros

  • Excellent sound quality with great depth
  • Subsonic smart roll-off filter
  • Adjustable gain with MC capabilities

Cons

  • Not as loud and bassy as some competitors
  • May not give perfect performance with MC cartridges

The iFi Audio Zen Air Phono Preamp is a rare audio gear piece that seems too good for its price point. It’s an entry-level preamp that costs a little more than some competitors yet boasts a feature set that exceeds what most of that competition delivers.

Based in Southport, United Kingdom, iFi has been developing high-end audio gear since 2012 (if you’re more into digital-first listening, the iFi xDSD Gryphon is one of our favorite DAC-amps). The company is known for its excellent sound and sleek, curvy enclosures, and the Zen Air phono preamp greatly matches its reputation. The Zen Air offers a sound stage without too much emphasis on the bass register, which supports a sound stage with nuance. Compared to the Pro-Ject Audio – Phono Box DC, which is typically $30 more, the Zen Air delivers more robust mids.

If its innate musicality isn’t enough to make this preamp worth it, the Zen Air’s feature set seals the deal. Perhaps most striking is the subsonic filter switch, which purportedly uses AI to dictate bass roll-off and, in practice, eliminates low flutter and drive rumble without cutting out the juicy low end of your track. The Zen handles MC capabilities with switchable gain levels on the rear. It delivers a lower-than-average noise floor, though, in practice, this will be greatly affected by your placement of the device around other electronics (as with any preamp).

All in all, the iFi Audio Zen is a remarkably capable entry-level preamp that impresses with its innate sound, feature set, and signature look. However, if you’re looking for a more traditionally square, nondescript component specifically for MM cartridges, the Fluance PA10 High Fidelity Phono Preamp is another $99 option with a selectable high pass filter.

Best features: Rega-Fono Mini A2D

REGA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With great sound, and a built-in USB connection, this phono preamp makes sure your analog audio is ready for the digital age.

Specs

  • MM or MC: MM only
  • Gain control and filters: Yes
  • Weight: .22 pounds
  • Size: 10 x 7 x 2.5 inches

Pros 

  • USB out
  • Gain knob

Cons

  • No MC capabilities

For most phono preamps, it’s enough to sound good and offer some breadth of connectivity—maybe they add an EQ into the mix—not so with the Rega-Fono Mini A2D, which doubles as an analog-to-digital converter with the help of its USB connection. The Fono Mini is particularly tiny by preamp standards, it weighs just .22 pounds. The housing features a simple gain knob on the front, next to a centrally located USB output. The back houses the customary ins and outs.

The Rega’s equalization tends toward bright highs but still produces decent bass. Its gain, which is adjusted with the knob on the front, delivers powerful boosting. The lack of EQ customization isn’t too much of a downside, as many receivers offer some degree of customizable EQ if you should want it, and the Rega inherently sounds nice.

It’s the Rega’s USB connection that makes this device really shine. It’s a feature that isn’t common in phono preamps unless you’re shopping for devices five times the price of the Rega, and it seriously expands what the phono preamp can do—and even be. The Rega-Fono Mini A2D is a preamp that questions the bounds of what a phono preamp can be.

Best high-end: McIntosh MP100

McIntosh

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With immaculate sound, discrete MM and MC load dials, and a mechanical switch-off digitizer, the MP100 is a stacked preamp.

Specs

  • MM or MC: MM and MC with discrete circuits
  • Gain control and filters: Yes
  • Weight: 8.6 pounds
  • Size: 11.5 x 3.3 x 13.75 inches

Pros

  • Gorgeous sound
  • Excellent 24-bit USB digitizer included
  • Coaxial and optical output

Cons

  • Expensive

Based in Binghamton, New York, McIntosh is famous for handcrafted, precisely engineered audio equipment. The McIntosh MP100 phono preamp is a true high-end phono preamp with one of the best feature sets on the market. With a glass front featuring the iconic McIntosh logo illuminated in green LEDs and a stainless steel housing, the MP100 shows off its quality at first glance. Those same extra long-lasting LEDs are used for a clipping indicator, as well as type above the various knobs and buttons along the front display. Front controls include separate tiered MM and MC load knobs, an MC/MM input button, a mono button, a digital output level button, and a standby button. 

Perhaps the most exciting feature of the MP100 is its 24-bit analog-to-digital converter. With a USB-B, coaxial, and optical output, the MP100 is ready for vinyl digitization at 24 bits with a 96khz sample rate (much higher than CD’s 16 bits and commensurate with Blu-ray). It’s a pretty futuristic feature that ensures you can rip vinyl records to digital with world-class lossless quality. However, those digital outs aren’t just for ripping FLAC files; the digital outs also allow you to use your MP100 to connect a turntable directly to a home theater system without a full-sized phono receiver. Additionally, in a nod to pure analog lovers, these digital features can be fully disabled and powered down for those who wish to reduce potential noise.

The digitizer isn’t the only exciting feature of the McIntosh, however. It’s a preamp built with love, and it shows. The MP100 contains two discrete phono circuits, one for MM and one for MC, designed with an ultra-low noise floor and flat response in mind, controllable via two loading dials on the front of the device. To solidify that low-noise floor, the device incorporates a multi-regulated power supply. 

If it weren’t for the digitizer, the McIntosh would remain competitive with other high-end handcrafted phono stages in its class, like the Stellar Phono Preamplifier, which also includes dual controllable inputs for MM and MC cartridges, similar to the MP100s dual circuits. However, we think most audiophiles can appreciate native analog-to-digital conversion at 24 bits. Therefore with its feature-rich delivery, exceptional sound handling, and absolutely gorgeous build, we think the McIntosh MP100 is the best high-end phono preamp on the market.

Best budget: ART DJPREII Phono Preamplifier

ART

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a low-cut filter, adjustable capacitance, gain, and a clipping indicator, this preamp puts you in control.

Specs

  • MM or MC: MM (MC limited)
  • Gain control and filters: Yes
  • Weight: 1.1 pounds
  • Size: 1.75 x 4.2 x 3.5 inches

Pros 

  • Highly versatile
  • Significantly more features than you would expect on an amp of this price
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Not the best MC coverage

Generally, when you think of budget items, you don’t expect them to come loaded with a wide feature set. The ART DJPREII, however, is a budget option that’s an exception. At an affordable price point, the ART offers a good sound that may not deliver some of the detail and depth of higher-end preamps but will still create a detailed soundstage with good low-end and pleasant musical highs.

The ART does good sound, but what makes this preamp stand out is everything it throws into the package beyond that solid sound delivery. Perhaps its most exciting feature is a low-end roll-off switch that cuts some of the boominess from older distorted vinyl, or a turntable’s drive rumble, without cutting much out of the mix. On the front of the device, there’s a centrally located gain knob (up to +10 dB) with a convenient clip indicator, as well as a low-cut switch and input cap button. It has a lot of features for such a good price.

While the ART may be able to achieve some results with an MC system, it isn’t nearly as optimized for that as it is for MM. But that’s okay because this product is already loaded for the price. All in all, it’s a budget preamp that should do more than most people expect out of their phono preamp.

Also worth considering: Cambridge Audio Alva Solo

Cambridge Audio

SEE IT

Constructed with an internal switch mode power supply and surface-mounted circuit board for a clean, clear signal path, the Cambridge Audio Alva Solo preamp for moving magnet cartridges is neutral and expressive throughout the frequency range. It’s circuitry that conveys the vibrancy of vinyl and a design the company is so proud of that it has been adapted in some form into both the $2,999 flagship EVO 150 integrated amplifier/hi-res network player and the $1,999 flagship Alva TT V2 direct-drive moving coil turntable (both of which are standout products). Another appealing aspect of the Cambridge Audio Alva Solo is how the compact lunar grey exclosure matches physically and aesthetically with the MXN 10 High-Resolution Wi-Fi Network Audio Player and Bluetooth Streamer and DacMagic 200M DAC and Headphone Amplifier with Bluetooth and USB, in case you want to build a hybrid analog-digital stack in a personal listening station—just add high-end headphones for maximum clarity. It’s a specific look, but the same can be said of all our picks. And it doesn’t support MC cartridges. Still, the instrument separation and sonic extension are undeniable.

What to consider when buying the best phono preamps

The first question to ask yourself is whether you actually need a phono preamp. Some turntables and A/V receivers include built-in preamps. Receivers with a grounding screw next to their phono jack (this should be labeled) have a phono preamp. Some contemporary turntables also boost signal all in one and eschew the need for a phono preamp completely. Before you buy a phono preamp, it’s worth investigating whether your turntable, receiver, or even powered speaker (for example, the Kanto YU6 or Klipsch The Sevens and Nines or other turntable-friendly speakers) might include a preamp. Trial and error here won’t hurt anything. You’re golden if you plug your turntable into your sound system, and it begins playing at a decent volume. But if you find little to no sound produced, you need one of the phono preamps listed above.

Sometimes systems with a built-in preamp can also benefit from a phono preamp, as a discrete preamp will often do a better job than the included components. 

Your phono cartridge

Turntables fall into two categories: moving magnet (MM) cartridges and moving coil (MC) cartridges. MM cartridges tend to be heavier and yield a more saturated response. Lighter MC cartridges lean more toward an airier, detailed sound. The two cartridge types are both transducers that change kinetic energy into electrical energy. However, they do this in opposite ways.

MM cartridges employ a stylus attached to magnets, which vibrates between coiled wires as the needle tracks a record’s groove. Because the magnets attach to the stylus, the mass of the magnets puts greater pressure on the stylus and makes it slightly less responsive. MC cartridges invert this system by attaching the coils to the stylus so that they vibrate next to fixed magnets. Since the coil has less mass than the magnet, this creates a smaller and lighter cartridge with less drag and more responsiveness to the vinyl. 

Some phono preamps work for both MM and MC cartridges. However, most lower-end phono preamps are better with common MM cartridges—like the one on the Fluance RT85, a turntable our reviewer loved. If you’ve invested in an MC cartridge turntable, be sure you’ve selected a phono preamp that has enough gain to power your sound.

Filters

One of the most important components of a phono preamp is its equalizer. That’s because RIAA equalization is built right into the way that records have been physically produced since the standard was implemented in 1954. RIAA equalization protocol physically prints a highpass filter into the structure of your record, allowing records expanded playback time and less stress on your device’s stylus. The standardized RIAA equalization curve fixes this by boosting low frequencies and reducing high frequencies.

As bassier frequencies require larger groove widths that take up more space, put more stress on a record player’s stylus, and require more from cutters when cutting a record, RIAA equalization was implemented to initiate a standard physical low-frequency reduction and high-frequency boost on the recording end of all record production, which is then counteracted with a standardized inverse lowpass EQ on playback, allowing for greater record length and longer-lasting needles. RIAA equalization is one of the most important functions of a phono preamp, as it normalizes the inherent physical lowpass cut into your vinyl.

Because of the innate low boost in RIAA equalization, records are prone to low-end flutters and drive rumble, which is boosted along with your album’s bassline. Many phono preamps feature equalization settings designed to help with this and other issues. A low-cut filter (subsonic or otherwise) is a common feature on phono preamps, as are variable gain settings and various other filter patterns that can bring out particular nuances.

FAQs

Q: How much does a phono preamp cost?

This key component to any turntable-centered sound system can cost anywhere from $65 to $2,000 or more, depending on features and finishing touches.

Q: Does a good phono preamp make a difference?

Absolutely. Good phono preamps boost the overall level between your turntable and receiver while delivering benefits like heightened detail and a broadened or deeper sound stage. Some phono preamps even offer special features like analog-to-digital converters. While it might sound counterintuitive, you might need to source a fair amount of add-ins to get the purest signal.

Q: Is phono or line better?

Line is a more powerful signal than phono. Since the phono signal is so much lower than the line, a preamp is required to boost your phono signal before it is sent to your receiver.

Q: Is it better to have a separate phono preamp?

Most discrete phono preamps do a better job than preamps incorporated into turntables or receivers. The best phono preamps do an especially excellent job.

Q: Is RCA the same as phono? Is phono the same as aux?

RCA plugs are used for phono connections. Aux denotes an auxiliary port. Typically, these are used with a 3.5mm jack, which is not the same size as a phono cable. Aux ports are usually used to connect headphones or digital players.

Final thoughts on the best phono preamps

With so much positive output in such a little box, picking a phono preamp can be an exciting step in building a top-tier audio system. The best phono preamps deliver solid sonic boosting and a balanced sound stage equalized for the RIAA standard. Sometimes, they deliver special features like an analog-to-digital converter. Higher-end models can feature dual circuits with tweakable loading settings for moving magnet and moving coil cartridges. For most users, the Moon by Simaudio does the best job at providing everything you need in all the right measures. The iFi Audio Zen Air, on the other hand, is an entry-level contender worth a look for its MM/MC cartridge support and subsonic filter. However, if you’re looking for the truly high-end (and top-dollar) option, the McIntosh MP100 dishes out inarguable quality that’s future-proofed with a native 24-bit analog-to-digital converter. Whatever you pick, some heavenly hi-fi audio awaits.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best phono preamps for turntables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/ecoflow-solar-generator-spring-amazon-deal/ Wed, 27 Mar 2024 16:58:56 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=608167
A Delta solar generator and solar panel bundle in a pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

Power practically anything with this EcoFlow solar generator that's on super-sale at Amazon.

The post Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Delta solar generator and solar panel bundle in a pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The weather is warming up and it’s the perfect time to take a springtime hike over the weekend. Maybe you even want to take a weekend camping trip. A solar generator helps power your cameras, laptops, and phones, and EcoFlow makes some of our favorite ones. We love the fast charging power on the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max, and you could power your entire house using the EcoFlow Delta Pro. You can snag this EcoFlow solar generator and bundle deal for a whopping 45% off—that’s $750 in savings.

ECOFLOW Solar Generator DELTA2 with 220W Solar Panel $899 (Was $1,649)

Ecoflow

SEE IT

This generator puts out 1800 watts of power and 15 outlets, meaning you can power practically anything. You don’t need an outlet to charge it—you can simply use the included solar panel, which is worth $379 alone. It has a lithium iron phosphate battery (LiFePO4, more commonly known as LFP) battery, which gives the generator a longer life span, reduced maintenance, better safety features, and improved charge efficiency, meaning you’ll have it for plenty of power outages and camping trips. Heads-up, they ship separately, so don’t freak out if they don’t arrive at the same time.

More solar generator deals at Amazon:

The post Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best mouse for Mac in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-mouse-for-mac/ Fri, 29 Jul 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458966
The best mouse for macs composited
Stan Horaczek

Take control of your Mac.

The post The best mouse for Mac in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best mouse for macs composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Logitech MX Master 3S is the best overall mouse for Mac. Logitech MX Master 3S
SEE IT

Logitech’s MX Master 3S sets a high bar for what a mouse can do.

Best gaming SteelSeries Prime Wireless is the best gaming mouse for Mac. SteelSeries Prime Wireless
SEE IT

Gaming on your Mac is fast and fun with the SteelSeries Prime Wireless.

Best budget Logitech M100 Logitech M100
SEE IT

Logitech’s M100 offers a simple, straightforward experience at an affordable price.

MacBook trackpads are some of the best around, but it’s hard to beat the precision and comfort of a mouse. Mice provide greater control, improving productivity, and much more comfort over long sessions. Though Mac users often run to Apple’s products first—in this case, the Magic Mouse—we think it is important for you to know there are lots of other options out there. And many of them offer more functionality. Do you want something with multiple buttons that you can program? A gaming mouse with superior customization options? The best mouse for Mac comes in all shapes and sizes, and we want to help you find yours.

How we chose the best mouse for Mac

I’ve used a MacBook Pro for over 10 years and tested a lot of mice in that time. I know how important a mouse is for a steady workflow, and how frustrating it can be to feel stuck with something you don’t like. Over the years, I’ve tested and reviewed all kinds of mice, from gaming mice to pocket-sized travel mice, for publications like Gear Patrol, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. I combined that experience with fellow Apple enthusiasts’ suggestions, general user impressions, and research into features and specs to come up with my picks for the best mouse for Mac users of every type.

The best mouse for Mac: Reviews & Recommendations

Laptop or desktop, with Macs for students or for business, you should use a mouse whenever you can. It’s more comfortable, more precise, and can improve your daily workflow. We’ve pulled together a list of the best mice for Mac users, whether you need something to make you more productive, compete in multiplayer games, or just want something comfortable. There’s a little something for everyone.

Best overall: Logitech MX Master 3S

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The MX Master 3S features deep customization, a terrific scroll wheel, and a comfortable design.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.92 x 3.32 x 2.01 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.31 pounds
  • Style: Wireless
  • DPI: 200-8,000 (can be set in increments of 50)
  • Battery life: Up to 70 days on a full charge

Pros

  • Comfortable design
  • Extensive customization
  • Fantastic battery life

Cons

  • No left-handed model

We’re typically fans of Logitech accessories in general, and the Logitech MX Master 3S was the best ergonomic mouse we’ve tried, earning it a spot here. It features a comfortable hybrid design, flexibility, multitude of productivity-enhancing features, and it lasts up to 70 hours per charge. When it does run low, one minute of charging will get you three hours of use. Our favorite physical design features were the MX Master 3S’ dedicated thumbwheel and controls above the thumb rest, which offer superior flexibility while demanding little hand movement.

This mouse may look intimidating at first, but it felt immediately natural in the hand during our tests. As a bonus, its buttons were extremely quiet—so much so that we can recommend this mouse for office use. Its scroll wheel moves along with satisfying, incremental clicks. Initially, we didn’t know what to make of the thumb wheel but found it helpful while working in image editing applications, which is when horizontal scrolling was most helpful. Photoshop, Illustrator, and InDesign users will find this feature indispensable.

One of the most convenient features of the MX Master 3S is the ability to pair it with up to three Bluetooth devices. A recessed button on the bottom of the mouse allows you to easily switch between connections, but it will never get pressed accidentally during regular use. We used the mouse with both our personal and work laptops and switched between them without seamlessly. The biggest surprise we found while testing this mouse was the usefulness of Logitech’s Logi Options+ software, which let us designate a specific function to the mouse’s scroll wheel click and side buttons. Accessing core system features without taking our hand off the mouse was a huge time saver.

Logitech’s MX Master 3S is an ergonomic triumph and a powerful, precise instrument we could recommend to anyone looking for a wireless mouse for creative work. Plus, it pairs beautifully with a top pick in the best keyboards for Macs.

Best Apple mouse: Apple Magic Mouse

Apple

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Apple’s Magic Mouse is a simple-looking but technically advanced option for those who’re used to multitouch gestures on other Apple hardware.

Specs

  • Dimensions: .85 x 2.25 x 4.47 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.22 pounds
  • Style: Wireless
  • DPI: 1300 (can be set in increments of 50)
  • Battery life: Up to 90 days on a full charge

Pros

  • Touch-sensitive top
  • Curved design
  • Also works with iPad

Cons

  • Cannot be used while charging

Apple’s own Magic Mouse has advantages over third-party mice, especially if you also spend time working on an iPad. The low-profile mouse has a curved top, which contours to the hand, and a pair of buttons whose functionality can be customized in macOS. More importantly, the entire top section of the mouse is a touch screen, which allows you to use gestures to accomplish certain tasks. Swiping up and down will scroll your screen, double-tapping will zoom into a section of your screen, double-tapping with two fingers will bring up mission control, swiping with two fingers will allow you to swipe between full-screen apps, and swiping with one finger will swipe between pages. These gestures can be disabled in MacOS, but leaving them can be handy as it makes getting around the operating system easier. Speaking of operating systems, the Magic Mouse was designed to work with both iPadOS and macOS, which is helpful if you use both recreationally or to get work done. Our chief complaint with the Magic Mouse is that its Lightning charging port isn’t USB-C and is located on the bottom of the mouse, so you can’t use it while it’s being charged.

Best wired: Logitech G403

Logitech G

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Logitech G403 provides users with robust customization, long-lasting comfort, and the ability to adjust the mouse’s weight.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.88 x 2.68 x 1.69 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.19 pounds
  • Style: Wired
  • DPI: 200-12,000
  • Battery life: N/A

Pros

  • Six programmable buttons
  • Onboard memory means you can take settings with you
  • RGB lighting
  • Adjustable weight

Cons

  • Some might find it too flashy as an everyday mouse

The Logitech G403 is a simple, six-button gaming mouse that’s perfect for any kind of computing. Its understated design, deep customization, and ergonomics work just as well for work as they do for play. With rubberized grips for improved grip and control, Mac-compatible configuration software, and an adjustable weight system, the G403 gives you lots of room to customize how your mouse feels so that you have precise control. Whether gaming or working in spreadsheets, Logitech G403 provides users with a robust, highly customizable experience.

Best portable: Logitech MX Anywhere 3S

Logitech

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The MX Anywhere 3’s compact design and powerful features make it the perfect portable option.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.96 x 2.56 x 1.35 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.21 pounds
  • Style: Wireless
  • DPI: 200-4,000
  • Battery life: Up to 70 days

Pros

  • Compact, comfortable design
  • Extensive customization
  • Excellent scroll wheel

Cons

  • Side buttons aren’t suited for left-handed use
  • Not as comfortable as a full-size mouse, especially for people with large hands

Logitech’s MX Anywhere 3 features a compact design that doesn’t feel like a compromise. The conventional six-button mouse is small enough to fit in a shirt pocket but large enough to provide some support for your hand. Like the MX Master 3S, it offers many Logitech “MX”-level features, including the ability to connect with up to three devices over Bluetooth and a USB dongle, plus a sensor that can track on glass. If you’re hitting the road this summer, the MX Anywhere 3 is the mouse you want for your Mac.

Best ergonomic: Logitech Lift

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Logitech Lift vertical mouse prioritizes comfort and ergonomics without sacrificing features.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 2.8 x 2.7 x 4.25 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.27 pounds
  • Style: Wireless
  • DPI: 400-4,000
  • Battery life: Up to two years (single AA battery)

Pros

  • Vertical design puts your hand in a more natural posture
  • Customizable buttons
  • Excellent battery life

Cons

  • No rechargeable battery

The Logitech Lift is a vertical ergonomic mouse that allows you to control your cursor without twisting your wrist to lay your hand over it. This reduces wrist strain by having your hand posture in a more natural position, reducing pain induced by repetitive strain injuries. It isn’t quite as feature-rich as the MX Vertical, but the Lift is a good starting point and offers up to two years of battery life off a single AA battery (or consider a rechargeable one). The Lift is also one of the few mice available in not only a right-handed form but also a left-handed orientation, making it accessible to everyone.

Best gaming: SteelSeries Prime Wireless

SteelSeries

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon, eBay

Why it made the cut: Featuring a durable design, great battery life, and support for multiple grip styles, the SteelSeries Prime Wireless is a great gaming mouse for Mac.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.93 x 2.67 x 1.66 (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.17 pounds
  • Style: Wireless
  • DPI: 100-18,000
  • Battery life: Up to 100 hours

Pros

  • Sleek, simple design
  • Supports multiple grip styles
  • Durable

Cons

  • Expensive

If you plan to play competitive games on your iMac or MacBook Pro, the SteelSeries Prime Wireless will provide you with the precision and accuracy necessary to defeat your opponents. This gaming mouse was designed in collaboration with 100 esports pros, featuring 18,000 DPI and a lag-free experience that promises up to 100 hours of battery life on a full charge. The SteelSeries Prime Wireless has also been designed to accommodate both standard “palm” grips and gaming-focused “claw” and “tip” grip styles and features mouse switches rated to work for up to 100 million clicks. And when you’re not gaming with the Prime, you can customize the device’s buttons to fit with your workflow.

Best budget: Logitech M100

Logitech

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Logitech’s M100 offers a simple, straightforward experience at an affordable price.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.45 x 2.44 x 1.5 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 0.19 pounds
  • Style: Wired
  • DPI: 1,000
  • Battery life: N/A

Pros

  • Simple design
  • Ambidextrous
  • Doesn’t need batteries or charging

Cons

  • Very basic

For a simple plug-and-go experience, the Logitech M100 offers a great design at an affordable price. It doesn’t feature the extra buttons of our other picks and can’t be customized, but it provides users with a familiar experience that’s precise, fast, and accurate. It’s also ambidextrous, so it will feel comfortable whether you’re a left-handed or right-handed user. The only problem you might run into is that the M100 connects via USB-A port, which many newer MacBook Pro and MacBook Air laptops don’t have (and check out our thoughts on the latest MacBook Air, the M3). In that case, you might want to consider purchasing a USB hub to get connected.

What to consider when picking the best mouse for Mac

A good mouse should feel comfortable and accurate. You should be able to hold the mouse for a long time, moving the mouse quickly and smoothly across most surfaces without losing track of your cursor. You can plug in or connect almost any mouse to a Mac and start using it right away, but many high-end mice require configuration software to take full advantage of their features, so make sure your mouse plays nice with Mac.

Most Mac users should prioritize wireless mice since most Macbooks made in the last few years have very few ports. In that case, it should offer good battery life and provide a consistent connection.

Wired or wireless?

Before you choose a wired or wireless mouse, you must understand the pros and cons of each setup. Wireless mice are generally more versatile and convenient because they allow users to move quickly from home office to coffee and can pair with multiple devices simultaneously. Wired mice, on the other hand, are typically tethered to a single work or home desktop and may not always be convenient to unplug, so they’re not suited for travel.

However, wired models provide guaranteed stability and less input lag, particularly compared to cheap wireless mice. You also don’t need to wonder about charging or replacing batteries when using a wired mouse, although the battery life of most wireless mice is excellent and shouldn’t be an issue if you charge it weekly.

The best wireless mice generally connect to your computer via a 2.4GHz wireless dongle, which requires a USB connection. In a few cases, you can find a mouse with a USB-C dongle, which is perfect for a MacBook, but users looking for the best possible performance may still find themselves reaching for a USB hub.

We recommend most Mac users get a wireless mouse. Aside from the 2021 MacBook Pro, most recent Mac models only offer a handful of USB-C ports, so connecting a wireless mouse over Bluetooth is the easiest connectivity option. At this point, wireless mice provide close to equal performance to wired mice, particularly outside of gaming.

Comfort

The mouse you buy should feel comfortable all day long. Mice designed with ergonomics in mind support your hand, so you don’t need to grab it or extend your fingers to reach their various inputs. They also allow you to hold your arm in a more natural posture. A poorly designed mouse will feel flat and feature hard-to-reach buttons that force you to shift your hand on the mouse to reach them.

If you can, test out a mouse before you commit to a specific model. Your preferred size, weight, and mouse shape may vary. A few minutes of testing is no replacement for hours of use, but it can still give you an idea of how a mouse’s shape fits in your hand.

Buttons and software

Mice come in all kinds of configurations. Most center around the standard “five-button” format: Left- and right-click panels, two side buttons, and a central button (often in the form of a clickable scroll wheel). That said, some high-end mice offer as many as 10 to 12 buttons, giving you the option to program frequently used keyboard inputs onto your mouse. These more feature-rich mice are often coveted for gaming, but also appear on productivity mice designed for creative workflows and “power users” who want to optimize their PC workflow.

Regardless of how many inputs they have, gaming mice and high-end productivity models usually support a configuration app designed by the manufacturer, which allows you to customize what each button does. These features boost productivity and allow users to create an experience tailored to their workflow. If you buy a mouse that relies on one of these apps, you should check to ensure its configuration software runs on macOS. Many popular mouse brands, particularly those focused on gaming, do not offer macOS versions of their apps.

Mouse sensor

Virtually all modern mice feature an optical sensor on the bottom, which tracks the mouse’s movement so your on-screen cursor can match it. Optical sensors use a small LED light and a photo sensor to look for even the smallest changes in the surface underneath your mouse. Your mouse updates cursor placement on-screen based on your movements.

Not all mouse sensors are created equal, though almost any mouse made by a major manufacturer should be well-equipped for everyday work and web browsing. Broadly speaking, a better mouse sensor offers a more responsive experience and the ability to fine-tune your control. Some cheaper sensors may have a hard time on certain surfaces, such as glass. You may also find that better sensors are less likely to lose track of your mouse when you pick it up to move it.

On a more granular level, mice with “powerful” sensors will offer better, more customizable tracking. You will see that primarily through the mouse’s maximum cursor speed or “sensitivity,” which allows you to adjust how far your cursor moves when you move your mouse. Sensitivity is measured in “dots per inch” (DPI), which tells you how many pixels your cursor will span when you move your mouse 1 inch. The vast majority of mice offer a high-enough max DPI for any standard-size monitor, but it can be helpful to look at as an indication of general sensor quality. There’s a wider range of mouse sensor specs that measure its ability to track your mouse’s movement, but they’ll only help the most discerning competitive gamers.

FAQs

Q: Are all mice compatible with Mac products?

Mice are generally platform-agnostic. Technically, you can connect any mouse, and it should just work on a basic level. That said, many mice support configuration software that allows you to take full advantage of their features, and not all manufacturers make their apps available on macOS. We can’t recommend buying a mouse if you won’t have access to its full functionality.

Also, some mice are designed to integrate with specific features within a platform. For example, Logitech offers a version of its excellent MX Master 3 for Mac, which integrates more deeply with devices like the MacBook Pro. 

Q: What’s the difference between a Magic Mouse and a normal mouse?

Apple’s Magic Mouse is … a unique device. As a first-party Apple peripheral, it integrates seamlessly with Mac devices, and its sleek look matches many Apple computers. At the same time, the Magic Mouse’s minimalist design creates some confounding flaws. 

The Magic Mouse’s top surface is very flat and allows you to set different inputs for clicking on the left or right side, as well as using swipes, pinches, and tapping. No other mouse does that quite the same way. However, that flat surface isn’t particularly comfortable for conventional mouse use. Meanwhile, it lacks side buttons and features a charging port on the underside of the mouse, preventing you from using it while charging.

Candidly, we think there are better options for Mac users unless you have your heart set on buying an Apple peripheral to go with your Apple computer.

Q: Is a wired or wireless mouse better?

Picking between a wired and wireless mouse often comes down to convenience. At this point, most wireless mice provide a stable connection without introducing a noticeable amount of additional input lag outside of gaming. A wireless mouse cuts the cord but introduces some maintenance. A wired mouse means you don’t have to worry about charging or losing a dongle.

For Macs, especially modern Mac laptops with only a couple of USB-C ports, we recommend looking for a wireless mouse so you can avoid using a USB hub to connect it.

Final thoughts on the best mouse for Mac

Mac users have dozens of quality mice options that range in size, features, and price. The hard part is wading through the multitude of choices and finding the one that works best for you. Our picks above provide a good jumping-off point for every type of user, whether you want something ergonomic or portable. Whatever you choose, make sure it offers the features that fit into your workflow and, most importantly, is comfortable to use over an extended period.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mouse for Mac in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bidets in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bidet-toilet/ Wed, 06 Oct 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278386
A lineup of the best bidets on a white background
Amanda Reed

Pop a squat on one of these bidets and trade abrasive toilet paper for a stream dream.

The post The best bidets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best bidets on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall The Toto Washlet S550E is the best bidet on the market.toto-washlet-best-bidets-overall Toto Washlet S550e
SEE IT

The Washlet provides premium features with the quality that makes you feel like you’ve landed in a spa.

Best with Dryer The Brondell Swash 1400 Luxury Bidet Toilet Seat is the best bidet with dryer. Brondell Swash 1400 Luxury Bidet Toilet Seat
SEE IT

A soothing heated seat and dryer let you relax while you take care of business.

Best Budget The LUXE Bidet Neo 120 is the best budget bidet. LUXE Bidet Neo 120
SEE IT

Two dials control it all and let you retrofit your toilet at a bargain price.

Bidets aren’t unusual in Asia, Europe, and the Middle East, but they’ve been a foreign topic of conversation in the United States until recently. Thankfully, many people learned a few lessons about the pros of a gentle water spray to cleanse our most sensitive parts in the midst of toilet paper shortages and conservation conversations. Bidets feature safeguards that ensure only clean water touches the body and are less abrasive than traditional toilet paper. Whether you’re ready to install a bidet/toilet combo or transform your existing toilet, there’s a model that will do the job. You don’t necessarily need to spend a bundle (though you can). What you do need is a little research (like what we’ve got) to figure out exactly which model you need. Trust us, if you haven’t experienced the fresh, clean sensation of the best bidets, you’re in for a clean (and sanitary) treat.

How we chose the best bidets

Bidets upgrade one of the most intimate spaces of the home. We asked a series of questions to determine which ones belonged on our list:

Performance: Does the bidet do what it’s supposed to do? Can different users get the same results? Is it durable? If it doesn’t get you clean, it didn’t make the list.

Installation: Do you need a professional, or can DIYers handle it? Does the bidet come with all the necessary hardware? Installation isn’t always a cinch, but it should be doable. 

Ease of operation: Do you need an advanced degree to wash your hiney? The answer had to be no to this one to make it onto our list. You shouldn’t have to study to use the toilet, er, bidet.

We also looked at reviews, recommendations, and performed heavy research to narrow down our picks.

The best bidets: Reviews & Recommendations

No toilet paper? No problem, if you have a bidet. One of our picks should keep your bottom clean and make you feel like you’ve come out on top.

Best overall: Toto Washlet S550E

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Toto Washlet S550E installs onto an existing toilet yet provides premium cleaning and comfort, making it one of the best bidets on the market.

Specs

  • Type: Electronic
  • Installation: Existing toilet
  • Adjustable temperature and pressure: Yes

Pros

  • Heated seat and warm water
  • Remote control
  • Features eco-friendly e-water cleaning after each use
  • Memory for two users

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Sensor can cause lid to open when not using the bidet or toilet

Toto bidets set the standards that other brands emulate. The Toto Washlet provides control over just about every bidet variable: a heated seat, nightlight, air dryer, auto lid, air deodorizer, and warm spray water are all included. You may not need an air deodorizer, but with the S550E, your toilet smells fresh and clean after every use. Not bad. Not bad at all. 

A remote control gives you power over all of it. You can adjust the wand angle, water temperature, water pressure, or set the water to oscillate. The nozzle automatically self-cleans after each use. That doesn’t mean you don’t ever need to clean it every now and then manually, but it’s constantly getting rinsed. This model has a memory feature for up to two users. Toto includes a pre-mist feature as part of the e-water design that wets the inside of the bowl to prevent debris from sticking.

This Toto is pricey. And, if the toilet placement in the bathroom is just right, the automatic lid may open and close every time someone enters the bathroom.

Best toilet combo: WOODBRIDGE B-0960S B0960S Smart Bidet

Woodbridge

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Woodbridge gets the top spot among bidet-toilet combos for its sleek outward appearance and highly efficient (and luxurious) inward performance.

Specs

  • Type: Bidet/toilet combo
  • Installation: Full replacement
  • Adjustable temperature and pressure: Yes 

Pros

  • Attention to detail in construction and design
  • Remote control
  • Adjustable water temperature, pressure, and toilet seat temperature

Cons

  • Installation can be difficult
  • Poor customer service

The WOODBRIDGE B-0960S B0960S Smart Bidet brings pretty much everything you could want from a bidet-toilet combo to the bathroom. It offers a sleek, tankless design and a remote control. Every screw and fastener has a cover, so all you see is a sleek, sophisticated toilet. You don’t even have to flush yourself. The sensor automatically flushes when you exit.

The seat has adjustable heat, and a dryer finishes off the job. The Woodbridge even has a built-in air purifier that draws air in and over a carbon filter to get rid of odors. A high-tech spray nozzle offers an oscillate or massage setting, too. It’s all controlled with a touchscreen remote control that you can hold in your hand or mount to the wall.

However, this sophisticated bidet isn’t the easiest to install, and the company doesn’t offer the best customer service. Some reviewers have also had trouble with water volume when flushing. Once you get it up and running, however, this splurge is quite the experience.

Best with dryer: Brondell Swash 1400 Luxury Bidet Toilet Seat

Brondell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brondwell’s memory features and heat adjustability put it at the top of the pack when it comes to bidets with dryers. 

Specs

  • Type: Electric
  • Installation: Existing toilet 
  • Adjustable temperature and pressure: Yes

Pros

  • Fits on an existing toilet
  • Memory feature makes automatic adjustments to dryer temperature
  • Self-cleaning features

Cons

  • Flimsy plastic in the seat
  • Trouble maintaining water temperature in winter

The Brondell bidet fits onto an existing toilet and comes in either an elongated or round design. The air dryer on this model offers warm, comfortable heat that’s fully adjustable using the remote control. The remote lets you set memory settings, so with the touch of a button, the bidet is set specifically for you. A heated seat keeps the rest of you warm.

Two stainless-steel nozzles do the rinsing, and they get sterilized after each use. A removable deodorizer freshens the bathroom, and a gently closing lid means no more slamming. 

There are a couple of cons with this model. A few users have had problems with the plastic in the seat breaking down after a year or two. Others have found that the unit has trouble maintaining the water temperature, especially in winter.

Best electric: Bio Bidet Bliss BB2000

Bio Bidet

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Bio Bidet Bliss adds a little extra with different streams for each gender and high-tech touchscreen controls. 

Specs

  • Type: Electric 
  • Installation: Existing toilet
  • Adjustable temperature and pressure: Yes

Pros

  • Three stream options for different genders or washing preferences
  • Self-cleaning, from the inside out
  • Activate main features without remote control

Cons

  • Seat heating function doesn’t work well

The Bio Bidet Bliss is the best electric bidet for how its combination of features works together. There’s one worth mentioning right upfront—the three stream options: posterior wash, feminine wash, and vortex wash. The posterior and feminine wash come out of different openings and angles to clean different parts of the anatomy. The vortex wash uses extra water for added cleaning power. 

The Bliss nozzle self-cleans, but it does it from the inside out. First, it rinses the inside of the nozzle before running water over the outside to finish the job. While this model has a remote control on which you can access and adjust every feature, it also has onboard manual controls for the main functions. The Bliss is an excellent option for those who don’t want to mess with settings every time they go to the bathroom. The Bliss tops off the features with a heated seat, warm water, air dryer, and built-in nightlight.

Where it doesn’t seem to function as well is the heated seat. Some users have found that it doesn’t get very warm or stay very warm.

Best budget: LUXE Bidet Neo 120

Luxe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The LUXE made the cut for the simplicity of the installation and design and the impressive performance, which is all you really need from a budget bidet. 

Specs

  • Type: Non-electric
  • Installation: Existing toilet
  • Adjustable temperature and pressure: Temperature—no, pressure—yes

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Self-cleaning feature
  • Manual, so it doesn’t turn on if you don’t want to use it

Cons

  • No warm water
  • May require bumpers to stabilize and protect the toilet seat

The LUXE Bidet Neo 120 attaches to your existing toilet seat with an easy installation process. (You may need some additional hardware based on the toilet seat shape and design.) The LUXE attaches underneath an existing toilet seat. 

Manual controls on the attached control box run the show. This model only has two dials. One controls water pressure, and the other turns on the bidet and turns on the self-clean feature. However, there’s variation in water pressure because the pressure starts at the house pressure. If you have high water pressure in your home, you’ll automatically get more pressure with this model. 

On the downside, there’s no heated water—room temperature and cold are all you get. And, as we pointed out earlier, you might have to install additional bumpers on the seat to get it to flush. 

Also consider: Soft Spa Electronic Bidet Toilet Seat

Soft Spa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Soft Spa Electronic Bidet Toilet Seat offers an array of customizable features to suit any user, and it provides the option of a hands-free nozzle clean.

Specs

  • Power method: Electrical cord (outlet required)
  • Materials: Plastic, metal, stainless steel, and rubber
  • Style: Elongated

Pros

  • 12 features
  • Remote-controlled
  • Works with most standard flush systems
  • Adjustable water temperature
  • Dryer

Cons

  • Only plug into a GFCI grounded outlet

If you’re looking for a way to save money on toilet paper and cut down on its negative environmental impacts, Soft Spa 9500 gives you everything you could want from a bidet toilet seat without being too cumbersome in your bathroom. It comes with 12 remote-controlled features, ranging from adjustable seat and drying temperatures to a night light (making it easier to use if you stumble in the middle of the night). You can adjust the water temperature and pressure to your own liking, and the bidet also offers a gentle mode. The self-cleaning wand and deodorizer feature keep you fresh and mess-free. 

Fluidmaster reports that installation takes less than half an hour. The model comes with the bidet seat and lid, remote control, supply lines, and everything you need besides a wrench and flathead screwdriver. The provided T-valve taps directly into your water line to channel water both to your bidet seat and the toilet tank. The four-foot electrical cord can be used with a temporary extension cord—if you opt to do this, Fluidmaster recommends you only use a three-prong grounded extension cord rated for 15 amps. The bidet has a GFCI plug, so it can be used with or without a GFCI outlet, according to Fluidmaster.

Also consider: TUSHY Ace electric bidet seat

TUSHY

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The TUSHY Ace integrated seat can be installed in less than 10 minutes so its oscillating spray can provide you with a lifetime of soothing cleansing.

Specs

  • Power method: Electrical cord (outlet required)
  • Materials: Plastic, metal, stainless steel, and rubber
  • Style: Elongated and Round options

Pros

  • 5-setting seat warmer
  • Side control panel plus capacitive-touch remote
  • Works with most standard flush systems
  • Adjustable water temperature, pressure, angle (including front wash)
  • Dryer
  • Fits 95% of American toilets

Cons

  • Only plug into a GFCI grounded outlet

If you’re looking to make it a new bidet day, don’t sit out getting a TUSHY Ace. It’s a top value from a company that understands branding. I tried to come up with some booty-focused wordplay that wasn’t already on the internet retailer’s website and/or packaging and found it a real challenge. They take the crown and, well, own the throne. It takes more than … cheekiness to make a great product, however. Luckily, TUSHY delivers a clean sweep there, too. I tried the TUSHY Ace electric bidet during the cold winter months, and it warms my heart to say it warmed my butt. It was the best heated addition to my ablutions, and it easy to install—something I say as someone who should not be trusted around tools. And its remote-controlled features—including temperature-regulated seat and water, angle-adjustable rear- and front-facing nozzle, plus a “derri-air” dryer—made it a welcome modern addition to hindquarters headquarters. It’s as simple to use as it was to attach. Spoil, don’t soil yourself, and invest in a bidet that oscillates as you luxuriate—your butt deserves to be put on a pedestal. It’s even portable, sort of, if you’re willing to take the 10 minutes to install it here or there. Is a bidet ass-ential? Admittedly, no, but the bottom line is it can be worthwhile and the best attachment for an easy bathroom upgrade nonetheless. And it never hurts to watch for the company’s semi-annual sales so that you can save some paper of both the sanitary and currency varieties. — Tony Ware

What to consider when buying the best bidets

Not all bidets are built the same. Here’s what you should know before snagging one for yourself:

Types of bidets

  • Electric: Electric bidet seats are the most high-tech and luxurious of the bidets. You can control water pressure and temperature and enjoy a warm toilet seat while using a remote to make adjustments. These models usually clean themselves, too. Some include a built-in dryer, kind of like your own personal car wash (no TP needed). These models install onto an existing toilet.
  • Non-electric: Non-electric bidets also install directly to an existing toilet. These models tap into the existing water pressure and take some adjusting to dial in the right water pressure. Non-electric bidets may be self-cleaning. Others are manual clean only. 
  • Handheld: You know that water sprayer at your kitchen sink? That’s pretty much what a handheld bidet looks like, except it attaches to your toilet tank. These are other models that are easy to add to an existing toilet. They often have pressure controls, too.
  • Bidet/toilet combo: If you’re going all in, the bidet/toilet combo is for you. These combos have the bidet fully integrated into the toilet’s design. They’re the most expensive option and have all of the features of an electric bidet.

Water temperature and pressure

It’s pretty easy to see why your tushy benefits from adjustable water temperature and pressure. Some models allow you to adjust both each time you use the bidet, while with others, you have to use whatever pressure you get throughout the rest of the house.

Nozzle angles

Bidets with an adjustable nozzle angle let you customize the angle to your backside. Bidet newbies might have trouble making adjustments while using the bidet, so you might want to forgo this feature if this will be your first bidet.

Extra features

Get ready for a little luxury with a heated seat, remote control, or a drying fan. All three of these extras make the bathroom experience feel more like a spa than your home throne. Of course, they’ll add to the price and might take some time to learn to use, especially if they’re controlled by a touchscreen remote.

FAQs

Q: Are bidets sanitary?

Bidets are very sanitary, but they take some getting used to. The bidet does the washing, so there’s no getting debris on your hand or ripping through toilet paper. Many bidets have self-cleaning features that rinse the nozzle after each use. They still need to be cleaned regularly, but for the most part, they clean themselves.

Q: How do you dry after using a bidet?

You dry after using a bidet with either the bidet’s heated dryer or with toilet paper. However, you’ll need much less toilet paper to dab off after using a bidet (a good thing, as toilet paper may be a major source of forever chemicals in wastewater.

Q: How do you pronounce bidet?

Phonetically, bidet is pronounced bi-dae, (dae sounds like day). The word bidet comes from the French word bider, which means to trot. That pretty much describes what people must have looked like when using the first bidets.

Final thoughts on the best bidets

The Toto Washlet S550E provides pretty much everything you need or could ever want from a bidet. Toto bidets also have a distinction as some of the best bidets on the market, a reputation with which we fully agree. If you don’t have thousands to drop on a bidet, LUXE Bidet Neo 120 is just one of the options that can keep you clean for a fraction of the cost.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bidets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to dye Easter eggs, volcano-style: An explosion of color with a splash of science https://www.popsci.com/diy/volcano-eggs-dyeing/ Wed, 27 Mar 2024 14:02:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607782
colorful eggs in a pink glass bowl on a white countertop
Add some color and fizz to your Easter egg dyeing this year. PopSci

You probably already have everything you need to make these vibrant eggs.

The post How to dye Easter eggs, volcano-style: An explosion of color with a splash of science appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
colorful eggs in a pink glass bowl on a white countertop
Add some color and fizz to your Easter egg dyeing this year. PopSci

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Biting the heads off chocolate bunnies is fun, but the real thrill of Easter is dyeing eggs.

Maybe you grew up with the classic Paas tablet kits or your parents tried to dye Easter eggs the natural way with beets and turmeric. Both techniques will result in pigmented eggs but neither can match the science fair-style fun of volcano eggs. That’s right, these eggs rely on the same baking soda and vinegar chemical reaction that made your papier-mâché volcano bubble over in fourth grade. But instead of resulting in a sticky mess of newspaper strips, you’ll end up with a colorful array of dyed eggs that look like a tie-dyed nebula.

So go ahead and add more POP to your Easter eggs this year. (Popping bubbles, that is.)

What you’ll need to make volcano eggs

Ingredients

Tools

Activity time

  • 30-60 minutes

Set up

  • This project can get messy. We placed an old towel under a small laminate art table. You could also do the project outside, but I wouldn’t recommend dyeing the eggs on grandma’s beloved, antique wood table. My project assistant was a 6 year old who rated the fun a “10 out of 10.”
muffin tin, baking soda, vinegar, a dozen eggs, paint brush, and food coloring on a white countertop
You likely have everything you need to make volcano eggs already in your home. Image: PopSci

Directions

  1. Boil eggs in water with 1 tablespoon of white vinegar. Allow to cool.
  2. Fill each muffin tin cup with 1-2 tablespoons of baking soda, depending on how much “paint” you’d like to create.
  3. Add 5-15 drops of food coloring to the baking soda in each muffin tin cup.
    Note: On first attempt, we used “natural food coloring” and the final product’s colors were quite dull. If you’re looking for something brighter (like our final product, seen above), use traditional food dye or the McCormick neon food coloring.
  4. Add a splash of water to each cup and stir with toothpicks to create a paste-like consistency. Add more water or baking soda to get the proper consistency.
Home photo
The consistency of your baking soda paint should be similar to a waffle batter. Create whatever colors you want using different mixtures of food coloring. Also, if you’re working with a child, expect a mess. Image: PopSci
  1. Use a small paint brush to paint your eggs with the baking soda and food coloring paste.
    Note: You can also use your hands to dip the eggs, but may want to wear gloves to avoid colorful finger tips.
  2. After completing your painting masterpiece, place eggs in a bowl to let the color set for 5 minutes.
  3. While the color is setting, wash and dry muffin tin (or use additional tin). Then, scoop 1 tablespoon of baking soda in each cup.
  4. Place one painted egg on top of baking soda in each cup.
    Note: For even brighter colors, add a few more drops of food coloring directly onto eggs in the cups.
Home photo
The baking soda paint will leave your eggs feeling chalky (good!). Putting the eggs in cups with additional baking soda makes for an extra fizzy experience. Image: PopSci
  1. Now it’s volcano egg time! Add a hefty splash of vinegar to each cup. Allow the bubbles to fizz out before moving onto the next cup.
    Note: If you don’t want the egg colors mixing, use less vinegar. If you, like us, enjoy chaos, use more vinegar and let all the colors run into each other.
Animated GIF - Find & Share on GIPHY
  1. After “exploding” (as my child called it) all your eggs, place eggs back in carton or on wired rack to dry. Use tongs or a spoon to move eggs, if you’re trying to keep fingers dye-free.
    Note: We didn’t use gloves and it took 3-5 hand washes to remove the dye from our fingers.

And that’s it! Sit back and admire your beautiful color-explosion volcano eggs while biting the head off a chocolate bunny.

Home photo
Ohhhhhh pretty. Image: PopSci

The post How to dye Easter eggs, volcano-style: An explosion of color with a splash of science appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best air purifiers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-air-purifiers/ Mon, 15 Mar 2021 15:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-air-purifiers-2/
A lineup of the best air purifiers on a white background
Amanda Reed

Whether you’ve got pets, allergies, or worries about wildfire season, you can look forward to better air quality with one of our well-filtered purifier picks.

The post The best air purifiers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best air purifiers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for large rooms Mila Smart Air Purifier Mila Smart Air Purifier
SEE IT

This all-purpose smart air purifier adapts to room size and comes with a carbon monoxide detector and sleep and white noise modes.

Best for smoke Alen BreatheSmart 75i Alen BreatheSmart 75i
SEE IT

This model detects smoke particles and kicks into automatic overdrive to mitigate it.

Best for allergies InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier
SEE IT

Certified to keep you safe from pollen and not contribute to dangerous levels of ozone gas.

Air purifiers suck in pollen, dust, smoke, other allergens, and even viruses—pummeling them and then circulating clean, filtered air. It sounds simple enough, but not all purifiers are created equal, and there isn’t one that’s right for every person. Your particular environment and the size of your home are huge factors in choosing the best option for you. Is allergy season wreaking havoc on your sinuses? Do you live in a smoggy city? Has wildfire smoke been wafting through, blanketing everything in an unnatural haze? In short, even the finest filters aren’t guaranteed to fix all that ails you and your home. But if you’re wondering whether air purifiers are really worth it … we think so. They can help distribute cleaner air, and that’s always a good thing, considering the link between air quality and health. So, read on as we clear the air on what we think are the best air purifiers.

How we chose the best air purifiers

As pet owners and parents, we’ve experienced our fair share of smells and toxins—and that’s just from inside the house. And whether allergy or wildfire season is upon us, there’s always something environmental to consider. With all this in mind, we compiled peer recommendations, critical reviews, online research, user impressions, and plentiful personal testing to create this list of the best air purifiers. We also examined what each air purifier claims to eliminate from the air, its HEPA square footage, and the filters’ MERV (minimum efficiency reporting values) rating ratings.

The best air purifiers: Reviews & Recommendations

Pollen, pet dander, smells, smoke, germs, and other airborne goblins are no match for the best air purifiers. This list includes quiet air purifiers, ones that double as humidifiers, and even ones that claim they can help with a majority of airborne pathogens.

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This three-in-one smart device automatically adapts to changes in air quality and humidity.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 400 square feet
  • Dimensions: 36.66 x 11.02 x 12.23 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 59.8 dB

Pros

  • Connectivity with Siri and Alexa
  • Three products in one
  • Air quality reporting

Cons

  • Expensive

Between its TikTok- and Insta-famous Airwrap multistyler to its line of powerful vacuums, Dyson has made a name for itself in sucking—which we don’t mean negatively. The Dyson PH04 Purifier Humidify+Cool Formaldehyde proves yet again that Sir James Dyson really knows what he’s doing when it comes to pushing air out and in. This air purifier uses an intelligent sensing system and Air Multiplier technology to purify, humidify, and cool the air. You don’t even need to touch the stylish, distinctive unit—it automatically senses and reacts to changes in air quality and humidity (we’ve watched one enthusiastically spring to life time and time again after a particularly aggressive sauté session in the kitchen). It even features a solid-state sensor to detect and destroy formaldehyde emitted by household items—a boon if you’re in a newly renovated/refurbished space, as fresh carpet and new mattresses are emitting odd things.

You don’t have to worry about airborne baddies getting re-released into the air since the entire purifier-humidifier is fully sealed to the HEPA H13 standard. If you love numbers, neat tech, and data, this machine will tickle your brain when it reports your air quality in real-time on the LCD screen and DysonLink app (which you can use to tweak/schedule usage). The filters are low-maintenance and easy to replace, and the machine features a deep-clean cycle to get rid of mineral build-up and bacteria that may be lurking in the water system. Although it’s almost $1,000, you’re getting three devices for the cost of one. Talk about smart.

Best for large rooms: Mila Smart Air Purifier

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mold- and carbon monoxide-detecting air purifier comes in different filter configurations for custom air purification.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 1,000 square feet 
  • Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 15 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 62 dB but lowers to 24 dB while in room

Pros

  • Stylist
  • Small
  • Carbon monoxide, mold detection, and white noise machine built-in

Cons

  • Reviews note excessive air quality notifications

This classy, app-controllable large room air purifier adapts to the size of whatever room it’s placed in. It also looks great in any room it’s placed in. The filter has 45 square feet of HEPA, and with 447 CADR, it’s effective in rooms up to 1,000 square feet. Additional features include a sleep mode and white noise so that it won’t interfere with your sleeping habits. The device also features a carbon monoxide detector. It will monitor your room’s humidity and let you know if it detects any mold. If you’re not a fan of notifications, disable them if you go with the Mila—reviewers note that the Mila app sends lots of alerts.

Best for small rooms: LEVOIT Air Purifier for Home Bedroom

Levoit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take this lightweight, compact air purifier from room to room to experience dual-filter, three-stage filtration in your entire home.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 161 square feet
  • Dimensions: 6.69 x 6.69 x 10.43 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 52 dB

Pros

  • Aromatherapy
  • Dual-filter, three-stage filtration
  • Specifically targets hay fever

Cons

  • Not for large homes

The Levoit promises to help relieve allergies, congestion, and sneezing and is our pick for the best small air purifier. Although we can’t vouch for the unit’s specific efficacy against rhinitis, we can vouch for the fact that it has three filters (one more than most other units): HEPA for dust, pollen, and dander; carbon for odors; and polyester for lint and hair. One fun additional feature is that this one has an aromatherapy option if you’d like a little lavender to help lull you to sleep at night.

Best for quiet: Blueair Blue Pure 311i Max

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Particles down to .1 microns are no match for this quiet-but-powerful air purifier.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: Up to 929 square feet
  • Dimensions: 19 x 12.5 x 12.5 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 50 dB

Pros

  • Removes particles down to .1 micron
  • Stylish
  • App connectivity

Cons

  • Reviews note occasional problems with auto-sensing

Blueair makes svelte cylinders with Scandinavian style packed with highly effective electrostatic and mechanical filtration. The Blue Pure 311i Max is HEPASilent but deadly … against microbes in the air. This stylish, small air purifier features five fan speeds and a one-touch auto mode with a fine particles (PM 2.5) sensor to monitor concentration and adjust speed according. This air purifier can clean a 387-square-foot room in 12.5 minutes and a 929-square-foot space in 30 minutes (there are both larger and smaller models, so something for every home). And, it snags all those particles (99.97% of them down to 0.1 micron) all nearly undetected, clocking in at 23 dB on low/night mode—louder than a quiet natural area with no wind but softer than a whisper. And it never runs above 50dB, which makes it QuietMark certified and perfect for a bedroom, TV room, any room … plus it’s only 8 pounds, so it’s easy to move around while you decide between your study and your yoga studio (or realize it’s easiest to buy two).

Is it working? We barely hear it. But we also don’t hear ourselves sneezing and wheezing and complaining about our watery eyes, so we’re going with yes. If we need more confirmation, we can look at a five-color LED that changes according to Air Quality Index (AQI), or we can reference an app that gives insight into indoor vs. outdoor pollution and lets you control mode, tweak LED Brightness, set a schedule, and more (assuming the 311i Max and your phone are connected to WiFi). And if we don’t want it to be working, Google Assistant and Alexa compatibility let us turn it off with voice commands if our phone isn’t convenient (hooray smart-home devices). While some reviews note that the auto-sensing feature is not as accurate as they hoped, we’ve observed the Blue Pure 311i Max react firsthand thanks to a low smoke-point cooking oil incident or two. It was lively even from across a loft apartment—and helped with the post-coming odors. And the washable pre-filter fabric cover (shown above in “Stockholm Fog” color, quietly complementing some audio-video gear) meshed effortlessly with the decor to boot.

Best HEPA: Coway Tower True HEPA Air Purifier

Coway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Stylish-meets-powerful with this True HEPA air purifier that features four levels of filtration.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 330 square feet
  • Dimensions: 10.5 × 32.7 × 10.7 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 52 dB

Pros

  • Real-time air sensing
  • Washable pre-filter
  • Air quality indicator

Cons

  • Noisier compared to other air purifiers

Multiple fan speeds, a timer, an air-quality assessor, and a filter-replacement indicator light make this the best HEPA air purifier—not just quiet and effective, but user-friendly. At just under $200, it’s neither cheap nor exorbitant for an air purifier, and it’s also aesthetically pleasing. Reviewers note that this air purifier is noisier than most.

Best with UV light: Germ Guardian True HEPA Filter Air Purifier

Germ Guardian

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This quiet air purifier uses CARB-compliant UVC light and titanium dioxide to reduce airborne bacteria, viruses, and mold spores.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 153 square feet
  • Dimensions: 10.25 x 6.75 x 21.5 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 61.2 dB

Pros

  • Quiet
  • Reduces odors
  • Pre-filter traps allergens

Cons

  • UV light can be bad for the environment

UVC light (the most destructive of all the UVs) in an air purifier works as a UVGI—ultraviolet germicidal irradiation—disinfection method by attacking the DNA of cells floating through the air, like mold spores, viruses, and bacteria. (This means, like all other filters, it cannot do anything for particles that have settled into fabric). An activated charcoal filter reduces odors. The 22-inch purifier filters air four times per hour at maximum speed in rooms up to 153 square feet. The four fan speeds, whisper-quiet operation, and CARB compliance make this air purifier an especially good pick for allergy sufferers. California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliance means you can rest easy about its environmental footprint.

Best for allergies: InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier

InvisiClean

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: CARB compliance plus four levels of air purification equals an exorcism for your sneezes.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 319 square feet
  • Dimensions: 12.34 x 6.25 x 17.75 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 55 dB

Pros

  • Four fan speeds
  • Quiet
  • CARB compliant

Cons

  • No auto-sensing

The four fan speeds, whisper-quiet operation, and CARB compliance make this air purifier an especially good pick for allergy sufferers. The California Air Resources Board requires purifiers to produce .050 parts per million of ozone or less, so any device with this certification won’t contribute to unsafe gas levels.

Best for smoke: Alen BreatheSmart 75i

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Detailed air quality indicators, a B7-Pure filter, and a CADR of 347 mean that this air purifier will stop smoke in its tracks.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 1300 square feet
  • Dimensions: 12 x 19 x 27 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 51 dB

Pros

  • 8 colorways
  • Quickly cleans large rooms
  • Auto-adjusts based on air quality
  • Relatively quiet at high speeds
  • Can swap out panel colors to match decor

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Little warranty
  • Heavy

This is an easy pick for the best air purifier for smoke, thanks to its CADR of 347 (out of 450). Thanks to automatic air-quality detection, the unit will kick up to turbo when any type of smoke is present. When no irritants are present, the device goes into energy-saving mode. Five air quality colors give you a more detailed visual indicator of air quality—other air purifiers only include three color indicators. It’s also the “best design” pick in our best air purifiers for smoke buying guide, which you should check out if you want to smash smog and fog (and nicotine-addicted neighbors) specifically.

Best for mold: PuroAir 400 HEPA 14 Air Purifier

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Put your mold worries to be with this hospital-grade air purifier.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 2145 square feet
  • Dimensions: 17.5 x 10.6 x 12.5
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): Not listed

Pros

  • HEPA 14 filter
  • Easy-to-read air quality monitor
  • Lots of trustworthy certifications

Cons

  • No app connectivity
  • A little noisy compared to other air purifiers

If you’re looking to exterminate mold spores that can make you cough, the PuroAir 400 Air Purifier can do just that, thanks to its HEPA 14 air purifier, which is practically hospital-grade. It’s CARB-compliant, and has ETL, ISO, UL, and Energy Star certifications. This all just means it’s safe to use and energy-efficient. A smart sensor works for you, adjusting power when polluted air is detected.

Our only complaint? It’s a little loud on the lowest setting. I personally moved mine to the kitchen since its gentle whoosh was too distracting in my home office. If you’re looking for something quieter, consider our best overall air purifier for mold, the PuroAir 240 HEPA 14 Air Purifier. It has the same HEPA 14 filter found in the 400 but is whisper-quiet.

Best for pets: LEVOIT Core P350 Air Air Purifier

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Eliminate “dog smell” from your space without sacrificing features, design, quality, and price.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 218 square feet
  • Dimensions: 8.7 x 8.7 x 14.2 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 24 dB

Pros

  • Quiet and compact
  • Pet Lock prevents pet and child interference
  • Lots of settings and controls

Cons

  • No app connectivity

Our pets are often considered family. And just like regular children, four-legged kin can stinky, get hair everywhere, and mess with electronics. Thankfully, the Core P350 is an air purifier made with pet ownership in mind. has a three-in-one filtration system and Pet-Lock to stop hands/paws from meddling with the settings. It’s powerful enough to purify a 219-square-foot room in 12 minutes, but only produces 24 decibels of noise. Three fan settings let you choose filtering speeds, and its night mode is so quiet you don’t even recognize that it’s still on. It doesn’t include app connectivity or air quality sensor, but you can’t beat its price and effectiveness.

Best budget: LEVOIT Air Purifier for Home, Core 300

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This compact air purifier tackles smoke, dust, pollen, bacteria, and viruses without hurting your wallet.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 219 square feet
  • Dimensions: 8.7 x 8.7 x 16.25 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 50 dB

Pros

  • Filter life indicator
  • Timer
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Louder than other air purifiers

This cheap air purifier targets smoke, dust, and pollen, along with some bacteria and viruses. Four specialty replacement filters include a pet-allergy option and a toxin absorber for particularly smoky or smoggy areas. Like higher-end air purifiers that are more expensive, this Levoit air purifier features timer settings and a sleep mode. And the display lights can be turned off to ensure a pitch-black room when sleeping. Although the air purifier is louder than some competitors, it resembles a whooshing fan at its highest setting—if you can deal with that, this air purifier is for you.

What to consider when buying the best air purifiers

The best air purifier for you might not be the one your best friend or neighbor loves. You want a HEPA filter with a high MERV rating that’s designed to cover the amount of space you have in your particular room or dwelling. Beyond that, consider whether you want other features like pathogen-killing UV light, smart controls, and/or odor elimination. Do you need the best air purifier for pets or perhaps something portable? Air purifiers for mold or models to get rid of smoke? Air filters work only on airborne particles. To get at anything that’s settled into upholstery or rugs, you’ll need a handy vacuum, a helpful robot, or something else that offers deep-clean suction.

Size of space

There’s an alphabet soup to make sense of when choosing the best air purifier for your home. ACH (air changes per hour) correlates to the airflow of your device. It’s calculated based on the volume of your space, ceiling height, and how many cubic feet per minute the device can cover. It’s independent of other factors, e.g., the filter’s efficacy—to calculate that you need the CADR (clean air delivery rate) rating; because a HEPA filter is more efficient, its CADR rating may be lower, which is deceptive.

The most important thing to note is that an air purifier’s efficacy cannot be calculated based on square footage alone. You can find handy calculators online to determine the proper purifier for your needs, but here’s what to consider with any device: Will it successfully rid your home of odors with carbon or other comparable filters? Is it a good choice for pet owners? Does it feature UV light? Read the fine print.

HEPA

You’ve likely heard of high-efficiency particulate air, or HEPA, filters. They are a type of pleated air filter that, according to the Environmental Protection Agency, “can theoretically remove at least 99.97% of dust, pollen, mold, bacteria, and any airborne particles with a size of .3 microns.” The smaller the particle, the more penetrating and nefarious it can be. So when you’re shopping for air purifiers, check out their filters’ MERV rating—the higher the MERV rating, the better it is at trapping the tiniest particles.

Suppose it’s the coronavirus that has you shopping for purifiers. In that case, it should be said that though a HEPA filter should be able to catch a virus of that size, there’s no conclusive proof that an air purifier can kill airborne COVID-19-carrying air droplets. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has stated that any room housing a coronavirus patient “should be exhausted directly to the outside, or be filtered through a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter directly before recirculation.”

If your main concern about your indoor air quality is lingering food or cigarette smoke odors, make sure the model you’re considering specifically targets fumes and other volatile organic compounds. HEPA filters aren’t good at eliminating odors on their own.

The HEPA filter was initially designed to capture radioactive particles when the atomic bomb was being developed because it can capture 99.97 percent of particles as small as .3 microns, which can evade other types of filters. (This is sometimes referred to as “true HEPA,” as European HEPA standards are required to trap only 85 percent of particles.) It works by ensnaring, sieving, and rerouting irritating particles.

A HEPA air purifier is considered the gold standard, but it does have limitations. Any particle smaller than .3 microns—for example, some viruses and VOCs (volatile organic compounds) like aerosols, ammonia, and other toxins—will slip right through. Changing your filter often enough is key. A HEPA filter does a great job of capturing mold. If you don’t change the filter, the purifier can redistribute that mold back into the air.

Allergies

The best air purifiers for allergies depend on your particular triggers because different filters work on different-sized particles. Pet hair and pollen are large particles, dust is medium-sized, and smoke is small. A combination HEPA-carbon filter is your best bet for filtering the maximum number of irritants to help reduce your allergies.

The addition of an ionizer and UV light, if you’re comfortable with it, adds a belt to your proverbial suspenders. Because UV light does create ozone particles, we recommend choosing an air purifier with UV light that’s approved for sale in California.

Smoke

Pollutants—like smoke and soot—can aggravate asthma, irritate your eyes, and stress your lungs and heart. An intuitive HEPA purifier with multiple fan speeds, maximum air circulation, and zero ozone output is the best one for allergy sufferers and people who are sensitive to smoke. The best air purifiers for smoke have a higher CADR rating. This means your device will be better at eliminating smoke and its odor, whether you’re talking about cigarettes, cannabis, or wildfires.

FAQs

Q: How much does an air purifier cost?

Even cheap air purifiers aren’t that cheap—they range between $50-$900. So, chances are, if you’ve found an option within your budget, you don’t need to second-guess it. Go through all the checkboxes you would for a more expensive model: Does it feature a true HEPA filter? Does your air purifier also feature a carbon filter? Is it ozone-free? If the answer to all those questions is yes, then go for it. What you’re likely sacrificing are bells and whistles you may not even need, like WiFi capability or large-space efficacy, but still possibly getting other extras, like low-noise operation and triple filtration.

Q: Should I sleep with the air purifier on?

Sure, there’s no reason not to sleep with the air purifier on! An air purifier contributes to an overall healthy home environment, even while you sleep. In fact, many models feature white noise or overnight modes, so they can continue to work without disturbing you (and possibly even helping you sleep).

Q: Where is the best place to position an air purifier?

The best place to position an air purifier is probably not where you think. Don’t stick it in a corner or behind a piece of furniture to conceal it. Beyond that, if there’s a particular pollutant (smoke, food odor) that you’re trying to combat, place the purifier near it. You want it 3 to 5 feet off the ground—so on a table or sill if it’s not a tower-style—and, whenever possible, near sites of good airflow, like doorways and windows. Moving your purifier from place to place helps maximize its efficacy.

Q: Will an air purifier affect my plants?

Your plants should be safe and sound in the presence of an air purifier, with one exception: models that expel ozone. Otherwise, purified air is good for plants, just like it’s good for humans.

Q: Do air purifiers with UV light really offer extra sanitation?

Opinions on whether air purifiers with UV lights are worth it differ. UV can conquer indoor air particles that escape other filters, like bacteria and viruses, but the EPA has said there’s no way to measure the effectiveness of UV filtration. The UV lights are technically considered pesticidal devices—”an instrument or other machine that is used to destroy, repel, trap or mitigate any pests, including bacteria and viruses”—according to the EPA, and it does not review, and therefore cannot endorse, those. UV light creates potentially harmful ozone, as well, although the amount is small.

Final thoughts on the best air purifiers

In almost every category, the best air purifiers have true HEPA and carbon filters. Together, they get you the most coverage regarding the breadth of pollutants the purifier will attack. Beyond that, the most important qualities are energy efficiency and picking the right model for the size of your room. Everything else—design, whether the device is app-enabled, UV lighting—is just gravy.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best air purifiers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garage cabinets in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-garage-cabinets/ Fri, 26 Mar 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278265
The best garage cabinets will help you make the most of your space.

So you’ve got a covered space to park your car. Make the most of your space with these storage options.

The post The best garage cabinets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best garage cabinets will help you make the most of your space.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall rolling garage storage system NewAge Products Bold 3.0 Grey 7 PC
SEE IT

These high-strength steel garage cabinets mount to the wall for added stability.

Best shelves wire garage shelves FLEXIMOUNTS 2-Pack 2x6ft Garage Shelving
SEE IT

These floating shelves keep your garage organized without taking up valuable floor space.

Best free-standing vertical garage storage Rubbermaid Storage 72 Inch, Four-Shelf, 2 Door cabinet
SEE IT

Tuck away tools and seasonal items in this reliable shed from Rubbermaid.

Garages can quickly become a catchall space that gets out of hand, but a garage cabinet can help. These handy storage systems can help you organize your tools, gardening gear, sports equipment, paint cans, and more. They come in a variety of designs to serve a range of storage requirements. Here’s what to look for when shopping for the best garage storage cabinets and our recommendations of the leading options on the market.

How we chose the best garage cabinets

Garage storage systems can range from budget-friendly open shelves to multi-piece units with dedicated workspaces that cost thousands of dollars. In putting together this guide, we assessed options from a range of manufacturers that designed solutions for minimal storage needs to full-on solutions for people who use their garage as a workspace. We also took into account the size of garages, mobility, the ability to lock, materials, and price. Finally, we weighed the comments of users who were happy and displeased with garage cabinets they bought.

The best garage cabinets: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether your garage barely has enough space for your car and a door-opening system or serves as an immaculately laid-out central storage location and workspace for a family, there’s a garage cabinet that can meet your needs. Here, we break down the sizes, dimensions, mobility, materials, and special features of our recommendations so you can find the best fit.

Best overall: NewAge Products Bold 3.0 Grey 7 PC

NewAge

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18 inches D x 108 inches W x 77.25 inches H
  • Weight: 800 pounds
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Comprehensive storage solution
  • Comes with workspace and LED lights
  • Lockable

Cons

  • Heavy 
  • Expensive

This comprehensive storage solution comes with lockers, wall cabinets, a rolling tool cabinet, and a base cabinet, plus a workspace. The 800-pound base is secured to the wall, but wheels on the tool-cabinet portion allow for more portable work to be done around the garage. The worktop is made of bamboo, which is easy to clean. This unit also features LED lights which make it easier to see. All doors are lockable so that you can keep children out of your workspace.

Best shelves: FLEXIMOUNTS 2-Pack Floating Shelves

Fleximounts

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 24 inches x 72 inches each
  • Weight: 58 pounds
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Comes in two sizes
  • Can be arranged in range of shapes
  • Steel construction

Cons

  • Storage items won’t be protected
  • Costly 

For people with more minimal storage needs, FLEXIMOUNTS storage bracket shelves are a simple solution. They are made to be installed solo and can be secured to wall studs or solid concrete. The components can be arranged in assorted ways—parallel, pyramid, staggered, etc.—to accommodate different design tastes. These are the way to go if you’re looking for overhead storage. Purchase hooks separately for extra hanging storage.

Best free-standing: Rubbermaid 72-Inch Four-Shelf Double-Door Resin Storage Cabinet 

Rubbermaid

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8 inches D x 36 inches W x 72 inches H
  • Weight: 68 pounds
  • Material: Resin, polyethylene

Pros

  • Comes in three sizes (small, medium, and large)
  • Durable
  • Can hold up to 690 pounds
  • Lockable

Cons

  • Shelves cannot be adjusted
  • Not made of sustainable materials

This large Rubbermaid storage unit features five shelves inside, which hold a maximum weight of 690 pounds. The high-density polyethylene will not deteriorate, rot, rust, or dent—unlike metal and wooden cabinets. This makes these cabinets perfect for storing messier items like soil, paints, or cleaning solutions. The unit snaps together, making setup a breeze. That said, the shelves cannot be adjusted or removed.

Best for tools: Power Tools Storage Organizers and Cabinets

Power Tools

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 9.84 inches D x 33.86 inches W x 17.72 inches H
  • Weight: 22 pounds
  • Material: Wood

Pros

  • Wall-mountable
  • Made of sustainable material
  • Allows you to organize tools of different sizes

Cons

  • No drawers
  • Items on display
  • No locks

Power Tools’ storage organizer was designed with variety in mind. It can hold small objects like hammers and clamps, power drills, and hanging tools. The wood is aesthetically appealing, plus it’s moisture-proof and resists erosion. That said, this unit doesn’t have drawers or doors, so all of your tools will always be in plain sight.

Best cabinet system: Ulti-MATE 8-Piece Garage Cabinet Kit with Bamboo Worktop

Ulti-MATE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 141.8 inches W x 21 inches D x 82 inches H
  • Weight: 911 pounds
  • Material: MDF and particleboard cabinet construction, textured PVC laminate

Pros

  • Provides plenty of storage
  • Includes bamboo workspace
  • Sleek design

Cons

  • Assembly required
  • Stationary

Tipping the scales at a whopping 911 pounds, this 8-piece system comes with a  4-drawer base cabinet, 2-door base cabinet, two 2-door tall cabinets, and three 2-door wall cabinets. This Ulti-MATE System also features a bamboo workspace. 

You’ll need a lot of space to house it, and there are no rollable parts, so once you decide on a location for it, be prepared to stick with it. No matter if you’re storing tools, paint cans, planters, or just need extra storage for household items, this substantial system can handle it.

Best rolling: Seville Classics UltraHD 12-Drawer Rolling Workbench

Seville Classics

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 72 inches W x 20 inches D x 37 inches H
  • Weight: 500 pounds
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Comes with 12 drawers
  • Topped with spacious wooden workspace
  • Designed with wheels for easy transport

Cons

  • Heavy
  • No overhead storage

If you’re looking for a garage cabinet that doubles as a spacious workspace, consider the Seville Classics UltraHD 12-Drawer Rolling Workbench. This attractive solution combines stainless steel, lockable drawers with one storage cabinet topped by a hardwood workspace that’s 72 inches wide and 20 inches deep. This unit will easily fit in with most garages. It does weigh 500 pounds, so the wheels will come in especially handy when you need to relocate.

Best budget: Seville Classics Wall Cabinet Storage

Seville Classics

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Dimensions: 24 inches W x 12 inches D x 24 inches H
  • Weight: 25.9 pounds
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Wall-mountable
  • Lockable door
  • Budget-friendly

Cons

  • Limited storage space
  • No compartments

This unit isn’t designed specifically for garages but can fit right into a space next to your vehicles. It’s two feet wide and one foot deep, so don’t think you’ll be storing your entire life in one of these. Still, it’s a great option for putting away tools and other smaller items, and at such a low price, you can get more than one to satisfy your storage needs.

Things to consider when buying garage cabinets

The hunt for the best garage cabinets isn’t as simple as buying a few storage cubicles and calling it a day. Start with a checklist of questions. Once you figure out what you’ll be storing in your garage, you’ll have a clearer idea of what kind to get.

The first thing to think about when installing garage storage is what future remodeling you might be doing to the space. Permanent storage systems allow for less flexibility with future upgrades. Next, consider what you’ll be storing. While you may want to display sports equipment on an open shelf, paint cans and tools might work better in a closed cabinet and drawers.

If you or anyone else will be doing carpentry work inside the garage—and if there is enough space to accommodate such grand ambitions—you should consider storage that incorporates a workbench. For those who decide to get one that’s separate from the storage, it’s a good idea to get the workbench first and plan the cabinet or shelf storage around it.

Finally, don’t forget the primary purpose of this part of the house. Garage storage and organization should be secondary to the vehicles that will be taking up most of the space. Garage cabinet systems must allow for the easy opening and closing of both the garage door and the door leading into and out of the house. The point of the best garage cabinets is to make the space as functional as possible, not serve as a barrier to such essential activities.

Should you get wall-mounted garage cabinets?

There are myriad benefits to getting wall-mounted garage cabinets—namely that they are more permanent fixtures than free-standing cubbies that sit on the floor. Depending on your taste and the space, these units can either be in the form of enclosed cabinets with doors or wall-mounted shelves. They are typically raised above ground level, so they make it easy to clean underneath the cabinets, and they make the space they are in appear less cluttered. Wall-mounted garage cabinets are also sturdier, and garage storage shelves require less bending than most standalone models. Both are less prone to wobbling around.

This type of organizing system does come with a few downsides. They require installation, and they can’t be easily rearranged once they’ve been mounted to the wall. Also, they may not be as tall as standalone units, which may mean storing longer items elsewhere in the garage. And if you prefer things to be out of sight and out of mind when not in use, wall-mounted storage shelves won’t keep anything hidden.

If the cons of permanent garage storage outweigh the pros, and you aren’t good with a hammer and other tools, make sure you consider the cost of hiring someone to install garage wall cabinets when comparing their price to that of other types of storage.

What about free-standing cabinets?

As previously mentioned, free-standing cabinets are a popular option for garage storage and organization that come with several limitations. If they sit on the floor, you won’t be able to clean under them, and you’ll probably have to do a bit more bending to retrieve items and replace them after use. Although they may wobble around a bit, they’ll likely be tall enough to store anything inside, and they’ll be easier to move around if and when you decide to give your garage a brand-new look.

What can you do about tool storage?

Steel cabinets work best for tool storage in garages. The drawers should be deep and fully extendable to permit the placement of bulky tools, and they should be padded to protect both the tools and the drawers and to stop the tools from moving around inside. Some come with convenience features like surge protectors, organizing trays, and USB charging ports. 

If you are adding tool storage to an existing garage storage system, consider stackable chests that you can place on top. Toolboxes, tool bags, and tool belts are decent alternatives to bulky tool storage, as are peg boards with multi-tool hangers.

Are garage cabinet systems worth the extra cost?

When choosing your garage storage, you can opt for individual cabinets or a full system. One of the big benefits of garage cabinet systems is that the slats or rails permit you to install them anywhere on the wall, rather than being limited to where the studs happen to already be placed.

If you go for a full system, just be sure it will more or less be suited for whatever storage needs you might have in the future. Of course, if necessary, you can always complement it with one or two individual cabinets. 

Do you want a garage storage cabinet on wheels?

If you want the ability to rearrange your garage storage without having to do any heavy lifting, garage storage cabinets on wheels are an excellent idea. If you go this route, though, you need to get a rolling garage cabinet with top-notch wheels that won’t break under the load of the storage space on top of them. 

This may sound like a pretty convenient arrangement if you need to occasionally move things around, or even if you are working on a project and you want to have everything easily accessible from your workspace. You’ll just have to be more vigilant about keeping the floor space clean to prevent small items from getting jammed in the wheels.

What you get for under $100

You can spend hundreds or thousands of dollars on garage storage, depending on your preferences and requirements. Although you can splurge on garage furniture that’s as beautiful as it is practical, if you’re not willing to pay a four-digit price tag, you can still satisfy your basic storage requirements at a fraction of the cost and get something that won’t bring down the aesthetic value of the space. Best of all, you’ll have extra cash to spend on the car you’ll be parking in it.

FAQs

Q: Why are garage cabinets off the floor?

Garage cabinets are off the floor to allow for easy sweeping and cleaning underneath and also to keep contents safe from flood damage. In addition to being more visually pleasing, a bit of height above the ground (four inches or so) means you’ll have to do less bending to reach things at the bottom, and it also makes garage storage systems easier to install and maintain.

Q: How high should I mount my garage cabinets?

You should mount your garage cabinets so that the distance between the surface of the floor and the top of the cabinets is about 96 inches. This height will allow you to reach the top either by standing on your toes or on a chair or stool. 

Q: Can I use kitchen cabinets in the garage?

You can use kitchen cabinets in the garage, including both the base and the upper cabinets. The installation process is pretty much the same, and the combination of drawers and cabinets allows for the convenient storage of larger and smaller items.

Final thoughts on the best garage cabinets

The best garage cabinets come in a variety of shapes and sizes. You can go with wall-mounted garage cabinets, free-standing garage cabinets, or garage storage cabinets on wheels, and individual cabinets and more expansive garage cabinet systems satisfy a wide range of storage needs. The latter can set you back thousands of dollars, but if you’re strapped for cash, you can find decent garage storage options for closer to $100.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garage cabinets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garage storage systems for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-garage-storage-systems/ Wed, 08 Feb 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=509351
The best garage storage systems help you organize your gear.

Corral the gear and organize your garage so there's room for your car.

The post The best garage storage systems for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best garage storage systems help you organize your gear.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Fleximounts Overhead Garage Storage Rack is the best garage storage system overall. Fleximounts Overhead Garage Storage Rack
SEE IT

This overhead storage system maximizes garage floor space by using no floor space at all.

Best cabinet The UltraHD Storage Cabinet is the best garage storage system that's a cabinet. Seville Classics UltraHD Storage Cabinet
SEE IT

This lockable steel storage cabinet is a good option for keeping expensive power tools secure.

Best budget The CX Shelving Unit is the best garage storage system at a budget-friendly price. CX Black & Yellow 4-Tier Storage Shelving Unit
SEE IT

This lockable steel storage cabinet is a good option for keeping expensive power tools secure.

A garage is coveted real estate—an empty space with infinite possibilities, especially if you install a garage storage system. Often, the garage becomes a repository for everything that doesn’t fit in the house, and you need a setup to maximize space. Storage systems come in all shapes and sizes, including shelves, cabinets, hooks, and ceiling-mounted racks. These racks are typically made from durable materials, such as steel or heavy-duty plastic, and feature high weight capacities that can exceed 1,000 pounds. This guide will review some of the best garage storage systems on the market so you can free up valuable floor space and finally use the garage for its intended purpose: storing your car.

How we chose the best garage storage systems

Garage storage is about being efficient with space, so I chose storage systems that can capably hold a large volume of things while taking up as little floor space as possible. Since a garage storage system is bound to take a beating, I chose models made from durable materials that can absorb abuse, such as steel and high-grade plastic. I also considered price, since garage storage systems can quickly get very expensive. Believing that a good storage system shouldn’t cost more than the stuff you’re storing, I chose models that offer the best bang for your buck while still meeting the aforementioned criteria.

The best garage storage systems: Reviews & Recommendations

As someone with a large garage filled with lots of stuff, I’m intimately familiar with the struggles of setting up apparatus like a garage door opener and organizing the interior. And not everyone has room for a standalone storage shed, so efficient use of garage space is a must. I applied my experiences taming my garage in researching more than two dozen garage systems for this list of the top five.

Best overall: Fleximounts Overhead Garage Storage Rack

Fleximounts

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Of all the storage designs out there, this one saves the most space by getting your stuff off the garage floor, making room for the family car.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 600 pounds
  • Storage capacity: Up to 105 cubic feet
  • Dimensions: 96 inches long by 48 inches wide by 22 to 40 inches high
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Takes up no floor space, making it ideal for small garages that also house cars
  • Large amount of storage space
  • Can also hang items from the rack

Cons 

  • Weight capacity of 600 pounds may be too little for heavier storage needs
  • Items are harder to access

If you’re purchasing a garage storage system mainly to get junk off the floor so you can use the garage for its intended purpose—housing your car—then Fleximounts is your best option. Whereas shelves and cabinets do a good job organizing things, they occupy precious floor space. Since Fleximounts hug the ceiling, they take up no floor space. The rack measures 4 feet by 8 feet and drops down from the ceiling 22 to 40 inches.

How much it can store is dependent on the height of your garage ceilings and the position of the garage door. Set to its maximum drop-down height, this rack provides 105 cubic feet of storage, about three times the amount of space that most garage shelving systems offer. You can also hang sporting equipment, gardening tools, and more from the racks for even more storage for those fancy new electric bikes.

Though this overhead rack is an excellent way to save space, some trade-offs exist. The rack can hold a maximum of 600 pounds, which may not be enough depending on what you plan to store on it. You’ll need to haul anything you plan to store up a stepladder to get it into the rack, which can be difficult for some people, especially if the objects are heavy. Accessing items stored in an overhead rack isn’t as convenient as grabbing them from a cabinet or shelf. Still, if your main goal is to maximize floor space in your garage and you don’t mind the access limitations of overhead storage, then Fleximounts is the way to go.

Best cabinet: Seville Classics UltraHD Tall Storage Cabinet

Seville Classics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: We loved this cabinet’s rock-solid construction, lockable doors, and large casters that allow you to maneuver it around the garage even when full.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 600 pounds
  • Storage capacity: 27 cubic feet
  • Dimensions: ‎18 inches deep by 36 inches wide by 72 inches high
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Takes up a small amount of floor space
  • Durable construction with reinforced cornersLarge wheels let you roll it around the garage
  • Lockable door protects valuable tools

Cons

  • Expensive for the amount of storage capacity

While there are more affordable garage cabinets available, few have the durability and versatility of this model from UltraHD. A garage cabinet should be able to take a licking, and this model can, thanks to stainless-steel construction and a sturdy design that includes reinforced steel corners on its top and rubber bumpers on the lower corners.

In addition to its rock-solid construction, I also love the versatility the large, 5-inch, heavy-duty casters provide. The wheels make it easy to roll into position for better access to its contents and are also handy if it’s necessary to rearrange the garage to make room for something else.

While the cabinet’s four shelves provide ample storage, what sets it apart from other cabinets are the lockable doors. The ability to lock the cabinet makes it ideal for storing expensive power tools, ensuring they stay secure even when the garage door is left open.

Although the cabinet does take up some floor space, it occupies a smaller footprint than many other cabinets due to its tall and narrow profile—it’s 18 inches deep by 36 inches wide by 72 inches high. The lockable doors and durable construction make this cabinet ideal for those who like the clean look a cabinet offers or who want a secure place to store their tools.

Best for gardening equipment: StoreYourBoard Tool Storage Rack

StoreYourBoard

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This set of hooks is long enough to hold many gardening tools.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 325 pounds
  • Storage capacity: N/A
  • Dimensions: 37 inches long by 10 inches deep by 3.25 inches wide
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Affordable way to store gardening tools
  • Sturdy steel construction
  • Long hooks can hold multiple tools
  • Mounting system suits most garage setups

Cons

  • Hooks might be too close together for large gardening tools.

Few things add more clutter to a garage than a jumble of yard equipment leaning against the wall. This tool storage rack from StoreYourBoard offers an economical and effective way of getting those tools organized and off the floor. The rack consists of four sets of double hooks mounted to a 3-foot-long bar that attaches to the garage’s wall studs. Each hook consists of two prongs set two inches apart, a design that makes them well-suited for holding garden hoses or the heads of shovels, rakes, weed whackers, or extension cords.

Each set of hooks is spaced 7.75 inches apart, providing enough clearance to hang most garden tools side by side without bumping heads. At 10 inches long, the hooks extend further into the garage than most. While this eats into the space savings they offer, the tradeoff is worth it for those with many gardening tools to hang.

With its sturdy steel construction, the rack can hold up to 325 pounds, well over the total weight that you’ll likely hang from it. Three large lag bolts are included for secure mounting. This rack’s sturdy construction, coupled with long hooks that give it a high capacity, make it an ideal choice for those with an extensive collection of gardening equipment.

Best for sports equipment: Kinghouse Garage Sports Equipment Organizer

Kinghouse Garage

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: We love the multiple racks that allow parents to organize equipment so kids can get at different items without having to dig through all of them.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: N/A
  • Storage capacity: N/A
  • Dimensions: 36 inches wide by 16.5 inches deep by 46 inches high
  • Material: Steel

Pros

  • Multiple racks and bins make it easy to organize equipment
  • Casters allow users to roll the rack out for easier access
  • Mesh bottoms prevent smaller objects from falling through the rack

Cons

  • Not as sturdy as other storage systems

When there’s no place to put all the balls, skateboards, baseball bats, gloves, helmets, and other outdoor sporting goods equipment, they inevitably end up scattered on the garage floor. While throwing all that gear into a bin or two is one option, a better one is this organizer from Kinghouse.

Unlike racks that have one section for holding all equipment, this model features a large storage area on the base and smaller racks at the top. This makes it easier to separate large items like skateboards and inline skates from medium-sized basketballs and soccer balls and smaller tennis balls and baseballs, so kids can access each without having to dig through one large pile.

In addition to multiple racks, this organizer also offers other design features, including hooks on the sides of the rack that can hold baseball bats and a tight mesh bottom that prevents smaller items from finding their way through the rack and onto the floor.

I also love that this rack sits on casters that make it easy to wheel into and out of the garage onto the driveway, making it easier for kids to grab items or put them away. With its ability to store a large volume of stuff while still making it all easily accessible, this rack is an ideal option for those looking to tame a mountain of sports gear.

Best budget: CX Black & Yellow 4-Tier Storage Shelving Unit

Why it made the cut: This shelving set is the most affordable and easy-to-assemble garage storage solution we could find.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 1,600 pounds (200 pounds per shelf)
  • Storage capacity: About 30 cubic feet
  • Dimensions: 48 inches long by 20 inches wide by 55 inches high
  • Material: Heavy-duty plastic

Pros

  • Affordably priced storage solution
  • Multiple shelves can be locked together for easy expansion
  • Assembles quickly and easily
  • Can hold 200 pounds per shelf

Cons

  • Takes up a fairly large amount of floor space

One of the main barriers to getting a garage organized is often the complicated assembly and high price tag that comes with many garage storage systems. This set of plastic shelves from CX is a great option for those who don’t want to spend hours assembling the unit or pay more for the storage system than the value of the stuff they’re going to store. The shelving unit consists of four 20-by-48-inch heavy-duty plastic shelves that can hold up to 200 pounds each, which is plenty of capacity for most storage needs. The shelves sit on sturdy feet with rubber non-slip coverings. Slats are cut into the shelves to prevent moisture from collecting and potentially causing water damage or mold growth.

There are several design features I love about these shelves. You can assemble the shelves in less than an hour with no tools required. The feet are adjustable, allowing you to level the shelves to account for any irregularities in the garage floor. This shelving is also expandable. Grooves on the ends of the shelving allow you to lock it together with another shelving unit on both sides.

Its smart design and high weight capacity make this set of shelves a great budget option for those who don’t mind its larger footprint.

What to consider when buying the best garage storage systems

Capacity

Storage systems need to hold a lot of stuff, so how much a cabinet, rack, or shelf can hold is crucial. Consider how many cubic feet of storage space the system offers and compare it to what you plan to store to ensure the system suits your needs. In addition to volume, weight capacity is also important. How much weight a storage system can handle ranges significantly, from hanging racks with a max capacity of around 300 pounds to shelving that can hold more than 1,500 pounds. Consider the weight of what you need to store when deciding which storage system to buy.

Floor space

Since garage storage systems are designed to open up space for cars, how much floor space a storage system takes up is crucial. With that in mind, it’s important to pay attention to the storage system’s total footprint to determine just how much floor space it will occupy. Generally speaking, shelves take up the most floor space, followed by cabinets. Storage racks that mount to the ceiling take up none and are installed with enough clearance to allow space for cars, people, or garage doors below them.

Durability

Look for garage storage systems made from durable materials such as steel and heavy-duty plastic. These materials can endure the rigors of life in a garage. Avoid materials, such as MDF or thin sheet metal, that are easily damaged by moisture or small impacts.

FAQs

Q: What kind of material is best for a garage storage system?

Painted steel and heavy-duty plastic are the best options for garage storage systems. These materials have great strength qualities, allowing them to hold hundreds of pounds. While a garage is not exposed to the elements, it is an unfinished space susceptible to high humidity and extreme temperature changes. Whereas materials such as pressboard and thin sheet metal can be damaged by moisture, painted steel and plastic aren’t susceptible to rust or corrosion.

Q: How do you maximize storage in a small garage?

To make the most of a small garage, consider going vertical by using hanging overhead racks instead of cabinets or shelves that take up valuable floor space. Install hooks that allow you to move items such as bikes and gardening equipment off the floor and onto the walls. If you need a workbench, consider installing a foldable model that stays flush with the wall when not used. 

Q: Are overhead racks safe?

Overhead racks are safe as long as you install them properly and ensure the ceiling can support the weight. When installing the racks, make sure they are bolted to ceiling joists using the fasteners included with them. Also, pay careful attention to the manufacturer’s weight limits for the racks when loading them and ensure you don’t exceed them.

Final thoughts on the best garage storage systems

A good storage system can help you organize your garage to free up floor space, allowing you to use it as a workshop or fit the car inside. That said, a good storage system will only help you organize your garage if you choose the right one. Before selecting a garage storage system, take stock of what’s currently in the garage. Decide what you need to store and select a system that best matches those needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garage storage systems for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best kneeling chairs in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-kneeling-chair/ Mon, 15 Mar 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-kneeling-chair/
A lineup of the best kneeling chairs on a white background
Amanda Reed

Sick of sitting on your you-know-what all day? Say goodbye to sore backs with a pressure-relieving chair for your home office setup.

The post The best kneeling chairs in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best kneeling chairs on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Varier Variable Balans Original best overall Kneeling Chair Varier Variable Balans Original Kneeling Chair
SEE IT

First designed in 1979 by Norwegian Hans Christian Mengshoel and popularized by industrial designer Opsvik, this model was—and is—considered a game-changer in the world of ergonomic office chairs.

Best rocker Rocking Kneeling Chair best kneeling chair rocker Sleekform Austin Rocking Kneeling Chair
SEE IT

This reinforced-plywood option has a 4-inch-thick seat cushion and memory foam knee pads, with a weight capacity of 265 pounds—and it rocks back and forth, of course!

Best budget Office Star best budget kneeling chair Office Star Ergonomically Designed Knee Chair
SEE IT

More expensive does not necessarily mean more ergonomically sound. You sacrifice aesthetics with this bargain model, but it gets the job done.

Humans were not meant to sit at a 90-degree angle for eight-plus hours a day, and we weren’t meant to stand for that long either—but a kneeling chair can help. According to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), “A chair that is well-designed and appropriately adjusted is an essential element of a safe and productive computer workstation. A good chair supports the back, legs, buttocks, and arms while reducing exposures to awkward postures, contact stress, and forceful exertions.” At the most elemental level, kneeling chair benefits include taking pressure off your back by shifting your body forward, opening up your pelvic area, engaging your core muscles, and taking pressure off your spinal discs. (The name is a bit of a misnomer, as the chair doesn’t shift weight into your knees but rather your butt and shins.) As a result of that sloping, you could also see improvements to your breathing and digestion (by taking the pressure off your internal organs) and improved circulation. Below are our picks for the best kneeling chairs.

How we chose the best kneeling chairs

If you’ve ever gotten a seated massage, you’re acquainted with the general shape of kneeling chairs. Because they take pressure off your spine, kneeling chair benefits include helping improve posture and giving you lumbar support. On the downside, you won’t have much lower-body mobility when you’re in it, so if you’re at all claustrophobic—e.g., you dislike the feeling of your legs being stuck in place—this might not be the option for you, though you can and should play around with positions: one foot up, one foot down, ankles crossed, etc. Also, you won’t have the benefit of wheeling around (though that means you’ll save on a chair mat and other such accessories). 

We vetted the available options on the market to recommend the best kneeling chairs. We researched the science on the detriments of sitting and considered OSHA’s guidance in this kneeling chair review. With that in mind, we looked at kneeling chairs that provided ergonomic design, options for a range of people of different sizes, adjustability, style, and price.

The best kneeling chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

When you first start using your knee chair, you might notice some discomfort, and that’s because you’re likely engaging muscles you don’t when you’re in a conventional office chair. These force you to sit up straight, which requires your abs, thighs, and lower back to engage. You may not be used to that. Eventually, you’ll be better for it, but as with any big change in life, there may be some growing pains! Any of our picks is a suitable introduction to the world of kneeling chairs.

Best overall: Varier Variable Balans Original Kneeling Chair

Varier

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The original kneeling chair, this Scandinavian design has stood the test of time. It’s made with flexible wood and comes in a range of colors to suit any office.

Specs

  • Material: Beech plywood, recycled polyester
  • Dimensions: 14 inches D x 14 inches W x 28 inches H 
  • Weight: 14.35 pounds

Pros

  • Elegant design
  • Time-tested 
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Expensive

Though not the most important quality in a knee chair, this one is aesthetically pleasing in that classic Scandinavian way and comes in loads of colors. The wood design is simple, iconic, and lightweight, so you can easily move it from room to room, creating an ergonomic workstation wherever you go.

Best with back support: DRAGONN by VIVO Ergonomic Kneeling Chair

VIVO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for additional support in a kneeling chair, this kneeling computer chair comes with a cushion for your back and has casters for easy movement.

Specs

  • Material: Metal
  • Dimensions: 13 inches D x 27.13 W x 21 inches H
  • Weight: 23 pounds

Pros

  • Provides back support
  • Comes with wheels
  • Ergonomic design

Cons

  • Less stationary

This kneeling office chair is on casters, allowing you to roam without getting out of your chair. The knee-pad angles and the distance between the seat and knee pads are adjustable, so this posture kneeling chair is a more inclusive option than some others. There is a 250-pound weight capacity. Note also that it requires some simple assembly.

Best rocker: Sleekform Austin Rocking Kneeling Chair

Sleekform

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This posture-correcting chair is also designed with a soothing rocking motion and memory foam cushions for maximum comfort. 

Specs

  • Materials: Reinforced plywood, fabric
  • Dimensions: 28 inches D x 16 inches W x 22 inches H
  • Weight: 14.7 pounds

Pros

  • Rocking function
  • Pads affix it to the floor 
  • Cushions designed with memory foam

Cons

  • No option for back support

A 20- to 30-degree seat-cushion slope is considered ideal for a kneeling desk (whereas a traditional computer desk is 90 degrees), and this chair hits right at 30, shifting weight into your sit bones to gently tilt you forward. The best part of a rocker is that the rocking motion can be a great distraction if you’re having trouble adjusting to your kneeling chair.

Best for short person: ProErgo Pneumatic Ergonomic Kneeling Chair

ProErgo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This affordable kneeling chair is designed for shorter people and comes with casters for easy mobility. 

Specs

  • Material: Metal 
  • Dimensions: 22.5 inches D x 18.25 inches W x 25.5 inches H
  • Weight: 17 pounds

Pros

  • Three adjustable height settings
  • Comes with a three-inch-thick cushion
  • Lockable casters
  • Great price

Cons

  • Not an option for big or tall people

This heavily cushioned, wheeling, ergonomic kneeling chair can sit as low as 19 inches off the floor, making it perfect for those who must, say, keep an adjustable standing desk at a lower height. This adjustable kneeling chair has wheels for easy mobility and folds neatly at the end of the day.

Best for tall person: Master Massage Ergonomic Steel Kneeling Chair Posture

Master Massage

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With thick cushions for the seat and knees, this kneeling chair is ideal for massages and comes with a two-year warranty. 

Specs

  • Material: Wood, alloy steel
  • Dimensions: 17.5 inches D x 21 inches W x 28 inches H
  • Weight: 16.5 pounds

Pros

  • Six adjustable height settings
  • Comes with wheels for easy transport
  • Folds down for storage

Cons

  • Plastic cushions

A steel base in this posture chair makes you feel secure as you sit, and mesh cushions keep you cool. The front-locking brake mechanism adds an extra layer of security. Remember: Your work surface is at the correct height when your elbow is at 90 degrees. Too low and you’ll hunch; too high and you’ll have to reach.

Best budget: Office Star Ergonomically Designed Knee Chair

Office Star

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This serviceable kneeling chair takes care of all the basics at an affordable price. 

Specs

  • Material: Metal
  • Dimensions: 25.25 inches D x 17 inches W x 20.5 inches H
  • Weight: 16 pounds

Pros

  • Ergonomic design 
  • Sturdy frame
  • Affordable price

Cons

  • Weight limit is 275 pounds

The key elements of a kneeling chair are here—pressure relief, a memory foam seat cushion, casters—but it does have some limitations. Its weight capacity is not particularly inclusive at 275 pounds, and the chair itself weighs 16 pounds, making it one you likely won’t want to schlep from room to room.

What to consider when buying the best kneeling chairs

The key to any great seating setup is variation. Eight hours on a kneeling chair is no better than eight hours on a regular desk chair. (Your legs, in particular, could cramp if you continually kneel.) Changing your position is key, so try to rotate sitting, kneeling, and standing throughout the day whenever possible. Here’s what else you should know when shopping for the best kneeling chairs:

Ergonomic design

Key factors in choosing the best ergonomic chair for you include height and adjustability. For example, your shins should rest comfortably on the leg pad and not be squeezed or pinched, so read the measurements carefully to make sure you’ve picked a chair that’s compatible with your size and weight. The best kneeling chair is one that adjusts to you, not vice versa.

Because of the way a knee chair shifts you forward, a seatback isn’t necessary or recommended, but there’s also no harm in having one if it makes you feel more comfortable. The key is to use it sparingly when you need a break or if you have a medical condition that makes it difficult to maintain the sloped-forward position for too long without back support. It’s great for building stamina in terms of how long you can engage your core muscles to support you in the kneeling position, but there’s no shame in relaxing onto the backrest when you need to. Remember: The whole point of getting a kneeling desk chair is to help you feel better.

It might sound counterintuitive—or just complicated—to add rocking to the equation of a kneeling chair, but there are benefits to rocking out! Especially for fidgety folks, the subtle rocking motion can make sitting more comfortable, enhance blood flow, and possibly even help with focus and attention. If sitting still isn’t your thing, try this more active way to sit.

Size of user

If you’re looking for a kneeler for a child or someone smaller than average, the best features you can look for are tilt, knee-pad, and height-pad adjustability, because what’s comfortable for someone 4-foot-8 will differ from someone who’s only a couple of inches taller. (In fact, adjustability is a key factor no matter what kind of kneeling chair you’re buying, and no matter your height.)

There are kneeling chairs for big and tall users, but not enough of them. Until that changes, you’re often unfortunately left to decipher based on your measurements. Some things to keep in mind are the height of your desk and whether you have a long or short torso or long or short legs. All of those things factor into whether a particular kneeler is the best kneeling chair for you just as much as your weight does.

Price

What’s great about kneeling ergonomic office chairs is that there hasn’t been much innovation since the original design, and that’s because the basics don’t need improvement. Remember that the key elements of kneeling office chairs are that they give you lumbar support, alleviate back pain, and contribute to your overall ergonomic home office setup. Everything else—a rocking feature, a pretty design—is gravy. So you should be able to find an option that suits you at a reasonable price.

FAQs

Q: How much does a kneeling chair cost?

A kneeling chair can start at $80 and go up into the $400 range, depending on the manufacturer.

Q: How should I sit in a kneeling chair?

Begin by sitting down as you would in any chair. Then, place your legs on the knee pads, keeping the majority of your weight in your tush. You may then be naturally inclined to slouch, which is where your core comes in: Engage your muscles to keep your posture strong and upright, and voilà: You’re sitting in a kneeling chair! Remember to switch the position of your legs from time to time so they don’t get tired or fall asleep.

Q: What should the angle on a kneeling chair be?

Ideally, you’ll find a chair you like with an adjustable angle, so you can play around until you find the setting that’s exactly right for you. If you can’t, a chair with an angle of 25 to 30 degrees (dropping you from the usual 90-degree angle) is a safe place to start.

Q: Are kneeling chairs really good for you?

Like anything else, they’re not for everyone and have their downsides, but yes, they are really good for you! In addition to aligning your neck, shoulders, and back, they naturally roll your shoulders back. The key is not to overdo it with this piece of home office furniture. Alternate your chair with your regular computer chair, and take breaks from both of those by getting up and going for short walks, even just around the living room.

Q: Who should use a kneeling chair?

A kneeling chair is designed for people who are looking to improve their posture. Because they rely on core strength, they can also help alleviate back pain, which can help people who are used to sitting in a regular office chair all day.

Final thoughts on the best kneeling chairs

If you end every workday with a big stretch and various involuntary noises that indicate your back is killing you, it’s time to change your chair. A kneeling desk is a great option for lots of people and worth working into your rotation. When you find the best kneeling chair for you, your neck, your back, your shoulders, and your six-pack will thank you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best kneeling chairs in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Whip up Easter savings with$80 off a KitchenAid mixer at Amazon—but act fast https://www.popsci.com/gear/kitchenaid-mixer-appliance-easter-amazon-deal/ Tue, 26 Mar 2024 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607965
A person making black raspberry cupcakes using a KitchenAid stand mixer.
KitchenAid

Save on a classic KitchenAid stand mixer that can whip cream, fold dough, and mix batter for every holiday at Amazon.

The post Whip up Easter savings with$80 off a KitchenAid mixer at Amazon—but act fast appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person making black raspberry cupcakes using a KitchenAid stand mixer.
KitchenAid

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Easter is just around the corner, which means peanut butter eggs, Easter lamb cakes, and other post-Lent goodies are within arm’s reach. Those treats just don’t come out of air, however. You’ll need some solid kitchen tools to turn cake mix into a literal animal, after all. This KitchenAid mixer is 24% off at Amazon and is the perfect conduit for making delicious baked goods and sweets beyond Christ’s resurrection.

KitchenAid Classic Series 4.5 Quart Tilt-Head Stand Mixer $249.99 (Was $329.99)

KitchenAid

SEE IT

This classic stand mixer is an investment that will last almost a lifetime thanks to its durable metal construction. The whisk hits 59 touchpoints around the mixer bowl, meaning when ingredients are mixed, they’re mixed. It’s The 4.5-quart stainless steel bowl holds enough dough to make 8 dozen cookies, and it’s dishwasher safe for easy clean-up. 10 speeds and the included 6-wire whip, flat beater, and dough hook let you tackle almost any recipe in the book. And, there are more attachments you can purchase separately for even more fun in the kitchen.

You’ll receive this mixer by Thursday if you subscribe with Amazon Prime. You can show it off to your family as they admire your sweet treat spread on Easter Sunday.

More KitchenAid appliance deals:

The post Whip up Easter savings with$80 off a KitchenAid mixer at Amazon—but act fast appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart water bottles in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-water-bottles/ Fri, 16 Jun 2023 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=549271
A lineup of smart water bottles on a white background
Amanda Reed

These bottles can purify your water, track your water intake, and remind you to drink something other than coffee or Diet Coke.

The post The best smart water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of smart water bottles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A mint-colored insulated LARQ smart water bottle on a small wooden table in front of a brick background LARQ PureVis Bottle
SEE IT

A UV-C light zaps away bio-contaminants that could leave you feeling queasy.

Best for hydration A blue HidrateSpark water bottle on a blue and white background HidrateSpark PRO Smart Water Bottle
SEE IT

Bluetooth automatically updates how much water you’ve sipped.

Best budget A teal HidrateSpark TAP water bottle on a blue and white background HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid
SEE IT

An option that’s only $20 packed with top-shelf features.

Among the plethora of “smart” things in this world—televisions, phones, speakers, and even entire homes—water bottles don’t come to top of mind. However, we think that can change, thanks to water bottles now having more capabilities other than “simple receptacle of many liquids.” Now, you can count how many ounces you’re chugging, get reminded to take a sip, and even get your filtered water to a new level of clean. The best smart water bottles make staying hydrated easy as they’re refilled and you’re fulfilled. 

The best smart water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: LARQ PureVis Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-tech water bottle comes with a self-cleaning cap that uses the power of UV light to give your filtered water a purer taste and keep the bottle clean. 

Specs

  • Cap options: PureVis self-cleaning cap, filter cap with flip top (doesn’t self-clean)
  • Bottle sizes: 17 oz.; 25 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: Yes
  • Water tracking: No

Pros

  • Clean that you can taste
  • Sleek look
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • No water tracking
  • Largest size is still relatively small
  • MicroUSB vs. USB-C

Although water covers more than 70 percent of the Earth’s surface, only 3 percent is drinkable fresh water. Even deeper than that, only .5 percent of that drinkable fresh water is available, meaning it’s not locked in a glacier or the atmosphere. And water from public water systems isn’t guaranteed to be clean (hello, boil water advisories). Enter the LARQ PureVis bottle, which uses UV-C light to eliminate up to 99% of bio-contaminants (including E.Coli). And it self-cleans every two hours, meaning you don’t even need to think about having a musty water bottle. Double-vacuum insulation keeps things cool, even when you’re getting stress-sweats thinking about how only 3 percent of the world’s water is drinkable fresh water. 

The LARQ makes for a great travel water bottle as well, especially if you really want to make sure the bottled water you’re drinking is A-OK. Just make sure you fill it up after you pass through TSA security—you don’t want to get this fancy, pricey water bottle confiscated by a very strict agent before a flight. If you’re more active, consider the Movement PureVis bottle, which is uninsulated and lighter but has the same PureVis tech as the insulated version. 

A close-up of the microUSB charger on the LARQ smart water bottle
Amanda Reed

At $99-$118, this water bottle is expensive, meaning it’s heartbreaking for you and your wallet if you misplace it, especially since you can’t use Bluetooth to track its location. And its capacity tops out at 25 ounces—practically a sip for those who drink water like a fish. There’s no hydration tracking, meaning it’s up to you to remember how much water you’ve imbibed. A pitcher version lets you get squeaky clean water you can put into your favorite gallon water bottles (or even the other smart water bottles on this list that focus on water intake tracking). Still, if you’re looking for UV cleaning and water tracking … sadly, this ain’t it!

The water problem, considering how things are going with the climate and public infrastructure, isn’t going away anytime soon. The LARQ PureVis bottle gives you more peace of mind and lets you not sip on nasties. It’s not the only self-cleaning water bottle on our list, but it’s definitely the best. Read more of our thoughts on the LARQ.

Best for hydration: HidrateSpark PRO Smart Water Bottle

HidrateSpark

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This light-up water bottle uses the power of Bluetooth to keep track of how much water you’ve consumed. It even tells you how much water you should drink based on your height and weight. 

Specs

  • Cap options: Chug or straw lid
  • Bottle sizes: 17 oz.; 21 oz.; 32 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: No
  • Water tracking: Yes

Pros

  • Lots of size options
  • Seamless water tracking
  • Friendly UX with bottle and app

Cons

  • Straw cap hard to sip out of
  • Heavy
  • Not self-cleaning

If you need the gently pulsing alarm clock version of a water bottle (aka, those bottles with the lines and cute phrases don’t cut it for you—someone with a mushy brain and short attention span caused by social media scrolling), consider the HidrateSpark PRO just that. It works with Bluetooth and a coordinating app to measure your water intake. All you need to do is set the bottle down, and the app automatically updates how close you are to your water goal. You can set that number yourself or allow the bottle to figure that out for you by entering your weight, height, elevation, and other metrics. Setup is super easy and takes less than five minutes, less than the time it takes to wash the bottle when you first get it in. The settings are also super robust: you can set when the bottle glows—every time you take a sip, when you meet your goal, both, or even … not at all! It’s similarly priced to other non-smart water bottles on the market, meaning you’re wallet won’t hurt as much compared to other options on this list. 

Best budget: HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid

HidrateSpark

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Practically all the same capabilities of the HidrateSPARK Pro bottle minus the price tag—and some of the cheapest smart water bottles you can buy. 

Specs

  • Cap options: Chug or straw cap
  • Bottle sizes: 20 oz.; 24 oz.; 32 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: No
  • Water tracking: Yes

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Easy setup

Cons

  • Not insulated
  • Water intake only updated with phone tap

Sure, it’s not as packed with features as its PRO sibling, but the HidrateSpark TAP is an excellent option for someone who doesn’t want to spend too much money on a smart water bottle. It doesn’t update as often as the PRO because it lacks Bluetooth tech—it uses near-field communication (NFC) instead of Bluetooth, with a simple phone tap allowing you to update the app with how much you’ve sipped. It comes in a sip-top option and lights up to remind you to drink (although you can’t customize that option; it’s preset at once an hour for 12 hours as soon as you turn the timer on). Look no further if you’re looking for a basic, budget-friendly smart water bottle. 

Here are other options we think are a cool drink of water:

FAQs

Q: How much does a smart water bottle cost?

A smart water bottle costs between $29-$120, depending on size and features. Ones with Bluetooth and UV-C light will be more expensive than those with an NFC tag for updating.  

Q: Is it OK to refill smart water bottles?

Not only is it OK to refill a smart water bottle, but it’s also encouraged! Some smart water bottles let you know how many bottles you need to drink to make your personal hydration goals. 

Q: How do I clean a smart water bottle?

Washing a smart water bottle is incredibly similar to washing a regular insulated water bottle. If your smart water bottle isn’t dishwasher safe, remove any electronic components (batteries, sensors, etc.) and wash by hand with dish soap and warm water. If it’s dishwasher safe, simply throw it in there and wait until the cycle is over. 

Q: Can I microwave a smart water bottle?

Depends. You can’t microwave stainless steel (unless you want to destroy your microwave). You can technically microwave Tritan plastic, but make sure all electronic components aren’t going in the microwave. Would we personally microwave a Tritan plastic water bottle? No, but you do you, boo!

Q: Why do people use smart water bottles?

Some of us consistently rot our brains from too much social media and reach for a Diet Coke, an oatmilk iced latte, or a seltzer before even thinking about regular, plain water. A smart water bottle reminds you to take a sip and takes the guesswork out of how much water you should drink. Your kidneys will thank you!

Final thoughts on the best smart water bottles

Smart water bottles are a great way to easily track how much water you drink daily, ensure your water has no rogue bacteria, and self-clean for mustiness-free sipping. Our favorite smart water bottle is the LARQ PureVis Bottle, which kills potential bacteria in water for results you can taste. If you’re looking for an option to track hydration, we recommend the Hidrate SparkPRO Smart Water Bottle, which syncs seamlessly with incredibly customizable settings to boot. If the cheapest option is your goal, look no further than the HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid—the HidrateSpark’s formidable and budget-friendly sibling. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best table saws for any job, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-table-saws/ Wed, 25 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583133
The best table saws composited together on a white background
Stan Horaczek

A solid table saw is an essential part of any power tool kit, whether you're a pro contractor or a DIY warrior.

The post The best table saws for any job, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best table saws composited together on a white background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw with its legs extended on a plain background DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw
SEE IT

This all-rounder offers renowned build-quality, excellent capacities, and user-friendly features.

Best budget The GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw standing on a plain background GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw
SEE IT

Get all the features and performance you need with money left over in the budget for materials.

Best folding The Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw sitting on a plain white background Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw
SEE IT

This compact saw collapses down to a fraction of its normal size for easy storage and portability.

Table saws come in a variety of sizes, from bench-top models popular with DIYers through jobsite saws to cabinet saws used in furniture making. While they are perhaps most used for making long, accurate ripping cuts through boards and sheet material, they can also crosscut at various angles and, with specialist blades, create rabbets (steps) and dadoes (grooves) for joints, door panels, or drawer bottoms. They range in price from a couple hundred dollars to several thousand, depending on the specs. In this article, we’re checking out the key features of these versatile tools and looking at the best table saws for both trade users, and DIY enthusiasts.

How we chose the best table saws

I owned my own woodshop for 10 years and used table saws daily. I am also a qualified engineer, so I know what makes a good saw tick. To supplement my own hands-on experience, we researched a host of current models from both leading and less well-known manufacturers. This ensured we understood what was available and were up-to-date on technological advances.

The variety of table saws available is extensive, so we wanted to represent as many different types as possible in our collated selection. Our picks range from portable benchtop table saws to models called contractor saws designed for pro woodshops.

Cutting capacities are, of course, a key issue, but so is accuracy and stability. Table saw buyers will also be keen to know that their tool will be reliable and durable, so we factored this into our thoughts. Finally, there’s value for money, which doesn’t necessarily mean finding the cheapest table saw but rather those that meet performance expectations while keeping prices at an affordable level.

The best table saws: Reviews & Recommendations

The following models all meet the performance and cost criteria we set, but each of them has different capabilities and their own pros and cons. We have assigned categories to make finding the best table saw for a particular range of tasks easier, but all of our picks are tools we’d be proud to keep in our storage shed.

Best overall: DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-quality tool offers performance that makes it suitable for busy professionals, enthusiastic DIYers, or home furniture makers.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 32-1/2 inches
  • Table Size: 21-7/8 x 26-3/8 inches

Pros

  •     Pro-grade build quality and reliability
  •     Good cutting capacities and precise fence
  •     Stand offers stability and improves mobility

Cons

  •     Supplied blade could be better
  •     Premium price tag

Given the variety available, it’s almost impossible to pick a single best table saw that will meet everyone’s needs. The DeWalt DWE7491RS is the one that, in our opinion, comes closest. It has the performance and durability demanded by tradespeople, and capacities that could make it the only table saw most keen DIYers ever need.

Maximum depth of cut is 3-1/8 inches, meaning it will easily handle 2x dimensioned lumber used for framing and construction. A ripping capacity (maximum width of cut) of 32-1/2 inches makes it great for plywood and other sheet materials. The table offers good support, and the extending fence has a rack and pinion drive that makes it easy to use, and delivers repeatable accuracy. There’s a nice chunky wheel for blade angle adjustment and a big stop button front and center where it’s easy to reach in an emergency. There’s a 2-1/2” dust port that can be hooked up to a shop vac or other extraction. The included blade is 24-tooth TCT (tungsten carbide tipped). It’s OK, but those looking for a better finish to their cuts will want to upgrade.

The DeWalt table saw comes with a rolling stand that offers good stability and folds down quickly for transportation. It is held in place with four bolts, so it is easy to remove for bench-top use if preferred.

Best budget: GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw

GoPlus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For those on a restricted budget, this table saw offers similar features and capacities to those from leading brands.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 26 inches
  • Table Size: 19 x 26 inches

Pros

  •     Offers good value for money
  •     Competitive cutting capacities and feature set
  •     Includes 36-tooth TCT blade

Cons

  •     Quality control is inconsistent
  •     May arrive requiring considerable adjustment

We generally avoid power tools from lesser-known brands for fear of poor build quality or reliability. The GoPlus table saw is an exception. It might not be the tool for precision woodworking, but it has similar features and capacities to many better-known rivals at a fraction of the price.

With a maximum depth of cut of 3 inches and ripping of up to 26 inches, it will handle most common store-bought construction and DIY materials. The aluminum table has been coated to provide an easier sliding surface. The fence runs on plain rails rather than rack and pinion, but it has an easy adjustment system and a magnifier lens over the scale to improve readability. The included stand raises the saw to a comfortable working height. Assembly involves 24 bolts, so it takes a few minutes to put together, but it provides good support once assembled. A surprisingly good 36-tooth TCT blade is included.

So far, so good. However, while most buyers we surveyed appear happy, inconsistent quality control means some saws arrive needing a lot of adjustment before they can be used. Whether the GoPlus is the right table saw for you will depend on what is expected of it. It is suitable for many construction and DIY jobs around the home and yard, but we wouldn’t recommend it for those expecting high accuracy.

Best folding: Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw

Skil

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Skil is one of the world’s leading saw brands, and this model’s integrated folding stand combines sturdy support with easy portability.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 25-1/2 inches
  • Table Size: 24 x 25 inches

Pros

  •     Stand folds easily for portability
  •     Tool-free blade alignment
  •     Accurate rack and pinion fence

Cons

  •     Some plastic components are fragile
  •     Customer support has been criticized

Several of the top table saws we looked at offer good stands, but none match the simple efficiency and affordability of the folding stand on this Skil model. In fact, this table saw is an attractive proposition all around. While it costs more than some of the budget table saws available, it is well below the price of premium models and, in many ways, offers comparable performance.

When deployed, the Skil table saw stand provides the stability necessary for working with large sheet materials. To use the saw as a benchtop model, there’s no need to undo lots of nuts and bolts; the legs tuck under with a simple button push.

A 3-1/2 inch maximum depth of cut is very competitive, though the 25-1/2 inch rip is less than some. The fence has the rack and pinion adjustment we prefer for accuracy, and the tool-free micro adjustment for blade alignment is a nice feature. However, the supplied blade is only 24-tooth TCT. It’s not bad, but those working with hardwoods will probably want to buy something more robust.

Best for jobsites: Bosch 4100XC-10 10-Inch Worksite Table Saw

Bosch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A high-performance jobsite saw with a wheeled gravity lift stand that rises and falls in seconds.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 30 inches inches
  • Table Size: 22-1/2 x 30 inches

Pros

  •     Powerful 4HP motor for effortless cutting
  •     Constant response circuitry maintains performance
  •     Excellent rolling stand for jobsite mobility

Cons

  •     Expensive, and heavy with stand attached
  •     Poor assembly instructions

Jobsite table saws need to be reliable and durable in working environments that are often harsh. The Bosch 4100XC-10 is a proven solution that is powerful, accurate, and comes with a gravity rise stand that provides virtually effortless single-handed operation.

Cutting capacities are among the best on the market with 3-18 inch maximum depth and 30-inch ripping. The table surface is the largest we looked at on a portable saw, offering a stable platform for large-scale cutting. The motor is an impressive 4-horsepower unit, and the Bosch worksite saw features constant load circuitry that measures blade feedback and matches power output to the demands of the material being cut so the blade won’t stall. The SquareLock fence isn’t rack and pinion, but it is very sturdy. It fits neatly into a slot on the side for transportation.

While the stand is excellent in operation, there are a couple of negatives. It doesn’t come pre-assembled, and the instructions for putting it together are poor. Once finished mounting, the sawing is best done by two people. The other consideration is the all-up weight, which is 94 pounds, so while it’s easy to roll to the truck at the end of the day, lifting it requires a little more effort.

Best for shops: SawStop CNS175-TGP236 10-Inch Contractor Saw

SawStop

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A high-performance, high-capacity, and high-precision  contractor-grade saw for discerning professionals or enthusiastic home furniture makers

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 36 inches
  • Table Size: 27 x 44 inches

Pros

  •     Patented SawStop safety system
  •     T-Glide fence does no deflect
  •     Includes excellent 40-tooth TCT blade

Cons

  •     A considerable investment
  •     Replacement brake cartridges are expensive

The SawStop contractor saw is a superbly engineered tool built for high-precision woodworking. The table is cast iron rather than aluminum for added strength and rigidity and has a flatness within ten-thousandths of an inch (measured diagonally). Extension tables are steel.

Given the 10-inch blade, the maximum depth of cut is a fairly standard 3-1/8 inches. However, ripping is 36 inches, and extensions can be added to take it out to 52 inches. The T-Glide fence is heavy-gauge steel to prevent deflection under load. Versatility is such that a router table can also be added, saving valuable workshop space. A sliding crosscut table, popular with professionals, is also available.

The headline feature is the patented SawStop safety system that can detect human skin and will stop the blade and drop it under the saw table in under five milliseconds. This remarkable device means that instead of losing fingers, all the woodworker will have is a scratch. The only downside is that the special sensor cartridge has to be replaced after an event, and they’re not cheap.

The SawStop contractor saw is a considerable investment, but compared with rivals of a similar standard, it’s very competitive.

Best cordless: DeWalt DCS7485B Flexvolt 8-1/4-Inch Table Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has the excellent build quality and reliability associated with the brand and delivers 60V power where rivals only offer 18V.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 8-1/4 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 2-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 24 inches
  • Table Size: 14-1/5 x 26-3/4 inches

Pros

  •     Go-anywhere cordless cutting
  •     Class-leading 60V power
  •     Protective metal roll cage

Cons

  •     Modest capacities
  •     Battery and charger not included

The ability to take a table saw anywhere, regardless of whether there’s electricity available, has obvious benefits whether you’re a contractor or just want to work beyond the range of extension cords (which, for safety reasons, should never be more than 100 feet). The DeWalt DCS7485B Flexvolt gives that ability, and where most rivals offer 18V batteries, this model uses DeWalt’s high-performance 60V unit, meaning more power for longer.

Cordless does come with a compromise. Table saws are quite power-hungry tools, so in order to provide decent cutting performance, the blade is reduced to 8-1/4 inches. This, of course, means lower capacities. However, with a maximum depth of 2-1/2 inches and a maximum rip of 24 inches, this is still a very useful saw for DIY and light-duty trade use.

Portability is another major benefit of cordless table saws. The DeWalt weighs 45 pounds and has carry handles that double as feet, plus a steel roll cage to protect internal components from knocks. There’s often a premium to pay for cordless tools, and that’s true here. By the time battery and charger are added, this saw is a similar price to high-quality 10-inch corded table saws.

What to consider before buying a table saw

All table saws function in basically the same way, but size and configuration can vary dramatically. In this section, we look at what impact those aspects have on finding the best table saw for particular needs.

Types of table saw

Table saws can be divided into five main types:

  • Benchtop table saws are self-explanatory. These are the smallest and lightest table saws and are usually the choice for DIY users who have limited space or might only use a table saw occasionally.
  • Jobsite table saws are probably the most popular type. They are usually supplied with a stand that gives the stability required for working with large sheet materials. Wheels help with mobility. They are also a good choice for more enthusiastic DIY users.
  • Contractor table saws are the smallest of what might be described as ‘fixed’ saws. They are designed for permanent shop use and have a larger ripping capacity than benchtop or jobsite models.
  • Hybrid & cabinet table saws are larger versions of the contractor saw and are normally only found in professional woodworking shops. Where contractor table saws sit on sturdy legs, hybrid and cabinet saws usually have fully enclosed cabinets that provide even greater stability.

Blade size and capacities

High-end table saws for commercial use can have 12-inch diameter blades, but 10-inch is by far the most common. This means maximum depth of cut is broadly similar, though still varies between 3 and 3-1/2 inches. Cordless models are usually 8-1/4-inch with a depth of cut of around 2-1/2 inches.

The big difference is ripping capacity or maximum width. On benchtop table saws, this can be as little as 24 inches, whereas cabinet table saws can offer 60 inches or more. Greater ripping capacity and the larger table surface that goes with it are particularly important for those who frequently work with sheet material. Not only does it offer wider cuts, but also a more stable platform, so it’s easier to maintain accuracy.

Fence and miter gauge

The ripping fence (usually just called the fence) is another element that has a major impact on accuracy. It keeps the material in place as you perform long cuts. If it deflects when material is pushed against it, the cut won’t remain true. As a result, these devices are usually a substantial construction with secure clamping.

The rails are also important. Often, the fence just slides along these and then clamps in position. Some benchtop and jobsite saws offer rack and pinion rails, which make it easier to make fine adjustments.

A miter gauge is usually included for making angled crosscuts. On cheap table saws, these are often criticized, though better alternatives are widely available.

Other features

  • A blade guard and riving knife (which prevents the material from pinching the blade and causing kickback) are important safety features. These should never be removed while the saw is in use.
  • Weight may be a factor if the table saw is going to be moved around the workshop or transported regularly. Some are fitted with wheeled stands, but larger models can be awkward to lift in and out of a vehicle.
  • Dust ports are usually fitted, but it’s worth checking size if a shop vac or other extraction will be used. Low-cost adaptors are available if existing equipment doesn’t match.
  • Convenient onboard storage for blade wrenches, miter gauges, a push stick, and other accessories is often provided.

FAQs

Q: Is a table saw better than a miter saw?

Their main functions are different, so it’s not really a case of one being better than the other. A table saw can crosscut framing lumber, etc., but doesn’t have the depth of cut or versatility that a miter saw has for compound angles. On the other hand, a miter saw can’t cut sheet material like plywood or OSB. It’s important to understand how each saw works before making that decision.

Q: Is a table saw safe for beginners?

When operated according to the manufacturer’s instructions with guards and riving knife in place, a table saw is as safe as any other type of saw. Use protective eyewear or a face shield, and a dust mask are always recommended.

Q: How long will a table saw last?

It will depend on how much it is used, the working environment, and how well it is maintained, but 10 years is usually given as the expected life of a table saw.

Final thoughts on the best table saws

As we’ve seen from the selection above, there are high-quality table saws that will suit everyone from beginners on a budget to full-time tradespeople. The DeWalt DWE7491RS is a terrific all-rounder. It has the performance and capacities that professionals demand and, with proper care, might also be the only table saw many home woodworkers ever need. At the other end of the price scale, the GoPlus table saw is an ideal solution for those who want the benefits a table saw offers but might never go beyond occasional DIY or small furniture projects (and who might want to read our guides to orbital sanders and laser levels next).

If you’re looking for other cutting tools, check out our lists of the best miter saws and the best circular saws. The right tool makes the job much simpler.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best table saws for any job, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best LED light bulbs for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-led-light-bulbs/ Fri, 22 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607293
A lineup of the best LED light bulbs in four vertical sections
Amanda Reed

Choosing an LED lightbulb that's eco-conscious, reliable, and is built to last is always a bright idea.

The post The best LED light bulbs for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best LED light bulbs in four vertical sections
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall White Feit LED light bulbs on a plain background. Feit Electric A19 LED Light Bulb
SEE IT

Reliable and dimmer-friendly.

Best color-changing Four Govee LED smart light bulbs on a plain background Govee Smart Light Bulbs
SEE IT

Choose from the entire color wheel to set the mood from your phone.

Best value A Sylvania LED light bulb in a ceiling fan light socket. SYLVANIA ECO LED Light Bulb
SEE IT

An simple, LED light bulb without any pricey bells and whistles.

How many PopSci writers does it take to change an LED lightbulb? Per our own very scientific observations, just two: One to stand on a stool/chair/anything that’s not a ladder, and another to spot and catch the lightbulb changer in case they fall. Our worker’s compensation only goes so far. All jokes aside, LED light bulbs are less of a headache than incandescent and fluorescent ones—seriously. They’re less likely to flicker, not going to buzz or hum, and their brightness varies from bright daylight to soft, warm white. Our favorite part about them? You don’t have to change them every six months or worry about your electric bills going through the roof after accidentally falling asleep with the light on. The best LED light bulbs—such as the ones you’ll find below—are eco-friendly, long-lasting, and come in all sorts of color temperatures.

How we chose the best LED light bulbs

There are many kinds of lightbulbs in this world—so many that the permutations of color, bulb shape, and wattage would shock Benjamin Franklin so much that his gout flares up. I mean, twinkle lights are great, but sometimes you need to see where you set something down more than set the mood. For consistency’s sake, we only considered A19 LED lightbulbs (with a few exceptions) and ensured they were at least 800 lumens, the 60W equivalent to their environmentally antagonizing incandescent siblings. We also ensured each bulb came in different color temperatures so you can deck your entire home in your favorite bulbs. We tested them in our homes and researched critical and consumer favorites, consulting peer reviews and user recommendations for a more democratic look.

The best LED light bulbs: Reviews & Recommendations

Starting August 1, 2023, incandescent lightbulbs, with a few exceptions, are banned in the United States. One of our choices can help you make the switch and even inspire an entirely new lighting theme in your house … a light might even go off in your head, you might say.

Best overall: Feit Electric A19 LED Light Bulb

Feit

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage equivalent: 60 watts
  • Bulb shape: A19
  • Color temperature: 2700K, 3000K, 5000K

Pros

  • Versatile
  • UL-listed
  • Dimmable
  • Damp rated

Cons

  • Some reviews mention flickering and trouble with dimming

If you don’t need the bells and whistles like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity, the Feit A19 800-lumen bulb gives you the basics with the added bonus of dimming. It only uses 8.8 watts of energy and emits no ultraviolet light, which means you can use it in rooms with artwork and photographs. With its frosted bulb and A19 shape, it looks just like a regular incandescent bulb. It’s damp-rated, so you can feel good about using it in steamy bathrooms.

It comes in three color temperatures: 2700K, 3000K, and 5000K. I like using 3000K for bathrooms and kitchens, and 2700K for the living room and bedrooms, but all color temperatures are accurate. The bulbs can last 25,000 hours, which is a testament to their durability and quality. They’re UL-listed, Energy Star-rated, and FCC and CEC Title 24 compliant. That’s all code for “safe, won’t kill you, and are efficient as advertised.”

Reviews note some issues with dimming and flickering, but that could be caused by faulty electrics and old dimmers that aren’t compatible with new lightbulbs. If you stand by your sockets and switches, you’ll be more than happy with these Feit lightbulbs that can do it all.

Best dimmable: EcoSmart 60W Equivalent Soft White A19 Energy Star + Dimmable LED Light Bulb

Ecosmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 60 watts
  • Bulb shape: A19
  • Color temperature: 2700K

Pros

  • Dimmable
  • Energy Star-rated
  • Variety of color different color temperatures

Cons

  • Only available on Amazon via third-party
  • Last 15,000 hours

These 60-watt replacement bulbs are some of the best for dimmer switches. The bulbs are compatible with most dimmer switches and in omnidirectional indoor lighting situations. They only produce 8.5 watts and are Energy Star-rated, meaning they’re as efficient as advertised. They’re also available in other color temperatures, which you can find in separate listings.

However, these bulbs are only available on Amazon via a third-party seller and not from the manufacturers themselves. This means you may not meet the manufacturer’s warranty if you need to report a problem. They also only last 15,000 hours, meaning they won’t last as long as other LED light bulbs. Make sure your dimmer switch is compatible with the bulb’s wattage, or else you won’t be able to take advantage of their dimming capabilities.

Best color-changing: Govee Smart Light Bulbs

Govee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage equivalent: 60 watts
  • Bulb shape: A19
  • Color temperature: N/A

Pros

  • Works with Alexa and Google voice assistants
  • App-controlled
  • Syncs with music

Cons

  • Expensive for a light bulb
  • Risk connectivity loss

If boring white bulbs make you groan and you want to light each room in a different shade of the rainbow, you can do so with these Govee lights without completely breaking the bank. You can DIY a plethora of colors or choose from 54 preset lighting scenes. If you’re throwing a party, these bulbs change color and brightness depending on the music you’re playing (one reason we’re also a fan of their LED strip lights and TV backlight kits). You can control the lights via the Govee app or via your favorite smart-home voice assistant like Alexa and Google.

You can also set a timer on the bulb to DIY your own sunrise alarm clock. Like other smart alarm clocks on the market, the Govee bulbs can brighten when you take up and gradually dim before you go to bed. It’s expensive for a light bulb, and you risk disconnecting from the app and being stuck with red light for longer than you care.

Best smart: Philips Hue Smart Light

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage equivalent: 75 watts
  • Bulb shape: A19
  • Color temperature: N/A

Pros

  • Smart button for additional control
  • Compatible with voice assistants
  • Lighting presets and custom lighting

Cons

  • Expensive for a light bulb
  • Smart Button doesn’t dim

The Philips Hue light bulbs are our best overall pick for the best smart lighting and it gets better if you opt for the company’s Starter Kit, which includes a hardware hub that can control up to 50 bulbs, a Smart Button with a mounting plate to control your bulbs with a good ol’ fashioned switch, and three Hue White and Color smart light bulbs.

If you’re cool with controlling your lights via the Philips Hue app or Apple, Amazon, and Google voice assistants. Each bulb is dimmable and customizable, with 16 million color combinations to choose from. Since it connects to your Wi-Fi router and, therefore, the Internet of Things, you don’t even need to be home to control your lighting. That’s perfect if you’re like me and your security measures involve keeping a light on so bad actors think someone is home. It is pricier than other options like the Govee, but it’s a great, reliable place to get started with smart lighting.

Best recessed: GE Reveal 6-Pack 65 W R30 LED Light Bulbs

Specs

  • Wattage equivalent: 65 watts
  • Bulb shape: R30
  • Color temperature: 2700K

Pros

  • Works with a dimmer switch
  • Can be used indoors and out
  • Mercury-free

Cons

  • Only lasts around 15,000 hours

If you use recessed lighting in your home, a recessed bulb is the best choice for getting a smooth, clean look. A19, for lack of better phrasing, just looks goofy in a recessed socket. This one only uses 9 watts and can work with a dimmer switch. It’s warmer at 2700K, but there are other color temperature options available, like Relax and Refresh. You can use these recessed bulbs in your home or for your floodlights outdoors. They’re free of mercury, but they only last 15,000 hours, which is low compared to other LED light bulbs out there.

Best value: SYLVANIA ECO LED Light Bulb

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage equivalent: 60 watts
  • Bulb shape: A19
  • Color temperature: 2700K, 5000K

Pros

  • Lots of color options
  • Come in packs larger than 4
  • Perfect for someone who just wants a light bulb

Cons

  • Non-dimmable
  • No smart capabilities

I am but a simple, frugal woman with a particular lightbulb taste. Do not give me a daylight-bright bulb and dare to put it in my bedroom. That is a bulb meant for the kitchen! I can’t lie; I was rather dismayed when I found out incandescent bulbs would be leaving shelves. What would I do without the warm glow in my bedroom ushering me to relaxation? It turns out the switch was no big deal, and I would just have to pay attention to the color temperature listed on the box. I learned this lesson the hard way after buying bulbs that were too cool in the spaces I placed them in, and I was too stubborn to change them out and waste a bulb.

When I moved into my new apartment, half of the light bulbs were burned out or on the verge of doing so. I had lots of bulbs to replace and craved something warm, so I ultimately went with these SYLVANIA ECO LED light bulbs. They come in all sorts of color temperatures, sizes, and wattages, but I personally picked up the 8-count 60W bulbs in Soft White. I don’t like when lighting is too warm (it wrecks my selfies and product images), and the Soft White is just where I like my light to be: Not so bright that I feel like I’m at the doctor’s and not so orange that everything I own becomes awash in a tangerine dream. I even went a little crazy and put them in the kitchen, where I could have gotten away with using a Daylight or Bright White bulb.

This lightbulb doesn’t have bells and whistles like dimming, color-changing capabilities, or Wi-Fi connectivity. That’s perfectly fine by me, a person who gets frustrated at robot vacuums and still operates a 2012 MacBook Pro (with disc drive, I might add). If this makes me a Luddite, well, just crucify me with some USB-C cables and the latest iPhone.

What to consider when buying the best LED light bulbs

We’ve all had annoying lightbulbs that buzz, flash, or aren’t the correct color temperature for the room (looking at you, old blinking and too-bright fluorescent light bulbs in the office and at school). Buying the right lightbulb can change an entire room’s mood, vibe, and can even affect your own. Here’s what you need to know before that “add to cart” click:

Usage

The use-case will help you decide what shape and color temperature. If you’re using your LED bulbs for overhead lighting, 800-1100 lumen (more on that below) bulbs will work perfectly. If you’re shopping for recessed lighting like ceiling lights or track lights, something around 700 lumens is more appropriate. You should look for an LED lightbulb in the 700-1300 lumen range for an outdoor floodlight.

Brightness and temperature

For LED light bulbs, brightness is measured in Lumens. Watts are also associated with brightness, but are more an indicator of energy use. If you’re making the switch from incandescent to LED, here are some conversions for popular wattages:

  • 800 lumens replaces a 60-watt bulb
  • 1,000 lumens replaces a 75-watt bulb
  • 1,600 lumens replaces a 100-watt bulb

Usually, LED lightbulb manufacturers will include the “wattage” on an LED bulb so you don’t have to do the mental math yourself

Color temperature is measured in Kelvins (K). The entire Kelvin scale ranges from 1,000 to 10,000, but commercial and residential lighting ranges from 2000K-6500K. There are three main Kelvin tiers you’ll come across:

  • 2700K: Usually advertised as “soft white” or “warm white.”
  • 3000K: Usually advertised as “cool white.”
  • 5000K: Usually advertised as “bright white” or “daylight.”

Dimming

Not every LED light bulb will work with a dimmer switch. Either the bulb itself is not compatible with a dimmer, or your current dimmer isn’t rated for LED light bulbs. If the packaging on your LED bulb says it’s dimmable, and you have a dimmer that’s rated for LED light bulbs, congrats! You have a winning combination. Some LED light bulbs have Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity and thus can be dimmed using your phone.

FAQs

Q: How can you tell if an LED is good quality?

There are a few things to look at in an LED light. You want to ensure all light bulbs show the same color temperature. Differences in temperature across bulbs can indicate a poor LED. Look for ENERGY STAR certification to verify energy efficiency. LED light bulbs also shouldn’t flicker or feel flimsy. Check for UL or DLC certifications, and double-check reviews for customer satisfaction.

Q: What color of LED is the best?

It depends on what room you’re in. Warmer colors—2,200-3,000 Kelvins—are good for bedrooms, living areas, and anywhere you want to relax. Cooler colors—5,000-6,500 Kelvins—are best for kitchens, offices, and other workspaces. Or, you can defy all conventions/remind yourself you have free will and do what you want.

Q: What is better: LED or incandescent light bulbs?

Hands-down LED light bulbs. They produce less heat, are more energy efficient and eco-friendly, have a longer lifespan, are durable, don’t emit UV rays, can be used in all sorts of design applications, can operate in hot or cold temperatures, are better at dispersing light, can be used with a low voltage power supply … the list goes on.

Final thoughts on the best LED light bulbs

Since incandescent bulbs are dwindling on shelves, switching to an LED light bulb isn’t just a necessity; It’s a small change that makes a big impact. LED light bulbs help you save on electric bills, let you spend more time sitting in your living room than changing the lightbulbs in it, and even assist in creating a vibe shift through a color change. Talk about having a bright idea.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best LED light bulbs for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get unlimited access to a sweet little treat with up to 48% off Café coffee machines at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/amazon-big-spring-sale-kitchen-appliance-deals/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 20:11:46 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607267
A Cafe Bellisima espresso machine on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Sweet treats are for everyone. If you're budget isn't loving your coffee trips, consider investing in a espresso machine.

The post Get unlimited access to a sweet little treat with up to 48% off Café coffee machines at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Cafe Bellisima espresso machine on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We all deserve a little afternoon sweetie treatie, but the money spent on those aforementioned snackos and drinkies adds up fast. One of the best ways to cut down on small purchases is by investing in a coffee machine that can make specialty-style drinks in the comfort of your home. Café’s Specialty and Bellissimo lines are on sale at Amazon as part of its Big Spring Sale, and are perfect for making a jazzy little afternoon coffee at home.

Café Bellissimo Semi Automatic Espresso Machine + Milk Frother $300.26 (Was $579)

Café

SEE IT

This smart espresso machine connects to your phone so you can customize your drink preferences. An Italian-made, 15-bar pump gives you a balanced cup of ‘spro, and a 95-ounce water reservoir means you’ll get more drinks with less hassle. Our favorite part has to be the built-in conical Burr grinder with 15 levels of grind size.

More kitchen appliances on sale:

The post Get unlimited access to a sweet little treat with up to 48% off Café coffee machines at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 32-inch TVs for small apartments, dorms, and bedrooms in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-32-inch-tvs/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606796
A lineup of the best 32-inch televisions on a white background.
Amanda Reed

Bigger isn't always better. A 32-inch television is perfect for small bedrooms, college residence halls, and teensy tiny living rooms.

The post The best 32-inch TVs for small apartments, dorms, and bedrooms in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best 32-inch televisions on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Roku 32-inch select series TV on a plain background. Roku 32" Select Series 720p HD Smart RokuTV
SEE IT

Intuitive and easy-to-use.

Best smart An Amazon 32-inch 2 series television on a plain background. Amazon Fire TV 32" 2-Series HD smart TV
SEE IT

Connect other smart home devices to your TV or connect it to your voice assistant of choice.

Best budget A TCL 32-inch S3 television on a plain background. TCL 32-Inch Class S3 1080p LED Smart TV
SEE IT

1080p resolution at a great price.

A 32-inch TV is a perfect choice if you’re got a tight space and are looking for a TV that’s “just right” by Goldilocks standards: It’s not too big, but not too small. Although we all dream of an 85-inch TV that’s large and cinematic, not everyone has 85-inch television space or money. In many cases, too large of a television can overwhelm a room. You want space and wall clearance for your knick-knacks, doodads, and various trinkets you’ve collected over the years, after all. If you’re shopping for a college student, most housing and res-life offices will recommend televisions that are 32 inches or less. Personally, I was only allowed to bring a television that was 17 inches or less. Kids these days really have it all, considering television tech has advanced exponentially compared to when I was in college a decade ago (Shudder! Ick! Time!). The best 32-inch televisions pack high-tech features into a small package for modest rooms.

The best 32-inch TVs: Reviews & Recommendations

Bigger isn’t always better. One of our choices will look great in the guest room or a 200-square-foot dorm room.

Best overall: Roku 32-inch Select Series 720p HD Smart RokuTV

Roku

SEE IT

Specs

  • Resolution: 720p
  • Ports: 2x HDMI, 1x HDMI eARC, USB
  • Operating system: Roku OS
  • Refresh rate: 60 Hz

Pros

  • Voice-controlled remote
  • Bezel-less design
  • Compatible with lots of home control devices like Alexa

Cons

  • Brightness is not the best
  • No Ethernet port

We love Roku TVs for their combination of quality and price. One of our favorite Roku TVs is the 65-inch Roku Select, so we weren’t surprised that we loved its pint-sized cousin. We also love vacationing in Roku City and taking in all the sites it has to offer, like the monsters attacking the city proper and the movie theater.

All jokes aside, this is a solid TV under $300. You can customize the home screen so your favorite streaming apps, inputs, and Roku’s free live TV are just a remote click away. Speaking of, the remote is push-to-talk compatible, meaning you don’t have to spend three minutes picking at letters. We also love the remote’s no-nonsense layout. You can also use the Roku app as a bonus remote to bring some peace to the home or if you lose the one it comes with.

Although it’s not 4K, 720p resolution is great if you don’t need that level of detail. However, the brightness is lacking, which is only a problem if you want a blindingly bright TV. It also doesn’t come with an Ethernet port. If that’s too large of a con, consider upgrading to the Roku Select Series 4K. The smallest size is 43 inches, just a heads-up, but it does have an Ethernet port.

When you activate your device, you get a one-month trial of AMC+ and Starz on the Roku Channel. Plus, it’s compatible with Apple AirPlay and HomeKit, Alexa, Google Home, and Roku Smart Home. It’s quick to set up, has great sound, and comes at a great price. What’s not to like?

Best smart: Amazon Fire TV 32-inch 2-Series HD smart TV

Amazon

SEE IT

  • Resolution: 720p
  • Ports: 2x HDMI 1.4, 1x HDMI ARC, 1x Ethernet, 1x USB 2,0
  • Operating system: Fire TV OS
  • Refresh rate: 60 Hz

Pros

  • Lots of ports
  • Dolby Digital Plus compatible
  • Synchronicity between Fire TV devices

Cons

  • Slow interface

This smart television is great for the freshman who needs a TV with all the bells and whistles for their dorm, or someone looking to stay entertained in your tiny home or RV. The image quality isn’t 4K—like the Roku, it comes at 720p resolution—but support for HDR 10, HLG, and Dolby Digital Plus makes it kick just a little harder. Our favorite feature is its synchronicity: You can pause your show in one room and pick up where you left off on another Fire TV in a different room. You can also control other smart home devices from your TV and ask Alexa to tell you a joke right in your living room.

If you participate in late-night binge-watching, you can connect your Bluetooth headphones to your TV so you don’t disturb sleeping roommates (who may or may not be your children and spouse). You also get six months of MGM+ when you purchase this TV. We recommend using it to watch FROM, which is equal parts scary and addicting.

Unfortunately, the interface on this TV is a little lagging. If you’re patient, you won’t mind. If you’re not … you could probably use it to practice waiting a little for once.

Best value: TCL 32-inch Class S3 1080p LED Smart TV

TCL

SEE IT

  • Resolution: 1080p
  • Ports: 2x HDMI, 1x HDMI ARC, 1 USB
  • Operating system: Roku OS
  • Refresh rate: 60 Hz

Pros

  • Higher resolution
  • Bezel-less design
  • Easy to install

Cons

  • Sound quality could be better

If you’re bummed about the prices and resolutions of these TVs and you’re dead-set on a 32-inch TV, consider this one from TCL. It comes with 1080p resolution and Dolby Digital Plus compatibility for decent picture and sound quality. Reviews note that the sound could be better, but there’s nothing a cheap soundbar can’t fix.

This TV is also VESA-compatible, which means you can mount it on your wall in case you’re not feeling the included legs. We’re particularly fond of the Game Mode, which reduces lag and latency so you can demolish aliens in Helldivers II with ease. Unlike the aliens, you’ll enjoy the company of the TCL S3 and the entertainment it brings.

Here are more 32-inch TVs to stream all your favorite shows:

FAQs

Q: How far should I sit from a 32-inch TV?

For the best viewing experience, you should sit about 4 feet away from a 32-inch TV. If you’re looking, the exact number is 47 inches.

Q: How long should a 32-inch TV last?

The average lifespan of a television is 4-10 years, depending on use. Turning down the brightness can actually elongate the lifespan of your television since you’re not wearing out the LEDs as much as you would at full brightness.

Q: Is a 32-inch TV too small for a living room?

It depends on the size of the living room and personal preference. A 32- to 43-inch TV is great for small living rooms; consider A 43- to 55-inch television is right for a medium living room, and anything more than 55 inches fits a large living room. If you’re a movie buff or gamer, you’ll want a television that’s larger for a more immersive experience. If aesthetics are more of a priority, a smaller television can give you more space for all your artwork and shelves.

Q: Is 4K worth it on a 32-inch TV?

4K televisions are often more expensive than HD versions. A smaller screen might also cause your eyes to miss details, especially if you’re sitting more than 4 feet away from it. Generally, a 1080p resolution will be more than enough for this size of television. Save the 4K for something larger.

Final thoughts on the best 32-inch TVs

A smaller form factor doesn’t mean you will have a worse viewing experience. Good things come in small packages, after all. A 32-inch television is perfect for a dorm room, guest room, or pool house … if it’s a tiny room and you want to watch things in it, 32 inches is the perfect TV size for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 32-inch TVs for small apartments, dorms, and bedrooms in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best triple-monitor stands of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-triple-monitor-stands/ Sun, 26 Jun 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451603
The best triple monitor stands free up lots of desk space.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

How else are you going to put three monitors on one desk?

The post The best triple-monitor stands of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best triple monitor stands free up lots of desk space.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall MOUNT PRO Triple Monitor Desk Mount Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount
SEE IT

The Mount Pro triple-monitor desk mount supports a wide range of screens and doesn’t break the bank.

Best side-by-side ECHOGEAR 3 Monitor Desk Stand Echogear Adjustable Triple-Monitor Desk Mount
SEE IT

The Echogear triple-monitor desk mount will surround you with screens.

Best pyramid-style Stand Steady Freestanding 3 Monitor Mount Desk Stand Stand Steady Freestanding Three-Monitor Mount Desk Stand
SEE IT

If using a desk-mounted monitor stand is a problem, Stand Steady makes a very solid freestanding triple-monitor stand.

Few office accessories provide the kind of tech flex you get from a triple monitor stand. These adjustable arms can fill your entire field of vision with sweet screen real estate. Making the jump to three monitors is a serious move, but having one of the best triple-monitor stands to hold them up will make you feel like a Hollywood-style computer whiz (and there are actual real-world benefits, too).

How we chose the best triple-monitor stands

To pick the best triple-monitor stands, I paired my own testing and experience with professional reviews and consumer feedback. We specifically looked at a wide range of triple-monitor stands that arrange your monitors in different orientations and prioritized those that gave users as much adjustability as possible. Unlike the best monitor arms and dual-monitor stands, there are no major tech peripheral manufacturers making triple-monitor arms right now. As such, we also prioritized popular arms with lots of positive reviews and recommendations from consumers.

The best triple-monitor arms: Reviews & Recommendations

So you have three monitors and you want to put them up on a single stand. Now that you know the basics of what to look for, we have a few recommendations, including arms that clamp to your desk and stands that stand free without any installation. You can set up your monitors side-by-side or stack them in a pyramid formation. Whether you’re looking to put a finishing touch on your office or enhance your gaming battle station, there should be a decent option for you among these picks.

Best overall: Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount

MOUNT IT!

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: A fair price point and good feature set put the Mount Pro Triple at the front of the pack.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk-mounted
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring and static height
  • Weight range: 17.6 lbs per arm
  • Display size range: Up to 27-inch
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $119

Pros

  • Separate VESA plates for easy mounting
  • Gas-spring movement means effortless adjustment
  • Two mounting options: Desk clamp or grommet

Cons

  • No depth adjustment for middle screen

The Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount is an unassuming top pick: It’s simply solid in every way. Like many other mounts, it offers gas-spring movement for your left and right screens and adjustable height and rotation for your central screen. It supports a pretty high 17.6-pound upper weight limit, so it should be able to handle almost any 24- or 27-inch monitor. While it may annoy some that it doesn’t support larger displays, most users with multi-display setups normally stick to those sizes, anyway. 

The only major flaw we found was universal across nearly every triple monitor mount we researched: the middle display offers monitor rotation, adjustable height, tilting, and swiveling, but not the ability to adjust its depth. If you have a particularly deep desk, you may want to go with our freestanding pick.

Best side-by-side: Echogear Adjustable triple-monitor desk mount (ECHO-GM3C)

Echogear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Echogear’s triple-monitor stand stands out because of its unique form factor.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk-mounted
  • Adjustment mechanism: Static height
  • Weight range: 20 lbs per screen
  • Display size range: Up to 27-inch
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $132

Pros

  • Great for immersion
  • Natural ergonomic curve
  • US-based customer service

Cons

  • Less adjustment than other options
  • No grommet installation

Minnesota-based Echogear is known primarily for making wall mounts, but they make a very nice desk-mounted triple-monitor stand. It lines up the monitors, but arranges them in an ergonomic and immersive curve, turning your three monitors into a single, gigantic curved display array. It’s an appealing option for anyone who wants to set it and forget it, and could be great for hardcore racing or flight-sim players.

The curve also presents some limitations, though: For example, the mount isn’t really made to pair well with individual curved displays, even if they fit the size and weight limits. They also note that an older 27-inch monitor with a large bezel (the outer plastic frame), may cause some issues with fitting the screens.

Luckily, Echogear has excellent customer service. The company has chat and phone-based support options that typically answer quickly and accurately. If you aren’t sure if your monitors will fit in the display, customer service will help you figure things out before you buy.

Best pyramid-style: Stand Steady Freestanding Three-Monitor Mount Desk Stand

Stand Steady

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Stand Steady makes a really solid pyramid-style desktop triple-monitor stand.

Specs

  • Mount type: Freestanding
  • Adjustment mechanism: Static height
  • Weight range: Up to 17.6 lbs
  • Display size range: Up to 32-inch
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $99

Pros

  • Freestanding mount can sit on any desk
  • Supports 32-inch displays
  • Pyramid configuration means less twisting your neck
  • Separate VESA plates for easy mounting

Cons

  • No depth adjustment for middle screen

Having three screens lined up side-by-side in landscape mode sounds like a great idea … right until you have a project where you’re constantly turning your from the left display to the right one. Without depth adjustment functionality or a natural curve, you’ll wind up twisting your neck a lot, which isn’t great for your body. A pyramid configuration—two monitors side by side at eye level, and a third dead center above the other two—is great if you use two displays often, and only glance at the third on occasion.

Stand Steady makes both freestanding and desk-mounted pyramid-style triple-monitor stands, but we went with the desktop option because it’s a little cheaper, and because it’s better suited to support three 32-inch displays.

Best with USB hub: Mount-It Triple-Monitor Mount with USB/Audio Ports

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Honestly, we’re surprised more manufacturers haven’t built USB hubs into their monitor stands.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk-mounted
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring and static height
  • Weight range: Up to 15.4 lbs
  • Display size range: 32″
  • Available colors: Black
  • Price: $147

Pros

  • Separate VESA plates for easy mounting
  • Gas-spring movement means effortless adjustment
  • Two mount options: Desk clamp or grommet
  • USB 3.0 and Audio jacks are a great bonus

Cons

  • USB and audio jacks are pass-through, not hub
  • Middle screen has no depth adjustment
  • Low weight limit

The Mount-It Triple-Monitor Stand doesn’t do much that our other monitor stands can’t, but it has one surprisingly compelling ace up its sleeve: USB 3.0 and 3.5mm audio passthrough ports built into the base of the display. Unlike monitor USB ports, these are passthrough ports that need to be plugged into your PC using cables that come out the back of the stand. For most people, though, having those ports front and center is a big improvement on constantly reaching behind things or having external USB hubs taking up valuable desk real estate.

It also doesn’t feature a grommet-based mounting option, so you won’t be able to screw it into the back of your desk.

Things to consider before buying a triple-monitor stand

If you have three displays and are ready to upgrade to a triple-monitor stand or arm, there are a few important things to keep in mind. Monitor stands come in a few different form factors, which handle monitors differently and require varying amounts of installation. It’s important to know what you’re getting into before you start adjusting your workspace.

Desk clamps vs. stands: Triple-monitor stands can be mounted one of two ways: A freestanding monitor stand, similar to what comes with most monitors, or a desk-mounted stand that clamps to the back of a flat desk. Manufacturers also make dual- and single-monitor stands that bolt into the wall behind your desk, but there currently aren’t any wall-mounted triple-monitor options that we’re aware of at this time.

If you have a strong desk with a uniformly thick desktop, we prefer the desk-mounted route. It saves you a ton of desk space without sacrificing any sturdiness or durability. Not all desks can handle a desk mount, though. If you have a glass desk or one without a lip for a clamp to grip, stick to a freestanding mount. Seriously, a clamp could shatter a glass desk or fall right off an unsteady mount–taking all of your screens with it—so only consider this if you’ve invested in a sturdy option.

Weight limits: There are also two important specs to check on all your monitors before picking out a monitor stand. First, make sure all of your displays can be removed from their stands and come with mounting brackets. Look for a large square grouping of screws on the back of each monitor. It may be hidden by the existing stand. The VESA mounting bracket is a universal standard across all mountable screens—monitors and TVs—created and maintained by the Video Electronics Standards Association. It makes buying stands and mounting displays as easy as possible.

Most VESA mounts for PC monitors usually come in one of two sizes: 75mm x 75mm or 100mm x 100 mm. Nearly every stand we’ve seen supports both of them, so most monitors that can be removed from their default stands should work on any third-party stand. Things may get a little tricky if any of your displays are especially large (32 inches or more) or you have an ultrawide monitor. There are just enough potential variations that it pays to check before buying a stand.

You should also check each monitor’s weight. Monitor stands are made to handle specific weights for each display, and you do not want to use one that can’t handle your screens. If your monitors exceed the stand’s weight, the setup will fall, and your screens will likely break.

Both of these specs should appear both in any support manuals for your displays or on their product pages on the manufacturers’ websites.

FAQs

Q: Can you hook up 3 monitors to a computer?

Absolutely. If you’re using a gaming desktop with a discrete graphics card, like an Nvidia RTX 3070 or AMD RX 6900 XT, you’ll have enough ports to connect three screens to your PC over DisplayPort, HDMI, or possibly USB-C. Things get trickier with laptops, as they typically don’t have as much graphical horsepower as a desktop computer or as many ports. With the right gaming laptop and an HDMI splitter, though? It’s not impossible.

Q: How much does a triple-monitor setup weigh?

This is worth checking out before diving into a triple-monitor setup. With three screens, you’re asking a lot of your desk, and you don’t want to mount your monitors to an unstable surface. Monitors tend to weigh between 14-20 lbs each, depending on size, and monitor mounts tend to be around 20 lbs themselves, so it’s safe to say that a triple-monitor setup would tend to weigh at least 62 lbs for a setup with smaller screens and upwards of 80 lbs total for a setup with bigger screens.

Q: Are 3 monitors good for gaming?

It depends on the game. Devotees of simulator games like Microsoft Flight Simulator or racing games like F1 2022 often swear by a triple-monitor setup. Even the borders between the monitors can contribute to the sense of immersion in these games, making the screens feel more like windows. For a first-person shooter, the benefits will be more subjective. Often, we think a single ultrawide gaming monitor would probably be a better fit.

Q: Does using 3 monitors affect PC performance?

The more pixels your PC needs to push, the harder your computer has to work. A triple-monitor setup will absolutely affect performance on budget and mid-tier desktops. If you have a gaming desktop with a modern graphics card, the impact may be imperceptible. More often than not, though, you will see a difference in how your computer runs.

Q: Why should I use a triple-monitor stand?

A good monitor stand will reclaim some desk space and creates a healthier, more ergonomic workspace. Setting up three monitors on one desk can take up a huge amount of space. Putting your displays on a single stand should free up a fair amount of real estate on your desk, even if most of it is under the monitors.

On top of that, using a monitor stand grants you enhanced adjustability to optimize your workstation’s ergonomics. Ideally, you want all of your monitors perfectly aligned, with the top of the screens at eye level. This prevents you from craning your neck to get a full, clear view of the screen. Using one stand for all three monitors ensures you can position them all evenly. (Depending on your setup, you will still likely need to move your neck a bit, but your setup will be far healthier.)

Q: How much should a triple-monitor stand cost?

Triple-monitor stands vary in price, but you shouldn’t need to spend more than $150 on a good one. If you’re on a budget, or don’t want a stand with extra features, you could spend as little as $60.

Final thoughts on the best triple-monitor stands

While the options for triple-monitor stands are far fewer than one or two displays, you still have plenty of decent choices. Keep in mind that you can also combine multiple monitor stands to create a custom setup if you’re struggling to find a perfect fit with these picks. That said, we expect most people should be able to find the right triple-monitor stand for them on this list.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best triple-monitor stands of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best LED light strips for any space in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-led-light-strips/ Fri, 28 Jan 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=421926
The Best LED light strips of 2022
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Bring color and dimension into your space with customizable lighting.

The post The best LED light strips for any space in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best LED light strips of 2022
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Govee LED Smart Lights on a white background. Govee Smart LED Strip Lights
SEE IT

This pick offers a range of connectivity, an easy-to-install design, and multiple modes to suit any mood. 

Best cheap Nexillumi LED Strips on a white background. Nexillumi 50-foot LED Strip Lights
SEE IT

With ample length and wattage, these affordable LEDs can effectively illuminate most spaces.

Best for TVs Pangton Villa LED Strip Lights on a white background. Pangton Villa LED Strip Lights
SEE IT

Level up your home entertainment centerpiece with this LED backlighting, which does one thing but does it well.

You may be surprised by just how profoundly a set of LED light strips can change the feel of a space. Though most people instantly turn to lamps and other traditional furnishings to brighten up a room, you shouldn’t overlook LED light strips, which are easy to install and offer a full spectrum of color. The effect is illumination that can complement any atmosphere or activity—whether a day spent in bed watching Netflix or a Friday night hosting friends. Whether you use them as an accent behind your TV or brighten up a whole room, a few well-placed light strips can create a futuristic glow to match and/or amplify the mood. The possibilities with these techy lights are seemingly endless. These are the best LED light strips for every setup, from little luminary boosts to full-on glow-ups.

How we selected the best LED light strips 

I recently installed the Govee Smart LED Strip Lights underneath my bed frame and was surprised at both the ease of installation and what a dramatic difference it made to the ambiance of my room. While LED strips vary greatly in use, they all can create an improved mood wherever they are installed. I compared over 50 LED light strips for connectivity, color variety, size, ratings, installation, and type to find a variety of styles that work well for different spaces and lighting goals. 

The best LED light strips: Reviews & Recommendations

LED strip lights can be used to illuminate a variety of places—from your gaming station to the inside of your car. Depending on what you plan to light up, you may need a strip, or strips, with certain qualities, like the ability to connect to a smart home hub. One of our picks should be perfect for creating the vibe you want.

Best overall: Govee Smart LED Strip Lights

Govee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pick can suit almost any space and is easy to install, with interactive features like music sync and voice assistant controls. 

Specs:  

  • Number of lights: 150 per 16-foot strip
  • Wattage: 36W
  • Length: 16.4 feet
  • Connectivity: Bluetooth and WiFi

Pros

  • Alexa and Google Assistant compatible
  • Music sync mode
  • 16 million colors to select from 

Cons 

  • Adhesive strip can’t be moved after placement

I recently installed the Govee Smart LED Strip Lights in my home and can confidently say that this pick is easy to use and offers a great variety of colors and connectivity. Available in both 16.4-foot (150 LED bead) and 32.8-foot (300 LED bead) lengths and easily customizable, they’re a great option for lighting up both big and small spaces. They take just minutes to set up—just wipe down your surface, peel the paper off the strip’s adhesive back, then apply with or without the help of included support clips. Be careful when you place them, though; they’re a lot harder to remove once they’re stuck to something.

Customization is similarly snappy: You can fine-tune your settings using the Govee Home app (available on iOS and Android). Change colors to a unique shade from an RGB wheel, add a timer, and control brightness to suit your mood. Govee Home also offers different preset lighting modes—including “sunrise,” “sunset,” “movie,” “candlelight,” and a music sync option that uses the built-in mic (the same one that allows hands-free on/off, color, and brightness, control through Alexa and/or Google Assistant) to let the lights dance to the beat. You have more than enough options to make any space suit any situation—from date nights to quiet evenings with a good book.

Love decorative holiday lights, just hate dragging in and out the decorations? If you’re looking to get expressive with the exterior of your house, pick up Govee’s Smart RGBIC Outdoor, waterproof IP67 strips that offer 75 scenes and 16 million colors. Set them up once and use them over and over for Halloween, Christmas, New Year’s Eve, etc., controlling them with Alexa. If you’re searching for something a bit more traditional that also offers ambient light, however, you can also consider our recommendations for the best twinkle lights to add some simple sparkle. 

Best premium: Philips Hue Bluetooth Lightstrip

Phillips

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a range of options available in one automation-friendly ecosystem, this pick can seamlessly integrate into your smart home system with minimal setup. 

Specs

  • Number of lights: 50 per 
  • Wattage: 20W
  • Length: 3 feet or 6 feet (extendable)
  • Connectivity: Bluetooth, WiFi

Pros

  • Works with many smart home devices
  • Multiple strings of lights can interact
  • Doesn’t slow internet

Cons 

  • Most expensive option

While the average LED strip can be customized and controlled with the help of an app or remote, it typically operates alone. Philips light strips can be integrated via Hue Hub (sold separately) to create an independently connected system that won’t bog down your WiFi, which is probably already handling a plethora of devices. You can add up to 50 extensions (of the same Bluetooth version, so check compatibility before purchase) for a full-home lighting system that’s tailored to your needs—with features like a handy motion sensor for automatic power, scheduled automation, and smart control while home and away. This feature gives the Philips ultimate versatility, allowing you to easily install dimmable, night, or even queued hallway lighting that feels futuristic. The Philips lights are also designed with a coated strip to diffuse the light—creating a sleek modern look that changes hue on command. 

You can fit these Philips strips into any space and integrate them into your existing smart home system, whether that’s with Alexa, Google Assistant, Apple Homekit, Microsoft Cortana, SmartThings, or IFTTT. The Philips app also offers more detailed customization than some of our cheaper picks, like preset mood lighting, timers, and alarms that can coincide with your sleep schedule. 

Best for rooms: Daybetter LED Strip Lights

Daybetter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With up to 100 feet of lighting in a single package, this pick can extend around most rooms and provide an incredible glow.

Specs 

  • Number of lights: 270 per 50-foot strip
  • Wattage: 54W
  • Length: 50 feet  
  • Connectivity: Bluetooth, IR Remote 

Pros

  • App and IR Remote control
  • Smart timing settings
  • Can trim strip to size

Cons 

  • White tone is blue-tinted

These LED strip lights from Daybetter are a great bet for big lighting projects. Featuring two 50-foot strips you can string together, this package is perfect for running along a room’s perimeter. If you have a big but not too big project, they can also be cut down to fit your space. The strong adhesive backing makes them easy to set up. Like the other general-use lights on this list, the Daybetter strips can be controlled with an IR remote (included) or smartphone app via Bluetooth, and they support specialty features like an on/off and color-change timer and music sync. There’s one issue we’re aware of, though: According to some users, the white LEDs come across as especially cold, bluish light—something to keep in mind if you want these to replace, instead of complement, traditional bright lighting.

Best for cars: Govee Interior Lights for Car

Govee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These lights are specially designed to install in a car, illuminating your drive and even syncing to your favorite playlist. 

Specs

  • Number of lights: 72 per strip
  • Wattage: N/A
  • Length: 4 x .98 foot strips
  • Connectivity: App-controlled

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Compatible with any car model
  • Waterproof design

Cons 

  • May need to adjust the music setting depending on genre 

Ambient lighting doesn’t need to be limited to your home. Govee makes a series of Bluetooth-enabled Interior Car Lights, which you can power through your car’s 12-volt cigarette lighter port. Two lines connect the four flexible, waterproof light strips, each of which has 72 LEDs and together offer enough length to allow any vehicle to be bathed in energetic light. The creative mode available in the Govee Home app allows you to choose from 16 million colors, select and tailor a dynamic music mode that syncs with the bass on your go-to songs, and add effects (there’s also a physically connected control box if you’re keeping your phone safely tucked away while driving). It’s a unique lighting option that will turn every drive into an adventure.

Best for TVs: Pangton Villa LED Strip Lights

Pangton Villa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Specially designed to be installed on the back of your television, these LED strips add vibrant ambient lighting to your entertainment setup. 

Specs

  • Number of lights: 36
  • Wattage: 2.5 watts
  • Length: 6.5 feet 
  • Connectivity: USB, Remote

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Improves image clarity
  • Affordable option

Cons 

  • Limited usefulness outside of TVs

If you’ve been in search of a cost-effective way to improve the aesthetics and comfort of your home entertainment system, putting an LED light strip behind your TV can make a huge difference at a low cost. These inexpensive Pangton Villa LED Strip Lights add a colorful illumination behind your TV, easily adhering to any 40- to 60-inch TV with a USB plug to draw power from your set and cut additional cord clutter from your setup. With the remote, you can select from 16 colors and four brightness modes and customize your lighting. The backlit placement of these LED lights raises ambient light without creating glare on the screen, reducing eye strain and increasing perceived contrast on the display. If you have both a bigger budget and a bigger appetite for upgrades, however, we have a full range of recommendations for the best LED lights for your TV that offer features like a microphone and camera that monitors your screen to sync up the lights, voice-activated commands, or a hub that can connect with the rest of your smart home gadgets. 

Best budget: Nexillumi 50-foot LED Strip Lights

Nexillumi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pick offers great length, wattage, and connectivity on a budget.

Specs

  • Number of lights: 270 per 50-foot strip
  • Wattage: 40W
  • Length: 50 feet
  • Connectivity: Bluetooth and Remote

Pros

  • Alarm clock function
  • IR Remote for controls
  • Most cost-friendly option

Cons 

  • Transformer makes a small sound when used on the highest setting 

With over 50 feet and 270 light sources for under $20, the Nexillumi light strip is the most cost-effective way to add ambient lighting to your home. Despite the low price tag, you don’t lose out on connectivity, color range, and wattage, which are about the same as our top pick. 

The Nexillumi strip comes with a 44-button IR remote that allows you to control colors, modes, and brightness. There’s also a smartphone app (available on iOS or Android) that offers even more granular customization for fine-tuning. While the Nexillumi strips are certainly one of the top contenders for the best LED light strips on this list, they don’t include smart home support, so you’ll need to rely on the app and remote to fine-tune your settings—no convenient voice control mode here. 

It also has a couple of the higher-end sets’ features: There’s a microphone mode, which allows you to sync the lights to any music using a small mic located in the controller switch, so the colors change and pulsate along with your favorite tracks. The alarm function, meanwhile, lets you wake to a gently increasing light source in the color of your choice—which can surprisingly mimic a natural sunrise.

Things to consider before buying the best LED light strips

Some light strips are multifunctional and can be adhered to just about any surface, while others are made with a specific use in mind. The best LED light strips, the ones you need, will have features to match your lifestyle, and here are some things to consider to make sure they do just that.

Size: The first thing you want to think about before buying an LED light strip is purely logistical: How much space do you want to light up? Plan out where and how you plan to place your lights and measure out what you’ll need (you can take a string, place it along where you want to place the LEDs, and then measure that to know how much lighting you’ll need). From there, make sure you either buy a strip, or set of strips, at least as long as the space you need to ensure there are no gaps or hanging pieces. You may not be able to get the exact length you need, so check your lights to make sure there’s a way to cut or shorten them.

Connectivity: Most modern LED strips support a variety of connectivity options that allow you to control the color, brightness, and power of your lights via a remote or smartphone app. If your lights will be located in a hard-to-reach area, ensure you have a good way to change the lights from afar. If you already use a smart-home service or voice assistant, like Amazon Alexa or the Google Assistant, it may make sense to pick lights that you can control that way. And there’s no need to stop at LED light strips when it comes to making your system smarter and more functional—you can also install smart lights into your existing fixtures for even more control and convenience. 

Power: Depending on where you plan on installing your LED strips, you may want to consider what power source your pick uses. If you’re looking to light your home entertainment system or workstation, opting for an LED strip with a USB connector that can plug directly into your TV or computer will save time. You can skip dangling cords or unsightly setups by powering up the strips from the device. Those who want to snake lights around furniture or walls are better off with LEDs that can plug directly into the wall. 

Color variety: Lighting can play a powerful role in creating an ambiance in our homes, which is why LED strip lights with a broad color range can help in setting the mood for any situation. Ideally, your light strips will support the full RGB spectrum, 16.8 million colors, like in an RGB-lit gaming keyboard or mouse. Not all LED light strips have so many options, though; you can expect to get a smaller range of preselected colors to choose from in budget models, while others offer a truly customizable color range that you can finagle in the app. 

FAQs

Q: How long can you run LED light strips?

One of the benefits of LED light strips is that they are designed to last—allowing you to get ample use that won’t sputter out after a few months. LED strips can last up to 50,000 hours, approximately five years of steady and reliable ambient lighting. 

Q: Do LED strips use a lot of electricity?

LEDs use a small amount of electricity compared to incandescent bulbs or halogen lighting. And if you’re looking to cut back on your energy consumption even further, we recommend selecting LEDs with lower voltage, which translates to less wattage and energy use—though you will sacrifice a bit of brightness as well. 

Q: Which LED light strips are the brightest?

Of our top-rated selections, the Daybetter LED Strip Lights are the brightest, with 54 watts available in a wide swath of hues and tones. 

Q: How much should an LED light strip cost?

A basic LED light strip will cost you under $25, but you can spend a lot more to get one with additional features like Internet interactivity and better smart home integration.

Final thoughts on the best LED light strips

While some home improvement tasks can be both costly and time-consuming, installing LED light strips is an uncomplicated way to improve your space on a budget. This versatile ambient upgrade’s colors, modes, and applications make the best LED light strips a great fit for nearly any space and situation, whether you want to reduce eye strain or just liven up your home entertainment system with backlighting or add music-synced lights to an interior.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best LED light strips for any space in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best mini projectors for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-mini-projectors/ Thu, 12 May 2022 16:00:03 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439520
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

Screen movies, share photos, and deliver presentations with these pint-size projectors.

The post The best mini projectors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dangbei Atom Projector on a bed frame. Danbei Atom
SEE IT

A light, bright, mini streaming machine.

Best for movies Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12 Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12
SEE IT

Advanced imaging offers a cinema-like experience.

Best budget KODAK FLIK HD9 on a plain white background. Kodak FLIK HD9
SEE IT

A projector that’s road-worthy and feature-rich.

Mini projectors balance size, features, price, and image quality. Is it easy to pack big entertainment in a small package? Nope, so when purchasing a mini projector, managing your expectations is important. These units will never match the brightness, resolution, color saturation, contrast, or picture size you get from a full-size projector. On the other hand, try slipping one of those 20-pound monsters into your carry-on bag or using it in a small office or a dorm room. Ideally, the best mini projectors weigh a few pounds or less—sometimes much less—but are bright enough for presentations and to display photos, spec sheets, or whatever else you’d like. 

These small entertainment units often include built-in batteries for truly portable play, and some have Android TV functionality for easy streaming. Integrated speakers are common, and there are often HDMI and USB ports for external media like Blu-ray players, set-top streaming boxes, or USB streaming sticks. Finding the best mini projector that meets your priorities isn’t always easy, so we’ve gathered six of the best mini projectors while also providing some insight into what to look for when you’re shopping.

How we chose the best mini projectors

When selecting the best mini projectors to include in our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home projectors, and we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorites—as well as the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites and sifted through online reviews and comments to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing first and foremost on how the unit balanced image quality against its small, portable size. Color, contrast, and resolution were considered, as were size and weight. Price was an important factor, especially in terms of “bang for your buck,” and additional features—like built-in streaming apps, batteries, and speakers—were evaluated as well.

The best mini projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

A little more compact than some portable projectors, while not as limited in features as a pico projector, the best mini projectors are all-in-one entertainment.

Best overall: Dangbei Atom

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small, light projector ticks all our boxes with a native 1080p picture, a reasonably bright lamp, a built-in battery, and an onboard speaker. 

Specs 

  • Brightness: 1200 lumens
  • Size: ‎10.03 x 10.03 x 4.92 inches
  • Weight: 2.82 pounds

Pros

  • Fantastic color reproduction for its size
  • Built-in speakers
  • Bright for a compact projector

Cons

  • Single HDMI port

Leave it to Dangbei to make a mini projector good enough to compare favorably to significantly larger models. It has every essential projector feature, from HDR10 support and solid-sounding built-in speakers to a 1200 lumen bulb, and the ability to project a 180-inch screen. Additional features, like having enough processing power to run Google TV smoothly, Netflix support, the ability to trigger the Google Assistant, and an auto-keystone correction feature that keeps your screen looking tidy, are also available. On a technical level, it’s hard to find any fault with the Dangbei Atom, given its ultra-thin and compact profile and every feature the company managed to cram into this projector.

Our primary tests included playing video games on the Nintendo Switch. In general, colors looked good, games sounded pretty rich, and there wasn’t a discernible amount of latency when playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild, which admittedly runs at 30 frames per second. The Atom, which clocks in at just 1.87 inches thick and under three pounds, is a technical triumph of engineering given its size. That said, a 1080P image projected on a 100-inch screen does look worse than one at 4K. This wasn’t an issue when playing games on the Nintendo Switch, which tops out at 1080P, but was noticeable when watching videos. If you stream a lot of 4K content, it may be wise to look elsewhere. Our only other complaint is that its single HDMI port means you’ll be swapping out components whenever you want to use a different device.

But the Atom’s size—it was easy to carry the projector and power cable in one hand from room to room—means you can easily take it with you on vacation or set up and break down your big-screen home theater setup in a couple of minutes. The Atom is the ideal mini projector for spaces like dorm rooms or studio apartments.

Best for movies: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Superior contrast, a relatively bright lamp, and advanced imaging technology work to deliver what’s by far the best-looking movies you’ll see from any other projector on this list.  

Specs

  • Brightness: 1000 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 6.9 x 6.9 x 5 inches
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 200,000:1 contrast ratio
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • A bit heavy by mini standards
  • Expensive

The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is more expensive than most other mini projectors, but that’s the trade-off for a positively cinematic movie-watching experience. With a native Full HD 1080p resolution and 1,000-ANSI lumen MicroLaser light source, the unit projects a sharp 140-inch picture. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range, while high contrast and adaptive color correction deliver shadows full of detail and saturated colors that positively pop. 

Built-in Android TV provides access to a full suite of streaming apps, and the EpiqVision Mini has two HDMI inputs for external players. A 5-watt Yamaha speaker delivers robust and clear audio. 

Unfortunately, this Android projector doesn’t have an internal battery, so don’t expect to use it without having access to AC power. It’s also a chunkier piece of gear than many mini projectors on this list—this isn’t dropping into anyone’s pocket. And, again, the price—close to $1,000, compared to all our other sub-$500 choices—might make it a tough buy for anyone watching their budget. But if you prioritize your movies above all else, there’s a reason this is one of our favorite home theater projectors.

Best for gaming: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro mini projector enhances gaming by providing a crisp picture, a 3D mode, superior audio quality, and low latency.

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 7.76 x 9.57 x 9.69 inches
  • Weight: 4.6 lbs.

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Good image quality for its size
  • Great price

Cons

  • Dim bulb

If you’d like to game on a mini projector, your best choice is XGIMI’s MoGo 2 Pro. Its only drawback is the brightness of its bulb, which at 400 lumens means you’ll only want to use it in dark rooms. This limitation may be a dealbreaker for you, but if you’re fine with the limitation, you’ll be rewarded in other ways. XGIMI managed to fit a dual-speaker audio system, a processor fast enough to run Android 11 (sans Netflix), object avoidance, and auto keystone correction into a compact package. It lacks HDR, which will matter if you play video games on a PlayStation 5 or Xbox Series X, or pay for the highest tiers of some streaming services, but Nintendo Switch owners and casual streamers won’t be missing out.

A feature called uninterrupted keystone correction will keep your screen—up to 200 inches in size—looking even while you use it. If you’ve been flummoxed by finicky slightly tilted projection screens in the past, this may end up being your favorite features. XGIMI has continually proven it knows how to eke out as much performance as possible from its hardware. This is your answer if you’re a casual gamer who wants to play on the biggest possible screen.

Best pocket-sized: AAXA P6 Ultimate

AAXA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native 720p resolution, this pint-size player delivers a much better picture than you usually get from such a small projector. 

Specs

  • Lumens: 417 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 5.25 x 5.7 x 3.1 inches
  • Weight: ‎4.07 pounds

Pros

  • Extremely small size
  • 3-hour battery life
  • 200-inch maximum screen size

Cons

  • One HDMI port

AAXA’s ultimate version of its P6 projector is so small it could actually fit in the pocket of a pair of cargo pants. With a native resolution of 720p, it’s hardly the most powerful projector we’re recommending, but it does support the ability to accept 4K signals. The mini projector’s 417 ANSI bulb is impressive, but be mindful that AAXA lists the projector as having 1,000 LED lumens, which, while accurate, may give the impression that the P6 Ultimate is brighter than it really is. If screen size is your most important metric, the P6 Ultimate holds up well, with the ability to project a 200-inch image. Be mindful that a 200-inch 720p picture will look blurry when compared to higher-resolution projectors.

What makes the P6 Ultimate the best pocket-sized mini projector is its battery, which allows you to run it for up to six hours per charge. You’ll get less watch time if you crank up its brightness to the max, but it’s still impressive that a projector this small has a battery inside. Similarly, AAXA built a speaker into this projector, which is almost unimaginable given its size. The AAXA P6 Ultimate runs AndroidOS natively, so you’ll be able to stream media to it without plugging in a media streamer. That’s great because this mini projector only has a single HDMI port, which is understandable but still a drawback. If you want to get a mini projector that really lives up to that adjective, AAXA’s P6 Ultimate is the one to get.

Best for travel: NEBULA Capsule 3

NEBULA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Lightweight and featuring a built-in Android TV, this battery-powered projector travels easily. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 300 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 3.3 x 3.3 x 6.7 inches
  • Weight: 1.98 pounds

Pros

  • Up to 2.5 hours of battery life
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Native HD resolution but can accept 4K inputs

Cons

  • Price

If we could only recommend one mini projector for travel, it’d be the latest model in NEBULA’s capsule series. The Capsule 3’s slim, cylindrical shape makes it easy to carry in a backpack. And its battery means you can use it on travels where outlets are fewer and further between. Its technical features, including its native 1080P resolution, eight-watt speaker with Dolby Audio, AndroidOS support, and laser projection system help it stay competitive in this category. NEBULA doubled the Capsule 3’s contrast and improved its color accuracy when compared to the previous generation for those looking to upgrade.

Most importantly, the Capsule 3 is 55% smaller than the model it replaced, and at just under 2 pounds, it’s a lot easier to carry around on trips. Our primary technical complaint is that this projector has a brightness of 300 lumens—the other is its single HDMI port. This is understood given its smaller size and to accommodate the fact that it runs on battery power, but it’s still something to be aware of. If you’re more concerned with how to broadcast a 120-inch screen on any trip you go on, the Capsule 3 is the mini projector to get.

Best budget: Kodak FLIK HD9

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This inexpensive and ultra-small projector is a great way to share presentations, photos, or videos. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 200 ANSI lumens
  • Size: ‎5.1 x 4.3 x 5.9 inches
  • Weight: 3.3 pounds

Pros

  • 1080P resolution
  • Runs AndroidOS
  • Built in speakers

Cons

  • Not very bright

Kodak’s FLIK HD9 is better than any budget-friendly mini projector has any right to be, and it’s an inexpensive way to share content from your smartphone or stream your favorite media. It runs AndroidOS for easy video streaming, has a built-in speaker system, and has a native resolution of 1080p. Its remote even allows you to access the Google Assistant, so you can use the projector completely hands-free. These specs and features are unheard of for a projector that costs just $250—though its 200-lumen bulb is its Achilles heel. You’ll only be able to use this mini projector in absolute darkness. As far as mini projectors go, you’ll need to spend over $100 more to get one that bests it in meaningful ways.

Things to consider before buying a mini projector

It’s not easy for something that potentially fits in your palm (or at least can be easily carried with one hand) to throw a picture that’s around 100-200 inches from corner to corner, in 720p or 1080p, with accurate colors and decent shadow detail. Here are the specs to watch for as you shop:

Brightness

ANSI lumens describe how much light a projector creates, which determines how bright and large your picture will be—especially in less-than-ideal situations where you can’t achieve a completely dark room. Brightness levels of around 200 to 500 ANSI lumens are common, with picture sizes of around 80-120 inches. That said, some projectors can achieve much brighter pictures than that, even some that could be used in daylight

Chip

Projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types of them: DLP, LCD, and LCoS. DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid-range to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall but, not surprisingly, cost more and don’t show up in budget units. 

One last thing to know about chips: Single-DLP projectors, which comprise most budget-priced units, sometimes suffer from “the rainbow effect.” This is when bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. With thousands upon thousands of single-DLP projectors sold, it’s obvious that most people don’t even notice them—or aren’t bothered. But if you have an opportunity to test out a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect.

Pico and palmtops

There’s mini, and there’s mini. Pico projectors, also sometimes called pocket projectors, are about the size of a smartphone. They’re extremely portable, of course, but their pictures rarely match the brightness or quality found on bigger machines. Palmtop projectors are larger and brighter than pico projectors, with more connections, but still light enough to drop into a bag for travel or presentations. Many models also connect with smartphones, making them ideal cell phone projectors.

Power

Many mini projectors run on internal batteries for at least a couple of hours, making them even more portable. That said, it’s not enough juice to binge an entire series or watch some of the longer Marvel movies. Luckily, mini projectors also come with AC cords, so when you’re at home, in an office, or at a friend’s place, you can just plug them in.

Screens

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $100, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which are especially important when using a mini projector, which is likely already hobbled by a dimmer light source.

Audio

Because they’re built for portability, mini projectors often include speakers. Three or more watts can generally fill a small space, but volume isn’t everything. Ensure the speakers produce clear audio to separate voices from background noise or music in busy scenes. Decent bass response will contribute to the sound’s fullness, too. Many mini projectors also include an audio-out jack for using external speakers. 

FAQs

Q: Are mini projectors worth buying?

Mini projectors are worth buying if you put a premium on size and portability. They’re small, lightweight, and often include features like battery power, built-in Android TV, and speakers. However, they sacrifice picture quality and brightness to achieve those other ends. If you want something you can keep set up in your personal media room, a mini projector isn’t the best choice.

Q: Can you watch Netflix on a mini projector?

You can watch Netflix on a mini projector by connecting a set-top streaming box, like an Apple TV or Roku, via HDMI, or some other streaming stick/media folder through the USB port. Some mini projectors have internal Android TV, but the Netflix app isn’t always compatible. It’s important to confirm compatibility ahead of time.

Q: How much does a mini projector cost?

Mini projectors can range in price depending on the number of features, brightness, and quality of the image. Expect to pay around $200 at the very low end for basic units and as much as $800 for projectors with high-quality, cinematic visuals.

Q: Is a projector better than a TV?

Sometimes a projector is better than a TV, but sometimes it’s not. It depends on what sort of viewing experience you want to have, and where you plan on having it. Projectors are usually capable of much bigger pictures—imagine a full-size unit delivering 300 inches of Marvel movie mayhem! But if you don’t need that big a screen, or you simply don’t have room for it, maybe a large, flat-screen TV will suit you better. Projectors can often offer much better contrast than TVs, but that’s only if they’re in a dark room. If the ambient light is an issue, projectors might run into trouble. Projectors need enough space to “throw” their image in order for it to achieve its maximum size—is your room deep enough to allow that? On the other hand, projectors capable of displaying a 100-inch picture are much easier to take on the road with you than a 100-inch TV! In the end, deciding which is best comes down to your own lifestyle and movie-watching interests. 

Q: How much do mini projectors cost?

The cost of mini projectors can range from $250 for budget options to more than $800 for premium versions with high picture quality, superior audio, and built-in access to Android TV and more than 5,000 apps. You can find versions that work easily with your iPhone or more sophisticated models that feature a 3D mode.

Final thoughts on the best mini projectors

Mini projectors almost never live up to the specs of larger, more permanent units—but they cost less and travel easily. Anyone looking to purchase a mini projector needs to first accept that reality before deciding which unit suits them best. After that, it comes down to priorities. If you want a great picture and don’t care about much else, Epson’s EpiqVision Mini EF12 delivers a cinema-like picture. On the other hand, the AAXA P7 Mini Projector trades off some brightness and a bit of image quality for portability. It features a battery and costs much less. In striking that balance and embracing what’s great about mini projectors, the AAXA P7 edged out the Epson for our top pick.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mini projectors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best glasses cleaners for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-glasses-cleaner/ Mon, 08 Mar 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-glasses-cleaner/
A lineup of the best glasses cleaner on a white background
Amanda Reed

Dreaming of smudge- and fog-free glasses? Make it happen with these portable lenses cleaners.

The post The best glasses cleaners for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best glasses cleaner on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best cleaner clip Peeps Carbon Klean Eyeglass Lens Cleaner Peeps Carbon Klean Eyeglass Lens Cleaner
SEE IT

The Peeps glasses cleaner is small, making it easy to stow in a pocket or bag.

Best cloth MagicFiber Microfiber Cleaning Cloths MagicFiber Microfiber Cleaning Cloths
SEE IT

These cloth wipes come in packs of multiples for long-term convenience.

Best budget BCP Mini Eyeglass Cleaning Brushes BCP Mini Eyeglass Cleaning Brushes
SEE IT

The simple design of this glasses cleaner tool allows it to perform at a high level on a budget.

Keeping glasses clean is the only way to ensure that they’re doing their job, so choosing a spectacles cleaner that will suit your routines and activities without causing undue damage to your sensitive lenses is important. Dust, oil, hair, and other types of grime are a normal part of everyday life, but nobody is more constantly reminded of the inconvenience they can cause than people who wear glasses. If you or someone you care about is burdened by the constant cycle of smudging and cleaning that comes with owning a pair of glasses, turn to one of the best glasses cleaners on the market to lessen the ache of spectacle maintenance.

Glasses wearers who intermittently reach for a pair of readers or who only put them on at specific times can benefit from a simple solution like glasses cleaner wipes or sprays, while long-term wearers or folks who engage in physically demanding activities may want to opt for a more robust cleaning solution like a microfiber or ultrasonic glasses cleaner. Below, we’ll break down a few types of the best eyeglasses cleaners available to help you find the right option for any situation.

How we chose the best glasses cleaners

Whether we’re wearing blue light glasses, readers, or sunglasses, most of us have experienced a stubborn smudged lens. Sure, you can always try to clean it on your t-shirt, but you always somehow get your fingerprint on the lens when you do that. In order to find the best glasses cleaners, we sprayed, wiped down, and wore our very own prescription glasses to see which contender held up, and which contenders left us besmirched and bothered.

The best glasses cleaners: Reviews & Recommendations

There’s a difference between products that will clean drinking glasses and other surfaces and glasses cleaner. One of our picks should be pocketable to protect your lenses on the go.

Best overall: Zeiss Lens Wipes

Zeiss

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Individually packaged lens wipes
  • Count: 200
  • Alcohol content: 40-50%
  • Expiration: 3 years from manufacture date

Pros

  • Perfect for on-the-go use
  • Gentle on lenses
  • Can be used on binoculars, cameras, and more

Cons

  • Single-use inherently not eco-friendly

Zeiss Lens Wipes are pre-moistened with an alcohol-based cleaner and come in a package of 200 wipes, making these some of the best glasses cleaner wipes for getting consistent results. Zeiss is a longstanding company that’s well-known for its high-quality optical products, including camera lenses and binoculars, so these wipes are designed to be extremely gentle on the most sensitive surfaces. These wipes are guaranteed to leave eyeglasses streak-free and contain no harsh ammonia-based products or fragrances.

You might want to avoid using them for smart glasses. Most manufacturers of those recommend using a damp washcloth and some mild soap or a non-alcohol-based cleaner.

Best cleaner clip: Peeps Carbon Klean Eyeglass Lens Cleaner

Peeps

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Clip cleaner
  • Count: 1
  • Alcohol content: N/A
  • Expiration: 500 uses

Pros

  • Stashable
  • Eco-friendly
  • Cover keeps pads clean

Cons

  • Easy to lose

The Peeps glasses cleaner is small, making it easy to stow in a pocket or bag. It features two carbon microfiber pads situated at the top of the clip opposite one another for quick and easy cleaning and a brush end for disposing of dust and hair. The unit comes with a cover to keep the pads clean during storage and prolong their useful life as well.

Best anti-fog: Optix 55 Anti-Fog Spray

Optix 55

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Spray
  • Count: 1
  • Alcohol content: N/A
  • Expiration: 400 pumps

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Hypoallergenic
  • Can be used on binoculars and goggles

Cons

  • Microfiber cloth not included
  • Not for anti-reflective glasses

Users searching for the best anti-fog glasses cleaner will appreciate that this glasses cleaner spray from Optix 55 is effective at preventing the formation of fog on a variety of optical products, including binoculars and swimming goggles. Simply spray to apply, spread it evenly with your finger, let it dry for one minute, and then wipe clean with a microfiber cloth for easy glasses fog-proofing. It’s hypoallergenic as well, so you can feel good about using it near your face, but be aware that it’s not made for use on AR-coated eyeglasses.

Best cloth: MagicFiber Microfiber Cleaning Cloths

MagicFiber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Microfiber cloth
  • Count: 6
  • Alcohol content: N/A
  • Expiration: N/A

Pros

  • Hand-washable
  • Not bulky
  • Can use on tablets and phones

Cons

  • A little small compared to other glasses cloths

These MagicFiber glasses cleaner cloths are the perfect solution for everyday glasses wearers who prefer a familiar and affordable way to clean their glasses. The glasses cleaners measure 6 x 7 inches each and come in packs of multiples for long-term convenience. Since they fold up flat, they’re great for storing in glasses cases without adding extra bulk, and they’re hand-washable so that you can get the most bang for your buck. They’re also great for cleaning your laptop screen.

Best ultrasonic: iSonic-D2840 Ultrasonic Cleaner

iSonic

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Sonic cleaner
  • Count: 1
  • Alcohol content:
  • Expiration: N/A

Pros

  • Can be used with jewelry
  • Quiet
  • Lots of operation options

Cons

  • Might be too rough for delicate jewelry
  • Not portable

The iSonic D2840 is one of the best ultrasonic eyeglass cleaners on the market, delivering thorough performance and deep cleaning unparalleled by cloths and sprays. The unit sports a 1.6-liter tank and includes an interior basket for safe cleaning of your small items. A digital timer that ranges between 90 and 480 seconds allows for precise and controlled operation, and a blue interior LED indicates when the unit is running for peace of mind. This isn’t really a portable solution when compared to the others on this list, but it’s still the best option for getting dust and grime off of every square inch of your glasses. You don’t have to worry about your glasses breaking in an ultrasonic machine, either.

Best budget: BCP Mini Eyeglass Cleaning Brushes

BCP

SEE IT

Specs

  • Form: Cleaning brush
  • Count: 12
  • Alcohol content: N/A
  • Expiration: N/A

Pros

  • Cheap
  • Multi-pack to leave one where you please
  • Handy

Cons

  • More frequent replacement compared to other models
  • Hard to reach into the glasses corner

The simple design of this glasses cleaner tool allows it to perform at a high level on a budget. Two microfiber pads sit at the ends of each arm, which attach at a ringed base that allows users to stow the cleaner on a keyring or lanyard. While the microfiber quality combined with the friendly price point makes this one of the best cheap glasses cleaners money can buy, this model doesn’t include any form of carrying case, so it’s likely that it will collect dust and debris faster than other systems, which may necessitate more frequent replacement.

What to consider when buying the best glasses cleaner

The best glasses cleaners come in a variety of forms suited for different environments and lifestyles. Some are portable and built for reusability, while others are disposable and designed primarily for consistency. From glasses cleaner cloths to ultrasonic eyeglass cleaners, here are some of our favorite glasses cleaners currently on the market.

Microfiber glasses cleaner clips

Glasses that are put through low-impact to moderately messy daily activities usually collect a good deal of dust and dirt from being worn on the face and stored outside of a case. Some of the best eyeglasses cleaners for managing the most common forms of surface oil and grime come in the form of compact reusable microfiber eyeglasses cleaner clips. These utilize a portable and easy-to-handle design that allows users to clean both sides of the lens at once while keeping a firm grip on their glasses.

When shopping for a microfiber glasses cleaner, it’s important to choose a design that comes with a cover to keep the cleaner from passively collecting dust and dirt when not in use. A cover keeps the delicate microfiber durable, but it also keeps other harmful debris from lodging in the cleaning pads and potentially scraping your lenses during cleaning. Some models of cleaner clips also include soft brush attachments, which can aid in removing loose powders from glasses in situations where microfiber may spread it around.

Anti-fog glasses cleaner

While eyeglasses get their name straight from one of the most common materials to ever exist, most lenses are actually made of a type of specialized plastic that’s better suited to optical use than traditional glass. Besides being lighter in weight, plastics and polycarbonates are more resistant to shattering from impacts than glass, and they bond much easier with anti-glare coatings. Despite all this, plastic is no less susceptible than glass to collecting moisture, and there’s never a safe or convenient time for your vision to be blocked by unwanted fog. Treating your glasses with an anti-fog glasses cleaner ensures that your lenses will stay sparkle-clear and perform as intended for sustained periods in any weather.

There are many varieties on the market to choose from, but the best anti-fog glasses cleaners generally form a coating on the lens over a period of multiple uses and are applied as a liquid directly to the plastic before being allowed to sit for some time. When shopping for an anti-fog glasses cleaner, you might opt for a model that comes in a spray bottle for ease of portability and quick application. Unlike normal water or alcohol compounds, anti-fog eyeglass cleaners make it harder for moisture to collect in humid environments and ensure that eyewear users can enjoy uninterrupted vision.

Glasses cleaner cloths

When cleaning glasses, not just any traditional cloth or fabric material will do; it’s crucial to select a cloth that’s designed specifically for eyewear to avoid irreversible damage from scratching and abrasion. Cleaning cloths come in many sizes and varieties, but the best glasses cleaner cloths are made from microfiber, an incredibly fine material made of polyester or nylon. A dense construction or weave allows microfiber to wick away grease, hair, and dirt of even the smallest sizes from sensitive and smooth surfaces like eyeglass lenses, making microfiber cleaning cloths an economical and simple solution for keeping glasses free of debris.

Another benefit of well-made microfiber cleaning cloths is their reusability, which makes them cost-effective and a good long-term solution for everyday glasses wearers. Though they are sensitive, many models can withstand hand washings, which can extend their effective life. Glasses cleaner cloths are a good choice for travelers due to their inherent portability, but they may attract dust and debris when stored improperly. For this reason, they work best if you’re open to washing them from time to time.

Glasses cleaner wipes

For fans of a disposable form factor, one-use glasses cleaner wipes are a fantastic way to get lenses sparkling clean quickly. Choosing glasses cleaner wipes over reusable products like microfiber cloths or clip cleaners is ideal in situations where you absolutely have to ensure that the cleaning product is free and clear of dirt and abrasive materials during each use. Because of their disposable nature, the best eyeglasses cleaner wipes will deliver a consistently streak-free finish in a very portable package.

Most spectacle cleaner wipes are folded cloths made of fine tissue that’s been treated with an alcohol-based cleaning solution free of harsh chemicals. It’s important to choose a wipe that’s designed specifically for critical applications over a generic alcohol wipe to prevent accidental scratches or other types of damage to arise during cleaning. Some of the best cleaning wipes on the market can be used for camera lenses, binocular lenses, and other sensitive optical surfaces, and the disposable format further ensures that users achieve the best results every time.

For heavy-duty cleaning: Ultrasonic eyeglass cleaners

Users who want to put their glasses through one of the most thorough and high-tech cleaning processes available should consider adding an ultrasonic eyeglass cleaner to their eyewear arsenal. Ultrasonic cleaning incorporates high-frequency sound and liquid solvents to disrupt and absorb a wide variety of surface contaminants, making it very useful for cleaning eyeglasses as well as jewelry and other everyday wearables. While this may be the priciest option on the list, ultrasonic eyeglass cleaners are still surprisingly affordable, considering that they provide an unparalleled level of clean for every surface and nook on a pair of glasses in addition to the lenses themselves.

When shopping for the best ultrasonic eyeglass cleaner, it’s important to ensure it includes a plastic basket or stand to keep your glasses elevated inside the compartment. Doing so prevents pitting from occurring and ensures that every area on the surface of the glasses is fully cleaned. Some models of ultrasonic cleaners also come with a proprietary solvent that promotes the dissolution of oils and dirt, so take note of the specific solvent type when it’s time to buy a refill.

Buy in bulk to get clean for less

Glasses cleaners are a relatively affordable category of product considering their usefulness, but that fact comes down to their simplicity in design above all else. If you’re looking for a way to clean your glasses on a budget, there are many good options to choose from, but there are some factors to take into consideration. When shopping for the best cheap glasses cleaner, make sure that the model in question doesn’t skimp on softness; cutting corners in cost often makes certain details imprecise, and it’s imperative that your cleaner doesn’t accidentally scratch your lenses by using coarse material. You may have to sacrifice reusability when going for an affordable way to get streak-free glasses, which may also be a limiting factor if you are concerned about creating waste.

FAQs

Q: What causes eyeglasses to become cloudy?

Cloudy eyeglass lenses are most commonly caused by accumulations of oil and dirt that go unaddressed over long periods of time, but they can also be caused by the formation of minuscule scratches from improper storage. To prevent eyeglasses from becoming cloudy, clean your lenses thoroughly and regularly, and store them securely in a case with a soft interior.

Q: Can you wash eyeglass cleaning cloths?

Microfiber eyeglass cleaning cloths can and should be washed to maximize their lifespan and cut down on waste. While these cloths are incredibly resilient and effective, it’s imperative to wash them by hand to prevent the introduction of snags or imperfections that might cause harm to your lenses.

Q: Is Windex good for cleaning eyeglasses?

Windex is a well-known cleaning product due to its ability to aggressively remove dirt and grime from glass, but it accomplishes this through the use of chemicals that are far too intense for use on eyeglasses. If you’re looking for an effective liquid glasses cleaner, stick to anti-fog spray or use pre-moistened glasses cleaner wipes.

Q: How often should you clean glasses?

Every one to two days will suffice. If you’re looking to get into the habit of cleaning your glasses, do so every morning so you can see clearly all day.

Final thoughts on the best glasses cleaners

Using the best glasses cleaners available ensures that your vision remains crystal clear every step of the way, and can even prolong the life of your lenses. There’s no one right way to clean your glasses, but using a mix of microfiber cloths and wipes, anti-fog sprays, ultrasonic cleaners, and microfiber clip cleaners can ensure that both you and your lenses are safe.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best glasses cleaners for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best mattresses in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-mattress/ Tue, 06 Jul 2021 09:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-mattress/
Textured details of mattresses from Helix, Tuft & Needle, Sealy, and Casper.

You'll get more shuteye, potentially for less money, when you find a mattress that suits your sleeping style and your budget.

The post The best mattresses in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Textured details of mattresses from Helix, Tuft & Needle, Sealy, and Casper.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Helix Midnight Elite Mattress, which features a quilted white cover and two white pillows on top. Helix Midnight Elite Mattress
SEE IT

This award-winning, supportive mattress is known as the “tallest on the internet” for its 16 inches of thickness.

Best cooling Casper Snow Max cooling mattress Casper Snow Max Hybrid Mattress
SEE IT

Toss and turn no more with this medium-soft mattress that delivers tangible pressure relief and noticeable cooling capacity.

Best budget A white mattress made by Zinus in a wooden frame flanked by green shelves and a white rug. Zinus Memory Green Mattress
SEE IT

This affordable memory foam mattress is designed with three layers of foam to conform to the body while encouraging airflow.

What better way to start your morning than by showing up well-rested, and what better way to rest than on a new mattress? With new technology and developments in sleep science, we know more about what it takes to get a good night’s sleep and how important it is—and you don’t have to wait for Daylight Saving Time and Sleep Awareness Week to have it on your mind (though any reason is a good reason). Traditional coil innerspring models have evolved, and modern designs come with foam materials that can literally shape to our bodies. With cooling gels, foam, plush pillow tops, and breathable materials, we can stay cool, relaxed, and comfortable all through the night. Moreover, you’re no longer stuck shopping in stores with pushy salespeople. One of the best mattresses can show up at your doorstep once you decide on the best option for you from our extensive list.

How we chose the best mattresses

While it’s easy to assume that all mattresses offer similar performance, several factors affect their functionality. Several years of experience covering home goods and furniture and extensive product research went into choosing our final curated selection. We reviewed over 30 mattresses and weighed many practical considerations when making our recommendations, including:

Type: Foam, innerspring, and hybrid mattresses each have benefits, so we considered all three types for this guide.

Firmness: There is no perfect mattress firmness level, so we included plush, medium, and firm options in this guide to suit various sleep preferences.

Thickness: Mattresses range in height from about 5 inches to 20 inches. While thickness doesn’t necessarily relate to quality, most people find a thicker one more comfortable. Considering that, we only selected mattresses with heights of 10 inches or more.

Trial period: Since buying a mattress is such a personal decision, many manufacturers offer trial periods to help you test them out and ensure the right fit. We preferred brands that offered trial periods of 100 nights or more.

Value: Buying a mattress is a major investment that can last a decade or more, so it’s worth it to save up to buy a high-quality model. That being said, we still considered value when making our recommendations and only included products that we considered to be a great price for the quality provided.

Size: In order to fairly compare the prices of all our recommended mattresses, this guide primarily features details for queen-sized mattresses (which measure 60 by 80 inches), though all models listed are also available in other sizes. This consideration is particularly important for our “Best for RVs” buy.

The best mattresses: Reviews & Recommendations

While we can’t always control the stress in our daily lives, we can control the quality and comfort of our nightly rejuvenation by selecting the best mattress for our bodies. The right bed will provide you with optimal support and comfort. Whether you prefer firm support or a plush, soft mattress, you can choose from many options in many price ranges, so we’ve helped narrow it down.

Best overall: Helix Midnight Elite Mattress

Helix

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 16 inches
  • Firmness: Medium
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Superior comfort
  • Designed with cooling technology
  • Made without harmful chemicals

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Requires deep-pocketed sheets

If you’re looking to upgrade your sleeping experience all around, consider the award-winning Helix Midnight Elite Mattress. At 16 inches thick, it’s known as the “tallest mattress on the internet.” This hybrid mattress features a quilted top with two layers of microcoils specifically designed for back support and five layers of high-density foam. The Helix is wrapped in GlacioTex Elite Phase Change cooling fabric that dissipates each user’s heat. Plus, you can rest easy knowing that these mattresses are GREENGUARD Gold-certified for using low amounts of potentially harmful VOCs. And you can test it out for 100 days to ensure it’s right for you.

Best cooling: Casper Snow Max Hybrid Mattress

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 14 inches
  • Firmness: Medium-Soft
  • Available in: Twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Features enhanced cooling technology
  • Ergonomically designed
  • Hybrid model features foam and springs
  • Subject to 10-year limited mattress warranty

Cons

  • Stomach sleepers could find it too soft

Casper is a pioneer in the online bed-in-a-box market, so when you purchase a mattress from them you can, well, rest assured you’re getting a quality product. And the company’s new 2024 line-up is as refreshing as the sleep you’ll get on a Casper mattress, specifically the Snow Max (an evolution of the Wave Hybrid Snow). After a month with a Queen Snow Max (shown above) we can confidently say that thanks to its combined features it is a Goldilocks mattress: balanced in temperature regulation, support, and motion isolation, so just right. I brought it up from the mail room easily enough with a cart (or bring a partner, as a Queen is 111 pounds), then opened it one Saturday morning. It was ready to enjoy the evening of the day it arrived, with minimal residual smell.

This hybrid mattress’s combined heat dissipating features—including a cool-to-the-touch cover, 2x the HeatDelete Bands of the Standard Snow (still a good buy if you prefer a less soft medium), and Phase Change Material—let us put on the crisp percale sheets and coziest flannel duvet cover without hesitation or sweat. Meanwhile, the Zoned Support Strips of firmer, but still airflow-friendly memory foam focused an ergonomic cradle as needed for the side sleepers to wake without aching shoulders or stiff spines. And the multiple layers of soothing and precision-cut foam atop the pockets flex coils mean minimal motion transfer, which is great in a household where sleep schedules aren’t always aligned as well as bodies once they settle into bed.

The Snow Max is a mattress that you can sink into without feeling submerged, and it has good edge support. With its 14-inch height, the Casper Snow Max fits sheets tightly, but rightly. And the comfort and cooling are as advertised, which is great for folks who were previously wary of memory foam. Want to complete the package? The Hybrid Snow Pillow used a breathable foam-and-fibers design to extend support for your neck and cooling for a more restful night’s sleep (available in Standard/King sizes). Like to watch a 4K projector in bed? We recommend a Backrest Pillow or two.

Best memory foam: Tuft & Needle Mint Mattress

Tuft & Needle

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Memory foam
  • Height: 11.5 inches
  • Firmness: Medium
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Adaptive foam adjusts to the body
  • Designed with cooling technology
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Works with most frames
  • Removable cover is machine-washable

Cons

  • Not springy
  • Not the best for people with larger builds

This memory foam mattress has multiple layers of foam to form a strong base, ceramic gel beads for support, and a cooling gel inside the mattress. The top layer uses T&N adaptive foam, which contours to your shape and releases tension in your limbs. What’s more, it is swathed in a breathable cover to help cool the body. And you can rest easy knowing that this model is Greenguard Gold- and CertiPUR-certified, which means it’s free from harmful chemicals. That said, you may miss the springiness of mattress coils, and this option isn’t the best for stomach sleepers or people with larger builds.

Best for RVs: Brooklyn Bedding Aurora Luxe Cooling Mattress

Brooklyn Bedding

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 13.25 inches
  • Firmness: Can choose between soft, medium, and firm
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king, split California king, short queen, RV king, RV bunk
  • Provides 100-night trial: Allows for 120-day trial

Pros

  • Designed with cooling fibers that absorb body heat
  • Available in soft, medium, or firm
  • Makes mattresses for RVs

Cons

  • Prominent logo
  • The mattress topper may buckle

Not going to be satified with any old mattress? Brooklyn Bedding provides more options to customize your mattress than most companies. The Arizona-based company (that’s right, not from the Five Boroughs) allows customers to choose between soft, medium, and firm mattresses to match their typical sleep orientation. And in addition to the usual lineup from twin through California king, Brooklyn Bedding also offers Bunk/King sizes specifically for RVs (not pictured above). That’s right; you can take the pressure off your joints and degrees off your body after a long day of driving, adventuring, or both.

The great thing about a bed-in-a-box is that it’s easy to get into and maneuver around an RV before unpacking (none of the exhausting contortionism required when navigating turns with a flat mattress. But what sets the Aurora Luxe mattress apart is its cooling technology. The mattress features a cover made with GlacioTex fibers and thermal-regulating foam that absorbs body heat. The fibers also allow for plenty of airflow. And the hybrid model is made with individually encased coils that provide support under the foam layers cushioning the body for a satisfying night’s sleep. It should be said that the sides can compress a surprising amount thanks to the pillowy top of the medium or soft, but that relaxing, reassuring hug might be worth it—just something to consider if you rest/roll around in a moving/uneven vehicle.

Best for durability: Nod Hybrid by Tuft & Needle

Tuft & Needle

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 10 inches
  • Firmness: Firm
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Provides firm support
  • Smaller footprint
  • Less expensive

Cons

  • Some users found it didn’t help back pain
  • Returns can be challenging

This Tuft & Needle mattress offers a hybrid construction, with layers of adaptive foam, slow recovery foam, and a layer of pocket coils with a foam base. It’s topped with a stay-cool material to prevent the heat that is associated with some foam mattresses. The hybrid style allows for the bounce and structure of traditional models combined with the muscle-relaxing comfort of modern memory foam.

Best eco-friendly: Tuft & Needle Original Queen Mattress

Tuft & Needle

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Memory foam
  • Height: 9.5 inches
  • Firmness: Firm
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Relieves pressure
  • Foam is infused with cooling gel
  • Features adaptive, high-density foam

Cons

  • Foam mattresses require time to fully expand
  • May have a chemical smell when delivered

While traditional foam mattresses cause sleepers to sink into the material, this pick from Tuft & Needle uses an adaptive foam that’s designed to provide a firm level of support without making you feel trapped.

The brand’s proprietary foam features an open-cell structure that adapts to your body position as you sleep and is infused with graphite and gel beads to make the material more breathable and provide a cooling effect. The materials used are certified by CertiPUR-US as being free of harmful chemicals.

With a medium firmness level, this mattress should be suitable for most sleepers, but back sleepers will particularly appreciate this level of support. Tuft & Needle offers a 100-night trial period to ensure the mattress is right for you. According to the manufacturer, 95 percent of buyers keep their mattresses after the trial period ends. Like most foam mattresses, this model needs up to 72 hours to expand fully after delivery.

Best for back sleepers: Leesa Hybrid 11 Mattress

Leesa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 11 inches
  • Firmness: Medium
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Hybrid design featuring pocket coils and foam
  • Features a ventilated comfort layer
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Because it comes rolled in a box, it will need time to expand
  • Some users say you can feel the springs

Back sleepers do best with a medium level of firmness that keeps their spines properly aligned while also providing cushioning at key pressure points like the shoulders and hips. This hybrid model from Leesa features pocket springs covered in a top layer of cozy memory foam. The comfort layer on top of the memory foam includes ventilation holes to prevent overheating as you sleep.

Innerspring mattresses are known for having higher levels of motion transfer than foam mattresses, meaning that if your partner gets up in the middle of the night, you’ll feel the mattress shift. This model, however, includes over 1,000 individually wrapped springs to reduce motion transfer. The coils span the entire mattress, so you won’t experience issues with the edges or corners sagging.

While medium-firm mattresses are ideal for back sleepers, they’re also an excellent all-around pick if your mattress needs to accommodate various sleep positions. And in terms of materials, this mattress is CertiPUR-US-certified.

Best for stomach sleepers: Casper Sleep Element Mattress

Casper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Foam
  • Height: 10 inches
  • Firmness: Firm
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Firm support for stomach sleepers
  • Perforated foam layer for air circulation
  • Made with sustainable materials

Cons

  • Foam mattress requires up to 72 hours to fully expand

Casper’s Element mattress is a budget pick constructed from three different types of foam and provides a firm support level. Stomach sleepers do best with a high level of support to alleviate pressure on their chests, shoulders, knees, and hips.

The top layer features a comfortable memory foam that relieves pressure by contouring to your body. The middle layer is made from AirScape, a perforated foam that provides air circulation that is beneficial for hot sleepers. The base layer is extra-firm and durable to provide the maximum level of support. As a bonus, each mattress uses eco-friendly textiles and is constructed with 121 recycled plastic bottles. (While the Element is no longer offered as part of Casper’s core mattress line, it is still available through Amazon for the time being.)

Best for side sleepers: Sealy Posturepedic Soft Feel Mattress

Sealy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid
  • Height: 13 inches
  • Firmness: Plush (soft); also available in medium and firm
  • Available in: Twin, twin XL, full, queen, king, split king, California king
  • Provides 100-night trial: Yes

Pros

  • Targeted support in the center layer
  • Cooling foam is great for hot sleepers
  • A moisture-wicking cover helps you stay dry
  • 13-inch thickness

Cons

  • Heavy
  • More expensive than some models

A plush mattress is best for side sleepers because they need cushioning on their pressure points. This model from Sealy combines an innerspring system with a gel foam top layer for a perfect balance of 13 inches of comfort and support. One unique feature of this model is that it has targeted reinforcement in the middle third of the mattress, which is where the heaviest part of your body needs support.

The 660 coils are designed to prevent motion transfer, and the brand’s Stable Edge Pro coil system ensures the edges of the mattress don’t sag. The Euro Top cushion layer includes SealyCool Air Gel Foam, which adds breathability, making sleeping comfortable no matter the temperature. Each purchase includes a moisture-wicking protective cover that will improve the mattress’s longevity. While this mattress is soft, the same one is also available in medium and firm.

Best budget: Zinus Memory Green Mattress

Zinus

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Memory foam
  • Height: 12 inches
  • Firmness: Plush (soft)
  • Available in: Narrow twin, twin, twin XL, full, short queen, queen, king, California king
  • Provides 100-day trial: No, provides 30-day trial

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Made without dangerous chemicals
  • Can support up to 500 pounds

Cons

  • Trial period shorter than most

Not looking to spend a lot? Typically, you can find deals on foam mattresses; prices get lower as the size and thickness get smaller. The Zinus Memory Green Mattress, for example, is full size and measures 12 inches thick for under $400. This budget pick is made with three layers of foam to conform to the body, allow for airflow, and provide base support. The makers compress and ship it in a small box that expands within 72 hours of opening the package. And it’s also CertiPUR-US-certified.

Things to consider when shopping for the best mattresses

The mattress marketplace is full of options. With hundreds of models and manufacturers, finding the right choice can feel overwhelming. You can pick from traditional and new materials and price points that range from reasonable to a splurge. Also, consider what type of comfort and support you want. While you should ideally try the model out in person, many online purchases come with free trials and easy returns. Finally, you should understand the construction and materials used. You want your mattress to be durable and retain its shape for many years.

Innerspring vs. memory foam

First, you should understand the difference between innerspring vs. memory foam. Traditional mattresses are designed with what is called innerspring construction, which is steel coils arranged in various configurations. While some manufacturers advertise that the more coils, the better the support—and, therefore, the better the quality—it’s important to consider the gauge of metal used in these springs. Thinner-gauge metal may not be as durable as a thicker gauge. Some are designed with a Bonnell-style coil or hourglass shape, a continuous wire coil, or individually pocketed springs. You can find highly-rated mattresses made with all of these coil styles.

Why does it matter? Coil construction is responsible for the bounciness. The top of the innerspring construction mattresses can include special layers of cushioning, such as a pillow top layer or infused gel. Shifting positions tends to be easy with innerspring mattresses due to the bouncy quality. Foam layers and plush pillow tops added to the top help suppress the bounce by absorbing some of the vibrations.

Qualities of memory foam

Many mattresses today are completely constructed out of foam. The memory foam mattress was invented in the 1960s, designed to soften and mold to your body when you lie on it. Once you get up, it springs back to its original shape. The top models use foam to relieve pressure in body areas that may hold tension. This malleable material conforms to the body and is made with good motion isolation, which is convenient for couples. What’s more, these costs vary from budget to high end. That said, some negative attributes associated with some foam construction mattresses include an initial “off-gas” chemical smell that will dissipate after a few days of being set up and lack of bounce. The foam can also trap body heat.

Though many manufacturers use polyurethane to create their foam layers, others use latex as well. Some include both (so be wary if you have sensitivities). Specific foams offer cooling, support, and pressure relief. Additional varieties include high-density polyfoam, high-resiliency polyfoam, open-cell memory foam, gel memory foam, and varieties of latex foam.

Hybrid mattresses

Hybrid mattresses are made with both traditional construction (metal innerspring coil) and modern materials like foams and gels. They’re great for people who want the best of both mattress styles. A hybrid has the sturdy support of the innerspring coil, better edge support, and durability, along with the signature bounce. However, hybrids also incorporate the many benefits of new technology. Modern foam options offer superior comfort with the ability to mold to your body and relieve pressure in joints and muscles. Adding layers of foam or gel on top of the traditional base provides support and flexibility.

One of the complaints associated with foam-style mattresses is that it can be difficult getting in and out of bed. Sometimes the softness (lack of bounce) and molding quality can make the edge of the bed seemingly collapse when you sit on it. With an innerspring coil, you get some edge support and bounce that makes sitting on bed and getting out of bed easier.

Sleep position

Side sleepers are best served by a well-cushioned mattress because their hips and shoulders need to rest comfortably on the mattress. Back sleepers generally prefer a medium-firm option because they require plenty of spine support and cushioning for pressure points like the hips, lower back, and shoulders. Stomach sleepers should consider a firm mattress to provide support to the chest, stomach, knees, and hips. All-foam picks probably aren’t the best fit for stomach sleepers because they may cause you to sink in more in the middle, forming a U shape and putting a strain on your lower back.

Pain relief

The big question: Will it help you get a good night’s sleep? They will ensure you wake up without additional aches and pains and feel truly rested. The best mattress for back pain relief is a combination of flexibility and durability. It will conform to your body and provide full-body relief, but be supportive enough not to sink or sag.

People seeking pain relief should also consider temperature. Cooling fabrics, gels, and breathable fabrics will allow for an ideal sleeping experience with plenty of airflow. Look for ergonomic designs such as gel pads that help to align the spine, provide softer support under the shoulders, and firmer support around the hips and lower back.

Durability

Anyone who has spent a night tossing and turning in a friend’s basement on their ancient, broken mattress understands the importance of durability. The more durable the materials and construction, the more comfortable nights you will enjoy. Better quality spring construction will provide years of solid but flexible support. Look for foam that can withstand years of conforming to the body while remaining adaptable enough to return to its original shape after you get up.

The amount of wear and tear on the bed is just one factor affecting its lifespan. A rarely used mattress in a seasonal beach house will last longer than one a child jumps on every night. Laboratories test this durability with simulations of normal use and offer an idea of how well they will hold up in time. The longer a mattress can retain its original shape, height, firmness, and side/back support, the more durable it is. A mattress that can withstand eight or more years of wear and tear earns a high durability rating.

FAQs

Q: How much does a mattress cost?

The cost of a mattress ranges from about $3,000 for a premium pick like the Helix Midnight Elite Mattress to just over $300 for the budget-friendly Zinus Memory Green Mattress. In addition to cost, it’s worthwhile to consider the likely longevity of your purchase.

Q: How do you know when it’s time to replace your mattress?

Generally speaking, you should replace a mattress every 6 to 8 years. That being said, there’s no need to replace one that’s still comfortable and supportive. You’ll know it’s time to start shopping for a replacement if it begins to sag or you frequently wake up with back pain.

Q: Do you need a box spring?

Box springs were necessary when mattresses were thinner and less supportive, but most modern mattresses do not require a box spring and are designed to be used on platform-style bed frames.

Q: Is it better to sleep on a hard or soft mattress?

Our recommendations cover a variety of types and styles to suit your needs best. The Tuft & Needle Mint Mattress is one of our top picks because of its adaptive foam construction. Our recommended choice for those on a budget is the Zinus 10-Inch Memory Foam Mattress for its supportive base and comfortable memory foam layer.

Final thoughts on the best mattresses

Buying a mattress doesn’t have to require hours of in-person shopping and haggling with salespeople. Now you can search hundreds of styles online and order them to your doorstep without hassle. Understanding the needs of your body, as well as the materials and construction, will help you pick a brand and model. Then, find the best mattress and look forward to restful nights and serenity ahead.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mattresses in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric generators of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-electric-generator/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=391411
The best electric generators lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

Stay safe and keep devices energized during a blackout these picks for your home.

The post The best electric generators of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best electric generators lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for overnight emergencies The Jackery Portable Power Station explorer 1000 is the best generator for overnight emergencies. Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 1000
SEE IT

Reliable battery power during emergencies. 

Best for RVs The Westinghouse Outdoor Portable Generator is the best electric generator for RVs. Westinghouse Outdoor Portable Generator
SEE IT

Powerful gas generator for homes and RVs.

Best for small appliances The WEN 56203I 2000-Watt Portable Inverter Generator is the best electric generator for small appliances WEN 56203i 2000-Watt Portable Inverter Generator
SEE IT

A simple, cheap inverter generator that’s lightweight and easy to use. 

Electric generators can save you in an emergency or just make life a lot more pleasant when you’re off the grid. Our daily lives depend on electricity, so when the power goes out, it can be more than a simple inconvenience; it can be a catastrophe. Appliances won’t work. Medical equipment like CPAP machines won’t work. And, worst of all, without power, there is no internet. Electric generators can power the entire home. A small generator can keep the appliances in an RV working. And indoor-friendly, battery-powered electric power stations keep laptops and floor lamps shining bright all through the night. No matter what situation you’re in, the right emergency generator gives you the power options needed to survive comfortably. If you’ve got hurricane preparedness on your mind, you can use one during bad storms. You can use one when camping or tailgating. You can even use the best electric generator to keep an outdoor event going strong all night long.

How we chose the best electric generators

To spark our search for the best electric generators, we looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research. We also took knowledge from other generator stories—like this one on inverter generators—and applied it here.

The best electric generators: Reviews & Recommendations

First, pick the type of generator you want—gas generator or solar generator—and then find the generator that provides enough electricity for your needs. Do you want to power the entire house or just an iPhone? The best electric generator will be the right size at the right price. 

Best for RVs: Westinghouse Outdoor Portable Generator

Westinghouse Outdoor Power Equipment

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Power your fridge or your RV with this generator that’s “just-right” when it comes to power and cost.

Specs

  • Weight: 109 lbs.
  • Watts: 3,600 watts
  • Hours of power: 14 hours on 1,000 watts
  • Number of outlets: 4

Pros

  • Starts easily
  • “Just-right” in power and cost
  • Can power select household appliances

Cons

  • Heavy

The Westinghouse gas generator offers 3,600 running watts, which is more than enough for RV appliances, gadgets, and lights. It can use gasoline or propane and you’ll get 14 hours of power on a full tank when running about 1,000 watts. It sits right in the middle of options in terms of power output and cost, not too little or too cheap, and not overpowered or overpriced. It comes ready for campers and RV plugs and outlets. While it can’t be used as a whole-home generator if the home is small, it’s designed for providing backup power for a few select household appliances like refrigerators and heat pumps. It starts easily and Westinghouse makes dependable generators that work when it matters most. 

Best for overnight emergencies: Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 1000

Jackery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight and powerful generator can keep everyone connected while powering the fridge.

Specs

  • Weight: 22 lbs.
  • Wattage: 1000 watts
  • Hours of power: 65 hours and up
  • Number of outlets: 3

Pros

  • Easy to carry
  • Has less of an impact on the environment
  • Reliable
  • Can be charged via solar power

Cons

  • Expensive

The Jackery Explorer 1000 station is a powerful source of electricity and a great substitute for a gas emergency generator. On a full charge, the 1,000-watt battery brick can keep a laptop going for over 24 hours and a mini-fridge running for 9 hours. It’s ideal for keeping everyone safe and everything connected during an overnight blackout. It’s also easy to carry on camping trips, weighing only 22 pounds. It can be hooked up to solar panels (not included) but as with most solar generators, it takes a while to charge—about 7 hours of direct sunlight to get to 80-percent power. It’s not the cheapest power station, but you’re paying for extra wattage-hours. For families on a dark, stormy night, it’s a reliable piece of safety equipment. 

Best for CPAP machines: Flashfish Portable Power Station

FF FLASHFISH

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Breathe easy knowing that this generator can keep your CPAP running for two nights.

Specs

  • Weight: 4.08 lbs.
  • Wattage: 200 watts
  • Hours of power: Up to 30 hours depending on device
  • Number of outlets: One

Pros

  • Can be charged via solar power
  • Quiet
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Only for smaller devices that require less power

Those suffering from sleep apnea understand the need for a reliable source of electricity through the night. Most CPAP breathing machines run on between 40 and 60 watts. The Flashfish Portable Power Station can keep your breathing device going through at least two nights on a full charge. This is a lower-wattage power station, so don’t expect to run power tools or hair dryers on the 200-watt generator. The power station is quiet, another plus for quality sleep health and weighs only five pounds, making it great for traveling and camping. For sleep apnea breathing machines, or simply to keep iPhones fully charged, this little power station does a remarkable job. 

Best for devices: Goal Zero Yeti 200X Portable Power Station

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Stay online when the power’s out with this portable generator that packs a punch.

Specs

  • Weight: 5 lbs.
  • Wattage: 200 watts
  • Hours of power: Up to 42 hours depending on device
  • Number of outlets: One

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Quick to charge compared to other generators
  • Can be charged using solar power

Cons

  • Decent at charging larger devices

The Yeti power station offers 200Wh of electricity. It’s a great tool for charging and using handheld electronics like laptops (50Wh) and GoPro cameras (5Wh). It has one AC outlets, 2 USB-A ports, and 2 USB-C ports. The Yeti generator charges to full capacity in about five hours when plugged into the wall and about 2 hours when plugged into a car. It is on the lighter side, weighing just under 5 pounds, but it can’t charge an entire cabin. It’s a solid choice for keeping gadgets going for 12 hours or more. And, it can power a router for 8 hours, meaning you can stay online when the power’s out.

Best for small appliances: WEN 56225i 2250-Watt Portable Inverter Generator

WEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to pay big bucks to power your coffee maker, mini fridge, or microwave when the power’s out.

Specs

  • Weight: 48.5 lbs.
  • Wattage: 2250 watts
  • Hours of power: 7 hours of half load run time
  • Number of outlets: Two

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Can keep a mini fridge charged for around 10 hours
  • Eco mode and fuel shut-off built-in

Cons

  • Not that many outlets compared to other generators of similar wattage
  • Heavy

For day trips or night emergencies, this little, inexpensive 48.5-pound inverter generator is a simple and effective way to add power anywhere. At less than $450, this cheap gas generator will surprisingly power small appliances. This is more powerful than most battery-powered stations on the list, but less expensive than big, heavy-duty gas generators. It can’t power the entire house, but it’s good for running a mini fridge and lights for hours. This generator is a cheap emergency device that will get you through a rough night.

What to consider buying the best electric generators

Electric generators are complicated machines. Knowing the various types of generators and how they work will ensure your generator or power station of choice offers efficient, safe electricity whenever and wherever you need it. 

Do you need a gas-powered electric generator or a battery-powered generator?

Gas-powered generators can be big and noisy, yet powerful. These heavy beasts turn gasoline into controllable lighting, and that’s no easy task. The bigger gas generators are used as whole-house generators and can provide efficient backup electricity when the power goes out. Some can be wired into your home’s electricity for a seamless transfer of power. But whole-house generators are not cheap and they often need to be installed by professionals. Smaller, portable gas generators are great at keeping major appliances running, such as refrigerators and air conditioning units—but they need space to give off deadly carbon monoxide gas. (Never use them indoors, even in a garage with the door open.)

Battery-powered electric generators, meanwhile, are often called power stations because they’re not actually making the electricity, simply storing it. They’re becoming more and more popular. These generators provide just enough electricity for phones, laptops, TVs, and other devices that are not as wattage-hungry as big household appliances like washing machines. They are cheaper, lighter, and much more portable than gas generators. And they can safely be used inside the home. 

If all you need is a power source for charging gadgets and staying connected to the outside world, a portable electric power station that runs on a rechargeable battery is the best solution. 

Understanding the backup-generator power rating

Looking at the stats and specs of even the most basic generator can be confusing. The two numbers to look for are running wattage and surge or starting wattage.

Running wattage refers to the power needed to keep a device working. Because most appliances need an extra boost of power to start and get up to speed, the generator will also list a starting wattage to show how much juice you need to get things going. 

For a whole home generator, you may need a unit that offers up to 8,000 watts. This will run most appliances and essential electronics. But if all you need is a portable generator for charging devices, you can survive on a generator that only offers 100 watts. 

Make a list of all the appliances you want to run if/when the power goes out. Use this as a rough guide to predict how much wattage you’ll need. Give yourself plenty of wiggle room by opting for a more powerful generator. 

Portable power stations will often list wattage hours (Wh). This means if a generator is rated at 200Wh, it can run a 20-watt device for 10 hours. Keep in mind that the specs listed apply only if the generator is fully charged. 

Pay attention to charge time and fuel for the best electrical generator

Besides power output, the most important thing to look for in a battery-powered electric generator is the charge time. Many power stations can either be plugged into the wall or car outlet, or use solar panels to fill up the battery. But it can take time; a 160-watt battery needs at least five hours of consistent AC-wall-outlet power for a full charge. And when disaster strikes, you won’t have five hours to spare. If you go for a battery-powered generator, be diligent about charging the station. Solar generators take even longer. Plan accordingly.

Gas generators will need fuel, of course. Many can be filled with standard gasoline, but propane tanks will last longer. Whole-home generators, and some portable gas generators, can be connected to the home’s natural gas line for dependable power. Natural-gas generators are more efficient and more earth-friendly than gasoline generators. Whatever fuel source you use, stock up and be ready for whatever weather comes your way.

Are portable electric generators really portable?

Even if the gas generator is advertised as portable, it may still require some muscle power to maneuver. These gas generators can weigh hundreds of pounds, and even with wheels and handles, it can be grueling to lug them around on camping trips. 

Battery-powered energy stations are much more portable, weighing less than 20 pounds. Travel generators may weigh only two pounds and have enough power to charge a phone nearly ten times. 

What is a power inverter and how does it help?

An inverter generator takes DC power, converts it to AC power, and then converts it again into DC power. Why the back and forth? To put it simply, the power will be more consistent and efficient when inverted from DC to AC and back to DC. This is ideal for sensitive electronics such as laptops. Inconsistent power or power surges can wreak havoc on high-tech devices. The clean power output of an inverter generator is safer. The downside: Inverter generators cost more than standard gas generators. But they are also quieter than gas generators and more efficient, so it may be well worth the money. 

Finally, noise is also a crucial stat for gas generators. Loud generators coughing up 90 decibels can ruin an outdoor event. Battery-powered energy stations are quiet because they lack an engine, but they also lack the big power output of gas generators. 

FAQs

Q: What size generator do I need to power a house?

To power a house, you’ll need at least 4,000 watts of electricity. That will run basic appliances and electronics without too much trouble. But for a complete, whole-home generator, you may need up to 8,000 watts. These natural-gas generators can run all the lights, heating/cooling systems, and household appliances of a mid-sized home. They won’t be cheap, but they do provide reliable energy and can hook into your home’s existing natural gas line. If all you want is a power supply for electronics like laptops or CPAP machines, you’ll only need about 200 watts to get through a few nights. The size of the generator depends on what you want to operate. Hair dryers and blenders are notoriously high-wattage machines. Mini-fridges and electric grills won’t need nearly as much power. 

Q: What type of generator is most efficient?

Natural-gas generators are the most efficient for powering an entire house. Gasoline and propane generators are the most efficient for RVs. But for keeping TVs and computers running, the most efficient power supply will be a rechargeable power station like the Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 1000. These easy-to-use power stations keep phones and tablets running without burning fuel. They are also quiet and safe to use indoors. 

Q: How do I choose an electric generator?

Choose an electric generator by considering all of your options. Gas generators are the standard method of bringing power to the powerless, but the fumes, weight, and noise prevent these big engines from being in-home power supplies or good portable camping generators. Electric, rechargeable power stations provide less wattage but are safe and ideal for laptops, TVs, phones, and other electronics. And if you want a whole-home generator to be the backup power for all appliances, you’ll need an 8,000-watt natural-gas generator. The type of electric generator you need depends on what you’ll need to keep running when the power goes out.  

Final thoughts on the best electric generators

The best generator will be a powerful resource that’s as dependable as it is efficient. The size and type of electric generator will vary based on how you want to use it. Big gas generators are great for big appliances. Power stations are great for small devices. And natural gas generators are great for keeping the entire home running smoothly. Whatever generator or power supply you choose, make sure it’s ready to work whenever you need it—that means keeping it fueled up or keeping the battery charged. The best electric generator can be a powerful resource if used correctly. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric generators of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar deck lights in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-deck-lights/ Tue, 20 Jun 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=549598
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Think Mother Nature needs a night light? Grab these solar lights to keep just a tad of the power of the sun running in the dark.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector
SEE IT

These lights give you more control, and more intelligent operation, than the competition.

Best lanterns TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light
SEE IT

These lanterns give you the best range of usage options while feeling quite authentic.

Best budget Lightique Moroccan String Lights Lightique Moroccan String Lights
SEE IT

Highly weatherproof lights on a string. What more do you need?

A solid set of solar deck lights can change the tone of an entire outdoor space without much cost or effort. There are many different styles to choose from, each with their own specialties. Some provide a romantic ambiance, while others function to illuminate stairs and other objects to help you and your guests avoid accidents. Here, we’ve collected a comprehensive list of the best solar deck lights for any style, functionality, or circumstance.

How we chose the best solar deck lights

Finding the best solar deck lighting goes beyond finding the best forms for them (strings, stair illuminators, etc.) but also needs to consider several more complex factors. To make our decisions, real-world functionality, and materials were highly considered.

Solar-powered deck lights are tricky to fully review for anyone due to the somewhat finicky nature of the weather. As humans, we tend to over or underestimate local cloudiness based on our temperaments. Accordingly, it makes sense to cast a wide range and survey large numbers of real customer reviews, often more telling than expert reviews of lights in near-pristine conditions. How is the actual brightness and reliability of the lights, for instance?

Despite the low energy costs of maintaining outdoor lighting, many people buy solar-powered deck lights for their environmental benefits. Unfortunately, there are some environmentally destructive solar-powering materials. Manufacturers aren’t always forthcoming with what materials they use, and deck lights are, admittedly, small. Still, we’ll do our best to present what materials are used so you can make an informed decision about your purchase.

The best solar deck lights: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a single best solar deck lights set is difficult due to the many types available and the niches they each fill. Still, the Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector easily takes our slot for top dog in the hierarchy. They fill their niche so well they can take on multiple jobs! But, if you need something else—including a bit of ambiance—we have a full list of great picks where you’re sure to find something that suits your needs, including deck lights that can be hung overhead, used specifically for stairs, and more.

Best overall: Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector

Aootek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a smart design and smart function, these are powerful lights!

Specs

  • Brightness: ~2,000 Lux
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Plastic, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, remote 
  • Price: $58

Pros

  • Surprisingly bright
  • Three lighting modes to suit your preferences
  • Mirror light reflector tech
  • Environmentally friendly silicon solar panel

Cons

  • Not the best for “ambiance”

If you’re looking for something tough, bright, and reactive, then the Aootek Solar Lights are the best place to start. In a product category that typically shies away from being too “smart” (the typical smart tech sucks energy out of a system quickly), Aootek makes some great compromises to make deck lights that will do what you want when you want them to, in a convenient way.

They do this by providing three modes of usage. First, there is an energy-conserving security light mode triggered by motion, which is best used to ward others away from your deck when it isn’t in use. Next, a permanent on mode keeps the light on consistently throughout, perfect for your nighttime party. Finally, a sort of hybrid smart brightness mode brings the best of both worlds, giving a low level of light that gets brighter when motion is detected. This final lighting mode is perfect for guiding guests from your garden, or other parts of your landscape, to your deck and keeping them safe once there. In all instances, the lights are a clear and bright white, which is perfect for vision but may not necessarily create as romantic of an environment as other choices on this list. After installing the lights, they should stay well-protected as they have a durable plastic frame and achieve IP65 protection, meaning they are resistant to both dust and rain. And, speaking of materials, the solar power collection system is silicone based. Silicone panels are typically carbon-free, making these the best motion-sensing lights and somewhat better for the environment.

Best stair lights: JACKYLED Solar Step Lights

JACKYLED

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strong and bright, the JACKYLED step lights won’t break or let you fall.

Specs

  • Brightness: 12 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Stainless steel, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, switch
  • Price: $39

Pros

  • Easier-than-most installation
  • Durable, rust-resistant frame
  • Bottom and side lights

Cons

  • Occasionally one will have a weak battery

The JACKYLED Solar Step Lights provide durability and flexibility for lighting up your steps. With a 3-way lighting system, the JACKYLED can be affixed to the vertical side of your steps to light up the step below and the easily-tripped-on front of the step. Don’t worry about kicking them, either, as the frame is a tough, rust-resistant stainless steel. Alternatively, line them up on the wall or rails adjacent to your steps to get a different angle (if your local lighting permits). No matter where you choose to place them, the setup should be a snap with screw-in and tape-on options available.

Best string lights: Brightown Solar String Lights

Brightown

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brightown lights offer a romantic ambiance on speed dial.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable settings
  • Water-resistance: IP45
  • Materials: Plastic
  • Control: Timer, remote 
  • Price: $40

Pros

  • Shatterproof bulbs even a klutz can install safely (strong dual hooks)
  • Great solar panel
  • Neat remote control
  • 20,000-hour lifespan

Cons

  • Not connectable

If you’re looking for true flexibility, the Brightown Solar String lights will give it to you. First, the setup is easy due to a patented dual-clip design, with clips and hooks adorning both the top and side of each bulb (optional ties can also be used). Even if you were to knock the bulbs about, they’re shatter-resistance. Once up, you can choose from various modes, including timers, variable brightnesses, and effects like blinking or pulsing. On a dimmer mode, they’re the perfect mood lighting and, when made brighter, can keep things light enough to see properly. On blinking mode, they light up the party like twinkle lights. Finally, everything is tied together by an above-average solar panel that can quickly charge indoors if you get an unlucky glut of cloudy days.

Best deck post lights: VOLISUN Solar Post Cap Lights

VOLISUN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has a stylish design, fits multiple post sizes, and can store enough energy to last through an overcast day here and there.

Specs

  • Brightness: Dual setting
  • Weather-resistance: IP44
  • Materials: Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
  • Control: Automatic, switch
  • Price: $49

Pros

  • Battery holds enough charge to shine for 20 hours on lower brightness setting
  • Fits both 4×4 and 6×6 post tops
  • Pop-on installation is easy

Cons

  • Doesn’t fit 5×5 post tops

VOLISUN is a pretty prolific maker of solar deck lights in every style. Their solar post cap lights stand out amongst their collection for their ease of use, style, and lasting power. Choose between a 4×4 or 6×6 setting (based on the size of your post), pop it on, and tighten a couple of screws, and your system is completely installed. But, before you move, flip the switch to ‘I’ or ‘II’ to select a power mode. The lower mood setting—‘I’ power—can last over 20 hours on a single charge, while the stronger ‘II’ setting can last over 10 hours. In other words, if you’re satisfied with the lower setting, you’ll be able to have guaranteed lights (next to) all the time, even after a day of inclement weather.

Best lanterns: TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light

TomCare

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Hang, carry, or put on your table—the TomCare lanterns are super versatile in presentation

Specs

  • Brightness: 25 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Metal, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
  • Control: Automatic, Switch
  • Price: $43

Pros

  • Easily maneuverable
  • Sturdy metal frame
  • Attractive flickering effect

Cons

  • Not as cheap as the average solar deck lights

A lot of solar lanterns fail at one of the most basic things they should do: looking and feeling like a lantern. The tops of both lanterns in the TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light kit have a relatively innocuous solar panel, but the rest look like something out of history. The grainy, faux-aged copper, aside from the flickering flame-effect lighting inside, looks particularly decorative. Even better, this lantern offers much more versatility than other lanterns meant to sit or hang only. Place your lantern on a table as a set piece or hang it just about wherever you’d like, but try to find a regular resting spot that gets some sun during the day!

Best budget: Lightique Moroccan String Lights

Lightique

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: They’re the easiest way to get a bit of solar power on your deck.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable modes
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Copper
  • Control: Touch
  • Price: $13

Pros

  • Incredible IP rating for the price
  • Simple installation
  • 8 lighting modes

Cons

  • Short string (good if that’s all you need)

If you don’t need anything too elaborate and just want a short string of lights, try Lightique’s Moroccan String Lights. On the one hand, it’s just 10 feet of string lights. On the other hand, they provide eight lighting modes (including favorites like twinkle flash and wave), a unique look, a super simple installation, and the perfect size to install above your door. Additionally, at under $10, an IP68 rating is practically unheard of. If you have a wider door, it might be nice to have a longer string of lights, but for this price, you can’t really get any better.

What to consider before buying solar deck lights

When choosing solar deck lights for your property, you’ll naturally want to gravitate toward an aesthetic you like. Simply looking at product images can help you with this. However, things can get a bit more tricky once you’ve narrowed your selection down by taste. You’ll want to ask yourself what materials are used in producing the device and its bulbs’ caging. There are also factors, such as placement and weather resistance, that are surprisingly similar to the questions you’d be asking yourself if you were buying a potted plant for your deck.

Placement

Where should you place your solar deck lights? It’s more than feng shui, but you’ll definitely need to consider the facing of your solar panels, with a Northern exposure being especially bad if you live in the Northern Hemisphere. In fact, a lot of the placing suggestions are at least somewhat similar to what would be suggested for plants that require medium to high sunlight; avoid placing solar panels under overhangs, brush, and other locations where the light cannot reach them.

The next thing to think about is how to arrange your lighting. Are your solar deck lights multidirectional, unidirectional, or a standard bulb in open space? 3-way designs are especially useful for lighting up stairs and are best placed on the vertical part of each step. In this position, they emphasize both the landing for the foot and the height needed to take on each subsequent step. Avoid positioning bright bulbs or intense unidirectional lighting too close to head height—for adults and children—as it could be uncomfortable to the eyes.

Finally, what are the odds that something will get smacked, stepped on, or hit when the furniture is moved? If your solar deck lights aren’t made of a strong material (see below) then you might be faced with being extra careful or removing them temporarily when bringing in new deck gear.

Weather resistance

Whether or not a product can withstand a slight drizzle is usually the first thing buyers look at in an outdoor product. Unfortunately, it is a bit more complex than picking something labeled as “waterproof” due to the nature of the outdoors.

Your first thing to check should be a product’s IPXX rating, which will display as a number like IP46 or IPX8. More officially known as an item’s Ingress Protection rating, the numbers refer to a standardized 3rd party measure of a product’s officially tested protection against solids and liquids. Nowadays, the system is used for everything from earbuds to solar deck lights. While not all good weather-resistant products have an IP rating, you can feel secure in those that do.

The first digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand dust. For solar deck lights, this number will usually be a 4 or a 6, with 4 meaning the product withstands particles greater than a millimeter thick and 6 meaning the product does not allow dust inside. Periodically, you’ll see an ‘X’ instead of a number, which indicates that this test was not performed.

The second digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand water and other liquids to a lesser degree. For a solar deck light, a rating of 4 or 5 will likely do in most situations, as these signify the device is protected from spraying and splashing water from multiple directions. A rating of 7 or higher indicates the solar deck light could withstand being fully submerged in water for a period of time. Just how well are solar deck lights protected from the rain? As a fun fact, please note that there are customer reports of solar deck lights surviving Floridian hurricanes.

Finally, there are a couple of miscellaneous categories to check for. If your frame is steel, is it stainless steel or marked to be rustproof? While these issues might largely be aesthetic, having rust accumulate around screw holes won’t do you any favors down the line. For hanging and free-swinging solar deck lights, consider finding a product that offers shatterproof bulbs, as they’re both wind-resistant and accident resistant. If you live in an area with extreme temperatures, be sure also to check the upper and lower bounds for temperature that your solar deck lights can withstand.

Materials used

It’s not as in-depth of a category as the other two, but the materials used to make a solar deck light can make or break your experience with it (sometimes literally if it gets kicked but has low-quality caging).

Typically, the main materials you’ll see for the caging of solar deck lights are going to be hard plastic and some form of metal. Plastic can be a stylish black that fades into the night, a more modern iPhone-esque white, or any other color. High-quality plastic is actually quite nice and shouldn’t be ignored. Alternatively, metal casing provides extra security, especially if the light is to be put in a place where it might get stepped on. As mentioned in the previous section, looking for stainless steel or rustproof metal is advised.

Of course, this is for external caging and the parts that make up the solar panel. While we’d all like to pat ourselves on the back, the truth is that deck lights don’t use up a lot of energy in the first place. So long as you’re using modern LED bulbs, your entire home’s lighting shouldn’t even be in your home’s Top 10 energy users.

As a result, it is important to appreciate solar deck lights for their convenience and lack of wires. If you want to be environmentally conscious, focus on the materials used in the solar panel and opt for silicon (especially of the monocrystalline style) when possible. Also, look for new solar panel technologies as they come. Ultimately, though, there is a balance in all things, and solar deck lights are quite tiny in the scheme of things.

FAQs

Q: How much do solar deck lights cost?

Solar deck lights are typically not that expensive. You can get a good set for under $60 in most cases. This is because they are primarily made of bulbs and a plastic casing, neither expensive. And, just like with a solar-powered outdoor light, the technology to charge via solar power (at least for smaller objects) is always getting cheaper. In other words, the best solar deck lights are available for everyone.

Q: Is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night?

Not only is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night, but it is also somewhat encouraged. The best solar deck lights come with timers and other mechanisms to keep your lights on when possible and in such a way that is energy efficient. Unlike the best tiki torches, many of the best solar deck lights are made to run even when you aren’t around and even have motion-sensing modes.

Q: Will solar lights charge in overcast conditions?

Yes, solar lights charge even on cloudy days, but they charge best on clear days. Just as the fair-skinned can get a sunburn on a cloudy day, your solar panel can pick up at least some UV rays when the sun isn’t at full strength. Many of the best solar deck lights have optional secondary charging mechanisms or multi-use-day battery storage to compensate for the odd overcast day.

Final thoughts on the best solar deck lights

Solar deck lights illuminate your deck or patio using an inherent wireless design. They are, by nature, a seamless and cost-effective method to enhance both the safety and ambiance of your outdoor spaces. As of 2023, however, finding the best solar deck lights requires some research. It might take some time but rest assured, there is a perfect product out there. Anyone can discover solar deck lights that align with their needs, their family’s preferences, and the specific aesthetic of their home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garden hoses for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-garden-hose/ Tue, 27 Apr 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284433
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

Keep your yard thriving with the help of these essential tools.

The post The best garden hoses for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Flexzilla makes one of the best garden hoses. Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose
SEE IT

The durable, kink-free design of this garden hose makes it ideal for washing the car, watering the garden, or setting up a sprinkler for the grass.

Best heavy-duty Bionic Steel makes the best garden hose that's heavy-duty. Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose
SEE IT

Users needn’t worry about rust, kinks, or even temperature extremes with this impressive stainless steel garden hose.

Best budget Melnor makes one of the best garden hoses at a budget-friendly price. Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose
SEE IT

Delicate plants won’t suffer damage thanks to this vinyl soaker hose that releases water gradually.

A garden hose may sound like an afterthought when it comes to caring for outdoor space, but choosing the right model can have a drastic impact on your yard work experience. The options run from lightweight, coiled options designed for smaller yards to heavy-duty models with layers of insulation that are ideal for commercial use. Whether you need something to water window boxes or wash the car, we’ve rounded up the features to look for and our recommendations for the best garden hoses available today.

How we chose the best garden hoses

We conducted extensive product research into more than 40 different garden hoses. We drew on our significant experience from years of yard and garden maintenance when compiling this selection of the best garden hoses. The primary criteria we considered when looking at each type of hose included length, material, and any extra features, like a no-kink design or an included spray nozzle.

Length is a key consideration since a too-short hose might not allow you to water the entire yard; therefore, were prioritized options available in multiple hose lengths over similar ones that come in one size only. We looked for hoses with special features that made watering easier and also factored in the hose’s material and couplings. We then selected products with more durable construction over cheaply made versions. After all, you don’t want your outdoor misting fan’s lifeline to fail you on a sweltering day.

The best garden hoses: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for a garden hose isn’t difficult, but buying the wrong length or opting for a heavy-duty model that’s cumbersome to use in a large backyard can easily make you regret a purchase. We’ve rounded up the best options for a variety of situations and price points below so you can make the best decision going in and don’t get soaked.

Best overall: Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose

Flexzilla

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Hybrid polymer
  • Length: 3-, 5-, 10-, 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available
  • Price: $40

Pros

  • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
  • Kink-free hybrid polymer material
  • Drinking-water safe

Cons

  • Larger sizes take up a lot of storage space
  • Can be heavy

Home gardeners who keep up with watering are likely to appreciate the kink-free design of the Flexzilla Garden Hose. It’s available in convenient sizes for garden use, including 25, 50, 75, and 100 feet. Its flexible hybrid polymer is drinking-water safe, so users can take a refreshing sip while tackling outdoor chores.

This standard garden hose is lightweight and easy to maneuver, with corrosion-resistant aluminum couplings for a secure, leak-free fit. The only shortcoming is that larger sizes take up much space when fully coiled. But as long as one has room to store it, the Flexzilla is a versatile, dependable, and durable choice.

Best expandable: TheFitLife Flexible and Expandable Garden Hose

TheFitLife

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Expandable hose
  • Material: Latex, fabric, brass
  • Length: 25, 50, 75, 100 feet
  • Price: $62

Pros

  • Available in four lengths
  • Expands and folds up easily
  • Easily transported

Cons

  • Fabric exterior can pick up dirt

One of the hottest trends in the past few years has been the invention of the expandable garden hose that doesn’t kink. Patios, driveways, or manicured lawns are all prime locations for this style of hose. These fabric-wrapped, rubberized coils shrink to an easily transported size when the water pressure is turned off and extend to full length when pressure is applied. Some of them come with hangable sacks or can be thrown into an unused pot for easy storage, making for the most convenient option if you don’t enjoy the ritual of a neatly coiled water hose. Because the outer sheathing of an expandable hose is absorbent fabric, these are best used around areas that don’t have a lot of dirt or mulch, as the fabric will pick up pieces of debris when dragged across your yard.

Best permanent coil: Water Right PCH-025-EP-6PKRS 300 Series 25-Foot Coil Hose

Water Right

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Coiled hose
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Length: 25, 50, and 75 feet available
  • Price: $42

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Fun to use
  • Less expensive

Cons

  • Can’t handle a large volume of water
  • Advertised lengths shorter because of coiling

If your gardening needs are simple and don’t require a large volume of water—and you like the aesthetics of a spring-loaded, lightweight garden hose—the Slinky-type coil hose is right for you. These coils resemble the vintage toy that could magically walk downstairs on its own and, if you stay within the 25-foot length, are a dream to manage. Just getting started? Check out our guide to the best raised beds.

Best hybrid rubber: Giraffe Garden Hose 25 feet Lightweight Hybrid 5/8 inch

Giraffe Tools

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid hose
  • Material: Polymer 
  • Length: 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 feet
  • Price: $29

Pros

  • Available  in 7 lengths
  • Extremely durable
  • Designed with inner insulation that keeps it flexible in cold weather
  • Strong water pressure of 150 psi

Cons

  • More expensive
  • Heavy

Made of strong, modern materials that can take temperature swings, sun exposure and rough abuse, these hybrid rubber garden hoses are designed for commercial use and can take a beating. Perfect for connecting to a sprinkler and moving over mulch, dirt, and around trees, the classic hose is the most commonly used for residential applications. For other classic garden hoses, try this 50’ option or this 100’ garden hose.

Best for drinking: Camco 25-Ft TastePURE Drinking Water Hose

Camco

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard hose
  • Material: PVC
  • Length: 25 feet
  • Price: $20

Pros

  • Lead-free, BPA-free, and phthalate-free
  • Resists kinking
  • Comes with UV protection

Cons

  • Only available in one size
  • Material may degrade over time

If you’ve ever taken a long slurp from the end of a hose, you’ll know that they are not meant to transfer drinking water and commonly leave a plastic, rubbery aftertaste in your mouth. There have been advances in technology in the last few years that eliminate this chemical effect. While the prices are higher and the longevity of the hose can be compromised by the PVC materials that don’t stand up to temperature fluctuations with the strength of traditional rubber, if you’re intent on drinking water from your hose—or need an RV water hose for your camper rig—you’ll want to purchase a BPA-free version like this hose.

Best heavy-duty: Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose

Bionic Steel

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Length: 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available
  • Price: $59

Pros

  • Impressive weather resistance
  • Crush-resistant aluminum couplings
  • Kink-free and rust-proof

Cons

  • Reduced flexibility

Durability in all sorts of conditions is the main benefit of the Bionic Steel Garden Hose. It’s made of interwoven stainless steel to resist the effects of such extreme weather as sub-zero temperatures and hot, sunny days. The hose also features rugged, crush-resistant aluminum couplings that can be trampled without damage.

This workhorse of a hose is available in 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths, and it’s easy to coil for storage. The stainless steel material is rust-proof and resistant to kinks, though this benefit may reduce flexibility.

Best commercial: Gilmour Pro Commercial Hose 3/4 Inch

Gilmour

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Commercial garden hose
  • Material: Rubber and vinyl
  • Length: 25, 50, 100 feet
  • Price: $65

Pros

  • Incredibly durable
  • Double reinforced
  • Powerful water pressure of 500 psi
  • Available in three lengths

Cons

  • Can become stiff
  • Must be hand-coiled

You’ll likely use a commercial-style hose for a permanent installation instead of casual daily use, but these hoses are built for toughness instead of flexibility. Often extremely stiff due to their double-walled manufacturing, these are typically not suited for roll-up hose keepers and, instead, must be coiled by hand.

Best budget: Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose

Melnor

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Soaker hose
  • Material: Vinyl
  • Length: 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths available
  • Price: $26

Pros

  • Water seeps through the entire length of the hose
  • Gentle water release won’t damage plants
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Plastic coupling is vulnerable to cracking and leaking

Safely hydrate delicate plants with the Melnor Soaker Hose. It’s capped at the end to create the necessary internal pressure for water to seep through its porous vinyl sides. Whereas powerful bursts of water from a standard hose can damage plants, this soaker option gently gives flowerbeds, vegetables, fruits, and other plants the water they need to thrive.

This lightweight garden hose is available in 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths, and when not in use, it lays completely flat, making it easy to fold and store. The only issue with this Melnor model is that its two couplings are plastic, which may be susceptible to cracking and leaking.

Things to consider when choosing the best garden hose

In addition to length and material, it’s important to understand the various types of garden hoses available. Keep all the following factors and features in mind while shopping for the best garden hose for your needs.

Type

The most common garden hoses include standard, soaker, sprinkler, flat, coiled, and expandable. Different garden hoses may be uniquely suited to specific outdoor duties.

Standard garden hoses run straight, which makes them vulnerable to kinking. They are round in shape and typically use metal or plastic couplings at each end to connect to a faucet or spray nozzle. Soaker garden hoses slowly release water into the garden, thanks to thousands of pinholes along the length of the hose. Sprinkler garden hoses may seem like soakers at first glance, but they have fewer holes, allowing them to function more like a horizontal sprinkler system. Flat garden hoses are intended to reduce kinking. They lay flat when empty but will take on a rounded shape when filled with water. The flat shape also makes them easier to roll and store. Coiled garden hoses have a design that allows them to rapidly return to a more compact, coiled shape after use. This makes it easier to prep the hose for storage. Expandable garden hoses combine the compact storage capabilities of a coiled option with the length and kink-free design of a flat model. It can expand up to three times its length when filled with water and, after use, shrink to its original size for compact storage. The expandable material won’t kink but, over time, may lose flexibility and become unable to expand fully.

Length

While the most common garden hose length is 50 feet, some hoses range from just 10 feet to 150 feet. Take some basic measurements from your outdoor faucet to the perimeter of your yard to determine the best length for the hose.

Keep in mind that the longer the hose, the less water pressure it will have due to friction and drag caused by water flowing through it. So balance the length with optimal water pressure and, if necessary, consider a hose with a larger diameter, which may help you achieve the desired length without losing substantial water pressure.

Material

Garden hoses are made from a range of different materials intended to allow for flexibility while protecting the hose from damage. Common materials include vinyl, latex, rubber, plastic, and various metals.

Vinyl is commonly used for the hose itself. It’s a lightweight, flexible material, though not as durable as other options. These products may also be labeled polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Latex is regularly used to make expandable hoses. It may have a polyester fabric exterior to improve durability and protect the hose from punctures. Rubber is a tough, durable, temperature-resistant material ideal for standard, coiled, and flat garden hoses. However, it is typically more expensive than vinyl. Plastic, commonly used for hose couplings, is more vulnerable to cracking and breaking than metal couplings. Metals like brass, aluminum, and stainless steel, are regularly used to make strong, reliable hose couplings. Stainless steel may also be used to form the exterior of heavy-duty hoses.

FAQs

Q: What is the standard garden hose size?

The standard garden hose sizes are 25, 50 or 100 feet in length—however, longer is not always better. Once you move into the 50-foot or even 100-foot garden hose length, it becomes frighteningly easy to turn the whole thing into a tangled mass of frustration, so keep this in mind if you do decide to purchase a permanent coil hose that’s longer than 25 feet.

Q: How long should a garden hose last?

The best garden hoses should last 10 years or more, but that’s dependent on how well you take care of your garden tools. For example, leaving a hose out in the sun or exposed to other weather elements can cause rapid deterioration and dramatically decrease your hose’s shelf life. If you fully drain your hose after use every time and coil it neatly—kinking can lead to tears and holes—before storing it in a safe place, you’ll get many more years out of it.

Q: What is the best kink-free garden hose?

The best kink-free garden hoses are, hands down, expandable hoses. The design makes it impossible to pinch the flow of water off while you’re using them. 

Q: Does garden hose length affect water pressure?

Yes, hose length does affect water pressure. In general, the longer the garden hose, the lower the water pressure, because as water passes through the interior of the hose, the contact causes resistance, reducing water pressure.

Q: What’s the best way to store an expandable hose?

To properly store an expandable hose, turn off the water, disconnect the hose, and allow it to shrink and dry fully. Then simply roll the hose up and place it in a garden box or a shed, to protect it from direct sunlight and, to a degree, extreme temperature changes. Some products come with a storage bag or hook to keep the hose neat when not in use.

Q: Do I need a garden hose nozzle for my hose?

A garden hose nozzle isn’t necessary when it comes to watering the lawn. Users can simply position a thumb partially over the hose opening to direct water over a broad area. However, a nozzle makes watering much easier to control, a benefit when it comes to fragile plants that could be damaged by anything more than a light misting.

Final thoughts on the best garden hoses

A good garden hose is a backyard essential. Even if you’re not much of a gardener, you’ll likely rely on it for a host of tasks, from washing patio furniture to filling the kids’ blow-up  Made with drinking water-safe materials, the Flexzilla Garden Hose is lightweight and available in multiple lengths so that you can choose the right size for your yard. If you haven’t the space to store a long hose, TheFitLife Expandable Garden Hose is an excellent and affordable option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden hoses for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Stop allergies and save with this Shark air purifier deal at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/shark-air-purifier-allergy-spring-amazon-deal/ Thu, 14 Mar 2024 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606600
Shark air purifiers on a plain white background in a horizontal pattern
Amanda Reed

Stop sneezes, sniffles, and pollen in their tracks and save some cash with this air purifier deal at Amazon.

The post Stop allergies and save with this Shark air purifier deal at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Shark air purifiers on a plain white background in a horizontal pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The weather is warming up, the birds are chirping, and the air … is starting to be too pollinated for our sensitive noses. Allergy medicine is an acceptable remedy, but you can include more in your arsenal to stop the sneezing, sniffles, tears, and itchiness. We’re fond of this Shark air purifier, which features a never-change filter and $60 off at Amazon.

Shark NeverChange Whole Home Air Purifier $269.99 (Was $329.99)

Shark

SEE IT

We recommend this air purifier to tackle mold, but we also love it for allergies. Mold is an allergen, after all. This air purifier captures 99.98% of micro-sized particles, and you only need to replace it once every five years. Clean Sense IQ tracks air quality and adjusts power accordingly It has a 1400-square-foot coverage area, meaning it can purify your entire apartment or just one large room. To clean, remove the screens and wipe or rinse.

More air purifier deals:

The post Stop allergies and save with this Shark air purifier deal at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dehumidifiers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-dehumidifiers/ Thu, 30 Sep 2021 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=399506
The best dehumidifier of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

A solid dehumidifier can keep moisture can make a big difference in your home’s feel and smell.

The post The best dehumidifiers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best dehumidifier of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall GoveeLife Smart Dehumidifier on a plain white background. GoveeLife Smart Dehumidifier
SEE IT

In terms of features, performance, and overall value GoveeLife’s Smart Dehumidifier reigns supreme.

Best whole house hOmeLabs Dehumidifier on a plain white background. hOmeLabs Dehumidifier
SEE IT

If you’ve got a large space that needs humidity control, hOmeLabs’ Dehumidifier is the ideal choice.

Best budget NineSky Dehumidifier on a plain white background. NineSky Dehumidifier
SEE IT

Need a small, inexpensive dehumidifier for a smaller space, don’t miss this model from NineSky.

Dehumidifiers are specialized appliances that remove excess moisture from your home or office space. Maybe you live in a humid climate and don’t want your furniture, clothing, or office space to be warped by excess vapor in the air, or you have a damp basement that smells funky. Dehumidifiers are a great option for these types of environments, so you can prevent allergies, dust mites, and mold, all of which are a huge pain in the butt to deal with.

In fact, studies show that indoor humidity can affect respiratory infections and allergies and that maintaining indoor humidity levels between 40 and 60 percent may be better for your health and well-being. The top dehumidifier can help you identify humidity levels, and keep a consistent air quality. Dehumidifiers can also help pantry food stay fresh for longer or accelerate drying time when hang-drying fresh laundry. With all these benefits, a dehumidifier is definitely a necessary investment if you live in a damp environment. That’s why we did our research to find you the best dehumidifiers so you can breathe easily and stay dry.

How we chose the best dehumidifiers

There are a few crucial elements to consider when shopping for dehumidifiers. First, we looked at pint capacity (i.e., how much water the unit can successfully remove daily). We want to ensure your dehumidifier is as effective as possible in drying out your space. We considered dozens of the most popular models with the most relevant features, drawing on years of experience in the health and wellness space.

We also considered whether the model came with a drain pump or hose so you wouldn’t have to manually empty the excess water reservoir. Additionally, we wanted to recommend models that were as easy to use and operate as possible: features such as auto-turn off, auto restart, Wi-Fi connectivity, etc., were among the capabilities we looked for.

Finally, we looked at the noise level. Who wants to be disturbed by loud machinery? Less humidity and less noise are always top considerations.

The best dehumidifiers: Reviews & Recommendations

The best dehumidifiers suck out moisture from the air, essentially “dehumidifying” the space. They’re sort of like a vacuum cleaner, but instead of sucking up dust and dirt, they suck in moist air through a fan. Then, they draw out the condensation and release warmer, dry air back into the room. 

Some models work more like a refrigerators in that the warm, wet air passes over freezing pipes that cool the air. Then, the dry, cool air passes over a hot compressor unit and gets released back at room temperature through a grille. The excess water can be collected and removed in one of two ways, depending on the model you select. The water is either released into a removable reservoir that you can drain manually or circulated out of the unit automatically through a hose. Our recommendations are suited for every size of home and budget.

Best overall: GoveeLife Smart Dehumidifier

GoveeLife

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Daily rate: 50 Pints
  • Coverage: 4,500 Square Feet
  • Dimensions: 11.61″D x 15.35″W x 24.41″H

Pros:

  • Large coverage area
  • Helpful smart features
  • Energy Star compliant

Cons:

  • No built-in pump

If you don’t need a dehumidifier with a built-in pump, GoveeLife’s Smart Dehumidifier is your best option. The Energy Star-compliant dehumidifier can cover an area of up to 4,500 square feet, which means an entire floor of your home (such as a basement), and suck up to 50 pints of water from your air each day. Its Wi-Fi features allow you to control and monitor the dehumidifier through an app on your iOS or Android-enabled device, and you’ll receive a notification when its tank is full. GoveeLife includes a drain hose, though you have the option to attach a garden hose to the dehumidifier—it’ll be larger and get water out more quickly—if you’d prefer.

If you’ve set up a smart home, you can control the dehumidifier using Amazon’s Alexa or Google Assistant to operate it completely hands-free. Don’t worry; if you’re less technically inclined, you can also adjust its settings manually by pushing buttons on top of the device. The dehumidifier is equipped with a “Smart Comfort Mode,” which will automatically regulate the humidity in your room as it fluctuates. You can see how the humidity in your home changes over the course of the day through GoveeLife’s app. This happens in real-time, so you don’t need to set it up.

While GoveeLife’s Smart Dehumidifier is among the smartest models we’re recommending, it’s also the best overall value. Normally $299.99, it can often be found for $80-$100 less, thanks to frequent Amazon coupons.

Best whole house: hOmeLabs Dehumidifier

hOmelabs

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Daily rate: 50 Pints
  • Coverage: 4,500 Square Feet
  • Dimensions: 11″D x 15.4″W x 24.3″H

Pros:

  • Built-in pump
  • Full bucket and overheat protection
  • Energy Star Compliant

Cons:

  • Price

If you have a large area and want a set-it-and-forget-it solution for managing your humidifier, hOmeLabs has you covered. Its humidifier can cover an area of up to 4,500 square feet, remove up to 50 liters of water from your home each day, and empty its tank with a single button push thanks to a built-in pump. It’s a little more expensive than our top pick, and doesn’t have any Wi-Fi-enabled features, but the inclusion of a pump more than makes up for it. Once you’ve set the dehumidifier up—a control panel on top of the appliance handles this in a few button presses—you shouldn’t need to adjust it very often. The dehumidifier will beep when its tank is full, at which point you can empty it by activating its pump.

Automatic overheat protection is a feature that’ll come in handy if you run this dehumidifier continuously—especially when sleeping, and its auto restart function will bring the dehumidifier back to life if you experience a power surge. These little touches—on top of having a pump and covering a large area—make hOmeLabs’ dehumidifier stand out. If you live in a single-floor dwelling or multi-floor home with an open staircase, this dehumidifier is the one to get and worth its cost.

Best with pump: Honeywell Smart Dehumidifier for Home

Honeywell

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Daily rate: 50 Pints
  • Coverage: 3,500 Square Feet
  • Dimensions: 12.4″D x 15.75″W x 25.4″H

Pros:

  • Built-in pump
  • Energy Star certified
  • Removes odors
  • Continuous drain

Cons:

  • Price

Honeywell’s Smart dehumidifier may not cover as much space as hOmeLabs’, but is a little less expensive and was also designed to remove odors. Energy Star deemed this one of its Most Efficient options, a distinction that’s important if you’d like to run it all the time without significantly raising your utility bill every month. The dehumidifier has thermal overload protection to keep it from overheating, and is made from a heat-safe casting. You can set up this dehumidifier to begin automatically at a set temperature so it’ll kick on to keep you comfortable before you need it.

It may not have smart features, but you can set this dehumidifier to continuously drain its tank thanks to its built-in pump. This is a great feature if you plan to be out of the house for an extended period of time, but it would have been even better if this dehumidifier was smart, so you could keep track of how often it was being emptied. Regardless, this is an optional setting, albeit one that’s very welcome and a primary reason this is the best dehumidifier with a pump. If you’d like to take a mostly hands-off approach to moderating your home’s climate, this is the dehumidifier to get.

Best industrial: Waykar 130 Pints Dehumidifier

Waykar

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Daily rate: 130 Pints
  • Coverage: 6,500 Square Feet
  • Dimensions: 10.83″D x 14.96″W x 24.41″H

Pros:

  • High coverage area
  • High daily rate
  • Automatic drainage

Cons:

  • No smart features

Waykar’s 130 Pint Dehumidifier is designed for office spaces, storage facilities, or similar work environments, and it’s a heavy-duty option if you’ve got serious climate control needs. It can remove nearly three times as much water from the air daily than our other recommendations, and cover way more space to boot. Waykar recommends using it in a wine cellar or similar space, where ignoring environmental control isn’t an option. This dehumidifier also features a continuous drain feature, which, as the name suggests, will monitor the status of its water tank and automatically empty it periodically.

You can also empty its internal bucket if you’d prefer or if you don’t have a sink or other drainage area in the room. A small transparent strip on the front of the dehumidifier allows you to see how full its tank is at a glance, which is helpful if you’re emptying it out manually. The dehumidifier doesn’t have any smart features, which is surprising given its higher price and automatic draining function. It’d be helpful to get an alert each time the tank is being emptied or enable and disable the feature depending on how long you’ll be out of your house. Still, there’s no denying that this is the best dehumidifier if you’ve got a very large area that needs continual maintenance.

Best budget: NineSky Dehumidifier

NineSky

SEE IT

Specs:

  • Daily rate: 1.88 pints
  • Coverage: 300
  • Dimensions: 6.1″D x 6.1″W x 9.25″H

Pros:

  • Price
  • Night light
  • Compact size

Cons:

  • Limited use cases

If you’d like to control your home’s climate but live in a small space or are on a tight budget, NineSky has you covered. For $50, you’re getting a dehumidifier that covers 300 square feet and can suck 1.88 pints of water out of the air without reaching capacity. This is a great bathroom dehumidifier or one to keep on a bedside table overnight to prevent waking up due to discomfort. At just under 10-inches tall and a tiny bit over six-inches wide, you can fit this dehumidifier just about anywhere. It’s also just over 3 pounds, so you can carry it from room to room throughout the day if you have a home office that you’d like to keep comfortable during the day before bringing it back to your bedroom once the sun goes down.

While it’s a lot less feature-rich than our larger, more expensive dehumidifier recommendations, NineSky didn’t skimp out on the essentials. This dehumidifier will automatically shut down when its tank is full to prevent it from spilling over, and it only has two buttons, which makes it easy to operate. If you’re in a dorm room or other smaller space and wake up feeling uncomfortably sticky in the summertime, NineSky’s dehumidifier is essential. (Looking for more small dehumidifier options? We’ve got you covered.)

What to consider when looking for the best dehumidifiers

There are many factors to consider when deciding which dehumidifier is right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide.

Types of Dehumidifiers

  • Heat Pump Dehumidifier (refrigerator style). These dehumidifiers use a fan, pump, and heat exchange coils to dehumidify the space. The air is sucked in through a fan and then passes over the super cold heat exchanger coils. Excess moisture is then collected into the reservoir or through a drainage hose. They’re not always best for colder climates, as the air is already cold.
  • Desiccant Dehumidifier (aka Chemical Absorbent Dehumidifier). Instead of cooling the air to remove moisture, desiccant dehumidifiers use a chemical drying agent, such as silica gel. The chemical agent is then passed through a heat exchange wheel that helps to draw out moisture, and pushes dry air back into the room.
  • Ventilating Dehumidifiers. These use a sensor control to measure the amount of humidity in the air. Once the humidity reaches a certain level (that you can manually specify), it will turn on the ventilator and draw in air from outside. These aren’t as common. 

The type of dehumidifier

Dehumidifiers can be broken down into one of three categories, and we’ve explained the differences between them below.

  • Heat Pump Dehumidifier (refrigerator style). These dehumidifiers use a fan, pump, and heat exchange coils to dehumidify the space. The air is sucked in through a fan and then passes over the super cold heat exchanger coils. Excess moisture is then collected into the reservoir or through a drainage hose. They’re not always best for colder climates, as the air is already cold.
  • Desiccant Dehumidifier (aka Chemical Absorbent Dehumidifier). Instead of cooling the air to remove moisture, desiccant dehumidifiers use a chemical drying agent, such as silica gel. The chemical agent is then passed through a heat exchange wheel that helps to draw out moisture, and pushes dry air back into the room.
  • Ventilating Dehumidifiers. These use a sensor control to measure the amount of humidity in the air. Once the humidity reaches a certain level (that you can manually specify), it will turn on the ventilator and draw in air from outside. These aren’t as common. 

Pint Capacity

This is an indicator of how much water, or humidity, will be absorbed throughout the day. This is rated in moisture absorbed per 24 hours (i.e., a 30-pint humidifier removes 30 pints of moisture per day, then 50 pints, then 70 pints, etc). Selecting pint capacity depends on your room size and how damp the room is.

Whole home vs. portable

Do you need a dehumidifier that can work for an entire house or office space? Or will you need a smaller, more portable model for just one room? Portable dehumidifiers are less expensive upfront, but whole-home dehumidifiers are more energy efficient in the long term.

Energy usage

Dehumidifiers can range anywhere from 50 to 800 watts. The higher the wattage, the more powerful, but also the higher your energy bill might be. This is something to consider, so look for Energy Star certified dehumidifiers to make sure you’re not wasting energy and running up that bill. 

FAQs

Q: How do I know if I need a dehumidifier?

According to the EPA (Environmental Protection Agency), humidity levels indoors should be kept below 60% to prevent mold and an infestation of pests. If your humidity levels reach 60% or higher, you can use a dehumidifier to bring those levels back down. 

Q: How many rooms will my dehumidifier reach?

Generally speaking, a dehumidifier will have the most impact on the room it’s actually in. While some dehumidifiers promote reaching a large amount of square footage, closed doors, and long hallways may hinder its ability to reach the humid air in other rooms. For example, if you have a particularly damp basement, you can place your main dehumidifier in the basement and then place smaller, portable dehumidifiers in other rooms.

Q: Do I need to replace any filters?

No, you do not need to replace filters. Dehumidifiers come with permanent filters that you can periodically rinse and clean to ensure long-term, extended use. 

Q: Does a dehumidifier use a lot of energy?

It depends on the size of the dehumidifier you’re using. Larger dehumidifiers use more energy, but they typically do not need to run as often, so they may be more energy efficient overall. 

Look for Energy Star Certified labels to ensure that your dehumidifier “uses more efficient refrigeration coils, compressors, and fans to remove the same amount of moisture as a similarly-sized conventional unit but uses nearly 15% less energy.”

Final thoughts on the best dehumidifiers

Dehumidifiers are a lifesaver when it comes to keeping our humidity levels at bay. Stave off mold, allergies, and dust mites with the help of this water-sucking device. Just be sure to find ones that are Energy Star certified to keep your utility bill as low as your humidity! 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dehumidifiers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Clean up your act with a Roomba for just $180 at Best Buy https://www.popsci.com/gear/roomba-robot-vacuum-best-buy-deal/ Wed, 13 Mar 2024 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606331
iRobot Roomba 694 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

This $95 discount makes the Wi-Fi enabled robot vacuum a must-have.

The post Clean up your act with a Roomba for just $180 at Best Buy appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
iRobot Roomba 694 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

iRobot’s Roomba invented the category of robot vacuums, and while competition in this space is fierce, the company continues to innovate. You can snag the Roomba 694 for nearly $100 off thanks to a limited-time deal at Best Buy. The Wi-Fi-enabled vacuum will learn when and how often you clean, and automatically adapt based on your needs. You can set its schedule manually by using iRobot’s app on iOS and Android, or start cleaning at any time without lifting a finger by asking Amazon’s Alexa or Google Assistant through a smart speaker.

iRobot Roomba 694 $180 (Was $275)

iRobot

SEE IT

The Roomba 694 uses a three-stage cleaning system to suck up the most dirt regardless of your flooring. Its sensors can detect debris and spend more time cleaning dirtier areas before moving on to the rest of your room. Additional sensors allow the Roomba 694 to avoid obstacles like shoes, chairs, and stairs. After 90 minutes the robot vacuum will return to its charging cradle to top up its battery before resting for an extended time or continuing a longer cleaning job. If you hate keeping your floors clean but have been on the fence about getting a robot vacuum, you shouldn’t pass up Best Buy’s discount on the iRobot Roomba 694.

Other great iRobot deals to help you stay tidy:

The post Clean up your act with a Roomba for just $180 at Best Buy appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best projectors for gaming in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-projectors-for-gaming/ Wed, 19 Oct 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=478798
The best projectors for gaming available in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Go way bigger than your TV can with these high-performance projectors. But be warned: Playing on a 150-inch screen will spoil you.

The post The best projectors for gaming in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best projectors for gaming available in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall XGIMI Horizon Ultra on top of a bedframe. XGIMI Horizon Ultra
SEE IT

It has the trifecta that gamers are looking for in a projector: 4K support, a high refresh rate, and a low response time.

Best portable Dangbei Atom Projector on a bed frame. Dangbei Atom
SEE IT

You can easily fit it in a bag for a camping trip or the like, and 1,200 lumens is more than enough to conduct a clear image in dark or dim conditions.

Best budget XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro XGIMI Mogo 2 Pro
SEE IT

For well under $500 this compact, powerful projector is hard to beat.

Whether you’re more into the frenetic gunplay of Call of Duty or the slow charms of Stardew Valley, the idea of playing your favorite games on a 20-foot-tall screen is undoubtedly appealing, and projectors for gaming can make it happen. Though projectors were considered a generally weak option for gaming in the past, improvements in resolution and response time have dramatically increased their appeal to everyday consumers. The top-of-the-line projectors are still going to make a major dent in your wallet, but there are good budget options, too. While a 4K TV or monitor is the traditional choice for most gamers, there’s no better pair in the AV world than a projector with games. We looked at dozens of projectors to determine the best projectors for gaming in your specific setup, and here are our top picks.

How we chose the best projectors for gaming

I’ve been a professional tech writer for about a decade now, as well as a contributor to PopSci writing about everything from 3-D printers to VPNs. I know my way around gadgets for every level of consumer, from entry-level to industrial. To make these recommendations, I consulted personal testimonials, peer recommendations, consumer reviews, and tests conducted by top-quality professionals. This helped me to determine which projectors shone brightest.

The best projectors for gaming: Reviews & Recommendations

As you’ll see in our list, some projectors are so portable that you can take them on a road trip, or perhaps even on a plane. They’re also more outdoor-friendly than traditional TVs, so you can have a backyard grill or bonfire as you play games with your friends.

Best overall: XGIMI Horizon Ultra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The XGIMI Horizon Ultra is a reasonably priced projector that delivers everything that a gamer could ask for. 

Specs

  • Price: $1,600
  • Throw ratio: 1.2 to 1.5:1
  • Brightness: 2300 lumens
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Response time: 18ms (4K)
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz (4K)
  • Other features: Dolby Vision support
  • Screen size range: 40 to 200 inches
  • Source lifespan: 25,000 hours

Pros

  • 4K support
  • Excellent color reproduction
  • Solid speaker system

Cons

  • Two HDMI ports

We chose XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra as the best 4K projector you can get in 2024, and stand by that recommendation if you’d like to use it primarily for gaming. Everything from its premium metal remote (surprisingly more high-quality feeling than plastic) to its industrial design, to overall perfromance is a slam dunk. We played Nintendo Switch games on this projector during our tests and were consistently impressed with its color accuracy, response time, and overall fidelity. Any missed frames were on account of the game, not this hardware. The Horizon Ultra allowed us to fully appreciate the candy-colored Penny’s Big Breakaway and Star Ocean: Second Story R especially. Gamers who play on the Xbox Series X or PlayStation 5 will appreciate the fact that this projector supports Dolby Vision, the latest HDR (High Dynamic Range) video standard. Games that support HDR have even deeper colors, and the Horizon Ultra will allow you to see every one.

One of this projector’s most surprising features is its relatively robust stereo speaker system, which was developed by Harman Kardon. The speakers were so good that we never felt the need to plug in an external pair, as game soundtracks and dialogue were clear and rich. The projector is equipped with an HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) port, so you’ll only need a single cable to connect it to a surround sound system. The only issue with this projector is that it only has two HDMI ports, which could pose a problem for multiplatform gamers. The best solution is to hook the Horizon Ultra to an AV receiver, but that’s an added expense. You can also get an HDMI splitter if you’d prefer.

The Horizon Ultra runs on a version of Google TV based on Android 11, and we found the user interface to be snappy and easy to navigate. You can access a handful of popular streaming services from the remote itself, and download new or more obscure ones from the app store. It doesn’t support Netflix—an issue with the operating system, not the projector—which is a bummer if you’d like to access that service. This isn’t a dealbreaker, but something to note.

If you’d like a fantastic-looking projector whose gaming performance has proven to be excellent, we highly recommend XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra.

Best 4K: BenQ X300G

BenQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The BenQ X300G is an incredible premium 4K gaming projector that provides a crisper image and better contrast than most of its competitors.

Specs

  • Price: $1,800
  • Throw ratio: .69 to .83
  • Brightness: 2000 lumens
  • Resolutions supported: 1080p, 4K
  • Response time: 4.2ms (1080p), 16.7ms (4K)
  • Refresh rate: 240Hz (1080p), 60 Hz (4K)
  • Other features: HDR support, eARC sound, smart features
  • Screen size range: 30 to 150 inches
  • Source lifespan: 30,000 hours

Pros

  • High frame rate and low reponse times
  • Short throw ratio
  • Smart features

Cons

  • Slightly smaller maximum screen size

BenQ has been making projectors and monitors specifically suited for gamers for several years now, and the X300G proves the company isn’t slowing down. Its lower bulb luminosity and screen size range kept it from being our number one choice, but it has no major downsides. In fact, its 150 inch maximum display size will likely be just fine for most people because of space limitations. That said, its lower-than-average throw ratio means the limiting factor will likely be the size of your wall or screen, not the depth of your room.

On a technical level the X300G checks all the boxes gamers would need for a projector. It supports HDR, has a game mode the optimizes its performance to reduce input lag as much as possible, and supports spatial audio for more immersive sound thanks to a DSP (digital signal processor) chip. This is the only projector for gaming we’re recommending with a built-in passive radiator on the bottom to improve bass performance. The X300G runs on Android TV, so you can access the latest apps through it directly, which is helpful for non-gaming purposes.

A feature called SettingXchange allows you to download custom video profiles to the projector via an app on your computer, so you can have per-game settings to make that particular title look as good as possible. This is an exclusive file format to BenQ’s projectors, and you can even create and upload your own profiles so other gamers can download them. This ecosystem is completely free to use, and the type of feature serious gamers will appreciate. On the port selection side the X300G features a pair of HDMI ports (one is an ARC port), plus a DisplayPort, so you can easily hook up a computer to it using the right USB-C cable.

Hardcore gamers will found a lot to love in BenQ’s X300G, a projector for gamers who are serious about getting the highest levels of color accuracy possible when playing.

Best short-throw: Hisense PX2-PRO

HIsense PX2-PRO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Hisense PX2-Pro is an excellent gaming projector with the specs to please any player, and its short-throw ratio makes it suitable for any living situation.

Specs

  • Price: $2,800
  • Throw ratio: .25:1
  • Brightness: 2,400 lumens
  • Resolutions supported: 4K
  • Response time: 16.67ms (4K)
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz (4K)
  • Other features: 30 Watt speakers
  • Screen size range: 90 to 130 inches
  • Source lifespan: 25,000 hours

Pros

  • Short throw picture possible to use in any room with a blank wall
  • Spports 107% of the BT.2020 color gamut
  • Three HDMI ports

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Large size

Hisense’s PX2-Pro requires a huge financial commitment, but it makes gaming on a projector possible for people in tight spaces. It has an incredibly small throw distance, and can create a 100+ inch screen while being only a couple of feet away from your wall. If you have an existing media center with a TV on top of it, you can simply replace it with the PX2-Pro, and be good to go. This style of projector feeds an image through multiple a concave mirror and curved lenses to achieve its ultra throw performance. The result is the ultimate projector for those with little room to spare. The downside to this style of projector is that its maximum screen size is lower than most projectors for gaming. Still, the difference between playing on a 65-inch display and 130-inch display is significant, and its increased luminosity more than makes up for this shortcoming.

This is the largest projector for gaming we’re recommending, but Hisense used this extra space wisely. The PX2-Pro is equipped with a 30 watt audio system with support for Dolby Atmos right out of the box, three HDMI ports (including an ARC port), and a video system that supports Dolby Vision, and can show 107% of the BT.2020 color gamut. If color accuracy and audio fidelity are your biggest concerns when playing games, you won’t find a finer 4K projector than the PX2-Pro. The inclusion of an extra HDMI port is a very welcome feature for multiplatform gamers who want to keep all of the current-generation consoles hooked up at once.

The PX2-Pro runs on Google TV, and it’s one of the few to support Netflix right out of the box. In fact, there’s a shortcut button to it right on the remote. This means you’ll have access to every major media streaming platform right out of the box, which is fantastic for multimedia aficionados. Additionally, you can control this projector for gaming using both the Google Assistant and Alexa completely hands free. This isn’t a gaming feature, but it’s nice to have.

If you’ve resigned yourself to the fact that a projector won’t work in your gaming setup because there’s not enough space, Hisense’s PX2-Pro will prove you wrong.

Best mini: Dangbei Atom

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Dengbei Atom’s compact size and competitive price make it a force to beat in the portable projector world.

Specs

  • Price: $900
  • Throw ratio: 1.2:1
  • Brightness: 1200 lumens
  • Resolutions supported: 1080p
  • Response time: 26.5ms
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • Other features: 5W dual speakers
  • Screen size range: 60 to 180 inches
  • Source lifespan: 30,000 hours

Pros

  • Fantastic color reproduction for its size
  • Built-in speakers
  • Bright for a compact projector

Cons

  • 1080P video can look grainy on a giant screen
  • One HDMI port

Leave it to Dangbei to make a mini projector that can stand comfortably with models that cost double the price and take up a lot more room. Every feature you’d want for gaming: support for HDR10, built-in speakers that sound very good given their size, a 1200 lumen bulb, and the ability to project a 180-inch screen are all present. Extra features, like a processor that can handle running Google TV with aplomb, Netflix support, the ability to trigger the, Google Assistant, and an auto-keystone correction feature that keeps your screen looking tidy, are also available. It’s hard to find any fault with the Dangbei Atom given its ultra thin and compact profile given every feature the company managed to cram into this projector.

Gaming on the Dangbei Atom using a Nintendo Switch went very well. Colors looked good, games sounded pretty rich, and there wasn’t a discernible amount of latency when playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild, which admittedly runs at 30 frames per second. In its own right, the Atom, which clocks in at just 1.87 inches thick and under three pounds, is a technical triumph of engineering. That said, a 1080P image projected on a 100-inch screen does look worse than one at 4K. This wasn’t an issue when playing games on the Nintendo Switch, which tops out at 1080P, but was noticeable when watching videos, and would be a bigger deal when playing on more powerful consoles or a PC. Our only other complaint is that its single HDMI port means you’ll be swapping out consoles whenever you need to play a new title.

But the Atom’s overall portability—it was easy to carry the projector and power cable in one hand from room to room—means you can take it with you to play games on vacation, or set up and break down your big-screen gaming setup within a couple of minutes. For spaces like dorm rooms, the Atom is the ideal projector for gaming. At the time of publication, Amazon is offering a $150 off coupon, which brings the price of the Dangbei Atom down to $750.

Best portable: Nebula Mars 3

Nebula

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Nebula Mars 3 might cost more than some mini projectors, but its ultra-compact size and top-shelf specs make it a winner.

Specs

  • Price: $980
  • Throw ratio: 1.2
  • Brightness: 1000 lumens
  • Resolutions supported: 1080p
  • Response time: 26.7ms
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz
  • Other features: HDR10 support
  • Screen size range: 30 to 200 inches
  • Source lifespan: 25,000 hours

Pros

  • Battery powered
  • Built in speakers
  • HDR support

Cons

  • Your run time on battery will vary largely based on your settings

If true portability is your must-have feature in a projector for gaming, look no further than Nebula’s Mars 3. It’s the only model we’re recommending that can run on battery power for up to five hours, though we suspect that’ll be a lot lower if you run the machine at its maximum brightness setting. And it gets bright, which is why it’s one of our favorite projectors for daylight viewing. Still, for nighttime outdoor gaming sessions, it’s hard to beat the ability to play mobile games on a big screen. It’s also an excellent choice if you’d like to use your projector for mixed use cases, as its built-in operating system will allow you to stream videos from popular services—including Netflix—any place you have an active internet connection (or USB-C to HDMI cable).

On the tech spec side you’ll have to give up a little bit for the sake of portability, namely brightness. At 1,000 lumens this projector has the second-dimmest bulb out of all our recommendations. The Mars 3 will still work perfectly fine in fully dark rooms, but will struggle when there’s light leakage. Nebula said it fine-tuned the Mars 3’s video system using AI for consistent performance. This projector does only supports HDR 10 rather than Dolby Vision, so you’ll give up some color reproduction. That said, Nebula didn’t skimp out in other areas, namely the projector’s audio system.

The Mars 3 has a 40 watt, three driver Dolby Audio system, which should pack a serious punch. You’ll need the volume and oomph when playing games outdoors, where ambient noise can drown out the sounds you want to hear. The Mars 3 runs on Android TV, with Netflix, which makes it an excellent portable movie machine. If portability is paramount to your enjoyment of playing games, Nebula’s Mars 3 is an excellent choice.

Best budget: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro is a high-quality projector that gives gamers everything they want for less than $500.

Specs

  • Price: $450
  • Throw ratio: 1.2:1
  • Brightness: 400 lumens
  • Resolutions supported: 1080p
  • Response time: 33.6ms
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz 
  • Other features: HDR10 support
  • Screen size range: 40 to 200 inches
  • Source lifespan: 25,000 hours

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Good image quality for its size
  • Great price

Cons

  • Dim bulb

If you’d like to game on a projector that costs under $500, your best choice by far is XGIMI’s MoGo 2 Pro. Let’s get its one big con out of the way: At 400 lumens, this is the dimmest projector for gaming we’re comfortable recommending. It’s designed to be used exclusively in pitch black rooms at night. This limitation may be a dealbreaker for some, but if you’re fine with it you’ll be rewarded in other ways.

XGIMI managed to fit a two-speaker audio system, chip fast enough to run Android 11 (sans Netflix), object avoidance, and auto keystone correction into a very small package. It lacks HDR, which will matter most if you play games on a PlayStation 5 or Xbox Series X, but Nintendo Switch owners won’t be missing out. A feature called uninterrupted keystone correction will keep your screen—up to 200 inches in size—looking even while you use it. While it’s not as performant as our other projector recommendations, its price is hard to beat, and XGIMI has proven it knows how to eek out as much performance as possible from its hardware. If you’re a casual gamer who wants to play on the biggest possible screen, this is your answer.

What to consider before buying a projector for gaming

There are many factors to consider when deciding which projector for gaming is right for you. Below are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide.

Throw ratio

First, you should think about the room or rooms that you plan to use your gaming projector in and, especially, where you want to put the projector. You might even way to measure its dimensions to confirm. Depending on that, you’ll want to get a projector that has a throw ratio (a measure of its picture size relative to its distance from the wall) that fits that space.

For example, standard-throw or long-throw projectors often require 10 to 15 feet of space in order to output a good-quality image, which might not work for everyone’s living situation. Short-throw projectors can make do with just 5 to 8 feet—and ultra short-throws even less than that—so they might be a better fit for certain people.

Go too big with your screen and you may have to move your head around a lot in order to see the whole screen. That will have you searching “how to cure gaming motion sickness” in a hurry.

Input lag

One of the biggest tech specs gamers consider when shopping for a monitor or TV is input lag—or the rate at which the screen displays new information as you’ve typed a key, moved a joystick, or clicked on your mouse. This lag is measured in milliseconds, which is imperceptible to the average eye, but makes a big difference in gaming, where every moment lost gives your opponent an advantage.

The truth is projectors have a far higher level of input lag than any TV or monitor because the video signal has to get broadcast from your projector onto the wall. Even an object traveling at the speed of light takes time to reach its destination. If you plan on playing competitive games on the projector, you’ll want to shell out for a model that has the fastest response time possible.

Portability

While they vary in size, projectors are far easier to transport than TVs, and most can be adjusted to fit walls that are between 3 and 30 feet. Our pick for the best portable projector can also run on battery power, which means you can game on the big screen from wherever you’d like.

Audio performance

Most of the projectors we’re recommending have built-in speakers, which means you won’t absolutely have to connect them to an external pair. These integrated audio systems can actually sound surprisingly good, though you’ll want to plug your projector into an AV receiver if you’d like to watch movies or play video games in surround sound.

Smart features

A lot of modern projectors for gaming run an operating system—primarily Google TV or another custom version of Android—that allows you to access streaming apps from them directly. These features aren’t necessarily important for gaming, but are helpful when using your projector for other forms of recreation. More expensive models tend to have smart features like Alex and Google Home support, too.

Why should I buy a projector for gaming?

Of course, there are downsides to projectors. For one thing, they’re expensive, with even the budget options coming in at well north of the price of a cheap TV.  For another, they require a certain setup to be used correctly.

Projectors require a darkened room in order to work well, which probably isn’t an issue for most people, but it can be inconvenient at times. The bottom line is that while a projector for gaming probably isn’t an everyday use item for most people, it can be very helpful for social gatherings, especially LAN parties.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best projectors for gaming cost?

On average, the best projectors for gaming range from $700 – $3,000, depending on the depth of features. That’s more than a new TV (unless it’s a fancy OLED), but that’s the price of portability.

Q: Do gaming projectors experience input lag?

All modern televisions and projectors have some form of input lag, which is listed as the response time in the device’s technical specifications. Though lower is always better, the 4ms to 8ms response times listed for most of our recommended projectors are suitable for even intense action games. Portable projectors have slower response times, but most people will not notice the difference. If you tend to pay attention to such things, we recommend buying a full-sized projector for gaming. If you don’t want any input lag, invest in an old CRT (cathode-ray tube) TV for retro gaming.

Q: What’s the difference between projector frame rate and refresh rate?

The projector frame rate is the number of frames displayed by the projector per second. The refresh rate is the number of times per second that the projector updates. When it comes to gaming, frame rate is determined by the hardware capabilities of your console or PC, as well as the individual game itself. 

The refresh rate is the upper bound of the frame rate that it can display. For example, if I play a competitive shooter like Counter-Strike: Global Offensive on a powerful computer that can output a capped frame rate of 120fps, but I connect it to a projector with a 60Hz refresh rate, the projector will display the game at 60fps. High refresh rates are generally desirable for PC gaming, but most consoles tend to output at 60fps at the high end.

Q: Is a projector better than a TV for gaming?

This really depends on your use case, but generally, no. Televisions tend to offer a better value to gamers per dollar than projectors. You can buy a TV with the same vital gaming stats (response time, resolution support, etc.) as a top-of-the-line projector for a fraction of the price. However, projectors have some advantages over televisions, such as portability and versatility.

Q: How much does a projector for gaming cost?

This depends on its features, but our recommendations cost between $450 and $2,800.

Final thoughts on the best projectors for gaming

Ultimately, a nice projector is a great gaming device, though it’s more of a luxury item than a solid TV. If you’re a gamer on the go, however, and you have the budget, our picks will allow you to turn any space into the place for a competitive round or 10. Just add console, friends, and let the heated competition keep you warm while you play on the patio.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best projectors for gaming in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gas generators of 2024 for home, RVs, and emergencies https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-gas-generator/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=381538
A lineup of the best gas generators on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep all systems running with gas-fueled generators for emergencies, outside events, and anywhere backup power is needed.

The post The best gas generators of 2024 for home, RVs, and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best gas generators on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for travelers The Honda 662220 EU2200i Portable Inverter Generator is the best gas generator for travelers. Honda 662220 EU2200i Portable Inverter Generator
SEE IT

One of the best brands of generators delivers portable power.

Best overall Generac GP3300i Generac GP3300i
SEE IT

Steady power for sensitive electronics.

Best for homeowners The DuroMax XP8500EH Dual Fuel Portable Generator is the best gas generator for homeowners. DuroMax XP8500EH Dual-Fuel Portable Generator
SEE IT

Intense power supply for the entire home.

It’s always a good idea to have a backup gas generator in your possession. Storms can knock out your home’s electricity. Rural areas may have unreliable power networks. Or maybe you need an efficient way to operate tools and equipment on a job site. Frankly, owning a portable gas generator is a lifesaver when disaster strikes. And they’re a must for epic camping trips. But these heavy-duty machines can be expensive and complicated. Before you invest in a backup generator, learn about the different features and power output options. Find a portable power station that works when it matters most, and discover how today’s best gas generators keep appliances running and households happy.

How we chose the best gas generators

To ignite our mission to find the best gas generators, we looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research. We also took knowledge from other generator stories and applied it here.

The best gas generators: Reviews & Recommendations

With so many gas generators on the market, where do you start? The first step is knowing how you want to use the generator. Then set a budget and look for the features that are important to your specific needs. For instance, do you need extra or specialized outlets for RVs? Do you want to power the entire home? Or do you only need to charge a smartphone? Find the best gas generator and stay energized. 

Best overall: Generac GP3300i

Generac

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It has enough power to keep your major appliances running and smart power management to do it as efficiently as possible.

Specs

  • Weight: 59.4 pounds
  • Watts: 3,300 (max)
  • Number of outlets: 3

Pros

  • Powerful enough to run full-sized appliances
  • Easy to carry for its heft 
  • Quiet running thanks to inverter power
  • Can work in concert with another unit (with the optional parallel cable).

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Heavier than other portables

At just under 60 pounds, this isn’t the most portable generator around, but it’s packed with enough power and features to make it a solid overall pick for most uses from extended camping trips to emergency home backup. This generator runs at 2,500 watts, but it can crank up to 3,300 starting watts to get bigger electric motors going without straining. 

The connections include three 120V AC outlets, as well as a pair of 5V USB ports for charging small devices like phones and tablets. The main engine is powerful enough to run a full-sized fridge to keep your food from spoiling during a long power outage. Despite all of its built-in power, this generator can also daisy chain with another identical unit to augment the power output. Its economy mode tweaks engine speed to meet specific demands so it’s not unnecessarily burning pricey fuel when it doesn’t need the extra oomph. 

At the end of the day, this generator puts out plenty of clean power that’s suitable even for sensitive electronics like computers without much of a hassle. That’s a big deal when the power is out and you really want to keep the lights (and everything else) on.

Runner-up: Champion Power Equipment 201052 Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Champion Power Equipment

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Power your fridge or a chainsaw with this heavy-duty generator.

Specs

  • Weight: 119 lbs.
  • Watts:  3,800 watts
  • Hours of power: Up to 14 hours of run time on gasoline or 10.5 hours on propane.
  • Number of outlets: 4

Pros

  • Dual-fuel allows for flexibility
  • Can power major appliances
  • Lots of outlets for different kinds of equipment

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Loud

The 3,800-watt Champion generator can use gas or propane, making it a great all-around generator. But it really excels during a crisis when you need electricity most. If the power goes out during a storm or other disaster, use the Champion gas generator to run refrigerators, freezers, sump pumps, and just about any other major appliance. It’s also a great source of energy for power tools, a huge plus during disaster cleanup. The biggest downside is the noise. At 68dB, it’s not a quiet machine. We wouldn’t recommend this for outdoor parties and events. But when you need solid, reliable power, this is the best beast of portable gas generators.

Best for travelers: Honda 662220 EU2200i Portable Inverter Generator

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This generator is quiet and light, making it a perfect addition to your next RV adventure.

Specs

  • Weight: 46.5 lbs.
  • Watts: 2200 watts
  • Hours of power: 10 hours
  • Number of outlets: 2

Pros

  • Reliable
  • Quiet
  • Energy-efficient

Cons

  • Expensive

If you’re already a seasoned RV enthusiast, you know the high-quality of Honda gas generators. The EU2200i is a reliable inverter gas generator that’s surprisingly, and pleasantly, quiet. The 48dB is more than acceptable for an RV generator. And the 2,200 watts can power up air conditioning units and other heavy-duty RV appliances and still have enough juice to charge smartphones and tablets with ease. It’s an energy-efficient generator, capable of operating for nearly 10 hours on a single tank (depending on how hard you’re using it, of course). The big drawback is price. At over $1,000, this is far from the cheapest gas generator for RVs. But it is one of the best and most reliable. 

Best for homeowners: DuroMax XP8500EH Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

DuroMax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A behemoth generator like this is your best bet for re-powering the entire house.

Specs

  • Weight: 204 lbs.
  • Watts: 8,500 watts
  • Hours of power: 48 hours
  • Number of outlets: 4

Pros

  • Portable
  • Lots of outlets
  • Dual-fuel

Cons

  • Heavy

For powering an entire house, the DuraMax Dual-Fuel generator is the machine for the job. It’s a portable generator with the energy output of a whole home generator. The dual-fuel system lets you run it on gasoline or propane, or both. With two USB outlets, four household outlets, a 120/240V twist lock, and one vehicle outlet, you’ll have plenty of options for keeping the power on. This is a heavy-duty generator, weighing over 200 pounds, so it may not be great for food trucks, campers, and other mobile uses. However, the 8,500 watts is hard to beat, making this the best fuel generator when big power is needed. 

Best for small appliances: A-iPower SUA2000iV 2000 Watt Portable Inverter Generator

A-iPower

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need to spend much to bring your small appliances back to life.

Specs

  • Weight: 50 lbs.
  • Watts: 2,000
  • Hours of power: 4 hours
  • Number of outlets: 1

Pros

  • Budget-friendly
  • Quiet
  • “Low idle” mode for extended run time

Cons

  • Heavy

A gas generator under $500 can’t be expected to power an entire house or RV. The A-iPower gas generator is a portable power source that works best on small appliances like fans, lamps, and mini-fridges. This compact inverter generator can power anything up to 800 watts. It runs on gasoline and only makes 52 decibels of noise—that’s as loud as a running refrigerator or a quiet street. If you don’t mind the wattage and weight, and only plan to use this in case of emergencies, the A-iPower generator is a great, inexpensive energy solution. 

What to consider when buying the best gas generators

Modern gas generators are high-tech, sophisticated pieces of equipment. Designed for dependability and safety, the best portable generator must be ready to run and easy to operate. Before buying and using a gas-powered energy station, understand how they work, what they offer, and where they provide the most efficient flow of electricity. 

How much electricity do you need to generate?

The generator used to power up a laptop on a stormy night won’t be ideal for keeping all major appliances running during a multi-day blackout. Look closely at the specs and product descriptions. Most portable gas generators produce between 200 and 7,500 watts. 

How do you know how many watts you need? Multiply the voltage (120V in the U.S.) by the amperage of the product (usually found on the back of the appliance or on a tag). The result is the necessary wattage. For example, a refrigerator that uses 6 amps will need 720 watts to keep it running smoothly. You’ll need a generator that can offer at least that much wattage if you want the fridge to stay chilly.

A gasoline generator will list two wattage numbers: starting watts and running watts. Some appliances need a big boost of power to get up and running; that’s the starting watts. But the appliance won’t need as much wattage to sustain its operation; that’s the running watts 

To calculate how much wattage you’ll need, make a list of the appliances you’d like to keep running and include the running watts and starting watts as two separate numbers. Add up all the running wattage. Find the highest starting wattage and add this number to the total running wattage. This gives you a rough idea of how much power is required. 

Confused? Simply put, your power generator needs more wattage than you think. For RVs and camping generators, look for an option that supplies between 2,000 and 4,000 watts. For a standard house out in a rural area on an unreliable grid, a generator should provide between 5,000 and 7,000 watts. This will keep appliances such as refrigerators, freezers, water pumps, and lights running smoothly. In addition, consider these variables: How many appliances do you have running simultaneously? Do you want to keep the AC operating? What about an electric water heater? Do you use an electric oven? That said, no two homes are alike, so the above numbers are approximations.  

Before buying a gas generator, think carefully about how you want to use it. If all you want is a steady power supply to keep the lights on, get a low-wattage generator. Lights only eat up about 60 watts of power. But if you want to make smoothies during a camping trip, you’ll need more power to put the blender on blast. (Blenders need about 500 starting watts and 300 running watts.)

Whole house generator vs. portable gas generator

Don’t expect a 1,000-watt portable generator to electrify an entire home. While portable gas generators can be used as handy backup generators during a power outage, those who are looking for something to maintain normal operations of the entire household during an outage should invest in a whole house generator. 

These natural generators can cost around $5,000 and are permanently installed outside the home. They are directly connected to your home’s power and will automatically turn on if the power goes out. Running on natural gas or propane, modern whole-house generators are operated via user-friendly smartphone apps. Homeowners can monitor and manage the whole-house gas generator with a simple tap on a screen. If you need a substantial backup power solution, invest in a whole-house generator. 

Stay safe when using your gas generator

A gas generator should never be used in a confined space with poor ventilation. These generators produce carbon monoxide (CO) exhaust. It’s odorless and deadly. The best gas generator will have a safety feature that shuts off the machine when a buildup of CO gas is detected. However, don’t rely on the gas generator alone to protect you. Always use the gas generator thoughtfully and carefully. 

For example, never use the gas generator in a garage, even if the door is open. CO gas can collect in the garage and seep into the rest of the house. And never use a gas generator in a shed or basement. Keep the gas generator outdoors and a minimum of 20 feet away from the house. And always direct the exhaust away from windows and doors.

The noise factor

Gas-powered generators are judged by two important factors: Wattage and decibels. Gas generators can be loud…very loud. Typically, a gas generator coughs up between 65 dB and 100 dB. For comparison, a motorcycle revs up about 95 dB and an approaching subway train squeals out 100 dB of annoying noise pollution. Gas generators may not be as loud as a subway train, but even mildly loud sounds can cause hearing loss over a period of time. 

Look carefully at the decibel rating of a gas generator. If you plan on using the portable generator for an event, make sure the motor won’t drown out the party with incessant rumbles. Find the quietest generator available. And don’t put yourself or anyone else at risk by trying to muffle the noise with blankets. Gas generators need to breathe.

Fuel source: What powers the power?

Most portable generators run on standard gasoline. It’s relatively inexpensive and widely available. But some generators can also use propane or natural gas. Natural-gas generators are popular as home standby generators because they can connect with the existing gas line. Natural-gas generators are also quieter. Propane generators are great during an emergency, when the local gas station is overrun with customers. Propane doesn’t go stale, so it’s a good option for stocking up and storing. 

Dual-fuel generators use a combination of gas and propane, or natural gas and propane. They can switch between the two fuel options, and they’re great for RVs and camping trips when you’re not sure what type of fuel will be available. (There are also solar generators, if you’re going off-grid and would have a hard time carrying fuel, but we concentrated on gas-powered generators in this round-up.)

FAQs

Q: What makes a good gas generator?

A good gasoline generator must check three boxes: The right amount of power, the right noise level, and the right price. For homeowners in need of a backup generator capable of powering most major appliances, you’ll need between 4,000 and 7,000 watts. It’s always best to overshoot your power needs to account for starting wattage. Unless you use a battery-powered generator, expect the generator to be noisy. Anything over 70dB can be irritating, while anything over 100dB will sound like a piece of industrial equipment. The best gas generator must also be affordable. For a 4,000-watt backup generator, expect to pay about $500. 

Q: What size generator is needed to power a house?

To power a house, you’ll need at least 2,000 watts. It really depends on what items you need to juice up. Lights and laptops use relatively little power. Meanwhile, electric water heaters and AC units are big power drains. If you plan to use the generator to keep your entire house fully operational, you may need 7,000 watts. Make a list of the appliances that matter most, as well as the gadgets and tools you can’t live without. This may include refrigerators and electric stoves. Calculate the wattage (amps multiplied by voltage) of each appliance and add extra wattage for starting the appliance. This will give you a rough idea of how much wattage you’ll need from a gas generator.

Q: Are gas generators worth the money?

Yes, gas generators are worth the money. During an emergency, access to dependable electricity can be a matter of life or death. Being able to turn on heat in the winter and AC in the summer is critical, especially for the elderly. With hurricanes and natural disasters becoming more common, equipping your home with a backup generator is not just a good idea, it’s a necessity. That said, how much you want to spend on the generator is up to you. A cheap, $200 generator may be all you need to turn on the lights and use an electric stove. A $5,000 natural gasoline generator can run the entire house. No matter how much you spend, if the generator is to be used during a disaster, you must have a fuel supply ready. Gasoline can go bad, so check your generator regularly.   

Final thoughts on the best gas generators

When you need a dependable source of power, a gas generator is the magic box to keep things running smoothly. These hard-working machines provide enough electricity to run necessary appliances—and then some. Understand the differences between fuel options and don’t overlook the decibel rating. Add up how much wattage you need and you’ll find the best gas generator for the job.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best gas generators of 2024 for home, RVs, and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-inverter-generators/ Mon, 29 Aug 2022 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=465835
Best inverter generators sliced header
Tony Ware

Get fuel-sipping performance that's portable.

The post The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best inverter generators sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Generac GP3500iO delivers solid power and unrivaled reliability. Generac GP3500iO
SEE IT

This is a solid all-around option for just about any home.

Most sustainable Jackery 2000 Pro Review Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro
SEE IT

Go solar if you want to save the environment and some money.

Best for home backup The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 will keep your lights on, quietly. Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series
SEE IT

Don’t worry about blackouts with this powerful-but-quiet model.

The issue with old-school generators is that they always operated at full bore, burning fuel and pumping out power at the highest possible capacity at all times, but inverter generators solve the problem. They offer a throttle that adjusts engine speed to meet actual electrical needs. This greatly improves fuel efficiency, reduces emissions, and decreases operating volume. Inverter generators also provide an extremely clean source of electricity that won’t harm sensitive devices with unpredictable and inconsistent power output. Whether you’ve got hurricane preparedness or just generally useful home appliances on your mind, the best inverter generators offer solid efficiency and runtime, rock-solid craftsmanship, and deliver the reliability you need when the lights go out.

How we picked the best inverter generators

As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of mobile power products for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. I’ve researched each of these selections extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers. We focus on generators that offer solid build quality, powerful performance, and reliability. A generator isn’t worth much if you can’t be sure it will work when you really need it.

The best inverter generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Our top-rated inverter generators represent a range of uses and budgets. Some are designed to provide full-fledged backup power for an entire home. Others are more portable for camping, worksites, or other smaller-scale intentions. In any case, below you’ll find something that fits your circumstances.

Best overall: Generac GP3500iO

Generac

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid performance, superior reliability, and outstanding versatility make the Generac GP3500iO a great all-around inverter generator.

Specs

  • Rated output: 3,000W
  • Peak output: 3,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
  • Weight: 74.3 lbs
  • Runtime: 11 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $839

Pros

  • Outstanding reliability
  • Solid output
  • Quiet
  • Relatively light

Cons

  • No wheels
  • Not enough output for a whole house

When it comes to building an inverter generator that delivers a lifespan worthy of the investment, Generac is as good as they come. The GP3500iO is built to last and will provide many years of reliable power.

Speaking of which, its power output is no slouch either. While its 3,000-3,500W operating range isn’t large enough to keep an entire house powered, it is more than enough to keep key appliances operating or to keep a campsite, RV, or off-grid worksite fully electrified. It’s also parallel-ready, so if you do need more power you can chain a second unit in to double the output. And at a surprisingly competitive price of just over $800, buying two isn’t all that much of a stretch.

It’s 50% quieter than most comparably sized generators, making it perfect for hauling out into nature. That being said, it’s a bit lighter than many similar models, it isn’t exactly featherweight and it doesn’t come with wheels, so some may find it somewhat challenging to wrangle in and out of the RV.

For all intents and purposes, however, we think the GP3500iO is the best inverter generator for the money thanks to its outstanding build quality, performance, and versatility.

Most sustainable: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for plenty of sustainable, portable power, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro delivers.

Specs

  • Rated output: 2,200W
  • Peak output: 4,400W
  • Gas tank capacity: N/A
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Runtime: 2,160 Watt hours
  • Price: $2,099

Pros

  • Super portable
  • Easy to use
  • Solid output
  • Super fast charging 

Cons

  • Not enough output for a whole house
  • Can only be charged in the sun

In its own offshoot class of inverter generators—that of the electric generators, meaning that it requires no gas at all—the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro offers substantial, sustainable, highly portable power. In fact, we like the 2000 Pro so much that we named it the top solar generator of the year.

With output ranging between 2,200-4,400 watts, the 2000 Pro delivers more power than virtually any other solar power generator on the market. While the runtime of its 2,160 Wh capacity depends entirely upon how much you ask of it, it’s capable of powering a full-sized fridge for over three hours, a portable electric cooler for 15 hours, a hand drill for 60 hours, and can charge small devices like a smartphone or laptop dozens and dozens of times. It also recharges fast, going from empty to 100% in under two hours when plugged into a wall outlet or in just 2.5 hours when plugged into its solar array.

The Jackery 2000 Pro is also super portable and super user-friendly, making it an ideal choice for camping or vanlifing. While it’s not powerful enough to keep an entire house juiced, it will serve as a solid source of backup power in the event that the lights go out, allowing you to keep a few key appliances and devices running.

Best for home backup: Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series

Briggs & Stratton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For emergency backup power at home, the Briggs & Stratton Q6500 delivers solid yet quiet performance.

Specs

  • Rated output: 5,000W
  • Peak output: 6,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
  • Weight: 128 lbs
  • Runtime: 14 hours at 25% load 
  • Price: $1,399

Pros

  • Solid output
  • Quiet
  • Easy to move and store
  • Power usage meter

Cons

  • Some buyers report customer service issues

When you need an inverter generator to power your entire home, power output is your foremost concern. The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series delivers more than enough output capacity and runtime to suit the average homeowner’s needs. What’s more, it’s also quieter than most other generators, making about as much noise as a dishwasher.

All of that makes it ideal for at-home emergency backup power use, but the deal is sweetened thanks to its highly mobile, highly storable design. Its telescoping handle sets flush into its square shape, making it easy to store in the garage. When it’s time to deploy, the inclusion of sturdy wheels makes it easy to roll into place.

Some users have reported issues when seeking customer service from the company, but their experience seems to be in the minority. Generally speaking, this is an outstanding generator to have on hand for when the lights go out.

Best for RVs: Honda EU2200i

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you need a tough, reliable source of power on the go, the Honda EU2200i is the best recreational inverter generator out there.

Specs

  • Rated output: 1,800W
  • Peak output: 2,200W
  • Gas tank capacity: .95 gallons
  • Weight: 47.4 lbs
  • Runtime: 8.1 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $1,199

Pros

  • Outstanding portability
  • Outstanding reliability
  • Solid power output
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Not powerful enough for a while house

Fun fact: Honda actually released the first inverter generator ever back in 1987. That being the case, it should come as no surprise that they’ve had plenty of time to perfect the art.

And perfect the Honda EU2200i is—at least for the purposes of RVing or camping. It weighs less than 50 pounds and can easily fit in most common car trunks, it’s as portable as generators come. At the same time, it offers a solid 1,800-2,200W of power, which is enough to run virtually any RV air conditioner with room left over to charge an array of devices.

What’s more, the EU2200i is one of the most solidly built generators on the market. With a typical lifespan of somewhere between 1000-2000 operating hours, a properly maintained EU2200i should last some 10-20 years.

Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP13000HX

DuroMax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its high output and solid construction, the DuroMax XP13000HX is as reliable as they come.

Specs

  • Rated output: 10,500W
  • Peak output: 13,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
  • Weight: 238 lbs
  • Runtime: 13 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $1,499

Pros

  • Dual-fuel versatility
  • Massive power output
  • Rock-solid construction
  • Wheel kit included

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Very expensive

We like the DuroMax XP1300HX so much that we placed it at the top of our roundup of the best dual-fuel generators. Not only does it produce an enormous amount of power—more than enough to power an entire house—but its dual-fuel versatility allows it to run on both gas and propane. This makes it easier to find fuel sources in a pinch, and when fueled by propane means that it will be quieter and produce fewer emissions. It’s also as solidly built as any machine most humans will ever own.

That solid build does translate into weight—a hefty 238 pounds of it. The wheels do make it easy to move around wheel-barrow-style, but you definitely won’t be bringing it camping. As far as emergency home backup power goes, however, the XXP1300HX is outstanding.

Best budget: WEN 56203i Super Quiet

WEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WEN 56203i Super Quiet offers substantial quality at a low price.

Specs

  • Rated output: 1,700W
  • Peak output: 2,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 1 gallon
  • Weight: 38 lbs
  • Runtime: 10.8 25% rated load
  • Price: $429

Pros

  • Rock-bottom price
  • Quiet
  • Great runtime
  • Super portable

Cons

  • Relatively low power output

At $340, the WEN 56203i Super Quiet is about as budget-friendly as generators get. What makes it stand out is that it offers significantly better performance than every other generator in its class.

Capable of churning out a steady 1,700-2,000W, this generator isn’t going to power your house but it will serve as a decent source of emergency power in a pinch, and it serves as a great camping option. Its campability is accentuated by its quiet performance and outstanding portability. It also sips fuel efficiently, delivering a great runtime for its fuel capacity.

What to consider when buying inverter generators

There are a lot of inverter generators out there, but they tend to come with lofty price tags. It requires hardware to actually invert the current, which allows it to avoid voltage spikes that could harm devices plugged into it. Many subpar brands simply don’t offer the build quality that you would expect from such a high-value piece of equipment, while others fall short of delivering the performance you need for reliable power. To make a smart buy, here are a few important considerations to keep in mind so that you can be sure of getting the best inverter generator for the money:

Power output

If a generator doesn’t produce enough power to meet your needs, what good is it? Generators are rated by the number of watts they can produce in any given moment, which is often accompanied by a peak performance rating that represents the maximum power they can deliver in short bursts. To determine how much juice you need, add up the operating wattage for all the devices and appliances you expect to power, then find a generator that delivers accordingly. The average 5000-7500W generator, for example, will generally provide enough power for most of the key items in your home, including the fridge, TV, lighting, well pump, and a smattering of small devices.

Runtime

If you expect to be using your inverter generator for long periods at a time—if you live somewhere with frequent or prolonged power outages, for example, or if you’ll be needing off-grid power all day long—you don’t want to be refueling it again and again. Runtimes are determined by how large a generator’s fuel tank is combined with its operating efficiency. Most inverter generators have runtimes of roughly 5-6 hours, though a few highly efficient models can stretch that to nearly a full day.

Fuel type

While the majority of inverter generators run on gasoline, many also run on propane or natural gas, and a few can even be powered by the sun. Gas generators offers the most power output but it’s also the loudest and causes the most emissions. Propane and natural gas shave off a bit of the output in favor of quieter, cleaner operations. Solar generators are emission-free and just shy of silent, but they can only be recharged if the sun is out (or a wall/car socket is handy).

Size and weight

Inverter generators come in a variety of sizes and weights, resulting in varying degrees of portability. Some are large and essentially immobile, which means they’re designed to be set in place and forgotten about until the need arises. Others are more portable thanks to reduced size, weight, or the addition of handles and wheels.

Reliability

A generator doesn’t do much good if it breaks down when you need it. Reliable craftsmanship is essential, but it can be difficult to determine at a glance or by reading a spec sheet. We’ve verified the reliability of our picks via reviews from owners who have used specific models over time.

FAQs

Q: What is best, an inverter or a generator?

An inverter is a component in an inverter generator that converts AC power into DC power and then “inverts” it back into cleaner AC power. That might sound technical but the important thing is that it results in power that is “safer” for sensitive devices like laptops or smartphones, and it throttles the engine to match your actual power demands, which improves a generator’s efficiency.

Q: What is the highest-watt inverter generator?

While industrial-grade inverter generators can get quite large, the highest wattage you’ll find at the consumer level is about 15,000-17,500. That’s wildly unnecessary for the typical user. The largest generator we’ve suggested is the DuroMax XP13000HX, which can produce up to 13,000 watts—more than enough for the average home.

Q: What is the most reliable inverter generator?

All of the generators we’ve recommended above offer outstanding reliability. In terms of lifespan, most will last upwards of 10 years with proper maintenance.

Q: Is an inverter generator good for home use?

Absolutely. The “clean” power produced by an inverter generator ensures that all your electronics can operate safely. As long as you buy a model that offers the appropriate level of power for your needs, it is perfectly suited for the task.

Q: How big of an inverter generator do I need?

That depends on how you intend to use it. To power the majority of your home—including a fridge, lights, TV, and a smattering of other small appliances and devices—you’ll want at least 4,000W. If you’ll be camping and powering an RV, shoot for at least 1,800 watts as most RV air conditions require around 1,500W and you’ll want a little leftover for lights and charging your phone.

Final thoughts on the best inverter generators

If you live in an area where power cuts are frequent, an inverter generator will be a game-changer. It will ensure that you have plenty of reliable power while everyone else on the block sits in the dark. And if you’re looking to power an RV, an inverter generator will keep you living in comfort while off the grid. While the best inverter generators are no small investment, one will pay for itself in the long run in terms of comfort and peace of mind.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best fire pit tables in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fire-pit-tables/ Tue, 12 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606189
The best fire pit tables of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Warm up your backyard get-togethers with the best fire pit tables, which are aesthetically pleasing and highly functional.

The post The best fire pit tables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best fire pit tables of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Walsunny Fire Pits 45 inch Gas Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. Walsunny Fire Pits 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

A reasonable price, sharp look, and inclusion of a windscreen make this the best choice.

Best splurge EAST OAK 57 Inch Gas Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. EAST OAK 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

Get the most power and greatest heat coverage.

Best value EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

A budget-friendly, more portable pick when you’re short on space.

If backyard aesthetics and extending how long you can use your outdoor space into late fall and early spring evenings are important to you, a fire pit table is an ideal solution. These gas-powered fire pits require little maintenance, are pleasing to the eye, and generate a lot of heat. What separates them from a traditional fire pit is that they have an edge around their rim—which you can use to store a drink, the makings of s’mores, etc.—and can complement your patio furniture and more aesthetically pleasing outdoor storage. The best part is that you can operate them without knowing how to start a fire and can control their intensity with the twist of a knob. The best fire pit tables will become the focal point of your patio or backyard conversation pit and provide utility for years to come.

The best fire pit tables: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Walsunny 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table

Walsunny

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22 x 45 x 24.5 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 88 pounds
  • BTU: 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units)

Pros

  • Long width
  • Includes glass windshield
  • Easy lift lid

Cons

  • Heavy

Walsunny’s 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table is an excellent choice for anyone looking to spruce up their backyard this year. It’s long, which means more people can fit around it than a typical fire pit, and the inclusion of a glass windshield means you won’t have to worry about flames licking the food and drinks you put around its edges. That shield also ensures you’ll get a consistent flame rather than one that shrinks whenever there’s a breeze.

This gas-powered fire table has a hidden door that keeps its propane tank out of people’s sight line, and its easy lift cover makes setting it up easier. A cover fits flush on top of the fire table’s pit, and you can lift it up its handle with one hand. This design means you can also use the fire pit table as a regular table while the sun is out. Walsunny says its fire pit table is compatible with a 20-pound tank, which should last you several hours-long sessions before needing to be replaced. The only factor you should consider when getting this fire pit table is its 88-pound weight, which means you’ll want to figure out where to keep it semi-permanently before it arrives. A portable fire pit this is not. If its heft isn’t an issue, there’s no reason to pass up on this fire pit table, given its performance, smart design, and reasonable price.

Best splurge: EAST OAK 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 57 x 21.1 x 25.6 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 50.5 pounds
  • BTU: 60,000 BTU

Pros

  • Long width
  • High maximum heat
  • Most space around the rim

Cons

  • Price
  • Windguard not included

EAST OAK’s 57 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table may be pricy, but it’s also the most powerful and longest model we recommend. This means it can provide the most heat to the most people, with an even wider lip around the rim for food and drinks. It also shares some of our favorite design elements with the best overall pick. The fire pit table’s cover sits flush with its body, which means it can be used as a table when the flames aren’t ignited. A hidden door keeps the propane tank out of sight, and the table’s control knob is color-coordinated with its base, which is aesthetically pleasing. EAST OAK says its fire pit table is compatible with 20-pound propane tanks.

If power is what you’re after, EAST OAK’s fire pit table has nearly 20% more BTU than our other recommendations. Its aluminum frame can handle the heat without an issue. Our only complaint with this fire pit table is that it doesn’t come with a windshield, which is unfortunate given its high price. If you’d like this fire pit to be slightly narrower, EAST OAK just released a new model to fit your needs.

Best value: EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28 x 28 x 25 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 56
  • BTU: 50,000 BTU

Pros

  • Compact size
  • Competitive BTU with larger models
  • Price

Cons

  • Heats a smaller area

If your backyard is tiny, you can still get a fire pit table that can suit your space. This square-shaped model from EAST OAK may not be able to heat as large of an area as our wider recommendations, but it’s still powerful enough to keep three people or so very toasty. Despite its smaller size, EAST OAK crammed all the essential features, from a powerful heating system to a hidden door that keeps your propane tank out of sight. The company says you can use this fire pit table with a 20-pound propane tank, which is on par with the other models we recommend.

EAST OAK didn’t include a windshield with this fire pit table, but that’s reasonable given its sub-$200 price. We’re pleased that the company designed the table with an all-aluminum frame, which will handle exposure to heat for extended periods. If you need a durable, relatively portable fire pit table for your backyard and are on a budget, this is the one to get.

Here are other fire pit tables that can heat up gatherings:

FAQs

Q: Is glass or rock better for a fire pit?

There’s no functional difference between rock and glass fire pits; it all depends on your aesthetic preference.

Q: Do fire pit tables give off much heat?

Yes. A fire pit table will give off roughly as much heat as a similarly sized fire pit as they work the same way.

Q: What is the best material to burn in a fire pit?

Fire pit tables run on propane, so you won’t need to add more fuel. However, you must ensure the propane tank attached to the table is sufficiently filled. (We’re sure that, like us, you also have a propane grill, so keep multiple tanks on hand at any time.)

Q: Is a round or square fire pit table better?

This comes down to whichever shape suits your preferences. Round and square tables work similarly if their power level is the same.

Q: How much does a fire pit table cost?

This depends on its size and BTU output. Our recommendations cost between $169 and $539.

Final thoughts on the best fire pit tables

A fire pit table will add a significant ambiance to your outdoor space while serving several vital functions. When it’s not on, using the table while hosting will give you ample space for a multicourse meal with drinks. Once the meal ends, you can ignite the fire pit to provide illumination and heat deep into the night. The benefit of using a fire pit table over a typical fire pit is that you don’t have to worry about waiting for it to fully extinguish or cleaning out an ash pan at the end of the night (though you should always know where your fire extinguisher is, just in case). You also don’t have to worry about keeping wood dry when it rains, which can be a hassle in many parts of the country. A fire pit table offers all the benefits of a fire pit in a simpler-to-use, nicer-to-look-at package.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fire pit tables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/blink-outdoor-security-cameras-amazon-deal/ Tue, 12 Mar 2024 17:55:30 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606254
A Blink outdoor camera on a fence
Blink

This deal will be gone in the blink of an eye if you wait.

The post Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Blink outdoor camera on a fence
Blink

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The tax return has hit your bank account, you just got a merit increase from your job, and maybe you even have some leftover cash from your bonus. We currently live in Trying Times, and the smart adult thing to do is put some of that cash away—emphasis on some. But what will you do with some of your sums? We recommend an outdoor security system from Blink that’s currently 50% off. You’ll save money, protect your home, and catch porch pirates in the act. Wins all around, if you ask us.

Blink

SEE IT

These wire-free smart security cameras have a two-year battery life and can be controlled via the Blink app. Each camera produces 1080p live video, crisp-two-way audio, and even infrared night vision for keeping an eye on this when the sun sets. A Blink subscription plan lets you access person detection and cloud storage. The kit comes with five Outdoor 4 cameras, a Sync 2 Module, 10 AA batteries, five mounting kits, one USB cable, and one power adapter.

If you only want one Blink camera, the one-camera system is 35% off, down to $64.99 from $99.99.

More security camera deals:

The post Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Grab these deep discounts on GE CYNC lighting: Bulbs, strips, dimmers, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/ge-cync-lighting-amazon-deal-spring-2024/ Mon, 11 Mar 2024 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606087
GE CYNC light bulbs arranged on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

GE's excellent smart lighting doesn't require an extra hardware bridge to take voice commands.

The post Grab these deep discounts on GE CYNC lighting: Bulbs, strips, dimmers, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
GE CYNC light bulbs arranged on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It was dark when I woke up this morning. That’s not some metaphor for how crummy Daylight Savings Time makes me feel. It was still night when my alarm went off. Luckily, good lighting can make the transition into daytime a lot more comfortable. Right now, Amazon has GE CYNC lighting for up to half-off. That includes bulbs, strips, and even dimmer switches if you want to upgrade your entire system. We’re big fans of the GE smart light bulbs and smart light switches, so we’re glad to see them on sale.

GE CYNC Smart LED Light Bulbs, Soft White, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi 2 Pack $16.30 (was $24.99)

Some smart lights require an extra hardware hub in order to work at all, but these CYNC bulbs connect directly and take orders from an app or a voice assistant like Alexa. In fact, Amazon can link the bulbs to your Alexa before shipping them so they’ll arrive ready to take your commands. That’s pretty handy. They’re soft white, so they provide a nice glow instead of a blinding glare. This is as cheap as we have seen this year.

More GE CYNC lighting deals

The post Grab these deep discounts on GE CYNC lighting: Bulbs, strips, dimmers, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save 30% on an AI-powered Shark robot vacuum at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/shark-robot-ai-vacuum-amazon-2024-deal/ Thu, 08 Feb 2024 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=601935
Shark AV2501 AE on on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Let this deeply discounted robot vacuum clean your floors with pinpoint precision without lifting a finger.

The post Save 30% on an AI-powered Shark robot vacuum at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Shark AV2501 AE on on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Nobody likes cleaning their floors, which is why you should let a robot vacuum do it for you. Shark’s AV2501AR is an AI-powered, self-cleaning, Wi-Fi-enabled, Alexa and Google Assistant-compatible model that’s nearly half off right now at Amazon. It guarantees an even clean by using LiDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors to map out and navigate around the rooms of your home to avoid missing a spot—even corners.

Shark AV2501AE $447.99 (Was $649.99)

Shark

SEE IT

The AV2501AE can be controlled using an iOS and Android app, or by speaking commands using a smart speaker with access to Amazon’s Alexa or the Google Assistant. Either of these methods allows you to schedule or initiate cleanings, change cleaning settings, or ask the vacuum to return to its charging stand. Shark says this robot vacuum can last for up to 120 minutes per charge, and it’ll automatically head back to its charging base when its power runs low. Upon its return, the vacuum will dump the contents of its dirt chamber into a bag within its base, so you have minimal contact with it.

Other robot vacuums that’ll help you clean up your act:

The post Save 30% on an AI-powered Shark robot vacuum at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Upgrade your garage before spring with this 45% discount on a DeWalt cordless drill https://www.popsci.com/gear/dewalt-drill-driver-kit-amazon-deal-2024/ Thu, 11 Jan 2024 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=598212
DeWalt Drill Kit on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Take on your your 2024 DIY projects with a powerful battery-powered drill for an excellent price.

The post Upgrade your garage before spring with this 45% discount on a DeWalt cordless drill appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
DeWalt Drill Kit on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

If those 2023 home improvement projects are still hanging around, it’s time to get to work. The right tools will help and this $80 discount on DeWalt’s 20V Max Cordless Drill Driver Kit at Amazon is a great place to start. The kit includes DeWalt’s drill, one battery, a battery charger, and a carrying case. This kit doesn’t come with any bits, so you’ll want to pick on a 45-piece set for just under $18.

DeWalt 20V Max Cordless Drill Driver Kit $99 (Was $179)

DeWalt

SEE IT

A big part of this drill’s appeal is its raw power. Its 300-watt motor allows the drill to spin at up to 1,500 RPM. That’s more than enough power to drive a screw through thick pieces of wood or some metal. An LED light automatically turns on when you use the drill, which makes it easier to see what you’re doing in dim spaces like basements, closets, or attics. Even the drill’s handle has been engineered to fit comfortably in the hand for as long as possible.

More delightful DeWalt deals:

The post Upgrade your garage before spring with this 45% discount on a DeWalt cordless drill appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dog blankets to keep your pooch comfortable in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dog-blankets/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=605530
A lineup of the best dog blankets cut into four vertical panels
Amanda Reed

A dog blanket can keep your pup feeling safe, cozy, and warm.

The post The best dog blankets to keep your pooch comfortable in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best dog blankets cut into four vertical panels
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A tan PetAmi waterproof throw blanket for dogs on a plain background. PetAmi Waterproof Dog Blanket
SEE IT

Washable, soft, and tear-resistant.

Best waterproof A dog laying on a grey Furhaven waterproof throw blanket for dogs that's on a couch. Furhaven Waterproof Throw Blanket for Dogs
SEE IT

A waterproof blanket that looks like one you already own.

Best budget A gray fleece and white Sherpa Bedsure dog blanket on a plain background. Bedsure Waterproof Dog Blanket
SEE IT

This blanket comes in plenty of sizes at a great price.

Your house probably has a “dog blanket” that didn’t start that way. Your pooch probably stole your favorite blanket, and you let them have it because you’re a big softy. Two things can be true at once: You can love Fido with all your heart and soul and want your human blanket to remain with the humans. Enter the dog blanket. Unlike a blanket you use for lounging around, dog blankets are made with sharp teeth, nails, and messes in mind. They’re waterproof, incredibly durable, and, most importantly, comfortable for your pup. Most dog blankets look identical to the ones you use at the foot of your bed or on the edge of your sofa. And no one is wiser if it gets ruined beyond repair. Simply repurchase and hope your dog has a bad enough memory. Everyone—you, your dog, and your couch—wins when using one of the best dog blankets.

How we chose the best dog blankets

Two bizarre resume points make me qualified to write about dog blankets. My dad’s dog, Misty, is an 80-pound Great Pyrenees-Newfounland mix that loves to shed. I also write about human blankets and am a cat owner—I know what materials stick to fur, what weaves get snagged in claws, and I recognize the washing machine’s importance. I also conducted heavy research and looked at reviews and recommendations to narrow our picks.

The best dog blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re using it on top of your dog’s bed or the couch, a dog blanket makes everything cozier than before. One of our picks should bring your dog joy and keep your upholstery intact.

Best overall: PetAmi Waterproof Dog Blanket

PetAmi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 29×40-60×80 inches
  • Machine washable?: Yes
  • Materials: Fleece polyester

Pros

  • Lots of sizes for all pets
  • Easy to clean
  • The material stays soft after washing

Cons

  • Makes a crinkle sound due to the waterproof membrane

If there’s one thing a pet loves, it’s something that’s soft, from chew toys to your own comfortable bed. This fleece blanket from PetAmi, with its double-sided fleece and internal waterproof membrane, is a step up from the regular blanket you’re currently using. It comes in all sorts of colors and sizes, meaning you can get a smaller one for the dog bed and a larger one for the couch. The price ranges from $18-$45 depending on size, meaning pet-proofing your house won’t completely drain your wallet.

An internal waterproof membrane prevents accidents from reaching the couch cushion, and a stain-resistant fabric stops muddy paws from overstaying their welcome. However, it sounds a little crinkly when folding or handling. We’d rather deal with a crinkle than a pee-stained couch, so we consider this a very minor concession.

Best splurge: PupProtector Waterproof Throw

PupProtector

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 60×50 inches
  • Machine washable?: Yes
  • Materials: Faux fur, microsuede

Pros

  • Stylish
  • Fluffy and soft
  • Protects furniture

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Only comes in two sizes

If you have a larger budget and want your dog blanket to blend with your decor, the PupProtector Waterproof Throw is your pick. To clean, simply throw it in the wash and dry on low heat. Much like the PetAmi blanket, this one also has an internal waterproof lining to stop liquids from seeping through. We’re partial to the cow print, the print du jour on social media. It is expensive and only comes in two sizes—a 60×50-inch Original size and an 80×62-inch Large version—which isn’t ideal if you’re working on a budget or are shopping for a small dog.

Best cooling: PetFusion Premium Cat and Dog Cooling Blanket

PetFusion

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 27×31-46-60 inches
  • Machine washable?: Yes
  • Materials: PE fabric, nylon

Pros

  • Available in four sizes
  • Machine washable
  • Good for other animals

Cons

  • Loses cooling abilities in the sunlight
  • Not waterproof

Summers are particularly hard for pups: They don’t sweat like humans do and rely on panting to keep themselves cool. Consider a cooling blanket if your dog is having difficulty cooling down after a warm walk or when coming in from outside. This one from PetFusion is cold to the touch and can help your dog get back to baseline faster. If accidents are top-of-mind, you might want to layer this blanket with another on this list, as it’s not waterproof. Of course, this blanket loses its effectiveness if placed in direct sunlight. Keep your dog chill by keeping this blanket in the shade or away from the window. (And while you’re at it, consider investing in a tower fan.)

Best waterproof: Furhaven Waterproof Throw Blanket

Furhaven

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 40×30-60×50 inches
  • Machine washable?: Yes
  • Materials: Polyester

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Soft
  • Waterproof

Cons

  • On the thin side

This waterproof dog blanket matches your current decor and doesn’t scream, “I am a waterproof dog blanket,” perfect for pet parents with design in mind. One side features plush, long faux fur, while the other sports a waterproof velvet, combining a soft feel with peace of mind. It’s machine washable and comes in four sizes. It’s also well-priced, meaning you won’t feel bad buying one for the car, couch, pet bed, or chair. However, it’s very thin despite its plushness. That’s not a major dealbreaker if you use it to cover your couch.

Best budget: Bedsure Waterproof Dog Blanket

Bedsure

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 25×35-86×108 inches
  • Machine washable?: Yes
  • Materials: Polyester Sherpa, flannel fleece

Pros

  • Cheap but feels high-quality
  • Comes in all kinds of sizes and colors
  • Waterproof and leakproof

Cons

  • Takes a while to dry

Bedsure makes some of our favorite throw blankets, so it’s no surprise that we’re fans of its waterproof dog blanket that comes in plenty of sizes and colors to match your dog’s vibe and crate situation. We also love the available range of sizes—you can get a small 25×35-inch blanket or a King-size behemoth that can cover your entire bed. A waterproof lining prevents any leaks from seeping through the blanket, and it’s double-sided so your dog can have more than one sensory adventure. It’s machine washable and can be dried at a low temperature, but reviews note it takes a while to dry since it’s a thick blanket. We’d take “Thick and slow to dry” over anything else.

What to consider when buying the best dog blankets

Dog blankets aren’t just for protecting furniture or lining crates. Dogs can nest, and blankets are perfect for their special spot. We all have our favorite things, dogs included. Not everyone loves barking at the mailperson or chasing after squirrels, but to each their own.

Here’s what you should know when picking the perfect dog blanket for your pup:

Material

Most dog blankers are made of synthetic materials like nylon and polyester since they’re easy to clean and don’t hold on to stains. These fabrics can also make all sorts of textures dogs love, like fleece and Sherpa.

Although natural fabrics like wool, cotton, and linen are great for humans, you should probably skip them when choosing a dog blanket. Sharp nails can snag on the weave and tear holes in the fabric, and they easily hold on to stains. Plus, these fabrics are known for their breeziness. The only breeze your dog wants is one they can chase after.

Size

Of course, you and your dog aren’t beholden to any size. If you want to buy your Italian greyhound the largest-sized blanket, we certainly aren’t stopping you. However, we don’t think your St. Bernard would love the smallest size, but stranger things have happened.

Machine washing and waterproofing

These two are a must-have feature if you have a puppy or older dog. The first allows you to clean up accidents easily, such as the messes that happen while potty training or if your canine is experiencing incontinence. The latter stops said accidents and messes from soaking through and getting on your furniture, which is exponentially harder to clean.

FAQs

Q: Do dogs get cold at night?

Yes, dogs can get cold at night, especially if it’s a chilly evening. If you see your dog shaking, shivering, whining, barking, hunching over, and tucking their tail between their legs, they might be too cold. If that’s the case, bring them in for the evening, grab a blanket for them, or consider a dog jacket for walks.

Q: Are electric blankets safe for dogs?

Yes and no. Electric blankets are safe for dogs if they’re made with dogs in mind. Dogs and humans have different body temperatures, meaning something warm for you could be too hot for your pooch. Consider an electric dog blanket if your pup lacks fur/hair or has an incredibly short coat. Otherwise, a plain ol’ dog blanket is perfect.

Q: Do dogs sleep better with a blanket?

Like us, dogs love the comfort and coziness of a blanket. If you don’t like your dog sleeping in bed with you, a blanket fills the need that your sheets cannot. Being swathed in a familiar scent—whether it’s yours or theirs—is another bonus, especially if you bring it along during car rides and visits to the vet to provide a sense of safety and security.

Final thoughts on the best dog blankets

A dog blanket doesn’t just keep your dog warm—it also protects your furniture from claw marks, fur, and the occasional potty incident. They’re stylish, waterproof, soft, and often don’t break the bank. Dog blankets are made with pooches in mind, meaning they’re built to withstand getting dragged around the house or chewed on—your shoes and throw pillows can’t say the same.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dog blankets to keep your pooch comfortable in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best throw blankets of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-throw-blanket/ Thu, 08 Jul 2021 23:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=375677
The best throw blankets will help keep you warm.

The only downside to discovering the best throw blanket? You may never leave your couch again.

The post The best throw blankets of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best throw blankets will help keep you warm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for cold weather The Longhui Blanket is the best throw blanket overall. Longhui Cable Knit Throw Blanket
SEE IT
Best overall Double Stitch by Bedsure Throw Blanket on a blue couch Double Stitch Bedsure Throw Blanket
SEE IT
Best cashmere EP Mode's blankets are the best throw blankets that are cashmere. EP Mode 100% Cashmere Throw Blanket
SEE IT

No matter the temperature outside, sometimes there’s nothing better than curling up with a throw blanket and a good book. Draped over the back of the couch, on your favorite chair, or on the edge of your bed, the best throw blankets keep you warm and cozy all year long. Depending on the season, there are many fabrics to choose from, whether that’s soft fleece and sherpa or lightweight cotton. The most important feature is comfort, so picking a quality fabric is paramount.

In addition to keeping you warm, throw blankets also add a stylish touch to your home ambiance. With so many colors and styles to choose from, there is bound to be one that enhances your room aesthetic. Sit down and get ready to cozy up to our selection of the best throw blankets.

How we selected the best throw blankets

To make the best selections for our list of best throw blankets, we looked at twelve brands and eight products among them. As someone who lives in a New York City apartment without any control over the temperature, I swear by my throw blankets. Not only do I want them to do their job of keeping me warm, but I also want them to look good in my space. Keeping that in mind, the most important features I considered were the fabric, style, and color offerings. 

Fabric was number one on my list, because that will determine how soft, lightweight, and comfortable a throw blanket is and which season the blanket is best suited for. For example, fleece and sherpa blankets are super warm and cozy and are the best option for curling up on the couch during the colder months. During chilly spring and summer nights, cotton blankets are the best option because they are lightweight and breathable. I also considered style and color offerings because you want your blanket to look nice in your home, especially since it’s typically displayed draped over the couch or on the edge of the bed. 

The best throw blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

A comfy blanket is just what you need at the end (or beginning…or middle) of a long, stressful day or just anytime you want to be wrapped in the fabric equivalent of a hug. Here are some of the best.

Best overall: Double Stitch by Bedsure Throw Blanket

Bedsure

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Cool Multi, Warm Multi
  • Dimensions: 50 inches x 60 inches
  • Materials: Cotton

Pros

  • Machine washable 
  • Affordable
  • Durable

Cons

  • Fewer color options
  • Only one size

The Double Stitch by Bedsure features a subtly striking geometric design. With a quality throw blanket, you want something that not only looks good but will also last. The throw blanket is made of 100 percent cotton, and the yarn is specially woven for durability. The versatile, cozy blanket looks at home everywhere from the couch to the patio. There are two color options to choose from. This blanket also meets OEKO-TEX 100 standards for high-quality textiles and using water responsibly.

Best for cold weather: Longhui Cable Knit Throw Blanket

Longhui

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Gray, black, burnt orange, cream, gray blue, ivory, light gray, mustard, navy, sage green
  • Dimensions: 63 inches L x 50 inches W
  • Materials: Acrylic and sherpa

Pros

  • Machine washable and dryer-friendly 
  • Multiple colors to choose from
  • Two sizes to choose from

Cons

  • Two layers are sewn together only at edges

We’ve all heard of sweater weather, but what about sweater-blanket weather? Whatever you call chilly weather, the Longhui Cable Knit Throw Blanket is perfect for it. The top layer of the blanket features a cable-knit design, made of acrylic, offering cozy vibes that are sure to enhance your bed, couch, or favorite reading chair. The bottom layer is made from warm, soft, and fuzzy sherpa fleece. Snuggling under the two layers together feels like putting on your favorite oversize sweater. Speaking of oversize, this blanket is available in two sizes: 63 inches long by 50 inches wide and and 80 inches long by 60 inches wide. The majority of reviewers speak to the quality of this blanket, but a few noted that the size listed is not entirely accurate. Additionally, the two layers are sewn together only at the edges, so they can separate easily. 

Washing and drying your throw blanket can be a headache, but this blanket is both machine washable and dryer-friendly. Reviewers say that the blanket held up well without any pilling or shrinkage after washing it on the gentle cycle and drying on low heat. All in all, this blanket is a great cozy option that won’t compromise the design of your living room or bedroom.

Best heated: Zircon Electric Blanket Heated Throw Flannel 

Zircon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: One
  • Dimensions: 60 inches L x 50 inches W
  • Materials: Sherpa, flannel

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Warm
  • Can help you reduce energy costs

Cons

  • Design not as attactive as some

Think of this as a combo heating pad and throw blanket. An unexpected perk of using a heated blanket? You may lower your electric bill. If you can keep yourself warm under a blankie, you may not need to crank up the heat in your home quite so much. This throw measures 50 inches by 60 inches and features a four-hour automatic shutoff, a 6-foot power cord, and a 3-foot controller cord with remote control, so you won’t get tangled or toasted as you doze. Specs-wise, it’s 110V–120V at 60Hz, and the best part is that it’s machine-washable.

Best lightweight: Loomia Sophie Turkish Cotton Throw Blanket

Loomia

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Cream
  • Dimensions: 85 inches L x 65 inches W
  • Materials: Cotton

Pros

  • Made with 100 percent Turkish cotton
  • Oversize classic design  
  • Natural materials

Cons

  • Only one color offered

For cool nights, when you just need a little extra coverage to keep you warm, the Loomia Sophie Turkish Cotton Throw Blanket could be your go-to blanket. Made with 100 percent Turkish cotton in OEKO-TEX facilities (products have been tested for harmful chemicals), this blanket is soft, lightweight, and, most importantly, breathable. While it’s ideal for those cooler nights in warmer months, it’s heavy enough to keep you cozy moving into fall as well. And if you love to support small businesses, the Loomia is a family-owned company based in South Carolina. 

The Sophie blanket is both versatile and stylish. With a natural cream base, black stripes, and tassels on all sides, this blanket has a traditional yet modern feel with farmhouse vibes, which will complement nearly all decor styles from the living room to the bedroom. At 85 inches long by 65 inches wide, this blanket accommodates couches and full/queen-size beds. It’s hard to find any downsides for this blanket, though it does only come in one color. For now, the cream will have to do.

Best weighted: CottonBlue Weighted Blanket

CottonBlue

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Blush pink, gray, Morocco gray, Morocco navy blue, Morocco pink 
  • Dimensions: 72 inches L x 48 inches W (12 pounds); 72 inches L x 48 inches W (15 pounds); 80 inches L x 60 inches W (20 pounds)
  • Materials: Fleece and sherpa

Pros

  • Offered in multiple weights
  • Comes in several colors
  • Fade- and stain-resistant

Cons

  • Not machine-washable; spot clean or commercial wash

If you’re looking for an upgrade from your current throw blanket, then the CottonBlue Weighted Blanket could be what you need. Available in multiple colors to fit your style and three different weights, there is an option for everyone. CottonBlue offers a great chart so you can select the best weight for you. As a rule of thumb, the blanket should be about 7 percent to 14 percent of your body weight, but they suggest going lighter if you’re unsure. Reviewers find this blanket super warm and soft and say it “feels like a hug.”

This weighted blanket features a five-layer design, with fleece as the top layer, an extra layer of fabric just in case the beads leak, the nontoxic ceramic beads, polyester padding, and sherpa as the bottom layer. To ensure even weight distribution and no bead leakage, the beads are locked into smaller compartments. Both the fleece and sherpa are antistatic, wrinkle-free, and non-fading for long-term use. 

That said, this blanket is tricky to clean in that you can’t just throw it into the wash. The brand suggests either spot cleaning or using a commercial washing machine. Whether you’re curling up in bed or on your couch, this weighted

Best for dogs: Pavilia Waterproof Blanket

Pavilia

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Charcoal, light gray, navy, plaid gray, plaid light gray, plaid navy, plaid red, taupe
  • Dimensions: 80 inches L x 60 inches W and 90 inches L x 90 inches W
  • Materials: Microfiber polyester

Pros

  • Multiple colors to choose from
  • Waterproof
  • Machine washable and dryer-friendly

Cons

  • Sizing inconsistent 

The Pavilia Waterproof Blanket works overtime as your and your pet’s new favorite throw blanket and your couch’s protectant. Before purchasing this blanket, just be sure there’s enough space for both you and your pet on your couch, because your furry pal will rarely want to relinquish their spot. Available in eight colors to accommodate different decor preferences, one side is fleece and the other is sherpa — a pair made in cozy heaven. Made from 100 percent microfiber polyester, the blanket is super warm but won’t be as breathable as blankets made with natural fabrics. 

Pavilia boasts its blanket is designed with a waterproof layer between the fleece and sherpa layers, so should it get wet, moisture won’t leak through. This feature makes it an ideal choice to protect your furniture from accidents or messy pet paws. Many reviewers have tested the blanket and say that it holds up to its waterproof claim, while others are less convinced. This blanket works well for the couch or a full/queen-size bed, but if you do have a queen, it’s just big enough to lay on top.

Best faux fur: Everlasting Comfort Luxury Faux Fur Throw Blanket

Everlasting Comfort

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Arctic blue, black, chocolate, dark red, gray, ivory, navy blue, teal
  • Dimensions: 80 inches L x 60 inches W and 90 inches L x 90 inches W
  • Materials: Microfiber polyester

Pros

  • Extremely comfortable
  • Double-sided
  • Big enough for two

Cons

  • Made from synthetic materials

Thick, long, durable fabric in multiple colors is both pretty and cozy, and hidden stitching makes it nice and tidy. This throw is washer- and tumble-dry-safe, so you can keep it fresh as a daisy. Note that some colors (teal, navy, ivory) are the same on both sides, while others (arctic blue and chocolate) are a solid hue on one side, animal print on the other.

Best cashmere: EP Mode 100% Pure Cashmere Throw Blanket 

EP Mode

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Baby blue, beige border, camel tartan, grey tartan, light heather gray, merlot, neutral checkered, neutral windowpane, rugby tan, whisper white
  • Dimensions: 65 inches L x 50 inches W
  • Materials: Cashmere

Pros

  • Elegant
  • Warm
  • Lots of colors and designs to choose from
  • Made of natural materials

Cons

  • Not machine-washable
  • Can pill

This lightweight cashmere throw blanket is made of 100 percent cashmere and comes in a wide range of colors and patterns to suit a variety of settings. It measures 65 inches by 50 inches, which is enough room for a person to curl up in. It’s worth noting that because cashmere is a natural material, it’s prone to pilling and absolutely cannot be hand- or machine-washed—so, factor in extra costs for dry-cleaning. Using a garment bristle brush will prevent unsightly snags, but this throw is definitely best for people who are gentle with their things and/or don’t mind the occasional pill sighting. 

Best budget: Bedsure Fleece Blanket Throw

Bedsure

SEE IT

Specs

  • Colors: Camel, dark gray, gray, navy, teal, white
  • Dimensions: 60 inches L x 50 inches W
  • Materials: Acrylic

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Offered in multiple colors
  • Nice design

Cons

  • Thin
  • Might wear easily

Cozy up on your couch or your favorite chair with the Bedsure Knit Throw Blanket. The knit design features a diamond pattern with handmade fringes all around the sides. This combination offers a sophisticated yet contemporary design that looks great in the living room or bedroom. Available in five solid colors, there is an option for every palette. Made from acrylic, this blanket is super lightweight, to the point that reviewers were surprised at how warm it actually was. They found it was versatile enough to keep them cozy during summer, spring, and fall.

While this blanket has a lot of great features, some reviewers said that due to its thinness, it ripped and came out a bit fuzzy after being washed. With that said, this blanket is a great option for adding a pop of color into your home and using it seasonally.

What to consider when buying the best throw blankets

Linus was onto something. There’s just something comforting about a soft blankie. But what makes one better than another—never mind the best throw blanket—is subjective. The key is to figure out what “comfort” means to you. 

Season

Throw blankets can be used for every season, but how do you know which style is best for the colder months versus the warmer ones? During fall and winter, you’ll want a heavier blanket to keep you warm. Materials like fleece, sherpa, and wool will do the trick. Lighter blankets are ideal for spring and summer. Breathable materials like cotton will offer just the right amount of warmth on chilly spring and summer nights.

Heat

If you are the person wearing two sweatshirts and socks while everyone else in the room is sweating, consider a heated throw blanket. The best part about it is that you can use the heat option when you want to—or not. So, maybe in winter, you wrap that baby around you as if you were a toasty pig in a blanket, while in summer you forgo the heat option and just enjoy the natural warmth of the material itself.

Weight

If you’ve ever had X-rays done at the dentist and felt an extra sense of relaxation when the hygienist put the leaded apron on your body, you may want to consider a weighted blanket. Though it’s unclear whether the effects of a weighted blanket are psychological or physiological, it hardly matters if you happen to be one of the many people who find the application of weight to be sleep-inducing and anxiety-abating. (Think of the way swaddling calms a newborn. It’s like that.) Weighted blankets, also called gravity blankets, get their heft from plastic- or glass-bead filling. They’ve long been used by practitioners in the neurodivergent community to help restore a sense of calm in children with sensory-overload issues. They can reportedly also help promote better sleep. However, if you have any respiratory or circulatory issues—or you just want to double-check that a weighted blanket is the right choice for you—always ask your doctor first.

Style

This one seems like a no-brainer but bears repeating: If you don’t like synthetic fabrics in your clothing, you won’t like them in your throw blankets. The reverse is also true: If you wear only vegan materials, there’s a throw out there for you too, with no animal products involved. Cashmere throws are the gold standard when it comes to draping yourself in luxury, and options abound in this soft wool. They’ll cost you a little more, of course, but there are many good choices out there that won’t break the bank. If you’re interested in spending nearly two grand on a blankie, there are options for you too.

Price

When purchasing a throw blanket, consider your budget. You don’t have to empty your wallet to get a good one, but it’s a good idea to think about longevity, materials, and style. If you’re looking for a throw blanket to use for one season, you don’t have to spend much, but if you’re hoping to use the same blanket season after season, you might want to consider one that is a bit higher in quality.

FAQs

Q: What is the best material for a throw blanket? 

“Best” is entirely subjective, and the answer depends on your needs and lifestyle. If you have active kids or pets, or you’re just not particularly precious with your belongings, pick a hardy microfiber that can take a licking. If you’re more about the aesthetics and or like to wrap yourself in a pretty throw and sit as still as a mummy or instantly fall asleep, consider upgrading from a basic wool throw blanket to something like cashmere, which is regal but also delicate. One undeniably premium pick, however, is a stylish Brooklinen throw blanket, available in a variety of eco-friendly materials (baby alpaca, wool, lambswool, cashmere, and lambswool) that will keep you warm by the fire or when you’re basking in the warm glow of Netflix.

Q: What is the difference between a throw and a blanket? 

The difference between a throw and a blanket is in the eye of the beholder! All throws are blankets, but not all blankets are throws—did that clear things up? Here’s the easiest way to tell the difference: If the item of which you speak is something that spends most of its day atop your bed, covers the entire bed, and you climb under it at night, it’s probably a blanket (or a comforter or a duvet). If it’s the kind of thing you fold up and place over a chair or couch for decoration when it’s not in use and then casually drape over yourself when you are settling in for a night of TV bingeing, it’s more likely a throw. The good news? It doesn’t really matter what you call them as long as you pick one you like. 

Q: How many blankets should you sleep with? 

A better question: How many blankets do you want to sleep with? If you like the feel of a weighted blanket but either don’t want to invest in one or can’t find an option that’s the proper weight, consider layering multiple blankets to mimic the feeling of having calming weight on top of you. Otherwise, even if you’re a cold sleeper, one blanket—depending of course on other factors, like how cool or drafty your home is—should suffice. Once you get settled, the blanket will trap hot air underneath and warm you up. Ever notice how sometimes when you get into bed it’s frigid, and then only a few minutes later you’re just right? Or the opposite: You feel great when you climb under the blankets, then suddenly you’re sweating? It’s a Goldilocks proposition: Trial and error is the only way to figure out how many blankets are the right number for you and your best night’s sleep. 

The final word on choosing the best throw blankets

Throw blankets are like pizza: Even if they’re cheap, they’re still pretty good. The best throw blankets use quality materials, enhance your home decor, and, most importantly, are comfortable and keep you warm. Our five selections do just that and cover a range of style, necessities, and fabrics. After choosing your perfect blanket, you’re just one throw away from a cozy night in.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best throw blankets of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best air purifiers for smoke in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-air-purifiers-for-smoke/ Fri, 01 Mar 2024 21:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=605154
The best air purifiers for smoke on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Clear out the haze and keep fabrics and lungs happy and healthy with an air purifier that effectively filters smoke.

The post The best air purifiers for smoke in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best air purifiers for smoke on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Levoit Core 600S on a plain white background. Levoit Core 600S Smart Air Purifier
SEE IT

Reasonably priced, smart, and tied for the highest CADR, the Levoit Core 600S easily takes the crown.

Best for tight spaces Levoit EverestAir Smart Air Purifier on a plain white background. Levoit EverestAir Smart Air Purifier
SEE IT

The vent angles can adjust from 45 to 90 degrees, and the slim design can fit almost anywhere.

Best Wall-Mountable Rabbit A3 Air Purifier on a plain white background. Rabbit A3 Air Purifier
SEE IT

If you need to save floor space, the Rabbit A3 can be mounted on the wall.

Indoor air quality is negatively impacted by smoke, which is why an air purifier for smoke is so important. According to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), wildfire smoke can make indoor air unhealthy to breathe. And the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) warns that cigarette smoke harms almost every organ in the body and is the leading cause of preventable death in the U.S., with secondhand smoke from burning tobacco products also dangerous and able to cause disease. And the agency warns that even the psychoactive effects of secondhand marijuana smoke can be experienced by those nearby.

And then, there’s the smoke from burnt food and other temporary household activities. “Cooking is one of the most important pollutant-generating activities at home, and it can generate a very high level of PM2.5 and volatile organic compounds [VOCs] in a very short period of time,” Dr. Jie Zhao, head of Delos Labs at Delos, tells PopSci. While he believes an externally connected range hood can help, Zhao says pollutants can still linger in the home for hours. “So, if you cook regularly, I definitely recommend having an air purifier in your kitchen/living room area,” he advises, adding that you’ll be surprised to see how dirty the filter will get if you use the air purifier for six months.  

An air purifier is not a magic bullet for counteracting smoke; however, one of the best air purifiers for smoke can help to substantially neutralize the effects of smoke over a period of time. “Units that combine HEPA filters along with activated carbon filters can filter smoke particles, VOCs, and odors,” says Dr. John McKeon, CEO of Allergy Standards. And since stand-alone air purifiers are designed to work in an enclosed space, he explains that choosing an appropriately sized air purifier with enough clean air delivery rate (CADR) for the room is important. “You may want to focus on the use of air purifiers in the most-occupied rooms in your home; this will be more effective than running an air purifier with internal doors open and reducing the overall impact.” The best air purifiers for smoke can make a significant difference in the air quality of your home.

How we chose the best air purifiers for smoke

We conducted extensive research, reached out to experts, and did plenty of first-hand testing to compile this list of the best air purifiers for smoke. With smoking neighbors next to our primary tester (yours truly), there are always new air purifiers for homes in play to determine which are most effective at combating secondhand and thirdhand smoke (that’s the residual smoke that gets trapped in carpets, curtains, bedding, clothing, and on walls and floors). Every selection on this list has been tested. We also considered peer recommendations and consumer reviews, clean air delivery rate (CADR), and recommended room sizes.

The best air purifiers for smoke: Reviews & Recommendations

We usually have some variation of a best value/best budget and other categories on our list. However, when talking about removing harmful smoke from the air, we’re more concerned with identifying the best air purifiers than coming up with catchy titles or where to cut corners. A budget air purifier can save you money, and some may do well when you’re trying to remove the smell of your gym shoes. Also, a small air purifier may clean your room … eventually. But when you’re trying to remove smoke—something that can negatively impact your health and the health of your family members—you need to do it quickly, so we’re laser-focused on presenting you with the very best room air purifiers to achieve that objective.

Best overall: Levoit Core 600S Smart Air Purifier     

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.x 3 x 12.3 x 23.6 inches
  • Weight: 13.7 lbs.
  • Recommended coverage area: 635 square feet
  • CADR: 410
  • Noise level: 26-55 dB

Pros

  • Among the highest clean air delivery rate (CADR)
  • Auto adjusts
  • App provides control via smartphone
  • Captures particles as small as 0.3 microns
  • Compatible with Alexa and Google Assistant
  • Lightweight
  • Handle for easy transport
  • 3-stage filtration system

Cons

  • Rather tricky to take the top off

The Levoit Core 600S Smart Air Purifier is our best overall choice if you’re looking for an air purifier to handle smoke. It’s a lightweight appliance that is easy to use. The three-stage filtration system includes a pre-filter to capture large particles like dust, hair, pet fur, and lint. Inside of that is the H13 True HEPA filter. It can capture 99.7% of tiny particles as small as 0.3 microns. This allows the filter to trap smoke particles, as well as dust and other allergens like pollen and pet dander. Inside the HEPA filter is the activated carbon filter, which captures the odors caused by smoking. I’ve found that it does a great job of helping to remove the foul smells caused by secondhand tobacco products and those occasional times popcorn burns.

The air purifier has a clean air delivery rate (CADR) of 410 cfm (cubic feet per minute). It can change the air five times an hour in a closed room that’s 635 square feet. There’s also an auto mode, which we tended to use most of the time. When it detects contaminants in the air, the fan speed automatically increases (there are four speeds) to clean the room, depending on the air quality.

The digital display on the top includes icons for on/off, fan speed, and auto mode. Other icons put the air purifier in sleep mode (which is quieter than the low mode), turn the light display on or off—or lock it (which is handy if you have kids or pets in your home), or set the timer for anywhere from 1 to 12 hours. When the air filter needs to be changed, there’s also an indicator for that. The air purifier connects to your Wi-Fi router to use the VeSync app. We didn’t use the app since it’s easier to just tap the icons on the display. However, if you download the app and create an account, you can change the settings, view air quality updates, and create schedules for when you want the air purifier to start or stop.

The digital display also serves another purpose. The color-coded air quality indicator rings are blue when the air quality is very good, green when it’s good, orange when the air is moderate, or red when it’s bad. Inside the rings is the PM2.5 display, which reveals when the air purifier detects particulate matter 2.5 microns or less. If the number reaches 115, the air has reached an unhealthy level.

The only downside to the Levoit Core 600S, and it’s not a big deal, is that unlike some air purifiers, which have an easy filter release system that’s merely pulling a panel forward, with this one, we had to twist the top half off—and usually this entails sitting in a chair to grasp the bottom half between legs to create enough resistance. Fortunately, the filter only needs to be changed every 6 to 12 months, depending on usage (although the pre-filter needs to be vacuumed every 2 to 4 weeks). Otherwise, it’s a pretty perfect air purifier. 

Runner-up: Blueair Blue Pure 211i Max Air Purifier  

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22.7 x 14.4 x 14.4 inches
  • Weight: 16.2 lbs
  • Recommended coverage area: 635 square feet
  • CADR: 410
  • Noise level: 23 -53 dB

Pros

  • Among the highest CADR
  • Wi-Fi connectivity
  • LED touch screen
  • Voice control
  • Stylish color choices for fabric pre-filter

Cons

  • No handles
  • Can get loud on highest setting

Actually, it was a toss-up between this and the Levoit Core 600S Smart Air Purifier for the best overall choice. The latter won because it’s less expensive, not as bulky, and has a handle. Otherwise, the Blueair Blue Pure 211i Max has many of the same features. It also has a feature that the Levoit Core 600S doesn’t have: swappable cloth filters. The appliance comes with a Stockholm Fog (grey) washable pre-filter, which is great if you dislike most air purifiers’ sterile-white color. However, you can also purchase an additional pre-filter at a nominal cost ($12.99) in three other colors: Limestone, Sand, and Moss.

The air purifier can clean 635 sq. ft. in just 12.5 minutes and 1,524 sq. ft. in 30 minutes. It has four fan speeds, in addition to a night mode that also dims the lights. The auto mode adjusts the fan speed depending on indoor air quality, and it’s our default mode. The digital panel includes icons for turning the air purifier on and off, fan speed, child lock, auto mode, and night mode. There are also indicators for the filter replacement light and to show if the Wi-Fi is connected. The PM values (PM 10, PM 2.5, and PM 1) are also shown on the display, and these numbers identify the size of pollution invading my space. 

We prefer the large color-coded rings (visible across the room and from any direction) found on some air purifiers to the tiny light (around 1 inch) on the Blueair Pure Pure 211i Max. But the light turns blue for excellent, green for good, yellow for moderate, orange for polluted, and red for very polluted air. The filtration system consists of the fabric pre-filter to catch large particles, the main HEPA filter for pollen, pet dander, and other allergens, and also the activated carbon layer for smoking, cooking, and other odors.

Connecting to the app lets you remotely view the current air status and control the air purifier. Filters last from 6 to 9 months, depending on usage. Although the noise level is rated between 23 and 53dB, when it’s on the highest setting, this is one of the loudest air purifiers we’ve tested.

Best filter change system: Oransi Mod Air Purifier

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14 x 25 x 14 inches
  • Weight: 23 lbs.
  • Recommended coverage area: 524 to 1,268 square feet
  • CADR: 363
  • Noise level: 28 – 54dB

Pros

  • Touchless filter removal
  • Long-lasting filter
  • Interesting design

Cons

  • Big and heavy

Right off the bat, we were impressed with the design of the Oransi Mod Air Purifier. It’s one of those items that people walk into the house and ask, “What’s that?” because, at first glance, it doesn’t look like an air purifier. And, although orange isn’t a favorite color, the orange handle against the gray appliance looks rather stylish. Another great feature is easy-to-change filters.

Wait—did we say easy to change? Actually, it’s rather tedious to turn the 23-pound air purifier upside down and then turn the base on the bottom to the open position. It’s like trying to open a safe with a submarine-style door. However, the process is quite simple after taking the metal base off. Merely grab the air purifier by the handle to remove it and toss the entire contraption into the garbage, so hands don’t have to get dirty. Then, merely insert the new air purifier, turn the base until it locks, and flip the air purifier upright again. And you only need to do this once a year since the HEPA pleated filter and activated charcoal filter combo lasts for a year. Okay, ours lasted about 9 or 10 months before I needed to replace it, but we’re not complaining because air purifier filters work hard.

Compared to other types of air purifiers with washable pre-filters and/or filters that need to be vacuumed every few weeks, this is a much more hygienic and convenient process. Now, we’ll still take a Swiffer floor cloth and wipe the gray fabric on the outside of the air purifier every few weeks, but that’s a lot easier than disassembling the appliance.

In a 524 sq. ft room, the Oransi Mod can change the air five times in an hour, and it can clean a 1,268 sq. ft. room two times in an hour. This cool glass interface is on top, so you can just slide a finger around the fan dial to increase or decrease the fan’s output. There are 12 fan speeds (picture a speedometer), and it’s almost fun to make adjustments. The glass display also includes the on/off icon, and the filter replacement icon—which has a progress arc to let you know how much time is left on the filter (for example, when it’s at the halfway mark, we know we’ve used up 50 percent of the filter). We greatly prefer this to a replacement filter light just popping on unexpectedly.

Best for tight spaces: Levoit EverestAir Smart Air Purifier 

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18.9 x 8.5 x 23.2 inches
  • Weight: 20 lbs
  • Recommended coverage area: 558 – 2,790 square feet
  • CADR: 360
  • Noise level: 24 – 56dB

Pros

  • Smartphone control
  • Voice control
  • Laser dust sensor
  • Long-lasting filter

Cons

  • None that I could find

The Levoit Everest Air is a versatile air purifier with a slim design that allows it to fit in tight spaces or flush against the wall. Admittedly, you’ll get the best performance when an air purifier is at least a few feet away from anything else. However, you might not always have that option. Also, the slim shape makes it easier to move it completely out of the way when not in use—although its stylish, modern design isn’t something you’d likely want to hide. And although it’s not heavy, we appreciate the wheels, which make transporting it even easier. 

Another unique feature is the ability to adjust the vent angles. You can select 45, 60, 75, and 90 degrees for the angle choice using the digital display on the top of the air purifier. In a 160 sq. ft. room, the Levoit Everest Air can remove smoke in 4 minutes. In a 275 sq. ft. room, it takes roughly 6 minutes. A 380 sq. ft. room takes about 8 minutes, and a 558 sq. ft. room can be cleared in 12 minutes. The air purifier has a three-channel laser duster on the side (so be sure not to block it), which scans for airborne particles and adjusts the fan speed when in auto mode.

Air quality readings on the display (PM 1.0, PM2.5, PM10) and color-coded indicator colors—blue for very good, green for good, orange for moderate, and red for bad—take the guesswork out of controlling the appliance. The fan speeds, timer, and sleep features, as well as air info selections, are on the panel as well. However, there’s an option to control the air purifier through the VeSync app on your phone or use voice control (Alexa or Google Assistant). The filter system consists of a pre-filter and a main filter to trap smoke, dust, and pollen, combined with an activated carbon filter to neutralize smoke and other odors. The pre-filter is washable and should be cleaned every 2 to 4 weeks, while the filter combo pack can last approximately 12 to 15 months, depending on use.

Best design: Alen BreathSmart 75i Purifier  

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 27 x 18.5 x 11.5 inches
  • Weight: 27 lbs
  • Recommended coverage area: 1300 square feet
  • CADR: 350
  • Noise level: 25 – 49dBa

Pros

  • Cleans large rooms quickly
  • Relatively quiet at high speeds
  • Swappable panels
  • Variety of filter types
  • Good, halfway, and replace filter indicator

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

We admit that we’re partial to the Alen BreathSmart 75i Air Purifier because it was the first high-quality air purifier we tested (way back in Fall 2020), and it continues to impress with its performance. The air purifier shipped with a graphite front panel, and later, a separately purchased ( and now discontinued) red panel was added. Other designer panel choices are white, espresso, maple, rosewood, and weathered gray. The ability to swap out panels (for $59) allows the air purifier to blend in with any home design/décor aesthetic.

Over the years, we’ve also tried the various Alen H13 HEPA filters. The Fresh filter works best for both wildfire smoke and secondhand smoke. However, the company also makes a Pure filter for dust and allergens, and an Odor filter with an odor neutralizer.

The air purifier is rather heavy, but it does have a handle on the back and we’ve moved the BreathSmart 75i all around the home. It’s been in the bedroom, open-concept living area, and guest bedroom. And the air purifier performs well in every space to quickly and quietly remove smoke while looking good in the process. 

There’s a pre-filter that needs to be vacuumed every few weeks. Otherwise, the actual filter can last from 12 to 15 months, depending on usage. The filtration system is easy to access—just grab the magnetic panel on either side and gently pull forward to access the filter box. No laying the air purifier on its side or turning it outside down.

The digital panel on the top includes the power button, five speed selections, as well as the auto function, Wi-Fi indicator, child lock, and light setting. The color-coded ring lets me know at a glance if the air is excellent, good, average, bad, or poor. There’s also an optional ionizer feature that never gets turned on. The filter indicator has three stages (good, halfway, replace), which help you gauge the filter’s life. The controls—which consist primarily of words instead of icons—are simple and easy to read. Usually, we don’t let guests tinker with the air purifiers, but we trust them to operate this one since it’s quite user-friendly.

Best wall mountable: Rabbit A3 Air Purifier

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 19.7 x 18.9 x 8.4 inches
  • Weight: 20.3 lbs
  • Recommended coverage area: 1,070 square feet
  • CADR: 257
  • Noise level: 20.3 – 51.0 dB

Pros

  • Wall-mountable and self-standing
  • Connects wirelessly
  • 6-filter system
  • Customized filters
  • Plethora of design panel choices
  • 4-stage replace filter notification

Cons

  • Expensive

The Rabbit A3 Air Purifier ships with a wall-mounting kit (which includes a bracket and hanger screws) for installing it on the wall—which can be a lifesaver in a space-challenged area. And it can be mounted either right side up or there’s the option to mount it upside down. However, we only use it in the freestanding floor position. It’s not a small air purifier, but it’s lightweight, and the handle makes it easy to transport. The Rabbit A3 can change the air four times an hour in a 535 sq. ft. area and two times an hour in a 1,070 sq. ft. area. The sensors on the Rabbit A3 detect pollutants and automatically adjust fan speed as necessary.

The air purifier has a 6-stage filtration process that includes a washable pre-filter that should be cleaned every 3 months. The medium filter traps smoke, pollen, and pet dander, while the activated carbon filter traps and removes odors, and the BioGS HEPA filter traps particles 0.3 microns in size. Rabbit also makes a customized filter, available in four options: germ defense, pet allergy, toxin absorber, and odor remover. The medium, activated charcoal, BioGS HEPA and customized filters are included in the filter kit, and are replaced at 12-month intervals, depending on use. Replacing the kit is easy, since the front panel snaps off.

The display panel includes informative icons that make operating the air purifier quite easy. The Filter replacement icon has four vertical LED lights to indicate whether the lifespan is new to 10 months, 9 to 7 months, 6 to 4 months, or replace within 3 months. Above other icons, the vertical LED lights are used to indicate Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connection status, air quality, fan speed, auto mode sensitivity, and light control. There’s also a setting for the negative ion generator, but we never use that setting. After downloading the app, the air purifier can also be controlled via smartphone or app.

The Rabbit Air 3 has one more notable feature. We tested the standard black model, and it also comes in a standard white model. However, you can also select a cool insert instead from the Artists Series for only $20 more—or buy an additional panel for $70. Selections include cherry blossom-white, irises, cherry blossom-black, great wave, starry night, vase of flowers, and Lofoten Islands. 

What to consider when shopping for the best air purifiers for smoke

“Air purifiers are effective in filtering out particulate matter from smoke,” Dr. Zhao of Delos Labs says. “For example, one study that looked at the efficacy of portable air purifiers in controlling wildfire-generated fine particulate matter (PM2.5) concentrations found a 73 to 92 percent reduction in indoor PM2.5 levels within eight hours.” These are some factors to remember to ensure your air purifier works to remove smoke effectively and efficiently.

HEPA filter

The presence of a HEPA filter is one important consideration. “Smoke particles can be extremely small, which can make them difficult to trap,” explains Jack White, senior director of technical services at Rainbow Restoration. “But a HEPA filter is designed to trap tiny particles and prevent them from circulating back into the air.”

Zhao agrees and recommends looking for air purifiers with a HEPA filter–or performance that can achieve HEPA-level filtration efficiency. “A HEPA filter is rated to remove at least 99.97% of dust, pollen, mold, bacteria, and any airborne particles with a size of 0.3 microns (µm).” Since these air purifiers efficiently filter out even the smallest particles—such as fine particulate matter—Zhao says they can be very helpful in clearing smoke from the air.

“These type of portable air purifiers are a valuable addition in homes, especially for individuals with respiratory issues such as asthma, allergies, COPD, cardiovascular conditions, or weakened immune systems, as well as older adults, pregnant women, and young children,” Zhao says.

CADR and space size

For each selection on our list, we also provide the clean air delivery rate (CADR) and recommended room size. Those are two stats you need to know when choosing an air purifier for smoke. “A high CADR is important when it comes to air purifiers because it’s an indication of the machine’s ability to quickly and effectively filter out smoke particles, along with other airborne pollutants like dust, pollen, etc.,” White says.

Zhao explains that the size and number of air purifiers a home may need depends on the size of the space itself. “It is important to get a purifier that is able to cover the area in which you plan to place it,” he says.  “You can determine whether the purifier is large enough for your space by looking at the manufacturer’s recommendations and the CADR of the device.” So what’s the connection? “The higher the CADR, the more equivalent air changes per hour [ACHe] for a specific space size, and the quicker the replacement of air in your space with clean air.”

Several popular air purifiers didn’t make our list because they had low CADR numbers or didn’t provide this information.  

Activated carbon filter

“Along with a HEPA filter, an activated carbon filter acts as an odor neutralizer,” White says. “Smoke contains various chemical compounds that contribute to its distinctive smell and toxicity, but the activated carbon is like a sponge – it’ll absorb all of those unpleasant smoke odors and pollutants.”

Other factors to consider

Is it helping or hurting your efforts?

Zhao says most air purifiers have one or more filters inside, which must be replaced every 6–12 months. “Dust, pet dander, and other types of particulate matter may contain bacteria, viruses, and mold spores, which can grow inside the filter.” He says some air purifiers have UVC (Ultraviolet-C) and ionization features that can deactivate or kill these microorganisms, prolonging the filter’s life and reducing re-exposure risks when replacing the filter.

However, he warns that there might be a risk of ozone generation when using some features. “Exposure to ground-level ozone can contribute to health issues such as breathing problems, airway damage, increased risk of lung infection, and aggravation of lung diseases.” If you’re considering an air purifier labeled “electronic air cleaner” or “ionizer,” he recommends looking for devices with the UL2998 certification for low/no ozone emission.

Dr. John McKeon of Allergy Standards added this. “When shopping for an air purifier specifically for smoke filtration, look for models that have been independently tested and certified by reputable third parties like the asthma & allergy friendly® Certification Program.” He points to the Rabbit Air A3 as being certified asthma & allergy friendly.

Noise

Some air purifiers are slightly quieter or noisier than others. However, Zhao warns that noise is inevitable for air purifiers. “A majority of them have fans inside, so depending on the fan speed and product design, you may hear some background noise (which sounds much like “white noise”) when they are on.” If you run the air purifier regularly, you may use a lower setting, but when you’re actively trying to remove smoke as quickly as possible, you’ll need to boost the fan speed—which in turn will increase the noise level.

Ease of use

Tim David, owner of Airlucent, recommends additional features like multiple fan speeds to adjust the performance. “Newer purifiers also have smart features like air quality sensors, which should be a must if you are mainly filtering smoke,” he says. ‘This way, you will know for how long you need to run the purifier. “

FAQs

Q: Can air purifiers really help with smoke?

Yes. If they have the right CADR and are appropriately sized for the intended room, they can help reduce smoke. Keep in mind, for example, if someone is smoking while the air purifier is running, it’s going to take longer to clean the room since it’s battling both the active and the old smoke at the same time.

Q: How often should I change the air purifier filter?

While manufacturers provide recommendations, how long the air purifier lasts will depend on how often you use it. For example, the manufacturer may provide a 12-month lifespan—if you use it 8 hours a day. But if you’re running it 24/7, the filter is going to wear out much faster.

Q: Does placement of the air purifier matter?

Yes. For maximum performance, don’t place the air purifier in a corner, against a wall, or up against anything else.

Q: Can I get one air purifier to clean my entire home?

Not likely. Even if your home is the size of a shoebox, you probably have a bathroom and some other room with a door. Air purifiers don’t go over or under doors. On the other hand, if you put an air purifier in a closed room, it will work much more efficiently, assuming it’s the right size.

Q: How do I know the right size?

As a general guideline, you should know the size of your room/area, and then get an air purifier designed to clean a larger room. Manufacturers are sometimes guilty of overestimating performance.

Final thoughts on the best air purifiers for smoke

Smoke—in any form—can be hazardous to your health. Fortunately, there are air purifiers designed to remove smoke effectively and efficiently. If you choose one with a good CADR number and air transfer rate, combined with a HEPA filter and active carbon filter, you’re on the way to keeping your home clean, fresh, and safe.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best air purifiers for smoke in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best office chairs for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-office-chair/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-office-chair/
Peripherals photo

These premium perches let you relax in comfort and style when working from home.

The post The best office chairs for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Peripherals photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Most iconic The black Herman Miller Aeron Chair against a plain background. Herman Miller Aeron Chair
SEE IT

Set your recline range at one of three postures with the specially designed tilt limiter.

Most eco-friendly The mesh Steelcase Karman Office Chair is facing a brown standing desk with an open laptop, plant, and a lamp on top. Steelcase Karman
SEE IT

This sleek chair is made from recycled materials and a breathable proprietary mesh.

Best for big and tall The black Steelcase Gesture office chair against a plain background. Steelcase Gesture
SEE IT

This highly adjustable chair can support up to 400 pounds.

The first office chairs originated around the middle of the 19th century when workers began spending long hours sitting at desks, which required special features not found on other chairs at the time. Today, office chairs have become a staple of modern life in corporate settings and at home. Unfortunately, this is not a sustainable way to work for many people. Ergonomics has been an essential consideration in furniture since the 1970s, and modern-day office chairs are designed with safety and health in mind, which often results in increased productivity. If you’ve been aching for a comfortable chair, literally, it’s time to shop for a designated workstation. We’ve hand-selected some of the best office chairs to get you started.

How we chose the best office chairs

When evaluating the best chairs for the office, the most obvious thing to remember is that there is no “one size fits all” approach, as anyone with a passing knowledge of the story Goldilocks and the Three Bears can probably tell you. One person’s lumbar support could be another person’s backache waiting to happen, so we assessed a wide variety of office desk chairs to meet a range of needs. All in all, we researched no less than five or six dozen chairs before deciding on the list that made the final cut.

Some of the features we homed in on for these computer chairs were basic comfort, ease of use, versatility, cost, easy assembly, style, and overall design. While some of the best chairs for office may come with all the bells and whistles, they may not always be the most cost-efficient or aesthetically pleasing options. However, those who are serious about their home office setup or who work long hours may want the very best executive office chair that fits their budget.

The best office chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

The best home office chairs today have features such as adjustable seats and heights, armrests, and back supports. These features help to prevent repetitive stress injuries, back pain, and other aches and discomforts associated with long periods of sitting, and our selections reflect those benefits.

Best overall: Anthros

Curtis Silver

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Various fabrics and leather alternatives, as well as real wood accent options
  • Furniture base: Swivel or non-swivel options, with casters for carpet or wood

Pros

  • Built with reliable science
  • 12-year warranty
  • Puts basic ergonomics to shame
  • Fully adjustable

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No headrest

The Anthros chair is made for those who sit, which is a lot of people. Most people. At some point, all people. But this chair, in particular, was created for those who sit a lot and are looking to fix what we’ve been breaking all these years behind the dull gray of cubicle walls, made worse by the advent of smartphones: our posture. Whether hunching over a device or curling forward, staring into a monitor, our spines and musculature have taken a beating. Anthros chair might just be the solution to our everlasting pain.

Here’s the thing, though: The Anthros chair is expensive, which puts it in the class of chairs with other marquee brands we feature, like Herman Miller and Steelcase. However, when you break down the science and construction of this chair, it’s a worthy splurge and one that stands alone. It’s the first office chair FDA-registered as a product that can improve posture. And the team at Anthros is composed of designers, physical and occupational therapists, pain and posture specialists, inventors, and biomechanics experts. But how’s the butt-feel?

It’s great, and here’s a tidbit you might not have considered when purchasing an office chair: It has the lowest sheer rating (sliding off the chair, causing pain over time) of all its closest competitors and the highest pressure distribution/contact area rating. These ratings were achieved through vigorous scientific testing, with data to back it up. The science proves the butt-feel is fantastic. 

A lot of times when we’re purchasing chairs, we stop at the butt pad. We don’t think enough about the back support, and we get tempted (and misled) with words like “lumbar” and “ergonomics.” The truth is that those things are gimmicks, and true ergonomics come from proper full-body alignment and pelvic support. This is much more important to your structural integrity than an added lumbar pillow that pushes your lower spine forward.

To offer the best level of support, Anthros is built with separate pelvic support and upper back support. This helps push your pelvic bone forward and keep your shoulders straight and not slouching. This design was cultivated over four years of testing and development and met along the way with resistance from manufacturing partners and the costs of building the chair within the United States. 

“Every step of the way, we faced suggestions from our manufacturing partner that tempted us to take the easier route, the one well-trodden by existing office chair manufacturers,” Ambassador Community Director Ashley Williams, PT, DPT, ATP/SM, CASp, tells PopSci via email. “‘Why not use mesh?’ they’d suggest, or a synchro-tilt, or even a recline feature—options that seemed to be the industry standard. But our response was always guided by a deeper understanding of what truly benefits the human body during long periods of sitting.”

Fighting against common practices and focusing on the benefits to our backs and posture has resulted in a chair that certainly does what it sets out to do. After just a week of using the Anthros chair (shown in “Quartz/Ivory” colorway above), this reviewer can attest that while it initially seems to force good posture, it began to feel more natural than any other chair. Instead of curving into a gaming chair with an uncomfortable pillow in your back, it sets your hips straight and keeps your spine aligned. 

Plus, it doesn’t stop there. With a tension tilt, adjustable (up, down, side to side) armrests, and depth positioning on the pelvic and upper back support, you will find your perfect sit in this chair. The fully adjustable nature means you’ll not even want to slouch, regardless of your shape or current posture state, because the support is there. There’s no reason to slouch. 

Sure, there’s no headrest, but what do you need that for if the back support properly supports your neck? And if you already struggle with back pain, then you’ll want ultimate support. And that’s why we sit anyway. 

“Research indicates a strong correlation between poor posture and a range of adverse health outcomes, including chronic pain, fatigue, injury, depression, impaired vision, digestive issues, poor circulation, dysfunctional breathing, and even a shortened lifespan,” continues Williams. “Remarkably, up to 80 percent of individuals will encounter at least one episode of back pain in their lifetime.”

With that in mind, it all boils down to Anthros’ claim that after years of experiments, collecting data, and existing research, the team found that it created three things with this chair: a back support that increases disc space and reduces disc pressure, dramatically improves posture, and provides the world’s most comfortable, lowest-pressure cushion. And none of that is marketing nonsense. There’s a reason the FDA took notice. My back can attest to the support, and my butt can attest to the cushion. 

This is a human-centric chair, designed not just to be a thing you occupy while sitting but to fix your form while doing so. And the way it does that, with separate supports for your pelvis and back without relying on jutting lumbar supports or an exhaustingly loose tilt, is about as good as you’ll get in an office chair. 

If you spend more time sitting than anything else and find yourself struggling to maintain posture, along with the aches and pains of failing to do so, the Anthros chair will definitely fix that.

The manufacturer provided a review unit. The Anthros chair starts at $1,849 (pre-customization), but PopSci readers can save more than $100 now using this link.

Best breathability: Herman Miller Aeron Chair

Why it made the cut: Since its introduction in 1994, this classic Herman Miller office chair has evolved and been updated to enhance the modern workplace experience.

Specs

  • Materials: Recycled materials
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 41 pounds

Pros

  • Adjustable recline for three postures
  • Fully adjustable arms
  • Comes in three different sizes

Cons

  • Headrest not included and sold separately

For over 25 years, the Herman Miller Aeron Chair has been a gold standard for office furniture with its classic, ergonomic design. The latest version of the Aeron has been fully remastered with many premium design features to better support modern office workers with an adjustable range of motion for leaning forward or reclining back.

The tilt limiter function, for instance, allows you to set the recline range at one of three postures, while tension control lets you adjust the amount of effort needed to recline comfortably. In addition, the chair’s armrests adjust from a height of 6.8 to 10.8 inches above the seat, slide back and forth over a range of 2.5 inches, and pivot between 15 degrees outward and 17.5 degrees inward for a fully customizable fit. Yet, the chair is still available in three sizes to accommodate even people six feet or taller.

For lumbar support, two individual pads flex independently and adjust to fit the spine curve, though some customers feel that it could use even more support. Another minor gripe is that the headrest is sold separately even with the hefty price tag, which might be a dealbreaker for those who are already concerned about making the pricey investment. But it fits the bill if you’re on the hunt for black office chairs.

Best value ergonomic: Flexispot Exclusive Ergonomic Chair (C7)

FlexiSpot

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This comfortable chair is designed for maximum adjustability and comes with self-adaptive back support and a headrest to support you throughout the day.

Specs

  • Materials: PU soft plastic; aluminum alloy base
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 45.2 pounds

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Mesh back (and optional seat) allows for lots of airflow
  • Adjustable height, headrest, armrests, and lumbar/back
  • Smooth caster (wheel) motion

Cons

  • Armrests feel cheap compared to the rest of the chair
  • Bottom/space between armrests may be slightly narrow for users with wide hips

Flexispot’s premium office chair is the Ergonomic Chair Pro (C7). This offering comes in two colors, features a sturdy aluminum base, and boasts adjustable height, headrest, and armrests. The C7 is simple to assemble (about 30 minutes).

Cool air easily flows through this chair’s material, which Flexispot calls “high elasticity filament,” making it comfortable to sit in for long periods of time when combined with the ergonomic design. You can opt for the same material for the seat (for a fee) or stick with the stock foam cushion (the 20-inch seat provides ample space for cross-legged sitting). The chair itself can recline from 90 to 128 degrees to get comfortable sitting back with a foot hammock or practicing perfect posture. The headrest, which is made of the same material as the rest of the chair, is quite comfortable and slightly contorts to support the head and neck. And the lumbar support cushion detects posture changes and automatically adjusts itself to ensure constant support.

One of the most surprisingly loved features of C7 owners is the wheels. They’re larger than many stock options that come with other chairs and are particularly quiet, especially on a short carpet or rug. Flexispot has also designed the FlexiSpot Comhar Pro Standing Desk Q8, which goes well with this chair. You can find it in our guide to the best standing desks.

Best eco-friendly: Steelcase Karman Chair

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Made by one of the top names in office chairs, Steelcase’s new Karman chair is inspired by the cosmos and is made from recycled materials and a proprietary textile that responds the shape of users’ bodies.

Specs

  • Materials: Intermix mesh, aluminum
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 29 pounds

Pros

  • Made from recycled materials 
  • Sleek design
  • Lightweight
  • Comfort adjustment dial added

Cons

  • Lumbar support is a separate purchase
  • Supports less weight capacity than other ergonomic chairs

Steelcase’s Karman Chair is inspired by the weightlessness of the Kármán Line, where the Earth’s atmosphere meets space. The chair is designed with sustainability in mind. At 29 pounds, this chair is lighter than many options on the market. It is made from 25 percent recycled and 75 percent recyclable material. And the proprietary mesh material in this offering combines yarn and filaments together to create a weave that responds to your body. 

The Karman features a mechanism that automatically senses your weight to provide the right support for your back when you recline. It also boasts a new comfort dial that adjusts the tension by up to 20 percent. Users can also customize the chair when ordering, choosing between height adjustability, 4-way adjustable arms, or an armless model. You can also purchase a cushion for extra lumbar support for an extra $57. Design enthusiasts will also appreciate the ability to choose between 13 colorways and several frame finishes.

Best for big and tall: Steelcase Gesture

Steelcase

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Polyester with foam padding
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 70 pounds

Pros

  • Accommodates a range of body shapes and sizes
  • Supports up to 400 pounds
  • Highly adjustable
  • Versatile arms that won’t cut into legs

Cons

  • Expensive

If you spend most of your life sitting at a desk (like so many people do), it’s worth investing in a chair that will treat your body correctly. The Steelcase Gesture comfortably supports up to 400 pounds and has a maximum seat height of 21 inches. It can support bodies of any size. What’s more, this high-back chair features highly adjustable arms, which aren’t attached at the front of the seat, so they won’t dig into your thighs if your legs sit far apart (a problem with many other big-and-tall chairs). 

The seat cushion on this tall office chair has air pockets inside for ideal support and squishiness. Plus, the cushions are softer around the edges, so they flex under your legs, put less pressure on the muscles, and encourage blood flow. The back of the chair has a patented flexible panel that mimics the ideal shape of the spine to encourage sturdy posture. The headrest also encourages a more upright position to prevent slouching. Yes, the Steelcase Gesture is expensive, but it will treat your body how it deserves to be treated. Find more options in the best big and tall office chairs.

Best for back pain: Gabrylly Ergonomic Mesh Office Chair

Gabrylly

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For all-around comfort, you can’t beat this budget ergonomic office chair. This mesh construction office chair provides four supporting points at the head, back, hips, and hands.

Specs

  • Materials: Mesh
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 41 pounds  

Pros

  • High-quality breathable mesh construction
  • Adjustable flip-up armrests
  • Smooth and quiet rolling caster wheels

Cons

  • Doesn’t suit tall people as well

You’ll sit comfortably and work efficiently for hours in the Gabrylly Ergonomic Mesh Office Chair, which provides four supporting points at the head, back, hips, and hands, along with proper lumbar support. For added relief, the headrest, back, and seat are all constructed of breathable, high-quality mesh that won’t overheat and will keep you cool even in the middle of summer.

But perhaps the most popular feature of this back supportive chair is the fully adjustable, foldable armrests that can change height at the press of a button or flip to slide easily under any desk or table. The tilt function is also adjustable from 90 to 120 degrees, which is perfect for anyone from gamers to those who regularly spend long hours behind a desk. As a bonus, the smooth caster wheels are quiet and won’t cause damage to wooden floors.

The manufacturer’s description states that the chair is suitable for people from 5’5″ to 6’2″ in height. However, some taller users have found that the alignment of the headrest is awkward or that it doesn’t fold back far enough, so you don’t bump the back of your head. That’s an easy fix, though, as the headrest can be removed if it doesn’t work to your liking. And once you’re done, you can sink into one of the best massage chairs.

Best for long hours: Branch Ergonomic Chair

Gabriel Morgan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Those looking for an office chair that provides plenty of ergonomic support while also looking good will appreciate the versatility of this chair.

Specs

  • Materials: Aluminum base, nylon mesh
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 35 pounds

Pros

  • Provides backrest for lumbar support
  • Elegant design
  • Comes in customizable color combinations

Cons

  • Headrest is an added-on cost

Lumbar support may not be the first thing that comes to mind when you think of sleek Italian design. But Branch’s Ergonomic Chair incorporates both comfort and elegance, which is important when you’re spending most of your day in the home office. You can adjust the armrests, height, tilt, and seat depth to get the perfect fit. It also comes with a lumbar cushion for extra support that you can remove. 

The swivel chair is designed with an aluminum base that can support people from 5’2″ to 6’2″ and can accommodate up to 275 pounds. The backrest is made of nylon, which is flexible and breathable and makes it a great option if you’re searching for mesh office chairs. The Branch Ergonomic Chair also comes in three colors—black, gray, and light blue—and your choice of a black or white frame. To find out more, read a full Branch Ergonomic Chair review.

Best upholstered: Art Leon Mid-Century Modern Accent Chair

Art Leon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mid-century modern swivel chair works perfectly as either an office chair for working behind a desk or an accent chair for curling up with a good book.

Specs

  • Materials: Faux leather
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 33.5 pounds

Pros

  • Caster-free design won’t scratch your floor
  • Comfortable handrail-style armrests
  • Wooden swivel legs rotate 360 degrees

Cons

  • Too small for some

Those who prioritize style and comfort equally will appreciate this Art Leon Mid Century Modern Accent Chair, which pairs an eye-catching, mod design with firm, well-cushioned, and ample seating. This comfy chair is also the perfect option for small offices and tight spaces. The sleek, handrail-style armrests curve down to fit under most desks yet are sturdy enough for pushing yourself up out of the seat.

Four sturdy oak legs extend outward from the swivel base that spins a full 360 degrees. Unlike most modern office chairs, this small office chair doesn’t have caster wheels. It’s a safer option for people with small kids and pets since there’s no worry about tiny hands, feet, paws, and tails accidentally getting rolled over.

Some customers love that this accent chair is roomy enough to curl up in or sit cross-legged, while others on the larger side find it a bit dainty or cramped for their tastes. Another slight downside is that a handful of users have complained about the faux leather having a chemical odor. However, the scent seems to dissipate on its own after a few days or faster if sprayed with a linen freshener such as Febreze.

Best modern design: Laura Davidson SOHO Chair

Laura Davidson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This sleek chair comes in 20 colors and supports good posture.

Specs

  • Materials: Vinyl
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 30 pounds

Pros

  • Aluminum base supports 400 pounds
  • Durable, heat-embossed ribbing
  • Comes in 20 bright, fun colors

Cons

  • Vinyl faux leather not very breathable

The sleek Laura Davidson SOHO Office Chair almost does too good of a job at maintaining your posture because try as you might, it makes slouching nearly impossible. The supportive chrome steel frame and leatherette seat help support your back, with heat-embossed ribbing at least three times more durable than competitor products that use cheaper stitching.

Unlike some office chairs that have a low weight threshold, the extra-strength aluminum base not only looks great but supports over 400 pounds. Plus, the polyurethane rolling casters work great on various surfaces, including hardwood floors and low pile carpet, but without the risk of scratching or damage. With 20 bright, eye-catching colors, these cute office chairs look great in a home office or study.

This chair may not be the best for warmer climates as the faux vinyl leather is not very breathable and may become uncomfortable at higher temperatures. In addition, a few customers have noted that the arms can be difficult to screw on and need frequent tightening, but they can also be removed entirely if that becomes a recurring and bothersome issue. Another modern option that can work is one of the best kneeling chairs.

Best budget: BestOffice Home Office Chair

BestOffice

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you don’t mind a narrow seat, this budget office chair boasts an attractively affordable price tag with standard features and basic lumbar support.

Specs

  • Materials: Mesh, metal base
  • Furniture base: Swivel
  • Weight: 19 pounds

Pros

  • Affordable for a range of budgets
  • Easy to install and assemble
  • Ergonomic nylon mesh lumbar support

Cons

  • Seat is too narrow for wider hips

If you’re looking for cheap office chairs, you could do worse than the BestOffice Home Office Chair, which has a price tag that can get nearly anyone on board. Constructed from a high-density sponge cushion, this chair provides comfortable seating and ergonomic nylon mesh for optimal lumbar support and 360-degree rolling wheels.

Though the chair arrives unassembled, it comes with all the hardware and necessary tools to put it together and can be set up easily in about 15 minutes. All parts and accessories have passed tests with the Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association for quality materials.

Even though the mesh chair can support up to 250 pounds, it may be a better option for smaller adults, kids, and teens, as some customers have found it to be a tight fit. Some people also find that the armrests are too low, and combined with the narrow seat, the arms may bump uncomfortably on your legs and hips. But for the price, it’s hard to beat. For other options, here are our roundups of the best office chairs under $200 and the best affordable gaming chairs.

What to consider before buying an office chair

When looking for a good office chair to add to your home workstation, there are a few basic things to consider:

Space

First, do you have a dedicated home office, or will you be working in another room in your home? If you have to set up your workspace in a dining room, living room, or bedroom, you may want to consider an office chair that’s comfortable but fits seamlessly into your home decor or has multi-functional use.

Ergonomic design

But if you do happen to have a dedicated office space, you might decide to invest in a high-performing or ergonomic office chair. This also holds true for gamers who spend long hours in front of their computer screen and need an office chair that won’t give them neck or back pain. Posture is another consideration. If you tend to slouch, you won’t be doing your back any favors by choosing an office chair that reinforces negative habits.

Size

Unfortunately, big and tall people may find that shopping for a comfortable office chair can be challenging. It’s a good rule of thumb to check a chair’s weight and size limits before committing. Otherwise, you may find that your new chair is uncomfortable or impractical for everyday use. 

FAQs

Q: How much should I spend on an office chair?

You can find a decent office chair no matter what your budget is. Office chairs can range wildly from under $100 to over $1,500. For a high-quality, ergonomic office chair, expect to spend somewhere in the market of $200 to $600. If you’re looking for more affordable office furniture, consider our budget-friendly pick, the BestOffice Home Office Chair.

Q: What should I look for in an ergonomic office chair?

Features to look for in an ergonomic office chair include lumbar support, seat and backrest materials, armrests, overall movement and stability, and seat width, depth, and height. Most importantly, a good ergonomic chair should allow the seat height to be adjusted from at least 15 to 22 inches off the floor, depending on how tall you are.

Q: What types of office chairs are available?

Most office chairs on our list are traditional swivel chairs with pneumatic up-and-down adjustments and some customizable ergonomic detailing. However, we also included a non-traditional active stool that can be adjusted to fit a standing desk. Office chairs come in all types, and are made of nylon, leather, faux leather, and many other materials. Older models of office chairs might feature wood backs with a leather pillow.

Q: How long do most office chairs last?

Some studies estimate that you’ll get seven to eight years of use out of an office chair, while others are more optimistic and suggest that you can go an entire decade before your chair has to be repaired or replaced. Of course, the life expectancy of your office chair also depends on how much money you invest, as a $50 chair is obviously not going to hold up as well as a chair that costs $500.

Final thoughts on the best office chairs

Our top pick for the all-around best office chair is the Anthros. Though not as well-known a high-end name as some on this list—such as the Herman Miller Aeron Chair, which is still an excellent option—we love the posture-positive feel of the Anthros paired with its sleek, versatile design. For those looking for a stylish, comfortable design, we’ll give a shoutout to the Art Leon Mid-Century Modern Accent Chair. It’s an outstanding value for those living and working in small spaces or apartments, as it can be used not just as an office chair but as an accent chair, dining chair, reading chair, and more. And if you’re specifically looking to address back pain without putting a hurting on your wallet, the FlexiSpot and Gabrylly stand out.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best office chairs for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 4K projectors in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-4k-projectors/ Tue, 27 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=603351
The best 4K projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Turn a blank wall into an ultra-high definition movie theater to enjoy your movies, TV shows, and video games more than before.

The post The best 4K projectors in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best 4K projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall XGIMI Horizon Ultra on a plain white background. XGIMI Horizon Ultra
SEE IT

Top-of-the-line audio and video quality in an eye-catching package.

Best design JMGO N1 Ultra on a plain white background. JMGO N1 Ultra
SEE IT

The N1 Ultra’s tilting design ensures it’ll align perfectly with any wall, ceiling, or screen.

Best budget XGIMI Horizon Pro on a plain white background. XGIMI Horizon Pro
SEE IT

Get all the must-have 4K projector features for less money.

A 4K projector is the ultimate tool for cinephiles or gamers who want to get the most out of their ultra-high definition films and games without getting into multi-thousand-dollar screens and burdensome furniture. Only the most expensive TVs can even come close to the literal scale of a projector’s maximum screen size, and then you deal with the challenges of anchoring a 110-inch flatscreen. Moreover, 4K projection technology has evolved enough to fall significantly in price over the past couple of years. Spending a lot for the absolute premium models is still possible, but most of our recommendations will set you back under $2,000. A 65-, 75-, or even 85-inch 4K TV could still be the most cost-effective choice, but there’s no denying that 4K projectors have become much more accessible. The best 4K projectors will allow you to achieve the dream of bringing a movie theater into your house with no compromises.

How we chose the best 4K projectors

There are more 4K projectors than ever, and our recommendations come from extensive research and hands-on testing. We watched movies and played games on these devices to see how they held up during fast-paced action and casual viewing alike. Our tests were conducted by projecting images onto a wall from approximately nine feet away. Games were played on a Nintendo Switch, while videos were watched using both the projector’s internal operating system (if applicable) and Roku Streaming Stick 4K.

The best 4K projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re upgrading from a TV or Full HD projector, our 4K projectors for movies will be a significant upgrade and a massive step toward creating the ideal home theater system.

Best overall: XGIMI Horizon Ultra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 2,300
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 x Ethernet, 1 x Optical, 1 x AUX
  • Speakers: Yes
  • Price $1,599

Pros

  • Stunning video quality
  • Harman Kardon audio system
  • Snappy user interface

Cons

  • No native Netflix

XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra is hands-down the best 4K projector we’ve tested yet, from its thoughtful design (even its remote is premium, encased in metal, not plastic) to its video fidelity. The projector is rectangular, a “Misty Gold” cube with “eco leather” on the top and sides and fabric covering most of its front. When the projector is off, the covering you see above is up, protecting the projector’s lens from getting scratched or accumulating dust. When the projector is turned on, the front covering glides downward, revealing the lens. It’s a neat trick that never got old during months of testing. XGIMI gets top marks by making a 4K projector with both a functional and whimsical design.

Where audio and video quality are concerned, XGIMI also gets top marks. The Horizon Ultra continually produced a bright, colorful image even in a room with some light leakage. If the curtains aren’t drawn, well, the Horizon Pro can’t compete with direct sunlight—but few projectors can. However, if you set this 4K projector up in a dark environment—even a room where the sun peeks through the blinds during the day—you’ll be constantly impressed by what this projector’s LED + laser lamps and their 2,300 ISO lumens deliver. It’s the first long-throw 4K projector with Dolby Vision (plus HDR10 and HLG), and that heightened contrast and dynamic color adjustment are apparent as you watch throughout the day and night. Plus, optical zoom plus automatic keystone correction and focus allow for an image size of 40 to 200 inches and flexible positioning, up to 40 degrees off-center.

Playing video games like Phantasy Star Second Story R, wherein characters dart across the screen while visual effects pop up constantly, was no problem for the Horizon Pro’s 18ms latency and 60Hz refresh rate, which handled the task with aplomb. Watching soccer games or Netflix shows like Chef’s Table (more on that shortly) was similarly satisfying. This 4K projector’s color reproduction was fantastic and shows or games with support for HDR (high dynamic range) look even better. Similarly, the projector’s built-in 2x12W stereo sound system, courtesy of Harman Kardon, was equally impressive. It didn’t stack up compared to a wireless surround sound setup, but it did its job, capable of decoding Dolby and DTS and delivering clear dialogue and deep bass. We never felt the need to connect external speakers to the projector, which was quite the feat.

The XGIMI Horizon Ultra runs on Google TV. While the Android 11 operating system connected through Wi-Fi 6 moved fluidly—we could get in and out of apps and settings easily—the lack of native Netflix on the platform was bothersome. This wasn’t an issue since our testing included hooking up a media streamer (and there are workarounds if you’re willing to side-load apps), but could prove annoying for some. With that blemish aside, we can wholeheartedly recommend XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra to anyone interested in getting a 4K movie projector right now. (And if you have a really big wall and are willing to wait, XGIMI’s upcoming Horizon Max, announced at CES 2024, offers an IMAX 1.90:1 aspect ratio, more lumens, an updated Intelligent Screen Adaption system, and more immersive sound … for a higher price).

Best splurge: AWOL Vision LTV-2500

AWOL Vision

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 2,600
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 1 x Ethernet, 1 x AV-in, 1 x Optical
  • Speakers: Yes
  • Price: $2,998

Pros

  • Very high luminosity
  • Ultra short throw
  • 3D film support

Cons

  • Price

AWOL Vision’s LTV-2500 is an incredible indulgence for the most persnickety media viewer—especially those without a lot of space. This is a short-throw triple-laser projector, which means it can create a 100-plus-inch screen while being only a foot or so away from your wall. The projector itself is significantly larger than any of our other recommendations, but the fact that you don’t need to keep it several feet away from your wall means it can fit neatly on top of any entertainment center. If you’re swapping out a TV for a 4K laser projector, the LTV-2500 will provide the smoothest transition, which is especially helpful if you’ve already set up an AV receiver with a surround sound system. If you don’t have speakers set up, you’ll appreciate that the LTV’s audio system can play back Dolby Atmos surround sound audio natively.

The LTV-2500 supports all the most popular video technologies, from HDR 10+ to Dolby Vision, with 2,600 lumens plus support for over 1 billion colors and 147 percent of DCI-P3, and it also actively supports 3D video. If you have a pair of active shutter 3D glasses, a Blu-ray player that supports 3D movies, and a cache of 3D films, you can enjoy them in their full fidelity. This is surprising considering how badly 3D movies sold, but it’s a welcome feature if you’d like to play your entire movie library in the highest possible quality with every feature intact.

This projector doesn’t run an operating system, but AWOL Vision includes an Amazon Fire Stick 4K Max, which you can use to stream content from any popular streaming service. It’s a pain to burn one of its two HDMI ports on a media streamer, especially given the LTV-2500’s high price, but this won’t be an issue if you connect a game console or other multifunctional device with access to Netflix, YouTube, and other services. If you’d like to set up a home theater system with a 4K projector but don’t have a lot of room, AWOL Vision’s LTV-2500 is the best choice.

Best design: JMGO N1 Ultra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 2,200
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 1 x USB-A, 1 x headphone jack
  • Speakers: Yes
  • Price: $2,299

Pros

  • “Freestyle” flexible design
  • Great video quality
  • Solid image correction

Cons

  • No Netflix

We’re wary of any gadget that seems to be predicated on a gimmick, but JMGO’s N1 Ultra isn’t a one-trick pony. Its standout feature is that the triple-laser projector is suspended on top of its stand, allowing you to tilt it upward and downward up to 135 degrees easily. And its gimbal allows for a 360-degree horizontal pan. This comes in handy if you’re trying to position it just so or want to project your video onto a ceiling for a limited time. In our experience, the N1 Ultra’s flexibility was a huge asset. Moving it was simple, but the 4K projector never tilted on its own; JMGO managed to tweak its torque to avoid accidents.

We tested the N1 Ultra and its 2,200 CVIA lumens/HDR10 support/1600:1 contrast ratio during extended play sessions of The Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom, and it allowed us to take in the verdant green hills, snowy peaks, and harsh deserts of Hyrule in their full fidelity. The projector was bright enough to compete with light leaking through curtains in our testing space, with no big picture quality loss, thanks in part to Auto Adaptive Brightness, Auto Keystone Correction, Smart Object Avoidance, Auto Screen Fitting, and more smart features. Video from streaming services also looked sharp, though the lack of Netflix on Google TV proved troublesome once again. 4K videos from professional YouTubers were a treat for the eyes, however. Where sound is concerned, the 10Wx2 speaker system was solid, though it couldn’t quite match the fidelity of the speakers built into XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra.

Still, if you’d like a 4K projector that’s easy to tweak and whose eye-catching design isn’t just for show, JMGO’s N1 Ultra is more than worth a look.

Best for bright rooms: Dangbei Mars Pro 4K

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 3,200
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 X Ethernet, 1 X optical audio, 1 x headphone jack
  • Speakers: Yes
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Ultra bright
  • Packed with ports
  • Excellent audio quality

Cons

  • No operating system

Dangbei’s Mars Pro 4K is well worth the investment for those in bright rooms and who desire booming sound. The ALPD projector’s literal bright spot is its 3,200 ANSI lumen bulb, which allowed the Mars Pro 4K to create a clear picture in a room with moderate light pollution. It’s still not suitable in a room with many windows at noon, but you don’t have to wait until night to turn it on. If you plan to set your home theater up in a living room rather than a basement and you get this projector, you’ll be fine. The Mars Pro has no built-in software, but Dengbe bundles it with an Android streaming dongle; you can also connect your media streamer of choice.

The Mars Pro supports HDR10/HLG high dynamic range formats, and our experience watching HD and ultra-high-definition content was fantastic. Colors popped, and a great amount of detail was present even in HD footage and games. We projected a screen roughly 100 inches wide (you can go up to 200), but the projector’s autofocus kept the entire frame looking sharp. Similarly, the Mars Pro 4K’s 10Wx2 audio system delivered a nice punch—though a little treble-heavy—when watching videos or playing games with the volume cranked up. That said, you won’t need to connect this projector to a speaker system if you don’t want to.

If you’re queasy about setting up a 4K projector because the room it’ll be in gets natural light for part of the day, the ultra-bright Dangbei Mars Pro 4K is the one to get.

Best budget: XGIMI Horizon Pro

XGIMI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 1,500
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 x Ethernet, 1 x AUX, 1 x Optical
  • Speakers: Yes
  • Price: $1,199

Pros

  • Good color reproduction
  • Solid speakers
  • Price

Cons

  • Not quite as performant

XGIMI’s Horizon Pro is a step down in performance from our best overall pick, but it’s still a solid choice if you need a 4K projector on a slightly lower budget. It has an eight-watt dual speaker audio system courtesy of Harman Kardon, is packed with every necessary port, and runs on Google TV. While it matches its more expensive technical sibling in luminosity, its speaker system is weaker, and it uses previous-generation video hardware so that color reproduction won’t be quite as good. You’ll still get a great-looking clear picture, but projectors have progressed since the Horizon Pro’s launch. Still, it has all of the essential features you’d need from a 4K projector, from support for HDR, AI brightness adjustment, and a competent auto-focus system. If you’re looking for a home theater upgrade that won’t break the bank, you’ll find it here.

FAQs

Q: Is 3,000 lumens good for a projector?

Yes. Most 4K projectors have a luminosity of between 1,500 and 2,500, so 3,000 lumens would be just fine.

Q: How long does a 4K projector last?

A 4K projector itself can last a decade or more, but its bulb may burn out before then and need to be replaced. Many projector bulbs are designed to last about 10,000 hours (that’s 27.38 years if you use the device for an hour per day). If you plan on keeping your 4K projector for the long haul, it may be worthwhile to consider getting a replacement bulb, too.

Q: Which is better OLED or laser projector?

There’s no such thing as an OLED projector. The difference between an OLED TV and a laser projector is that the former will have more consistent contrast and black levels in an optimized environment, while the latter will offer a larger screen size. There’s no wrong answer here, pick the device that works best for you.

Q: Where should I put my 4K projector?

For the optimal experience, install your 4K projector 10 feet away from the wall you’re projecting onto.

Q: Is a projector better on a wall or screen?

A projection screen is an added expense, but you’ll surely appreciate projecting an image onto a pristine white surface with no dips or scratches. That said, installing a projection screen may not be practical, especially if you’re renting your place, which is why a projector such as the XGIMI Horizon Ultra has automatic color correction.

Q: How much does a 4K projector cost?

This depends on its luminosity and other hardware specifications. Our 4K projector recommendations cost between $1,099 and $2,998.

What to consider when shopping for the best 4K projector for you

There are many factors to consider when deciding which 4K projector is right for you. Here are the factors we considered most important when writing this guide:

Luminosity

The brightness of a projector’s bulb is measured in lumens; the higher its luminosity, the brighter its picture—though there are different scales (ANSI vs. ISO), so keep an eye on the spec specifics. Luminosity is important because it allows your projector to overcome light pollution from the sun, lamps, or fluorescent sources. Light pollution washes out a projector’s ability to project a picture, making it look washed out or harder to see. A brighter picture is also easier to see regardless of how much external light is in the room, so you need to gauge your environment, especially if you need a projector for daylight viewing. If you have a dark(er) space, a projector’s luminosity is outranked in importance by its resolution, but all models here are 4K, offering 3840 pixels across and 2160 up and down.

Throw distance

A projector’s throw distance determines the picture size based on how far it is from a wall. “Short-throw” style projectors can be very close to a wall while still making a large picture, making them ideal for smaller spaces. Meanwhile, a typical long-throw projector works best when installed between eight and 10 feet away from your wall. Be mindful that wall space is key regardless of what type of 4K projector you get. You won’t get as much out of your projector if you don’t have enough room. This tool can help you evaluate your throw distance-to-screen size ratio.

Maximum screen size

Every 4K projector we recommend can project a picture over 100 inches long, with most capable of reaching 200. Maximum size will ultimately be determined by its throw distance and how much wall space you can provide. Because these projectors have such a high resolution, you shouldn’t deal with any significant loss in picture quality, even on an ultra-large screen.

Port selection

A 4K projector’s ports (sometimes known as inputs) will determine the types of components (e.g., game console, Blu-Ray player, streaming device) you can connect to it. Our 4K projector recommendations have at least one HDMI port—most have two—which means you can plug just about any audio or video gadget into it. Many of our recommendations also have a headphone jack or other audio out port, which allows you to connect them to external speakers for better sound.

Speakers

All 4K projectors in this guide have built-in speakers, which is helpful if you prioritize portability. Many of the speaker systems on these higher-end projectors are surprisingly robust, so you won’t need to plug in an external set to get good sound. If you want the full home theater experience, you’ll still need an AV receiver and surround sound speaker set.

Smart features

One of the standard features of premium 4K projectors is the ability to stream movies and TV shows from the most popular services directly from the device itself. Hardware makers have partnered with Google to allow their projectors to run on Google TV, a software platform that competes with FireOS and Roku.

Final thoughts on the best 4K projectors

A 4K projector is still a luxury, but one that’s become significantly more attainable recently. We’re comfortable recommending them to anyone serious about setting up a home theater room in their home, even if one doesn’t set up a surround sound system right away. Setting up a 4K projector now means not having to think about a home theater upgrade for years since improvements to bulb brightness and color fidelity aren’t improving by leaps and bounds annually. If you’re looking for an entire home theater in a single box, a 4K projector is the best option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 4K projectors in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>